Skip to main content

Full text of "CSUF Course Catalogs 1959-2007"

See other formats


$1 PLUS TAX 





GENERAL CATALOG 

and 

ANNOUNCEMENT OF COURSES 
1970-71 



CALIFORNIA STATE 
COLLEGE, FULLERTON 

800 North State College Boulevard, Fullerton, California 
(714) 870-2011 92631 


All material herein is subject to change without prior notice 
Effective Date: September 14, 1970 


COMPLIMENTARY COPY 


TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Page Page 

Annual Calendar 5 College Calendar 6 

I. ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION 

Trustees of the California State Office of the Chancellor 13 

Colleges 11 The California State Colleges 14 

Officers of the Trustees 12 The College Advisory Board 15 


II. THE 


ADMINISTRATION 

College administration 19 

College committees 22 

OBJECTIVES AND HISTORY 

Objectives of the college 28 

History of the college 28 

College accreditation 29 

SPECIAL PROGRAMS 
AND SERVICES 

International programs 30 

Late afternoon and evening classes 30 

Summer sessions 31 

Extension program and services— 31 

Library 32 

Computer Center 33 

Instructional Media Center 33 

Medical Technology 33 

Paramedical Health Sciences 34 

Premedical-Predental Committee 34 

Premedical Preparation 34 

College Foundation 35 


III. ADMISSION 


ADMISSION TO THE COLLEGE 

Admission requirements 49 

Freshman 49 

Undergraduate transfers 50 

Graduate students 51 

Foreign students 51 

Summer session student 51 

Common admission and intrasystem 

transfer 51 

Readmission of former students 52 

Procedures 52 

Statement of residence 53 

Credential programs 54 

Cancellation of admission 54 

Honors at entrance 54 

Undergraduate entrance testing 54 


RESEARCH CENTERS AND CLINICS 


Center for Research in Business, 

Economics, Community 36 

Center for Governmental Studies.... 37 

Reading Center 37 

Laboratory for Phonetic Speech__ 37 

Special Education Clinic 38 

Speech and Hearing Clinic 38 

Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary 38 

STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES 

Relations with schools 39 

Student activities 39 

Student organizations 39 

Student publications 39 

Student news bureau 40 

Athletics 40 

Housing 40 

Student health services 41 

Placement services 41 

Counseling and Testing Services ... 42 

International Education 43 

Financial Aid 43 

New Educational Horizons 45 

D REGISTRATION 

Health requirements 55 

Evaluations 55 

REGISTRATION 

Orientation 57 

Registration 57 

Late registration 57 

Change of program 57 

Concurrent enrollment 57 

Auditors 57 

Veterans 57 

Selective Service 58 

Reserve Officers’ Training Corps 58 

Fees and expenses 58 

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

Academic advisement 60 


2 


TABUS OF CONTENTS— Continued 

IV. REGULATIONS 

Page Page 


GENERAL REGULATIONS 

Enrollment definitions and 

regulations 63 

Grading practices 63 

Transcripts 65 

Continuous residency regulations.— 65 

Student honors 66 

Probation and disqualification 66 

Right of petition 67 

GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS FOR 
THE BACHELOR'S DEGREE 

General education 68 

Units 69 

Scholarship 69 

Major I 69 

V. COLLEGE 

Curricula offered 81 

SCHOOL OF THE ARTS 

Art 89 

Dance 94 

Music 95 

Theatre 100 


SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 
AND ECONOMICS 

Undergraduate program in business 

administration and economics 107 

Business education 110 

Master of Business Administration 111 

Economics 115 


SCHOOL OF EDUCATION 

Teacher education curricula 122 

Advanced credential programs 134 

Graduate programs 135 

Bachelor of Science in 

Physical Education 139 

Master of Science in 
Physical Education 141 

SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING 

Engineering 145 

DEPARTMENT OF ETHNIC STUDIES 

Bachelor of Arts 155 


Multiple majors and second 

baccalaureate degrees 69 

Minor 70 

Graduation requirement check. 70 

Approval and recommendation of 
faculty 70 

THE PROGRAM OF MASTER'S 
DEGREES 

General requirements for the 

master’s degree 71 

Standards for graduate study 71 

Steps in the master’s degree 

program 71 

Graduate policies and procedures— 72 


CURRICULA 

SCHOOL OF INTERDISaPUNARY 
STUDIES 

American Studies 159 

Interdisciplinary Center — — 159 

Latin-American Studies 160 

Linguistics 161 

Religious Studies 165 

Russian Area Studies 166 

Social Sciences 166 

Technological Studies 167 

SCHOOL OF LETTERS, ARTS 
AND SOENCES 

Anthropology 171 

Biological science 173 

Chemistry 175 

Communications 180 

Comparative literature 183 

English 184 

Foreign languages 186 

Geography 188 

History 190 

Mathematics 191 

Philosophy 194 

Physics 195 

Political science 198 

Psychology 200 

Science and mathematics education 202 

Sociology 205 

Speech communication 207 

DIVISION OF LIBRARY SCIENCE 

Library Science 213 


3 


TABLE OF CONTENTS — Continued 


VI. ANNOUNCEMENT OF COURSES 


Page 


General course numbering code 217 

Prerequisites 217 

Independent study 217 

SCHOOL OF THi ARTS 

Art 219 

Art education 226 

Dance 226 

Music 228 

Music education 235 

Theatre 236 

Theatre education 241 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 
AND ECONOMICS 

Accounting 242 

Business administration 244 

Economics 244 

Finance 248 

Management 250 

Marketing 253 

Quantitative methods 256 

SCHOOL OF EDUCATION 

Preservice courses 258 

Graduate courses 263 

Professional courses in the 

postgraduate program 268 

Health education 270 

Physical education 271 

Recreation 277 

SCHOOL OF ENOINEERING 

Engineering 279 

DEPARTMENT OF ETHNIC STUDIES ^ 290 

SCHOOL OF INTERDISaPLINARY 
STUDIES 

American studies 293 

Interdisciplinary Center 293 

Latin-American studies 295 

Linguistics 296 

Religious studies 298 

Russian area studies 299 

Social sciences 300 

Technological studies 301 


Page 

SCHOOL OF LETTERS, ARTS 
AND SaENCES 

Anthropology 303 

Astronomy 308 

Biological science 308 

Chemistry 314 

Communications 319 

Comparative literature 323 

Earth science 326 

English 327 

English education 332 

Foreign languages education 332 


French 332 


Geography _ 

335 

Geology 

338 

German 

338 

Hebrew 

341 

Hkfory 

341 

International study courses 
Tralian 

349 

340 

Journalism education 

350 

Larin 

350 

Mathematics __ 

350 

Mathematics education 

355 

Nature interpretation 

355 

Oceanography 

35/5 

Philosophy 

35/5 

Physical science 

350 

Physics _ _ 

3/50 

Political science 

3/54 

Portuguese 

371 

Psychology _ 

371 

Russian 

375 

Science education 

376 

Sociology 

378 

Spanish 

387 

Speech communication 

385 

Speech education 


Swahili _ 

301 

DIVISION OF LIBRARY 

Library Science 

SaENCE 

392 


VII. DIRECTORIES 

Advisory councils 395 Faculty and administration 408 

Auxiliary organizations 402 Index 426 

Cooperating public school teachers 405 


4 


ANNUAL CALENDAR 



5 



COLLEGE CALENDAR 


1970-71 


SUMMER SESSION 1970— First Session 

April 13, Monday— 

June 1, Monday Inclusive dates for early registration for summer 

session 

June 15, Monday First summer session begins— registration and classes 

July 4, Saturday Independence Day holiday — college closed 

July 24, Friday First summer session ends 

SUMMER SESSION 1970— Second Session 


July 27, Monday Second summer session begins — registration and 

classes 

September 4, Friday Second summer session ends; effective date of grad- 

uation for those completing baccalaureate require- 
ments 

September 7, Monday Labor Day holiday— all oflSces closed 

September 9, Wednesday Admission Day— all offices open 


FALL SEMESTER 1970 


January 2, 1970 

Period for filing applications for admission to the fall semester 1970 begins 
for all new students and former students not in attendance during the spring 
semester 1970. Applicants are urged to file early in the period in view of en- 
rollment limitations. Applications will be closed when enrollment quotas are 
filled, or July 1, whichever is earlier. 


September 14, Monday Academic year begins; advisement, orientation and 

registration week begins (see Class Schedule for 
details) 

September 17, Thursday Last day to register without late registration fee; 

application deadline for baccalaureate degree can- 
didates for graduation, June 1971 and September 
1971 

September 21, Monday Instruction begins 

October 12, Monday- Columbus Day holiday — all offices closed; 

no instruction 

November 2, Monday Deadline for January 1971 master’s degree candi- 

dates to request a graduation check 

November 11, Wednesday Veterans Day holiday — all offices closed; 

no instruction 


November 26-27, 

Thursday, Friday Thanksgiving recess— all offices closed 

December 21, Monday Winter recess begins 

January 4, Monday Instruction resumes 

January 13, Wednesday Last day of classes 

January 14-15, 

Thursday-Friday Examination study days 

January 18, Monday Semester examinations begin 

January 22, Friday Semester examinations end; semester ends; effective 

date of graduation for those completing 
requirements 


6 



SPRING SEMESTER 1971 


October 1, 1970 

Period for filing applications for admission to the spring semester 1971 begins 
for all new students and former students not in attendance during the fall 
semester 1970. Applicants are urged to file early in the period in view of enroll- 
ment limitations. Applications will be closed when enrollment quotas are filled, 
or December 1, whichever is earlier. (Dates are subject to change.) 


February 1, Monday Semester begins; advisement, orientation and regis- 


tration week begins 

February 4, Thursday Last day to register without late registration fee; 

application deadline for baccalaureate degree can- 
didates for graduation January 1972 
February 8, Monday Instruction begins 

February 12, Friday Lincoln’s Birthday holiday — all offices closed; 

no instruction 

February 15, Monday Washington’s Birthday holiday — all offices closed; 

no instruction • 

March 1, Monday Application deadline for June 1971 master’s degree 

candidates to request a graduation check and for 
first summer session 1971 master’s degree candidates 
to request certificates of completion 

April 5, Monday Spring recess begins 

April 12, Monday Instruction resumes 

April 13, Tuesday Martin Luther King, Jr., memorial observance 

April 19, Monday Early registration for summer session begins 

April 23, Friday Day of the Titan 

May 3, Monday Memorial Day holiday — all offices closed; 

no instruction • 

May 21, Friday Last day of classes 

May 24-25, 

Monday, Tuesday Examination study days 

May 26, Wednesday Semester examinations begin 

May 31, Monday Memorial Day holiday — all offices closed; no 

instruction • 

June 2, Wednesday Semester examinations end 

June 4, Friday Commencement (subject to change); semester ends; 

eflFective date of graduation for those completing 
requirements 


SUMMER SESSION 1971— Rrst Session 

April 19, Monday- 

June 7, Monday Inclusive dates for early registration for summer 

session 

June 21, Monday First summer session begins— registration and classes 

July 5, Monday Independence Day holiday — all offices closed 

July 30, Friday First summer session ends 


SUMMER SESSION 1971— Second Session 


August 2, Monday Second summer session begins — registration and 

classes 

September 6, Monday Labor Day holiday; all offices closed; no instruction 

September 10, Friday Second summer session ends; effective date of 

graduation for those completing baccalaureate 
requirements 

* Recent legislation establishes revised dates for observing certain national holidays. The academic 
calendar reflects these changes. 


7 




: u/':- ■ 






•■- s ' ' Cv C;i ;„ ■ 

■- ' . S ..)■>.<' ’■'j.'V.-. 



V- 






•.. , fJV.? 


' V f.y. ':. ■'■• ■ . ..xi’vC; : 




, r 

'■' V 

or 


' O' : ; . 



, T* . ,-• i, ,, . ; 

1. ■ '. O-i: /‘. 






\ '; ;H, if,!.;;,’ 

v: -A'r /-j ihu,, 
•isth: „■!■*: ,:c; )i-,.v’'i',, 

. -••.■■• ‘I _ ;S iv O 

., ..o 


•' V-',. . -.s -' ■V.o ^ 

: •■■ ■ , ■'■ -r,. ■ 

r-r 7 • 

f'r 'r • -*-7*’-^^*'^ 

; ;.o ' ^ -f 


o.„r- rv'-*^ .•^;2 

, /if:. ;hq/. 

' •' . ' - 

’.. ' . . ... ... v-roo; ■' . , S' 

■ ■ : ". ■" :•• " 'oM' 

■ ■"' .r'r:. .. O'-rr, ^ ;■«. 00,0 


-o ' . ' 'Oi ':: .,,1. , .^ ... '{wo^oo'i 7.. ' 'jajii: i-iq o: 

;j. t^C ;7 -to 


ORGANIZATION AND 
ADMINISTRATION 


I 


mu 


BOARD OF TRUSTEES 
OFFICE OF THE CHANCELLOR 
THE CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGES 

ADVISORY BOARD 


(VAk vA'mmktmo 








■■\k 


ko (JkA<M 

kk' i'£yi'rk<-'Kk: J .'ri'''Tl<i 

V. V..^ - jJU.,' 'ITA'i'.^ kA ^A'-'-k: k.:- k, 

kkkiM :^3fK'T^/OA 


TRUSTEES 

OF THE CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGES 


Ex Officio Trustoos 

Ronald Reagan, BA. State Capitol, Sacramento 95814 

Governor of California and President of the Trustees 

Ed Reinecke, B5 State Capitol, Sacramento 95814 

Lieutenant Governor of California 

Max Rafferty, A3., M.A., Ed.D 721 Capitol Mall, Sacramento 95814 

State Superintendent of Public Instruction 

Robert T. Monagan, BA. —State Capitol, Sacramento 95814 

Speaker of the Assembly 

Glenn S. Dumke, A3., MA., Ph.D., LL.D., L.H.D —5670 Wilshire 

Chancellor of the California State Colleges Boulevard, Los Angeles 90036 

Appointed Trustees 

Appointments are for a term of eight years expiring March 1 on dates in paren- 
theses. Names are listed in order of accession to the board. 

Charles Luckman, LLD., ATX). (1974) 

9220 Sunset Boulevard, Los Angeles 90069 
Theodore Meriam, A3. (1971) 

P.O. Box 370, Chico 95927 
Albert J. Ruffo, LL.B., B.S. in E£. (1971) 

675 North First Street, Suite 1200, San Jose 95112 
Mrs. Philip Conley, BA. (1972) 

3729 Huntington Boulevard, Fresno 93702 
E. Guy Warren, BA. (1973) 

P.O. Box 59, Hayward 94541 
Daniel H. Ridder, BA. (1975) 

604 Pine Street, Long Beach 90801 
George D. Hart, A3. (1975) 

111 Sutter Street, San Francisco 94104 
Alec L. Cory, BA., LL3. ( 1973 ) 

530 B Street, Suite 1900, San Diego 92101 
William A. Norris, BA., LL3. (1972) 

609 South Grand Avenue, Los Angeles 90017 
Edward O. Lee, BA. (1974) 

610 16th Street, Room 420, Oakland 94612 
Dudley Swim, A3., MA. (1976) 

Route 2, Box 5000, (Darmel Valley Road, Carmel 93924 
Karl L. Wente, M3. (1976) 

5565 Tesla Road, Livermore 94550 
E. Litton Bivans (1977) 

2431 Dallas Street, Los Angeles 90031 
W. O. Weissich, B3., JX). (1977) 

1299 Fourth Street, San Rafael 94901 
Robert A Hornby, LL.D. (1978) 

P.O. Box 60043 Terminal Annex, Los Angeles 9(X)60 
Phillip V. Sanchez, A3., MA. (1978) 

1015 East Alluvial Street, Fresno 93726 


11 


Trustees 


Officers of the Trustees 


Governor Ronald Reagan 
President 
Alec L. Cory 
Vice Chairman 


E. Guy Warren 
Chairman 
Glenn S. Dumke 
Secretary-Treasurer 


12 


OFFICE OF THE CHANCELLOR 

OF THE CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGES 


5670 Wilshire Boulevard, Los Angeles 90036 
213 938-2981 

Glenn S. Dumke Chancellor 

Harry E. Brakebill Executive Vice Chancellor 

C. Mansel Keene - Assistant Chancellor, Faculty and Staff Affairs 

Russell G. Whitesel Vice Chancellor, Academic Affairs 

D. Dale Hanner Vice Chancellor, Business Affairs 

Norman L. Epstein Vice Chancellor and General Counsel 

Harry W. Hannon Vice Chancellor, Physical Planning and Development 


13 


THE CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGES 


California State College, Bakersfield 
615 California Avenue 
Bakersfield 93304 
Paul F. Romberg, President 
805 327-9101 

California State College, Dominguez 
Hills 

1000 East Victoria Street 
Dominguez Hills 90247 
Leo F. Cain, President 
213 532-4300 

California State College, Fullerton 
800 North State College Boulevard 
Fullerton 92631 

William B. Langsdorf, President 
714 870-2011 

California State College, Hayward 
25800 Hillary Street 
Hayward 94542 
EUlis E. McCune, President 
415 538-8000 

California State College, Long Beach 
6101 East Seventh Street 
Long Beach 90801 
Stephen Horn, President 
213 433-0951 

California State College, Los Angeles 
5151 State College Drive 
Los Angeles 90032 
John A. Greenlee, President 
213 224-2011 

California State College, 

San Bernardino 
5500 State College Parkway 
San Bernardino 92407 
John M. Pfau, President 
714 887-6311 

California State Polytechnic College, 
Kellogg-Voorhis 
3801 West Temple Avenue 
Pomona 91766 

Robert C. Kramer, President 
213 964-6424 

California State Polytechnic College, 
San Luis Obispo 
San Luis Obispo 93401 
Robert E. Kennedy, President 
805 546-0111 


Chico State College 
Chico 95926 

Robert E. Hill, President 
916 345-5011 
Fresno State College 
Shaw and Cedar Avenues 
Fresno 93726 

Karl Falk, Acting President 
209 487-9011 
Humboldt State College 
Areata 95521 

Cornelius H. Siemens, President 
707 826-3011 

Sacramento State College 
6000 J Street 
Sacramento 95819 
Bernard L. Hyink, President 
916 454-6011 
San Diego State College 
5402 College Avenue 
San Diego 92115 
Malcolm A. Love, President 
714 286-5000 

San Fernando Valley State College 
18111 Nordhoff Street 
Northridge 91324 
James W. Qeary, President 
213 349-1200 

San Francisco State College 
1600 Holloway Avenue 
San Francisco 94132 
S. I. Hayakawa, President 
415 469-9123 
San Jose State College 
125 South Seventh Street 
San Jose 95114 

Hobert W. Bums, Acting President 
408 294-6414 
Sonoma State College 
1801 East Cotati Avenue 
Rohnert Park (Cotati) 94928 
Ambrose R. Nichols, President 
707 795-2011 
Stanislaus State (College 
800 Monte Vista Avenue 
Turlock 95380 
Carl Gatlin, President 
209 634-9101 


14 


THE CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGES 

The 19 California State Colleges, from Humboldt County in the north to San 
Diego in the south, comprise the largest system of public higher education in the 
Western hemisphere and one of the largest in the world. Current enrollment 
exceeds 227,000 full- and part-time students who are served by a faculty that 
numbers approximately 13,000. 

Although San Jose State College, the oldest, was founded over a century ago, 
the California State Colleges were not drawn together as a system under an inde- 
pendent Board of Trustees until after passage of the Donahoe Higher Education 
Act by the Legislature in 1960. 

Responsibility for the California State Colleges is vested in the Board of Trustees, 
whose members are appointed by the Governor. The Chancellor is the administra- 
tive officer of the Trustees. Together, the Trustees and the Chancellor set broad 
policy, while delegating responsibility for implementation to the colleges. The 
Academic Senate of the California State Colleges, consisting of elected representa- 
tives of the faculty at each college, recommends academic policy to the Board of 
Trustees through the Chancellor. 

Each college in the system has its own geographic and curricular character, but 
all emphasize the liberal arts and sciences. Programs leading to the bachelor’s and 
master’s degrees, as well as a limited number of joint doctorates, are master planned 
to anticipate and accommodate student interest and the educational and professional 
needs of the State of California. The primary responsibility of the faculty is the 
instructional process, with increasing recognition of the importance of the role of 
research as a necessary concomitant to high quality teaching. 

The California State Colleges are now in the most dynamic period of their 
development. Prior to World War II, there were seven State Colleges with a peak 
total enrollment of 13,000. Since 1947, 12 new colleges have been established and 
sites have been selected for new campuses in Ventura, San Mateo, and Contra Costa 
counties. CaUfomia State College, Bakersfield, will open its doors to students for 
the first time this year. Enrollment in the system is expected to go beyond 400,000 
by 1980. 


CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGE, FULLERTON 


ADVISORY BOARD 

Leland C. Launer, Chairman 

Partner, Launer, Chaffee and Hanna Fullerton 

El. B, Buster, Vice Chairman 

Vice President, West Coast, Townsend Company Santa Ana 

Arnold O. Beckman 

Chairman of the Board, Beckman Instruments, Inc. Corona del Mar 

Mrs. Nicholas A. Begovich Fullerton 

Donald S. Bums 

President, Don Burns, Inc. — ^Volkswagen Corona del Mar 

H. L. Jack Caldwell 

Vice Chairman of the Board, Macco Realty Company Newport Beach 

C Stanley Chapman 

Chapman Ranch Fullerton 


15 


Advisory Board 


ADVISORY BOARD-Continued 

Rodney (Bud) Cx)ulson Anaheim 

William J. McGarvey, Jr. 

McGarvey-Thompson Realty, Inc. .Fullerton 

Charles A. Pearson 

Anaheim Truck and Transfer Anaheim 

Philip S. Twombly 

Executive Vice President, VIM (Dorp Fullerton 

Harold M. Williams 

Chairman of the Board, Norton Simon, Inc. .. Fullerton 


16 


THE COLLEGE 


ADMINISTRATION 
OBJECTIVES AND fflSTORY 
SPECIAL PROGRAMS AND SERVICES 
RESEARCH CENTERS AND CLINICS 
STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES 


yHxrrmM am. aawTDi'iisc) 
KMM'Lir) 

a;?f:ii;¥Hsa xa^aoiFTg 


ADMINISTRATION 


COLLEGE ADMINISTRATION 


President- 


Executive Assistant- 


-William B. Langsdorf 
Emmett T. Long 


Director of Facility Planning 

Building Coordinators 


Vice President, Administration- 

Director of Development 

Personnel Officer 

Publications Manager- 


Contracts and Grants Assistant. 


James B. Sharp 

Milton C. Blanchard 

Arthur L. Burroughs 

L. Donald Shields 

Bernard E. Foster 

Forrest S. Pine 

Jerry J. Keating 

Helen C. Carter 


Coordinator for Campus PoUce, Safety and Security. 
Vice President, Academic 

Executive Associate 

Dean, School of the Arts_ 


Russell J. Keeley 
Affairs Miles D. McCarthy 


—Charles A. Povlovich 
-J. Justin Gray 


Dean, School of Business Administration and Economics Jack W. Coleman 

Dean, School of Education - Eugene L. McGarry 

Dean, School of Engineering Ro^rt G. Valpey 

Director, School of Interdisciplinary Studies David M. Feldman 

Dean, School of Letters, Arts and lienees Hazel J. Jones 

Dean of Educational Services and Summer Sessions Gerhard E. Ehmann 

Administrative Assistant. James T. Mavity 


Dean of Academic Planning- 


Administrative Assistant- 


^Wayne W. Untereiner 

Doris B. Carlton 

Giles T. Brown 

Virginia P. Davis 

Ernest W. Toy, Jr. 

Bibliographic Services Department Doris H. Banks 

Readers* Services Department Barbara E. Davis 

Processing Services Department — Herta D. Fischer 

Director of Office of Academic Advisement- Russell H. Miller 

Director of Office of Faculty Records Lois S. Herron 


Dean of Graduate Studies- 
Administradve Assistant- 
College Librarian- 


Director of Institutional Research and Studies- 

Director of Instructional Media Center 

Director of Audiovisual Services 

Dean of Students 


-Kenneth R. Doane 
Allen M. Zeltzer 


Administrative Assistant- 


Director of New Educational Horizons — 
Associate Dean of Students and Director 

of Admissions and Records 

Admissions Officer 

Registrar- 


-Raymond E. Denno 

Ernest A. Becker 

David L. Perrault 

James C. Fleming 


-Ralph Emerson Bigelow 


-Mildred H. Scott 


Associate Dean of Students and Director 

of Counseling Center 

Counselor 

Counselor 

Counselor 

Counselor 

Counselor 


-Charles W. Buck 


Edward Jacobson 

-Daniel T. Kawakami 

Arthur W. Lynn 

Jack Russell 


Psychological Consultant, Mental Health Program- 


-Treva R. Sudhalter 
—Anthony R. Hybl 


19 


Schools and Departments 


Foreign Student Adviser.. 


-Louise G. Lee 


Testing Program Supervisor and Research Analyst.. — Howard K. Morton 

Director of Relations with Schools George O. Enell 

Associate Dean of Students and 

Director of Student Activities - — „T. Roger Nudd 

Activities Adviser Tom L. O’Donnell 

Activities Adviser Terre A. Stier 


Director of Housing 

Director of Placement Services.. 

Placement Supervisor 

Placement Supervisor 

Director of Financial Aids.. 


Dudley A. Stier 

Max W. Burke 

Mary G. Condon 

Eva C. Jensen 

-Thomas D. Morris 


Director of Student Health Center- 

Staff Physician 

Staff Physician 

Staff Physician.. 


-William H. Wickett, Jr., MX). 

Arthur E. Alne, M.D. 

Robert J. McFerran, MX). 

..Iris O. Moremen, M.D. 


Staff Physician - Helen L. Morton, M.D. 

Staff Psychiatrist. - Robert A. Rounds, MX). 

Business Manager ^Thomas A. Williams 


Administrative Assistant.. 
Budget Analyst- 


Accounting Officer 

Chief of Plant Operation — 

Procurement and Support Services Officer.. 


...Dennis C. Wharton 
-.Robert G. Fecarotta 

Glenn R. Mitchell 

Beryl E. Kempton 

Paul H. Rodet 


SCHOOLS AND DEPARTMENTS 

School of the Arts J. Justin Gray, Dean 

Art Department- Gerald D. Samuelson 

Dance Department Masami Kuni 

Music Department - ieo E. Kreter 

Theatre Department- Alvin J. Keller 

School of Business Administration and Economics Jack W. Coleman, Dean 

John C. Trego, Associate Dean 
James K. Hightower, Associate Dean 

Accounting Department — — Robert A. Meier 

Economics Department — Levem F. Graves 

Finance Department — B. E. Tsagris 

Management Department - - — — Donald R. Shaul 

Marketing Department Frank L. Roberts 

Quantitative Methods Department — JBen C. Edmondson 

School of Education - Eugene L. McGarry, Dean 

Emma E. Holmes, Associate Dean 
Ernest G. Lake, Coordinator for Graduate Studies 
Educational Psychology /Special Education/Pupil Personnel Services 


Calvin C. Nelson 

Elementary /Reading/Secondary Education —Hazel M. Croy 

Health Education/Physical Education/Recreation (Acting) Paul J. Pastor 

School Administration/Social Foundations- —JEmest G. Lake 

School of Engineering Robert G. Valpey, Dean 


20 


Schools and Departments 


School of Interdisciplinary Studies 

American Studies 

Ladn American Studies 

Linguistics 

Religious Studies — 

Russian Area Studies 

Social Sciences - 


David M. Feldman, Director 

David J. Pivar 

William J. Ketteringham 

David M. Feldman 

- Donald H. Card 

-Robert S. Feldman 

George Giacumakis, Jr. 


School of Letters, Arts and Sciences - - - Hazel J. Jones, Dean 

. . . Associate Dean 
. . . Associate Dean 

Anthropology Department. Hans H. Leder 

Biological Science Department Donald B. Bright 

Chemistry Department Andrew F. Montana 

Communications Department J. William Maxwell 

English Department - - Joan V. Greenwood 

Foreign Languages and Literatures Department Walter D. Kline 

Geography Department Gertrude M. Reith 

History Department - B. Carmon Hardy 

Mathematics Department — - Dennis B. Ames 

Philosophy Department Paul C. Hayner 

Physics Department (Acting) Edward L. Ck)operman 

Political Science Department - Clharles G. Bell 

Psychology Department Ernest H. Dondis 

Science and Mathematics Education Department (On leave) George C. Turner 

(Acting) Robert E. Lepper 

Sociology Department — Ernest Works 

Speech (Communication Department Lee E. Granell 

(Acting) Doris H. Banks 


Division of Library Science — 
Department of Ethnic Studies 


- Robert Serros 


College Committees 


COLLEGE COMMITTEES, 1969-70 


President's Cabinet 
William B. Langsdorf, Chairman 
Ernest A. Becker 
Giles T. Brown 
Jack W. Coleman 
Gerhard E. Ehmann 
David M. Feldman 
J. Justin Gray 
Joan V. Greenwood 
Bernard L. Hyink 

Faculty Council 
Joan V. Greenwood, Chairman 
George Giacumakis, Jr., Vice Chair- 
man 

George L. Friend, Secretary 
Allen M. Zeltzer, Treasurer 
Charles W. Buck 
Edwin R. Carr 
Jack W. Coleman 
James W. Cusick 
Franz Dolp 
Edwin Duerr 
George O. Enell 
Julian F. S. Foster 
tLevern F. Graves, ex officio 
Emma E. Holmes 
Bernard L. Hyink 
Donald W. Reran 
Joseph W. Landon 
Irene L. Lange 

William B. Langsdorf, ex officio 
William C. Langworthy 
Robert A. Lemmon 

SfoflF Council 

DeAun R. Stone, Chairman 
Elaine R. Lekich, Vice Chairman 
Jeanne E. Skinner, Secretary 
Juan R. Casas, Treasurer 
Harold Ackerman 
Don J. Boos 
Gloria A. Dwinell 
Jane Estes 

* Student 

t Member of Statewide Academic Senate. 

t Nonvoting 


Emmett T. Long 
Miles D. McCarthy 
Eugene L. McGarry 
•Robert E. Sandoval 
James B. Sharp 
L. Donald Shields 
Wayne W. Untereiner 
Robert G. Valpey 
Thomas A. Williams 


Daniel G. Lewis 
Michael T. Lyon 
Gerald C. Marley 
James F. Newell 
Ervie Pena 
Doris G. Phillips 
Joyce E. Pickersgill 
Houshang Poorkaj 
John E. Reynolds 
Herbert C. Rutemiller 
•Robert E. Sandoval, ex officio 
Donald A. Sears 
Howard J. Seller 
Morris G. Sica 
tEric A. Teel, ex officio 
Robert G. Valpey 
Eva R. Van Ginneken 
M. John Wagner 
David L. Walkington 
Charles F. Williams 
Nelson E. Woodard 
Michael Yessis 

^ Charles A. Povlovich, Parliamentarian 
Fred Q. Evans 

t Joan V. Greenwood, ex officio 
tElmmett T. Long, ex officio 
Eleanor B. Mortensen 
Donald J. Phillips 
iForrest S. Pine, ex officio 
Josephine T. Webster 
JMiriam J. Bergman, Parliamentarian 


22 


College Committees 


Campus Planning Committee 

William B. Langsdorf, Chairman 

Ernest A. Becker 

Jack C. Emmons, College Facility 

Planner, Office of the Chancellor 

Joan V. Greenwood, ex officio 

Bernard L. Hyink 

Howard Morgridge, Considting 
Architect 

John W. Olsen 

James B. Sharp 

L. Donald Shields 

Thomas A. Williams 

Academic Affairs Cabinet 

Bernard L. Hyink, Chairman 

Ernest A. Becker 

Ralph Emerson Bigelow 

Giles T. Brown 

Jack W. Coleman 

Gerhard E. Ehmann 

David M. Feldman 

J. Justin Gray 

Joan V. Greenwood 

Emma E. Holmes 

Hazel J. Jones 

John D. Lafky 

Ernest G. Lake 

Miles D. McCanhy 

Eugene L. McGarry 

Charles A. Povlovich 

Ernest W. Toy, Jr. 

John W. Trego 

Wayne W. Untereiner 

Robert G. Valpey 

Graduate Council 

Giles T. Brown, Chairman 

Oswaldo Arana 

George I. Cohn 

Donald H. Gard 

George Giacumakis, Jr. 

J. Justin Gray 

Bernard L. Hyink, ex officio 
John D. Lafky 

Elmest G. Lake 

Alvin H. Rothman 

Student Personnel Services Cabinet 

Ernest A. Becker, Chairman 

Ralph Emerson Bigelow 
•Bruce W. Bimey 

Charles W. Buck 

Max W. Burke 

George O. Enell 

Thomas D. Morris 

T. Roger Nudd 

David L. Perrault 

Dudley A. Sder 

William H. Wickett, Jr. 

Advisory Committee on Radiological Safety 

Robert E. Spenger, Chairman L. Jack Bradshaw 

W. Van Willis, Radiological Safety Helen L. Morton, MX). 

Officer Thomas A. Williams 

Raymond V. Adams 

Computer Center Advisory Committee 
Kenneth R. Doane, Chairman 

Ernest A. Becker 

Ralph Emerson Bigelow 

Edward T. Card 

Jack W. Coleman 

Bernard L. Hyink 

Eugene L. McGarry 

• Student 

Charles A. Povlovich 

James B. Sharp 

L. Donald Shields 

Ernest W. Toy, Jr. 

Clarence E. Tygart 

Robert G. Valpey 

Thomas A. Willkuns 


23 


College Committees 

Student-Faculty Athletics Board 
Arthur D. Earick, Chcdrmm 
John E. Caine, Executive Secretary 
Robert C. Belloli 
David E. Van Deventer 
•Janine A. Farquhar 

Student-Faculty Publications Board 
Alvin J. Keller, Chairman 
J. William Maxwell, Executive 
Secretary 
•David L. Belz 
•Paul A. Friesen 
James L. Gilmore 
Sandra Sutphen 
•Rolf E. Wise 
t Ernest A. Becker 

Student-Faculty Public Events Board 
Morton C. Fierman, Chairman 
L. Donald Shields, Executive 
Secretary 

•Ica (Ike) C. Adams 
Edward L. Cooperman 


•Robert H. Sowersby 
•Wayne M. Spicer 
tElmer L. Johnson 
tT. Roger Nudd 
tWiUiam G. PoUock 


tGordon R. Chapman 
•tHoward J. Demehl 
•tPierre M. Guyette 
t Jerry J. Keating 
•tRalph M. O’Hollaren 
tWayne E. Overbeck 
•tCharles L. Rough 
t Joseph W. Sawicki 
•t William E. Schreiber 


•Cindy J. Detwiler 
•James L. Fitzpatrick 
Leo E. Kreter 
t Jerry J. Keating 
tT. Roger Nudd 


Student-Faculty Lecture Series Committee 
•Ica (Ike) C. Adams, Cochairman 
Michael E. Brown, Co chairman 
Donald B. Bright 
Samuel J. Cartledge 


•Allen Cofiori 
Franz Dolp 
•Sharon L. Gilbert 
•Dulcea A. Johnson 


* Student, 
t Nonvoting. 


24 


Standing Committees 


STANDING COMMITTEES OF THE FACULTY 
COUNCIL 1969-70 

Academic Standards 

Donald R. Henry, Chairman Hans H. Leder 

Ralph Emerson Bigelow, ex officio Gerald C. Marley 

•Robert L. Fitzgerald Eugene L. McGarry 

George L. Friend, ex officio 


Computer Facilities and Institutional Research 


Caroline W. Harlow, Chairman 

George C. Chiang 

Wen Mou Chou 

Jack W. Coleman 

Kenneth R. Doane, ex officio 


•Robert J. Religa 
Louis G. Schmidt 
Cameron Stewart 
David L. Walkington, ex officio 


Curriculum 

Hazel J. Jones, Chairman 
Ida S. Coppolino, Vice Chairman 
Leland J. Bellot 
Giles T. Brown, ex officio 
•Jerome A. Busch 
Barbara E. Davis 


Munir R. El-Saden 

Joan V. Greenwood, ex officio 

Joseph W. Landon 

Irene L. Lange 

Alvin H. Rothman 

Wayne W, Untereiner, ex officio 


Educational Development and Innovation 


Julian F. S. Foster, Chairman 
George T. Baker, III, Secretary 
Kenneth R. Doane 
Bernard L. Hyink, ex officio 
•Stan wood C. Johnson 
Fred Katz 

Elections 

John H. Bryden, Chairman 
George L. Friend, ex officio 
Ronald A. HeHn 
Granville W. Hough 

Faculty Affairs 
Charles G. Bell, Chairman 
Natalie Barish 
Roger R. Dittman 
Anne T. Feraru 

Fiscal Affairs and Statewide Issues 
Lawrence B. de Graaf, Chairman 
Joyce S. Pickersgill, Vice Chairman 
George Giacumakis, Jr., ex officio 
Levern F. Graves, ex officio 
•Robert K. Hall 

• Student. 


Robert B. McLaren 
Kenneth L. McWilliams 
L. Donald Shields, ex officio 
Ernest W. Toy, Jr. 

Allen M. Zeltzer, ex officio 


Frances I. Huotari 
Howard J. Seller 
Dudley A. Stier 


Sidney Klein 

Edith L. McCullough 

Allen M. Zeltzer, ex officio 


Herbert C. Rutemiller 

L. Donald Shields, ex officio 

Eric A. Teel, ex officio 

Martin A. Treon 

Thomas A. Williams, ex officio 


25 


Preprofessional Committee 


International Education 
Oswaldo Arana, Chairman 
Louise G. Lee, Secretary, ex officio 
Giles T. Brown, ex officio 
John B. Campbell, ex officio 
Joan V. Greenwood, ex officio 

Library 

Ted C. Smythe, Chairman 
•John H. Dunnigan 
Joan V. Greenwood, ex officio 
James J. Rizza 

Personnel 

Max Nelson, Chairman 
Richard C. Gilbert, Secretary 
Bayard H. Brattstrom 
Joan V. Greenwood, ex officio 

Research 

Sidney Baldwin, Chairman 
Michael P. Onorato, Vice Chairman 
Doris H. Banks 
Walter J. Dennison, ex officio 
Fred H. Dorer 

George Giacumakis, Jr., ex officio 

Student Affairs 
•Richard A. Straton, Chairman 
Ronald Crowley, Vice Chairman 
James A. Baur 
Ernest A. Becker, ex officio 
Michael E. Brown 
James C. Fleming 


Barbara A. Hartsig 
•James A. Harrell 
Ruth A. Nycum 
Houshang Poorkaj 


Eula M. Stovall 

Ernest W. Toy, Jr., ex officio 

Nelson E. Woodard 


Paul C. Hayner 
G. Bording Mathieu 
Doris G. Phillips 


Burton L. Karson 

Rita D. Oleyar 

L. Donald Shields, ex officio 

Morris G. Sica 

Norman Townshend-Zellner 


Donald H. Gard 

George Giacumakis, Jr., ex officio 
Barbara A. Harris 
Jack E. Kemmerly 
Michael T. Lyon 


PREPROFESSIONAL COMMITTEE, 1969-70 


Premedical Committee 
Miles D. McCarthy, Chairman 
Ernest A. Becker 
Richard C. Gilbert 
Richard A. McFarland 


Andrew F. Montana 
Mildred H. Scott 
Donald D. Sutton 
William H. Wickett, Jr. 


The President of the College and the Chairman of the Faculty Council are 
ex officio members of all faculty committees, 

* Student. 


26 


Associated Students 


ASSOCIATED STUDENTS 


Executive Officers 

Robert E. Sandoval, President Ica (Ike) C. Adams, Executive 

Secretary 

Robert J. Hull, Controller 

Administrative Officers 
William G. Pollock, Administrator 


Senate 

Rusty B. Wilson, Speaker 
Larry W. Bledsoe 
Gregory S. Bishop 
John H. Dunnigan 
Lawrence E. Elkins 
Klaus G. Flitner 
Robert W. Hartman 
Vincent D. Jantz 
Andrea G. Johnson 
Blaine H. Lohman 
Clarence E. MacDonald 
Martin P. McMullen 
Margaret M. McNelly 


Roger A. Levy, Assistant 
Administrator 

McDiarmid Messenger 
O. Dennis Mims 
^T. Roger Nudd, ex officio 
Gerald N. Page 
H. Lyndon Porter 
C. Barry Rosenfeld 
Theodore G. Schoneberger 
Richard A. Straton 
Raul R. Tapia 
David B. Vodden 
John M. Walcek 
*David L. Walkington 


CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGE, FULLERTON 
FOUNDATION 
BOARD OF TRUSTEES 


Clarence J. Schwartz, President 
Sidney Baldwin, Vice President 
Hilton L. Dalessi, Treasurer 
Richard Wagner, Secretary 
Ernest A. Becker 
William B. Langsdorf 
Thomas W. Mathew 
Charles A. Povlovich, Jr. 
Orrington C. Ramsay 

Foundation Manager 

Foundation Accountant- 
Bookstore Manager 

* Facility, 
t Student. 


Orville F. Recht 
tRobert E. Sandoval, ex officio 
Phil N. Scheid 
L. Donald Shields 
Leo Tamamian 
Norman Townshend-Zellner 
Mrs. Phillip S. Twombly 
tRusty B. Wilson, ex officio 

Walter J. Dennison 

William J. Millico 

Douglas S. Pittman 


27 


OBJECTIVES AND HISTORY 


OBJECTIVES OF CALIFORNIA STATE 
COLLEGE, FULLERTON 

The main functions of an institution of higher learning are to disseminate and 
advance knowledge. The philosophy which guides an institution can limit or pro- 
mote the successful achievement of these objectives. Therefore, from its inception, 
the college has directed its educational program toward the fullest possible devel- 
opment of the individuals who participate in it. For both faculty and students this 
entails a commitment to high standards of scholarship, a comprehensive rather than 
a narrow approach to major areas of study, and a concern with research and other 
creative activity. 

The college holds to the belief that an enduring educational experience must be 
founded upon exploration of our cultural heritage, through basic studies in the 
liberal arts and sciences, and that it can and should at the same time prepare for 
success in a chosen occupation or profession. Accordingly, the required general 
education program has as its objective the development in each student of: 

1. The effective use and interpretation of the written and spoken language. 

2. An imderstanding of the wide range of human endeavor and accomplishments 
in liberal arts and sciences, their interrelationships, and the various choices 
and values they represent. 

3. An understanding of information and principles in some areas of the liberal 
arts and sciences in sufficient depth to encourage critical and creative thought 
and expression. 

4. A spirit of inquiry into the past and into the future, in order to cope with 
conditions in the continually changing world. 

5. An understanding of the rights, privileges and responsibilities of citizenship 
in the community and nation, and of effective participation in today’s world. 

In addition, the college requires of all students who are candidates for a degree — 
whatever their special purpose — the pursuit of a subject major. 

(For specific details, see page 68) 


HISTORY OF CALIFORNIA STATE 
COLLEGE, FULLERTON 

Orange County is situated on a coastal plain southeast of the City of Los Angeles. 
A little more than a decade ago the county was regarded as being one of rural 
characteristics, with emphasis on the production of oranges and other citrus fruits. 
Today it is referred to as one of the fastest growing counties in the nation, having 
multiplied its population almost five times in the last fifteen years. Orange County 
reached the one million mark in population in 1963, to make it the third most 
populous county in California. The median age of the population is 26.6 years, and 
42 per cent are less than 20 years of age. Much of the county is still rural, the 
county having a population density of 1.37 persons per acre. There are sections, 
however, that are as dense as 16.^ persons per acre. Every indication points to 
continued growth, with a predicted population of two million by 1980. Thousands 
of acres of irrigated agricultural land have been converted to subdivisions, business 
and industry, freeways, and schools. The electronics industry is the leader in 
growth among industries and businesses in the county. 


28 


AccrediMion 


California State College, Fullerton, was established by act of the Legislature 
under the terms of Chapter 1681 of the Statutes of 1957. On March 13, 1958, the 
Public Works Board selected the site of the college, located in the northeast section 
of the City of Fullerton. It now consists of 225 acres, and is bounded on the north 
by Yorba Linda Boulevard, on the west by State College Boulevard, on the south 
by Nutwood Avenue, and on the east by the Orange Freeway. The college 
is located within five miles of 60 percent of the industry and within 10 miles 
of 70 percent of the population of Orange County. It is also within easy driving 
range of Orange County beaches and mountains, and of the other cultural centers 
of southern California and their recreation and entertainment areas. 

Dr. William B. Langsdorf was appointed president of the college on January 16, 
1959, and with two aides came to Fullerton on March 2, 1959, to begin planmng 
for the opening of the new college. Arrangements were made with the Fullerton 
Union High School District to lease quarters for the college administrative offices 
on the Fullerton Union High School campus, and to hold classes at the Sunny Hills 
High School for the 1959-60 school year. 

During the first decade the official fall enrollment grew from 452 to 11,020 
individuals. Enrollment is expected to surpass 14,000 students in 1970 and peak 
at 35,000 in the 1980s. 

In the fall of 1960, the college opened classes on its own campus where it occu- 
pied 12 temporary buildings. The first permanent building, the Letters and Science 
Building, was occupied in 1963. The Music-Speech-Drama Building was completed 
in 1964; the Physical Education Building, 1965; the Library and Audiovisual Center, 
1966; the Commons, 1967; the Humanities-Social Sciences Building, 1969; and the 
An Center, 1970. Both the Administration-Business Administration Building and the 
Engineering Building are due for completion in 1971, with the Education Building 
expected to follow in 1972. Additional buildings are being planned for the future. 


ACCREDITATION 

The college is fully accredited by the Western Association of Schools and Col- 
leges. Specific programs have been accredited by the California State Board of 
Education, the American Association of Collegiate Schools of Business, the National 
Association of Schools of Music and the American Chemical Society. 

California State College, Fullerton is a member of the Council of Graduate 
Schools in the United States and the Western Association of Graduate Schools. 


29 


SPECIAL PROGRAMS AND SERVICES 


INTERNATIONAL PROGRAMS 

The California State Colleges offer programs of study for a full academic year 
at a number of distinguished universities abroad. Students study and live under the 
same conditions as students at the cooperating universities, but remain enrolled 
in the California State Colleges, where they may apply their work toward degree 
requirements in accordance with college regulations. The programs, which are 
voluntary, cooperative and sy'stemwide in nature, are designed as bona fide aca- 
demic undertalangs with clearly defined educational and professional objectives. 

For 1970-71, the cooperating Universities are: University of the Andes, Bogota, 
Colombia; University of Aix-Marseilles, France; Free University of Berlin and 
University of Heidelberg, Germany; University of Ghana; The Hebrew University 
of Jerusalem and Tel Aviv University, Israel; University of Florence, Italy; Waseda 
University, Tokyo, Japan; University of Granada and University of Madrid, 
Spain; University of Stockholm and Uppsala University, Sweden; and National 
University, Taiwan. 

Students are selected on the basis of academic, linguistic and personal qualifica- 
tions. The criteria are: 

a. Upper division or graduate standing by the beginning of the academic year 
abroad; 

b. Academic achievement; 

c. Proficiency in the language of instruction; 

d. Faculty recommendations. 

Programs in Ghana, Israel, Italy, Japan, Sweden and Taiwan do not require 
previous linguistic preparation; applicants for all other programs must demonstrate 
adequate facility in the langauge of instruction at the host university. 

Approximate cost to the student during the 1970-71 year, including round trip 
transportation from San Francisco, room and board for the academic year, and 
medical insurance, is $2,300 for Colombia, France, Germany and Spain; $2,000 
for Israel and Taiwan; and $2,500 for Ghana, Italy, Japan and Sweden. 

Application for the 1971-72 academic year should be made early in the fall 
semester of 1970. Detailed information may be obtained from the Office of Inter- 
national Programs, the California State Colleges, 1600 Holloway Avenue, San 
Francisco, 94132. 

LATE AFTERNOON AND EVENING CLASSES 

The educational program of the college is offered continuously from 8 ajn. 
until 10 p.m., Monday through Friday. Classes held during the late afternoon and 
evening hours are part of the regular college offering and are taught by the 
college faculty. 

Students enrolling in these classes must have met all admission requirements of 
the college, including the filing of an official application for admission, the filing 
of complete official transcripts from other schools and colleges, and in the case 
of lower division applicants, the completion of required tests for admission. 

A class schedule, listing all classes meeting in the late afternoon and evening 
hours, may be obtained at the Titan Bookstore. 


30 


Summer Sessions 


SUMMER SESSIONS 

Nature of the Summer Sessions 

The summer session is designed to meet the needs of students who are interested 
in the enrichment of their educational background as well as completing require- 
ments for a degree or credential. Summer session courses are the equivalent of 
college courses offered in the fall and spring semesters, and apply toward gradu- 
ation and residence requirements as well as teaching credential requirements. Day- 
time and evening classes have been scheduled. Many courses have prerequisite 
requirements which students must meet. Master’s degree work is also offered. 

The college in 1970 will conduct two six-week summer sessions, from June 15 
through July 24, and from July 27 through September 4. There also will be 
a number of two-week and three- week workshops running concurrently. In addi- 
tion to much of the regular curriculum, summer offerings include special work- 
shops and seminars for teachers and other professional groups. A program of 
recreational activities is planned to serve a wide variety of interests. 

A tuition fee of $24.00 per unit is charged plus an Associated Students member- 
ship fee of $6 per person. The summer session class schedule announcing all 
courses is published in March, and may be obtained by writing the dean of summer 
sessions. Information may be obtained at any time by telephoning (714) 870-2611, 
or by visiting the college summer sessions oflSce. 

Admission to the Summer Sessions 

Although the quality of the program and most of the course offerings are the 
same as in the regular session, the college does not require an advance application 
or transcripts from students registering for credit courses in the summer session. 
However, students must be high school graduates and are expected to have satisfied 
the prerequisites for the courses in which they register. Admission to summer 
session does not grant admission to the regular session. Admission to the summer 
sessions is completed at registration. 

Authorized Student Load 

The authorized student load is six units for a six-week session, and 12 units 
for the entire summer. “Not more than one semester unit may be earned for 
each week of attendance in summer session, except that upon approval of ap- 
propriate college authorities, additional semester units may be earned at the rate 
of one-half unit for each three units of credit for which a student is registered.” 
(Title 5, ^lifomia State Administrative Ck)de) 

This means that combinations can be arranged so that a student may earn up to 
seven units during either of the two six-week summer sessions when a total of 
not more than two courses is involved (i.e., a four-unit course and a three-unit 
course, or a five-unit course and a two-unit course). Any student who enrolls by 
error in more than seven units during a six-week summer session will find that 
credit for excess units will not be counted toward a degree, credential or other 
objective. Any other exceptions must be petitioned through the Office of Ad- 
missions and Records. 


EXTENSION PROGRAM AND SERVICES 

The college cooperates with all community agencies (business and professional 
associations, chambers of commerce, school districts, industrial firms, economic and 
cultural groups, city and county governmental units, etc.) in the development of 
educational programs. These activities may be classes, conferences, institutes, work- 
shops, seminars or they may be consultant services, depending upon the need. In 


31 


College Library 


this manner, the college provides opportunities for the professional, vocational, and 
cultural improvement of persons unable to pursue an academic program in resi- 
dence. 

Extension Courses. Off-campus extension courses may be planned for those wish- 
ing to earn college credit and under certain conditions this credit may be applied 
toward a degree or a teaching credential. Extension offerings are equivalent in level 
and quality to residence courses. These courses may be modified and designed to 
meet the particular needs of certain groups and may be initiated at various times 
during the year. Any adult may enroll in an extension course, provided he meets 
the prerequisites of the course. Matriculation is not required. Refer to the section 
of this catalog on fees and expenses for information on fees. 

Persons wishing information about organizing an extension course or about cur- 
rent extension offerings should address inquiries to the director of extension. 

Conferences and Institutes. The college is interested in taking an active part in 
the development of conferences and institutes. The conference director, in coopera- 
tion with the respective academic departments and schools will work with agency 
representatives in planning the program, selection of a competent staff, and the 
general conduct of the conference. 

Requests for information or assistance with particular educational problems which 
might be met through the extension program should be directed to the conference 
director. 


THE COLLEGE LIBRARY 

The college library, completed in 1966, is housed on the first and fourth through 
sixth floors of the Library Building at the center of the campus. As its collection 
grows and the enrollment increases, the library will occupy the remaining two 
floors of the building. Designed presently to seat approximately 1,625 persons and 
to house about 205,000 books as well as related materials, the building contains 
group study and seminar rooms, study carrels for graduate students and facilities 
for individual and group listening, for the reading of microform materials and for 
copying materials in book and microform. 

The main book collection will contain about 260,000 volumes at the beginning 
of the 1970-71 academic year. During that year about 50,000 volumes will be added. 
Besides attempting to build a balanced collection of basic works, the library has 
concentrated its efforts in several subject areas. As a result relatively strong collec- 
tions are now available in such fields as World War II, international relations 
since 1870, Kant, Shakespeare, Melville, ichthyology, angling, historiography and 
historical bibliography, and library science. 

A selective depository for U.S. government documents since 1964, the library 
will house about 90,000 documents by the beginning of the 1970-71 academic year. 
The library has, in addition, some 10,000 reels of microfilmed U.S. government 
documents, chiefly State Department archives, but also such items as the Con- 
gressional Record and the papers of various presidents as well as microfiche copies 
of the material in Project ERIC. The library is a depository for California 
state documents and for California curriculum materials. 

The library subscribes to almost 4,000 periodicals. It has some 14,000 volumes of 
sound periodicals and has extensive microform holdings in backfiles of periodicals 
and of local, national, and international newspapers. 

Among its recent interesting purchases have been the Human Relations Area 
Files and in conjunction with the Patrons of the Library, the Langsdorf Anm- 
versary Collection of Grabhom Press and Book Qub of California books. 

Library hours are posted in the lobby and listed in the library handbook which 
is available at the reference and circulation desks. Professional librarians are on 
duty at all times to aid students and faculty in the use of library resources. 


32 


Computer Center 


COMPUTER CENTER 

The Computer Center, temporarily located on the fifth floor of the Letters 
and Science Building, serves as the central computing facility for all of the col- 
lege. As the central campus computing facility, it provides instructional, research 
and administrative computing services. 

The computing system is a CDC 3150 with 16K word (65K character) memory, 
card reader, card punch, line printer, two disk drives, and two magnetic tape 
drives. Data communications equipment connects this system to a larger CDC 
3300 computer located at a regional center in Los Angeles; hence, campus users 
also have access to the CDC 3300 for uses beyond the capability of the CDC 3150. 
Peripheral equipment such as keypunches and a sorter are available in an open 
shop area in the Computer Center for student use. 

Instruction in computer programming is offered by several departments at the 
college. Many other departments require use of the computer facility in their 
course work. Students programs are batch-processed several times daily, and a con- 
sulting service to assist users is available. Tlie Computer Center maintains a library 
of application programs for general use. This library will be augmented as new 
educational applications programs are develop for the CDC 3150. The following 
programming languages are supported by the Computer Center: FORTRAN, 
COBOL, ALGOL and COMPASS (Assembly Language for the CDC 3150). 

The Computer Center is scheduled to move to its permanent site on the second 
floor of the new Administration-Business Administration Building upon the build- 
ing’s completion in 1971. 

INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA CENTER 

The Instructional Media Center includes both the extensive Audiovisual Services 
located in the lower level of the Library Building and the Instructional Television 
Services located in the TV Studio of the Music-Speech-Drama Building. Services 
to faculty and students include use of all types of audiovisual equipment and 
materials, rental of films from major rental libraries, and for faculty: production 
of transparencies, charts, posters, embossoghaphs and diagrams plus all types of 
still and motion picture photography. Television services include videotaping facili- 
ties and playback both in the studio and on or off campus. 

The center is responsible for the coordination and development of instructional 
applications of media, and the improvement of programs and materials designed for 
instructional use. Liaison and service relations are maintained with other media 
learning-oriented units on the campus. Personnel of the center are prepared to 
assist the college faculty in their analysis of media needs as related to the pro- 
curement or production of materials pertinent to instructional development. 

MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 

An emphasis in medical technology is available under the MA. in Biology. 
Students electing this must take as part of their course requirements Medical 
Biology 513A (3 units) and 513B (3 units). These courses are given at an approved 
cooperating hospital laboratory school. For further details consult Dr. C^vin A. 
Davenport, Department of Biological Science. 


33 


Paramedical Health Sciences 


PARAMEDICAL HEALTH SCIENCES 

(Dental Technician, Nursing, Occupational Therapy, Optometry, 

Physical Therapy, Podiatry) 

Although no specific bachelor’s or master’s degree program is available in the 
professional areas of dental technician, nursing, occupational therapy, optometry, 
physical therapy, podiatry, academic preparatory courses for these professions are 
given in the science departments. Students should register their specific interest 
preference in the Ofiice of the Dean, School of Letters, Arts and Sciences, and 
arrange for advisement. 

PREMEDICAL-PREDENTAL COA^MIHEE 

Student counseling with respect to preprofessional programs in medicine, den- 
tistry and other health sciences as well as professional school admission problems 
are the concern of this committee. (See membership listing, page 26.) All students 
wishing to prepare for dental or medical careers should register in the Ofiice of 
the Dean of Letters, Arts and Sciences. 

PREMEDICAL PREPARATION 

Medical schools are currently seeking applicants with as broad and liberal an 
educational experience as possible. They recommend that applicants pursue collegi- 
ate major programs which are of vital interest to the student. However, all medical 
schools require a basic minimal training in the natural sciences which includes the 
following coursework: 

one year of general biology or zoology with laboratory 

one semester of embryology or comparative anatomy 

one year of inorganic college chemistry including qualitative analysis with lab- 
oratory 

one semester of quantitative analytical chemistry with laboratory 

one semester of organic chemistry with laboratory 

one year of college physics with laboratory 

Most medical school applicants complete a baccalaureate degree program prior 
to beginning their medical training. However, applications to medical school are 
processed normally at the termination of the sixth semester (junior year). The 
medical college admission test, required of all medical school applicants, is taken 
normaUy during the spring of the sixth semester (junior year). The prospective 
medical school applicant should therefore normally plan to complete the above 
natural science minimal requirements by the end of the junior year. Thus he should 
begin inorganic chemistry in his freshman year in order to satisfy the prerequisite 
requirements for the advanced courses in chemistry. 

Since medical school admissions are limited, the best prepared applicants are 
likely to have an advantage. Many medical schools recommend certain courses in 
the natural sciences in addition to those listed above in the minimal requirements. 
The prospective applicant is advised to consult the catalogs of those medical schools 
to which he anticipates applying for additional recommended preparatory subjects. 
He is further advised to consult a member of the Premedical Clommittee for assist- 
ance in planning his total collegiate program and to obtain copies of optimal 
programs from the chairman of the Premedical Committee. 


34 


College Foundation 


THE CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGE, FULLERTON 
FOUNDATION 

The California State College, Fullerton Foundation, was established and incorpo- 
rated in October 1959 to provide essential student and faculty services which cannot 
be provided from state appropriations; to supplement the program and activities 
of the college in appropriate ways; and to assist otherwise the college in fulfilling 
its purposes and in serving the people of the State of California — especially those 
of the area in which the school is located. 

Services provided by the foundation include the operation of various college 
auxiliary organizations including the bookstore, residence halls, and food service; 
business administration of scholarship and student loan funds; sponsored research 
programs; Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary; and certain institutes. 

The foundation’s overall policies are administered by a board of trustees made 
up of members of the college faculty, administration and students as well as com- 
munity leaders. 


35 


RESEARCH CENTERS AND CLINICS 


CENTER FOR RESEARCH IN BUSINESS, ECONOMICS, 
AND THE COMMUNITY 

The Center for Research in Business, Economics, and the Community provides: 

(1) School of Business Administration and Economics and other faculty with 
additional opportunity to participate in research activities in order to 
improve and reinforce teaching and professional competence; 

(2) Professional research and consultation services to the local area normally 
considered as being serviced by the college, including private business, 
labor, agriculture, and local government agencies; 

(3) Educational services, e.g., seminars and conferences, to improve the level 
of understanding and competence of local decision-makers in specialized 
areas relating to business administration and economics; and 

(4) A focus, through research, for the education of students and citizens in 
the business and economic problems of the local community, and for the 
involvement of faculty in such educational programs. 

The operations of the Center are carried out by constituent institutes, programs, 
and projects for which the Center provides overall leadership and coordination. 
The institutes are long-term, continuing organizations designed to operate in se- 
lected major problem and functional areas of strategic significance and concern 
to the School. Programs and projects within the Center are organized to carry 
on work outside the Institutes’ area of interest, which are a smaller scale and for 
a shorter time-span. 

Currently included within the Center for Research in Business, Economics, and 
the Community are: the affiliated Center for Economic Education; the Real Estate 
Research Institute; the Technological Studies Institute; and the Joint Institute 
for Urban Studies. 

Center for Economic Education 

The Center for Economic Education is one of many such centers at colleges 
and universities in the United States working with the national Joint Council on 
Economic Education to expand economic understanding. Center programs include 

(1) services to schools and colleges, individual educators, and the community; 

(2) research and professional training; and (3) operation of an economic education 
information center. The Center consists of a broadly based executive policy board; 
an administrative staff; and formally organized groups of participating users. Al- 
though operating autonomously, the Center is affiliated with the Center for Research 
in Business, Economics, and the Community. 

Real Estate Research Institute 

The Real Estate Research Institute conducts a continuing research program, 
with special emphasis on urban development in Orange County. Studies are imder- 
taken in cooperation with various public and private agencies, including the 
University of California, but primary funding is from the Department of Real 
Estate of the State of California. Opportunities exist for student participation in 
the various research activities. 


36 


Governmental Studies 


Technological Studies Institute 

The Technological Studies Institute conducts an interdisciplinary program of 
technological studies including research activities closely integrated with special 
course offerings and a library collection on technology. Research activities include 
study of methodology and techniques for measuring and analyzing technological 
change and its economic and social impacts; study of technology transfer and 
applications; and analysis of impacts of technological change on individuals, indus- 
tries and society. Curriculum activities of the program are coordinated through 
the Interdisciplinary Center of the college and courses included in the program 
are listed with that Center’s courses in the Catalog. 

Joint Institute for Urban Studies 

The Joint Institute for Urban Studies represents a cooperative effort by Cali- 
fornia State College, Fullerton and the University of California, Irvine to study 
the processes and problems of urban development with special reference to Orange 
County. 


CENTER FOR GOVERNMENTAL STUDIES 

The Center for Governmental Studies is part of the Department of Political 
Science’s expanding research and teaching activities. Established in 1965, the center 
has four major functions: first, to collect and make available fugitive governmental 
and political materials; second, to assist local government agencies and citizen 
groups in the study of local governmental problems; third, to provide students with 
instruction and experience in research techniques and methodology; and fourth, 
to provide facilities for community institutes and seminars. 

READING CENTER 

The Reading Center is located in the School of Education. Its primary purpose 
is to serve as a clinic and laboratory for graduate students in the reading option 
of the Master of Science in Education. Children from the college community 
schools attend the Reading Center for diagnosis and remediation. The center 
houses materials and equipment relating to reading instruction. 

LABORATORY FOR PHONETIC RESEARCH 

The Laboratory for Phonetic Research is the major research and traii^g facility 
for the program in linguistics at California State College, Fullerton. It is equipped 
with the necessary electromechanical facilities required for the acoustical and 
physiological study of human speech. 

Its objectives are threefold: 

Instruction, To provide teaching, training and experience for students who 
will serve during their professional lives to assist the language handicapped. 
Research, To provide advanced students and faculty with facilities for re- 
search on language function and dysfunction. 

CoTTmtunhy service. To provide qualitative diagnostic assistance to the college 
community to the extent possible. 

The courses which center about the laboratory are designed to prepare students 
as operators of the electromechanical aspects of clinical and research work in the 
analysis of normal and disordered speech. 

Advanced students and faculty use the laboratory to carry out significant research 
projects in acoustical, articulatory and experimental phonetics. To date, a wide 
range of such projects have either been completed or are currently in progress. 


37 


Special Education Clinic 


The findings of research work carried out in the laboratory are published in an 
ongoing series, “Reports of the Laboratory for Phonetic Research.** This publica- 
tion is distributed internationally by means of the Educational Resources Informa- 
tion Center in Washington, D. C. 

SPECIAL EDUCATION CLINIC 

The primary purpose of the Special Education Clinic is to provide intensive 
experiences for students with children referred by schools and other agencies in 
the community. The experiences involve educational assessment, instructional 
methodology and evaluation. All students participating in the clinic attend clinic 
seminars and prepare cases for presentation at the seminars. 

SPEECH AND HEARING CLINIC 

The College Speech and Hearing Clinic operates as a nonprofit California State 
College, Fullerton Foundation agency. In addition is an off-campus clinical program 
for graduate students that involves experiences within medical and paramedical 
settings. The primary purpose of the clinics both on campus and off campus is 
to provide opportunities for teaching, service and research. College students receive 
clinical experience and opportunity for observation. The on-campus clinic is fully 
accredited by the Board of Examiners of the American Speech and Hearing Asso- 
ciation and the California State Department of Education. 

TUCKER WILDLIFE SANCTUARY 

The Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary operates as a nonprofit California State College, 
Fullerton Foundation agency. The sanctuary provides for a program of continuing 
educational service to the community; a research center for biological field studies; 
a facility for teacher education in nature interpretation and conservation education; 
and a center for training students planning to enter into the public service field of 
nature interpretation. 


38 


STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES 


Coordinarion of Student Personnel Services centers in the Office of the Dean of 
Students. The professional functions of this area are directly administered by the 
Office of Admissions and Records, the Office of Relations with Schools, the Coun- 
seling and Testing Center, the Activities Office, the Housing Office, the Office of 
Placement Services, the Financial Aids Office, and the Student Health Center. 
Collateral responsibilities include foreign student advising, coordination of the 
California State Colleges’ international student programs, selective service, and 
veterans’ affairs. 


RELATIONS WITH SCHOOLS 

The Office of Relations with Schools administers a collegewide program to 
assist undergraduate students in the transition from school to college. This assist- 
ance is provided in the form of preadmissions guidance to prospective high school 
or undergraduate transfer students, counseling with parents, provision of current 
information about the college’s curricula and requirements to high school and 
college counselors, and research into the articulation problems of the transfer 
student. 

STUDENT ACTIVITIES 

The college recognizes the important role of student activities in education. 
The activities program represents a variety of areas intended to serve every student 
according to his interest, ability and available time. 

All registered students are members of Associated Students of California State 
College, Fullerton. The Associated Students are governed through the executive, 
legislative, and judicial branches of the Associated Students orgamzadon. The 
president and commissioners constitute the executive branch which has the responsi- 
bility for the development and administration of the program, including such 
activities as publications, religious clubs, intercollegiate athletics, intramural athletics, 
forensics, and music. The Associated Students Senate has full responsibility for 
legislation by which this program is directed and for the allocation of student funds 
for the program. The judicial branch serves as the legal body for interpretation of 
the constitution and enforcement of Associated Student policies. 

Student Organizations 

Student organizations are encouraged and aided by the college whenever stu- 
dents express a desire for activities which add to their educational opportunities. 
As a relatively young institution, the development of new organizations to serve 
the needs of a growing student population is rapid. More than 70 organizations 
are now recognized, including one local and seven national social fraternities, three 
national and two local social sororities, departmental professional fraternities, and 
many service, special interest and religious groups. 

Student Publications 

The college newspaper, the Daily Titan, is published as a product of the journal- 
ism classes and financed by the Associated Students. In addition, a handbook is 
available for use by organizations in the development and operation of their pro- 
gram. Two magazines, the Iconoclast and the Promethean, are also published by 
students. 


39 


Housing 


Student News Bureau 

The Student News Bureau was organized in 1960 to provide the outside press 
with news of student activities on the campus. It is financed by a budgeted alloca- 
tion from Associated Students. 

Athletics 

The intercollegiate athletic program consists of teams in baseball, basketball, 
cross country, football, golf, gymnastics, soccer, swimming, tennis, track and field, 
water polo and wrestling. A year-round program of intramural activities includes 
basketball, badminton, flag football, handball, softball, tennis and wrestling, swim- 
ming and weight lifting. 

The college is a member of the California Collegiate Athletic Association 
(CCA A) . All athletic teams compete under rules of the National Collegiate Athletic 
Association (NCAA). 

Intramural Activities 

The intramural program is conducted on a seasonal basis and involves a variety of 
athletic and recreational activities for both men and women. Rules and regulations 
which govern participation in the intramural program are available in the Office 
of the Director of the Intramural Program or in the Student Involvement Center. 

Extramural Activities 

Participation by women in extramural volleyball, basketball, tennis, swimming, 
track, and golf is provided through membership in the Elxtramural Coordinating 
Council of Southern California and the American Recreation and Athletic Federa- 
tion for College Women. 

College Recreation Association 

Individual recreation opportunities in weight training, swimming, handball, volley- 
ball, basketball and badminton are available through membership in the College 
Recreation Association to members of the student body, faculty and staff. 

HOUSING 

Othrys Hall provides housing for 561 unmarried students in two modem co- 
educational residence halls located adjacent to the campus. Rooms are mostly four- 
person occupancy; however, a few small doubles are also available. Elach room has 
its own private bath. The buildings are fully air-conditioned and carpeted. Among 
specially designed facilities are a library and swimming pool. Dining facilities are 
conveniently located on campus in the (College Commons. 

The residence hall directors and resident advisers of each hall attempt to promote 
a social, cultural and educational program which supports and expands the class- 
room experience. The resident has the opportunity to study, assume responsibility 
through hall government, and discuss serious topics of the day with guest speakers. 
A new program in experimental education. Project Titan, was begun in fall 1967. 
Regularly scheduled college classes are scheduled in the residence hall in order to 
promote a meaningful dialog between faculty members and students in an informal 
setting. 

The Freshman Sponsor Program, initiated in fall 1969, is a program in which 
selected upperclassmen live with small groups of freshmen and act as adviser- 
counselor-friend to these groups. The purpose of the Freshman Sponsor Program 
is to facilitate the transition of freshmen students from high school to a col- 
legiate environment. A tutor service is also available to Othrys Hall students. 

The Housing Office maintains listings of apartments and houses for students and 
faculty who are interested in off-campus living. For students looking for room- 


40 


Student Health Services 


mates, a bulletin board with names of persons currently with an apartment to 
share is also provided. Further information regarding housing may be obtained 
from the Housing Office. 

STUDENT HEALTH SERVICES 

The purpose of the Student Health Center is to help keep the student in class by 
providing high quality medical service early in the course of an illness, to provide 
a healthy and sanitary environment on campus in which to live and study, to 
stimulate better health awareness among the students, and to educate them to the 
high standards of good therapeutic and preventive care. 

The Student Health Center is in Room 580 of the Letters and Science Building 
and is open from 8:45 a.m. to 4:30 pjn. each weekday that classes are in session. 
No staff is available for night or weekend services, or off-campus calls. Special 
care and time are given to counseling of both emotional and physical problems. 
Physicians and nurses are continuously on duty during the day to care for 
emergencies and for the treatment of illnesses and injuries. 

Among the services presently offered are the following: 

1. Diagnosis and treatment of the usual medical and surgical problems. 

2. Physical examinations as required. 

3. Emergency care. 

4. Routine immunizations. 

5. Laboratory and X-ray facilities. 

6. Followup care as may be recommended by the student’s private physician 
within the scope of available facilities. 

7. Electrocardiography. 

8. Physical therapy treatment. 

9. Medical counseling. 

10. Psychiatric counseling and diagnosis. 

11. Specialists’ diagnostic services when directly referred by the Student Health 
Center. 

All fees for care in the Student Health Center, unless otherwise specifically stated, 
have been prepaid by the State of California and by the student’s registration fee. 
Only registered undergraduates and graduates are eligible for all or any of the 
health services offered. Emergency service is available to everyone on campus. 

Health, Accident, Hospital Insurance 

All students are urged to carry this type of insurance. An excellent policy at a 
low premium is available to all students through the Associated Students’ Business 
Office. 

All students living in college-sponsored housing, and foreign students, are re- 
quired to be covered by this policy. 

PLACEMENT SERVICES 

A centralized Placement Office is maintained with responsibilities for assMng 
students in finding both part-time and career employment. The college believes 
that it best serves both the student and employers only when its graduates have 
been placed in the professions for which they are prepared and trained. 

Part-time Placement 

Students wishing part-time jobs either on or off campus are eligible to receive 
the assistance of the office if they are taking seven units or more. New students 
niay receive service as soon as they have notice of their admission to the college. 
Secretarial skills are in great demand; but calls for schoolbus drivers, custodians. 


41 


Counseling and Testing Services 


teacher aids, draftsmen, waiters, clerks, youth and recreation leaders, sitters, gar- 
deners, etc., are received. If students must augment their resources while going to 
school they are encouraged to limit their work hours to approximately 10 per week. 

Business, Industry, and Goyernmenf Placement 

The Career Placement Interviewer assists graduating seniors and graduate students 
seeking career employment in business, industry, or public service through personal 
counseling in defining occupational preference, providing active job leads and 
making up resumes. 

In addition, the Placement Center makes arrangements for the on-campus recruit- 
ment program which brings the employers to the students. Also available through 
the center are applications for computerized job placement service operated by the 
College Placement Council. It is called GRAD (Graduate Resume Accumulation 
and Distribution) and it is for the C^SCF alumni seeking new professional oppor- 
tunities. 

Located in the Placement Center is the Career Library with an ever-expanding 
selection of resource materials on career opportunities. Federal, state, county, city 
and armed forces brochures and applications are also available for student access. 

The Placement Center serves as liaison office for the Peace Corps, the military 
and VISTA offering counseling and information brochures to any interested 
student. 

Educational Placement 

Students in the teacher education, pupil personnel services, supervision, or admin- 
istration curriculum of the college, who are in the final semester of a credential 
program, or who are in student teaching or directed field work, are eligible to 
register and receive the services of the Placement Center, chief of which is help in 
establishing a professional employment file. Such registrants are supplied informa- 
tion on openings and helped to establish their candidacies in the school districts 
and educational institutions. 

Students who are not in the student teaching program but who are completing 
their credential program at the (College are also eligible for service. This includes 
those about to receive their master’s degree, who plan to apply for a junior college 
credential. 

COUNSELING AND TESTING SERVICES 

Counseling 

Students who need assistance with such concerns as choosing an academic major 
or vocational goal, with study skills, or with personal problems affecting their aca- 
demic progress may obtain help through the Counseling C^enter. The staff of 
professionally trained counselors and psychologists has available a variety of re- 
sources including occupational information files, vocational and psychological tests, 
college and graduate school catalogs and directories of various lands to assist the 
student. 

The Counseling Center also maintains contact with agencies and professional 
persons in the community to whom students may be referred. 

Counseling services are available only to fully matriculated, registered students. 

Testing 

Collegewide testing programs are coordinated and administered by the Testing 
Center. These include college admissions tests and general tests for graduate school 
admission. In addition, the Testing Onter provides advice and consulting services 
to instructional departments in the development and administration of admission, 
selection, and placement tests for use by a specific department. 

The Testing Center also conducts ongoing research on the validity and appro- 
priateness of tests used in college testing programs. 


42 


Financial Aid 


Testing requirements for students seeking admission are listed in the admissions 
section of the catalog. Students seeking information about testing requirements for 
specific instructional programs should inquire in the appropriate instructional divi- 
sion or the Counseling and Testing Center. 

INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION 

Foreign Students 

Special services for foreign students are coordinated by the foreign student 
adviser. These services include aid with problems concerning visa status and em- 
ployment; orientation to academic procedures and requirements; advisement related 
to finances, social standards, and customs; and to resources and opportunities offered 
by campus and community. 

International Programs 

Information concerning study opportunities for American students in foreign 
universities is available in the Foreign Student Office. The foreign student adviser 
coordinates the selection of students applying for admission to one of the inter- 
national programs operated by the CaUfomia State Colleges in Colombia, France, 
Germany, Ghana, Greece, Israel, Italy, Japan, Lebanon, Netherlands, Peru, Portugal, 
Spain, Sweden, Taiwan, United Kingdom. 

(Also see International Programs on page 30,) 

FINANCIAL AID 

The Financial Aid Office provides personal guidance and assistance in financial 
matters to all students. Financial aid administers all scholarships, emergency loans, 
grants. National Defense Loans, and the work-study programs. 

Scholarships 

A limited number of scholarships are available for outstanding students. Qualified 
students should obtain scholarship applications from the Financial Aid Office, and 
return by April 15 for the fall semester and December 15 for the spring semester. 
Scholarship applications are evaluated by the College Scholarship Committee. 
Awards are based on scholastic record, financial need and personal qualifications. 
Some scholarships are limited to students majoring in specified disciplines. Depart- 
mental recommendations weight heavily in such cases. 

Scholarships offered by California State College, Fullerton are made possible by 
interested organizations, business firms and individuals. Recent contributors to the 
scholarship program include: 

California Congress of Parents and Teachers, Inc. 

CSCF Computer Center Scholarship Fund 

California State Employees* Association (CSCF Chapter) 

California State Firemen’s Association 

Delta Delta Delta East Orange County Alumnae Chapter 

Donna Cherry Memorial Scholarship 

Edward Mittleman Memorial Scholarship 

Fourth District, California Parents and Teachers Association 

Fullerton Rotary Qub 

Gamma Phi Beta Sorority (Orange County Alumnae) 

Kiwanis Club of Greater Fullerton 

Los Amigos Qub of Fullerton 

Lowell Joint Education Association Scholarship 

Mr. and Mrs. Rodney Coulson (President’s Award) 

Mu Phi Epsilon Scholarship Fund 

Orange (Dounty Engineering (Council Scholarship 


43 


Financial Aid 


Roberta King Maxwell Memorial Scholarship Fund 

Sadie Landon Memorial Music Scholarship Fund 

Sheryl Cummings Memorial Scholarship Fund 

Loans 

The generosity of organizations and individuals enables the college to offer short- 
term loans to students who meet unexpected financial difficulties of a temporary 
nature. Loans from these funds are made for various periods of time and to specified 
categories of students, according to college regulations and the wishes of the 
donors. The prime purpose of these loans is to meet educationally related expenses, 
and thus loans cannot be made for the purposes which are normally financed by 
private lending institutions. Application for a short-term loan may be made at any 
time during the school year. 

The following is a listing of the loan funds available during the 1970-71 school 
year: 

Altrusa Club of Fullerton Loan Fund 
Associated Students Foreign Student Loan Fund 
Betty Casault Memorial Loan Fund 
Brea Rotary Club Loan Fund 

California Retired Teachers Association (Laura Settle Fund) 

CSCF Faculty Women’s Club Loan Fund 

Gerald D. Hudson Memorial Loan Fund 

Gordon S. Fyfe Memorial Loan Fund 

James Merrick Memorial Loan Fund 

Juliann Ashford Memorial Loan Fund 

Kenneth G. Ryhal Memorial Loan Fund 

Laura E. Imhoff Memorial Loan Fund 

Marcella Fisk Memorial Loan Fund 

Michael R. Young Memorial Loan Fund 

Pan-Hellenic Qub of Northern Orange County Loan Fund 

Robert E. Edwards Memorial Loan Fund 

Rossmoor Women’s Club Loan Fund 

Rotary Club of Fullerton, Foreign Students Loan Fund 

Soroptimist International Qub of Fullerton Loan Fund 

Stan Chase Memorial Loan Fund 

Trust-Davis Memorial Loan Fund 

Wilma Doig Steen Memorial Loan Fund 

Zonta Club of Fullerton Loan Fund 

National Defense Student Loans 

California State College, Fullerton joins with the federal government and the 
State of California in making long-term, low-interest loans available to students 
under the National Defense Education Act. Details and applications are available 
at the Financial Aid Office. Deadlines for submissions of applications are December 
1 for the spring semester, April 1 for the summer sessions and June 1 for the 
fall semester. 

All unmarried applicants under age 25 are required to file a Parents’ Confidential 
Statement with the College Scholarship Service, Box 1025, Berkeley 94701, desig- 
nating California State College, Fullenon as one of the recipients. The Parents’ 
Confidential Statement assists the college to evaluate financial need, and, since it 
must be on hand before the loan application can be acted upon, early submission 
is advised. These forms can be obtained at most secondary schools or at the 
Financial Aid Office. 


44 


New Muccttional Horizons 


Federal Insured Loan Program 

The college cooperates with the Federal Government and private lending insti- 
tutions in making guaranteed loans available to full-time students. A loan recipient 
under this program must meet the following qualifications: 

a. have an adjusted family income of less than $15,000 per year 

b. be a full-time student 

c. be enrolled and in good standing at the college or accepted for enrollment. 

The interest on these loans is 7 percent per annum on the unpaid balance. The 

United States Office of Education will pay all interest while the student is en- 
rolled as a full-time student. Repayment ranges from 5 to 10 years following 
graduation, according to arrangements made with the lender. Applications and 
further information may be obtained from the Financial Aid Office. 

College Work-Study Program 

The college cooperates with the Federal Government in providing work-study 
jobs. Students who can establish “need eligibility” may work up to an average of 
15 hours a week during the school year and up to 40 hours in the summer. Under 
this program there are on-campus opportunities such as library and instructional 
aides, clerks, computer center aides, and laboratory and research assistants. Off- 
campus jobs in nonprofit community agencies include teacher aides, recreation 
leaders, office trainees, and administrative interns. Interested students should consult 
the Financial Aid Office for eligibility requirements. 

Educational Opportunity Grants 

Federal funds have been made available to the College to use in making grants 
to undergraduate students who display “exceptional financial need” and who would 
otherwise be unable to continue their education. These grants range from $200 to 
$1,000 per year and are non-repayable. These grants are always awarded in con- 
junction with other forms of aid, and thus a Parents* Confidential Statement is 
required. Deadlines are the same as for the National Defense Student Loans. 

Combined Intern-teaching and Master's Degree 

A National Science Foundation supported program in biology was started in 1967. 
This program permits a limited number of qualified biology teachers to attend 
CSCF a half-day, each day, for two academic school years, in order to complete 
the regular master’s degree in biology. These teachers receive their full salaries from 
their school districts. Concomitantly, an equal number of qualified graduate students 
also seeking a master’s degree in biology are provided with stipends which permit 
them to continue their own graduate work, replace the teacher during these half 
days (as intern teachers), and complete the Standard Teaching Credential with 
specialization in secondary school teaching. Additional coursework in science educa- 
tion is required through consultation with the Department of Science and Mathe- 
matics Education. 

NEW EDUCATIONAL HORIZONS 

New Educational Horizons is an innovative educational program concerned 
with the expansion of higher educational resources to meet the needs of all 
students. Through direct focus on the disadvantaged student, it hopes to attain 
pertinent information that can be disseminated to education in general to effectuate 
the development of a system that is democratic, flexible and capable of serving the 
pluralistic society in which it exists. 


45 



ADMISSION AND 
REGISTRATION 


ADMISSION TO THE COLLEGE 

REGISTRATION 
ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 


CIMA 

KOrr 


T/iORA.IMaA 



ausuloa fuiT (yr VA^mmai-: 
a viiMaG a 


ADMISSION TO THE COLLEGE 


Requirements for admission to California State College, Fullerton are in accord- 
ance with Title 5, Chapter 5, Subchapter 2 of the California Administrative Code 
as amended by the Board of Trustees of the California State Colleges on January 
21, 1965. A prospective applicant who is unsure of his status under these require- 
ments is encouraged to consult with a school or college counselor or the college 
admission office. 


ADMISSION AS A FRESHMAN 

An applicant who has had no college work will be considered for admission 
under one of the following provisions. Elxcept as noted, submission of the results 
of the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) or the American College Test (ACTT) is 
required. 


California High School Graduates and Residents 
An applicant who is a graduate of a California high school or a legal resident 
for tuition purposes must have a grade point average and total score on the SAT 
or composite score on the ACT which provides an eligibility index placing 
him among the upper one-third of California high school graduates. For 1970-71 
the minimum eligibility index is 3,072 using the SAT (741 with the ACT). It is 
computed by multiplying the grade point average by 800 and adding the result 
of the total SAT score, or by multiplying the grade point average by 200 and 
adding the result to 10 times the composite ACT score. The grade point average 
is based upon the last three years and does not include physical education or 
military science. The table below does not cover every case, but gives several 
examples of the test score needed with a given grade point average to be eligible 
for admission. 


Grade point average 

3.21 and above 
2.80 
2.40 
2.00 

1.99 and below 


SAT/ ACT needed 


Eligible with any score 
832/19 
1152/27 
1472/35 
Not eligible 


Nonresidents Graduating From High Schools in Other States or Possessions 
An applicant who is a nonresident for tuition purposes and who is a graduate 
of a high school in another state or a U.S. possession must have an ^eligibility 
index which would place him among the upper one-sixth of California high school 
graduates. For 1970-71, the minimum required eligibility index is 3,402 using the 
SAT (826 with the ACJT) and is calculated as in the previous section. 


Graduates of High Schools in a Foreign Country 
A graduate of a foreign high school must have preparation equivalent to that 
required of eligible California high school graduates. The college will carefully 
review the previous record of all such applicants and only those with promise 
of academic success equivalent to that of eligible California high school graduates 
will be admitted. Such applicants are not required to take either the SAT or the 
ACT tests. Ordinarily, the college does not accept foreign student applicants 
directly from foreign countries. 


49 


Admission of Undergraduate Transfers 

Non-high-school Graduates 

An applicant who is over 21 years of age, but has not graduated from high 
school, will be considered for admission only when his preparation in all other 
ways is such that the college believes his promise of academic success is equivalent 
to that of eligible California high school graduates. 

High School Students 

A student enrolled in high school as a senior will be considered for enrollment 
in certain special programs if he is recommended by his principal and his prepara- 
tion and ability are such that in the judgment of the college, the probability 
of his academic success is equivalent to that required of eligible California high 
school graduates. Such admission is only for a given program and does not 
constitute the right to continued enrollment. 

Other Applicants 

An applicant not admissible under one of the above provisions should enroll in 
a community college or other appropriate institution. Only under the most unusual 
circumstances will such applicants be permitted to enroll in the college. Permis- 
sion is granted only by special action. 

Recommended Preparation 

Overall excellence of performance in high school subjects and evidence of 
academic potential provide the best bases for predicting success at California State 
College, Fullerton. While no course pattern is required, the applicant to be 
prepared properly to undertake a full program of studies and particularly to 
pursue the required program in general education, is strongly encouraged to 
include the following subjects in his preparation for college work at Fullerton: 
college preparatory English; foreign language; college preparatory mathematics; 
college preparatory laboratory science; college preparatory history or social science, 
or both; and study in speech, music, art, and other subjects contributing to a 
general academic background. 


ADMISSION OF UNDERGRADUATE TRANSFERS 

An applicant who meets the requirements for admission with freshman standing 
and who has earned credit in one or more accredited colleges or universities may 
be admitted if he has a grade-point average of 2.0 (grade C on a five-point scale) 
or better in the total program attempted at such colleges or universities and is in 
good standing at the last degree-granting college or university attended. 

An applicant who does not meet the requirements for admission with freshman 
standing must as a condition for admission have earned 60 or more units of college 
credit with a grade-point average of 2.0 (grade C on a five-point scale) or better, 
if a California resident, in the total program attempted. Nonresidents of California 
must have earned 60 or more units with a grade-point average of 2.4 or better in 
the total program attempted. All applicants must be in good standing at the last 
college or university attended. 

An applicant who does not meet the requirements set forth above may be found 
eligible for admission on probation with advanced undergraduate standing only 
under extraordinary circumstances if, in the opinion of the proper college author- 
ities, he is likely to succeed in an academic program. Such admission is granted 
only by special action. 


50 


Admission of Foreign Students 


ADMISSION OF GRADUATE STUDENTS 

Unclassified Graduate Status 

An applicant who has completed a four-year college course and holds an 
acceptable baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution, or who has 
completed equivalent academic preparation as determined by the college, will be 
admitted as an unclassified graduate student. Such admission does not constitute 
acceptance to graduate degree curricula. 

Classified Graduate Status 

A student admitted to the college in unclassified graduate status may be con- 
sidered for admission to a graduate degree program as a classified student. The 
applicant must satisfactorily meet the professional, personal, scholastic, and other 
standards for graduate study, including qualifying examinations. Only those appli- 
cants who show promise of success and fimess will be admitted to graduate 
curricula, and only those who continue to demonstrate a satisfactory level of 
scholastic competence and fitness shall be eligible to continue in such curricula. 
Students whose performance in graduate curricula is judged to be unsatisfactory 
may be required to withdraw from all graduate curricula offered by the college. 
See the Graduate Bulletin as well as the description of graduate programs in this 
catalog for further information about requirements and procedures. 

ADMISSION OF FOREIGN STUDENTS 

At the present, the college usually does not accept foreign student applicants 
directly from foreign countries, with certain very rare exceptions. Only two cate- 
gories of foreign students will normally be accepted: 

(1) Those who have completed a two-year transfer program in a junior college 
in the United States with a good academic record. 

(2) Those who have completed a bachelor’s degree in an accredited college in 
the United States and wish to enroll as graduate students. 

Application procedures are the same as for other students, except that foreign 
language transcripts must be accompanied by certified English translations. 

THE SUMMER SESSION STUDENT 

Although the quality of the program and most of the course offerings are the 
same as in the regular session, the college does not require an advance applicadon 
or transcripts from students registering for credit courses in the summer se^ion. 
However, students must be high school graduates and are expected to have satisfied 
the prerequisites for the courses in which they register; in addition, students are 
expected to file a request to register in the summer session. Admission to summer 
session does not grant admission to the regular session. 

COMMON ADMISSION AND INTRASYSTEM TRANSFER 

New Students 

An applicant admitted to a California State College under regular ^ admission 
criteria (as a first-time freshman, graduate of a high school in the United States 
or its possessions; undergraduate transfer; unclassified graduate student) is eligible 
for admission to another State College in the same term. An applicant to a Cali- 
fornia State College may request the transfer of his admission file to another state 
college without payment of an additional application fee. However, admission to 
any state college is dependent on the fulfillment of application procedures, appli- 
cation deadlines, and space and program availability. 


51 


Readmisslon of Foreign Students 


Intrasystem Transfer 

A student at a California State College who is eligible to continue at that college 
is eligible to enroll at any other state college, provided he is in good standing and 
has a “C’ average at the first institution, and applies for intrasystem transfer at 
least 10 days prior to the close of admission at the second state college. However, 
transfer to another state college is subject to space and program availability. Appli- 
cation for intrasystem transfer may be made to the Office of Admissions and 
Records at either state college. 

A student on probation at the first state college may apply for intrasystem trans- 
fer as above. However, admission to the second state college will be subject to the 
policies and procedures governing probationary admission at the second state 
college. 


READMISSION OF FORMER STUDENTS 

A Student previously enrolled in the college, planning to return after an absence 
of one or more semesters, must file a new application for admission in accordance 
with procedures set forth below. The application fee is required if the student was 
not enrolled in either of the two semesters prior to the semester to which he is 
seeking admission or if he was enrolled in another institution during his absence 
from California State College, Fullerton. Unless a leave of absence was granted, 
catalog requirements at the time of readmission will apply. 

Former Students in Good Standing 

A student who left the coUege in good standing will be readmitted provided 
any academic work attempted elsewhere since the last attendance does not change 
his scholastic status. Transcripts of the record of any work attempted in the 
interim are required. 

Former Students Who Were on Probation 
A student on probation at the close of his last enrollment will be readmitted 
on probation provided he is otherwise eligible. The student must furnish tran- 
scripts of any college work taken during his absence. 

Former Students Who Were Disqualified 
The readmission of a previously disqualified student is by special action only. 
Ordinarily the college will consider an application for reinstatement only after 
the student has remained absent for a minimum of one semester following dis- 
qualification and has fullfilled all recommended conditions. In every instance, 
readmission action is based on evidence, including transcripts of study completed 
elsewhere subsequent to disqualification, which in the judgement of the college war- 
rants such action. If readmitted, the student is placed on scholastic probation. 


PROCEDURES FOR ADMISSION 

All prospective students, whether for part-time or full-time programs of study 
in day or evening classes, must file an application for admission and other required 
documents within the announced filing period. Applicants must be formally ad- 
mitted to the college to enroll in classes. Because of enrollment limitations prospec- 
tive students are advised to file applications for admission early in the filing period. 
Applications will be closed in any enrollment category when enrollment limita- 
tions are reached. 


52 


Procedures for Admission 


How to apply: 

1. Submit a completed application for admission, including the statement of resi- 
dence, within the announced filing period accompanied by the required appli- 
cation fee. 

2. Request required transcripts of record of all previous scholastic work from 
each school or college attended. The transcripts must be sent by the issuing 
institution directly to 

OflSce of Admissions and Records 

California State College, Fullerton 

800 North State College Boulevard 

Fullerton, California 92631. 

The transcripts required are 
— for UTidergraduates — 

(a) the high school transcript, and 

(b) a transcript from each college or university attended. Undergraduate 
applicants for a teaching credential must submit two copies of the 
transcript from each college or university attended; 

— for graduates — 

(a) applicants for unclassified graduate standing with no degree or cre- 
dential objective must submit a transcript from the college or univer- 
sity where the baccalaureate was earned. 

(b) applicants for a master’s degree or teaching credential, or both, must 
submit two copies of the transcript from each college or university 
attended. 

All students are advised that they should also have a complete set of college 
transcripts for their personal use at all times of advisement. 

All transcripts must be received directly from the issuing institution to be 
considered official and cannot be returned to the student. Foreign language 
transcripts must be accompanied by certified English translations. 

3. If required, submit the scores from either the Scholastic Aptitude Test or 
the American College Test. Scores are required for all undergradute appli- 
cants with fewer than 60 completed semester units of study (90 quarter 
units). Applicants to classified graduate curricula must submit the scores of 
any qualifying examinations required in their prospective program of study. 

Statement of Residence 

All applicants for admission to the College must file a Statement of Residence with 
their application. Students in continuous attendance during successive semesters are 
not required to complete this form after the initial filing unless there has been a 
change in their status. Students are held responsible for reporting any change in 
residence status to the Office of Admissions and Records. Any interruption in 
attendance requires a new Statement of Residence before re-entrance. 

The determination of residence status is governed by laws found in the Govern- 
ment Code and the Education Code, and by court cases interpreting these statutes. 
For admission and tuition purposes “a resident student” means any person who has 
been a bona fide resident of the State of Califorma for more than one year im- 
mediately preceding the opening of the semester. The residence determination date 
is established by the Board of Trustees. 

Normally, the legal residence of an unmarried minor is that of his parents. Elxcep- 
tions to the rules on residency determination, or waivers of nonresident tuition, 
apply under certain conditions for exchange students, a child or spouse of an aca- 
demic or administrative employee of the California State Colleges, a minor child 
of an active member of the Armed Forces stationed in California, and full-time 


53 


Procedures for Admission 

teachers in the public schools holding a valid credential and pursuing instruction 
for required certification qualification for their current position. 

Admission to Credential Programs 

Admission to the college as a student does not constitute admission to the teaching 
credential program. Students who plan to work toward teaching credentials must 
apply to the School of Education following procedures available from the School 
of Education. 

Cancellation of Admission 

A student who is admitted to the college for a given semester but who does not 
register in the specified semester will have his admission canceled. The student must 
file a new application form when he again seeks admission and must follow the 
complete application procedure and meet the then current admission requirements. 

Honors at Entrance 

Honors at entrance are awarded to both freshmen and transfer students who 
have demonstrated outstanding achievement in past academic work. For first-time 
freshmen with no previous college units earned, a grade-point average of 3.5 on a 
5-point scale must be earned in the coursework considered for admission to the 
college. Students who have completed fewer than 60 college semester units of credit 
must meet the grade-point average criteria for first-time freshmen and must also 
have earned a 3.5 grade-point average on all this past college work attempted. 
Students who have completed 60 or more semester college units are eligible if a 
grade-point average of 3.5 is earned in all college work completed. 

Undergraduate Entrance Testing Requirements 
All undergraduate students, who have completed fewer than 60 semester or 90 
quarter units of college work, are required to submit scores from either one of 
two national testing programs before eligibility for admission to the college can be 
determined. This requirement does not affect undergraduate students who have 
previously attended California State College, Fullerton and who have submitted 
ACT or SAT scores at the time of their first admission. 

Tests will be administered at established test centers. Dates that tests are given 
and location of established test centers may be obtained from high school ^d 
junior college counseling offices, the Testing Ofiice at this college or by writing 
to the testing services. The addresses of the testing services are: 

American College Testing Program, P.O. Box 414, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 
College l^trance Examination Board, Box 1025, Berkeley 94701 

To take one of these tests: 

1. Obtain a registration form and a Student Information Bulletin from your high 
school or junior college counselor, from one of the addresses above, or from 
the College Testing Center. Select a test center near your home from the list 
printed in the Bulletin. 

2. Send the completed registration form and the appropriate test fee to the 
proper address. Do not send to the Fullerton campus. 

3. Have your ACT or SAT scores reported to the Testing Center, California 
State College, Fullenon. These scores should be received before the deadline 
for application. Use the appropriate code number for score reports. 

If you have already taken either the ACT or SAT send $1 to the appropriate 
testing agency and request that your scores be reported to the Testing Center. 
Use appropriate code number when requesting such reports, and provide complete 
information concerning testing date, test center, name and address changes, etc. 
These test scores when included on high school or college transcripts are not 
acceptable. 


54 


Evaluations 


Health Requirements for Admission 

Undergraduate and graduate students must, upon admission, submit completed 
health history and physical examination forms. In addition, evidence of a negative 
chest X-ray taken within 12 months before their registration must be presented. 
A tuberculin skin test may be obtained in lieu of an X-ray. Evidence of a smallpox 
vaccination within the past 10 years is also required. 

The following laboratory services may be completed at the Student Health 
Center for a charge of $1: urinalysis, hemotocrit, tuberculin skin test and smallpox 
vaccination. 

All health requirements must be satisfactorily completed before the student 
will be allowed to complete registration. It is urged that the health clearance be 
obtained before the date of registration as this will conserve the student’s registra- 
tion time. 


EVALUATIONS 

Evaluation of Transfer Credits 

The Office of Admissions will evaluate previous college work in terms of its 
relationship to the requirements of California State College, Fullerton. All degree 
candidates will be issued a credit summary during the first semester of attendance 
which serves as a basis for determining specific remaining requirements for the 
student’s specific objectives. 

Once issued to a student, the evaluation remains valid as long as the student en- 
rolls at the date specified, pursues the objective specified, and remains in con- 
tinuous attendance. The student will not be held to additional graduation re- 
quirements unless such requirements become mandatoty as a result of changes in 
the California Administrative Code or the California Education Code. If the 
student does not remain in continuous attendance and has not applied for and been 
granted a formal leave of absence, the evaluation issued upon readmission wiU 
specify the remaining requirements for the student’s specific objectives. 

In view of the foregoing regulations, the student should notify the Office^ of 
Admissions immediately if he changes the objective specified in his evaluation. 
While the evaluation for a student remains valid, the student is held responsible 
for complying with all changes in regulations and procedures which may appear 
in subsequent catalogs. 

Acceptance of Credit 

Credit for work completed at accredited institutions will be accepted toward 
the satisfaction of degree and credential requirements at the college within limi- 
tations of residence requirements, junior college transfer maximums, and course 
applicability. 

General Policy 

Transfer credit is not limited to those courses which precisely parallel the 
courses offered at the college. Credit is normally granted for all courses completed 
at other accredited institutions which reasonably correspond to one of the various 
curricula described in this catalog. Courses which do not appear to correspond 
with offerings at the college are ordinarily not granted transfer credit. Courses 
in vocational or shop-type courses, and remedial courses are examples of courses 
not accepted for transfer credit. Students who have completed work at professional 
schools in the field of art or music or similar fields may expect a reduction in credit 
if the work completed carries a credit value in excess of that normally allowed for 
corresponding courses or areas at the college. 


55 


ivaluafions 

Transfer of Credit From a Junior College 
Upper division credit is not allowed for courses taken in a junior college. Cre- 
dential credit is not allowed for courses in professional education taken in a junior 
college. This does not invalidate credit for preprofessional courses taken at a 
junior college, such as introduction to education, art or design, arithmetic, or music 
for classroom teachers. After a student has completed 70 units of college credit, 
whether at a junior college or a four-year institution, or at both, no further 
junior college units will be accepted for unit credit. 

Credit for Military Service 

Students who have been in active military service for at least a year may be 
granted six units of undergraduate credit. Courses taken in service schools may be 
given credit on the basis of an evaluation which determines that they are of 
college level. Any credit for military experience will be given only upon request. 
Records verifying such experience must be filed with the Office of Admissions. 

Credit for Extension and Correspondence Courses 
The maximum amount of credit through correspondence and extension courses 
which may be allowed toward the bachelor’s degree is 24 units, of which not more 
than 12 may be transferred from another college or university. 

Credit by Advanced Placement 

Students who have successfully completed courses in the advanced placement 
program (defined as receiving a score of 3, 4 or 5) shall be granted credit toward 
graduation, advanced placement in the college’s sequence courses, and credit for 
curriculum requirements. 

Credit by Examination 

Students may be granted credit for a course toward graduation and to meet 
curriculum requirements by the satisfactory completion of a challenge examina- 
tion in that course requirement. The examinations are to be comprehensive and 
administered by the department in which the course is offered. Well in advance 
of the challenge examination the student will secure written approval of his major 
adviser and the chairman of the department in which the course is offered. Upon 
the successful completion of the examination, the notation on the permanent 
record of the student will be made as “CR” for the course. “CR” is to indicate 
credit for the course with a passing grade. Upon failure of the examination, the 
notation on the permanent record of the student will be made as “No CR” for 
the course. Credit by examination may not be used to fulfill the minimum resi- 
dence requirements. The challenge examination for any course may be attempted 
only once. A maximum of 30 credits can be earned by challenge examination^ 
including those achieved by advanced placement. 

College Level Examination Program 

The college will consider examination results from the College Level Examination 
Program of the College Entrance Examination Board for placement and credit. 
Study is currently underway to establish specific policy on placement and credit 
in degree curricula for those who complete one or more examinations in the College 
Level Examination Program. Further information about this program may be ob- 
tained from the Office of Relations with Schools. 


56 


REGISTRATION 


Orientation 

Various opportunities are provided for new students to obtain information relat- 
ing to academic programs, student services and activities, and other aspects of col- 
lege life. Information about specific programs will be found in the Class Schedtde. 

Registration 

Registration is the final step in enrollment. When a student has been admitted by 
the Office of Admissions, he should obtain a Class Schedtde before the beginning 
of each term. The Class Schedtde contains details regarding courses offered and 
the registration schedule. Students consult with their advisers during registration. 

At registration, every student is required to file a program card with the Office 
of the Registrar. The filing of a program card by the student and its acceptance 
by the college obligates the student to perform the designated work to the best 
of his ability. All undergraduates are urged to declare a major at the earliest 
practicable time and not later than at the time they have completed 60 units of col- 
lege work. Registration is not official until fees have been paid, and no student is 
allowed to attend classes until all steps in the registration process have been com- 
pleted. 

Late Registration 

The last day to register late each semester will be announced in the Class 
Schedule. Late registrants will find themselves handicapped in arranging their pro- 
grams and must pay a $5 late registration fee in addition to regular fees. 

Change of Program 

Each student is responsible for the program of courses he selects and lists when 
he registers. Changes may not be made thereafter without the filing of a change 
of program form in the Office of the Registrar. All applications for courses 
dropped or added cost a $1 change of program fee. No classes may be dropped 
during the last four weeks of instruction, although complete withdrawal from col- 
lege is still possible. 

Concurrent Enrollment 

A student enrolled at the college may enroll concurrently for additional courses 
at another institution only with advance written approval from the student’s aca- 
demic adviser on official forms filed in the Office of the Reg^istrar. Permission 
will not be granted when the study load in the proposed combined program 
exceeds the imits authorized at this college. 

Auditors 

A properly qualified student may enroll in classes as an auditor. The student 
niust meet the regular college admission requirements and must pay the same fees 
as other students. An auditor may not change his registration to obtain credit 
after the last date to add courses to the study list. An auditor is not permitted 
to take examinations in the course. 


VETERANS 

California State College, Fullerton is approved by the Bureau of Readjustment 
Education, State Department of Education, to offer programs to veterans seeking 
benefits under state and federal legislation. All students seeking veterans benefits 
niust have a degree or credential objective. 


57 


Selective Service 


Applications for benefits should be filed well in advance of the semester in which 
the veteran plans to use these benefits in order to have the authorization at the 
time of registration. 


SELECTIVE SERVICE 

Male students requiring certification of student status for selective service purposes 
may request the Office of Admissions and Records to submit SSS Forms 103, 109, 
or 109A, to their local boards. Undergraduate students shall normally be enrolled 
for 12 units a semester to be considered full time for this purpose. Graduate stu- 
dents enrolled for nine units of study may be considered full time provided at 
least three units are 500-level courses. 

All students are advised that by enrolling each consecutive term at the mini- 
mal level to qualify for full-time certification they may not achieve the degree 
and credential programs within the time limit allowed by the Selective Service 
System. 


RESERVE OFFICERS' TRAINING CORPS 

California State College, Fullerton does not have a Reserve Officers’ Training 
Corps program. However, a two-year program is available to eligible male students 
through cooperation with the University of Southern California where an Air 
Force ROTC program is conducted. For complete information, write the Professor 
of Aerospace Studies, University of Southern California, Los Angeles 90007. 


FEES AND EXPENSES 


Application fee (nonrefundable) $20.00 

Registration Fees 

Regular students (more than 6 units) 

Materials and service fee 54.00 

Associated Students fee 10.00 

College Union fee 8.00 

Facilities fee 3.00 


Total per semester $75.00 

Limited students (1-6 units) 

Materials and service fee 54.00 

Associated Students fee 5.00 

College Union fee 4.00 

Facilities fee - 3.00 


Total per semester... 

Music studio lesson fee 

Per lesson 

Summer Session fees 

Per unit or fraction of unit 

Associated Students fee 

College Union fee 

Extension fees 

Per unit or fraction of unit 


$66.00 


$1.00 to $10.00 


24.00 

2.00 

4.00 


._.....$20 to $40 


58 


Fees and Expenses 


Other Fees or Charges 

Nonresident tuition fee (in addition to fees required of resident students, 


except for enrollment in extension or summer session) 

15 units or more per semester $550.00 

Less than 15 units, per unit or fraction of unit 37.00 

Nonresident foreign students (in addition to fees required of resident 
students) 

15 units or more per semester 300.00 

Less than 15 units, per unit or fraction of unit 20.00 

Late registration fee (in addition to other fees listed above) 5.00 

Check returned from bank for any cause 2.00 

Change of program fee 1.00 

Transcript fee (no charge for first copy) 1.00 

Failure to meet administrative required appointment or time limit 2.00 


Auditors pay the same fees as others 

Fees are subject to change by the Trustees of the Calif omia State Colleges 

Refund of fees 

Upon withdrawal from college, the materials and service fee may be refunded 
if written application for refund, on forms provided by the college, is submitted 
to the Registrar not later than 14 days following the day of the term that instruction 
begins; provided that the amount of $10 shall be retained to cover the cost of 
registration. Late registration fees, change of program fees and application fees are 
not refundable. 

The entire fee may be refunded if a student is unable to continue his registration 
because of a college regulation or because of compulsory military service. Applica- 
tion for refund under such circumstances may be made at any time before the 
date when the student receives any academic credit for the courses for which he 
is registered. 

The difference between the applicable materials and service fee, less $5, may be 
refunded if the unit load of the student is reduced to a lower materials and service 
fee category within the 14 days following the day of the term that instruction 
begins. 

Parking fees 

Semester pass (nonreserved spaces) : 


Regular student . 

T.irn^t^d (^“^ ^’nlts) 

$13.00 

6.00 

Coin nperf*ted adniissinn 

.25 

Summer session, each six-week period 

5.00 


Typical Student Expenses 

Typical school year budgets for California residents living in the college resi- 
dence hall will be approximately $2,010. Budgets for students living at home or 
making other housing arrangements will vary widely. It is estimated that, including 
an $800 yearly allowance for room and board, the cost will approximate $1,600. 
Nonresident students must also allow for nonresident tuition. 


59 


ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 


All undergraduate students working toward a degree or credential are assigned 
an adviser in the major field. Those seeking a credential will also be assigned a 
professional adviser in the School of Education. 

Graduate students in all instructional areas except education will be assigned a 
major adviser. In education, all will have a professional adviser. Those students 
seeking a credential for teaching secondary schools will be assigned both a pro- 
fessional adviser and a major adviser. 

California State College, Fullerton believes its students have the capability to 
plan their schedules and to make a selection among available sections of a course. 
Such matters are the proper responsibility of the student and not of his adviser. 

Advisers are assigned by department chairmen. The adviser is basically a resource 
person who will help the student plan his academic program so that he meets the 
requirements of the major or credential objective in the most desirable manner. 
While the adviser can provide valuable information and suggestions to the student, 
the ultimate responsibility for the program the student plans and the courses he 
chooses lies with the student himself. 


60 


REGULATIONS 


GENERAL REGULATIONS 
GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS FOR 

BACHELOR’S DEGREE 
THE PROGRAM OF MASTER’S DEGREES 



mn 'iioiTAUOASO- 

■ :-;"^:«:>ir8AM UO MAiK>OH'I MIT' 


GENERAL REGULATIONS 


ENROLLMENT DEFINITIONS AND REGULATIONS 

Unit of Credit 

Each college semester unit represents three hours of college work per week for 
one semester. Courses are of three types: 

(1) Lecture— one hour in class plus two hours of study. 

(2) Activity — two hours of class plus one hour of study. 

0) Laboratory — three hours in class. 

Some courses may combine two or more of these types. 

Classification in College 

Undergraduate students who have completed 0-29 K semester units of work are 
classified as freshmen, 30-59 semester units as sophomores, 60-89 semester units 
as juniors, and 90 or more as seniors. 

Study List Limits 

A student is normally permitted to enroll in a maximum of 16 units each semester 
(engineering students are excepted), with 12 units considered the rmnvrnum full- 
time load. However, upon written approval of his adviser, the student may carry 
additional units. The foregoing limits apply to undergraduate students attending 
college on a full-time basis. Students with outside responsibilities are strongly 
advised to reduce their program of study. The minimum full-time program of 
study for graduate students as defined in the “Graduate Policies and Procedures’* 
section of this catalog. 

Undergraduate Students Taking Graduate Level Courses 
Graduate level (500) courses are organized primarily for graduate students. 
Undergraduate students may be permitted to enroll in a graduate level (500) 
course if: 

(a) They are within 9 units of completion of graduation requirements, or 

(b) They are exceptionally qualified seniors whose undergraduate work in the 
related field or fields has been of 3.5 grade-point average or better, and 
whose cumulative overall grade-point average is at least 3.25. 

Such cases shall require specific approval by the chairman of the department in 
which the course is offered and by the chairman of the student’s major department. 

Graduate level (500) courses taken under (a) above may be applied to a gradu- 
ate program. 

Graduate level (500) courses taken under (b) above may be applied to the under- 
graduate program only. 


Grading System 
Satisfactory grade 


A 

B 

C 

Cr or P 


GRADING PRACTICES 


Grade-point value 
4 
3 

2 ' 

. None assigned 


63 


Grading Practices 


Unsatisfactory grade Grade-point value 

NR (No Report) 0 

Special grade 

E (Incomplete) 0 

AU (Auditor) (no credit toward degree or credential) _ None assigned 

W (Passing withdrawal) None assigned 

NP or NC (not passed — no credit) None assigned 


With the exception of the grades of E, AU, W, P, NP, and Cr, all units 
attempted are computed in the student's grade-point average. 

Incomplete Work 

A grade of E may be given only when, in the opinion of the instructor, a stu- 
dent cannot complete a course during the semester of enrollment for reasons be- 
yond his control. Such reasons are assumed to include: illness of the student, or 
of members of his immediate family, extraordinary financial problems, loss of out- 
side position, and other such exigencies. In assigning a grade of E, the instructor 
will file with his department a statement of the specific requirements for comple- 
tion of coursework. Such requirements will not include or necessitate retal^g 
the course. This statement will also include a provisional grade indicating the 
quality of work completed at that time, and the instructor’s designation of the time 
limit allowed for completion of course requirements. Upon later completion of the 
course requirements, or upon expiration of the time limits for completion of course 
requirements, the instructor shall initiate a change to a grade of A, B, C, D, P, NP, 
or F. Instructional departments will determine procedures for completion of course 
requirements and assigning grades for such completed course work, in those spe- 
cial circumstances where the instructor is no longer available. 

Pass/No Pass 

Each student shall be permitted to select a maximum of one course, including 
its concomitant laboratory, in subjects outside of the major requirements in each 
term on a pass/no pass basis, not counting courses normally taught on a pass/no 
pass basis. For purposes of pass/no pass, the phrase “major requirements” can be 
taken to include core plus concentration (or option) requirements in departments 
using such terms and professional course requirements in teacher education cur- 
ricula. 

The student must declare his intention to take the course on a pass/no pass basis 
when he registers. Under no circumstances will he be permitted to change his 
declaration after the first week of classes in any given semester. Any student 
attempting a course on a pass/no pass basis must meet the prerequisites for that 
course. 

The policy of pass/no pass applies to undergraduate students, nonobjective grad- 
uate students, and to classified graduate students for courses not included in the 
approved study plan. 

Grade Reports to Students 

A repon of the final grades assigned in classes is sent to each student at the end 
of each semester. 

Student Writing 

Students will be required to demonstrate, in all classes where written expression 
is appropriate, their ability to write clearly and correctly about the materials of 
the course. Ability of a student to demonstrate writing proficiency shall be used 
as a part of the final grade determination in any course. 


64 


Transcripts 


Examinations 

Final examinations are required in all courses and are given at times scheduled 
by the college. No examination may be scheduled for a class at another time unless 
approved by the dean of the school. No makeup final examination will be given 
except for reason of illness or other verified emergencies. 

Grade-Point Averages; Repetition of Courses 

Grade-point averages are calculated by dividing grade points earned by units 
attempted. Work attempted at all institutions, including California State College, 
Fullerton, is included in all-college calculations. Work attempted at other insti- 
tutions may not be included in CSCF-only averages. 

When any course is repeated both grades are considered in computing grade- 
point averages. However, successful repetition of a course originally passed carries 
no additional unit credit towards a degree or credential. 

TRANSCRIPTS 

Upon request to the Office of the Registrar, each student will be provided with 
one official copy of his college record without charge. A charge of $1 will be made 
for each additional transcript requested by the student. No transcript will be 
supplied for college work taken in other institutions. 

CONTINUOUS RESIDENCY REGULATIONS 

Good Standing 

“Good standing” indicates that a student is eligible to continue or to return, and 
is free from financial obligation to the college and from disciplinary action. A 
student under academic or disciplinary disqualification is not eligible to receive a 
statement of “good standing” on transcripts issued by the college. 

Election of Regulations 

A student remaining in continuous attendance in regular sessions and continuing 
on the same curriculum in a state college may, for purposes of meeting graduadon 
requirements, elect to meet the graduadon requirements in effect either at the time 
of his entering the curriculum or at the time of his graduadon therefrom, except 
that subsdtudons for discondnued courses may be authorized or required by the 
proper college authoriries. 

Continuous Enrollment for Graduate Students 

A graduate student with a graduate degree objecdve is expected to maintain 
conrinuous enrollment in the college (summer sessions excluded) undl complerion 
of the degree. If a student pursuing an advanced degree finds it impossible to attend 
during a certain semester, and is not eligible for a leave of absence, as detailed 
elsewhere in this catalog, he may request permission to register in Graduate Studies 
700, a pass/no pass course with one unit of credit, which does not require class 
attendance. A student may not register in Graduate Studies 700 for a third con- 
secutive semester. 

A graduate student who fails to register has severed his connection with the 
college. 

Leave of Absence 

A student may petition for a leave of absence and if approved may upon his 
return continue under the catalog requirements that applied to his enrollment 
prior to the absence. Except in the case of required military service a leave of 
absence may be granted for a maximum of one year. Illness and compulsory 
military service are the only routinely approved reasons for a leave of absence. 


65 


Student Honors 

Policy on Grades for Withdrawal 

Students are obliged to notify the Office of the Registrar of changes in their 
programs involving dropped classes. Failure to file an official change may result 
in a penalty mark being recorded. Through the sixth week of instruction in the 
semester no record of enrollment will be made of dropped classes. After six weeks 
students are expected to complete all courses in which they are enrolled. However, 
for reasons of ill health or other unforeseen problems the student may drop a class, 
or classes, and receive a grade (W— withdrawal, or F — failure) by obtaining the 
signature of the professors involved and filing the change with the Office of the 
Registrar on the forms provided. 

Ordinarily, classes may not be dropped during the last four weeks of instruc- 
tion, although complete withdrawal from college is still possible. 

Complete Withdrawal From College 

Students who wish to withdraw from the college must complete a withdrawal- 
from-college card. See section on refund of fees for possible refunds. No student 
may withdraw after the date shown on the college calendar as the last day of 
instruction. Complete withdrawal from college is accomplished by following the 
procedures for dropping classes in addition to procedures for withdrawal. 

STUDENT HONORS 

Dean's List 

Academic achievement is recognized with the publication each semester of a list 
of students whose grade-point average for the previous term has been 3.5 or better. 
Students are notified in writing by the dean of students when they have earned 
this distinction. Eligibility is based on a minimum of 12 units of course work. 

Honors at Graduation 

Honors at graduation have been defined by the Faculty Council in three classi- 


fications: 

With honors GPA 3.5 

With high honors GPA 3.85 

With highest honors GPA 4.0 


PROBATION AND DISQUALIFICATION 

Academic Probation 

Academic probation serves to identify and to bring to the attention of appro- 
priate college authorities a student who is experiencing academic difficulties. 

A student shall be placed upon academic probation if either his cumulative grade- 
point average or his grade-point average at California State College, Fullerton 
falls below 2.0 (grade of C on five-point scale). The student shall be advised of 
probation status promptly and, except in unusual instances, before the end of the 
first week of instruction of the next consecutive enrollment period. 

A student shall be removed from the probation list and restored to clear standing 
when he earns a cumulative grade-point average of 2.0 (C) in all academic work 
attempted, and in all such work attempted at California State College, Fullerton. 

Academic Disqualification 

A student on academic probation shall be subject to academic disqualification if: 
1. As a lower division student (fewer than 60 semester hours of college work 
completed) he falls 15 or more grade points below a 2.0 (C) average on all 
college units attempted or in all units attempted at this college. 


66 


Right of Petition 


2. As a junior (60 to 89*/i semester hours of college work completed) he falls 
9 or more grade points below a 2.0 (C) average on all college units attempted 
or in all units attempted at this college. 

3. As a senior (90 or more semester hours of college work completed) he falls 
6 or more grade points below a 2.0 (C) average on all college units attempted 
or in all units attempted at this college. 

A graduate student (unclassified or classified) shall be disqualified if he falls 
below a 2.0 (C) average in all units attempted at this college as a graduate student. 

Student Conduct 

The college properly assumes that all students are in attendance to secure a sound 
education and that they will conduct themselves as mature citizens of the campus 
community. Compliance with all regulations of the college is therefore expected. 
If, however, on any occasion a student or an organization is alleged to have com- 
promised accepted college policies or standards^ appropriate judiciary procedures 
shall be initiated through the established college jtidicial process. Every effort will 
be made to encourage and support the development of self-discipline and control 
by students and student organizations. The dean of students, aided by all members 
of the faculty and advised by the Student Aifairs Committee of the faculty, is 
responsible to the President of the college for the behavior of students in their 
relationships to the college. The President in turn is responsible to the Chancellor 
and the Trustees of the (California State (Colleges who themselves are governed 
by specihc laws of the State of California. 

RIGHT OF PETITION 

Students may petition for review of certain college academic regulations when 
unusual circumstances exist. In such instances, students are requested to file a 
petition on a form designated for this purpose in the Office of Admissions and 
Records. All petitions must first be reviewed and signed by the student’s adviser. 
Action will then be taken on the petition and the student will be notified of this 
decision. A copy of the action will also be placed in the student’s folder in the 
Office of the Registrar. 

Students also have the right to appeal certain disciplinary actions taken by 
appropriate college authorities. Regulations governing original hearings and appeal 
rights and procedures have been carefully detailed to provide maximum protection 
to both the individual charged and the college community. Information about the 
operation of the judicial system involving student discipline may be obtained in 
the Office of the Dean of Students. 


67 


GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS FOR 
THE BACHELOR'S DEGREE 


A student is eligible for graduation if he is in good standing and fulfills the 
following requirements: 

1, General Education 

To be eligible for a baccalaureate degree from California State College, Fuller- 
ton, the student shall have completed a minimum of 45 semester units of general 
education courses selected in accordance with the pattern designated below. Such 
courses may be lower division courses or upper division courses for which the 
student qualifies. 

/. Natural Sciences Minimum: nine units 

The student shall select a minimum of two courses, one from each of two 
fields which shall include the following: biological sciences, chemistry, earth 
sciences, physics and physical science. 

//. Social Sciences Minimum: nine units 

The student shall select a minimum of three courses, one from each of three 
fields which shall include the following: anthropology, economics, geography, 
history, political science, psychology and sociology. 

Note: Of the courses taken to meet the requirements in United States History, 
Constitution, state and local government (California Administrative Clode, Sec- 
tion 40404), a maximum of three units may be applied for credit in Section II. 

III, Arts — Humanities Minimum: nine units 

The student shall select a minimum of three courses, one from each of three 
fields which shall include the following: art, drama, language (English, intermedi- 
ate or advanced courses in foreign languages), literature (American, compara- 
tive, English, foreign), music, philosophy and speech. 

IV, Basic Subjects Minimum: nine units 

The student shall select a minimum of three courses, one from each of three 
fields which shall include the following: computer science, elementary foreign 
languages, health education, mathematics, oral communication, physical educa- 
tion, reading, statistics and writing. 

V, Electives 

The student may fulfill the remaining units required for general education by 
selecting any undergraduate course offered by the college for credit except 
courses which apply to the student’s major or credential program. 

Transfer students certified under provisions of California Administrative C!x)de, 
Title V, as having met the 40-unit minimum general education requirements will 
be required to complete five additional units in general education selected from 
two or more sections, I - V above. 

In addition to general education-breadth requirements California Administrative 
(Dode, Section 40404, states that for graduation the student is required “to demon- 
strate competence in the Constitution of the United States, and in American His- 
tory induing the study of American institutions and ideals, and of the principles 
of state and local government established under the Constitution of this State.” 
To meet this requirement, the student may select from the following alternatives: 


68 


Bachelor's Degree 


1) pass a comprehensive examination in these fields, 2) pass Political Science 100 
and a course in U. S. history, 3) pass a combination of Political Science 300 and 
History 170A or 170B. Coursework completed to satisfy Section 40404 may be 
applied in the social sciences area of general education to a maximum of three 
units. 

2. Units 

(a) Total units 

A minimum of 124 semester units is required for graduation with a bachelor 
of arts degree. The Bachelor of Science in Engineering requires a minimum 
of 136 semester units. 

(b) Upper division units 

Completion of a minimum of 40 units of upper division credit is required. 

(c) Resident units 

Completion of a minimum of 24 semester units in residence is required. At 
least one-half of these units must be completed among the last 20 semester 
units counted toward the degree. Extension credit, or credit by examination, 
may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence requirement. 

3. Scholarship 

(a) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units attempted, 
including those accepted by transfer from another institution. 

(b) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units in the major. 

(c) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units attempted at 
Calif omia State College, Fullerton. 

4. Major 

Completion of all requirements for a major as specified by appropriate college 
authority is required. 

5. Multiple Majors and Second Baccalaureate Degrees 
Second Majors 

Within the units required for the baccalaureate it is possible for a student to 
complete the requirements for more than one major within a degree program 
when the additional major is within the degree program of the first major. 
The student shall declare the additional major with the appropriate department 
not later than the beginning of the student’s final year of study. The com- 
pletion of additional majors will be noted at the time of graduation by appro- 
priate entries on the academic record and on the commencement program. 

Second Baccalaureate 

(a) First degree completed elsewhere, second at CSCF 

Students seeking a bachelor’s degree from CSCF after having received a 
baccalaureate from another institution may qualify for graduation with 
the approval and recommendation of the faculty upon completion of the 
following: 

(1) general education requirements 

(2) all requirements in the major field of study 

(3) residence and scholarship requirements 

(b) Two baccalaureates from CSCF 

A student completing a baccalaureate program at CSCF will have com- 
pleted the general education, residence, and scholarship requirements. With 
the approval and recommendation of the faculty, he may qualify for a 
second baccalaureate under the following circumstances: 


69 


Bachelor's Degree 


(1) The second field of study is offered in a different program (e.g. 
bachelor of arts to bachelor of science) 

(2) At least 24 units are earned in residence beyond the requirements 
for the first degree 

(3) All requirements of the major are fulfilled 

Units included in second baccalaureate programs may not apply to gradu- 
ate degrees or credential programs. 

6 . Minor 

Completion of a minor field is TWt required for the baccalaureate degree at this 
time. 

7 . Graduation Requirement Check 

A candidate for graduation should file an application for a graduation require- 
ment check in the Office of the Registrar during registration of the semes- 
ter prior to the semester in which he expects to graduate. No graduation 
requirement check should be requested unless and until the senior has completed 
100 semester hours and a substantial portion of his major requirements (including 
the current work in progress). If the candidate does not complete the require- 
ments in the semester indicated, be must request a second graduation check indi- 
cating the new date, 

8. Approval and Recommendation by the Faculty of the College 


70 


THE PROGRAM OF MASTER'S DEGREES 


Master’s tiegree programs offered at California State College, Fullerton are listed 
on page 81 and are described in the appropriate section of this catalog under 
“College Curricula.” Program descriptions and additional information are con- 
tained in the Graduate Bulletin^ copies of which are available in the Office of Ad- 
missions and the Graduate Office. 

Master’s degrees in other areas are under consideration and will be announced 
when approved. 

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 
MASTER'S DEGREE 

General requirements for the master’s degree are a minimum of 30 semester units 
of approved coursework completed with a 3.0 (B) minimum grade-point average. 
The coursework should normally be completed within five years (see “Courses 
Over Five Years Old”). For specific requirements of panicular programs, please 
see the descriptions elsewhere in this catalog. 

1. No less than 24 shall be completed in residence. 

2. No less than 15 shall be in graduate (5(X)-level) courses. 

3. No more than a total of six shall be in extension and/or transfer credit. 

4. No more than six shall be allowed for a thesis, if a thesis is required. 

5. Six shall be in related fields outside the department or concentration. 

Some type of final evaluation, near the end of the student’s work toward his 
master’s degree, is required. It may be a thesis, a project, a comprehensive exami- 
nation, or any combination of these. 

Each student’s program for a master’s degree (including his eligibility, classified 
status, candidacy, and award of the degree) must be approved by an adviser and/ 
or coordinator, school or department committee, and the Dean of Graduate Studies. 

STANDARDS FOR GRADUATE STUDY 

Graduate study deals with more complex ideas and demands more sophisticated 
techniques, searching analysis, and creative thinking than undergraduate study. The 
research required is extensive in both primary and secondary sources and the 
quality of writing expected is high. The student is advised to consider these 
factors when deciding upon the amount of coursework to be undertaken during 
any one semester. 

STEPS IN THE MASTER'S DEGREE PROGRAM 

( Also see "^Graduate Policies and Procedures*^) 

1. Admission to Graduate Standing: Unclassified 

2. Declaration of Objective 

3. Providing Transcripts 

4. Taking Appropriate Tests 

5. Informal Advisement 

6. Admission to Graduate Standing: Classified (admission to a program and 

development of a Study Plan) 

7. Advancement to Candidacy (after 12 units on Study Plan v/ith a B average) 

8. Successful Fulfillment of Study Plan Requirements 


71 


NiasfBr^s Degree 


9. Final Steps 

a. Request for check on completion of requirements (see following note) 
fa. Thesis or project approval and arrangements for binding, microfilming 
and publication of the abstract (if appropriate) 
c. Written and/or oral examination (if appropriate) 

(Note that master's degrees are awarded only in January and June with 
appropriate deadlines for each. Students completing requirements by the end 
of the first summer session and desiring certificates of completion must meet 
the same deadline for requesting a check on completion as June graduates.) 


GRADUATE POLICIES AND PROCEDURES 

The following are in addition to other policies and procedures applying to both 
undergraduates and graduates described elsewhere in this catalog and in the appro- 
priate class schedule. Students are advised also to consult the Graduate Bulletin. 

Since all policies and procedures are subject to change, by appropriate college 
authority, students should consult class schedules and other official announcements 
for possible revision of policies and procedures stated herein. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: Unclassified 
For admission with graduate standing as an unclassified graduate student, a stu- 
dent shall have completed a four-year college course and hold an acceptable bac- 
calaureate degree from an accredited institution; or shall have completed equivalent 
academic preparation as determined by the appropriate college authorities. 

Admission to a state college with graduate standing does not constitute admission 
to a graduate degree program. Scores on specified tests may be required and 
criteria for acceptability of undergraduate work are established by appropriate 
college authorities. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: Classified 
A student who has been admitted to a state college in unclassified graduate status 
may, upon application, be admitted to a graduate degree program of the college 
as a classified graduate student if he satisfactorily meets the professional, personal, 
scholastic, and other standards for graduate study, including qualifying examina- 
tions, as the appropriate college authorities may prescribe. Only those applicants 
who show promise of success and fitness will be admitted to graduate degree 
programs, and only those who continue to demonstrate a satisfactory level of 
scholastic competence and fimess, as determined by the appropriate college author- 
ities, shall be eligible to continue in such programs. Students whose performance 
is judged to be unsatisfactory by the authorities of the college may be required 
to withdraw from all graduate degree curricula offered by the college. 

Admission From Nonaccredited Schools 
A student who is a graduate of a nonaccredited school must apply for admission 
as an undergraduate to complete requirements for a bachelor’s degree from this 
institution. However, once admitted, a student in this category who gives evidence 
of unusual promise and superior background may petition the school or department 
concerned for reclassification as an unclassified graduate student, and if the petition 
is granted he may then proceed in the graduate program. 

Applicability of Catalog and Graduate Bulletin Regulations 
A student remaining in continuous attendance in regular sessions and continuing 
in the same curriculum may elect to meet the degree requirements in effect either 
at the time of his classification or at the time of the completion of degree require- 


72 


Master's Degree 

ments» except that substitutions for discontinued courses may be authorized or 
required by the proper college authorities. 

Continuous Enrollment 

A graduate student with a graduate degree objective is expected to maintain 
continuous enrollment in the college (summer sessions excluded) until award of the 
degree. If a student pursuing an advanced degree finds it impossible to attend dur- 
ing a certain semester, and is not eligible for a leave of absence, as detailed else- 
where in this catalog, he may request permission to register in Graduate Studies 
700, a pass/no pass course with one unit of credit, which does not require class 
attendance. Registration in Graduate Studies 700 will normally be restricted to 
graduate students who have been classified or who are in a prescribed prerequisite 
program for a specific degree. A student may not register in Graduate Studies 700 
for a third consecutive semester. 

A graduate student who fails to register has severed his connection with the 
college. 

Applicability of Courses Taken During Summer Sessions 

California State College, Fullerton normally conducts two six-week summer 
sessions. Appropriate courses taken during the summer sessions may be applied to 
a graduate degree program, providing the courses are approved in advance by the 
proper college authorities. Since the funding of graduate work during the summer 
months does not include the necessary advisement and supervision, appropriate 
advisers and committees may not be available. 

It should be noted that enrollment in a summer session does not constitute admis- 
sion to the college (matriculation) and that any student desiring a master’s degree 
must be admitted to a regular semester (fall or spring) and is expected to be 
enrolled continuously until award of the degree (see “(Continuous Elnrollment”). 
Under present circumstances, master’s degrees are not awarded in September, but 
only in January and June. 

Grade-Point Average Standards 

The required GPA for admission to a master’s degree prograni (classified status) 
varies with the department or school. (Consult school or department descriptions 
of programs elsewhere in this catalog and in the Graduate Bulletin. However, a 
student must have earned a 3.0 average in all postbaccalaureate coursework taken 
at this college plus such transfer courses as are applied to his study plan. Exception 
to this rule may be granted by a school or department in response to a student 
petition only if it is evident that courses whose grades are not to be computed 
in the GPA are inapplicable and inappropriate to the degree program. 

The 30 semester units of approved coursework required for the degree 
must be completed with a 3.0 (B) minimum grade-point average. If a student ap- 
proaches the completion of the degree requirements with less than a 3.0 average, 
he may request a change in his study plan to add no more than six units of course- 
work in order to achieve at least a 3.0 average (see “Changes in Study Plan,” as 
follows). If a student’s average at any time falls below such a level that it cannot 
be raised to a 3.0 within the prescribed limits of coursework, he has in effect 
withdrawn himself from his master’s program. 

Tests Required for Admission to Master's Degree Programs 

Many of the master’s degree programs require the student to take certain tests, 
usually some part of the Graduate Record Examination, before he can be con- 
sidered for classified status. See program descriptions in this catalog for the types 
of tests required. The GRE tests are nationally administered and are given only 
a few times a year on specified dates. A current list of these dates is available at 
the Office of (Counseling and Testing, school and department offices. The student 


73 


iMaster's Degree 

must make written application for the tests on a form available at the above offices 
which must be submitted by the applicable deadline. Since test results are measured 
against those of students who normally take the tests in their senior year and 
since they are required before the student can be admitted to a degree program 
(that is, become a classified student), the taking of the tests should not be deferred 

Limitation on Preclassification Coursework 

No more than nine units of postgraduate work taken at California State (College, 
Fullerton prior to classified status may be applied to a student’s master’s degree 
study plan. Any acceptable transfer work is excluded from the nine units per- 
mitted. Students who receive postgraduate credit for courses taken during their 
final semester as a senior may accumulate as many as 12 units. 

Inapplicable Courses 

Courses numbered 100 to 299 and in the 700 series cannot be applied toward a 
master’s degree. Courses numbered 300 to 399 do not give graduate credit unless 
included on an approved graduate study plan. 

Workshop, extension, and institute coursework offered either by this college or 
other colleges or universities is not acceptable on a master’s degree study plan, 
unless it is so stipulated by the appropriate committee of the school or department 
concerned at this college. Any such courses offered by other institutions, but 
which are not acceptable for their own graduate degrees, may not be accepted 
by this college for a graduate degree. 

Also see the sections following on “CR, S, P, or NP Grades,” and “Courses Over 
Five Years Old.” 

CR, S, P, or NP Grades 

Any course taken at this college with a grade of CR, S, P, NP, or similar, can- 
not be accepted on a master’s degree study plan. 

A course taken at another college or university with a grade of CR, P, S, or 
similar, cannot be accepted on a master’s degree study plan unless such a course 
with such a grade is acceptable at that college or university for a graduate degree. 

Declassification 

Graduate students in classified graduate status shall be declassified upon the 
recommendation of the school and/or department, reverting to unclassified status, 
when one or more of the following conditions exist: 

1. The student fails to maintain the grade-point average required in the master’s 

degree program. 

2. The student’s professional performance is judged to be unsatisfactory. 

3. The student fails to petition for an extension of the time limit. 

4. The student’s request for declassification is approved by his graduate com- 
mittee. 

Courses Over Five Years Old 

All coursework on the master’s degree study plan should normally be completed 
within five years, except that, upon petition to the Graduate Office, two additional 
years may be allowed. The college, at its option, may further extend the time for 
students who pass a comprehensive examination in the relevant course. Requests 
to take such compresensive examinations should be made to school or department 
graduate studies committees. 

When an examination is administered, a report of successful completion will be 
made to the Dean of Graduate Studies. The grade received on the original course 
will be used on the master’s degree study plan, rather than the CR grade used 
for challenge examinations. 


74 


Masfer^a Degree 


The following shows the dates of expiration of courses according to the five 
year limitation: 


CotiTses taken in Will expire in 


1965 

1966 

1967 

1968 

1969 

1970 

1971 


1970 

1971 

1972 

1973 

1974 

1975 

1976 


The five-year period is computed as being the time between the actual date of 
completion of the earliest course and the month the degree is granted. 


Changes in Study Plan 

The student must complete the courses shown on his approved study plan on 
file in the Graduate Office and in the school or department office with at least a 
3.0 (B) GPA. If a student wishes to make a change in his study plan, he should 
file the appropriate form (copies available in the Graduate Office, schools and de- 
partments) in the school or department of his master’s degree prior to registration. 
The recommendation for a change must be signed by his adviser. No course for 
which a grade has been assigned may be removed from a study plan. 

Minimum Full-Time Load 

Ordinarily, nine units of coursework a semester shall constitute a minimum 
full-time program for graduate students, provided at least three units are in 500- 
level or higher courses. 


Maximum Unit Load 

Twelve units is considered to be a maximum load for graduate students, but, on 
the approval of an adviser, in exceptional cases, a student may take more. 


Theses and Projects 

When a thesis is required, the approved original bound copy and a microfilm of 
it must be deposited in the college Library. An abstract, of not more than 150 
words, must accompany the thesis, and will be published in the journal, Master^s 
Abstracts, Arrangements for the binding, microfilming and publication of the ab- 
stract must be completed by the last day of classes of the semester in which the 
degree is to be granted and are made through the college Foundation Office. The 
current fee for microfilming, publication of the abstract, and the archival copy is 
$18 (for theses with more than 240 pages there is an additional charge). The fee for 
binding is $7.50. 

WTien a project is required, it will be filed with the school or department of the 
degree program. Some record of the project, or the project itself, is preserved in 
the school or department and, when appropriate, in the college Library. When the 
school or deparonent recommends, a project or its written record may be treated 
as a thesis. 

The thesis and where appropriate the project must conform in matters of style 
and format to the rules in “Thesis Procedures and Regulations,” duplicated in- 
structions available in school or department offices, the Graduate Office, and the 
Library Reference Room. Since adherence to these rules must be checked and ap- 
proved, and valuable assistance can be given with problems associated with illus- 
trations, etc., students are advised to consult the Library adviser (in the Reference 
Room) well in advance of the final typing of the thesis. In addition, schools and 
departments have adopted particular form books and/or style sheets, which are 


75 


fAasfBr's Degree 


to be followed in matters of documentation and bibliography (consult Graduate 
Office, or appropriate school or department). 

It is the student’s responsibility to become acquainted with the appropriate rules 
and regulations and to make all necessary arrangements for the typing of the thesis, 
including instruction of the typist, if other than himself. Adequate time should be 
allowed for reading and criticism by the adviser, the committee members, and the 
librarian, for revisions, as needed, and for completion of the final edition of the 
thesis, including approvals. 

The deadline for submission of the completed thesis to the adviser and committee 
is six weeks in advance of the last day of classes of the semester in which the 
student hopes to be awarded the degree, unless other arrangements are made 
with the school or department. The deadline for depositing the approved original 
copy of the thesis in the college Foundation Office and making the arrangements 
for binding, microfilming and publication of the abstract is the last day of classes 
of the semester. If a student’s program requires a thesis, or if the project has been 
determined to be regarded as a thesis, the master’s degree cannot be awarded unless 
the notification that the student has completed this final step is received by the 
Dean of Graduate Studies. 

Graduate Assisfantships, Fellowships, and Financial Aids 

There are a limited number of appointments as graduate assistants available to 
outstanding graduate students who are working in graduate degree programs. 
These may pay up to $1,500 per semester. If interested, consult the chairman of 
the department in which degree study is being taken. Teaching fellowships are not 
currently available. 

The State of C^alifornia each year awards a certain number of graduate fellow- 
ships (payment of fees only). (Qualified students who are residents of California 
may make application for these through the Financial Aid Office. 

For information concerning other financial aids and part-time placement services, 
see pages 43 and 41, respectively. 

Waiver of Nonresident Tuition Fee 

Worthy graduate students who are not residents of California may, under certain 
circumstances, obtain a waiver of the nonresident tuition fee. Forms for this pur- 
pose are available at the Admissions and Records Office. 

International Study 

The college participates in the C^alifomia State Colleges’ program of study abroad. 
Under this program, limited studies taken at designated foreign universities, when 
arranged in advance, may be applied toward the requirements of a degree awarded 
by (Dal State Fullerton. It is important that plans be completed several months 
before starting such a program. For details consult the foreign student adviser. 

Second Master's Degree 

A graduate student desiring to work for a second master’s degree from Cal State 
Fullerton must request the school or department concerned and the Graduate 
Council for permission to enter a curriculum leading to the second master’s 
degree. If the request is granted the student must as a minimum satisfy all pre- 
requisites and all requirements of the new degree program. Approval of candidacy 
for the second degree will be given only after the first degree has been awarded. 

Postgraduate Credit for Seniors 

Students in the last semester of their senior year may petition on a form available 
in the Office of Admissions and Records to receive postgraduate credit for such 
current course work as is not required for the bachelor’s degree. The applicability 


76 


Master's Degree 


of such coursework to a master’s degree program must be determined by separate 
action by the appropriate school or department. Usually the student must have 
attained graduate standing and applied for classified status before this latter action 
is accomplished. 

Enrollment in SOO-Level Courses by Seniors 

A senior may take a 500-level course if he is within nine units of completion of 
graduation requirements and with the specific approval of the chairman of the 
department or dean of the school in which the course is offered and by the chair- 
man or dean of the student’s major department or school. Postgraduate credit and 
applicability of such coursework to a master’s degree is determined as indicated 
under “Postgraduate Credit for Seniors.” 

A senior who is not within nine units of graduation may take a 500-level course 
only if in addition to the approval of the appropriate chairmen or deans he also 
has a minimum GPA of 3.5 in the field or fields of his intended graduate program 
and of 3.25 overall. Under these circumstances, postgraduate credit may not be 
given for a 500-level course. 


77 


> 'r-' r»^ ;i-i(.r^;v-:i.,ov. rliru'r; 

'Vr^d br^ikjvft fu' :. 

' ' • ; ■ 'rv:iU^*?r: UK-a' •OOi. t/> 

f\r d .a.;! d ; •.ir; i-;V;>'dr’<,K £ ..v;^;t‘ y=.'''' ‘rO id..; .'■' 

'vd'V ■ ■ ■ ;.'r r. . ■« ■ ' ■' S'- .r'('',;--:,.,='jf-: :-r» ^d;'>v• br.'L 1*1 »: ;'v; fi..,,:, 

• ':'. 5 ^d':- '.'.'J’J '■■■<.f !;/?(; bv:.Vr''T i>„, '^r\fyrj ';,v, ":r T'!-' looflb;. J<rii :’j(i''i'i>’^v 1;l:';i^;urd7\'.' 

I ■■■>;, ^4;: dv-.'ld iv* ' ,‘r-'-.' ’u:'’.-u:5id 'iC- 
’■ ■'.'■'.ly' ■ ■■' ' ' r i;.( ’’■.«r5’.y.i4 ■'■•d‘:i.V!L‘ul. ..' ' 'ir*'' '.'.jTirjf'' dj 

id?. d'firdV 

'. ' -, r- h i-'T..* 3 mf; iii'dil"/.'* \ 'v' /■'. 

V' ■' ^’;v;:)y■: :i ::.' :'o 1 r m It vI't; 

^^-'■■':d ■■ ■* >'■■'■ », .d vri' d:ildr''\Vi tr^ ^ 

■'■ ■ ■' ■ :■■■•'■''; .,:;|.>;...-.'i r^T' .Ssb "it: \:y 

■ . ■ ■ :,' :.-r,:' A- V' 




COLLEGE 

CURRICULA 




COLLEGE CURRICULA 


California State College, Fullerton offers the following baccalaureate degree pro- 
grams which are described on the pages listed: 


B A American Studies 

Page 
159 

B.A. German 

Page 

186 

B A Anthropology 

171 

R,A, T4i«!rory . 

190 

FA Art 

RQ 

B.A. Linguistics 

161 

B A. Biological Science 

- 173 

R.A. Mflfhpmarirs _ 

191 

B.A. Business Administration 

108 

B.A. Music 

96 

P A O^pmUrry 

176 

R Mncir 

98 

P /\ r^npr^mnniriirinnc 

180 

B.A. philosophy 

194 

B.A. Comparative Literature . 

183 

B.S. Physical Education 

139 

PiA 

100 

B A . physics __ 

195 


202 

B.A. Political Science — . 

198 

R A pr'nnomirQ 

115 

B.A. Psychology 

200 

P p ppgrjnppringr 

145 

p ,4 Rcligrinns SmHics 

165 

R A Fngrlich 

184 

B.A. Russian Area Studies 

166 

BA. Ethnic Sn^di^^s 

155 

B.A. Sociology 

205 

R A Frc^^^ 

186 

R.A. Spanish _ . 

186 

B.A. Geography 

188 

B.A. Speech 

207 


The following master’s degree programs are offered: 


Page 

MA. Anthropology 172 

MA. Art 93 

MA. Biology 174 

M.B.A. Business Administration 111 

M.A. Chemistry 178 

MA. Communications 182 

M.A. Drama 102 

M.A. Economics 116 


M.S. Education (with emphasis in 
elementary education, read- 
ing, school administration, 
school counseling or spe- 


cial education) 135 

M.S. Engineering 149 

MA. English 185 

M.A. French 188 


Page 


M.A. Geography 189 

M.A. German 188 

MA. History 190 

M.S. Library Science 213 

M.A. Linguistics 162 

M.A. Mathematics 193 

M.A. Music 99 

M.S. Physical Education 141 

M.A. Political Science 198 

M.A. Psychology 201 

MPA. Public Administration 199 

MA. Social Sciences 166 

M.A. Sociology 206 

M.A. Spanish 188 

M.A. Speech 209 


The college is accredited by the California State Board of Education for pro- 
grams leading to the credentials listed under Teacher Education Curricula on 
page 122. 


81 








Oc! _. , ' ;■-! A > 


:i • ..v-i;, ^'y :'■ :. ■■ - . . !>dT 

•iv'l 


,^.r; 


- . 

. jI ./u]/ 

> /-...I--' 

* c 


. . , . .kXh' 

.\'v; 


- . ,_ . 

. .k.\ f\ 

iXiv'A ,:i.' 

; ) ; 

7\oy!f:-iyAn]n\l-r 

i'i-nrn i'ii ./'..H,]/; 

-., ; J ' 


f ■ 

- rijAjiXiVi ,/.tu 

^ r..if 


. .. -.'. uy 

> A.I/ 

A.c.,':. . . 



■vVT^'^Vi ./■J'f' 

■^. ..';r^r; : - ;/ 


— . . 


•: A r/ 


f.; 

■ yL>; A.U. 

•y'^' /...^■* 


■•,. ‘*Or- • 

'/I 'i 

/•■: :•■'«: 


.;i>/ ^ 'tn;:;!!;!; ' i 

yo*:y^ xtu 


■•'i-; i-> L'O/r^- 

.>; ; y y i -/ ■ 

- ^: i 

i'l'roi • ':;;•■■ C' lAx 

• , ‘ /. ■ , 

1 . 


,y:i\: i:}nhn3 3.'y. 

-. -■■i 







I A.l/: 

■ L:', • 

V 

^•' v.' ‘... 

:xy'y-j ■7:.'i 






SPECIAL CURRICULAR 

COURSES 



Special Courses 


STUDENT-TO-STUDENT TUTORIALS 

This year the college will begin a program of experimentation with and develop- 
ment of “snident-to-student tutorials.” One of the fastest and profoundest ways 
to learn is to teach. The “student-to-student tutorial” will provide a formal way to 
encourage students to learn through teaching. It will expand significandy the op- 
portunities for students to have meaningful experiences as teachers. At the same 
time, it greatly will increase the amount of tutoring available and will extend 
tutoring to all of the kinds of students who need and want tutorial assistance. 

Students electing to be tutors not only will increase their mastery of particular 
subject matters but also will have practice in developing their communication, 
cooperation and interpersonal relationship skills. Most important adult roles and jobs 
also involve a teaching dimension and the tutorial experience will provide op- 
portunities to develop awareness of teaching problems and competence in teaching 
techniques. 

Each department will decide whether or not it wishes to offer this course. 
Departments choosing to offer the student-to-student tutorial course will follow 
the rules listed in the following course description. 

The course number will be 196 or 496, and one to three units of credit can 
be given for each course. 

Prerequisites: A 3.0 or more grade-point average and/or consent of instructor 
and simultaneous enrollment in the course or previous enrollment in a similar course 
or its equivalent. The tutor and his tutee or tutees will work in mutually ad- 
vantageous ways by allowing all involved to delve more carefully and thoroughly 
into the materials presented in this specific course. One to three students may be 
tutored by the tutor unless the instructor decides that special circumstances warrant 
increasing the usual maximum of three tutees. Three hours of work are expected 
for each unit of credit, and this work may include^ apart from contact hours with 
tutees, such other activities as: tutorial preparations; consulting with instructors; 
reporting, analysis and evaluation of the tutorial experiences; and p>articipation 
in an all-college orientation and evaluation program for tutors. A maximum of 
three units can be taken each semester and nine units of any combination of 196 
and 496 for an undergraduate program. This course must be taken as an elective 
and not counted toward general education, major or minor requirements. The 
course can be taken on a credit/no credit basis by the tutor. Requests for tutors 
must be initiated by tutees and can be initiated up until the official college date 
for dropping a class with a “W”. Tutors electing to respond to such requests will 
receive credits at the end of the semester and can register in the course until the 
official college date for dropping a class with a “W”. Both tutors and tutees must 
submit written reports, analyses and evaluations of their shared tutorial experience, 
and both must participate in an all-college orientation program as well as in any 
conferences or critiques that the instructor of the course may require. 

Further information can be obtained from the department in which the student 
is interested in student-to-student tutorials. 

GRADUATE STUDIES 700 

A one-unit, pass/no pass course, which is designed to ensure continuous regis- 
tration for those graduate students with an advanced degree objective who find 
that they are unable to enroll in regularly offered coursework, and who are not 
eligible for a leave of absence. This course does not require class attendance. Per- 
mission to register in Graduate Studies 700 must be given by appropriate college 
authorities. A student may not register in Graduate Studies 700 for a third consecu- 
tive semester. 

Students are reminded that units in a 700-level course may not be applied toward 
fulfillment of requirements for an advanced degree. 


85 




Ti>s:^ciyn; .©>THBci2ia 

■ baa rfiiv'/ i-o’:;;:* . .-qx,;i ■■cr ti'^ (■■ »!;'>^' ^>:?:: < ••‘ul/ 

' SVR;';-’ i* '': '■' '-’'> ■ ■'> Ur> iO 3a'M': 

'.h*t h-amA p :iba’"''' i ■; ■ ''v,;;' . j-;: : i-iU oi u i< 

■■•c]fi('j» 'jidl' Y:bni#iTHliiLrrJ 5 i.<''! Ln;., Ijp'/ ;;' t!">;''''^''i''h rnirjli \>" 

ofh i/., ,.' L. o? .n:i >bi/v i.n t'-^hiinmicc 

l(,W • ••i vih •;>vi';^nYni .u-'W vbf...'i'Y 'i- 

l»!.hon>'7 Tnit'.v bru. t>-'v:.,i '■; o :.. ,•?/■■'.-'■ cr-.,-' i-.- ^vI'k :. > 1 ?rh Yo !.!'■ M'i^' 

, lo tyaimm.Au ;irh^ :> a , t:,ii -jT -i/rr '.■••' :. .l•.^^ 

.nrfhoSntf.'airm'j ibib ’^tdtiah'^^h /;r .'Vii.i'V - rau Aim o^k 

iirioi ;^ni: ’jnwi^xinru tBoW ■•'I';;-:, Mn- ■> N's/;: 

"•q^v :7hi[V<i>iq khal>A :Jilr hr.\, 'iv^T; ' 

q ;?■ />jtr:>-3*K{n,o‘, ba^R jTOibi.rjq !■' a, .-'h ...j . v 

. ,;■ - ;■■■. 

^irif ■:bvj O';’ li :a;s.!/ \c l^M^VyA^j i:ir- 

'.f ^ !;ro-'nv: -yJ ■;,■''•• 9;''bi:ofb vfy 

■q'y^v.; to nirra 3:3ifb OJ bn*i. /H;- \o aVi :j'.t ilr-v •j:*'T-,r<K» :;;(iT 

y>\ niyA^ in 

;j; < ijwv: r^'v dK^i-'Y '>/*,• 'i-’yao y:> OJ A 

a ;.: ilk :idtdK'r7lIo'!irj:>i "?o y^’i^o:' C'd- iri'>tiiiiQn.n:> ku jy;r£’iJDmb bfu 

d „ ''j.kiYifjo m ■'■how aK'v/ vYonri lo ^yjjiri .itiif [.oir. '.jdT .'''jok. /htp-T aii k 

voy;- ' Yf; vlioH-io JdMO'f: O'j'bb oi b^/iovni i!f. '5|fi«v;oih \d <v<;w ^iJLOd;g:oo^- 

JO -.ivT’: oiyjvfiY :?';:‘-r}? 07 oiiO dob ni ?"?';>:» fj'J^idnq 'jdj oia 

Arr^ ^^,v. •■,y:ni..'o;ro:o“ib ku'jqa i r-’XJ\A’‘'n o{tij!?^lnif lojuj sri7 \l{ h::rajxa 

’;o cYijcai Wi-d ■ t-rj-jrb \o ’^nrrniyx.'n Iruidi; 'ob 

ifji a yny;o Tono-jo ^rr.:ni Ti&c^y id':..’ '■yai >hov/ p'irj.r odbsr;:> *!.':■■ 

, --'Mo.rt'fO: ii'diVi’ •;^ai;:![7«i;DoY ;;. b.ho'jij; :,?z *'>;7hn3t>c; rfoac 

r'ydj:qr>ho^q ;wnd>h::/qrfi 'h' /.;- aro '■> rionf;i/hv3 h(n- zhyumi ,^wrr?o<; ' 

0:.; ;ooo:;i,Vhm A ,<707^:; o v.^: daii rr-'afiTaYno j:^3Uo-:>-Ur ;tM ;s 

;-V;' ).a iviiy.iuv.fayi^ -[at /'^•'j/ I'do ' r>:ta;'0’ dord? nad?,; ad ?JEir!iJ :t::A. 

yAf^^A. 00 k.v ad^lcj mI iju;ni -a: i jo ^Tfajh£;TSiid>baiJ nt loi ho. 

'vd I '^Aauiu no . :•■ . 0 -: j.* .’*- h' •■ roo Instyn)^ ha^riDoo non hot 

nodivi.f rA- ‘sOJj.a Y/h oi '•-.:j' ^o .'^> vhi ’d'.r-j-i’ no n-^v'sj d;d :;£.; 

sdST'dan ;b':«-d'.L' 'T'fb ‘hna • • ''yar,.--\' -‘'y ioo,. hr-^ ::j'=?3ar vd booiibhu T-rr/T 

d'' ..V otid'y’o-' aati.' on bnr>vfi»'i'i - •.,■ . .• o. :-:-..v/. j’}' /'V'/''' i. oab c ^nh;<,a7;! iq' 
,aV hoo":; .v;ai. i obi oi •aa:iai^d>'i ■ uj iy-; '■;■ ■•■dii: jfl't • y. oA? ;?5fioyr> ovhoo 

vao': Ky^ibl oniw brO’b .,'’Vv .-y./: u iiiL i-yXia "uA 

/ro;: v.'i xr/a hi'toro ttei'h bos «*• robir/'/ ibndu; 

;-J" a.;, h'J'V /r aiO'-'^OlO 7 W>m?Otn 10 ‘UVdjiluO-tk 0 :.: ';i Otqhi’hiiq fitful bai 

;uiio.. 1 ■••iin Oik 10 iaiiocf? 5 ^ni i)h. .; •^jMohriO 10 

!y jii" .j .'':h/' .;. a'.'.iO'5j qoh fh ot'.x:^ bonirndo jv. -a: -, aoh • fniolxii ioiIhaj'^ 

einho'in toot.tooa nr boJ?oi? 7 /Tf e 

eot ifMdKiAJia 

nr>'yin;Y:-- ^ •O Ldin’SUah ?/ doh-vy." ' . •.••.l\ '-■■KO 3:nf/-'^no A 

.; !" ' '. -•iO.: }-.yK-i<ivy: ay rbi'^/ EJn:;<i,)i.' .:■ .d; '"■ < onhi.! 

.■'.Y -. jY' ':‘\}: ,>7 ■“ ■■■'■ '' ' 'yOj h'yryit) fK dY; v ■ ' ^ v-.ril ira; 

,' .. ■ I ■•: vY.; yiUjjvi ^-Y.' r.x'th bdT .V ■.'■-.j lY i.A 

■.,'j. .j ,-’ ■■•:!•;. 'd i'Yv'in ' Y Y YY rkh/or ' pi oi notmn 

^ . . •• - . tri'a- :>A{Kiyi oitOPRob :d '. v;jj;cirshot2 A .gsahofiiii) 

oYJSdiro.’>'>. mi 

./■■■■ ./ ■'• ‘ • y' y' y .y::'. - : j' > \ « ro • ' •>ori.mp'i nii. ain-rhYb' 

).'i'YYr.dY: Aic '! ■' , •• ro'jtrpoi I 0 ipurdfriiu' 


THE ARTS 


hr\ :iu. 






SCHOOL OF THE ARTS 

Dean: J. Justin Gray 


DEPARTMENT OF ART 

Professors: Dietz, Hein, Ivy, Olsen, Partin, V. Smith 
Associate Professors: Evjenth, Kerciu, Samuelson (Chairman) 

Assistant Professors: Ching, Curran, James, Lagerberg, Lyon, Mack, Myers, Stokes- 

bary 

Lecturers: Ewing, Frankel, Klobe, Pryor 

The Department of Art offers a program which includes the several fields of 
art history, theory, and appreciation*, drawing, painting, sculpture; design, and 
crafts; and art education. The broadest objective of the program is to contribute 
to the intellectual, social, and creative development of the student as he prepares 
for citizenship in a democratic society. More specifically, the art program provides 
opportunities for students: (1) to develop a knowledge and understanding of those 
general principles of visual organization and expression basic to all forms and fields 
of art; (2) to develop a critical appreciation and understanding of historical and 
contemporary art forms through a study of these principles as they relate to the 
range of artistic production of mankind; (3) to use these general principles as a 
means to express more clearly their ideas, thoughts, and feelings in the creation of 
visual forms; (4) to develop those understandings and skills needed to pursue gradu- 
ate studies in the field, to teach art in the schools, or to qualify for a position in 
business and industry as an art specialist. 

Undergraduate curricula leading to the bachelor of arts degree have been de- 
signed to meet the specialized needs of the following groups: (1) students who 
wish to study art as an essential part of their personal and cultural development; 
(2) students seeking preprofessional preparation in art; (3) students planning to 
teach art at the secondary level who wish either a teaching major or minor in art; 
and (4) students planning to teach in the elementary schools who wish to have 
art as either an academic major or minor. 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree with a major in art, students must have 
a C average in all courses required for the degree. No credit toward the major 
will be allowed for specific major courses in which a grade of D is obtained. As 
is customary, the Art Department reserves the right to hold projects completed by 
a student for class credit for a period of three years. 

MAJOR IN ART FOR THE BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

Five course programs have been planned to meet the individual needs and in- 
terests of students working for the bachelor of arts degree with a major in art. 

In the development of specific course offerings which make up these programs, 
it has been the concern of the art faculty to see that each program contains: (1) 
basic courses in art history, theory, appreciation, and studio practice which have 
as their primary focus the study of those general principles of visual organization 
and expression underlying all fields of art; (2) more specialized courses which pro- 
vide for adequate preparation in depth in a single field of art. The teaching of art 
history, theory, and criticism is not confined to courses bearing that title. Rather, 
each studio course involves theory as well as the practice of art, includes as part 
of its content the study and reference to related historical art forms, and has as part 
of its purpose the development of those critical abilities which are necessary to a 
valid evaluation and appreciation of the art expressions of man. 


89 


Art 


Plan 1 provides for an emphasis in the area of art history, theory, and apprecia- 
tion and is particularly recommended for those students who wish to pursue gradu- 
ate studies in art history or museology. 

Plan II is designed for those students who prefer a studio-type program with a 
preprofessional orientation and an area of specialization selected from the follow- 
ing: (1) design; (2) crafts; (3) drawing and painting, or (4) sculpture. 

Plan III is for those students who wish to meet the requirements of the standard 
teaching credential with specialization in secondary teaching. 

Plan IV is for those students who wish to meet the requirements of the standard 
teaching credential with specialization in elementary teaching. 

Plan V is for those students who wish to meet the requirements for teaching 
in junior college. 

All five plans require a minimum of 60 units in art or approved related courses 
with a minimum of 30 units of upper division in art except for Plan IV which re- 
quires a minimum of 45 units of art including a minimum of 27 units of upper 
division in art. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, students must meet 
the other college requirements for a bachelor of arts degree (see page 66). Stu- 
dents following Plans III and IV also must meet any specific requirements for the 
desired teaching credential (see section in catalog for School of Education). 
Graduate students who plan to meet the requirement for a standard teaching cre- 
dential with specialization in secondary school teaching with a major in art must 
complete six units in art as approved by the major adviser on and beyond the 
specific course requirements listed in Plan III before they can be recommended 
by the Art Department for student teaching. 

Students following Plan III divide their student teaching between two semesters 
and register for three units of credit each semester. (See prerequisites and course 
description for Art Education 749.) 


PLAN I: ART HISTORY EMPHASIS 

Lower Division: Art history 201 A, B (6 units); 6 units of studio courses; 
approved electives (12 units) in art, anthroiX)logy, drama, foreign lan- 
guages, history, literature, music or philosophy 

Upper Division: Art history (36 units) including one course from each of 
the following six groups: 301-302; 411-412; 421-422; 431-432; 451-452; 
461-462-471; Six courses in not more than three of the above groupings 

and three courses (9 units) of approved electives 

Reading knowledge of one modem foreign language 


Units 


24 


36 


PLAN II: STUDIO EMPHASIS 
(Painting) 

Preparation for the Major 

Art 201 A3» 107 A3» 207A3» 117A3,C, 103, 104 and 3 units of electives: 
recommended: Art 216A or 247 A 30 

The Major 

6 units of upper division art history. Art 307 A, B, 487 A3 or C (6 units), 
317A,B and 6 units of electives in art 30 


(Printmaking) 

Preparation for the Major 

Art 201 A, B, 107A,B, 247, 117A,B,C, 103, 104 and 6 units of electives 30 


90 


Art 


The Major Units 

6 units of upper division art history, Art 347 A, B, 487D (6 units), 307 A, 

3 17 A and 6 units of electives in art - - 30 

(Sculpture) 

Preparation for the Major 

Art 201 A,B, 107 A,B, 103, 104, 216A,B, 117A,B,C and 205A — 30 

The Major 

6 units of upper division art history. Art 316A3, 486 (6 units), 336A3 and 
6 units of electives in art 30 

(Crafts) 

Preparation for the Major 

Art 201A,B, 123A, 107A,B, 103, 104, 205A and 6 units selected from Art 
106A, 205B, 216A or 117A3,C 30 

The Major — Genera/ Concentration 

6 units of upper division art history. Art 305 A, 315A, 325A, 353A or B and 
12 units selected from Art 305B, 315B, 325B, 338A, 316A, 485A, 485B, 485D, 

485C or 483E — 30 

The Major — Jewelry / Met a I smithing Concentration 

6 units of upper division art history. Art 305 A, 315 A,B, 325 A,B, 3 units 
selected from Art 305B, 353A, 353B or 338A and 6 units selected from Art 
485A or 485C 30 

The Major — Textile Concentration 

6 units of upper division art history. Art 35 3 A3, 483E (6 units) and 6 units 
of electives in art - - 30 

(Ceramics) 

Preparation for the Major 

Art 201 A3, 107 A3, 103, 104, 106A,B, 117A3,C and 3 units of electives 30 

The Major 

6 units of upper division art history. Art 306A,B, 485C (6 units), 406A3 
and 6 units of electives in art 30 

(Graphic Design) 

Preparation for the Major 

Art 201A3, 107 A3, 103, 104, 123A, 117A,QD, 223A3 30 

The Major 

6 units of upper division art history. Art 323 A3, 483 A (6 units), 338A, 317A, 

363 A, 3 units selected from Art 338B, 317B or 363B and 6 units of electives 
in art 30 

(Illustration) 

Preparation for the Major 

Art 201A3, 107 A3, 103, 104, 123A3, 117A,C3), 223B 30 


91 


Art 


The Major Units 

6 units of upper division art history, Art 363 A3» 483C (6 units), 317A,B, 

323A, 3 units selected from Art 338A, 307 A, 487B 30 

(Environmental Design) 

Preparation for the Major 

Art 201A,B, 107 A, B, 103, 104, 123AJB* and 6 units selected from Art 106A, 

205A, 216A or 223A3 - 30 

The Major — Interior Space Planning Concentration 

6 units of upper division art history. Art 313A3» 483B (6 units), 453 A,B, 
and 8 units selected from Art 333A, 353A, 353B, 483D or 363A 30 

The Major — Product Design Concentration 

6 units of upper division art history. Art 333 A3, 483C (6 units), 323 A, 

453 A3 and 5 units of electives in art 30 

(Creative Photo) 

Preparation for the Major 

Art 201 A, B, 103, 104, 107 A,B, 117A,C,D, 247A and 6 units of electives 30 

The Major 

6 units of upper division art history. Art. 338A, B, 489 (6 units), 347 A and 9 
units selected from 323A, 363A, 307A or 347B 30 

PLAN III: TEACHING EMPHASIS 
(Secondary) 

Preparation for the Major 

Art 201A,B, 107 A3, 123A or equivalent, 103, 104, 106A and 205A 27 

The Major 

9 units of upper division art history to include Art 411 or 412, 310A3, 


338A, 380, 6 units upper division to include Art 323 A and 6 units of art 

electives 33 

Fifth Year Credential Program: In the five-year program for the standard teach- 
ing credential, secondary, to be eligible for consideration for student teaching by 
the art faculty, the student must meet the following requirements: 

1. Be assigned by the Art Department Chairman to a faculty adviser in art 
concerned with teacher education. 

2. Fulfill credential requirements listed in this catalog within the School Ed- 
ucation for the curriculum on secondary school teacher education. 

3. Meet requirements listed under Plan III, Teaching Emphasis (Secondary) 
for the bachelor’s degree in art. 

4. Complete Art 380 and Art Ed 441, Educ 311 and Educ 340 prior to enroll- 
ment in Art Ed 442. 

5. Complete six additional upper division or graduate level units in art in an 
area of emphasis as part of the 30 units required beyond the bachelor’s 
degree. 

6. Obtain recommendation of the faculty adviser in art concerned with teacher 
education. 

7. Submit a portfolio of art work to be evaluated by the art faculty. 


92 


Art 


PLAN IV: TEACHING EMPHASIS 
(Elementary) 

Preparation for the Major 

6 units art history, Art 103, 104, 107B and 123 A 18 

The Major 

Art 411 or 412, 310A, 323 A, 380, 6 units upper-division crafts and 9 
units upper-division art electives — 27 

PLAN V: TEACHING EMPHASIS 
(Junior College) 

Lower Division: Same as Plan II. 

Upper Division: Same as Plan 11. 

&e Junior College Teacher Education Program, page 133. 

MINOR IN ART FOR THE BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

A minimum of 24 units is required for a minor in art for the bachelor of arts 
degree of which a minimum of 10 units must be in upper division courses. In- 
cluded in the program must be a basic course in each of the following areas: (1) 
art history and appreciation; (2) design; (3) drawing and painting; and (4) crafts. 
Those students planning to qualify for a standard teaching credential with special- 
ization in elementary or secondary teaching and art for a minor must obtain ap- 
proval from the Art Department for the courses selected to meet the upper divi- 
sion requirements for a minor in art. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN ART 

The program of studies leading to the master of arts degree in art provides a 
balance of theory and practice for those who desire to teach art or wish to develop 
a sound basis for continued advanced work in this field. The program offers each 
student the opportunity to expand his intellectual and technical resources and to 
acquire greater richness and depth in terms of creative understanding and achieve- 
ment in one of the following areas of concentration: (1) drawing and painting 
(including printmaking); (2) crafts (including ceramics); (3) design; and (4) 
sculpture. 

Prerequisites for the Program 
Prerequisites to the program include: 

(1) an undergraduate major in art or 24 units of upper division art including at 
least 12 units of upper division study in the elected area of concentration with 
a GPA of 3.0 or better; 

(2) Portfolio Review — before any units may apply to the approved study program 
for the degree, the student must arrange for a faculty committee evaluation 
of the student^s background, including a statement of purpose by the stu- 
dent, and review of creative work. Portfolio review dates are May 1 for the 
following fall semester, and December 1 for the following spring semester of 
each year. Arrangements may be made through the Art Office to meet these 
deadlines. 


93 


Dance 


Program of Studies 

The degree program requires 30 units of graduate study approved by the stu- 
dent’s graduate committee of which 15 must be 500-level courses. The 30 units are 
distributed as follows: 

Units 

1. 500-level courses in art 15-21 

A. Core courses in art, history, philosophy, analysis and criticism 9 

(1) Art 500 Graduate Seminar in Art (3 units) 

(2) Art 501 Graduate Seminar in Art History and Apprecia- 
tion (6 units) 

(On the recommendation of the adviser, the student may 
substitute 3 units in Philosophy 311, Philosophy of Art, or 
a 400 number art history course as partial fulfillment of this 
requirement.) 

B. Coursework in the area of concentration selected from one of 


the following areas 6 

(1) Drawing and painting 

(2) Crafts 
0) Design 
(4) Sculpture 

C. Project or thesis 3-6 

2. Additional courses 9-12 

A. 500- and/or 400-Ievel courses in art to extend the student’s field 

in depth 6 

B. 500-, 400- and/or 300-level courses either in courses outside the 


art department related to the student’s special area of interest 
or in courses within the art department outside the area of 
concentration to expand the student’s field in breadth 3-6 

Total : 30 

All courses must be completed with a B average, and all courses in the area of 
concentration must be graded B or better. The Department of Art requires the 
candidate for the Master of Arts in Art degree to exhibit his or her project in the 
department upon completion of the Master of Arts in Art degree and the art 
faculty reserves the right to retain an example from the student’s master’s exhibit 
for the college collection. 

For further information, consult the Department of Art. 

Also see “The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and the Graduate 
Bulletin. 

DEPARTMENT OF DANCE 

Associate Professor: Kuni (Chairman) 

Lecturers: Dougherty, Tait 

The program of studies in the Department of Dance provides training in each 
of the related aspects of dance such as its history, theory, composition including 
space forming and choreography, and the technics of movement leading to dance 
performances and productions. The curriculum is designed in accordance with the 
following three objectives: (1) to prepare the student who wishes to enter dance 
as a profession, either in teaching, choreography, or performance; (2) to provide 
for the general college student the opportunity for a personal involvement in dance 
as an art form and as a basic movement experience; (3) to offer curricular experi- 
ences in dance for the student who is majoring in fields of study that are closely 
related to dance such as art, music and theatre. 

A major in dance is not offered at this time. Refer to the Department of Theatre 
which offers both the B.A. and M.A. degrees with areas of concentration in dance. 


94 


Music 


DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 

Professors: Gray,* Kreter (Chairman), Landon, Lewis, Thorsen 
Associate Professors: Fuszek, Karson, Michalsky, Reims 

Assistant Professors: Chadwick, Charlton, Ellison, Kincaid, McCarty, Minor, Paul, 
Stewart, Unruh, Vaughan 
Lecturers: Alexander, Clantrell 

Lecturers (part time): Cartledge, Cook, Fiske, Shaffer, Tall 
Lecturers in applied music (part time): Barstow (Violin, Viola), Benditzky (Vio- 
loncello), Bloch (Clarinet), Chassman (Violin, Viola), Caudill (String Bass), 
Cook (Piano), Fleming (Trombone-Baritone), Goodwin (Percussion), Grauer 
(String Bass), Guameri (Trumpet), Henderson (French Horn), Howard (Flute), 
Imry (Guitar), Kemalyan (Voice), Lustgarten (Cello), McNab (Trumpet), 
Muggeridge ((3boe), Nowlin (Bassoon), Pittel (Saxophone), Remsen (Harp), 
Riggs (Voice), Shaffer (Organ), Stockhammer (Flute), Voorhies (Piano). 

The Department of Music offers courses in music for both majors and non- 
majors. The fundamental purpose of the music major curriculum leading toward 
the baccalaureate degree is to provide the necessary training in each of the related 
aspects of music such as its history and literature, theoretical studies, and musical 
performance. Such a program of studies is based on the need to provide serious 
students with a core curriculum which will prepare the individual in such areas 
as (a) the knowledge of the history and relationships of music as an art form, (b) 
a comprehensive and analytical understanding of musical literature, (c) a working 
knowledge of music theory and structure, (d) a high degree of competence in a 
performing field, and (e) a specialization within the major. 

The music program is designed to educate: 

1. Students in general, in terms of composite minors, music minors, or broad 
offerings in the humanities or liberal arts. 

2. Students preparing to teach in the elementary and/or secondary schools, with 
a major field concentration in music (special music teachers). 

3. Students preparing to teach in the elementary schools with a major field con- 
centration in music (classroom teachers). 

4. Students preparing to teach in the junior colleges and four-year colleges with 
a major field concentration in music. 

5. Students other than music majors preparing to teach as classroom teachers in 
the elementary schools. 

6. Students seeking undergraduate preparation for other vocations in music, 
normally requiring advanced training. 

REQUIREMENTS OF THE DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 

1. Placement examinations in basic piano, voice, theory and performance will be 
given to all music majors at the time of entrance to the college. Demonstrable 
proficiency in the piano placement examination will satisfy the requirement in 
piano proficiency (see 5c following). Students deficient in any of the above 
areas will be expected to take additional work as recommended. 

2. Music majors will be expected to declare a principal performance area with 
the approval of the faculty adviser. It will be expected that each student will 
demonstrate satisfactory progress within this principal performance area, cul- 
minating in the successful presentation of a senior recital before he may be 
approved for graduation. The recital requirement may be fulfilled by per- 
formance, conducting, composition or lecture, or any combination of these. 

3. All music majors are required to participate in a major performance group 
(band, orchestra or chorus) each semester of the regular school year (mini- 

* College administrative officer. 


95 


Mus/c 


mum: B.A. six semesters, B.M. eight semesters). Students who declare wind or 
percussion as their principal performance area must register for band (or 
orchestra if designated by the instrumental coordinator); string majors must 
register for orchestra; and voice majors must register for chorus. A music 
major whose principal performance area is piano or organ shall be assigned to 
an appropriate major performance group by his faculty adviser. 

4. All music majors whose principal performance area is an orchestral instrument 
or piano are expected to take part in small ensembles for a minimum of two 
semesters. 

5. The principal performance area for the major in music requires work in 
applied music, as follows: 

a. Piano, voice and instrumental majors must complete a minimum of eight 
semesters (six semesters B.A.) of applied music in the principal performance 
area. 

b. Choral or instrumental conducting majors must complete a minimum of 
eight semesters (six semesters B.A.) of applied music in the principal per- 
formance area, in addition to a minimum of six units in conducting. 

c. All music majors will take the piano proficiency examination during the 
junior year. This requirement may also be satisfied by successful completion 
of Music 282B. 

d. All music majors will present a recital in the senior year (as described in 
2 above). 

6. Senior transfer students entering California State College, Fullerton with a 
major in music, or graduate students in music entering to complete credential 
requirements are expected to complete a minimum of one semester of suc- 
cessful upper division work in music before they may be approved for di- 
rected teaching. Required courses and competencies expected of all the college 
music majors must be satisfied before endorsement by the faculty committee 
for acceptance in the credential program. 

7. All credential candidates are required to pass functional examinations in piano 
and voice before being approved for graduation. This requirement may also 
be satisfied by successful completion of Music 382 and 283B. 

8. All music majors will be expected to attend a weekly departmental organiza- 
tion class (Music 400) each semester of enrollment (maximum of eight se- 
mesters) . 

9. Any exception to a departmental requirement must be made by petition. 

MUSIC DEGREE PROGRAMS 

The Department of Music offers a variety of courses and programs leading to 
baccalaureate and graduate degrees in teaching and the professions. The baccalau- 
reate degree may be earned in two degree patterns. Within these patterns, a student 
will normally pursue an emphasis in applied music, composition, conducting, music 
education or music history, theory and literature. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

This program prepares students in (1) music history, theory and literature or 
(2) music for elementary classroom teachers. 

The music history, theory and literature emphasis is a general degree, providing 
suitable preparation for advanced degrees in theory, literature or musicology and 
basic preparation for advanced study in other fields, such as musical acoustics, 
music therapy, ethnomusicology, library science in music and music in industry 
and recreation. 

The emphasis for classroom teaching is not designed for the music specialist in 
public schools (see Bachelor of Music). Additional course work would be required 
if this emphasis is used as preparation for most graduate degrees in music. 


96 


Music 


The Bachelor of Arts in Music shall consist of no fewer than 45 units, of which 
at least 23 shall be in the upper division. The following minimum requirements are 
basic to this degree objective: 


Music Requirements: 

Lower Division Umts 

Music Theory (Mu 111a, b: 211) 9 

Music Literature (Mu 251) 3 

Applied Techniques (Ensemble 4, principal performance area 4) 8 

20 

Upper Division 

Music Theory (Mu 316, 320, 321a, 322a) 9 

Music History and Literature (Mu 351a, b) 6 

Applied Techniques (Elnsemble 2, principal performance area 2) 4 

Specialization in the major. 6 

Music History and Literature Classroom Teaching 

Emphasis Units Emphasis Units 

Elective courses in music history Mu 333 3 

and literature 6 Mu 28 le 2 

Upper division elective 1 

25 

Total 45 

Allied Requirements: 

Music History, Theory and Literature Emphasis Units 

1. An academic minor, with approval of the faculty adviser 20 


2. Foreign language, preferably German, to be satisfied by one of the 

following: 

(a) four years study of foreign language at the secondary school level, 

(b) a pass examination given by the Department of Foreign Languages 
and Literatures, or 

(c) completion of the second semester of the beginning college course 
in foreign language. 

Classroom Teacher Emphasis 

1. Diversified studies in academic areas appropriate for classroom teachers such 
as English, literature, mathematics, science, art, drama, social sciences, foreign 
language, and physical education and health by consultation with the major 
and professional advisers. 

2. A course in diction or foreign language. (May be satisfied by a minimum of 
one semester of foreign language or Mu 390A, B, Diction for Singers) . 

3. Elementary credential candidates majoring in music (B.A. in Music) are re- 
quired to complete two units of Mu 499 in the semester immediately preceding 
Student Teaching and to take Mu 599 for one unit concurrently with Student 
Teaching. Normally, both courses will be taken in the student’s graduate year. 

4. Ck)mpletion of Educ 311, Educ 331 and admittance to Teacher Education. 


97 


Niiislc 


BACHELOR OF MUSIC 

This degree program is for the development of persons specializing in per- 
formance and applied music techniques.* 

The music major, professional degree program, shall consist of no fewer than 
64 semester units, of which at least 32 shall be in the upper division. The following 
minimum requirements are basic to this degree objective: 

Lower Division 

Music Theory (Mu 111a, b, 211) 

Music Literature (Mu 251) 

Applied Techniques 

Performance Emphasis Music Education Emphasis 

Principal Performance Area 8 Principal Performance Area.— 4 

Major Performance Ensemble.. 4 Voice Qass 2 

Piano Class 2 

Major Performance Ensemble 4 


Umts 

9 

3 

12 


Total 24 

Upper Division Units 

Music Theory (Mu 316, 320, 321 A, 322 A, 323 A) 11 

Music History and Literature (Mu 351A, B) 6 

Specialization in the Major 23 


Performance Emphasis 

Principal Performance Area 8 

Major Performance Ensemble.. 4 

Senior Recital (Mu 498) 1 

Electives 10 


23 

Composition Emphasis 

Principal Performance Area 4 

Major Performance Ensemble.. 4 
(imposition (Mu 322B, 370, 

371) 6 

Senior Recital (Mu 498) 1 

Electives 8 


23 

Total — -- 40 

Total, lower and upper division 64 

MINOR IN MUSIC 

The minor in music may be used as an appropriate area of study by persons 
whose majors are in other helds, or may be used to satisfy minor field requirements 
for elementary or secondary teaching credentials. A maximum of 12 units from 

• This program also can prepare the student for a teaching career as a music specialist in Ae 
public elementary or secondary schools and junior colleges of California. The m^ic education 
emphasis is a five year pro^am leading toward the Standard Teaching Credential, Secondary 
School Teaching Specialization. Holders of this credential, secondary ^cialization, may teach 
music in either or both secondary and elementary public schools of California. For complete 
professional education reouirements, see School of Education section. In the post-graduate 
year, students must complete the music education techniques block (Mu Ed 441, 442, 443 
and 449) before admission to student teaching. 


Music Education Emphasis 
Principal Performance Area... 4 

Major Performance Ensemble 4 

Instruments Classes 8 

Conducting 6 

Senior Recital (Mu 498) 1 


23 


98 


Music 


the lower division may be included in work counted toward the music minor. The 
music minor requires a minimum preparation of 20 units. 

Composite of Lower Division and Upper Division Units 

Theory of Music (selected from Mu 101, 111A3» 21lA,B or any 300- or 

400-level theory classes for which student is qualified) 6 

Music History and Literature (Mu 100, 251, 350 or courses at the 400- 

or 500-level for which student is qualified) — 5-6 

Applied Techniques (including ensemble, conducting, piano or voice, or- 
chestral instruments, and principal instrument or voice) 8-9 

Note: Students expecting to use the minor for teaching must complete 
four units (two courses) of Mu 281 a-e. Orchestral Instruments and a 
minimum of two units in an ensemble appropriate to their area of speciali- 
zation. — 

Total 20 


MASTER OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

The program of studies leading to the Master of Arts in Music provides advanced 
studies in breadth as well as in an area of graduate specializauon. The program 
is further intended to provide advanced course work with a suitable balance in 
such music studies as theory, composition, history, literature and advanced applied 
techniques. There are suitable graduate specializations in the areas of history and 
literature of music; advanced applied techniques; theory-composition; and music 
education. 

The Master of Arts in Music is especially designed for teachers and supervisors 
of music; persons intending to specialize in applied fields in the pursuit of occu- 
pational goals; individuals preparing for college teaching; and persons intending to 
pursue advanced degrees beyond the master’s level. 

Prerequisites for Admission to the Program 

The student must have a baccalaureate degree with a major in music (or the 
equivalent of a major, i.e., 24 upper division courses in music). Opportunity is 
given the student to remove deficiencies by taking certain prescribed courses. 
Such courses cannot be applied to the master’s degree program. The student must 
also take the aptitude and advanced music tests of the Graduate Record Exam- 
ination and pass the graduate music placement-proficiency examination. 

Requirements for the Degree 

The degree program requires 30 units of graduate study, no more than nine of 
which shall be outside the field of music, and at least 15 of which must be in 
500-level courses in the major. The student will take Mu 500 (Graduate Studies 
in Music, two units) early in his program, and must include at least four units in 
history and literature of music, four in advanced techniques, two in theory com- 
position, and an added six units in one of the above, or in music education, as an 
area of specialization. A thesis or project is required, for which three units may 
be granted. In addition, each program will include at least six units of study out- 
side the department or area of specialization as approved by the graduate commit- 
tee. Elach program is individually designed in conference with the adviser. 

For further information, consult the Department of Music. 

Also see “The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 

FEES FOR APPLIED MUSIC 

Studio lesson fee, half-hour lessons (one unit) and examination, per lesson, 
$1 to $10. 


99 


Theatre 


DEPARTMENT OF THEATRE 

Professor: Young 

Associate Professors: Duerr, Henry, Keller (Chairman), Zeltzer • 

Assistant Professors: Cavan, Dieb, Ellmore, Laga, Lollich, Mee, Odle, Pickering, 

Spies, Taylor, VanderHoek 

The Department of Theatre program includes the several fields of playwriting, 
oral interpretation, acting-directing, technical theatre, theatre history and theory, 
radio-television and dance. Specifically, the course work is arranged to provide 
opportunities for students (1) to develop an appreciation for the theatre; (2) to 
become aware, as audience or participants of the shaping force of the theatre in 
society; (3) to improve the understandings and skills necessary for work in the 
theatre as a profession; (4) to prepare for teaching theatre; and (5) to pursue 
graduate studies. 

Any course in which the student receives less than C cannot be credited 
toward the major in drama. In addition to the course requirements, all students 
majoring in drama must participate in the casts or crews for a minimum of eight 
theatre productions, assignment to be determined by area emphasis, in consultation 
with the adviser. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN DRAMA 

Four course programs have been planned to meet the individual needs and inter- 
ests of students working for the bachelor of arts degree with a major in drama. 

Plan I is for those who wish to study theatre as a cultural contribution or who 
wish to pursue graduate degrees in theatre with emphasis in theatre history and 
theory. It is strongly recommended that students electing this plan support the 
major with approved electives from art, theatre, music, foreign languages, litera- 
ture, philosophy, or speech. 

Plan II is designed to develop the necessary competency for pursuing theatre 
as a profession, or for pursuing graduate degrees in theatre with an emphasis in 
an area of concentration other than history of the theatre. Areas of concentration 
are: playwriting; acting-directing; interpretation; radio-television, technical thea- 
tre and dance. 

Plan III meets the requirements of the standard teaching credential with speciali- 
zation in elementary teaching. 

Plan IV meets the requirements of the standard teaching credential with speciali- 
zation in secondary or junior college teaching. A minor is required and will be 
selected with the aid of the departmental adviser. 

All four plans require a minimum of 36 units in theatre with a minimum of 
24 units of upper division in theatre. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, students must meet 
the other college requirements for a bachelor of arts degree. Students following 
Plans III and IV also must meet any specific requirements for the desired teaching 
credential (see section in catalog for &hool of Education). Graduate students who 
plan to meet the requirements for a standard teaching credential with specialization 
in secondary teaching and a major in drama must complete or be enrolled in 
six units in theatre as approved by the major adviser beyond the specific course 
requirements listed in Plan IV before they can be recommended by the Theatre 
Department for student teaching. 

PLAN I: THEATRE HISTORY AND THEORY EMPHASIS 

Lower Division: Acting or stage movement, stagecraft, costume and/or 

makeup, oral interpretation. 

* College administrative officer. 


100 


Theatre 


Upper Division: Theatre 370A or B, Fundamentals of Directing (3); Theatre 
473 A, B, World Drama (6) ; Theatre 457A, B, History of the Theatre (6) ; 
Theatre 477, Contemporary Critical Techniques (3); Theatre 472, Ameri- 
can Theatre (3); electives (3 units)— 

PLAN lit PROFESSIONAL EMPHASIS IN AN AREA OF CONCENTRATION 

Lower Division: Same as in Plan I, with exception of technical theatre. 

Upper Division: In one of the following areas of concentration: 

Ploy writing — ^Theatre 364, Seminar in Playwriting (6), or Theatre 364 (3) 
and Theatre 383, TV Writing (3); Theatre 468A or B, Experi- 
mental Theatre (3); Theatre 370A, B, Fundamentals of Directing (6); 
Theatre 475A, B, History of the Theatre (6); Theatre 473A, B, World 
Drama (6); Theatre 477, Contemporary Critical Techniques (3) 

Oral Interpretation— Theatre 311, Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 314A, B, 
Reading Theatre (6); Theatre 411 A, B, C, Oral Interpretation of Prose, 
Poetry, Drama (9); Theatre 475A, B, History of Theatre (6); electives, 
six upper-division units selected from the following courses: Theatre 386, 
Stage Lighting; Theatre 472, American Theatre; Theatre 473A, B, World 
Drama; Theatre 477, Senior Seminar in Contemporary Critical Tech- 
niques 

The major in theatre with an emphasis in oral interpretation requires a 
minor consisting of 21 units in comparative literature or English and com- 
pletion of 11 units in supportive courses from related areas such as art, 
anthropology, comparative literature, English literature, linguistics, speech, 
philosophy to be selected in consultation with the student’s adviser. 

Acting-Directing— Theatre 370A, B, Fundamentals of Directing (6); Theatre 
363 A, B, Intermediate Acting, or Theatre 470A, B, Directing (6); Theatre 
473 A, B, World Drama (6); Theatre 475A, B, History of the Theatre 
(6); Dance 374, Dance (2-4); Theatre 468A, B, Experimental Theatre 
or Theatre 463 A, B, Advanced Acting (6) 

Radio-Television— Theatre 241, Voice Production for the Actor (2); Theatre 
370A, B, Fundamentals of Directing (6); Theatre 380, Introduction to 
Radio and Television (3); Theatre 381, Radio and Television Announcing 
(3); Theatre 383, Television Writing (3); Theatre 480, Radio and Tele- 
vision Production (3); Theatre 475 A, B, History of Theatre (6); collat- 
eral requirements in Communications Department (3); six units chosen 
from advanced courses in directing, acting or technical theatre 

Dance— Dance 374A, B, Dance Theatre and Production (4); Theatre 377A 
or B, Stage Costuming (2); Theatre 377A or B, Costuming Lab (1); 
Theatre 370A, Fundamentals of Directing (3); Theatre 376A, Stagecraft 

(2) ; Theatre 376A, Stagecraft Lab (1); Theatre 363A, Intermediate Acting 

(3) ; Theatre 473A, B, World Drama (6); Dance 474, Special Studies in 

Dance (2); Theatre 475A, B, History of the Theatre (6) 

Technical Theatre— Looker Division: Theatre 276A, B, Beginning Stagecraft 

(4) ; Theatre 276A, B, Stagecraft Lab (2); Theatre 285 A, Theatre Makeup 

(2); Theatre 263 A, Beginning Acting or Theatre 211, Oral Interpretation 
(3^ Theatre 277, Costume Fundamentals (2); Theatre 277, Costuming 
Lab (1); or Theatre 286, Design for Theatre (3) 

Upper Division: Theatre 376A, B, Advanced Stagecraft (4); Theatre 
376A, B, Stagecraft Lab (2); Theatre 377A and/or B, Stage Costuming 
(2-4); Theatre 377A and/or B, Ostume Lab (1-2 units); Theatre 370A, 
Fundamentals of Directing (3); Theatre 475A, B, History of Theatre (6); 
Theatre 386, Stage Lighting (3); Theatre 486 A, Advanced Stage Lighting 


Units 

24 


30 


30 


32-34 


35 


30 


14 


101 


Theatre 


Units 


(3) or Theatre 450, Theatre Management (3); Theatre 488A and/or B, 
Advanced Scene Design (3-6); Theatre 480, Radio and Television Produc- 
tion (3); one semester of upper division electives in tech (3) 33-39 

PLAN lilt TEACHING EMPHASIS 
(Elementary) 

Lower Division: Theatre 211, Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 263 A or B, 
Beginning Acting (3); Theatre 276A or B, Beginning Stagecraft (2); 
Theatre 276 A or B, Stagecraft Lab (1); Theatre 277, Costume Funda- 
mentals (2); Theatre 277, Costume Lab (1); Theatre 285 A, Theatrical 

Makeup (2); Theatre 286, Design for Theatre (3) 17 

Upper Division: Theatre 311, Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 314, Read- 
ing Theatre (3); Theatre 370A, B, Fundamentals of Directing (6); Dance 
374, Dance Theatre and Production (2) ; Theatre 402, Dramatic Activities 
for Children (3); Theatre 403, Children’s Theatre (3); Theatre 475, 
History of Theatre (3); Rehearsal and Performance, Children’s Theatre 
section. Theatre 478A or B (1) 24 

PLAN IVt TEACHING EMPHASIS 

(Sacondary or Junior College) 

Lower Division: Theatre 211, Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 263 A or B, 
Beginning Acting (3); Theatre 276A or B, Beginning Stagecraft (2); 
Theatre 276A or B, Stagecraft Lab (1); Theatre 277, Costume Funda- 
mentals (2); Theatre 277, Costume Lab (1); Theatre 285 A, Theatrical 

Makeup (2 units); Theatre 286, Design for Theatre (3) 17 

Upper Division: Theatre 370A, B, Fundamentals of Directing (6); Theatre 
386, Stage Lighting (3); Theatre 450, Theatre Management (3); Theatre 
472, American Theatre (3); Theatre 473A, B, World Drama (6); Theatre 
475A, B, History of Theatre (6) 27 

MINOR IN DRAMA 

The minor in theatre consists of 23 units, 12 of which must be in upper division. 
Lower Division: Theatre 211, Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 263A or B, 
Beginning Acting (3); Theatre 276A or B, Beginning Stagecraft (2); 
Theatre 276A or B, Stagecraft Lab (1); Theatre 285 A, Theatrical Makeup 

( 2 ) 11 

Upper Division: Theatre 314, Reading Theatre (3) Theatre 370A, Funda- 
mentals of Directing (3); Theatre 473A or B, World Drama (3); Theatre 

475 A or B, History of TTieatre (3 units) 12 

Candidates for the secondary teaching credential who wish to minor in theatre 
must obtain approval from the Theatre Department. Students minoring in theatre 
must participate in the casts or crews for a minimum of four theatre productions. 
Students must also enroll for Theatre Education 442, Teaching Theatre in the 
Secondary School (2). 


MASTER OF ARTS IN DRAMA 

The Master of Arts degree in drama is designed to provide a program of 
coordinated graduate studies built on the framework of the undergraduate prepa- 
ration; to provide added incentive for intellectual growth reflected in improvement 
in teaching and professional recognition; and to provide a sound basis for con- 
tinued graduate study in the field of theatre. The student is expected to demon- 
strate a high degree of intellectual and creative competence and to demonstrate 
mastery of one of the areas of emphasis in theatre (1) theatre history, (2) dramatic 


102 


Thettfre 


literature and criticism, (3) acting and directing, (4) playwriting, (5) technical 
theatre, (6) oral interpretation, (7) radio and television, (8) dance, (9) childen’s 
theatre. 

Prerequisites 

In addition to the college requirements, students admitted to this program must 
have earned 24 upper division units in theatre. Students will complete an oral inter- 
view before being admitted to a program of studies. 

Program of Studies 

The degree study plan in theatre will include at least 30 units of adviser-approved 
graduate studies, 15 units of which must be in 500-level courses. Elach program 
will have 24 units in drama; a core of six units (Theatre 500, Introduction to 
Graduate Study — taken very early in the program, and Theatre 598, Thesis); and 
six units of adviser-approved supporting courses in related fields either in other 
departments or within the Theatre Department but outside the area of emphasis. 
Before the degree is granted each student will pass an oral and written examina- 
tion. 

For further information, consult the Department of Theatre. Also see “The 
Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


103 




-.Vr' 




:r;; ^ 


. -v 1 Uf I. , , iJl.'ilJ:! 

y ■ r^: 

- s 

' ‘s ' 

.'-y-j \Z \c r*^- ^ 

yhr- . : . •■'.y. ; 

'■ . i C . : t ''* > ‘ ! ■'.■ 

■■ Ji;. ‘^7. ;{'• /:>■ 

.:V>- 

M 7 :;w ^:iV 'i.; ] 


S. 


;; .itf 


BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

AND ECONOMICS 

iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiH 


fy / 


'i: * 

' /A 3 - 


' lyKj V 'A... 




/' lA r?:^mmd 


t'y«. *iki.'*,t^!iil'i,V,,‘lj.’'' ..'I'.lii'iu'.- •*,■'. :;.,l' Ji' ;lL-‘Ajiiii^K 





SCHOOL OF BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS 

Dean: Jack W. Coleman 


Department of Accounting 

Professors: Coleman, Hirsch, Meier (chairman), Wiseman 
Associate Professor: Woo 

Assistant Professors: C^orman, Frye, Gustafson, Lee, Waxman 
Department of Economics 

Professors: Graves (chairman), Klein, Phillips, Townshend-Zellner 
Associate Professors: Horton, Lafky, Ponmey 

Assistant Professors: Ahn, Clayton, Dolp, Harlow, Lancaster, Michaels, Morkre, 
Pickersgill, Schick 
Lecturer: Chapman 

Department of Finance 
Professor: Tsagris (chairman) 

Associate Professors: Daane, Nichols 
Assistant Professors: Mlynaryk, Roebuck, Sharma 

Department of Management 
Professors: Barres, McCloud, Trego 

Associate Professors: Colgan, McKee, Shaul (chairman), Wiley 
Assistant Professors: Baillie, Hall, Hill, Lockareff 
Lecturers: Hellwig, Hough, Kirpalani, Lyle 

Department of Marketing 

Professors: Bell, Forrest, Roberts (chairman), Smith (Dean and Professor Emer- 
itus) 

Associate Professor: Lange 

Lecturers: Davis, Harris, King, Lundstrom, Vinson 

Department of Quantitative Methods 
Professors: Chow, Rutemiller (chairman) 

Associate Professors: (dolman, Edmondson, Hightower, Joun 
Assistant Professors: Busby, Mitchell 
Lecturers: Brown, Mueller 

THE UNDERGRADUATE PROGRAM IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION AND ECONO/AICS 

Through a study of the various theoretical and practical business policies and 
procedures, the ^hool of Business Administration and Economics affords a 
basic education for managerial and professional positions in business, government, 
and education. Although emphasis is given to theory, factual content which is essen- 
tial in specific vocations such as accounting, economics, finance, marketing, manage- 
ment, and business education is provided to enable students to enter apprenticeships 
in these fields with the expectation that their education should expedite their prog- 
ress, either to managerial positions or to staff positions as professional accountants, 
economists, educators, and marketing and business consultants. 

In our ever-expanding, complex society, the managers of tomorrow must be men 
and women with breadth of understanding and vision. Students who concentrate 
in a special area are encouraged to elect courses in other divisions of the college, 
particularly in the areas of the behavioral, social, and political sciences, and foreign 
languages. It is assumed that the first half of their college work toward a bachelor’s 


107 


Business Administration 


degree represents a required basic education in communication, mathematics, a 
laboratory science, social science, and the humanities. Since the understanding of 
mathematics is becoming increasingly important in business and the social sciences, 
students who contemplate enrollment in either business administration or economics 
are encouraged to take four years of high school mathematics. College algebra, or 
three years of high school mathematics including a second course in algebra, will 
be a minimum prerequisite for entrance to the program. 

If credits for either or both elementary accounting and principles of economics 
have not been earned, it will be necessary to enroll in these courses the first semes- 
ter of the junior year. 

Students enrolled in the school and working toward a college degree are subject 
to the general requirements of the college as to courses and credit hours required 
for graduation. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

The degree requirements are as follows: 

1. Completion of a minimum of 50 semester credit hours in business administra- 
tion and economics courses in the School of Business Administration and 
Economics, of which 35 semester credit hours must be upper division courses. 

2. Completion of at least 15 semester credit hours in the School of Business 
Administration and Economics at the college. 

3. Completion of the required core courses in the School of Business Adminis- 
tration and Economics. 

4. Completion of 12 semester credit hours of required courses in an area of 
concentration to be selected by the student. 

5. Completion of at least 62 semester credit hours in areas other than business 
administration. Students may elect to apply economics core courses outside 
the School of Business Administration and Economics to fulfill this require- 
ment. 

6. Students must attain at least a 2.0 grade point average (C average) in all 
college work attempted, in all courses taken in the School of Business Admin- 
istration and Economics, and in his area of concentration. 

CORE: The business administration and economics courses listed below are re- 
quired of all students majoring in business administration: 


Course 

Economics lOOA-B, or 200 Principles of Economics 5-6 

Economics 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory or 

Economics 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory t 3 

Quantitative Methods 265 Computer Programming and Applications . 3 

Accounting 201A-B Elementary Accounting 6 

Finance 330 Business Finance.. 3 

Management 341 Principles of Management 3 

Management 346 Business Law 3 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing 3 

Quantitative Methods 361 Business and Economic Statistics 3 

Quantitative Methods 462 Math Models in Business and Economics* 3 

Management 449 Seminar in Business Policies* * 3 


38-39 


AREAS OF CONCENTRATION FOR MAJORS IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 


A student in business administration should select an area of concentration by the 
second semester of the junior year and take the required courses in the area. 


^ Quantitatiye Methods majors will take QM 463 in lieu of QM 462; economics majors, QM 
362. 


** Students taking business economics as their area of concentration will take Econ 410, Govern- 
ment and Business — in lieu of Mgmt 449, Business Policies, 
t Students should ascertain departmental requirement. 


108 


Business Administration 


Accounting Units 

301A-301B Intermediate Accounting 6 

302 Cost Accounting — 3 

And at least one of the following courses: 

308 Federal Income Tax.- 3 

401 Advanced Accounting 3 

402 Auditing - 3 

407 Integrated Data Processing Systems- 3 

Economics 

310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory 3 

320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory 3 

Economics Elective, 400-level 3 

Management 446 Managerial Economics 3 

Finance 

331 Financial Analysis 3 

And at least three of the following courses: 

324 Money and Banking - - - 3 

335 Security Investments - 3 

336 Principles and Practices of Real Estate 3 

337 Real Estate Finance 3 

338 Real Estate Valuation — 3 

401 Real Estate Research 3 

425 Commercial Bank and Financial Institution Management 3 

431 Capital and Money Markets — 3 

433 Problems in Business Finance — — - 3 

435 Security Analysis - 3 

439 Social Insurance 3 

Managament 

342 Production Operations Management- 3 

343 Personnel Management 3 

444 Management of Systems — 3 

446 Managerial Economics 3 

Morkafing 

353 Marketing Administration— 3 

452 Marketing Research 3 

459 Marketing Problems 3 

A minimum of one of the following courses: 

352 Principles of Retailing 3 

354 Principles of Advertising 3 

355 Credit and Credit Administration 3 

356 Creative Motivation in Marketing 3 

357 Industrial Purchasing- - 3 

358 Physical Distribution — 3 

454 Advertising Problems 3 

457 Sales Analysis and Control — 3 

458 International Marketing — - 3 


109 


Business Administration 


Quantitative Methods 

Quantitative Methods majors are required to take Mathematics 150 A, Calculus 


461 Advanced Statistics 3 

At least three of the following courses: 

364 Computer Logic and Programming 3 

446 Computer Programming Theory 3 

464 Information Structures, Information Storage and Retrieval 3 

465 Linear Programming 3 

467 Statistical Quality Control 3 

469 Reliability Statistics 3 

Mktg 452 Marketing Research 3 

Exon 440 Introduction to Econometrics.— 3 


BUSINESS EDUCATION 

Students who wish to major in Business Administration in preparation for a 
career as a secondary school teacher in business subjects must meet the require- 
ments of the School of Business Administration and Economics and the secondary 
school teacher education program including the requirements for the proper cre- 
dential as outlined in the catalog. 

The requirements for a major in this area are as follows: 

1. The core requirements as set fonh for all business administration majors, 
page 108. 

2. Twelve hours of advanced work in one of the six areas of concentration: 

a. Accounting 

b. Economics 

c. Finance 

d. Management 

e. Marketing 

f. Quantitative methods 

3. Meet the School of Business minimum requirement of 50 credit hours in 
business administration and economics courses. 

4. A maximum of 12 credit hours in the secretarial held, including those applied 
as electives, may count toward the degree in business administration and 
economics.* ** 

5. Completion of at least 62 credit hours in areas other than business administra- 
tion and economics are required for the degree. 

Education courses required for a credential will be detailed by the School of 


Education. 

The requirements for a minor in this area are as follows: 

Units 

Economics lOOA-B or 200 Principles of Economics — 5-6 

Accounting 201 A-B Elementary Accounting 6 

QM 264 Computer Programming 1 

One of the following: 

Mktg 351 Principles of Marketing 3 

Fin 330 Business Finance 3 

Mgmt 346 Business Law 3 

••QM 265 Comp. Progr. and Appl. 3 3 

Elduc 442 Teaching Business in Secondary School 2 

t EUectives 6 

22-24 


* The college does not ofiFei work in secretarial training, typewriting, or business machines. 
Consult the Dean of the School of Business Administration and Eocnomics to arrange for 
transfer of approved courses to satisfy these requirements. 

** Will also satisfy QM 264 requirement. 

t A maximum of six units of secretarial courses, including those applied as electives, may 
count toward the minor in Business Education. 


110 


Business Administration 


MASHR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

Applicants, as well as continuing students, should read carefully the requirements 
for master’s degree programs, page 71. 

Note: The School of Business Administration and Economics requires that a 
student be classified in order to enroll in graduate courses (500-level) or receive 
prior permission from the Associate Dean for Graduate Programs in the School 
of Business Administration and Economics. 

T1i« Programs for the M.B.A. Dogroo 

The School of Business Administration and Economics offers two plans for the 
M.B.A. degree. 

Plan I is a broad integrated program designed primarily for students with an 
undergraduate degree in a field other than business administration or economics. 
To insure breadth in the program, the student is not permitted to take more than 
nine units in any one functional area. 

Plan n is an integrated program allowing some concentration in an area of spe- 
cialization. Under this plan the student is required to complete 12 units in an area 
of concentration. It is designed primarily for students with baccalaureate degrees 
in business administration and economics. 

The degree is earned by completion of 30 units in courses approved for graduate 
work with an overall grade-point average of not less than 3.0. 

The M.B.A. degree can be achieved via three combinations: 

a. 30 units of coursework; or 

b. 27 units of coursework and an approved project; or 

c. 24 units of coursework and an approved thesis. 

The procedural steps for admission to, and completion of, the Master of Busi- 
ness Administration degree follow: 

ADMISSION AS AN UNCLASSIFIED GRADUATE STUDENT 

1. Apply for admission to the college in unclassified graduate status and declare 
the objective to be an M.B.A. Plan I or an M.B.A. Plan II. If the student specifies 
the M.B.A. Plan II, he must also specify his area of concentration. This must be 
accomplished at the Office of Admissions and Records before the dates estab- 
lished in the college calendar. 

2. Apply for admission to the M.BA. program. Please read carefully page 71, 
and as indicated please secure informal advisement from the Graduate Office of 
the School of Business Administration and Economics. The informal advisement 
should occur at least three weeks prior to your first registration, but in any event 
during the first semester of work. 

Admission to the Graduate Program: Classified Graduate Status 

Please contact the Graduate Office of the School of Business Administration and 
Economics for advisement prior to your first registration, but in any event during 
the first semester of residence. 

Admission to classified status in the graduate program of the School of Business 
Administration and Economics at C)alifomia State College, Fullerton requires: 

1. A bachelor’s degree from a fully accredited college or university. 

2. At least a 2.75 GPA on upper division work ( the last SO per cent of course- 
work) at the under^aduate level, 

or 

At least a 3.0 GPA on the sequential 60 semester units immediately preceding 
the application for classified standing, provided that these 60 units are approved 
by the School of Business Administration and Economics. 

3. Completion of the Admission Test for Graduate Study in Business before or 
during the first semester of residence with a minimum score of 450. 


Ill 


Business Administration 

4. Completion of all prerequisite courses (basic business core subjects) within a 
seven-year period prior to being classified with an overall GPA of 3.0 and 
with no grade lower than 2.0 (C). 

5. Satisfactory completion of a comprehensive examination on prerequisite courses 
(basic business core subjects). 

PLAN I 

Prerequisites 

Acceptance into the program requires the completion of the following pre- 
requisites or equivalent with a grade-point average of not less than 3.0. 

•Math 120 Elementary Probability or Units 

Calculus 3 

•QM 264 Computer Programming 1 

Acetg 300 Accounting Fundamentals 3 

Econ 300 Basic Economics 3 

Fin 330 Business Finance 3 

Mgmt 341 Principles of Management 3 

Mgmt 346 Business Law 3 

Mktg 351 Principles of Marketing 3 

QM 361 Business and Economic Statistics 3 

Total 25 

CURRICULUM 

C^didates under the M3.A. Plan I Program are required to complete 30 units 
of which 6 units are electives. 

The coursework required of all candidates (24 units) under this option is as 
follows: 

Accounting Units 

Required 

t500 Seminar in Industrial Accounting — . 3 

501 Seminar in Administrative Accounting 3 

Electives 

407 Integrated Data Processing Systems 3 

502 Seminar in Accounting Theory 3 

504 Seminar in Contemporary Managerial Accounting Problems 3 

Other 400- and 500-level accounting courses 

Economics 

Required 

510 Competition, Monopoly and Public Policy 3 

512 (Comparative Economics Seminar 3 

Electives 

511 Economic Problems and Public Policy 3 

Other 400- and 500-level economics courses 

* QM 265, Computer Programming and Applications, will satisfy both the mathematics require- 
ment^ and the computer pre^amming requirement, 
t Accoimting majors must substitute another acceptable course for Accounting 500. 


112 


Business Administration 


Finance 

Required Umts 

532 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management.. — 3 

Electives 

533 Seminar in Financial Administration — 3 

534 Seminar in Financial Markets — 3 

535 Seminar in Investment Management 3 

536 Seminar in Risk Management. 3 

537 Seminar in Real Estate Investment — — 3 

Other 400- and 500-level finance courses 


Managament 

Required 

544 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and Administration 3 

EUectives 

541 Seminar in Project Operations Problem Solving 3 

542 Seminar in Labor Relations 3 

543 Seminar in Personnel Administration 3 

545 Seminar in R & D Project Management 3 

548 Seminar in International Management 3 

549 Seminar in Policy Planning and Administration 3 

Other 400- and 500-level management courses 

Marketing 

Required 

551 Seminar in Marketing Problems 3 

EJectives 

452 Marketing Research 3 

552 Seminar in Pricing and Price Policy 3 

553 Seminar in Product Planning 3 

554 Seminar in Promotion 3 

555 Seminar in Marketing Research 3 

556 Seminar in Consumer Behavior 3 

559 Seminar in Marketing Thought and Concepts 3 


Other 400- and 500-level marketing courses (except Marketing 459) 


Quantitative Methods 

Required 

563 Statistical Decision Theory, or 

560 Operations Research 3 

Ellectives 

446 Computer Programming Theory 3 

461 Advanced Statistics 3 

464 Information Structures, Information Storage and Retrieval 3 

465 Linear Programming — 3 

469 Reliability Statistics 3 

561 Seminar in Operations Research — — 3 

565 Seminar on Computers in Industry 3 

566 Design of Experiments 3 

Other 400- and 500-lcvel courses 


113 


Business Administration 


PLAN II 

Prer«quifites 

Acceptance into the program requires the completion of the following prerequi- 
sites or equivalent with a grade-point average of not less than 3.0. 


•Math 120 Elementary Probability or 

Calculus 3 

•QM 264 Computer Programming 1 

Acctg 201AB Elementary Accounting 6 

Econ lOOAB Principles of Economics 6 

Fin 330 Business Finance 3 

Mgmt 341 Principles of Management 3 

Mgmt 346 Business Law 3 

Mktg 351 Principles of Marketing 3 

QM 361 Business and Economics Statistics 3 

Total 31 


In addition to the prerequistes listed above, each student will be held responsible 
to the department of his choice for the specialized undergraduate background (pre- 
requisites) prescribed for that area of concentration. The area of concentration 
shall be selected from finance, management, marketing, and quantitative methods. 

CURRICULUM 

The curriculum required of candidates under the M.B.A. Plan II is as follows: 

1. The required graduate core program in the Plan II M.B.A. shall be 15 to 18 


umts: 

Acctg 500 Seminar in Industrial Accounting 3 

Fin 532 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management 3 

Mgmt 544 Seminar in Organizational Behavior, and Administrtation 3 

Econ 512 Comparative Economics Seminar or 

Econ 510 Competition, Monopoly, and Public Policy 3 

Mktg 551 Seminar in Marketing Problems 3 

QM 563 Statistical Decision Theory, or 
QM 560 Operations Research 3 


2. In addition to the graduate core, each student shall elect an area of concen- 
tration of at least 12 units to be approved by an adviser, the department chair- 
man concerned, and the graduate coordinator. Candidates under the M.B.A. 
Plan II program are required to complete a total of 30 units. 

ADVANCEMENT TO CANDIDACY 
Achievement of this status requires the following 

1. Completion of 12 credit hours of graduate work of which 6 units must be 
500-level with a minimum grade point average of 3.0. 

2. Completion of an application form (in the Graduate Office) approved by the 
adviser, the Associate Dean, Graduate Programs, and/or the Graduate Studies 
Committee. 

COMPLETION 

Comprehensive Examination 

Candidates for the M.B.A. degree must complete the prescribed coursework, 
must satisfactorily pass a comprehensive examination and must receive the endorse- 
ment of the faculty of the School of Business Administration and Economics. 

For further information, consult the Associate Dean, Graduate Programs, in the 
School of Business Administration and Economics. 

See also “The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 

* QM 265, Computer Programming and Applications, will satisfy both the mathematics re- 
quirement and the computer programming requirement. 


114 


Economics 


BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE IN ECONOMICS 

The economics major is designed to prepare students for positions in business 
education, and government, and for graduate work in economics and related dis- 
ciplines. 

Required of all students for the degree: 

1. Completion of 41 semester credit hours of courses in business administration 
and economics in the School of Business Administration and Economics, of 
which 27 semester credit hours must be in upper division courses. 

2. Completion of at least 15 semester hours in the School of Business Admin- 
istration and Economics at the college. 

3. Completion of the major course requirements for economics majors, in the 
School of Business Administration and Economics. Students in economics are 
required to take Quantitative Methods 265 or equivalent as prerequisite to 
Quantitative Methods 361. 

4. Completion of at least 62 semester credit hours in areas other than business 
administration and economics. 

5. Students must attain at least 2.0 grade-point average (C average) in all college 
work attempted, and in all courses in the School of Business Administration and 
Economics. 

Business administration and economics courses required of all students majoring 
in economics are listed below: 


Lower Division 

Course Units 

Eicon 200 or lOOA-B Principles of Economics 5-6 

Acctg 201A-B EHementary Accounting 6 

QM 265 Computer Programming and Applications.— — - 3 


Total 14-15 

Upper Division 

Course 

Econ 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory 3 

Econ 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory 3 

Eicon 410 Government and Business- — 3 

Eicon 420 Money and Banking 3 

QM 361 Business and Economic Statistics 3 

QM 362 Introduction to Quantitative Methods in Economics — 3 

Nine hours of upper division electives in Economics approved by the 
student’s adviser 9 

Total 27 

MINOR IN ECONOMICS 

A minor in economics may be achieved by taking the following courses: 
Economics Units 

200 or lOOA-B Principles of Economics 5-6 

310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory — 3 

320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory 3 

Electives 9 


Total 20-21 


115 


Economics 


MASHR OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 

The Master of Arts in Economics is a part-time, evening (and late-afternoon) 
degree program, designed especially for candidates who will be employed full or 
part-time while working for the M.A. degree. 

The procedural steps for admission to, and completion of, the Master of Arts 
in Economics degree follow. 

Admission Requirements 

1. Apply for admission to the college in unclassified graduate status and declare 
the objective to be a Master of Arts in Economics degree. This must be accom- 
plished at the Office of Admissions before the dates established in the college 
calendar. 

2. Apply for admission to the Master of Arts in Economics program. Please read 
carefully page 71, and as indicated secure informal advisement from the Graduate 
Office of the School of Business Administration and Economics. The informal 
advisement should occur at least three weeks prior to your first registration, but 
in any event during the first semester of work. Specific admission requirements 
include: 

a. An overall grade-point average in all undergraduate work of not less than 2.7. 

b. Competency in mathematics through fulfillment of one of the following: 
C^ourses in college algebra and calculus; completion of C^ifomia State Clollege, 
Fullerton courses QM 265 and QM 362 (or equivalent); satisfactory com- 
pletion of a mathematics proficiency test developed by the Department of 
Economics, comprising mathematical applications in economics. 

c. Satisfactory level of performance in a written examination in economics. 

d. Satisfactory level of performance on the Graduate Record Examination 
(verbal and quantitative), aptitude only. 

e. Interview. 

Pruruquiiltei 

Acceptance into the program requires the completion of the following pre- 
requisite courses, or equivalent: 

1. For students ^without an undergraduate major in econoimcs (a grade-point 
average of not less than 3.0 in the following prerequisites is required) : 

Units 


Principles of economics 6 

Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis 3 

Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis 3 

Statistics (analytical) 3 

Money and banking 3 

Government and business 3 

Total 21 


2. For students with an undergraduate major in econcmdcs: 24 semester units of 
work in economics or related courses (e.g., statistics), with a minimum grade- 
point average of 3.0. The 24 units must include the following courses or 
their equivalent, with a minimum grade of 3.0 in each course: Intermediate 
Microeconomic Analysis, Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis, Statistics 
(analytical), money and banking. 


116 


Economics 


Program 

1. A core of 12 graduate units in economics is required: 

Units 

Economics 502, Advanced Microeconomic Analysis 3 

Economics 503, Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis 3 

Economics 505, Methodology in Economic Research Seminar 3 

Economics 506, Seminar in Micro- and Macroeconomic 

Applications (project required) 3 


Total 12 

2. Electives*: 

a. Elect one graduate course in economics (other than the required core 

courses, and outside the quantitative field) 3 

b. Elect one 400-level or graduate-level course in quantitative or math- 

ematical economics 3 

c. Elect two 400-level or graduate-level courses in fields other than 

economics, yet related to economics and approved as part of the 
student’s integrated program 6 

d. Fleet two 400-level or graduate-level courses both in economics 

or both in other related fields, or one in economics and one in 
other related fields 6 

Total 18 

For further information, consult the Associate Dean, Graduate Programs in the 
School of Business Administration and Economics. 

See also “The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 

* If nine or more units are taken in fields outside economics in elective areas c. and d., then 
three of these uniu must be at the graduate level. 


117 




- - ■.■•'.:•;■ ':'-u-,,. .i'r ■■'' ^. S'C't y.\:v-:rtjy' 

■■■■' ;,V-". A ?■■.■ '■'■.. •’■. . ’ f I ■■ ..- 'U':, V''‘'..i ;■ :. ■; ■ 

'A ^ ^. ..•..>r}, .r'Uj. :;vi j- '•- i^- . :r .tu:. .-r.i-K*:' ^ 

• ; ■ w'v--v-': •_ ; •■■ 

. .. . ■ ,;■ ■ 

/•: 

■ ' ■ ■ ■'■ ^ -v .■ .■■ ■ .■ v,::,. i'f f; 

'.A . ,,;■ r ■■■- :f.,-f (•; , ^ 

..: . '.i.. .; ’V ■ ' ’ • > - » '• A ff 'T'-.'? ^ 

. ■ ., ; .r'';rfr i^Vv * 

r.-y ^ -io' ’ .v ,/7 o 

■ • •''j./i.'i'*!', } . ■' ,v'- 

- V ■ ■: ■ 'v 

^ .* ^ t ' ,^v A-1>0j .;s ^ .h ■ ■ 

■ _ ' ' 

- -- - - ■ . ■_ 

. •' . A'r::'\ ■ ^;r V, -'• t 

‘ ^ 5 - ' ny\.:, -y' 

“ ■•• . ', Air,:; :> l 


EDUCATION 






j 



i r 


' i I 


innii 




'I 


SCHOOL OF EDUCATION 


Dean: Eugene L. McGarry 


Professors: Alexander (Journalism Education), Brockmann, Carr, Coppolino, Croy, 
Cusick, Denno,* Dietz (Art Education), Doane,* Ehmann,* Feldman* (Foreign 
Language Education), Fierman, Gilmore, Hartsig, Jones (English Education), 
Kravitz, Lake, Landon (Music Education), Lay (Mathematics Education), R. 
Lepper (Science Education), McGarry, Schneider (English Education), Turner 
(Science Education) 

Professors Emeritus: Allen, McComb 

Associate Professors: Bennett, Cox (English Education), Donoghue, Good (Speech 
Education), Gould, Holmes, Henry (Theatre Education), Lemmon, McCullough, 
Nelson, Preble, Sica, Smith, Zimmerman (Foreign Language Education) 

Assistant Professors: Bachman (Mathematics Education), Bates, Chadwick (Music 
Education), Ellison (Music Education), Gerfen, Kane, Lyon (Art Education), 
McLaren, Moffet, Nims (English Education), C)sen, Pease, Powlison, Schmidt, 
Simpson, Stark, Streitberger (Science Education), Williams (Science Education) 
Lecturers: Ferguson, Kingdon, Knirk, Langstaff, March, Pagni (Mathematics Edu- 
cation) 

The courses, programs, and services of the school are directed toward the 
following objectives of students: 

1. Master of Science in Education with concentration in elementary curriculum 
and instruction, reading, school administration, school counseling, or special 
education. 

2. Preservice teacher education (elementary school, secondary school, junior 
college, mentally retarded) 

3. In-service teacher education 

4. Professional preparation of administrative and counseling personnel for the 
public schools 

5. Program for the preparation of reading specialists 

6. Major in physical education leading to the bachelor of science degree 

7. Master of Science in Physical Education 

Instruction concentrates on the central principles of human behavior, human 
development, human learning, individual differences, physical activity, the school 
as a basic institution of our culture, the methods and materials associated with 
effective teaching, school administration, school counseling, and the current and 
persistent problems that confront administrators, teachers, counselors and other 
professional workers in educational institutions. In addition to using published 
source materials and attending class sessions for presentations and discussions, many 
of the school’s courses require fieldwork in schools and other educational agencies. 

PUBLICATIONS AVAILABLE FROM SEVERAL DEPARTMENTS 
OF THE SCHOOL OF EDUCATION 

1. Master of Science in Education, Elementary Curriculum and Instruction. 

2. Master of Science in Education, Reading. 

3. Master of Science in Education, School Administration. 

4. Master of Science in Education, School Ck)unseling. 

5. Master of Science in Education, Special Education. 

6. Admission to Teacher Education: Standards, Instructions, Application. 

7. Admission to Student Teaching: Standards, Instructions, Application. 

* College administcative officer. 


121 


Edu€€tflon 

8. Standard Teaching Credential with a Specialization in Ellementary Teaching. 

9. Standard Teaching Credential with a Specialization in Secondary Teaching. 

10. Standard Teaching Credential with a Specialization in Junior College 
Teaching. 

11. Preparation of Teachers of Mentally Retarded Children Program. 

12. Program in Teaching Children with Speech and Hearing Handicaps. 

13. Standard Supervision Credential. 

14. Program for Elementary Internship. 

15. Program for Administrator Internship. 

16. Requirements for the Master of Science Degree in Physical Education. 

PRESERVICE TEACHER EDUCATION 

TEACHER EDUCATION CURRICULA 

California State College, Fullerton is accredited by the California State Board 
of Education for programs leading to the following credentials: 

1. Standard teaching credential with specialization in elementary school teaching 

2. Standard teaching credential with specialization in secondary school teaching 

3. Standard teaching credential with specialization in junior college teaching 

4. Standard teaching credential with specialization, in lieu of minor, in the 
teaching of exceptional children in the area of mentally retarded children. 

5. Standard teaching credential with specialization, in lieu of minor, in the teach- 
ing of exceptional children in the area of speech and hearing handicapped 
children 

6. Restricted teaching credential for services as a speech and hearing specialist. 

7. Restricted teaching credential to teach the trainable mentally retarded. 

8. Restricted teaching credential to teach the educable mentally retarded. 

9. Standard designated services credential with a specialization in pupil personnel 
services. 

10. Standard supervision credential. 

The School of Education has administrative responsibility for teacher education. 
All curricula provide for completing the requirements for graduation with the 
bachelor of arts degree at the end of the usual four collegiate years and an addi- 
tional year of work to satisfy requirements for a teaching credential. Preparation 
for teaching in a junior college requires the master’s degree. Details of the pro- 
grams are provided in special brochures available from the School of Education. 
Information about the professional services authorized by the above credentials 
will be provided by professional advisers. 

PERSONNEL SERVICES FOR TEACHER EDUCATION STUDENTS 

Advisement is available to any student seeking a public school credential and a 
bachelor of arts degree at this college. During registration, the student should 
consult an adviser in the department in which he expects to major and an adviser 
in the School of Education who will help him select courses and build his program. 
A student from another institution should bring transcripts of previous work and 
a tentative selection of courses. Transferred education courses must be of upper 
division level and taken within the past 15 years to be applicable to upper division 
credential requirements. 

ADMISSION TO TEACHER EDUCATION 

To become a candidate for a teaching credential the student must be enrolled, 
in good standing, and must be admitted to “teacher education” in the Office of 
Admission to Teacher Education of the School of Education. Application for 
admission to teacher education should be filed during the first semester of the 
junior year or the first semester of attendance at the college, if the student enters 
with advanced standing. 


122 


Ecfucotfon 


Admission to teacher education is required of each student before he files the 
application for student teaching.t 

A faculty committee will review information concerning the applicant’s intel- 
lectual resources and mastery of important concepts in the common curricular 
areas of higher education, command of fundamental skills of communication 
(English language usage, written composition, speech, hearing, reading compre- 
hension, handwriting, mathematical skills), scholarship, personality and character, 
interest in teaching, and health. Data related to these criteria are gathered from 
transcripts and records from other schools and colleges, group and individual 
tests, personality inventories, estimates of the potential of the applicant, and from 
the Student Health Center. Students should normally qualify for admission and 
be advised of their status during the second semester of the junior year or their 
first semester of attendance if they enter with advanced standing with degrees from 
accredited colleges. 

Students who show weaknesses in any of the fundamental skills of communication 
are advised of their standing. If there are weaknesses in only one or two of the 
areas noted above, the student will be advised of refresher courses and given a 
specified time to meet the standard. 

If the applicant has serious deficiencies in communication skills or does not meet 
the standards of mastery in the common curricular areas, personality and character, 
scholarship, interest in teaching, or health, the faculty committee will deny ad- 
mission to teacher education. 

The student must arrange to take the required battery of group and individual 
tests and inventories necessary to provide information needed by the faculty 
committee. The tests of breadth of understanding, reading, English usage, number 
skills, composition, handwriting, and personality are given by the School of Educa- 
tion for admission to teacher education; consult the Office of Admission to Teacher 
Education of the School of Education for dates. 

The student who comes to CSCF to work toward a credential for teaching in a 
secondary school and who already has a bachelor’s degree must, before he is ad- 
mitted to teacher education, consult with an adviser in the major and must submit 
a statement, signed by the adviser, which indicates the following: 

1. That the student’s undergraduate preparation in his major is considered to be 
adequate for the credential sought, or 

2. Specific courses which the student must complete to have a major adequate 
for the credential sought, and which he must complete before he will be 
admitted to student teaching. These may be in addition to the minimum of the 
six upper division or graduate units required in the major in the postgraduate 
year, or may, in part or in whole, satisfy this six unit minimum requirement. 

Full details on standards and procedures for admission to teacher education are 
described in “Instructions and Standards for Admission to Teacher Education,” 
which is available from the Office of Admission to Teacher Education, Department 
of Elementary Teacher Education, Reading and Secondary and Junior College 
Teacher Education. 


STUDENT TEACHING 

Each candidate for the standard teaching credential with specialization in elemen- 
tary school teaching will do his student teaching in the last semester of his senior 
year or in his postgraduate year at the college. Each candidate for the standard 
teaching credential with specialization in secondary school teaching, or for the 
standard teaching credential with specialization in junior college teaching will do 
his student teaching during a postgraduate year. Details about student teaching in 
special education classes are available in the Office of Special Education. Student 
teaching assignments are made in the elementary and secondary schools of districts 
geographically accessible to the college. Junior college student teaching assign- 

t Exceptions will be made in the case of new transfer students. 


123 


Education 


ments are made in nearby junior colleges. Students will be assigned to work under 
the supervision of carefully selected supervising teachers; a college supervisor makes 
frequent visits to the student teacher and the supervising teacher. Student teachers 
meet in a weekly seminar under the leadership of the college supervisor to discuss 
performance and problems. 

Application for Studont Teaching 

Admission to teacher education as described above is the first step in a cumulative 
and continuing evaluation of a candidate’s fitness to teach. TTie applicant for 
admission to student teaching must have a grade-point average of 2.5 in the major, 
2.5 in the minor, and 2.5 in professional education. Marks of C, or better, are 
required in all professional education courses. Applicants for admission to elemen- 
tary school student teaching must be classified as postgraduate students or be within 
15 units of the baccalaureate degree. Applicants for admission to secondary school 
student teaching or to junior college student teaching must be classified as post- 
graduate students. All applicants must have completed at least 12 units at California 
State College, Fullerton. The applicant must present a favorable report on health 
status and history. He must present evidence of readiness for student teaching 
responsibility as testified by the major adviser, the professional adviser, and other 
college faculty. This evidence relates to scholarship, breadth of understanding, 
command of the subjects to be taught, fundamental skills of communication, person- 
ality and character, interest and potential for teaching, and health. 

Competence is required in all subjects and skills for which the candidate is seeking 
a credential. For the elementary school teacher education student, this includes all 
subjects and skills commonly taught in the first eight grades of the public schools. 
Secondary school and junior college teacher education students must meet the 
requirements for major and minor (s) as specified by the academic divisions. 

All instructors of the college are asked to participate in the continuing evaluation 
of students in relation to those aptitude, personality and character traits which are 
considered essential to admission to the teaching profession. Dependability in 
fulfilling assignments, class attendance, ability to get along with people, industry, 
and emotional stability are representative criteria. In addition to the evaluations 
by instructors, the applicants may be interviewed by a faculty committee, and 
attention will be directed to general appearance, dress, vitality, poise, temperament, 
integrity, and social attitudes. 

The application for admission to student teaching is submitted to the coordinator 
of elementary education or the coordinator of secondary education. The application 
must be submitted by October 15 or March 1 of the semester preceding the 
semester in which the student teaching assignment is expected. A faculty committee 
will gather the information described above and report to the student in time to do 
planning for the following semester. 

Except for graduate students who are in their first semester of study at CSCF, 
applications will be accepted only from those who have completed all requirements 
for admission to teacher education. 

Full details on standards and procedures are described in “Instructions and 
Standards for Admission to Student Teaching,” available in the Department of 
Elementary Teacher Education, Reading and Secondary Teacher Education. 

Study Limits of Student Teachers 

Students who enroll in Educ 339 or 739, Student Teaching in the Elemen- 
tary School, will be limited to one additional course for that semester. Students 
who enroll in Educ 749, Student Teaching in the Secondary School, will be 
limited to two additional courses for that semester. It is expected that students 
will not carry out-of-college work responsibilities during the semester of the student 
teaching assignment. 


124 


Education 


If a student is under hardship because of these limitations, he may submit a 
petition to the coordinator of elementary education or to the coordinator of 
secondary education, as appropriate, requesting permission to carry not more than 
13 units, including student teaching. The petition must set forth, in full, the 
circumstances necessitating the petition. 

Permission to Substitute Teaching Experience for Student Teaching 

A candidate for a teaching credential who has had two years of successful, 
regular teaching experience must petition the School of Education, through his 
professional adviser, for permission to substitute such experience for the student 
teaching requirement. Substitution of teaching experience for student teaching will 
be considered only if the applicant: 

1. Has been admitted to teacher education at the college. 

2. Has submitted an official verification from his former supervisor, principal, 
or superintendent to the School of Education certifying at least two years of 
successful, regular teaching experience at the appropriate level. A form for 
this verification is available in the Office of the School of Education. 

STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS FOR CREDENTIALS FOR TEACHING 

The curricular requirements for credentials for teaching in California elemen- 
tary schools, secondary schools and junior colleges are included in the curricula 
descriptions. Upon the completion of the requirements, the student will submit 
an application for a credential to the State Department of Education in Sacramento. 
On these applications the student is asked about his citizenship status, his profes- 
sional conduct, and he is asked to sign an oath of allegiance. He must also submit 
a health examination form signed by a qualified physician, two fingerprint-identi- 
fication cards and the legal fee, which is currently $20. The forms are available in 
the Credentials Office of the college. 

Curriculum in Elementary School Teacher Education * 

The program leading to the recommendation for the standard teaching creden- 
tial with specialization in elementary school teaching includes the following: 

1. A bachelor’s degree from an approved institution. 

2. A fifth year of college or university postgraduate education taken at the upper 
division or graduate level. (If the student does not complete all requirements, 
the credential may be awarded on the basis of partial fulfillment at the end 
of four or more years of work if he has a bachelor’s degree from an approved 
institution and has completed the student teaching requirement.) 

3. A minimum of 45 semester hours in five of the following six areas: (1) social 
sciences, (2) natural sciences, (3) humanities (excluding foreign languages), 
(4) fine arts, (5) mathematics, and (6) foreign languages. The humanities 
requirement must include a year of English and a course in advanced com- 
position. (To prepare himself to meet professional responsibilities, an ele- 
mentary school teacher education candidate should include in his program 
Art 1(X), Music 101, PE 123, PE 149, and Speech (Dommunication 101 or Speech 
Ck)mmunication 231.) These 45 semester hours of coursework for the credential 
can be met through the college general education requirements for the bach- 
elor’s degree with the proper selection of courses. (Not more than six hours 
of coursework taken to satisfy these requirements shall apply toward the fulfill- 
ment of the requirements for either a major or a minor.) 

4. Three semester hours of coursework in the theory of the structure, arithmetic 
and algebra of the real number system or three semester hours of coursework 
in calculus. (Math Eld 3 03 A meets this requirement.) 

5. One of the following: 

a. A major consisting of at least 24 semester hours of upper division or gradu- 
ate level courses in an academic subject matter area commonly taught in the 

* Regulations for the credential are subject to change by tl^ State Board of Education; any cur- 
ricular changes will be available in later college publications. 

125 


Education 


public elementary schools. These majors are currently available for this 
specialization at the college: American studies, anthropology, art, biological 
science, chemistry, communications with a journalism emphasis, compara- 
tive literature, drama, economics, English, French, geography, German, his- 
tory, linguistics, mathematics, music, philosophy, physics, political science, 
psychology, sociology, Spanish, speech. (Note: the specifications above are 
state minima, and do not necessarily satisfy requirements for a major for 
graduation from the college.) 

b. A major and a minor, each of which is in a subject matter area commonly 
taught in the public elementary schools, and one of which is in an aca- 
demic subject matter area. The academic major shall consist of at least 
24 semester hours of upper division or graduate course work. If the major 
is not an academic one, it shall consist of 28 semester hours of upper division 
or graduate coursework. (With a nonacademic major, i.e., business admin- 
istration or physical education, only the major and minor subjects may 
be taught in kindergarten and grades 1 through 9.) This minor shall consist 
of a minimum of 20 semester hours of coursework. When the major is in an 
academic subject matter area specialized preparation in such areas as men- 
tally retarded or speech and hearing handicapped may be substituted. 

c. Two minors in subject matter areas commonly taught in the public ele- 
mentary schools and a major, other than education and educational method- 
ology, not commonly taught therein. If the major is not in an academic 
subject matter area, each minor shall be in an academic matter area. (With 
a nonacademic major only the major and minor subjects may be taught in 
kindergarten and grades 1 through 9.) If the major is in an academic subject 
matter area, one of the minors shall be in an academic subject matter area. 
These minors shall consist of a minimum of 12 semester hours coursework. 
Specialized preparation in such areas as mentally retarded or speech and 
hearing handicapped may be substituted for one of the minors. 

6. Courses selected from the following ones offered by academic departments 
as part of the basic preparation for elementary teachers. A minimum of 
three courses, selected with the approval of a professional adviser, must be 
completed before student teaching. 

Art 380 Art and Child Development (3) 

English 433 (Children’s Literature (3) 

Math Ed 303B Fundamental Concepts of Mathematics (3) 

Music 333 Music and Child Development (3) 

PE 333 Physical Education and Human Development (3) 

Sci Ed 310 Elementary Experimental Science (3) 

7. Professional education requirements which are currently met by the following 
program: 

Educ 329 Fieldwork in Methods of Teaching in Elementary Schools (1) 
Educ 331 A Elementary School Principles, Curricula, and Methods: Mathe- 
matics, Science, and Social Studies (4) 

Educ 331B EUementary School Principles, Curricula, and Methods: Language 
Arts and Reading (3) 

Educ 339 or 739 Student Teaching in the Elementary School (8) 

Educ 401 Social Foundations of Education (4) 

Educ 411 Psychological Foundations of Education (3) 

Note; Admission to the college does not include admission to the elementary 
teacher education program. Procedures for admission to teacher education are out- 
lined on page 122. It is the responsibility of each student to file an application for 


126 


Education 


admission to teacher education in his junior year and to complete the requirements 
for admission to teacher education before enrolling in Educ 329 and 331. 

Admission to teacher education does not include admission to student teaching. 
E^ch student is responsible for meeting the requirements and following the pro- 
cedures for advnssion to student teaching given on page 123. 

Composite Lower Division, Upper Division, and Fifth Year Work 

A student seeking recommendation for the standard teaching credential with 
specialization in elementary school teaching after five years of preservice teacher 
education should complete — 

In the lower and upper division: 

a. Course work listed in 3, 4, and 5 above. 

b. A minimum of three courses from item 6 above. These courses are to be 
selected in consultation with and with the approval of his professional 
adviser. 

c. Courses in professional education 
Junior year, Educ 411 (3) 

Senior year, second semester, Educ 329 (1), 331 A (4) and 33 IB (3) 

d. Additional courses selected in consultation with his professional adviser. 

In the fifth year: 

a. Courses in professional education 
First semester, Educ 739 (8) 

Second semester, Educ 401 (4) 

b. Additional courses from item 6 above as needed and other courses selected 
in consultation with his professional adviser. 

(The applicant for the standard teaching credential with specialization in 
elementary school teaching must complete 30 units of upper division and/or 
graduate work after he has completed all requirements for the bachelor’s 
degree.) 

A student seeking the standard teaching credential with specialization in elemen- 
tary school teaching on partial fulfillment of requirements should complete — 

In the lower and upper division: 

a. Coursework listed in 3, 4, and 5 above. 

b. A minimum of three courses from item 6 above. These courses are to 
be selected in consultation with and with the approval of his professional 
adviser. 

c. Courses in professional education 
Junior year, Educ 411 (3) 

Senior year, first semester, Educ 329 (1) and 331 A (4) and 331B (3) 

Senior year, second semester. Education 339 (8) 

d. Additional courses selected in consultation with his professional adviser 
In the fifth year (to be completed during the first seven years of teaching) : 

a. Courses in professional education 
Educ 401 (4) 

b. Additional courses from item 6 above as needed and other courses selected 
in consultation with his professional adviser. 

(The applicant for the standard teaching credential with specialization in 
elementary school teaching must complete 30 units of upper division and/or 
graduate work after he has completed all requirements for the bachelor’s 
degree.) 

Alternate Program, Internship 

An alternate program (internship teaching) leading to the recommendation for 
the standard teaching credential with specialization in elementary school teaching 
is available for those who meet the requirements. 


127 


Education 


This program fulfills the fifth year (30 units beyond the bachelor's degree) re- 
quirement and qualifies the candidate for the Standard Teaching Credential with 
an Elementary Specialization. 

This program extends over two summers and two semesters. A student must 
begin the internship program in the summer preceding his internship teaching. 

Standards for admissions to the internship program: 

a. A bachelor’s degree from an approved institution with a major consisting of 
at least 24 semester hours of upper division or graduate level courses in an 
academic subject matter area commonly taught in the public elementary 
schools. 

b. A minimum of 45 semester hours in five of the six areas outlined in No. 3 
on page 125.* 

c. Three semester hours of coursework in mathematics outlined in No. 4 on 
page 125.* 

d. No teaching experience. 

e. A grade-point average of 2.5 in the major. 

f. Minimum achievement requirements on the Graduate Record Elxamination for 
admission to graduate study. 

g. Screening by faculty in Elementary Teacher Education and by cooperating 
school districts. 

h. Sponsorship by a school district as an intern in elementary school teaching. 

(bourses in the program include selection from No. 6 on page 126, the courses in 
No. 7 on page 126, Elduc 496, 537, 595, and one or more electives from the follow- 
ing: 


Educ 503 
Educ 531 
Educ 532 
Educ 533 
Educ 534 


Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Foreign Languages (3) 
Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Language Ans (3) 
Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Mathematics (3) 
Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Science (3) 

Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Social Studies (3) 


Curricula in Preparation of Special Education Teachers 

There are three credential programs and one non-credential program offered by 
the department. The credential programs include the regular mental retardation 
credential, the restricted credential to teach the educable mentally retarded, and 
the restricted credential to teach the trainable mentally retarded. The non-creden- 
tial program is one leading to teaching the educationally handicapped. 

Requirements for the Credential to Teach the Mentally Retarded 

Students who complete the requirements for this credential are qualified to teach 
both the trainable and educable mentally retarded. In addition to completing the 
requirements in special education, the student must also complete the curriculum 
in either elementary or secondary education as described on pages 125 and 131. 
When the major is in an academic area commonly taught in the elementary or sec- 
ondary schools (as appropriate), the 22 units of specialized preparation described 
below (not including student teaching) may be substituted for the minor. Upon 
successful completion of the program, the student will be recommended for the 
standard teaching credential with a specialization in elementary or secondary teach- 
ing with specialized preparation to serve as a teacher of exceptional children, area 
of the mentally retarded. Upon receipt of the credential, the student will be 
authorized to teach in special classes as well as in regular classes at the appropriate 
level. 

Students desiring to prepare as teachers of the mentally retarded should proceed 
as follows: 


* For those M^ho do not meet this requirement, but otherwise qualify for the internship, a 
program will be planned so that the individual ran enter the intemshm pronam and 
meet the requirements of the Currictilum in Elementary School Teacher j^ucation. 


128 


Education 


1. Apply for admission to special education (forms are available in the depart- 
ment office) . 

2. Arrange for a personal interview with a member of the special education 
faculty. 

3. Apply for admission to teacher education as described on page 122. 

4. Upon completion of the necessary prerequisite courses, apply for admission 
to student teaching. Since students completing this program divide their 
student teaching experience between special education and regular education, 
they should apply for admission to student teaching as described on page 123. 
In addition, they must apply for student teaching in special education by 
completing the application form necessary the semester before taking the 
course. 

Students seeking recommendations for this special credential to teach the men- 
tally retarded should complete the courses listed below in lieu of the minor 


required for the Standard Teaching Credential. 

Units 

Educ 471 Exceptional Children 3 

Educ 473 Mental Retardation and Brain Injury 3 

Educ 474 Curriculum and Methods for Teaching the 

Mentally Retarded 3 

Elduc 475 Observation and Individual Instruction with the 

Mentally Retarded 3 

Exluc 779 Student Teaching with Mentally Retarded Pupils 4 

Educ 452 Principles of Guidance 3 

Speech Comm 403 Speech Development 
or Educ 470 Language and Communication Problems of Exceptional 

Children 3 

Electives from courses related to teaching the mentally retarded (4 units); 
electives must be approved by the adviser 

Total number of units in special education not 
including student teaching 22 


Recommended Sequence of Courses in Professional Education for Students 
Preparing as Teachers of the Mentally Retarded 


Elemenfory 

JEduc 411 (3) 


Junior year, first semester 

Junior year, second semester- £duc 471 (3) 


Secondary 

Educ 411 (3) 
Educ 471 (3) 
Educ 340 (3) 


Senior year, first semester— -Educ 331 (8) 

Educ 473 (3) 

Senior year, second semester. -JEduc 474 (3) 

Fifth year, first semester Educ 475 (3) 

Speech Comm 403 (3) 
Electives in special 
education (4) 

Educ 401 (4) 

Fifth year, second semester Elduc 779 (4) 

Educ 739 (4) 

Educ 452 (3) 


Elduc 442 (3) 

Educ 473 (3) 

Educ 474 (3) 

Educ 401 (4) 

Educ 475 (3) 

Speech Comm 403 (3) 
Electives in special 
education (4) 


Educ 779 (4) 
Educ 749 (2) 
Educ 452 (3) 


129 


fducotlon 


Hmqulrmmmnfi for a Hottrirtod Crodontlal to Tooth fho 
idytahim Montalty Rotardod 

Upon completion of the requirements for this credential, an individual is qualified 
for service at all grade levels with service restricted to teaching the mentally 
retarded. Students seeking this credential must: 

1. Obtain the baccalaureate degree. 

2. Complete a fifth year of college work. 

3. Complete 22 hours of course work in special education and related fields. 

4. Complete student teaching with educable mentally retarded children. 

Educ 312 is prerequisite to this credential program. 

Roqyiromontt for a Rowtrlctod Crodontial to Tooth tho 
Trolnohio Mmntolly Rotardod 

Successful completion of this program qualifies the student for a credential 
restricted to the teaching of the trainable mentally retarded. A fifth year of study 
is not required; courses may be completed either as an undergraduate or a graduate 
student. The student does not need to complete requirements for the Standard 
Element^ or Standard Secondary Teaching Credential. 

In addition to the completion of the requirements for the baccalaureate degree 
at California State College, Fullerton or other accredited institutions, the student 
must follow Plan I or Plan II listed below. 


Rotommondod Soqyonto of Cooroot in Profosdonol idotoHon for Stodonft 
Proportng ot Toothors of tho Trolnohio Montolly Rotordod 

b Recommended for students selecting program in the junior year 
(credential will be issued with bachelor's degree upon completion of program) . 
Major: Recommend Psychology, Sociology, or Speech, but others are accept- 
able. 


Junior year, first semester _Educ 411 (3) 

Junior year, second semester Educ 471 0) 

Senior year, first semester Educ 473 O) 

Educ 479 (6) 

Senior year, second semester Speech Comm 403 (3) 

Educ 779 (4) 

Plan lit For Graduate Students 

Urdts 

Educ 411 Psychological Foundations of Elducadon. 3 

Educ 471 Exceptional Children (optional) 3 

Educ 473 .Meni^ Retardation and Brain Injury 3 

Speech Comm 403 Speech Development (optional) 3 

Eiduc 479 Seminar and Practicum in Education of the TMR 6 

Educ 779 Student Teaching with the MentaUy Retarded 4 


The program for preparing teachers of the educationally handicapped is a gradu- 
ate program. Since it leads to no credential, the student must possess either a 
standard elementary or standard secondary credential in order to teach the edu- 
cadonaUy handicapped. Students interested in working with these children should 
consult with a member of the departmental faculty in order to plan their pro- 
grams. Since the curriculum is restricted to g^duate students, it should appeal to 
persons interested in specializing in special education at the master's degree leveL 
(See page 135 for the Master of Science in Education — Special Education) 


130 


tducafion 


Curriculum in Prupomtion of Hooding and Romodiol Hooding Spodolltft 

Teachers who wish to enter the program for the preparation of specialists in 
reading and remedial reading, including both primary and secondary school levels, 
may enroll in the following 18-unit specialty: 


Soguonco of Coursot In Hooding 


Curriculum and Research: Reading 
Etiology of Reading Difficulties — 

Analysis of Reading Difficulties - 

Analysis of Reading Practices 


3 

3 

3 

3 


Educ 506 
Educ 516 
Educ 581 
Educ 582 
or 

Educ 584 Linguistics and Reading - 3 

or 

Educ 585 Word Perception Skills in Reading 3 

Educ 583 A Remedial Reading: Casework 3 

Educ 583B Remedial Reading: Casework 3 

Completion of the reading sequence will entitle the student to a statement of 
completion of the reading specialty. 


Curriculum in Socondory School Toochor Iducotion • 

Credential requirements and die program leading to the recommendation for 
the standard teaching credential with specialization in secondary school teaching 
includes the following: 

1. A bachelor’s degree from an approved institution. 

2. A fifth year of college or university postgraduate education taken at the upper 
division or graduate level. (The postgraduate year is defined by California 
State College, Fullerton as 30 semester uniti of upper division or graduate 
level coursework completed after the bachelor's degree. Counework taken 
through extension at this college and summer workshops offered at this college 
may be used as coursework applying towards the fifth-year requirement.) 

3. Forty-five semester hours of coursework, including the English and the com- 
petency described below, and including four of the following six areas: (1) 
humanities (excluding foreign languages), (2) social sciences, (3) natural 
sciences, (4) mathematics requiring as a prerequisite an understanding and 
knowledge of high school algebra and geometry, (5) fine arts, and (6) foreign 
languages. The humanities requirement must include a year of English, and 
in addition, the applicant for the credential shall demonstrate competence in 
composition cither by passing a course in advanced composition or by paaung 

an examination in lieu thereof. , . , . 

(Noix: This 45 semester hours of coursework for the credential can be met 
through the college general education requirement for the bachelor’s degree 
with proper selection of courses. Not more than six hours of coursework 
taken to satisfy these requirements shall apply toward the major or minor for 

the credential.) , . . ^ j 

4. Preparation in subject matter areas commonly taught m public ^ondary 
schools for the purpose of credential requirements for majors and minors. 

a. One of the foUowing: 

Option 1. A major in an academic subject matter area commonly taught 
in the public secondary schools. 

Option 2. A major and a minor, each of which is in a subject matter area 
^ commonly taught in the public high schools, and one of which 

is in an academic subject matter area. 


• Thi. k the for the stencUrd teachi ng mOenoel with yo al ti a tio o m acopodary 

Credential requireinentt are fab)cct to regulatory changes. Any aoch changes 
will be deecxibed in later colleg e pu b l ications . 


131 


Education 


b. Major requireinents for the credential must include at least 24 upper divi> 
sion and graduate level units. At least six units in the major must be taken 
at the graduate level. Six postgraduate units in the minor may be taken in 
lieu of this requirement for the major. See the general course numbering 
code on page 217 for the description of graduate level courses for the cre- 
dential. Also see the appropriate sections of this catalog for descriptions of 
requirements in specific majors. The college will recognize single subject 
areas as satisfying Option 1 provided the student supplies additional upper 
division or graduate units in supporting areas structured by the department 
in which the baccalaureate degree is taken and in consiiltation with the 
other departments involved. This option should be considered carefully, 
since it nuy not be practical in terms of job placement. Some departments 
of the college will require that the student must present a minor. Stu- 
dents must consult with academic and professional advisers concerning 
Option 1. 

c. Minor requirements vary, but must include 20 units in a single subject in 
this credential program at CSCF. (Note: A minor is not required for 
graduation from the college but is required for the recommendation of the 
college for Option 2.) 

Each student will complete a major planned with and approved by his 
major adviser. Majors presently available are: American studies, art, biology, 
business administration, chemistry, communications with journalism em- 
phasis, drama, economics, English, French, geography, German, history, 
mathematics, music, physical education, physics, political science, Spanish, 
and speech. 

Each student will complete a minor planned with and approved by his 
professional adviser. Minors presently available are: American studies, art, 
biolog>\ business education, chemistry, communications with journalism 
emphasis, drama, economics, English, French, geography, German, history, 
mathematics, music, physical education, physics, political science, Spanish 
and speech. Students may also present specialized preparation to serve as a 
teacher of exceptional children in the area of the mentally retarded or 
speech and hearing handicapped in lieu of the minor. 

Students majoring in business administration and physical education must 
have an academic minor with a minimum of 20 units in subjects commonly 
taught in the public secondary schoob. Students with these majors must 
complete 12 units of upper division or graduate level w'ork in the minor 
area. 

5. Cred^dal requirements in courses for preservice professional education are 
met in the following program in professional education: 


Comrtm* Im Profmnional fdirccrtioii 


Units 


Educ 340 Principles and Curricula of Secondary Educadoo 3 

Educ 401 Social Foundadons of Educadon 4 

Educ 411 Psychological Foundadons of Educadon 3 

Educ 442 Teaching (art, English, etc.) in the Secondary Schools (also 

listed in respeedve departments) 2 

Educ 449 Field Work in Methods of Teaching in Secondary Schools 1 

Educ 749 Student Teaching (art, English, etc.) in the Secondary School 
and Seminar (also listed in respeedve departments) 6 


Students normally will begin their work in professional educadon in the junior 
year, and it is expected that, except for Educ 401, the courses above w'ill be taken 
in the indicated sequence. Students w'ho begin their work in professional educadon 
as seniors or as graduate students will follow* a somewhat different sequence, and 


132 


iduc€tfion 


should consult professional advisers when planning their programs. Graduate 
students without professional education backgrounds may be required to extend 
their program beyond a single academic year to complete the college secondary 
school teacher education program. Coursework taken in extension at other insti- 
tutions is not acceptable in substitution for any of the above courses. In all cases, 
students are required to take Educ 340 the first semester they are enrolled in 
professional education. 

Notm: Admission to the college does not include admission to the secondary 
school teacher education program. See the description on page 122 for the 
procedures for admission to teacher education which does include admission to this 
credential program. It is the responsibility of each student to file his application 
for admission to teacher education by the end of the semester in which he com- 
pletes Educ 340. It is also the responsibility of each student to arrange to 
complete his requirements for admission to teacher education early in his work 
in professional education. Students must be admitted to teacher education prior 
to taking Educ 442 and 449. * 

Admission to teacher education does not include admission to student teaching. 
See the description of the procedures for admission to student teaching on page 
123. The student must obser\’e the deadline and must meet other requirements for 
admission to student teaching. 

Curricvlwm in Junior Cellogo Toodior Idvcotlon 

The program requirements leading to the college-recommended standard teach- 
ing credential with a specialization in junior college teaching are: 

1. A master’s or higher degree from CSCF or other accredited institution. 

2. Preparation in subject matter areas commonly taught in public junior iCoUeges 
in either of the following: 

a. An academic major in a single subject commonly uught in public junior 
college. (The subject in which a master^s degree has been granted consti- 
tutes a major in that subject for these purposes.) 

b. If the major is nonacademic (the candidate hol^ a nuster's degree in a 
subject such as business administration or physical education), the can- 
didate must have an academic minor of a minimum of 20 semester hours 
in a single subject commonly taught in the public junior college. Twelve 
of the units in the minor must be of upper division or graduate level. 

3. Professional education requirements in CSCF recommended program: 

Units 

Educ 744 Principles of Junior College T each i ng 3 

Educ 799 Junior College Student Teaching and Seminar 4 

Admission fo Junior Colfogo Imathar idmtatiom Program 

Admission to the college does not constitute admission to junior college teacher 
education. 

The candidate must: 

Have a master’s or higher degree from a fuDy accredited institution in a field 
in which the college offers a major 
or 

have classified graduate status (master’s degree candidacy) at (SCF and 
possess a baccalaureate degree. 

Admission to junior college teacher education follows in general the procedure 
described on page 122. For exact procedures see Office of Admissions to Teacher 
Education. 

The student is responsible for filing his application for admimon as early as 
possible and is also responsible for admission to teacher education. 


133 


Education 


Application for junior college student teaching and seminar is not included in 
admission to the program. The student is responsible for following the procedures 
listed on page 124 under “Application for Student Teaching.” 

The courses in professional education listed above will be taken in sequence. 
The student must have postgraduate standing before he enrolls in these courses. 
Student teaching may be taken in either the last semester in which the master's 
degree will be completed or after the degree has been granted. 

N3.: The above is a description of the program leading to the recommenda- 
don of the college for the credendal. This program includes student teaching 
and work in professional education not required by the sute. The college pro- 
gram is designed to meet the job placement needs of candidates for poddons 
in junior colleges. 

Fr^frcm Laoding to tho Colifomio Crodontiol— Spooch and HooHng Spodallst 

Students wishing to pursue the major in Speech and Hearing and to complete a 
fifth year for the “Restricted Teaching Credendal for Services as a Speech and 
Hearing Specialist” (1967) should follow the major for speech for the BA. degree 
with emphasis in speech pathology and audiology to be followed by a fifth year 
of adviser-approved specialized preparadon. 

Required in the undergraduate and graduate years will be the compledon of 
65 semester units consdtudng a well-integrated program that includes 18 semester 
units in courses that provide fundamental informadon applicable to the normal 
development and use of speech, hearing, and language, and their reladonship to the 
educadve process, and 42 semester units in courses that provide informadon about 
and training in the management of speech, hearing, and language disorders and that 
provide informadon supplementary to these fields. 

Details of this teacher educadon program are found on page 206. The program 
is administered by the Department of Speech (Communication in consultation with 
the School of Educadon. 

Sfon^ord Toaching Crodantiol witli Spaciollsotion in Spnadi and Hoaring in Uaw 
of Minor 

A major other than speech and hearing is required for the clinical speech and 
hearing program taken in lieu of a minor. See an adviser in the Department of 
Speech Communicadon for details of this program. 


ADVANCED CREDENTIAL PROGRAMS 

Adminiftration and Soponriftion 

Students are required to take Educ 503, Foundadons of Administradve Leader- 
ship, during their first registradon in school admmistration, or be accepted in the 
internship in school administration. To continue in the program beyond this course 
the student must be granted a “lener of admission to the program” and possess an 
official CSCCF program evaluadon. Both the internship and the regular credendal 
program are an integrated whole. Students who desire only isolated courses from 
the program are normally denied admission to such courses. Elzperienced school 
administrators, holding a C^fomia Administradve credendal and exempt from 
degree requirements may register for any course in the School Administradon con- 
centradon. Teachers wishing to take courses in school administradon directed at 
helping them to understand administradon problems are welcome to take selected 
courses. 

A selected number of teachers, who have completed a minimum of five years 
teaching experience, will be offered an opportunity' to study and to praedee school 
administradon as school interns in administradon. A candidate must obtain admis- 
sion to the program and agreement must be reached with a sponsoring school or 
college district to employ the candidate as a full-time administrator during the 


134 


iduc€rtion 


school year. All candidates will be given a temporary credential for sopenriiion and 
administration according to the regulations of the California Administrative Code, 
Title V, Section 6555. Such candidates should register in two courses: 

Educ 561 Organization of School Systems 
Educ 563 Principles of School Personnel Administration 
^ Both courses must be completed in the summer session if the student is to do his 
internship beginning in the fall semester. Applications for admission to the admin- 
istrator internship program should be sent to Dr. Elmest G. Lake, Chairman, Intern- 
ship Program in School Administration, by June 1. Careful planning of electives 
will enable candidates to receive the master of science degree in education with a 
concentration in school administration upon further study after completing the 
requirements of the internship. 

Pupil Purtoimul Survicut 

Pupil Personnel Services offers work toward the credentials for school counseling, 
school psychometrists and school psychologists. (The Standard Designated Services 
Credential with Specialization in Pupil Personnel Services.) Students must check 
with an appropriate adviser to plan a program of study. 

Couftfu/lfif 

Students begin work for the credential by taking Educ 452, Principles of Guid- 
ance. Other courses in this credential program include: Educ 471, Excepoonal 
C^iildren; 509, Theory and Practice in Measurement; 510, Research Analysis and 
Design; 550, Ounseling Theories and Processes; 551, Educational and Career 
Orientation; 552, Group Processes in Guidance; 555, Dynamics of Individual 
Behavior and Case Study; 559AB, Fieldwork in Pupil Personnel Services. 

PsydioMUtry 

Students preparing for the psychometry credential complete the work in coun- 
seling and include ^chology 461, Group Psychological Testing; Psychology 531, 
Individual Mental Testing, Educ 559AB, Fieldwork in Psychometry; and co^- 
work in learning or behavior disorders depending on the needs of individual 
students. 

Sclioul Pfyckology 

Students preparing to be school psychologists add to the work in counseling and 
psychometry two 5-unit seminars. These are Educ 558A, School Psychology: 
Seminar in Personality Diagnosis; and Educ 558B, School Psychology; Seminar in 
Problems of Learning. In addition students will be employed fuU time as psychome- 
trists or do a minimum of 20 hours per week in fieldwork in school psychology. 

GRADUATE PROGRAMS 

MASTIR OF SCIENCf IN IDUCATIOH 

Ouuurul ClMiructuHftics 

This degree is reserved for professionally qualified graduate students wlw de^e 
to prepare for or advance their careers in school counseling^ school admsmstrationf 
specud education^ readingt or eUmensary curriculum and instructi^ Most students 
in school counseling and administration can meet credential requirements in cither 
pupil personnel services or administration (including supervision) while completing 
the degree. 

RruruquIsHus 

Most programs have as prerequisites a teaching credential, successful teaching 
experience, an approved major, acceptable scores on the Graduate Record Examina- 
tion (area tests or aptitude test), a 2J grade-point average on previous academic 


135 


iducafion 


and related work, and screening into the program on the basis of the prerequisites 
and professional leadership criteria. Credit will be given for previous postbacca- 
laureate studies when possible. Otherwise well-qualified students may be admitted 
to the college with limited subject or grade deficiences, but these dehciences must 
be removed. Grade-point average deficiencies may be removed by a demonstration 
of competency in the graduate program. 

Pr»f rams •# Sfwdy 

Elementary Curriculum and Instruction 

The adviser-approved 30 units (minimum) on the study plan will include the 
following: 

Units 

Coursework outside elementary education 9 

Two of the following: 

Educ 402 Comparative Education (3) 

Educ 403 History of Education (3) 

Educ 406 Educational Sociology (3) 

Educ 452 Principles of Guidance (3) 

Educ 501 Philosophy of EUlucation (3) 

Educ 509 Theory and Practice in Measurement (3) 

Educ 510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Other adviser-approved courses (3) 

Coursework in elementary educatkm 15 

Educ 537 Seminar for Elementary Education (3) 

Three of the following: 

Educ 530 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: 

Foreign L4mguages (3) 

Educ 531 Graduate Studies in Elementary EUlucadon: 

Language Arts (3) 

Educ 532 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: 

Mathematics (3) 

Educ 533 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: 

Science (3) 

Educ 534 Graduate ^dies in Elementary Education: 

Social Studies (3) 

One of the following: 

Educ 597 Graduate Project (1-2) (total of 3) 

Educ 596 Thesis (1-2) (total of 3) 

Electives selected with approval of the adviser 6 

For further mformation, consult the Chairman, 


Reading 

The adviser-approved 31-33 units on the study plan will include the following 
Studies: 


Uniu 


Educ 510 Research Design and Analysis 3 

Supporting courses from ocher disciplines 9 

Courses for the concentration in reading 18 

Educ 506 Curriculum and Research: Reading (3) 

Educ 516 Etiolo^ of Read^ Difficulties (3) 

Educ 581 Analysis of Reading Difficulties (3) 

Educ 582 Analysts of Reading Practices (3) 


or 

Educ 584 Linguistics and Reading (3) 
or 


136 


iducttfion 


Educ 585 Word Perception Skills in Reading (J) 

Edac 583 A Remedial Reading: Casework (3) 

Elduc 583B Remedial Reading: Casework (3) 

Educ 597 Graduate Project (1-3) 
or 

Educ 598 Graduate Thesis (1-3) 

Of 

A comprehensive examination (1) i-j 

For further information^ consult the Chairman, 

School Administration 

Students concentrating in school administration will take Educ 503, Foundations 
for Administrative Leadership, as soon as they identify their interest in this M^. 
degree. The adviser-approved 30 units (minimum) on the study plan will include: 

Unht 

Master's degree studies, supporting courses 9 

Educ 510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Adviser-approved courses (outside die student's area of specialization 
and outside the Department of School Administration (6) 

Courses for the Concentration in School Administration * 18 

Ail of the following: 

Educ 505 Supervision of Curriculum (4) 

Educ 561 Organization of School Systems (3) 

Educ 563 Principles of School Personnel Administration (2) 

Educ 564 Seminar in School Law (2) 

Educ 565 Seminar in School Finance, Business Administration and 
Buildings (3) 

Educ 567A Fieldwork and seminar in School Administration (Includes 
Project or Thesis) (2) 

Educ 567B Fieldwork and seminar in School Administration (Includes 
Project or Thesis (2) 

One of the following 3 

Educ 566 The Elementary School Principal and Supervisor (3) 

Educ 586 The Secondary School Principal, Junior 0>Uege Administra- 
tor and Supervisor (3) 

For further information^ consult the Chairman. 

School Counsoling 

Students concentrating in school counseling will take Educ 452, Principles of 
Guidance as soon as they identify their interest in thb concentration in the M. S. 
Education degree. At or near the end of this course students are normally admitted 
to this program by a screening process. Students who transfer this course in from 
other insdtutioos must see an adviser for approval of the next course before con- 
tinuing in the program. This second course then becomes the screening course for 
transfer students. 

The adviser-approved 30 units (minimum) on the study plan will include the 
following: 

Units 

A. Nine units outside the area of specialization 9 

1. Educ 510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

2. Six units selected with the approval of an adviser (6) 

* Though the reqaireisents for the M.S. decree ere not ideatical with the reqaiiemeats for the 
credentiel, e quelified student can acmere both obieedmes with careful plt»»4tig Consult 
joax adriaer for details. 


137 


Education 


B. Twcnty-onc units in the concentration in counseling 21 

1. Educ 551 Educational and Career Orientation (3) 

2. Educ 552 Group Processes in Guidance (3) 

3. Educ 553 Administration and Organization of Pupil Personnel 
Programs (3) 

4. Educ 555 Dynamics of Individual Behavior and Case Study (3) 

5. Educ 559A»B Fieldwork in Pupil Personnel Services (3-3) 

6. Educ 597 or 598 Graduate Project or Thesis (1-2; total of 3) 

For further mformatioti, consult the Chairman, 

Special Education 

The following information is provided to assist students in planning programs 
and in seeking admission to classified graduate status. Students should consult the 
Graduate Bulletin for information concerning standards for graduate study, steps 
in the master’s degree program, and graduate policies and procedures. This pub- 
lication is available from the Office of Graduate Studies. 

Obf«ctfv*t of tho Omgroo Program: 

The program is designed: 

1. To help individuals interpret and implement research related to exceptional 
children, conduct appropriate research in the classroom and/or clinic^ set- 
ting, become skilled in their abilities to diagnose with educational instruments 
and obsers’adon techniques, interpret the results of diagnostic procedures, 
prescribe and implement educational strategies. 

2. To provide teachers with competencies to enable them to fulfill the role of 
supervising teachers and demonstration teachers in special classes. 

3. To prepare individuals for positions of leadership in the field of special 
education. 

4. To prepare individuals to pursue graduate work toward the doctoral degree. 

Prorogvishoi for Admission fo tho Program: 

1. A baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution. 

2. At least 2J grade-point average in previous academic and related work. 

3. An acceptable score on the Graduate Record Elxamination — Aptitude Test. 

Stops im tho fAatror^% Dogroo Program (too Oradoato Ballotlmk 

Courses Required for the Degree: 

Units 

A. Nine semester hours of adviser-approved courses outside the area of 
special education 9 

1. 3 hours in basic research (Met by Educ 510 (3) or 

and Educ 509 (3)) 

2. Administration (Met by 6 units of advker- 

or approved courses) 

Glinic orientation 
or 

Teaching strategies 
or 

Gommunicadon and 
Interpersonal reladons 
or 

Educadonal technology 
or 

Inter- and intracoltural 
studies 


138 


Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation 

B. Twcnty-onc semester hours of adviser-approved courses selected from 
the area of special education - 21 

1. 4-6 units of thesis (Met by Educ 514 (3) 

or project jnJ 

Educ 597 or 598 (1-3)) 

2. 2-5 units of pracdcum (Met by Educ 572 (2-4) 

or 

Educ 496 (1-3)) 

3. 10-15 units of special education (Met by adviser-approved special 
specialization education courses at the 

400 and 500 level) 

for further information^ consult the Chairman. 

Also see “The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and the Graduate 
Bulletin, 

DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH EDUCATION, PHYSICAL 
EDUCATION AND RECREATION 

Professors: Johnson (Chairman), Omalev, Pastor 

Associate Professors: Barrett, Caine, Fulton, Hanauer, Lttde, Stovall, Yeans 
Assistant Professors: Fardy, Scheel, Witchey 
Instructors: Matson, Wolfe 
Lecturers: Coury, Moore, Weinmann 

iACHILOR Of SCIINCI IN PHYSICAL IDUCATION 

The department offers a bachelor of science in physical education for students 
preparing to teach, for thoae preparing to pursue graduate work in physical edu- 
cation and for those preparing for careen in buiinet^ industry and government 
service. 

The major consists of 40 units in health education, physical education and recre- 
ation, and six units of electives in upper division in supporting and related fields. 
Electives are to be approved by the students* departmental adviser. Requirements 
for the major, including proficiency requirements, prerequisite and lower division 
courses, arc indicated below. 

ProAclancy ■•qyiram^ats tf Sfydaati 

All physical education majors most demonstrate proficiency in the areas of 
aquatics, rhythms, gymnastics, combatives (men), modem dance (women) and in 
individual and team sports. Intensive skill courses in these areas should be uken 
in the lower division. All major students must attain satisfactory proficiency in all 
categories listed below in any one of the following ways; 

1. (Complete courses PE 205 Professional Activities 
Sports/Dance series (4 courses at two units each) 

or 

2. Pass proficiency screening test as administered by the course instrurtor. 


139 


Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation 
MAJOR IN PHYSICAL IDUCATION 

Pr«r*qwUlt«t UftitJ 

Chemistry 100* Introductory Chemistry 4 

or 

Physics 211 A* Elementary Physics 4 

or 

Physical Sci 201* Modem Physical Science 4 

Biological Sci 101 Elements of Biology 5 

Biological Sci 3dl Mammalian Anatomy and Physiology 4 

Total 13 

ll•cfiv•fl IfifardUciplinory 

Six units of electives in upper division in supporting or related fields. Elec- 
tives will be approved by the student's departmental adviser 6 

Total 6 

CowrMt in HmIHi, Phytlcol Idwcotlon and Rocraotlon 

Lower Division (all required) 

HE 101 Personal and Community Health . 2 

HE 102 Prevention and First Aid 2 

PE 201 Introduction to Physical Education and Recreation 3 

Rec 203 Recreation Programs and Activities- 2 

Total 9 

Upper Division fall required) 

PE 324 Theory and Principles of Human Motor Learning 3 

PE 325 Case Sadies in Human Motor Learning 3 

PE 416 Kinesiology 3 

PE 417 Physiology of Exercise 3 

PE 418 Adapted and Corrective Activities 3 

HE 419 The School Health Program 3 

PE 420 Tests and Measurements in Physical Education 3 

Total 21 

Upper Division (Any five courses) f 

PE 311 Analysis of Aquatics 2 

PE 312 Analysis of C^batives 2 

PE 313 Analysis of Folk, Square and Social Dance 2 

PE 314 Analysis of Individual and Dual Sports 2 

PE 315 Analysis of Modem Dance (W)-- 2 

PE 317A3 Analysis of Team Sports (W) 4 

PE 318 Analysis of Team Sports (M) 2 

PE 319 Analysis of Gymnastics and Tumbling 2 

Total 10 

Total in health, physical education and recreation - 40 


* Chrmistry or physics or physical science as tau^t at California State Collect, FoUenoo. 


140 


Health Education, Phyilcal Educcttion and Recreation 


MINOt IN PHYSICAL IDUCAT10N 

A minor consists of 22 units of work ts listed below: 

Lower Division: HE 102, P£ 201, Rec 203. 

Upper Division: PE 324, 416 or 417, 419 or 420 tnd select tny three courses 
(6 units) from the analysis series: t 
PE 311, 312, 313, 314, 315, 317A3. 318. 319. 

For information about teaching credentials, consult the Credentials Office or the 
chairman of the department. 

MASHR OF SaiNCI IN PHYSICAL IDUCAT10N 
Oo«»oral Cfioroctoristics 

The program of studies leading to this degree is designed to prepare carefully 
selected individuals as master teachers of physical education by providing the 
technical knowledge and scholarship necesnry to interpret to others through 
modem methods of education: (I) the basic subject maner of physical education; 
(2) the conduct and application of experimental research pertinent to physical 
education; (3) the ability to evaluate critically the basic isnics affecting physical 
education; and (4) the application of concepts from related fields having signifi- 
cance for physical education. 

The program is also designed to prepare teachers of physical education at the 
college level as well as to provide the background for continued study in a doctoral 
program in physical education. 


Profw^uisltot 

Prerequisites to the program include: 

(1) completion of 24 approved upper division units in physical education; 

(2) a grade-point average of iJO or better, for all upper dhriaion work uken in 
Physical education and a 2J GPA for all previous college work. (Contin- 
gency provisions: grade-point deficiencies in individual courses in physical 
education may be met by taking 6-12 hours of approved coorses at California 
State 0)Uege. Fullerton, and earning a JjO GPA in these courses. Such 
courses, while counted toward the prerequisites for the master of science 
program, may not be used to fulfill the program requirementi.) 

(1) of the Aptitude Test of the Graduate Record Eiamination. 


Frogram ol S4w^y 

The degree study plan normaUy consists of 30 units of graduate counework 
with a GPA of JJO or better. Counework shall include 21 units of 50O-level coorses 
of which 10 units shall be in the core studies. Further work includes 12-17 units in 
physical education electives with eight of these units concentrated in one special 
area. Six units of work must be in disciplines other than physical education. A 
ihesb and an oral examination at the conclusioo of the program are required; a 
written examination may also be required. 

L Core Studies (minimum 10 units) 


PE 510 Research Design in HEPER- 

PE 598 Thesis 

At least one of the following: 

PE 515 Seminar in Physical 


PE 516 Philosophical Bases of Physied E du catio n - 
PE 520 International Physical Education 


IL Electives (12-17 units) in Physical Education, including a minimum of eight 
tintrx in one of the following concentrations: 

(PE 599 Independent Research, 1-3 units, may be applied to any of the con- 
centrations which follow.) 

srsis — “ • — 


141 


Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation 


A. Administrative: Units 

PE 532 Curriculum Design in Physical Education — . 3 

PE 530 Administration and Supervision of HEPER 3 

PE 533 Facilities Development and Planning 2 

B. Scientific: 

PE 552 Human Bio-Kinedcs 3 

PE 555 Scientific Bases of Training 3 

PE 551 Seminar: Advanced Study in Physiology of Exercise 3 

PE 545 Seminar in Evaluation in Physical Education 3 

PE 540 Seminar in Problems in Adapted Physical Education 3 

C Scientific Sports: 

Must include two courses from the scientific area above: 

PE 560 Advanced Study in Performance: 

(a) Tennis-Badminton 2 

(b) Gymnastics 2 

(c) Track and Field 2 


III. Supporting courses from other disciplines 6 

For further details, constilt the Chairman of the Health Education, Physical Educa- 
tion and Recreation Department. 

See also “The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and Graduate Bulletin. 


142 


ENGINEERING 




■ f?e emetic I!} 


- ' 








SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING 


Dean: Robert G. Valpey 


Professors: Cohn, El-Sadcn (Chairman, Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering), 
Hunt (CHiairman, Electrical Engineering), Valpey 
Associate Professors: Chiang (Chairman, Structural Engineering and Engineering 
Mechanics), Kemmerly, Thomas 

Assistant Professors: Ho, Hudetz, Krishnamurthy, Kwon, Monzingo, Raczkowtki, 
Rizza, Tuazon 
Lecturer: Kreiner 

COUKSIS IN INOINIIIINO 

The School of Engineering offers programs at the undergraduate and graduate 
levels. The individual courses are described in the section of this catalog on 
announcement of courses. At the undergraduate level the school prescribes certain 
patterns of courses combined with those of other academic departments and schools 
of the college, as a program of 132 semester units leading to the degree of Bachelor 
of Science in Engineering. At the graduate level the school offers a sequence of 
courses as a program of 30 semester units leading to the degree of Master of 
Science in Elngineering. In the graduate program speafic options in ma)or fields 
arc offered. 

iACHELOII Of SCIINCI IN INOINIItINO 

The objective of the undergraduate engineering program is to form a broad 
base of science, mathematics, social science, humanities and engineei^ science- 
coupled with enough specialization in an area of concentration to initiate a success- 
ful engineering career. Students are prepared to enter directly into engineering 
practice or to continue further education at the graduate level. 

The hean of the engineering program b a core curriculum somewhat broader 
than that of the traditional engineering program. Thb core includes courses in 
mathematics, physics, chemistry, basic engineering sciences, social sciences and the 
humanities and provides a firm basb for more specialized knowledge at an advanced 
level Beyond the basic core curriculum a student chooses a minimum of 30 units 
of technical electives to complete hb program wbh enough specialization in an 
area of concentration to initiate a successful engineering career. During the first 
234 years of study all students in engineering take the same program emphasizing 
the intcr-rcladonship of the primary engmeering subjects which form the broad 
background required of modern-day engineers. 

The program of 132 semester units presumes that the entering student brings a 
high school preparation which includes geometry, trigonometry and two yean of 
algebra. Physics or chembtry, preferably both, are highly desirable. A course in 
mechanical drawing will be helpful. Students deficient in mathematics may take a 
spedal preparatory' course. Engineering 100, Introduction to Analysts, which wdl 
not carry credit for graduation. A placement examination b required in math- 

thematics. . 

A smooth transition from a junior college mto upper-division engineenng ts 
assured when the foUowing program, as a minimum, has been completed. Students 


145 


inginmering 


deficient in any of these areas may look to our summer catalog for offerings that 
may make up any deficiencies: 

Minimum Number of 
Semester Units 


Analytic geometry and calculus 14 

Chemistry (for engineering and science majors) 8 

Physics (for engineering and science majors) 12 

En^eering graphics 2 

Properties of engineering materials 2 

(Computer programming (FORTRAN) 2 

Electric circuits 4 

Analytical mechanics (statics) 3 


TiCHNICAL ILECTIVIS 

During the junior year the student shall submit a proposed study plan to his 
faculty adviser covering the sequence of upper-division level courses totaling not 
less than 30 units in engineering and closely related fields. He must have approval 
of this program before taking any technical electives. At least 15 of these units 
shall be in an area of concentration which will provide continuity and depth of 
understanding in a given area of specialization. A student shall include at least 
two senior-level engineering laboratories within his area of concentration and one 
design course within his area of concentration in the 30 units of technical electives. 
Elxamples of areas of concentration currently available are: electronics, communi- 
cations, control systems, digital systems, aeronautics, heat and mass transfer, ther- 
mal sciences, mechanical design, structural systems, structural design, applied me- 
chanics, etc. In lieu of these areas of concentration a student may request the 
engineering science program. The program in engineering science is to be selected 
by the student and his adviser and submitted for approval to a committee of the 
School of Engineering (supplemented, if appropriate, by members of the science 
and nuthemadcs faculty). The courses are to be selected from upper-division 
eleedves in engineering, physics, chemistry, mathemadcs and biology (addidonal 
prerequisites for science courses may be required), to meet a special and specific 
engineering science objeedve of the student such as engineering physics, computer 
science, premedical, etc. Note that specific engineering courses, in addidon to the 
two senior-level engineering laboratones and one design course, may be required 
by the adviser or the committee. 

Work taken at another college or university on which a grade of D w'as earned 
may not be subsdtuted for upper-division courses. 

MINIMUM RIQUIREMENTS FOR UNDIRORADUATl DiOREE 
Low*r DIvUion Sd*iK* and Mathamoflcs (All roqulrod for R.S.) 

•Math 150A, B Analydc Geometry and C^alculus 

Math 250 Intermediate Galculus 

Math 281 Linear Algebra with Differential Equadons 

Chem lOlA General Chemistry 

Chem 105 General Chemistry for Engineers 

Physics 225A, B, C Fundamental Physics 

Physics 2 26 A, B, C Fundamental Physics Laboratory 


Units 

8 

4 

3 

5 

_ 3 

9 

3 


35 


* Students with inadeq^te preparation (or Mathematics 150A will take Enaiiseeiinc 100, 
Introduction to Analysis. 


146 


inginmmring 


Vfdts 

Noii-«iigin««rin 9 O«ii«rol ldiK«tl«ii - - - . - 28 

The engineering student will take at least 24 units from Areas II and III of 
the general education requirements for the bachelor’s degree (see page 68), 
six units of which may meet the U5. history and government requirements. 

He will foUow, as a minimum, the collegewide requirements, adding courses 
at his discretion to make 24 units. An additional four units, for a total of 28 
must be specifically approved by his adviser and will be recommended to 
assure the best balance for the student’s education. A student shall be limited 
to a maximum of six units of activity courses. 

Lowar Division InginooHng (All roqulrod for 1,8.) 


Egr 101 Introduction to Engineering — — ■■ - - I 

Egr 102 Graphical Analysis - ■ ■■ — 2 

E^ 201 Mechanics - ; 5 

Egr 202 Properties of Enpneering Materials J 

Egr 205 Digital Computation 2 


Uppor Division Inglnooring (All roqoirod for I.S.) 


11 


Egr 300 Dectric Circuits ■ ^ 

Egr 300L Electric Circuits Laboratory 1 

Egr 302 Dynamics — ^ 

Egr 303 Electronics ^ 

Egr 303L Electronics Laboratory I 

Egr 304 Thermodynamics 5 

E^ 305 Transport Processes 5 

Egr 306A Unified Laboratory I 

Egr 306B Unified Laboratory I 

Egr 306 Engineering Analysis ^ 

Egr 312 Linear Systems Analysis 5 

Egr 370 Seminar in Engineering I 

Egr 417 Engineering Economy 2 


Tochnicol nocthros 


28 

30 


Total 

ditail ouniHi Of rypicAi • EioNT-sfMisni p kookam 


__132 


fOt 1,8. in inginiuino 

(113 Units) 

Snnmstnr 1 fmsIinMn 

General Education Elective -- ^ 

Math 150A Calculus — — * ^ 

Chem lOlA General Oiemistry 5 

Egr 101 Introduction to Engineering 1 

Egr 102 Graphical Analysif 2 

16 

* Nora: This pcogxam is insfriy s guide. The itudent mey lighten his s cs d emic lonl enda 
fo zDect hit Bsedt. 


147 


inginmmring 


2 Pr«tkm«ii Units 

Math HOB Calculus - ^ 4 

Physics 225A Fundamental Physics (Mechanics) 3 

Physics 226A Fundamental Physics Laboratory 1 

Chem 105 Chemistry (for engineers) 3 

Egr 205 Digital (Computation 2 

General Education Elective 3 

16 

S«in«tt«r 3 Sopkomor* 

General Education Electives 6 

Math 250 Intermediate Calculus 4 

Physics 225B Fundamental Physics (Electricity and Magnetism) 3 

Physics 226B Fundamental Physics Laboratory 1 

Egr 201 Mechanics 3 

17 

S«iii*tter 4 Sopkomora 

General Education Electives 6 

Math 281 Linear Algebra with Differential Equations 3 

Egr 202 Properties of Engineering Materials 3 

Physics 225C Fundamental Physics (Modem Physics) 3 

Physics 226C Fundamental Physics Laboratory 1 

16 

S«in«ttar 5 Junior 

Egr 300 Electric (Circuits 3 

Egr 300L Electric Circuits Laboratory 1 

Egr 3(H Thermodynamics 3 

Egr 305 Transport Processes 3 

Egr 306A Unified Laboratory 1 

Egr 302 Dynamics 3 

Egr 308 Engineering Analysis 3 

17 

Somotfor 4 Jonlor 

Egr 303 Electronics 3 

Egr 303L Electronics Laboratory 1 

Egr 306B Unified Laboratory I 

Egr 312 Linear Sy’stems Analysis 3 

Engineering Technical Electives 9 

17 

Somotfor 7 Sonlor 

CCcneral Education Dectives 3 

Egr 417 Engineering Economy 2 

Engineering Technical Electives 12 


17 


148 


inginmmrii 


S«m«tf«r • S«nlor 

General Education Elecdves — 6 

Elngineering Technical EJccdvcs .. 9 

Egr 370 Seminar in Engineering - 1 


16 

Total - 132 

Nora: A student may be reqtiired to take the eoginaeTioa matbcmatka review ooona, 
701A, B. This course is open to all who may feel the need for such a refresher course. No credit. 

MASnR Of SCtfNCf IN INOINfIRINO 

Applicants, as well as continuing students, should read carefully the college re- 
quirements for master’s degree programs, page 71. 

The procedural steps for admission to and the completion of the Master of 
Science in Engineering are as follows: 

Admission Procodwro 

1. Apply for admission to the college in unclassified graduate status and declare 
the objective to be a master of science in engineering. Proof of a degree from 
an accredited college or university must be supplied. This must be taken care 
of at the Office of Admissions before the dates established in the college calendar. 

2. Apply for admission to the School of Engineering master of science program. 
This must be taken care of at the office of the School of Engineering after admis- 
sion to the college but before regtscration. 


RmmquUitnf 

Admission to the engineering program requires a 2J undergraduate grade point 
average; however, students may be considered with grade deficiencies. Students 
pursuing a concentration in electrical engineering are required to take a qualifying 
examination. Any deficiencies apparent as a result of previous grades (or in the 
case of electrical engineering majors, previous grades or qualifying examination) 
must be made up, and in some cases wUl require six to 12 units of adviser- 
approved courses with at least a 34) average in addition to those required for the 
degree. A committee of the engineering faculty will evaluate each student's record 
for specific course deficiencies in the engineering field. Making suitable allowance 
for actual engineering experience, the committee will r^uire each student, prior to 
admission to the program, to make up such deficiencies as the committee deter- 
mines. 


Nora: A tmdent may be required to take the 
70IA, B. Thia cooxae k open to all who i 


> may feel the need for 


mathemafirt review coone, 
a refreaher cooxae. No credit. 


AdMiftsion to CloaaiAod Graduate Stataa 

Achievement of this status requires the following: 

1. Meeting the prerequisites of the previous paragraph. 

2. Before completing nine units at CSCF toward a MS. degree, a student shall 
fill out an application card for classified status and make an appointment with 
the adviser at the office of the School of Engineering. 

3. Preparing, in consultatioo with his adviser, an approved graduate study plan. 


AdvaiKemeat to Candidacy 

Achievement of this status requires the following: 

1. Having been granted classified status in the Master of Science in Engineering 
program. 

2. Having completed 12 units of counework on his master^s degree study plan, 
including six units of 500-les'el courses with a GPA of not less than 3i). 

3. Filing an advancement to candidacy card in the Graduate Ofike. 


149 


Engineering 


Oradttotlon 

Final achievement of the Master of Science in Elngineering requires: 

1. Having been admitted to candidacy status. 

2. Filing a request for check on completion of requirements in the Graduate 
Office prior to the appropriate deadline. 

3. Having completed 30 units of approved work with an overall GPA of not 
less than 3X). 

4. Completing satisfactorily a final comprehensive examination. 

5. Receiving approval of the faculty of the School of Engineering and the Dean 
of Graduate Studies. 

Tk« Program for Hio Mattor of Sdonco in Enginooring 

Qualifications for the Master of Science in Engineering requires the following: 

1. Completion of a minimum of 30 units of approved upper division or graduate- 
level work including: 

(a) a minimum of six units of approved upper division or graduate mathe- 
matics (certain engineering courses may fulfill this requirement). 

(b) a minimum of 15 units of approved 500 level courses. 

2. An overall GPA of 3.0. 

A candidate for the Master of Science in Engineering may pursue one of five 
options currently offered by the School of Engineering: 

Electrical engineering 

Mechanical and aerospace engineering 

Structural engineering and engineering mechanics 

Systems engineering 

Engineering science 

A student is normally required to select a minimum of 15 units within these 
options. These 15 units may be 400-level and 500-level courses. The 400-level 
courses are listed in the undergraduate program (preceding) and the 500-level 
courses are listed below: 

Eloctrical inglnoaring 

Umts 

Egr 501A. B Microwaves 3,3 

Egr 503 Information Theory and Coding- 3 

Egr 504 Linear Netu'ork Synthesis 3 

Egr 505 Nonlinear Control Systems 3 

Egr 506 Advanced Digital Computer Systems-^ 3 

Egr 507 Statistical Communication Theory- 3 

Egr 513 Optimal Control S>'stems 3 

Egr 514A, B Sofrw^are Systems Design 3,3 

Egr 515A, B (^antum Qectronics 3,3 

Egr 521A,B Antenna Theory 3,3 

Egr 523 Solid State Devices and Integrated Circuits 3 

Egr 553A, B Plasma D>*namics 3, 3 

Egr 554 Hybrid (Computation 3 

Egr 555 Dectromagnetic Field Theory 3 

Egr 557 Sampled-Data Systems 3 

Egr 559 Active Network Synthesis 3 

Egr 570 Seminar in Electric^ Engineering 1-3 

Egr 596A, B, (C, D Special Topics in Engineering 1-3 


150 


ingin—ring 


M#<haiii€ol and Aarospoca Inginaaring 


Units 


Egr 508 
Egr 511 
Egr 512 
Egr 516 
Egr 518 
Egr 520 
Egr 522 
Egr 524 
Egr 525 
Egr 530 
Egr 569 
Egr 573 
Egr 575 


Intermediate Fluid Mechanics 

Advanced Dynamics . . 

Gyrodynamics 

Advanced Principles of Heat Transfer- 
Advanced Fluid Mechanics — 


Incompressible Boundary Layer Theory 

Theory of Hydrodynamic Lubrication 

Advanced Thermodynamics 

Compressible Boundary Layer Theory 

Advanced Strength of Materials 

Orbital Mechanics 

Aerospace Guidance Systems 

Kinetic Theory and Sadstical Thermodynamics- 


Egr 596A,B,C,D Specif Topics in Engineering 

Strvctwral Inginaaring and Inglnoarlng Mackanict 

Egr 509 Theory of Plates and Shells 

Elgr 510 Numerical and Approx Meth. in Structural Mech. . 

Egr 511 Advanced Dynamics — 

Egr 517 Theory of Inelasticity 

Egr 518 Advanced Fluid Mechanics - 

Egr 519 Advanced Structural Mechanics . 

Egr 530 Advanced Strength of Materials 

Egr 545 Advanced Structural Design - 

Egr 547 Advanced Dynamics of Structures 

Egr 549 Theory of Elastic Stability 

Egr 577 Reliabilio' Analysis of Structures 

Egr 596A,B,C,D Special Topics in Engineering 

Systamt Inginoaring 

Egr 403 Computer Methods in Numerical Analyris 

Egr 404 Analog Computation 

Egr 404L Analog Computation Laboratory 

Egr 416 Feedback Control Systems 


1-3 


1-3 


Elngineering Probability and Statistict- 


Analytical Methods in Engineering 
Linear Systems Engineering 


Egr 423 
Egr 491 

Egr 581 , _ _ . . 

Egr 582 Estimation Theory in Systems Engm^ring.. 

Egr 585 Optimization Techniques in Systems 
Egr 587 Operational Analyst Techniq^ in Systems Engineering. 

Egr 592 Advanced Engineering Analysis^. - 

Egr 596A,B,CD Spedal Topia in Engineerag. 


1-3 


(Up to nine units in systam engineering may be selected from approved subjects 
offered in the School of Business Administration and Economics.) 


151 


inginemrtng 


Scl«n€« 

The program in engineering science is to be selected by the student and his 
adviser and submitted for approval to a committee of the Schotd of Engineering 
(supplemented, if appropriate, by members of the science and mathematics fac- 
ulty). The courses selected are to meet a special and specific engineering science 
objective of the student, such as engineering physics. 

In addition to those courses offered in the specific options, the following three 
courses apply to any option, though they are not necessarily required. 

Units 


Egr 597 Project 1-d 

Egr 598 Thesis 1-d 

Egr 599 Independent Graduate Research 1-3 


For funher information, consult the School of Engineering. 

See also ‘The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


152 


ETHNIC STUDIES 


• 5 ^ 


’ — 'v. ■ -*« 




^'- *■ "r ''- t: 

b^i»^ •' 'JT ?■' ’• 


DEPARTMENT OF ETHNIC STUDIES 


Associate Professors: Fuentes, Serros (Chainntn) 

Assistant Professors: Finnie, Gethaiga 
Lecturer; Vega 

iACHILOl OP ARTS IN ITHNIC STUOMS 

This degree program is designed to provide an effective vehicle for meeting a 
variety of needs in contemporary higher education. These arc: extending op- 
portunities for college education to students who have long been under-repre- 
sented due to cultural differences between their experiences and the cultural em- 
phasis of higher education; providing for personal consultation between faculty 
and students of diverse cultural backgrounds; revising curriculum and promoting 
research to give all students and faculty an understanding of the interaction of 
ethnic groups in past and contemporary civilizations; and conducting continuous 
research in innovative teaching methods and courses to create more effective means 
of teaching students in culturally pluralistic environment. 


Alro-AmeHcon Sfwdlet OptNn 

The required minimum for the major is 36 units: Ethnic Studies 101, and 102 * 
or 103 * and six additional units from lower division offerings and a minimum of 
24 units in upper division courses. 

The purposes of the Afro-American studies option arc: to provide a specializa- 
tion in Afro-American studies within the framework of a more generalized and 
comprehensive, ethnic studies perspective; to provide greater flexibaity and more 
electives within the ethnic studies program to meet the variety of needs and in- 
terests of the diverse group of students selecting this option; to acquaint students 
with the problems, successes and failures of America’s largest minority group; to 
help students understand the nature of contemporary ethnic and social turmoil 
and guide them into constructive modes of thought about current tames; to enable 
students to see the black experience in America in a world aettsng, and to enable 
students to lead more effective Uves in a culturally pluralistic and rapidly changing 
society. 


Core Courses: (6 units required) 

One of the courses listed below — 

220 Mexican Heritage (3) 

230 The American Indian (3) 

240 Black History; Black and White Versions (3) 

And one of the courses listed below — 

250 Qiltural Scars of Oppression (3) 

260 Cultural Identity and Contemporary Mexican and Black .\lan (3) 
Upper dwision: (a minimum of 24 upper division units from the following 

courses) 

301 Afro-American Culture (3) 

303 Ancient and Modem African Culture (3) 

309 The Black Family (3) , 

345 European, African, American and Western Ovilizatsoa (3) 

401 Black American and Contemporary Issues (3) 

402 Africa and Self-Determinarion (3) 

403 Africans and Black Americans (3) 

466 Black American from Slavery to Jim Crow (3) 

467 Black American Since 1890 (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 


noted fiom Ethnic Studies 102 aud/or 103 by mn ncammsrion and/or 
depamnent. 


155 


* Scndcnts can be czex 
the consent of the 


Ethnic Studies 


M«xlcaii«Am«rican Stvdi«t Option 

The required minimum for the major is 36 units: Ethnic Studies 101 and 102 * 
or 103 * and six additional units from the lower division ofiFerings and a minimum 
of 24 units in upper division courses. 

The purposes of the Mexican* American Studies option are: to provide a special* 
izadon in Mexican*American Studies within the framework of a more generalized 
and comprehensive, ethnic studies perspecdve; to provide greater flexibility and 
more electives within the ethnic studies program to meet the variety of nee^ and 
interests of the diverse group of students selecdng this major; to acquaint students 
with the problems, successes and failures of Orange County*s largest minority 
group; to help students understand the nature of contemporary ethnic and socid 
turmoil and guide them into construcdve modes of thought about current issues; 
to enable students to see the brown experience in America in a world setting; 
to enable students to lead more effecdve lives in a culturally pluralisdc and rapidly 
changing society; and to prepare students to work more effectively in Spanish* 
speaking areas. 


Core Courses: (6 units required) Units 

One of the courses listed below 3 

220 Mexican Heritage (3) 

230 The American Indian (3) 

240 Black History (3) 

And one of the courses listed below 3 

250 Cultural Scars of Oppression (3) 

260 Cultural Identity and the Contemporary Mexican and Black Man (3) 

Upper division: (a minimum of 24 upper division units from the follow- 
ing courses) 24 


302 Ancient Mexican Culture (3) 

305 The Chicano Family (3) 

306 Barrio Studies (3) 

307 Barrio Studies (3) 

336 Main Trends in Spanish*Amencan Literature (3) 

420 Spanish for the Elementary School Teacher in the Barrio (3) 

430 Cancidn del la Raza (3) 

433 Mexican Literature since 1040 (3) 

440 Mexican Intellectual Thought (3) 

450 The Mexican- American and Contemporar>' Issues (3) 

453 Mexico since 1910 (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

‘^Students c«n be exempted from Ethnic Studies 102 and/or 103 hj an examinatioo and/or 
the consent of the department. 


156 


INTERDISCIPLINARY 

STUDIES 



v.*.-'- - ; ’ V.. it i.:: a-’n BUkU' M ir: C 

T' '. tvr i*u. -tot^ r t tOtlv-^v' 


S: * •■ 


SCHOOL OF 
INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDIES 

Director: David M. Feldman 


AMERICAN STUDIES PROGRAM 

Associate Professors: Pivar (Coordinator), Weaver 

iACHELOR Of ARTS IN AMiRICAN STUDIIS 

The degree in American studies is an interdisciplinary program within the 
School of Interdisciplinary Studies. It is administered through a committee of 
scholars representing various disciplines. 

The program is designed for students with a special interest in the American 
experience, including the overseas experience. It permits through intensive study 
of the United States greater perception of American society both contemporary 
and historical. By developing the program to allow students to discover the larger 
relationships among disciplines the student may receive a better sense of the whole. 

The American studies degree prepares students for teaching dther on the ele- 
mentary or secondary level. Oedentialing, usually handled during the fifth year 
of study, may be obtained for students enrolled in this interdisciplinary progm. 
American studies is useful for any career in which an understanding of American 
culture is important. Specialized careers in American studies, leading to the PhJ)., 
are also available. 

Since two alternative programs are available, the student interested in becoming 
a major must consult with an American studies counselor to develop a course of 
study mutually satisfactory. 

American Stadias Program 

The major consists of )6 units distributed as folkxws: 

I. Core program (12 units) required of all majors. 

201 Introduction to American Studies (3) 

301 The American Character (3) 

350 Seminar in Theory and Method of American Studies (3) 

401 Proseminar in American Studies (3) 

II. Alternative plan (24 upper division units in either plan) 

a. The student may choose to work in two but not more than three 
disciplines rebted to the American ceperien^, Le.: history and literature 
or sociology, anthropology and poUtical science. 

b. The student may choose to purm a specialized theme or subject; i.e.: 
mass culture, urbanization or ethnic groups in American society. 

Students interested in the American studies majw must consult with the coordi- 
nator of the program before establishing individual course of study. 

INTERDISCIPLINARY CENTER PROGRAM 

Professor: Obler (Coordinator) 

The Interdisciplinary Onter was created out of the conviction that much of the 
real excitement happening in the intellectual world today (and probably other 
times as well) is at the boundary lines where traditional disciplines converge. The 
concrete reality of the human situation raises problems amenabb to no facile 
descriptions or easy solutions— certainly none that any one discipline can yield. 


159 


Latin American Studies 

Wc arc coming more and more to recognize the need for diverse perspectives — 
that whether we are confronting the immense complexity of the modem city or 
the subtle dimensions of love or anxiety, no single frame of reference or specialized 
knowledge can be sufficient. 

Many of the courses now offered or planned by the Center lie outside the 
province of any single department or academic discipline. They challenge students 
and professors alike to utilize their specialized knowledges and yet to go beyond 
them. A subject like love may be approached from historical, psychological, 
aesthetic or philosophical perspectives. Several courses (Psychology and Literary 
Criticism^ Social Sciences and Humanities: A Critical Analysis) utilize the comple- 
mentary' methodologies of the physical sciences, social sciences, or humanities. It 
follows that interdisciplinary courses frequently involve two or more professors 
and feature guests from outside the academic community. Many courses are of a 
frankly experimental nature, often one-time journeys into strange seas, perhaps 
ill-fated. Many can be used as credits toward upper-level general education or are 
cross-listed with several majors. The Center is interested in new courses or innova- 
tive programs; it welcomes suggestions from students or all other members of the 
academic community. 

LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES PROGRAM 

Professors: Beck (History), D. Feldman (Linguistics), Richardson (Political 
Science) 

Associate Professors: Arana (Foreign Languages), Yinger (Political Science) 
Assistant Professors: Baker (History), Christensen (Anthropology), Flickema 
(History), Ketteringham (Coordinator), Mend (Sociology) 

Lecturers: Baden (Foreign Languages) 

The School of Interdisciplinary Studies coordinates a program in Latin American 
studies taught by faculty from numerous fields with special training and field work 
in Latin America. 

The program is designed for students desiring a general education with specific 
knowledge about Ladn America. It is designed for students planning careers w'hich 
utU necessitate residence in or knowledge of Ladn America, such as teaching, 
business, scicndfic research, engineering, journalism or government service. It is also 
designed for students who are planning to teach Spanish or social studies in the 
secondary schools. The program ser\^es as a sound base for students preparing for 
graduate work in Ladn American studies or in specific disciplines with a speciili- 
zidon in the region of Ladn America. 

No degree currendy is offered in Ladn American studies but the following 
program, presendy av^able at the college, can be used to complement a regular 
degree program. It is the program currendy proposed by the college’s committee 
on Ladn American studies. 

FovndaHoR Cowrs««: 

Language: All students in the program should develop a proficiency level in 
language measured by Spanish 2(M and Portuguese 102. (This need may be met 
by compledon of the above courses, their equivalents, or by passing require- 
ments as stated by the Department of Foreign Languages.) 

Social Science: .\nthropology 202 introduedon to Cultural Anthropology (3) 

R •comm and Rd Coro Cowr»«s: 

Language: Spanish 317 Advanced C^nversadon and Composidon (3) 
Literature: Spanish 441 Spanish American Literature from Modemismo to the 


160 


UngultficM 


Present (3) 

History and Culture: Spanish 316 Introduction to Spanish American Qviliza- 
don (3) 

R*€omiii«nd«4l S«l*ct*d 15 units selected from three or more of 

the following groupings: 

Culture: 

Portuguese 315 introduedon to Brazilian Culture and Qviltzadon (3) 
Portuguese 325 Contemporary Brazilian Qvilizadon (3) 

Anthropology 322 Peoples of Mesoamerica (3) 

Anthropology 325 Peoples of South America (3) 

Sociology 460 Comparadve Insdtudons: Ladn America (3) 

Fine Arts and Literature: 

Spanish 440 Spanish American Literature from The Conquest to 1888 (3) 
History and Politics: 

History 450 Change in Contemporary Ladn America (3) 

History 453 History of Mexico (3) 

History 454 Argentina, Brazil, Chile (3) 

Polidcal Science 437 Government and Politics of Developing Systems: 
Ladn America (3) 

Polidcal Science 438 Ladn American Interest Groups (3) 

Polidcal Science 463 International Reladons and Problenis of Ladn America 

(3) 

Geography and Economics: 

Geography 434 Geography of Ladn America (3) 

Geography 464 Man and Geographic Reladonships in Ladn America (3) 
Economics 333 Economic Development: Analyses and Case Studies (3) 
Economics 330 Comparadve Economic Systems (3) 

PROGRAM IN LINGUISTICS 

Professors: D. Feldman • (Coordinator), FesKnden (Speech Communication), 
Nelson (Speech Gxnmunicadon), Schneider (English), Sears (English) 
Associate Professors: Kaplan (Speech Communicadon), Riley (Speech Communi- 
cadon). See (Anthropology), Silvers (Philosophy), Zimmermann (Foreign Lan- 
guages and Literatures) 

Assistant ProfesK>rs: Cartledge (Foreign Languages and Literatures), Christensen 
(Anthropology), Harris (Speech Gxiununka^), Mayer (Foreign Languages 
and Literatures), Treon (Speech Gxnmunicadoo) 

Linguisdes is the scientific study of language— its nature and development, its 
universal properties, its diversified stru ct ur e s and their dialectal variants, its ac> 
quisidoii by children and non-nadve speakers, its systems of writing and transertp- 
don, its cultural role in the speech community, and its application to other areas of 
human knowledge. As such, it is concerned with the multiple aspects of human 
communkadve behavior which encompass thought, symboUzadoo, language, mean- 
ing, acoustics, pe r cep d on and the physiological procesKs of utterance and audidon. 

The interdisdplimuy aspects of t^ study are reflected in the organizadon of 
the program which not o^y offers its own core of general linguistics courses for 
linguisdes credit but recognizes credit for linguistically-related courses in other 
departments of the college. 

iACHIlOR Of ARTS IN UNOUtSTKS 

This program is designed for students with an ezcepdonal interest in and apdtude 
for the study of the systems of human communicadon. It enables the underg^uate 

• oJUy (Ac e r . 


161 


Linguhflcs 


student to perceive the function of language in the development of civilization; to 
understand the essential relationships between language and thought and language 
and culture; to gain substantial familiarity with the structure of foreign languages 
as well as English; to observe several types of linguistic structures; and to become 
conversant with the historical study of language and formal techniques and 
theoretical foundations of linguistic analysis. The program will enable the student 
with linguistic and philological interests to grasp the scope of the entire field and, 
in addition, to determine more accurately the most meaningful concentrations 
in graduate study. 

Lowar Divition Raqwiramantt 

One year of Ladn, Greek, Hebrew or Sanskrit ( 6 ) 

Anthropology 202 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (3) 

Philosophy 210 Logic (3) 

Uppar Dhfiflaa Raqwiramants (minimum of 30 units) 

317 course in a modem foreign language (3) 

Linguistics 341 Introduction to Phonetics (3) 

Linguistics 404 General Semantics (2) 

Linguistics 406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) 

Linguistics 410 Language and Culture (3) 

E^lish 490 History of the English Language (3) 

Linguistics 490 Linguistics in Relation to Other Disciplines (1-4) 

Linguistics 530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

Twa alactivat (ar mara) from tha fallawing: 

English 303 Structure of Modem English (3) 

French, German, Russian or Spanish C^ourse 400 (3) 

Linguistics 375 The Philosophy of Language (3) 

Linguistics 402 Phonetic Analysis of Speech (3) 

Linguistics 411 Bilingualism (3) 

Linguistics 412 Sociolinguistics (3) 

Mathematics 304 Mathematical Logic (3) 

Mathematics 305 Elements of Set Theory (3) 

Mathematics 335 A3 Probability and Mathematical Statistics (3) 

Philosophy 368 Symbolic Logic (3) 

Psychology 161 Dementary Statistics (3) 

C^andtadve Methods 364 Computer Logic and Programming (3) 

Speech Communicadon 403 Sp^ch and Language Development (3) 

Students must consult with an adviser in linguisdcs before establishing their in- 
dividual programs of study. 

MASTIR OF ARTS IN UNOUISTfCS 

The MA in Linguisdcs is designed for students who have excepdonal interest in 
and apdtude for the study of the systems of human communicadon, reinforced by 
undergraduate study in linguisdcs and allied areas, such as foreign languages, 
English language, anthropology, speech communicadon and related areas in psy- 
chology and philosophy. It enables the graduate student to study in depth the 
posidon and fimcdon of human communicadon systems in the development of 
civilizadon; to understand more fully the essential reladonships between thought, 
language and culture; to deepen mastery of the structure of foreign languages as 
well as Ejiglish; to w’ork intensively with several types of linguisdc structures with 
special attendon to non-Indo-European languages; and to increase expertise in the 
historical study of language and formal techniques and theoredcal foundations of 
linguisdc analysis. 


162 


UtfguisficM 


The core courses of the program arc devoted to an in-depth consideration of 
d^ripdve, historical and applied linguistics. Tlie balance of the program will com- 
bine advanced work in the theory of phonemic, morphological and syntactical 
analysis, articulatory and experimental phonetics, semantics, lexicology, dialectology, 
language typology and held methods, in which the procedures of the linguist 
working under field conditions will be demonstrated by the analysis of several lan- 
guages elicited from informants. A variety of approaches to descriptive analysis 
and several theoretical points of view, b«h American and European, including 
generative grammar, transformational analysis and prosodies will be presented. 
A series of courses on the structure of individual languages, both ancient and 
modem, will provide the oppommities for applying the general principles of 
structural analysis and for establishing linguistic datt by elicitation from informants 
and analysis of written records. The languages examined will be drawn from a 
wide variety of language families including the more familiar numbers of the 
Indo-EUiropean group. General courses in comparative linguistics and comparison 
within individual langtiage families will review methods of establishing genetic re- 
lationships among languages; the geographical diffusion of linguistic features and 
problems of language contact will be studied by examining areal groupings of 
genetically unrelated languages. The relationship between lingtiistics and other 
disciplines and the application of the techniques, findings, and insights of that 
science to such activities as language teaching will be treated in courses and temi- 
nars of an interdisciplinary nature. 

The aim of the graduate program in linguistics, as reflected in the coarse offer- 
ings, is to provide thorough and well-balanced training for practice and research 
in the several areas of linguistic studies. 


Course roquiromoots 

Coursework in descriptive, historical and structural linguistics - 

Linguistics 501 Research Methods and Bibliography (I) 

Linguistics 505 Phonetics and Phonemics (3) 

Linguistics 507 Seminar: Morphos>Titax (3) 

Linguistics 508 Theories of Syntax (3) 

Linguistics 530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

Coursework selected from any one of the following six areas of subipe- 
cialization 


Umtf 

13 


9 


Appliod Uogoistics 

English 303 The Structure of Modem English (3) 

Linguistics 411 Bilingualism (3) 

French 466 Introduction to French Linguistics (3) 

German 466 Introduction to German Linguistics (3) 

Spanish 466 Introduction to Spanish LinguisDcs (3) 

Foreign Languages Ed 520 Advanced Seminar in Applied Li n guisdes (3) 
Linguistics 584 Linguistics and Reading (3) 

English 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

French 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Orman 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Spanish 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Linguistics 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

A»thropolo g kol LingwisHcs 

Linguistics 411 Bilingualism (3) 

T jngnt<rif< 412 Sodolmguistics (3) 

Linguistics 592 Field Methods (3) 


163 


Linguistics 


Linguistics 593 Language Typology (3) 

Anthropology 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Linguistics 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Analysis of Spoclfic Longuago Structuros 

French 500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

German 500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Spanish 500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

French 510 Phonology (3) 

German 510 Phonology (3) 

Spanish 510 Phonology (3) 

French 530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

German 530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

Spanish 530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

French 520 Old French (3) 

English 570 Graduate Seminar: Language Studies (3) 

English 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Spanish 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

French 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

German 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Linguistics 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Ixparimantal Phonatics 

Linguistics 402 Phonetic Analysis of Speech (3) 

Speech Communication 403 Speech Development (3) 

Speech Cx)mmunication 543 Major Problems in Speech Pathology and 
Audiology (3) 

Linguistics 540 Seminar in Elxperimental Phonetics (3) 

Speech Communication 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 
Linguistics 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Communication and Somantici 

Linguistics 411 Bilingualism (3) 

Linguistics 412 Sociolinguistics (3) 

Linguistics 504 Graduate Seminar: Semantics (3) 

Linguistics 515 Psycholinguistics (3) 

Philosophy 450 Seminar: Philosophy of Language (3) 

Speech O)mmunication 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 
Anthropology 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Linguistics 584 Linguistics and Reading (3) 

Linguistics 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Disordors of Communication 

Speech Communication 403 Speech Development (3) 

Speech Communication 441 Speech Pathology: Nonorganic Disorders (3) 
Speech Communication 443 Speech Pathology: Organic Disorders (3) 
Speech Communication 451 Diagnostic Methods in Speech and Hearing (3) 
Speech Communication 452 Therapeutic Procedures in Speech and 
Hearing (3) 

Speech Communication 463 Audiology (3) 

Speech Communication 464 Audiometry (3) 

Linguistics 540 Seminar in Elxperimental Phonetics (3) 

Speech Communication 557A-I Seminar in Speech Pathology (3) 

Speech Communication 563 Seminar in Audiology (3) 


164 


Religious Sfudims 


Speech Communication 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 


Linguistics 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

C^oursework in a related field - 6 

Linguistics 597 Project (2) - 2 

Total 30 

Admission to tho Groduoto Program 


In addition to fulfilling all general prerequisites for graduate work established 
at California State College, Fullerton, an applicant, in order to gain admission 
to this program, must hold a bachelor’s or equivalent degree with a major in 
linguistics consisting of 24 upper division semester credit hours, or equivalent, in 
the field, with grades testifying to above-average scholarship from an accredited 
institution. Those having degrees with other related majors may be admitted if 
they have completed the following courses or their equivalents. These prerequisites 
may be fulfilled concurrently with graduate coursework in the program. 

Linguistics 406 (3) 

English 490 (3) 

Linguistics 410 (3) 

Linguistics 490 0) 

Knowledge of one foreign language is required. Students without coursework in 
a foreign language may demonstrate proficiency by a score of **average” or better 
on the MLA-ETS Proficiency Examination for Advanced Students. Work toward 
fulfillment of this requirement may be uken concurrently with graduate course- 
work in linguistics. 

LAAORATOAY FOR PHONITIC RfSfARCN 

See description appearing on page 37. 

For further information, consult the coordinator of the program in linguistics. 
Also see “The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 

RELIGIOUS STUDIES PROGRAM 

Professors: Fierman (Elducadon), Gard (Coordinator) 

Assistant Professors: McLaren (^ucadon) 

RACHtiOR OF ARTS IN RUIOIOUS STUDIIS 

This program leads to the BA. in Religious Studies and is designed to encourage 
students to acquire the inteUectual tooU and schoUrly background required for a 
cridcal understanding of the forms and tradidons of religion that have appeared in 
human culture. 

Students in fields other than religion are encouraged to ask the questions which 
pertain to the real excitement at the boundary lines where the usual studies con- 
verge. The aim of each course is an open and nontraditiooal examination of ulti- 
mate questions as they apply to contemporary situations. The relevance of belief in 
both Eastern and Western civilizations for the cultural development of man is 
examined Guest lecturers from fields other than religion present their understand- 
ing of the art of living and of loving. An understanding of prejudice, war and 
other dimensions of religious value systems may thus be gained. 

Major In Rollglon 

Six hours of introduction to world religions and a senior seminar on contempo- 
rary religious issues, plus six hours each from one of three fields (history and soci- 
ology of religion, phenomenology of reUgion, comparative reUgion) and two years 
or their equivalents of coUege level language are required for the BA. in Religious 
Studies. 


165 


Russian Area Studies 


Cours«f in Rnliglout Sfudins 

303 Rabbinic Literature: The Writings of Law and Lore (3) 

304 Religion and the Cultural Crisis (3) 

305 Hebrew Prophets (3) 

306 Wisdom Literature (3) 

307 Dimensions of Religion (3) 

308 Judaism; From the Beginning to the Middle Ages (3) 

309 Judaism: From the Middle Ages to the Present (3) 

310 History and Development of Christianity (3) 

406 Anxiety, Guilt and Freedom (3) 

410 Theology and Contemporary Life (3) 

420 The Worlds of Martin Buber, “T^e Philosophy and Theology of Martin 
Buber” 

425 Religion in Western Culture (3) 

485 Major Contemporary Religious Thinkers (3) 

486 Major Contemporary Religious Topics (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Courses in other schools and departments which bear the word “religion” in 
their title are acceptable upon consultation with the Coordinator of Religious 
Studies. 


RUSSIAN AREA STUDIES PROGRAM 

Associate Professors: R. Feldman (Coordinator), Helin (Geography), Kerschner 

(Political Science), Tumas (Elnglish), Yessis (Physical Education) 

Assistant Professors: Mayer (Foreign Languages), Pickersgill (Economics) 
Lecturers: Erohina (Foreign Languages), Shippee (Political Science) 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN RUSSIAN AREA STUDIES 

The Russian area studies major is an interdisciplinary program designed for 
students interested in the language, literature, politics, history, economics, ideology, 
customs and geography of the Soviet Union. In addition to fulfilling the various 
cultural objectives common to any liberal arts program, the Russian area studies 
major prov'ides a foundation for teaching the Russian language and social studies 
on the elementary and secondary levels. This major serves especially the needs 
of students intending to pursue graduate studies and those who foresee employment 
in professions that demand a regional as well as traditional orientation. 

Unit Rnquimmnnts 

To qualify for this major a student must complete (1) 16 units of Russian 
language or their equivalent, (2) 24 units of upper division Russian area courses 
from at least four of the following fields: comparative literature, economics, geog- 
raphy, political science, history, foreign language, (3) 15 units of upper division 
coursework in a related discipline to be determined in consultation with a Rus- 
sian area counselor. 

PROGRAM IN SOCIAL SCIENCES 

Associate Professor: Giacumakis (Coordinator) 

MASTER OF ARTS IN SOCIAL SCIENCES 

The Master of Arts in Social Sciences is designed with three possible objectives 
in view: to provide a broader and more integrated disciplinary background for 
students later interested in working toward the doctorate in any one of the specific 
fields of social sciences or in the general area of social sciences; to prepare sec- 


166 


Technological Studies 


ondary and elementary school teachers to introduce the social sciences in a more 
modern and sophisticated way so that the social studies curriculum can be up- 
graded; and to provide opportunities for students with strong interests in inter- 
disciplinary programs to work out custom-tailored programs which will serve their 
interests. 

Pr«r*^ulfit«f 

An incoming student must have an undergraduate major or the equivalent in 
one of the social sciences and a minor in another. The coordinator will determine 
equivalence to major and minors. 

An incoming student must have a grade-point average of 3 X) in upper division 
(undergraduate) social sciences courses. 

Program of Study 

I. Social Sciences Core 

500 The Social Sciences in the Modem World: Major Findings, 

Concepts and Theories (3) 

501 The Social Sciences in the Modem World: Basic Skills 
and Human Dimensions (3) 

II. Mulddisciplinary Core 

This part of the program is to be made up of 21 units in at least three social 
science fields. Twelve of these units must be 500-level or graduate courses. 
The same three fields should be represented in the 12 graduate units. 

III. Project 

Every student will prepare a project, the norm of which will be a written 
research essay, but particulars of which will be defined by the committee for 
the student. Projects will be tailored to reflect the interdisciplinary effort. 

The social sciences include the following related fields: anthropology, economics, 
geography, history, political science, psychology and sociology. 

TECHNOLOGICAL STUDIES PROGRAM 

Lecturer: Chapman (Coordinator) 

The technological studies program was established to conduct special programs 
of studies and to provide course offerings which cut across related disciplines. 
Activities of the technological studies program are interdisciplinary and include a 
reference center and curriculum in technological studies as well as special activities 
such as the Technological Studies Revirw, a periodical devoted to the field. 

This program brings together courses from several disciplines on the nature and 
impacts of technology and methods of analysis. The general focus of the progi^ 
is on study of interdisciplinary methods and techniques for analyzing technological 
change; technology transfer and applications; and analysts of the impacts of tech- 
nological change on society. . . , 

The program provides an area for speaal study within recocp^d major fields 
of studies. Students may take separate courses or develop an individu^ized program 
of studies based on courses, directed readings and rese^ch participation. Wherever 
possible courses are conducted as seminars and bring together lecturers from 
relevant disciplines included in the sciences and humanities. Through independent 
studies students are encouraged to pursue topics or problems of special interest 
beyond the scope of regular courses under the supervision of a faculty adviser. The 
technological studies program is directly coordinated with the American studies 
program of the School of Interdisciplinary Studies and with other departments of 
the college. 


167 


Technological Studies 


Technological Studios Program 

Man and Technology ^ a program developed jointly between the technological 
studies program and the School of Engineering, directed to the study of man in 
the man-made world, the relationship between technology and the human condi- 
tion. The program (1) enables engineering students to meet social science and 
general education requirements of the School of Engineering by engaging in studies 
closely akin to their major studies; (2) provides a general course of study for 
students of other technologically oriented disciplines of the college; (3) makes 
available to nonengineering students a set of general education courses in the 
analysis and solution of engineering problems; and (4) provides a meeting ground 
for faculty and students concentrating in different fields of study through par- 
ticipation in interdisciplinary studies of technology. 

Couriaf in Tachnological Studlai 

Technological Studies 100 Introduction to Technological Studies (3) 
Technological Studies 11 OA Man-Made World (3) 

Technological Studies HOB Man-Made World (3) 

Technological Studies 11 lA Laboratory: Man-Made World (1) 

Technological Studies 11 IB Laboratory: Man-Made World (1) 

Technological Studies 201 Society and Technology (3) 

Technological Studies 464 Technology and Ideology (3) 

Interdisciplinary Center 499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Interdisciplinary Center 799 Independent Study (1-3) 

Economics 370 Economics of Research and Development and 
Technological Change (3) 

Engineering lOOA, B Introduction to Analysis (3) 

Eng^eering 101 Introduction to Engineering (1) 

Engineering 417 Engineering Economy (3) 

Engineering 423 Engineering Probability and Statistics (3) 

History 491 Proseminar: The American Response to Technological Develop- 
ment (3) 

Science Ed 461 Development of Science and Technology (3) 

Science Ed 470 Evolution of Scientific Ideas (3) 

Management 545 Research and Development Project Management (3) 


168 


LETTERS, 
ARTS AND SCIENCES 


i 


,'i 


i 


•• i 


4 




••T. 


■r 



SCHOOL OF 
LETTERS, ARTS AND SCIENCES 


Dean: Hazel J. Jones 


DEPARTMENT OF ANTHROPOLOGY 

Professor: Untcrcincr • 

Associate Professors: Leder (chairman). Sec 

Assistant Professors: Christensen, dc Rios, Joesink-Mande\'ille, Joseph, Koepping 
Lecturers: Evans, Hopa, Katz, Wicklund 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ANTHROPOLOOY 

The major in anthropology is designed for students desiring a broad generalist 
background, students preparing to become teachers of social sciences, and students 
preparing for graduate work in anthropology and in advanced areal and inter- 
national specializations. 

The required minimum for the major is 45 units, in addition to those taken for 
the generd education requirement, distributed as follows: 

Courses in Anthropology 

Thirty -three units must be taken in anthropology, 24 in upper division courses. 
Anthropology 201, 202, 203, 401, 410, 470 and 480 arc required. One course is 
required from areal offerings in the field: Anthropology 321, 322, 325, 328, 340, 
341, 345, 347, 350, 360 and 361. Two courses arc required from theoretical/insdtu- 
tio^ courses in the field: Anthropology *313, *315, 403, *406, 411, 413, 415, *416, 
420, 421, *422, 423, 424, 425, 428, 429, 430, 440, 441, 450, *453, and 460. (The courses 
marked * are cross-listed with other departments and programs. They may be 
used to satisfy the major requirement for: either the courses in anthropology; or 
related courses.) 

Minimum units 33 

Related Courses 

Twelve upper division units arc to be taken in the rebted social science fields 
of economics, geography, history, political science, sociology, and psychology, to 
be approved by the major adviser. Advanced work in biological science, the fine 
and applied arts, and the humanities may be substituted for these units by stu- 
dents with specialized interests with the approval of their advisers. Students inter- 
ested in specializing in anthropological linguistics arc urged to take courses from 
the college’s interdisciplinary program in linguistics. Students interested in specbl- 
izing in physical anthropolog>^ arc urged to take soro of the following biological 
science courses: 161 Principles of Zoology'; 312 Genetics; 361 Mammalian Anatomy 
and Physiology; 424 Evolution; 463 Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy; 465 Ani- 
mal Ecology; and 471 Natural History of the Vertebrates. Students interested in 
specializing in primitive art arc urged to take many of these art courses: 451 
Oceanic Art; 452 Art of Non-European Africa; 461 Art of North American 
Indians; 462 Art of Mcsoamcrica; 471 Art of Central and South America. 


Minimum units — 12 

Minimum total units for the major 45 

College administrative officer. 


171 


Anthropology 


Students considering advanced professional careers in research, teaching, or 
applications of anthropology are urged to explore and sample widely from course 
offerings in the other social sciences, the biological and natural sciences and the hu- 
manities and arts. Through a judicious selection of these courses it is hoped that 
Anthropology majors will broaden their interests and diversify and develop their 
skills in working towards a variety of individualized career objectives. 

T^ocking Minor in Anthropology 

Tl^ nunor in anthropology is intended as a second field for persons completing 
a major in another discipline in preparation for a teaching credential. Twenty-one 
units must be taken in anthropology; 15 of these in upper division courses. An- 
thropology 201 or 203 and 202 and 301 are required. Two additional courses 
must be selected from areal offerings in the field; Anthropology 321, 322, 325, 328, 
340, 345, 347, 350, 360, and 361. Another^course must be selected from theoretical/ 
institutional courses in the field: 313, 403, 406, 411, 413, 415, 416, 420, 421, 422, 423, 
425, 428, 429, 430, 450, 453, and 460. A final course must be either Anthropology 
401 or 480. 

MASTIR OF ARTS IN ANTHROPOLOGY 

The program for this degree provides advanced study of general anthropology 
as well as research and other learning exp>eriences for students with specialized 
areas of interest or competence. 

Prerequisites 

Admission to the program requires: 

a) A B.A. degree with a minimum of 24 units in anthropology including the 
following courses or their equivalents: 

201 Introduction to Physical Anthropology or 
203 Introduction to Archaeology 

202 introduedon to Cultural Anthropology 
301 World Ethnography 

401 Ethnographic Fidd Methods 

410 Language and Culture 

480 History of Anthropology 

One areal course (e.g. Ant 328, Peoples of Africa) 

One thcorerical or topical course (e.g. Ant 415, Culture and Personality: Psy- 
chological Anthropology) 

Reading courses and spocial examinadons may be subsdtuted for some of these 
prerequisites by the department. 

b) A GPA of 3.0 (B) for all work taken in anthropology. 

c) Evaluadon and acceptance by the graduate study committee. 

Students with limited subject or grade deficiencies may be considered for ad- 
mission to the program upon completion of addidonal courses, selected by the 
graduate study committee, with at least a 3.0 (B) average. 


Program of Study 

The study plan for the degree must include the following: 

Units 

1. Ant 501 Methodology of Anthropological Research 3 

2. Ant 502 Contemporary^ Theory in Cultural Anthropology — 3 

3. Ant 597 Project or Ant 598 Thesis 6 

4. Two addidonal graduate seminars in anthropology 6 

5. Upp>cr division or graduate work in anthropology 6 

6. Upp>er division or graduate work in related fields 6 

30 


172 


Biological Science 


Any adviser-approved 300- or 400-level course taken as a graduate student may 
be used for requirements 5 and 6. Ant 599 Independent Graduate Research may 
be used for requirement 5. 

For continuation in the program an average of 3.0 (B) for all work in the study 
plan must be maintained. A thesis or a project or in unusual cases two projects 
must be completed for the degree. Normally a student will register for thesis or 
project two times, for 3 units each semester. 

For further information, consult the Department of Anthropology. 

See also “The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and the Qtaduate Bulletin. 


DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE 

Professors: Bradshaw, Brattstrom, McCarthy,* Sutton (Chairman), Turner 
Associate Professors: P. Adams, Barish, Bright, Davenport, Hanes, Rosenberg, 
Rothman, Walkington 

Assistant Professors: Boice, Greenfield, Jones, McClanahan, McWilliams, Smith, 
Weintraub, Whiteside, Wilson 

The Department of Biological Science offers a program leading to the Bachelor 
of Arts in biological science for students preparing to enter graduate and profes- 
sional schools, for those preparing to teach, and for those preparing for careers in 
industry and government service. 

It is the conviction of the faculty in biological science that the purposes of all 
these students can best be served by building their curricula on a core of courses 
fundamental to the science of biolojgy. This core curriculum includes biological 
principles, ecology, genetics, microbiology, and physiology. 

In considering the curricula beyond this core of subjects, the faculty has agreed 
that the interest and goals of individual students can best be satisfied through indi- 
vidual counseling rather than through prescribed programs. After discussion with 
their advisers, students will elect those upper division courses which will satisfy 
their individual interests and professional goals. 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree in biological science, studeno must have a 
C average in all courses required for the nujor including those in the related 
sciences. No credit toward the major will be allowed for biological science courses 
in which a grade D is obtained. A proficiency in one modem foreign language 
(Russian, Spanish, German, French, others by petition) b required. Thb require- 
ment b normaUy met by completing the 203 or 303 les'cl course in the language 
(e.g. Gennan 101, 102. 303). Upon approval of the advber, nine units of any 
combination of courses in quantitative methods, sutisdes, or advanced mathematics 
(above Math 150A) may be substituted for the language requirement. 

Advanced students will be permitted to enroll in Biological Science 499, Inde- 
pendent Study. All full-time upper divbion students are expected to attend the 

departmental seminars. . , i- . 

The Department of Biolojgical Science also offers a cumculum for students nujor- 

ing in other fields who wbh to minor in biology. 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE 

One hundred twenty-four units including general education (see page ^), 
foreign language, 36 units in biology courses, and supporting courses in physical 
sciences and mathematics. The supporting courses must include one year of inor- 
ganic college chemistry including qualitative analysb with laboratory, two sweaters 
of organic chemistry with laboratory, one semester of college mathematics, and 
one year of college physics with laboratory .t 


t in biology at the Py3. leyd and cax«en in ^ idn e should 

ttike a full W of organic chemistry, a year of analytical geometry and calculus, and 
quantitatiTe uicmistry with laboratory. 

173 


Biological Science 


Minimum Coursu Ruquirumuntf for tho Major f 

Lowor Division 

141 Principles of Botany- 

161 Principles of Zoology 


Umtf 

4 

4 


Units 


8 8 


4 

3 

3 

4 

14 


28 28 

36 

Minimum Roquiromontt for iiological Scionco Minor f 

Biological science 

101, 141, 161 Principles 13 

404 Evolution or 

312 Genetics or 313 Human Genetics 3 

320 General Microbiology 4 

361 Mammalian Anatomy and Physiology or 

305 Molecular Biology or 

444 Plant Physiology 4 


Uppor Division 

Biological Science 

305 Molecular Biology 

312 Genetics Lecture 

316 Principles of Ecology 

320 General Microbiology 

Electives — 14 units, of which 4 must be 
outside area of emphasis 


24 


MASTER OF ARTS IN BIOLOGY 

The program for this degree is based on the assumption that modem science 
necessitates broad preparation through the master’s level of training. It permits 
breadth of preparation and at the same time concentration in an area such as 
botany, microbiology or zoology. In design it offers sufficient breadth and depth 
to strengthen the student’s academic understanding and improve his competence 
for (a) advanced graduate work toward the doctoral degree in biological science, 
(b) teaching at all levels— elementary, secondary, and junior college, (c) techno- 
logical work in the health sciences, (d) participating in research programs, (e) 
entering the field of public health service, and (f) participating in various field 
service and conservation positions with both the state and national governments. 

Prerequisites 

Prerequisites to classification in the MA. program in Biology are as follows: 
(1) B.A. in Biological Science at CSCF or other accredited institution with a grade- 
point average of 3.0 in biological science and a GPA of 2.5 in the related sciences 
of mathematics, chemistry and physics; (2) Study plan prepared in conference with 

t Substitutions in the program may be made for transfer students and others upon the recoounen- 
dadon of the adviser and the approval of the department chairman. 


174 


Chmmitfry 

the adviser and submitted to the departmental Graduate Committee. Students with 
limited subject or grade deficiencies may be considered for admission to the pro- 
gram upon completion of 12 units of postgraduate studies in biology, mathematics, 
chemistry or physics, with a GPA of 3.0. These courses will be selected in con- 
ference with the adviser. 

Advancement to candidacy for the MA. in Biology will be granted after complet- 
ing 15 units of coursework on the study plan with a GPA of 3.0. In addition, the 
student must pass the departmental qualification examination which will be offered 
at the beginning of each semester. Two attempts will be allowed to successfully 
complete this exam. The first attempt must be made no later than the semester fol- 
lowing classification. 

Program of Study 

A student who meets the prerequisites may apply for classified graduate status. 
He must file a study plan including 30 units of adviser-approved graduate work, 
at least 12 of which must be at the 500 level. The study plan may include six units 
of graduate level medical biology taken in an approved clinical laboratory school. 
All study plans must include Bio Sci 599, Independent Graduate Research, and 
Bio Sci 598, Thesis, and at least one departmenul seminar. Six units must be 
outside the principal area. Further electives may be possible. Required is a thesis 
or a published paper, or a paper accepted for publication, acceptable to the adviser 
and committee, covering a field or laboratory research problem. A final oral 
examination on his research is also required. 

For more detailed information or advisement, students should consult the chair- 
man of the Biological Science Department, or the graduate coordinator of the 
Biological Science Department. 

Also see “The Program of Master^s Degrees,” page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY 

Professors: Bryden, Shields * 

Associate Professors: Dorer, Hiegel, Janota, Langworthy, Montana (chairman), 
Prenzlow, Spenger, Wong 

Assistant Professors: Bailey, Baur, BeUoli, Huotari, Wegner, Willis 
Assistant: Ezell 


The Department of Chemistry is on the approved list of the American Oiemkal 
Society. ... 

The curriculum is planned to provide thorough instruction in the basic prinaples 
and concepts of chemistry for students who will (1) advance to graduate work 
in chemistry; (2) teach in the science programs of secondaty sch^k; (3) seek 
employment in industry or government; or (4) pursue a chemistry minor of funda- 
mental courses in chemistry in support of other areas such as physics and biology. 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree in chemistry, students must have a C 
average in all courses required for the majors including those in the rebted sci- 
ences. A reading proficiency in one modem foreign language (Russian, Carman, 
French) is required. This requirement may be met by taking either four semesters 
of college foreign language or three semesters of college foreign language provided 
the third semester is a course in Scientific French, German, or Russian. Under 
unusual circumstances the requirement may be met by examination upon approval 
by the Department Chairman. Examinations will be given in October and March 
of each academic year. For details of examination procedure, apply at the depart- 
ment oflSce. A reading comprehension of a second modem foreign language is 

•idiiujiistzAtiTc officer. 


175 


Chemistry 


strongly recommended for students planning graduate study leading to the PhX). 
degree. 

No credit toward the major will be allowed for specific major courses in which 
a grade D is obtained. 


BACHILOR OF ARTS IN CHEMISTRY 

Students may elect a curriculum (Plan A) based upon the recommendations of 
the Committee for Professional Training of Chemists of the American Chemical 
Society and upon completion of this program receive a Certificate of the Ameri- 
can Chemical Society. This curriculum qualifies graduates for chemical industry 
and graduate work in chemistry. The department offers Plan B and Plan C for 
those students who are candidates for professional schools as medicine, dentistry, 
etc.; secondary education; or graduate school in biochemistry or molecular biology. 

Plan A 

(A.C.S. Approved Program) 

Required courses in Chemistry: Units 


Gen Chem (101A3) 10 

Quant Chem (312) 4 

Org Chem (305A,B) 10 

Physical (Dhem (371 A3) — 6 

Physical Chem Lab (441) 4 

Adv Inorg (425) 3 

Instru Anal (411) 4 

Indep Study (499) or 

Senior Research (495) 2 

EJectives (at least one lecnire 
or lecture lab course) 3 


Total units 46 

Related areas {satisfies the general education requirement in physical science, 


mathematics and biology)-. Units 

Physics (225A, B, C) ; 226A, B, C 12 

Mathematics (150A3, 250 and 291) 15 

Biology 5 

Total Units 32 

Total units in science and mathematics 78 

General EUiucadon units, not including 13 units of physical science, 
mathematics, and biology (sec the general education requirements 

page 68) 32 

Undesignated units 14 

Total units for the BA. degree in Chemistry (Plan A) 124 


Plan R 

Required courses in Chemistry: Units 


Gen Chem (101A3) 10 

(Juant Chem (312) 4 

Org Chem (305A3) 10 

Physical Cliem (371A3) 6 

Physical Chem Lab (441) 4 

Adv Inorg (425) 3 

Indep Study (499) or 
Senior Research (495) 2 

Total units 39 


176 


Chmmitfry 


Related areas {satisfies the general education requirements in pbysiad science, 
mathematics, and biology): Units 

Physics (211A3) or ( 225A3,C) (226B,C) g-U 

Mathematics (150A3i 250) 12 

Biology 5 

Total units 25-28 

Total units in Science and Mathematics 

General education units, not including 13 units of physical science, 
mathematics, and biology (see the general education requirements 

page 68) 

Undesignated units 


62-64 


32 

30-28 


Total units for the BA. in Chemistry (Plan B) 124 

Pkiii C gio<h«iiiittry 

Required courses in Chemistry: 

Units 


Gen C^em (101A,B) 10 

Quant CSiem (312) 4 

Org Qiem (one year) 8-10 

Phys Chem (371A3) ^ 

Gen Biochem (421A3) ^ 

Gen Biochem Lab (422 A3) ^ 

Ind Study (499) 

Senior Rsch (495) 2 


Total units 40-42 

Related areas {satisfies the general education reqtdrements in physical science, 
mathematics, and biology) Units 

Physics (211 A3) or (225A3.C), (226B,C) - 8-11 

Mathematics (150A3» 250) — 12 

Biology — 12 


Total units 32-35 

Total units in Science and Madiemadcs 72-77 

General education units, not including 13 units of physical science, 
mathematics, and biology (see the general education requirements 

page 68) — 52 

Undesignated units - 20-15 


Total units for the BA. degree in Oemistry (Plan O 124 


MINOR IN CHiMISTRY 

A minimum of 24 acceptable units of chemistry, including organic chemistry 
(8) and physical chemistry (6), are required for a chemistry minor. 


177 


Chemistry 


Sugg«st«d light S«m*ft«r Program for a Major in Chomistry (Plan A) 


First Somostor (Froshman) 

Units 

Chcm lOlA Gen Chem 5 

Math 150A Anal Geo and Calc ... 4 

Eng 101 Composition and Lit 3 

Hist 170A or 170B U^. history 3 
PE Phys ed activity 1 


Socond Somostor (Froshman) 

Units 

Chcm lOlB Gen Chem 5 

Math 150B Anal Geo and Calc_ 4 
Physics 225A, 226A Fund Physics 4 
Elng 102 Lit and Composition — 3 
PE Phys ed activity 1 


16 

Third Somostor (Sophomoro) 

Chem 305A Org Chcm 5 

Math 250 Inter Calc 4 

Physics 225B, 226B Fund Physics 4 
Pol Sci 100 Amcr Government™. 3 

16 

Fifth Somostor (Junior) 

Chcm 371A Physical Chcm 3 

For Lang Mod For Lang 5 

General education courses 3 

Chem 312 Quant Chcm 4 

15 

Sovonth Somostor (Sonior) 

Chcm 441 Ph>^ Chem Lab 3 

Chem (495 or 499) 2-3 

Qicm 425 Adv Inorg 3 

For Lang 203 or 303 3 

General education courses 4 

15-16 

This type of schedule allows the student to elect his last semesters according to 
the branch of chemistry which attracts him the most. 

Below are listed the possible electives which would be available during the stu- 
dent's last three semesters in residence. 

Possible elective in the sixth semester: 

Chem 403 Anal of Org Cmpds 
Possible electives during the seventh and/or eighth semester; 

Chcm 403 Anal of Org Cmpds 
Chem 421 A, B Gtn Biochem 
Chcm 422A, B Gen Biochem Lab 
Chem 427 Prep Techniques 
Chcm 431 Adv Org 
Chcm 451 Quantum Chcm 

Suggasted Program for a Major in Chemistry (Plan B) 

This program is essentially the same as under Plan A except the number of 
required chemistry, mathematics and physics courses is reduced. A student planning 
on a career in teaching will, in addition, fulfill requirements of the School of 
Education. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN CHEMISTRY 

The Master of Arts in Chemistry is designed to qualify students for more ad- 
vanced work in chemistry, to provide preparation which will lead to responsible 


17 

Fourth Somostor (Sophomoro) 

Chem 305B Org Chem 5 

Math 291 3 

Physics 225C; 226C Fund Physics 4 
Bio Sci 5 

17 

Sixth Somostor (Junior) 

Chcm 371B Physical C)hcm 3 

EJcctive in chemistry 2-4 

For Lang 102 Mod For Lang 5 

General education courses 5 

15-17 

Eighth Somostor (Sonior) 

C^hem 411 Instr Anal 4 

EJeedve in chemistry 2-3 

General educadon courses 9 


15-16 


178 


Chmmtsfry 


positions in industrial or government research and development laboratories, and 
to provide preparation for the effective teaching of chemistry in the high schools 
and junior colleges. 

The program provides fundamental courses at a level and depth commensurate 
with those taken during the first year of a doctoral program and provides an in- 
troduction to research and research methods. 


Prerequisites 

Students to be admitted to the program must: 

1. Meet the general prerequisites for graduate work formulated and recom- 
mended by the college. 

2. Have a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution.^ 

3. Have an undergraduate major in chemistry with a grade-point average of }X) 
or better in chemistry courses taken, and a 2.5 GPA in all other previous col- 
lege work. 

4. Have had enough specialized elective courses in chemistry to give a minimum 
of 24 units of upper division chemistry, including at least one course which 
has three years of chemistry as a prerequisite. 

The major in chemistry should have included in the undergraduate program a 
year-course in each of the following fields: general chemistry, analytical chemistry, 
organic chemistry, and physical chemistry. The course in physical chemistry should 
have included laboratory work. 

Orientation examinations, administered by the department, are required of all 
students entering the program. The results of these examinations will be used to 
advise the student in developing his study plan. A student may be classified with 
certain subject deficiencies, but such deficiencies must be removed by completion 
of committee-approved courses with at least a B average before the student may 
be advanced to candidacy. Proficiency in reading chemical literature in one ap- 
proved foreign language (e.g., German, French or Russian) must be demonstrated 
before advancement to candidacy. 


Program of Study 

The degree program consists of 30 units of committee-approved course work 
completed with a minimum grade-point average of 3X), including at least 15 units 
of 500-level chemistry courses. 

The following courses are required of all students in the program: 

Units 

Chem550 Advanced Physic^ Chemistry 4 

Chem505 Seminar in Chemistry , / • • v 

Chem599 Independent Graduate Research - _ 3 (mmimum) 

Chem 598 Thesis 

Elective courses, to be taken with the approval of the adviser, must indude a 
minimum of six units outside the student’s area of specializa^ and a nun^um 
of nine units (in addition to the minimum of three units of Chem 599, as above) 
in one of the foUowing areas of specialization, mcluding related areas as approved 
by the committee. 


1. Analytical chemistry 

2. Biochemistry 

3. Inorganic chemistry 

4. Organic chemistry 

5. Physical chemistry 


For further details or advisement, please refer to the Graduate Coordinator of 

the Chemistry Department. dh* 

See also “The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


179 


Communicitfions 


DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS 

Professors: Alexander, Klein, Maxwell (chairman) 

Associate Professor: Smythe 

Assistant Professors: Johnson, Lawrence, Mastroianni 
Lecturers: Calhoun, Koehler, Overbeck 

The department offers a major in communications with emphases in advertising, 
news communication (journalism), photocommunication, public relations, technical 
communication, and telecommunication. 

Secondary teaching candidates must take the journalism emphasis. 

The MA. program in Communications is designed to provide advanced study 
in communications and related disciplines for those who wish to teach, engage in 
research, or follow professional careers in the mass media of communication. 

The communications major helps to prepare those desiring various careers related 
to mass communication — careers that nuy involve newspapers and magazines, tele- 
vision and radio, advertising, public relations, photography, industrial or govern- 
mental conununicadons, and teaching. Also, because of the program's emphasis on 
general principles of communicadon, it can serve well those with aspiradons for 
administradve work in many areas of business, industry, government and educadon. 
Addidonally, conununicadon courses will benefit those who wish a better under- 
standing of the funedons of the mass media in a democradc society. 


AACMELOR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIONS 

Requirements: A combined total of 48 units — 36 within the C^ommunicadons 
Department and 12 collateral units * in other departments, as follows: 


Communications Coro (21 units) 


The courses in the core are required of all students majoring in communica- 
dons.t 


C>>mm 101 
Comm 102 
Comm 333 
0)mm 407 
Comm 425 
Comm 426 
Comm 427 


Reporting and Writing (3) 

Reporting and Writing (3) 

Mass Communicadon in Modem Society (3) 

(Communicadon and the Law (3) 

History and Philosophy of American Mass (Communicadon (3) 
World (Communicadon Systems (3) 

Seminar on Current Issues in Mass Communicadon (3) 


EMPHASIS FOR COMMUNICATIONS MAJORS 

Every conununicadons major must select an area of emphasis and complete the 
courses in it. 


t AcKrurHting Units 

(Comm 353 Advertising (Copy and Layout 3 

Comm 356 Advertising Pr^uedon (1,1) 2 

(Conun 2 18 A incroduedon to Photography 2 

(Comm 354 Retail Advertising 3 

(Comm 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

(Comm 451 Nadonal Advertising Campaigns 3 


* Some flejdbility may be ];>exmitted in collateral units, depending on the student’s preparatioo in 
these areas. 

t Because of eztensiTe need for mathematics and science in the technical communication emphasis, 
s(»ne Tariatitm will he permitted, through adrisement only, to include additional 
and science in the program. Collateral unitt in ocher departments will exceed 12 for 
emphasis, but to^ required for the major will not exceed 48. 

T This emphasis is still in its developmental stage. Other courses are being prepared for inclu* 
sion in it. 


180 


Communications 


t Collateral Roquiromontf In Other Departments Units 

Art 103 Two-dimensional design ^ 3 

English 303 The Structure of Modem English 3 

Mktg 351 Principles of Marketing 3 

Phfl 310 Ethics - - 3 

News Cemmwnlcotlon (Jeurnalism) 

(Required for secondary teacher candidates) 

Comm 338 Newspaper Production 3 

Comm 332 Copy Editing and Makeup. 3 

Comm 335 Reporting of Public Affairs 3 

Comm 218A Introduction to Photography— 2 

Comm 218B Communications Photography - 2 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

t Collateral Requirements In Other Departments 

Econ 330 Comparative Economic Systems - — 3 

English 462 Modem British and American Novels 3 

Hist 476 United States Since 1933 3 

Psych 351 Social Psychology 3 

* Rhotecemmunication 

Comm 218A Introduction to Photography- - - 2 

Comm 218B Communications Photography 2 

Comm 306 Photographic Production — - - 2 

Comm 319 Documentary Film Production — 3 

Comm 375 The Documentary Film 3 

Comm 358A Publications Production - - 2 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship - 2 

t Cellateral Requirements in Other Departments 

Art 103 Two-dimensional Design 3 

Art 338A Creative Photography ^ 

Econ 201 The American Economy - - 3 

Psych 351 Social Psychology 3 

Rublic Relations 

Comm 361 Theory and Principles of Public Relations — 3 

Comm 463 Public Relations Methods- 3 

Comm 465 International Public Relations - 3 

Comm 358 Publications Production 2 

Comm 218A Introduction to Photography 2 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

t Collateral Requirements in Other Departments 

Econ 330 Comparative Economic Systems - 3 


Mgmt 341 Principles of Management 3 

Psych 351 Social Psychology 3 

* Technical Cemmunlcotien 

Comm 332 Copy Editii^ 3 

Comm 334 Feature Article Writing 3 

Comm 401 Report Writing 3 

Comm 403 Technical Writing 3 

Comm 404 Advanced Technical Writing and Editing 3 


t Or odkcx courses as si>pcoTed by adriser. 


181 


Communications 


I Collat«ral R*quir«in«ntft In Oth«r D«portm«nts Units 

Physics 211 A Elementary Physics 4 

Physics 21 IB EUementary Physics - - - — 4 

QM 361 Business and E^nomic Statistics 3 

QM 364 Computer Logic and Programming — 3 

* T^Ucommiiiiicatioii 

Comm 380 Introduction to Radio and Television — — 3 

Comm 371 Radio>television News and Public Affairs 3 

Comm 375 The Documentary Film - 3 

Comm 2 18 A Introduction to Photography 2 

Comm 319 Documentary Film Production - 3 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

X Collateral Roqwiromonts In Other Departments 

Drama 382 Television Techniques - 3 

English 303 The Structure of Modem English 3 

Psych 351 Social Psychology 3 

Speh 333 Business and Professional Speaking 3 


MINOR IN COMMUNICATIONS 

This minor offers a basic core of writing and publication courses for teacher 
candidates and others who wish some training in communications. 

Requirements: A combined total of 21 units, as follows: 

Lower division (maximum of 7) 

0)mm 101 or 102 (3) 

Comm 218A and 218B (2, 2) 

Upper division (minimum of 14 units) 
t Comm 331 or equivalent (3) 

Comm 333 (3) 

C>>mm 338 (3) 

Comm 358A or 358B (2) 

Conun 425 (3) 


HACHIR CREDENTIAL REQUIREMENTS 

O>mmunications majors who are teacher candidates should complete the commu- 
nication core and the neu's communication ( journalism) emphasis. This program 
has been declared to be academic by the State Board of Education. Prospective 
teachers must complete (Ix>mmunications 358 A, B as part of their major require- 
ments. These candidates must have their minor approved by the chairman of the 
Communications Department and must complete the required professional educa- 
tion courses in addition to their major and minor requirements. (See “Journalism 
Education/* page 350.) 

MASTIR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIONS 

The Master of Arts in Communications is designed to provide advanced study 
in communications and related disciplines, and to develop a research emphasis in 
one of the following: advertising, journalism education, neu's, photo-conununica- 
don, public reladons, technical communicauon, or tclecommunicadon. 

Such study will enable the graduate of the program to apply advanced com- 
municadons concepts and skills in careers that may involve newspapers and m^a- 
zines, tele\Tsion and radio, advertising, public reladons, photography, and technical 

* This emphasis is still in its deYelopmental sts«. Other courses are bein^ prepa r ed for incluskm in it. 
t Some raziation in these requirements may be permitted on the basu of prof esrion a l experience 
or interest. 

t Or ocher courses as approved by adviser. 


182 


Comparative Literature 


and scientific communications. Communications abilities are also highly applicable 
to administrative careers in industry, government and education. Students complet- 
ing the Communications M.A. with a journalism education research emphasis are 
eligible for journalism teaching positions in high school or junior college. 

Prerequisites 

Students must possess a baccalaureate degree and have completed a basic core 
of courses in communications as prerequisites to the M.A. program. Before admis- 
sion to classified graduate status, students must take the Graduate Record Exam- 
ination Aptitude Test. 

Program of Study 

Students are required to complete 30 units of approved studies, including 18 units 
in graduate level communications courses, and six units in related studies. Six of the 
18 units of graduate level courses are applicable to research for a thesis or project. 
In addition, students must satisfy a “collateral field requirement” in a related dis- 
cipline. 

For funher information, consult the Department of Communications. Also see 
“The Program of Master^s Degrees,” page 71 and the Graduate Bulletin. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMPARATIVE LITERATURE 

(An Interdiscipiinary Program) 

The program in comparative literature is an interdisciplinary program directed 
by the Committee on the Progr^ in Comp^ative Literature. The committee is 
responsible for formulating curriculum policies, approving courses, and advising 
students. Courses in comparative literature are taught by faculty from the Elnglish 
Department and other departments whose courses are approved by the committee. 
The Chairman of the English Department administers the program. The major 
in comparative literature provides professional competence and personal enrich- 
ment for students with an exceptional concern and appreciation for the study 
of the interrelationships between the languages and literatures of various civiliza- 
tions from the dawn of mankind to the present. The program offers courses in 
the study of literature with special emphasis on the global interrelatedness of 
literary form and content, theory and philosophy, genres and movements, providing 
an insight into the developments and backgrounds of mankind’s worldwide ctiltures 
and literatures. The literary works are read in English or English translations and 
the courses conducted in En^h. 

Upper Division Requirements 

(A) 15 units selected from courses listed under compandve literature. 

(B) 3 units of French, German, Italian, Russian, or Spanish selected from course 
numbers 431, 441, 451, 461, or any other 400 course approved by the ad- 
viser. 

(C) 6 units selected from courses listed under English and numbered 300 or 
above 

(D) 3 units of either History 415A or History llOA. 

(E) 9 units selected from any 300 or 400 literature course in comparative litera- 
ture, Elnglish, French, German, Italian, Russian, or Spanish. 

Total: 36 units. 

Majors in comparative literature are strongly advised to include in their pro- 
gram courses in related areas, such as art, anthropology, drama, history, linguistics, 
philosophy. 

Studrats must consult with an adviser in comparative literature through the 
Department of English before submitting their individual courses of study for 
approval by the Committee on the Program in Comparative Literature. 


183 


English 


DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 

Professors: Cummings^ Jones,* McNelly, Obler, Poliak (Salz), Ramsay, Schneider, 
Sears, Wagner (chairman), Watkin 

Associate Professors: Austin, Cox, Farzan, Friend, Glide, Greenwood, Haaker, 
Hodges, Huebner, Hughes, Rubinstein, Scott, Scoufos, Sharma, Tumas, Vogeler 
Assistant Professors: Boston, Epstein, Hayden, Hengeveld, Hipolito, Holland, Law, 
Miller, Neilson, Nims, Oleyar, Petalas, Schwarz, Seller, Shames, Shapiro, Spangler 
Instructors: Antonelli, C^abanel-Evans, Fuller, Kilker, Mauch 
Lecturers: deFrance, Garber, Romotsky, Sawicki, Yanko 

The English Department offers courses designed to acquaint the student with 
the nature and development of our language, with the literatures of England and 
America, and with the disciplines involved in the various kinds of writing. Elxcept 
for freshman English offerings, courses in world literature in Elnglish translation 
are listed separately, under 0>mparative Literature. In addition the Department of 
English offers some specialized professional courses for the preparation of teachers. 
On the senior and graduate levels, various opportunities are provided for seminar 
work and independent study. 

Elnglish lOlt and 102t or their equivalents or the consent of the instructor is a 
prerequisite to all English and comparative literature courses numbered 200 and 
above. 

iACNILOH OF ARTS IN ENGLISH 

Requirements: A total of 36 units beyond English 101 and 102 or their equiva- 
lents, with the following distribution: 

Laiffcr Division (maximum of 9 units) 

May include survey courses in British, American, or World Literature. 

Basic Course (3 units) 

201 Analysis of Literary Forms 
Upper Division (minimum of 27 units) 

Language and composition (minimum of 3 units), selected from the following: 
301 Advanced G>mposition 
303 The Structure of Modem English 
490 History of the English Language 
American Literature (6 units) : 

321 American Literanire to Whitman 

322 American Literature from Twain to the Modems 
Major Author (bourses (9 units) 

333 Chaucer 

334 Shakespeare 

341 • Milton 

Period courses (minimum of 6 units, at least 3 in a period preceding the Roman- 
tic Movement) selected from the foUowing: 

332 Medieval Literature 

335 Elizabethan and Jacobean Drama 

336 Elizabethan Poetry and Prose 

337 Seventeenth Ontury Poetry and Prose 

338 Drama of the Restoration and the 18th Century 

342 The Age of Reason in English Literature 

343 The Romantic Movement in English Literature 

* College AdministrmdTe Officer. 

t Finml dectstons on any changes in the freshman English program for 1970-71 were not 
made in time for inclusion in this catalog, l^ase see “Spraal English Department Bulletin 
*70-*71,** available in the FngliA Depa rtm ent, for English Department course descriptioos 
aiKl requirements at the 100 leveL Courses in the 100 series listed in the Class SchedmU 
are designed for freshman students. 


184 


English 


344 The Litcranirc of the 19th Century after 1830 

345 The Development of the English Novel through Jane Austen 

346 The Development of the Nineteenth-Century English Novel 

462 Modem British and American Novels 

463 Contemporary British and American Novels 

464 Modem British and American Drama 

466 Modem British and American Poetry 

Transfer students should consult with their advisers who may recommend the 
granting of funher credit for lower division work completed at other institutions. 

Electives to complete a minimum of 36 units selected from additional courses 
in language and composition, period courses, literary criticism, senior seminars, and 
comparative literature. Comparative literature offerings are listed separately, but 
count toward an English major. 

A program of literary studies gains in perspective through the study of history, 
sociology, philosophy, and psychology. These fields offer viul lifelines which 
nourish and deepen understanding of literature. Students of literature are strongly 
advised to include such courses in their program, particularly in the areas of 
philosophy and psychology. 

Elnglish majors who intend to pursue graduate study are urged to acquire pro- 
ficiency in at least one foreign language. Note: Freshmen intending to major in 
Elnglish should complete two years of course work in a foreign language, or dem- 
onstrate equivalent accomplishment by transfer or by examination. 

MINOR IN INOLISH 

Requirements: a total of 21 units. 

Lower Division (maximum of 9 units) 

201, 211, 212, or any lower division course beyond Elnglish 101 and 102 or the 
equivalent. 

Lower Division electives (3 units) 

Upper Division (minimum of 12 units), including: 

American Literature (minimum of 3 units), selected from the following: 

321 American Literature to Whitman 

322 American Literature from Twain to the Modems 

Language and composition (minimum of 3 units), selected from the following: 

301 Advanced Composition 

303 The Structure of Modem English 

490 History of the English Language 
Major Author Courses (minimum of 6 units) 

334 Shakespeare 

333 Chaucer or 

341 Milton 

MASnt OF ARTS IN INGLISH 

To qualify for admission to the program for the MA. in English (classified 
graduate stanis) a student must hold a bachelor*s degree in Elnglish from an ac- 
credited institution at which he has maintained at least a 3X) grade-point average 
in the major courses provided that he has a minmr um of 24 units of upper-division 
coursework; or if he holds a bachelor’s degree in another major, he must 
have completed 24 units of upper-division course work in Elnglish with at least 
a 3i) grade point average. If the student lacks the prerequisite number of Elnglish 
courses, he must make them up before he may begin work in the master’s degree 
program, earning at least a 3i) in such make-up coursework. In the event that the 
student’s GPA. in prerequisite English courses is less than 3i), he may be allowed 
to take from 6 to 9 units of probationary, adviser-approved coursework. If his 


185 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 

GPA in these probationary courses is 3.0 or better, he may be admitted (classi- 
fied). 

A student is required to have two years of one foreign language at the college 
level or 6 units of study in comparative literature. If taken as graduate work, these 
6 units may be applied to the master’s degree under “units in subjects related to 


English.** 

Program: Units 

Minimum units in courses restricted to graduate students (500 series) 18 

Maximum units in specified upper-division courses in English 6 

Units in subjects related to ^glish 6 

Total 30 


During his last semester or session, the student must enroU in Independent Gradu- 
ate Research (Elnglish 599) as one of his “500** courses. At the conclusion of this 
course he will take the written comprehensive examination for the master’s degree. 

Note: The student is strongly advised to take the steps necessary for admission 
to the program before registering for his first graduate courses. Part of the admis- 
sion process is to confer with the graduate adviser, who will analyze prerequisites 
and designate those courses which will apply to the degree program. Courses taken 
by an unclassified student do not necessarily apply toward a degree. At the time 
the student achieves classified status, no more than 9 units of postgraduate course- 
work may be applied to the master’s degree program. 

For further information, consult the Department of Elnglish. 

Also see “The Program of Master’s Degrees,** page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 

DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES 
AND LITERATURES 

Professors: Feldman,* Kline (chairman), Mathieu 

Associate Professors: Arana, Boarino, Merrifield, Shapley, Van Ginneken, Zimmer- 

mann 

Assistant Professors: Bertalot, Cartledge, Mayer, Vasari 
Instructors: Pena, Tussing 
Lecturers: Baden, Bali, Bloom 

The program of the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures is de- 
signed to meet the needs of several types of students, including those who seek 
a liberal arts education unth an emphasis on a foreign language and its literature; 
those who intend to teach at the elementary’, secondary, or college level; those 
who plan to use foreign languages in professional careers; or those who desire 
to pursue graduate studies. The program emphasizes high standards of achievement 
in the practical use of the language, in the study of its literature and its culture, 
in the mastery’ of applied linguistics, and in methodology’ of teaching, the latter 
acquired in part through apprenticeship. 

A student may enroll at any point in the sequence of courses for which his pre- 
vious study has prepared him. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN FRfNCH, GERMAN OR SPANISH 
MAJOR IN A FOREIGN LANGUAGE 

Three options are offered: French, German or Spanish. Requirements: Courses 
101, 102, 203, 204, 213, 214, or their equivalents completed sadsfactorilv; plus a 
minimum of 24 units of upper division courses, including, 315, 317, 375, 431, 441, 
451, 461. 

* College administrative officer. 


186 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 


Attention is directed to the courses in forei^ literatures in translation listed else- 
where in this catalog under Comparative Literature. These courses may not be 
counted toward a major in a foreign language. 

MINOR IN A FOREIGN LANGUAGE 

Requirements: Courses 101, 102, 203, 204, 213, 214, or their equivalents, completed 
satisfactorily; plus nine units in upper division courses selected in consultation with 
the adviser. JViuior concentrations are offered in French, German, Portuguese, Rus- 
sian and Spanish. 


MAJOR IN LINGUISTICS 

Requirements for the Bachelor of Arts and Master of Arts degrees in Linguistics 
are listed on page 161. 


CREDENTIAL PROGRAMS 

All prospective teachers, before being admitted to a credential program, must 
pass a proticiency examination in which their skills of listening, speaking, reading, 
writing and knowledge of linguistic principles will be tested. The examination is 
administered twice yearly, in September and February. Students should make 
arrangements with the Department to take the test during their senior year or 
during the first semester of their fifth year. 

STANDARD HACKING CREDENTIAL WITH A SPECIALIZATION 
IN ELEMENTARY TEACHING 

Students who are candidates for the standard teaching credential with a special- 
ization in elementary teaching must also complete the professional requirements, 
including Foreign Languages Education 432 and 433. 

STANDARD TEACHING CREDENTIAL WITH A SPECIALIZATION 
IN SECONDARY EDUCATION 

The credential program is the same as for the liberal arts major, with the fol- 
lowing additional requirements: 

Foreign Languages Elducation 442; 

French or German or Spanish Applied Linguistics 466; 
plus six units in the major language selected with the approval of the adviser and 
taken in the senior year or thereafter at the 400 and 500 level. 

INTERNATIONAL PROGRAMS 

In accordance with recommendations made by the Modem Language Association 
of America, the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures encourages all 
majors interested in a teaching career to participate in a study-abroad program. 
This will enable a student to perfect his mastery of the language and afford him 
additional insights into the foreign culture. To this end, the California State Col- 
leges International Programs offer a wide variety of study opportunities on the 
junior, senior and graduate level. Language majors are, however, required to com- 
plete a minimum of three literature courses at the 400 level on the Fullerton 
campus. For further information, sec page 43. 

THE LANGUAGf LAiORATORY 

Students enrolling in courses 101, 102, 203, 204 arc required, in addition to the 
regular periods, to practice for the minimum of prescribed time in the lan- 
guage laboratory. The 30-starion laboratory operates like a library; students may 
use it at a time most convement to them, preferably every day in sessions of 15 
to 30 minutes. Further details will be announced by each instructor and by the 
supervisor of the language laboratory. 

Students are invited to make use of the collection of literary and cultural record- 
ings in French, German, Portuguese, Russian and Spanish available in the language 
laboratory. 


187 


Geography 


MASTIR IN ARTS IN FRENCH, GERMAN OR SPANISH 

The degrees of Master of Arts in French, German and Spanish require a mini- 
mum of 30 semester units beyond the bachelor’s degree. A candidate presenting a 
BA. which has fewer than 24 upper division units in the major language, or is 
otherwise inadequate, normally will be required to take additional courses to build 
a full undergraduate major before beginning the graduate program. The student 
must also demonstrate proficiency in English, either by examination or a three-unit 
upper division course in Elnglish grammar. The 30 units in the graduate program are 


distributed as follows: 

Units 

Language and linguistics courses (minimum of 9 on 500 level) 12 

Literature courses (minimum of 6 on 500 level) 12 

Subjects in an approved related field 6 

Minimum total - 30 

A part of the 30 units may be assigned to a thesis. 


The candidate for the MA. degree must consult a graduate adviser before be- 
ginning his program. Before being advanced to candidacy for the degree, he must 
demonstrate proficiency in the language to a faculty committee appointed for that 
purpose. The terminal evaluation is by comprehensive written and oral examination, 
including fluency in the specified language. 

For further information, consult the Department of Foreign Languages and Lit- 
atures. 

See also “The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and the Gradtuite Bulletin, 

DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY 

Professor: Earick 

Associate Professors: Helin, Reith (chairman), Sutton 
Assistant Professors: Keneringham, Pettyjohn, Sager 

iACHEiOR OF ARTS IN GEOGRAPHY 

The major in geography provides knowledge concerning variety and change in 
the earth’s physical foundation and in man’s economic, cultural and political rela- 
tionship to that foundation. In doing so it contributes to a broad, liberal education 
and furnishes sound preparation for employment in business, planning, and govern- 
ment service. The fidd also provides a foundation for teaching on the elemental^’ 
and secondary levels and for advanced geographic study on the graduate level 
leading to university and college teaching and research. 

Unit R*qwir«m«nts 

The major consists of at least 36 units of geography, including no more than 13 
units of lower di\’ision work and excluding all work applied toward the general 
education requirement. To fulfill the major a student must complete the geog- 
raphy core (Geography 100, 206, 210 and 233) and a 24 unit concentration in upper 
division geography, including at least one course from each of the following groups: 

Physical: 312, 323 

Human: 350, 370, 453, 463, 464, 472, 481, 483 

Technique: 475, 478, 479, 480, 490 

Regional: 365, 366, 431 through 439, 445 

No unit credit toward the major will be allowed for geography courses in which 
a grade of D is received. Content credit for such courses may be allowed by the 
student’s adviser. 


188 


Geography 


TEACHINO MINOR IN GEOGRAPHY 

The minor in geography is intended as a second field for persons completing a 
major in another discipline in preparation for a teaching credential. It is designed 
to give a basic understanding of earth science and geographic relationships helpful 
to the classroom teacher. The program provides a balance between the physical 
and social sciences. 

R««|wir«d Cowrt«t 

Geography Core. (Geography 100, 206, 210 and 233) 

One course from each of the following groups: physical, human and regional. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN GEOGRAPHY 

This program provides advanced study in geographic concepts, techniques and 
methods. Through seminars and research it develops the analytical and interpretive 
abilities of the student, and provides requisite background for employment in 
teaching, government and business. 

Prerequisites 

Admission to the program requires the equivalent of 27 semester units of geog- 
raphy distributed as follows: (1) nine units in introductory geography; (2) three 
units in upi>er division physical geography; (3) six units in upper division human 
geography; (4) six units in upper division techniques; and (5) three units in 
upper division regional geography. A 3X) (B) average in all geography cour^ 
is required prior to classification in the program. Course or grade deficiencies 
may be made up with consent of the departmental graduate committee. Students 
are to complete the Graduate Record Elxamination (advanced geography test) prior 
to classification. 

Program of Study 

After completion of all prerequisites and removal of deficiencies, if any, the 
student is reviewed for clas^cation into the program by the departmental gradu- 
ate committee. On acceptance, an official study plan is developed in consulution 
with the sttident's graduate committee. Requirements for the degree include: 

Units 

Geography 500 Seminar in the Evolution of Geographic Thought 3 


Other seminars in geography 6-9 

Geography 597 Project or Geography 598 Thesis 6 

Elective upper division or graduate geography, including three units of 

technique 9-6 

Upper division or graduate work in related fields 6 

Total 30 

C^didacy is attained on the satisfactory completion, i.e., B or better in all, of 


12 approved units of work, including at least three units in a 5(X)-level geography 
seminar. A written or oral examination may be required for advancement to 
candidacy. Each candidate normally prepares two three-unit research projects, but, 
if recommended by the student*s graduate committee, he may substitute a six-unit 
thesis. Students interested in foreign area studies are expected to demonstrate a 
proficiency in a suitable foreign language. 

For further information, consult the Department of Geography. 

See also “The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


189 


History 


DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY 

Professors: Beck, Brown,* de Graaf, Langsdorf,* Povlovich * 

Associate Professors: Bellot, Etue, Feldman, Giacumakis, Hardy (chairman), Jor- 
dan, Onorato, Pivar, Putnam, Sailor, Toy * 

Assistant Professors: Baker, Bakkan, Breese, Elenbaas, Flickema, Hansen, Jeffrey, 
Miller, Rietveld, Scheinberg, Shumway, Stewart, Van Deventer, Weleba, Wood- 
ard, Yada, Zinberg 
Lecturer: King 


iACNILOR OP ARTS IN HISTORY 

The undergraduate major in history is designed to provide cultural enrichment, 
a sense of alternative, and perspective on both the present and the future. This 
major may be pursued to fulfill various professional and cultural objectives com- 
mon to a liberal arts program. It serves, especially, as a preparation for teaching, 
law, government, and other public services, and as the foundation for advanced 
study at the graduate level. 

The major is composed of a minimum of 24 units in the upper division, plus 
the basic courses in world civilizations (History llOA-llOB) and United Sutes 
Histor>’ (History 170A-170B). The basic courses may also be used to meet general 
education requirements. Students majoring in history are encouraged to include in 
their lower division programs some work in such fields as anthropology, eco- 
nomics, geography, literature, philosophy, political science and sociology. 

Students intending to do graduate work in history should acquire a reading 
knowledge of at least one foreign language appropriate to the pursuit of advanced 
research in a field of history. 

The 24 units of upper division courses required for the major must include: 

History 399 Historiography (3 units) 

Six units in United States history 

Six units in European history (from ancient Greece to modem times) 

Six units in the history of Asia, Africa, or Ladn America 

TEACHING MINOR IN HISTORY 

The teaching minor in history is composed of at least 20 units in history exclu- 


sive of the general education requirements: 

Recommended teaching minor: Units 

World civilization (or equivalent) 6 

Upper division work in history 15 

Total 21 


MASTER OF ARTS IN HISTORY 

The Master of Arts in Histor>' is designed to improve the student*s academic and 
professional competence for educational sciences at the elementary, secondary and 
junior college levels as preparation for advanced graduate work tow^ard the 
doctoral degree in history. It is relevant to various other specialties in public or 
private enterprise and general cultural or community ser\nce. The program aims 
to deepen the students understanding of the human condition through a careful 
study of human experience. 

Prerequisites 

Prerequisite to this masters degree is an undergraduate major in history with at 
least a GPA of 3.0 in the upper division history courses. Each sudent's background 
and record arc evaluated by the coordinator. Satisfactory scores on the aptitude 


* College administxmtiTe officer. 

190 


Mathematics 


test and the advanced test in history of the Graduate Record Elxaminadon arc 
required. 

Students with limited subject, grade, or breadth deficiencies may be considered 
for admission to the program upon completing courses approved by the Graduate 
Coordinator in History in addition to those required for the degree, with at least 
a B average. 

Program of Study 

Of the 30 units of adviser-approved graduate courses on the study plan for 
the degree, 18 must be in appropriate work at the 500-level, and six must be in 
other supportive social sciences or related fields. The required courses are: 

Hist 501 Seminar in the Content and Method of History (3 units) 

Hist 590 History and Historians (3 units) 

A. Option I: 

A primary focus in one area in which a field is intensively developed. This 
results in a specific topic of research with a written thesis as the final product 
(History 598, Thesis, 3 to 6 units). 

An oral examination on the thesis and the coursework will be required upon 
completion of the coursework but prior to the final draft of the thesis. 

B. Option II: 

The focus in this option is in two fields not found in the same general area. 
There is a minimum requirement of one graduate research seminar besides History 
501 and 590. There is also a minimum requirement of one graduate rwding seminar 
in the recent interpretations of history in the particular fields of interest. 

A written comprehensive in each of the two fields will be required upon com- 
pletion of the program. 

Students in this program must demonstrate a broad cultural understanding of 
one or more foreign countries of import to the master’s degree study program. 
This requirement may be met by a reading knowledge of an appropriate foreign 
language or an approved selection of comparative studies (12 units post B.A.), 
but the method must be approved by the student’s adviser. In certain programs an 
examination in statistics may be substituted for the language requirement. 

For further information, consult the Department of History. 

See also “The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS 

Professors: Ames (chairman), Gilbert, Sdel 

Associate Professors: Benson, Egbert, V. J. Klassen, V. M. Klassen, Marley, Miller, 
Sandberg 

Assistant Professors: Beck, Buchman, Clapp, Dinerstein, Gauntt, Mathews, Zee 

iACHELOIl Of ARTS IN MATHEMATICS 

The program of studies in mathematics offers courses stressing the understanding 
of mathematical concepts and the axiomatic approach. A sufficient variety of 
courses is given to sad^ the needs of: 

(1) The proficient aiming toward graduate study, 

(2) The student planning to use mathematics in a career in industry and gov- 
ernment service, 

(3) Preprofessional students in other science areas, 

(4) The prospective elementary and secondary teacher. 


191 


Mathematics 


The Major Program is designed to provide a student with both depth and 
breaath m matnenuucs. it ai^o prepares a student tor subsequent graduate work 
in mathematics. 

The Applied Option is designed to prepare a student for industrial employment 
in applied mathematics. 

The Teaching Option is designed to prepare a student for the teaching of mathe- 
matics (credentialed) in high school or lower. 

The science-language requirements for all mathematics majors are (1) Physics 
225 (A, B» C, or D) 3 units; and either (2a) 13 units (or its equivalent) of a 
modem foreign language (i.e^ German, French, Russian, or on the teaching option 
Spanish as well) or (2b) 12 units from the following categories: i) Additional 
courses from Physics 225 (A, B, (D, D), Physics 226 (A, B, C) or upper division 
physics, ii) Chemistry 101 A3 or upper division chemistry, iii) Philosophy 368 
(Symbolic Logic) or Math 304, but not both, iv) Quantitative Methods 264 
(Programming). 

Any mathematics major may, if he desires, satisfy his science-language require- 
ments with the above courses rather than the courses prescribed in a previous 
catalog. Funhermore, these courses may be taken on a pass/no pass basis. 

No credit toward the major will be allowed for specific major courses in 
mathematics in which a grade of D is obtained. To qualify for the Bachelor of 
Arts in Mathematics, students must have a C average in all mathematics courses 
required for the major. 

A placement test is given to students in the Department of Mathematics to 
determine their readiness to start the calculus. 

The basic courses in mathematics may also be used to meet the general education 
requirements. 

Mathematics majors should take the lower division mathematics courses (150 A, 
B, 250, 291) during the first two years. Furthermore, majors requiring Advanced 
Calculus (350A, B) should complete these courses before the senior year. 


Major Program in Mathamatics 

Required courses: 

Math 150A3 Anal>'tic Geometr>' and (Calculus 

Math 250 Intermediate Calculus 

Linear Algebra 


Vector and Tensor Analysis 
Elementary Differential Geometry 
Modem Algebra 


(choice). 


Math 291 
Math 306 
Math 307 
Math 302 

Math 3 50 A3 Advanced Calculus 
Math 407 Abstract Algebra 
Math 412 Complex Analysis 
Math 414 Topology 
Math 450 Real Analysis 

Any other 4(X)-lev’el course in mathematics 


(choice of threc). 


Umts 
- 8 

- 4 

- 3 


Required courses: 
Math 150A,B 
Math 250 
Math 291 
Math 306 
Math 307 
Math 310 
Math 350A,B 


Option in Appliod Mathomatics 

Analytic Geometry and Calculus 

Intermediate C^culus 

Linear Algebra 

Vector and Tensor Analysis I 

Elementary and Differential CJeometry j 

Ordinary Differential Equations 

Advanced Calcxilus 


39 

Units 

8 

4 

3 

(choice) 3 

3 

6 


192 


Mathematics 


Math 302 
Math 335 
Math 336 
Math 340 
Math 430 
Math 431 
Math 440 
Math 450 
Math 412 


Modem Algebra 
Mathematical Probability 
Mathematical Statistics 
Numerical Analysis 
Partial DiflFerential Equations 
Methods of Applied Mathematics 
Advanced Numerical Analysis 
Real Analysis 

Complex Analysis 


Units 


(choice of four, 12 

at least two of 
which must be 4(X)- 
level) 


3 


42 


Option in Mothomotics for Toockor Iducation 
for ilomontary or Socondory Iducation 

Required courses: 

Math 150A,B Analytic Geometry and Calculus - 

Math 250 Intermediate Calculus 

Math 291 Linear Algebra 

Math 302 Modem Algebra t 
Math 330 Number Theory 5 

Math £d 311 Fundamental Concepts of Mathematics— Algebra — 

Math Ed 312 Fundamental Concepts of Mathematics — (jeometry 

Math 315 Euclidean Geometry I ^ r • x 

Math 320 Projective Geometry j 

Math 335 Mathematical Probability | . 

Math 336 Mathematical Statistics j c oi e - 

EJeedve courses from Mathematics Department only, 300-level or higher 


8 

4 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

9 


39 

Minor Program in Mafhomotics 

A mathematics minor shall consist of 20 units of coursework selected from the 
courses offered by the Mathematics Department. They must include Mathematics 
291 and at least six upper division units from the Mathematics Department. Each 
course must be completed with a grade C or better. 

Minor Program in Matkomotict for Toockor Edwcotion 

A. For elementary education the minor shall consist of 20 umts of course work 
selected from the course listings in mathematics and mathematics education. These 
courses must include Mathematics HOB and Mathematics EUlucadon 303 A3* 

B. For secondary educadon the minor shall consist of 20 units of course work 
selected from the course listings in mathemadcs and mathemadcs educadon. These 
courses must include Mathemadcs 291 and six units of upper division courses in 
mathemadcs or mathemadcs educadon, exclusive of Mathemadcs Elducadon 303A, B. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN MATHEMATICS 

The MA. in Mathemadcs is designed to provide advanced study for students 
interested in continuing studies for a Ph.D. in mathemadcs, high school and junior 
college teaching, and mathemadcal analysis in industry. 

Prerequisites 

Prerequisites to the program include: 

(1) ]x>ssession of a baccalaureate degree from an accredited insdtudon; 

(2) an undergraduate major in mathemadcs or a combinadon of courses and 
work experience which the student*s graduate committee evaluates as satis- 
factory preparadon. 


193 


Philosophy 

Students with limited preparation or grade deficiencies may be considered for 
admission to the program, upon completion of committee-approved courses with at 
least a B average. 

Program of Study (for all except high school mathematics teachers) 

The degree program requires 30 units of graduate study approved by the sw- 
dent*s graduate committee. Sixteen of these units must be 500-level mathematics 
courses. Each student will be required to take electives to insure competence in 
algebra, analy'sis, topology and geometry. Nine units will be required outside the 
student^s specialization, which may be taken in the Mathematics Department. 

Proficiency in reading mathematics literature in an adviser-approved foreign 
language will be required before advancement to candidacy and before the depart- 
ment will recommend the awarding of the degree, the candidate must pass exami- 
nations (written and/or oral) designed to test his competence in the course work 
he has taken. 

For more detailed information or advisement, students should communicate with 
the Chairman of the Department of Mathematics. 

See also ‘The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 

Program of Study for Option in Mathematics for Secondary Schools 

This option, designed for high school mathematics teachers, requires 30 units of 
graduate study approved by the student's graduate committee. Tlie following 15 
units of coursework must be included; Math 581, 582, 583, 590 and one unit of 597. 
Each student will be required to take electives to insure competence in algebra, 
geometry and analysis. 

There is no foreign language requirement for this option. Before the department 
will recommend the awarding of the degree, the candidate must pass examinations 
designed to test his competence in the coursework he has taken. 

Most of the courses required for this option will be offered during the summer 
only. Courses will be scheduled so that a student may complete the degree re- 
quirements by attending classes during three successive summers. It should be noted 
^at the student must be admitted to the college for a regular semester and must 
be enrolled at the time of receiving the degree. 

For more detailed information or advisement, students should communicate with 
the Chairman of the Department of Mathematics. 

Also see ‘The Program of Master's Degrees,” page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 

DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY 

Professors: Alamshah, Becker,* Hayner (chairman) 

Associate Professor: Silvers 
Assistant Professors: Cronquist, Hinman, Russell 
Instructor: Hitchcock 
Lecturer: Cox 


ftACHIiOR OF ARTS IN PHILOSOPHY 

The major in philosophy is designed to provide the undergraduate student with 
(1) information about the achievements of the world’s outstanding philosophers 
in the analy^ and resolution of philosophic issues, and (2) some measure of skill 
in analy^zing and resolving such issues as they arise in his own areas of interest. 
C^ourses in philosophy are selected to provide both breadth and depth in exploring 
and analyzing philosophic concerns. 

* CoUese administradye officer. 


194 


Phyilcs 


Requirements for the Major 

A. A minimum of 30 units in Philosophy. 

B. Lower Division (Maximum of 6 units beyond general education require- 
ments). 

1. Philosophy 290 (3) 

2. Philosophy 291 0) 

Note: Students who have taken their lower division work elsewhere will be 
given credit for equivalent coursework. Up to 6 units of such coursework may 
be allowed for cre^t at the discretion of the department. 

C. Upper Division (Minimum of 24 units) 

1. Philosophy 300 (3) 

2. Philosophy 301 0) 

3. At least 9 units at the 4(X) level, to include: 

a. At least one seminar, (3) 

b. Philosophy 499, and (3) 

c. A 4(X) level elective other than a seminar. (3) 

A program in philosophy profits greatly through the study of literature, 
psychology, and the social sciences. Students of philosophy are advised to supple- 
ment their studies in philosophy with coursework offered in these fields. Philosophy 
majors are urged to acquire proficiency in a foreign language. 

MINOR IN PHILOSOPHY 

Requirements for the Minor 

A. A minimum of 21 units in Philosophy. 

B. Lower Division (Maximum of 9 units beyond general education require- 
ments). 

1. Philosophy 290 (3) 

2. Philosophy 291 (3) 

C Upper Division (Minimum of 12 units) 

1. Philosophy 300 (3) 

2. Philosophy 301 (3) 


DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS 

Professors: Adams, R., Blend 

Associate Professors: Cooperman (acting chairman), Crowley, Dittman 
Assistant Professors: Bengtson, Johnston, Stark 

iACHELOR OF ARTS IN PHYSICS 

The program leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree in physics provides funda- 
mental instruction for the student who is preparing (1) to teach in elementary or 
secondary schools, (2) to undertake graduate work in physics or related fields, 
(3) to pursue additional collegiate studies leading to professional degrees in dentis- 
try, law, medicine, nursing, and related areas, and (4) to seek employment in 
technical and applied fields. 

The faculty is concerned that the student of physics shall have adequate educa- 
tion in other liberal arts subjects, including foreign language. Through curriculum 
requirements and elective subjects, the physics student will be expected to acquire 
a broad education in traditional liberal arts subjects, the several sciences, and mathe- 
matics. In particular, the student is urged to make his selection of elective courses 
outside the field of physics. 

To qualify for the Bachelor of Arts in Physics, students must have a C average 
in all courses required for the major, including those in mathematics and related 

195 


Political Science 


Students should consult with their academic advisers. 

ORADUATI WORK IN PHYSICS 

The Physics Department offers a number and variety of graduate course^ in 
physics. 


DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL SCIENCE 

Professors: Baldwin, Hyink,* Mason, Richardson (Chairman) 

Associate Professors: Bell, (Darpenter, Feraru, Fisher, Foster, Kerschner, Yinger 
Assistant Professors: Brown, Harlow, Kahrs, Keller, Kim, M. Lepper, Stone, 
Sutphen 

Lecturers: Grody, Shippee 

■ACHILOR OP ARTS IN POLITICAL SCIENCI 

The undergraduate major in political science prepares students for teaching, gov- 
ernment employment on the local, state and national level, foreign service, grad- 
uate work in political science, law school, or leadership in civic and political ac- 
tivities. Politick science is also of value to prospective special librarians and 
journalists. 

Unit and Course Requirements 

The major consists of 30 units in political science of which at least 24 units must 
be in the upper division, plus 12 units in related departments taken with the ap- 
proval of the adviser. These units are in addition to those meeting the general edu- 
cation requirements. Prospective majors arc encouraged to take courses in anthro- 
pology, economics, geography, history, philosophy, psychology, sociology, and 
statistics. 

All majors are required to take: 

Political Science 100 (American Government) 

The public administration courses are designed to prepare students for public 
service careers unth local, state and federal government agencies, and for graduate 
work in public administration. Students will have opportunities to study, observe, 
and serve as interns in governmental agencies in the area. 

The prelaw student may work out an individual program in consultation with 
his adviser to meet the specific requirements for admission to the law school of his 
choice. 0>urses in related fields may include work in anthropology, economics, his- 
tory, psychology, and sociology; also in accounting and report writing. 

TIACNINO MINOR IN POLITICAL SCIENCI 

The teaching minor is composed of 21 units of political science, in addition 
to those meeting the general education requirements. Fifteen of these units must be 
taken from the courses required of all majors in political science. 

MASHR OF ARTS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE 

This degree is planned for students interested in advanced graduate work toward 
the doctoral degree in political science, for the professional improvement of high 

* College edministrmtiye officer. 


198 


Pofificol Science 


school and junior college teachers, government employees, personnel in the military 
services, and for individuals interested in civic and political leadership. 

Prerequisites 

A student desiring to be classified as a candidate for the degree: 

1. Must have taken the verbal and quantitative test of the Graduate Record 
Elxamination. The GRE Advanced Test in Political Science may also be re- 
required. 

2. Must have completed an undergraduate degree with a grade-point average of 
3X) or more in courses in his major held. If his major held was not political 
science or another social science, he must have a GPA of 3.0 both in his 
major and in any upper division social science courses he has taken. 

A student whose GPA is less than 3.0 may appeal to the departmental Graduate 
Committee for waiver of this requirement, if his combined score on the GRE 
aptitude test is 1,000 or more. 

3. Must have demonstrated knowledge of appropriate research methods. A read- 
ing knowledge of a foreign language, of statistics, and of computer program- 
ming may be required as preparation if pertinent to the student’s professional 
needs. 

Program of Study 

A student must design a study plan of 30 units of course work, subje^ to the 
approval of his M.A. committee (as part of the requirements for admission to 
classihed status). At least 18 of these units must be in political science, of which 
15 units, must be 500-lcvcl courses. Three to six units may be a thesis or project. 
A comprehensive final written examination and an oral examination are required. 

No more than 9 units of postgraduate work taken prior to classified status may 
be applied to a student's master’s degree program. 

For advisement and further information, consult the Department of Political 
Science. 

See also “The Program of Master’s Degrees, page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 

MASnR Of PUELIC ADMINISTRATION 

The general objective of the program is to educate persons for the vital area of 
managing public agencies and functions. Within this, there are three specific ob- 
jectives. First, to educate those who wish to enter a generalist career such as that 
of city manager, county manager, or city administrative officer. Second, to increase 
the competence of those already embarked on a general administrative career. 
Third, to aid functional specialists who feel the need for a broader education in 
administration due to promotion into an administrative position within the func- 
tional specialty. This would include employees in such areas as public works, plan- 
ning, personnel, and finance. 

Prerequisites 

A student desiring to enter the program must have a bachelor’s degree from an 
accredited institution with an undergraduate major in political science or a combi- 
nation of courses and work experience which the MJ’A. coordinator evaluates as 
satisfactory experience. Additional prerequisites are a B average in the upper 
division courses in the student’s major and satisfactory completion of the Aptitude 
Test of the Graduate Record Examination. 

Students with limited subject or grade point deficiencies, but who have exten- 
sive experience in an administrative capacity, may be classified in the program 
after they have demonstrated their ability for advanced work by taking 6-9 units 
of approved courses with grades of not less than B. Such courses are in addition 
to th^ required on the graduate program. 


199 


Psychology 


Program of Study 

The degree study plan must include 30 units of committee-approved coursework 
of which 15 must be at the 500 level. A minimum of 15 units must be in public 
administration, but the remainder may be assigned on an interdisciplinary basis 
from courses related to the needs of individual students. Unless the student has had 
acceptable governmental experience, he must undertake an internship (Political 
Science 497). Course requirements will include a thesis or project. 

No more than 9 units of postgraduate work taken prior to classified status may 
be applied to a student's master's degree program. 

For advisement and further information, consult the Department of Political 
Science. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees, page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 

Professors: Lindley, Schmidt, Tsai 

Associate Professors: (Dalhoun, (Carlson, Curtis, Dondis (chairman) 

Assistant Professors: Ebersole, Krivanek, Lindner, McFarland, Newell, Perkins, 
Schweitzer, Thomas 

Lecturers: Fitch, Smith, Steams, Watson 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PSYCHOLOGY 

The major in psychology consists of 36 units of lower and upper division work 
designed for students (1) who want a sound background in psychology as a science, 
(2) who want a basic understanding of human behavior as a supplement to some 
other major course of study, and (3) those who wish to acquire a thorough under- 
graduate training in psychology in anticipation of graduate study. 


Requirements for the Major 

Lower Division Units 

Psychology 101 Introductory Psychology 3 

Psychology 161 Elementary Statistics 3 

Psychology 202 Principles of Psychology' 3 


Upper Division 

A minimum of 27 units of upper division work is required for a major in psy- 
chology. Fifteen units arc required as follou's: 

Psyxhology 302 Experimental Psyxhology': Learning and Motivation 3 
Psyxhology 303 Elxperimental Psychology: Sensation Perception or 


Psychology 321 Physiological Psychology 3 

Psychology 351 Social Psychology or 

Psychology 331 Psychology of Personality 3 

Psychology 461 Group Psyxhological Testing 3 

Psychology 408 History of Psychology' 3 


A minimum of 12 additional units in psychology courses will be selected in con- 
sultation with the academic adviser. Not more than 3 units of Psych. 499, Inde- 
pendent Study, may be counted toward the major. 

Recommend Related Courses 

(bourses from each of the following areas according to the student's interests: 
(1) social sciences; (2) physical sciences; (3) biological sciences; (4) mathematics; 
(5) humanities. 


200 


Psychology 


Students planning to do graduate work in psychology are advised to plan addi- 
tional work in biological, physical, and computer sciences and to include at least 
a one-semester course in college mathematics. Undergraduate work in foreign 
languages is also recommended. 

MASnR OF ARTS IN PSYCHOLOGY 

This degree is planned to extend the body of psychological knowledge developed 
in the undergraduate major and result in the development of greater depth in 
understanding the content of psychology; increased skill in research capabilities; 
the professional reponing of research; potential career skills; and sound preparation 
for students planning to go on to advanced graduate work. On completion of this 
program, students will have a better understanding of the many and complex dis- 
ciplines in psychology as well as an understanding of related behavioral and scien- 
tific areas of study. 

Prerequisites 

Students to be admitted to the program must: (1) meet the general prerequisites 
for graduate work formulated and recommended by the college; (2) have com- 
pleted a bachelor’s degree with a major in psychology or 24 units in upper division 
psychology including a course in statistics, a course in the history of psychol- 
ogy, an upper division laboratory course in psychology, at least two of the follow- 
ing courses: physiological psychology, learning, sensation and perception, motiva- 
tion, and at least one of the following courses: social psychology, personality, 
developmental psychology; psychological testing; (3) have completed a course in 
college mathematics, a course in the biological sciences, and a course in sociology 
or anthropology; (4) have completed a baccalaureate degree with a 2J general 
average and a 3.0 average in psychology; (5) show satisfactory performance on the 
aptitude test and the advanced test in psychology, which arc parts of the Graduate 
Record Elxaminadon. 

Program of Study 

The Master of Arts in Psychology requires a minimum of 24 umts of approved 
graduate work in the major field, including the completion and acceptance by the 
Psychology Department Graduate Study Committee of a written thesis, plus six 
units of approved work for graduate credit from other related areas. 

The student, in consultation with an adviser on the staff of the Psychology De- 
partment, shall develop a program of studies which will be subnutted to the 
Graduate Study Committee of the Department of Psychology for approval. 

Course requirements for the MA. in Psychology: 

Units Totals 


Psychology 500 Advanced General Psychology- 3 

Psychology 510 Experimental Design 3 

Psychology 520 Seminar: Experimental Psychology 3 

Psychology 521 Seminar: Personality or Psychology 551 Semi- 
nar: So<^ Psychology 3 

Psychology 598 Thesis 3-6 15-18 

Rebted courses outside psychology - 6 6 

Elective courses in psychology- 6-9 6-9 

Total units for MA. in psychology 30 


Students will be required to pass a comprehensive examination in psychology in 
addition to satisfactory performance in the above courses. 

For further information, consult the Department of Psychology. 

Sec also ‘The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


201 


Science and Mathematics Education 

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND 
MATHEMATICS EDUCATION 

Professors: Lay, R. Lepper, Turner (Chairman) 

Associate Professors: Maloney, Woyski 

Assistant Professors: Bachman, Streitberger, Williams 

Lecturers: Allan, Pagni, Waian 

The Department of Science and Mathematics Education offers three programs 
in the general science area; Eanh Science Program, Nature Interpretation and Con- 
servation Program; and the Science and Mathematics Elducation Program. Degrees 
and curricula offerings in each area are described below. 

PROGRAM IN lARTH SCIENCU 
iACHILOR OF ARTS IN EARTH SCIENCE 

This program is designed to provide a broad foundation in the earth sciences to 
prepare students for (1) graduate work in one of the earth sciences, (2) teaching 
eanh science in secondary and elementary schools, (3) employment in government 
and industry, and (4) other major fields supponed by an earth science minor. 

To qualify for the bachelor of arts in earth science, students must have a C 
average in all courses required for the major including those in related fields. 
No credit will be allowxd toward the major for earth science courses passed with 
a grade of D. A proficiency in one modem foreign language (German, Russian, 
French, others by petition) is required. This requirement is normally met by 
completing one semester of readings in scientific foreign language (303) with a 
grade of C or better. Alternatives may be substituted by petition. Proficiency 
in English composition is required. This requirement is normally met by passing 
an upper division course in composition; the department may waive the require- 
ment for students who consistently submit written work of superior quality. 

Minimum Court* Roquiromonts for tho Eorth Scionco Mofor 

Of the 124 units required for graduation, 36 units are in earth science, 45 units 
in related fields, 35 units in general education courses which are not included 
among the related fields, and eight units are undesignated. 

The upper division units in earth science. Studies in Geoscience, are offered in 
four blocks which unify the major concepts of the geosciences. Each block 
consists of problems of increasing complexity designed to explore a wide variety 
of ideas and techniques. Elach student may choose his own sequence of topics 
as he progresses through a block, and may progress at his individu^ rate. Although 
each student is required to take all the blocks, he is free to develop his special 
interests within the framew*ork provided. 


Coursos in Earth Sdonco 
Lowor Division 

101 Physical (Geology 4 

102 Historical Geology 4 

Total 8 


202 


Science and Mathemcdics Education 


CovTMS III Earth ScUnca 

Uppar Division Units 

301 Studies in Geoscience, geochemistry 6 

302 Studies in Geoscience, geobiology 6 

350 General Astronomy 4 

401 Studies in Geoscience, geo*fluids 6 

402 Studies in Geoscience, geophysics 6 


Total 28 


Total 36 

Coursos in Rolotod Fiolds 

Mathematics 150A3 Anal Geom and Calculus 8 

Chemistry 101 A3 General Chemistry 10 

Physics 225A,C4D and 226A,C Fundamental Physics 11 

Biological Science 101 Elements of Biology 5 

Geography 312 Geomorphology — ^ ; — 3 


Electives, chosen from related fields in consultation with major 
adviser 


Total ; ; 46 

General education courses, not including those in related fields 28 

EUectives, undesignated . 14 


Total 88 


RICOMMINDfD PROGRAM FOR A MAJOR IN EARTH SCIENCE 

High School Proporotlon 

Mathematics — 4 years, including trigonometry 
Chemistry and/or Physics 

Modem Foreign Language — 3 years (German, Russian, or French preferred) 
Alternate courses if high school preparation is deficient: 

Trigonometry (junior college) 

Chemistry 100 (3 units) 

German 101 and 102 or Russian 101 and 102 (10 units) 


Freshman / 

Math 150 A An Gtom and Calc 
Chem lOlA General Chem 

Earth Sci 101 Physical Geol — 

Am^riran Mi«r 

Units 

. 3 
- 5 
. 4 

3 

Freshman II 

Math HOB An Geom and Calc~ 
(^em lOlB General Chem .. 

Earth Sci 102 Hist Gtol 

Poly Sci 100 

Units 

„ 4 

-- 5 

- 4 
„ 3 


16 


16 

Sophomore I 


Sopohomore II 


Physics 225, 226A Funda. 

. 4 

Physics 225. 226C Funda 

„ 4 

Eanh Sci 350 Cjcn Astronomy — 

. 4 

Bio Sci 101 Principles 

> 5 

Geog 312 Geomorphology 

. 3 

General education courses 

7 

General education courses 

. 6 


— 




16 


203 


Science and Mathematics Education 


Junior / Units 

Earth Sci 301 Studies in Gcosci— 6 

Physics 225D — 3 

Elective in related field 3 

English 301 or writing 3 


15 

Senior / 

Eanh Sci 401 Studies in Geosci ... 6 

Elective in related field 3 

EUecdvcs 6 

15 


Junior II Units 

Eanh Sci 302 Studies in Geosci— 6 

General education course 3 

Elective in related field 3 

Foreign Languages 303 Reading- 3 

15 

Senior II 

Eanh Sci 402 Studies in Geosci— 6 
Electives 9 

15 


MINOR IN EARTH SCIENCE 

A minimum of 20 units are required for a minor. These will typically include 
eight units of lower division eanh science and 12 units of Studies in Geoscience. 
The topics for study shall be selected by the student in consultation with his minor 
adviser. 


EMPHASIS IN NATURE INTERPRETATION AND CONSERVATION 

In recognition of the need for education in nature interpretation and conscr\’ation 
the Department of Science and Mathematics Elducadon is developing coursework 
in these disciplines. Much of the coursework for these areas will take place at the 
nearby Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary. This sanctuary has been designated as a center 
for research and nature interpretadon. In addidon to research and coursework, 
the sanctuary will provide a continuing public serv’^ice to the community through 
its daily programs in nature interpretadon. This serv’ice is provided by resident 
professor-naturalists and student-naturalists in training at the facility. School groups 
as well as adults are invited to attend the regularly scheduled programs. 

Courses Pr«t«iitly Olf«r«d 

350 Field Biology and Conservadon(3) 

454 Seminar: Public Contact Procedures (2) 

4d0 Applied Conservation (4) 

470 Field and Museum Interpretation Techniques (3) 

479A3 Supervised Naturalist Activities (3,3) 

Additional courses leading to departmental certification in Conser\'ation Studies 
and a possible graduate degree program are in preparation. Students interested in 
such coursework should contact the Department of Science and Mathematics Edu- 
cation for additional information. 

PROGRAM IN SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS EDUCATION 

The Department of Science and Mathenutics Education prepares students to 
teach in the areas of science and mathematics at the elementary and secondary 
levels, provides guidance for experienced teachers in the study and use of edu- 
cational practices developed for the teaching of sciences and mathematics and 
heli>s teachers develop original ideas in their areas of specialization. 

'ITie offerings of this department include basic professional training courses re- 
quired for teacher certification, advanced coursework in science and mathematics 
education, and certain academic content offerings designed especially for teacher 
preparation. 

Requirements for teaching majors and minors in science and mathematics are 
listed under the respective academic departments. 


204 


Sociology 


REQUIRfD COURSiWORK 

The following courses offered by the Department of Science and Mathematics 
Education are required for teaching credential candidates. 

EUmentary School Crodontlol Candldotot— Any Major 

Math Ed 303 A Fund Concepts of Math— Arithmetic 
Sci Ed 310 Elementary Experimental Science 

Socondory School Crodontlol Condldotos— Sdonco 

Sci Ed 442 Teaching Science in the Secondary School 
Sd Ed 749 Student Teaching in Science— Secondary 

Socondory School Crodontlol Condldotoo— Atothomotlct 

Math ^ 303A3 Fund Concepts of Math— Arithmetic 

Math Ed 311 Fund Concepts of Math — Algebra 

Math Exl 312 Fund Concepts of Math — Geometry 

Math Ed 442 Teaching Mathematics in the Secondary School 

Math Ed 749 Student Teaching in Mathematics — Secondary 


DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY 

Professor: Davis 

Associate Professors: Copp, Jacobson, Palisi, Poorkaj, Smith, Works (Chairman) 
Assistant Professors: Bedell, Bell, C^pune, Derenne, Feingold, Lackey, Mend, 
Rosen, Tygart, Walshok 
Lecturer: Sutherland 


•ACHELOR OF ARTS IN SOCIOLOGY 

The major in sociology provides knowledge concerning the structure and func- 
tioning of human society. It may serve as preparation for: (1) graduate study 
in sociology and careers in teaching and research, (2) employment or graduate 
study in social work, corrections and related careers, or (3) careers in business 
and industry, various areas of government service, and the study of law. Sociology 
has applications to a wide range of careers and to participation as a citizen. 

Unit Requirements 

The required minimum for the major is 42 units, in addition to those taken for 
the generd education requirement, distributed as follows: 

Courses in Sociology 

Thirty units must be taken in sociology, 24 in upper division courses. So- 
ciology 201 is required, and 3 additional units are acceptable from lower divi- 
sion offerings. The minimum of 24 upper division units must include 331 A, 
331B, 341, 481, and at least one of the following: 436, 470, 473, 477. 

Minimum units — 30 

Related Courses 

Twelve upper divisum units are to be taken in the related fields of anthro- 
pology, economics, geography, history, political science, and psychology, to 
be approved by the major adviser. 

Minimum units 12 

Minimum total units for the major 42 


205 


Sociology 


TIACHINO MINOR IN SOCIOLOGY 

For teaching credential purposes a minor consists of 21 units in sociology, dis- 
tributed as follows: 


Credits 


201 _ 


3 

3 

3 

3 

9 


202 or 411 or 413 or 431 


341 or 451 


477 or 480 or 481 


Electives in sociology.—. 



It offers an opportunity to broaden one’s knowledge of society, to strengthen 
skills of sociological anal>'^is, and to do research in depth in an area of particular 
interest. It may be used as preparation for study toward the doctorate in sociology, 
for junior college teaching, participation in research, or for a variety of positions 
in business and industry, corrections, the community, or government. 

Prerequisites 

Admission to the program requires a minimum of 18 upper division units in soci- 
ology, including the following courses or their equivalents: 

331 A Social Research Methods (design, collecting data, etc.) 

33 IB Social Research Methods (elementary statistics) 

341 Social Interaction 
481 Sociological Theory 

Also required is a GPA of 3X) (B) for all work in sociology and a 2.5 average for 
all previous college work. Students with limited grade or course deficiencies may 
be considered for admission to the program upon attaining a B average in courses 
approved by the Graduate (Coordinator. 

Program of Study 

The study plan for the degree must include the following: 

1. Sociology 530 Advanced Statistical Anal>'sis 3 

2. Sociology 531 Advanced Methods and Measurements in Sociology 3 

3. Sociolog>" 581 Analysis of Sociological Theory 3 

4. Sociology 598 Thesis 6 

5. Required additional units of graduate work in sociology 9 

6. Work which may be graduate or upper di\'ision sociology or related 

fields in any combination-.- 6 


30 


To complete the requirements, the candidate must successfully defend the thesis 
in an oral examination by a committee. 

Additional seminars, or Sociology 599, Independent Graduate Research, may be 
used for requirement “5”, but not in lieu of the thesis. Normally the student will 
register for thesis mo different times, for three units each semester. 

For further information, consult the Department of Sociology. 

Also see “The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and Ae Graduate Bulletin. 


206 


Speech Communication 


DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH COMMUNICATION 

(Communicology) 

Professors: Andersen, Fessenden, Long,* Nelson 

Associate Professors: Enell,* Good, Granell (Chairman), Kaplan, Nicolas, Riley 
Assistant Professors: Booth, Cockerham, Flocken, Harris, Keele, Koehler, Treon 
Lecturer: Grissom 

Coursework in the Department of Speech Communication investigates individual 
and group communication as a part of the larger process of human interaction. 
Such investigation analyzes past theories of communication and persuasion as well 
as contemporary communication practices in business, politics, religion and private 
life. It examines the essential qualities and varieties of oral language, the physical 
production of speech, the nature and treatment of communication disorders, and 
the means used to affect social control and disseminate information. 

COURSE PROGRAMS 

The major in Speech for the Bachelor of Arts degree requires a total of 36 units, 
24 of which must be in 300>and 400-lcvel courses. 

C>)urse programs are planned (1) to prepare students who seek a liberal arts 
emphasis in speech communication as a means for becoming an intellectually in- 
dependent citizen and consumer, (2) to prepare students who seek to become com- 
munication experts in business or government, (3) to prepare students who seek to 
apply communication skills in the ministry, law, business or other areas in which 
effective communication is basic, (4) to prepare students who seek either a 
Standard Teaching Credential or a Restricted Credential authorizing service as a 
speech and hearing specialist. 

Ma|or in $p««ch With Emphofit in Pubik Addmis 
Lownr Division Roquiromonts: 

An advanced course in oral communication: Speech Commumcation 102 
A basic course in logic and evidence: Speech Communication 235 
Up to 6 units of electives selected from Speech Communication 120, 138, 202, 
211, 230 

Upper Division Roquiromonts: 

A course in group process: Speech Communication 324 

A course in phonetics or communication disorders: Speech Communication 
341 or 342 

A course in persuasion: Speech Communication 334 

An advanced course in argument: Speech (Ommumcation 335 

A course in communication theory: Speech Commumcation 420 

A course in rhetorical history: Speech Commumcation 430 or 434 

Electives in public address, adviser approved, to complete the required 36 units 

Mafor in Speech with Emphasis in Speech Pothoiogy— Audiology 
Lower Division Requirements: 

An advanced course in oral communication: Speech Commumcation 102 
6 units of electives selected from Speech Commumcation 120, 138, 202, 211, 
230, 235 

Upper Division Requirements: 

A course in persuasion: Speech Communication 334 
A course in phonetics: Speech Communication 341 
A course in speech science: Speech Communication 340 


College sdminittTStive officer. 


207 


Sociology 


TEACHING MINOR IN SOCIOLOGY 


For teaching credential purposes a minor consists of 21 units in sociology, dis- 
tributed as follows: 

Credits 


201 3 

202 or 411 or 413 or 431 3 

341 or 451 3 

477 or 480 or 481 3 

Electives in sociology 9 


21 


MASTER OF ARTS IN SOCIOLOGY 

The program for this degree provides advanced study in general sociology. 
It offers an opportunity to broaden one’s knowledge of society, to strengthen 
skills of sociological analysis, and to do research in depth in an area of particular 
interest. It may be used as preparation for study toward the doctorate in sociology, 
for junior college teaching, participation in research, or for a variety of positions 
in business and industry, corrections, the community, or government. 

Prerequisites 

Admission to the program requires a minimum of 18 upper division units in soci- 
ology, including the following courses or their equivalents: 

331 A Social Research Methods (design, collecting data, etc.) 

33 IB Social Research Methods (elementary statistics) 

341 Social Interaction 
481 Sociological Theory 

Also required is a GPA of 3X) (B) for all w’ork in sociology and a 2.5 average for 
all previous college work. Students with limited grade or course deficiencies may 
be considered for admission to the program upon attaining a B average in courses 
approved by the Graduate Ox>rdinator. 

Program of Study 

The study plan for the degree must include the following: 

1. Sociology 530 Advanced Statistical Anal>'sis 3 

2. Sociology 531 Advanced Methods and Measurements in Sociology 3 

3. Sociolog>' 581 Anal>'sis of Sociological Theory 3 

4. Sociology 598 Thesis 6 

5. Required additional units of graduate work in sociology 9 

6. Work w'hich may be graduate or upper di\'ision sociology or related 

fields in any combination- 6 

30 

To complete the requirements, the candidate must successfully defend the thesis 
in an oral examination by a committee. 

Additional seminars, or Sociology 599, Independent Graduate Research, may be 
used for requirement “5”, but not in lieu of the thesis. Normally the student will 
register for thesis two different times, for three units each semester. 

For further information, consult the Department of Sociology. 

Also see “The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and ^e Graduate Bulletin. 


206 


Speech Communication 


DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH COMMUNICATION 

(Communicology) 

Professors: Andersen, Fessenden, Long,* Nelson 

Associate Professors: Enell,* Good, Granell (Chairman), Kaplan, Nicolas, Riley 
Assistant Professors: Booth, (Dockerham, Flocken, Harris, Keele, Koehler, Treon 
Lecturer: Grissom 

O)ursework in the Department of Speech Communication investigates individual 
and group communication as a part of the larger process of human interaction. 
Such investigation analyzes past theories of communication and persuasion as well 
as contemporary communication practices in business, politics, religion and private 
life. It examines the essential qualities and varieties of oral language, the physical 
production of speech, the nature and treatment of communication disorders, and 
the means used to affect social control and disseminate information. 

COURSE PROGRAMS 

The major in Speech for the Bachelor of Arts degree requires a total of 36 units, 
24 of which must be in 300-and 400-lcvel courses. 

Course programs are planned (1) to prepare students who seek a liberal arts 
emphasis in speech communication as a means for becoming an intellectually in- 
dependent citizen and consumer, (2) to prepare students who seek to become com- 
munication experts in business or government, (3) to prepare students who seek to 
apply communication skills in the ministry, law, business or other areas in which 
effective communication is basic, (4) to prepare students who seek either a 
Standard Teaching (Credential or a Restricted Credential authorizing service as a 
speech and hearing specialist. 

Ma|or in Spnnch With Emphasis in Pwbik Addrass 
Lowar Division Roquiromonts: 

An advanced course in oral communication: Speech Communication 102 
A basic course in logic and evidence: Speech Commumcadon 235 
Up to 6 units of electives selected from Speech Commumcation 120, 138, 202, 
211, 230 

Uppor Division Roquiromonts: 

A course in group process: Speech (Communication 324 

A course in phonetics or communication disorders: Speech Communication 
341 or 342 

A course in persuasion: Speech Communication 334 

An advanced course in argument: Speech Communication 335 

A course in communication theory: Speech Commumcation 420 

A course in rhetorical history: Speech Communication 430 or 434 

Electives in public address, adviser approved, to complete the required 36 units 

Mofor in Spauch with Emphasis in Spoach Pothoiogy— Audiology 
Lowor Division Roquiromonts: 

An advanced course in oral communication: Speech Conunumcation 102 
6 units of electives selected from Speech Commumcation 120, 138, 202, 211, 
230, 235 

Uppor Division Roquiromonts: 

A course in persuasion: Speech Communication 334 
A course in phonetics: Speech ([Communication 341 
A course in speech science: Speech Commumcation 340 


Collese s <iininUtTAti T e officer. 


207 


Speech Communication 

A general course in speech correction: Speech Communication 342 
An advanced course in speech pathology: Speech Communication 441 
A course in audiology: Speech Communication 463 

Electives in speech pathology — audiology, adviser approved, to complete the 
required 36 units. 

STANDARD TEACHINO CREDENTIAL PROGRAMS 
0«ii«ral E1«m«iitary Cr*d*iitial 

Lower Division Requirements: 

A minimum of 9 units to include Speech Communication 102, 202, 235 
Upper Division Requirements: 

Speech Communication 301, 324, 334, 335, 342, 430 or 434 and 6 to 9 units of 
adviser approved electives. 

0«n«ral Secondary Cr«d«ntial 

Lower Division Requirements: 

Speech Communication 102, 138, 211 or 311, 235 
Upper Division Reqidremems: 

Speech Communication 324, 334, 335, 338, 341 or 342, 430 or 434, 442 and 6 
units of adviser-approved electives. 

The fifth year is required for either of the above credential programs. Speech 
Education 442 must be taken by the student seeking the secondary teaching creden- 
tial before he can be approved for student teaching. 

For a junior college credential the student follows the program given for the 
secondary school credential. In addition, the Master of Am degree in Speech is 
required. 

Program Loading to tho Rostrictod Crodontlal Authorixing 
Sorvico at a Spooch and Mooring Spoeialist 

I. Bachelor of Am Degree — Major in Speech with emphasis in Speech Pathology 
and Audiology. (See Speech Major section, above) 

II. A fifth year of specialized preparation (full-time pursuit of upper division 
and/or graduate course work) 

III. Preparation must include a minimu of 65 semester hours of coursework 
and clinical practice as follows: 

Human Development and Bases for Speech, Hearing and Language, and Cjoals of 
Public Education: 

Units 


Speech O)mmunication 340 Speech Science 3 

Speech (Communication 341 Phonetics 3 

Speech (Communication 403 Speech and Language Development 3 

Psychology 361 Developmental Psychology (3) or 

Education 312 Human Grou-th and Development (3) 3 

Psychology 311 Educational Psychology (3) or 

Education 311 Psychological Foundations (4) 3-4 

Speech (Communication 402 Phonetic Anal>'sis of Speech (3) or 
Linguistics 406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) or 

adviser-approved related courses 3 


18-19 

Disorders of Speech, Hearing and Language Primary Field: 

Speech (Communication 342 Survey of Problems in (Communication 3 

Speech (Communication 441 Speech Pathology: Non-Organk 3 

Speech (Communication 443 Speech Pathology: Organic. 3 

Speech (Communication 451 Diagnostic Methods in Speech and Hearing 3 


208 


Speech Communication 


Therapeutic Methods in Speech and Hearing 

Audiology - - - 

Audiometry — 

Speech Reading and Auditory Training 

Articulation, Voice, Stuttering, Aphasia, etc. 


Speech Communication 452 
S^ech Communication 463 
Speech Communication 464 
Speech Communication 465 
Speech Communication 557 

(3) repeated for a total of 6 units 

Related Areas: 

Education 471 Exceptional Children 

Education 452 Principles of Guidance O) or 
Education 477 The E^ducationally Handicapped Child (3) or 
adviser-approved related courses 


Units 
3 
3 
3 
3 


36 

Clinical Practice and Student Teaching in Speech and Hearing: 

Speech Conununication 458 Qinical Practice - 3 

Speech Communication 558(a) Advanced Qinical Practice „„ 2 

Speech Communication 558(b) Advanced Clinical Practice — 2 

Speech Communication 459 Clinical Practice and Student Teaching in 
Speech Correction and Lip Reading 4 

11 

MINOR IN SPEECH 

The minor for secondary teaching or junior college teaching is 22 units as 
follows: Speech Communication 100 (not to be included as credit for minor), 
138, 102, 235, 324, 334, 342, 430 or 434 and 442. 

MASHR OP ARTS IN SPEECH 

This degree, with concentrations in public address or speech pathology and 
audiology, is a coordinated program of graduate studies to provide incentive for 
intellectuai growth, to prepare business communication specialists, to contribute to 
improvement in teaching and professional advancement, and to provide a sound 
basis for continued graduate study in speech. The student is expected to demon- 
strate a high degree of intellectual and creative competence, to evaluate critically, 
and to show mastery of his field of concentration. 

Prerequisites 

In addition to the college requirements, students admitted to this program must 
possess at least 24 semester units of upper division studies in speech communica- 
tion and adviser-approved background studies supporting the area of emphasis: a 
minimum of 18 semester units must be in or directly related to the area of empha- 
sis. To advance in the program, students must pass an oral qualification examination 
and demonstrate their effectiveness in graduate studies in the initial courses taken. 

Program of Study 

The degree study plan will include at least 30 units of adviser-approved graduate 
studies, 15 units of which must be in 500-level courses. Each program will have at 
least 15 units in one of the areas of concentration; a core of six units, to include 
Speech Communication 500 (Seminar in Speech Research taken prior to classi- 
fication), and Speech Communication 597, Project, Speech Communication 598, 
Thesis, or Speech Communication 599, Independent Research; and six units of ad- 
viser-approved supporting courses in related fields. A written comprehensive exam- 
ination is required of all candidates. 

For further information, consult the Department of Speech (Communication. 

See also “The Program of Master’s Degrees,” page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


209 




‘V- ; '• J. . .1.- 'i 

■ . . . ■■ > f'‘-: 

.. . «; .•• .u;/, 

V . ) f •• ■ ( r 

■<. . '■’ . ' • it.»J; .*. \ . i 

. ■ ' ; ..•i:. > ! 

y\ \'4 t 







■ri 




r’., '■■• 


t*. 


r. ; . i .: 


inj r.-- - .ns ; - 






-• -:fi V f 


LIBRARY SCIENCE 



r*/ • r jr r r r . . > f ' i'V ^ f ' f t * i 

■1 't: jc fhi'^'tcaJ 




DIVISION OF LIBRARY SCIENCE 


Acting Director: Mrs. Doris H. Bonks 


MASTER OF SCIENCE IN LIIRARY SCIENCE 

The Division of Library Science provides graduate education for librarianship 
with a primary focus on the basic principles of library service. The program in- 
itially offer enough basic courses to meet the requirements for a minor for the 
standard teaching credentials and electives for the master's degree with a speciali- 
zation in school librarianship. This will authorize a teacher to serve as a school 
h*brarian. The minimum coursework required for the specialized preparation b 
24 units and the minimum for the master's specialization is 30 units. 

The courses for the initial credential program and the foundation courses for 
the M. S. L. S. are Library Science 500,«501, 502, 503, 504, and 505. The addition 
of English 433, Children’s Literature, and 90 hours of supervised student teaching 
in the school library would meet the requirements for specialized preparation ap- 
plicable to the standard teaching credentials. 

As soon as possible, additional courses will be offered sufficient to meet the full 
requirements for the master's degree with options for specializations in special, 
public and academic librarianship. 


213 


> 






i.T’ ? 








r /.» 1 ; 



ANNOUNCEMENT 
OF COURSES 





GENERAL COURSE NUMBERING CODE 

100-299 Lower division courses of freshman and sophomore level, but open also 
to upper division students. 

300-399 Upper division courses of junior and senior level, which do not give 
graduate credit unless included on an approved graduate study plan (such 
as a credential or graduate degree program) for a specific graduate 
student. 

400-499 Upper division courses of junior and senior level which give graduate 
credit > when taken by a graduate student. (Note limitations in specific 
graduate programs.) 

500-599 Graduate courses organized primarily for graduate students.* 

700-799 Graduate professional courses in the postgraduate program, not applicable 
to graduate degrees. 


PREREQUISITES 

Students are expected to meet stated prerequisites for all courses. However, in 
exceptional cases, and at the discretion of the division in which the course is taught, 
students may be allowed to meet prerequisites by examination. 

INDEPENDENT STUDY 

Under the independent study program, the upper division student can pursue 
topics or problems of special interest beyond the scope of a regular course under 
the supervision of a faculty adviser. The work is of a research or creative nature, 
and normally culminates in a paper, project, comprehensive examination, or per- 
formance. B^ore registering, the student must get his topic approved by the pro- 
fessor who will be supervising independent study. The catalog numbers for inde- 
pendent study in departments are 4W and 599. Indepradent study courses may be 
repeated. A student wishing to enroll in more than six units of independent study 
in any one semester must have the approval of his major adviser and of the chair- 
man of the department (s) in which the independent study is to be conducted. 

* Note ezcepdons on poge 63. 


217 


SCHOOL OF THE ARTS 


ART 


100 Exploratory Courso in Art (3) 

Elzploration and creative use of a variety of art materials, processes, and concepts. 
Field trips required. Not open to art majors for credit except by permission of the 
Art Department. (6 hours activity) 

101 Introduction to Art (3) 

A course for the general student designed to develop an understanding of his- 
torical and contemporary art forms. Illustrated with examples of painting, sculp- 
ture, architecture, and design. Field trips required. Not open to art majors for 
credit except by permission of the Art Department. 

103 Two-dimonsionol Dotlgn (3) 

The inventive use of materials, tools, and elements of plastic organization as re- 
lated to a two-dimensional surface. (6 hours activity) 

104 Thran-dimnnsiencil Dncign (3) 

The inventive use of materials, tools, and elements of plasQc organization as re- 
later to three-dimensional form. (6 hours activity) 

106A«3 Buginning Curamics (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103. A basic course in the study of form as related to ceramic 
materials, tools, processes, and concepts. (6 hours activity) 

107A,B Buginning Drawing and Painting (3,3) 

Beginning work in the creative use of the materials of drawing and painting with 
onphasis on visual concepts, use of medium, individual exploration, and growth, 
planning and craftsmanship. 107 A emphasizes drawing; 

107B emphasizes painting. (9 hours laboratory) 

111 Ewndamantals of Art (3) 

A comparative study of the elements of plastic organization in relation to per- 
sonal and cultural aesthetic ex p r es si on and concepts. Fundamental art ideas, prob- 
lems of organization and structure, and terminology. Field trips required. 

117A,B,C4> LHa Drawing (1,1,1,1) 

Drawing from the live model. 117B will include working from the model with 
three-dimensional materials. (3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

133A,B Dascriptiva Drawing (3.3) 

An intensive study of traditional and contemporary drawing techniques and 
theories. Emphasis in 123A on representation of nature forms and in 123B on man- 
made and mechanical forms including linear perspective. (9 hours laboratory) 

301A,B Art and avilixation (3,3) 

A comparative survey of the basic ideas, forms, and styles of the visual arts as 
they devrioped in various cultures from prehistoric time to the present day. 

305 A,B Baginning Crafts (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. Art 104 may be taken concurrently. A study of 
form as related to the concepts, materials, and processes involved in the making 


219 


Art 


of both two- and three-dimensional art forms from wood, metal, plastics and 
paper. 205B will emphasize wood. (6 hours activity) 

a07A/l Drawing and Painting (Ixparimantai Mafhodt and Mafarialt (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 117A3* Art 107A3 or the equivalents. An intensive study of 
traditional and contemporary methods and materials as they relate to current 
approaches in drawing and painting. (9 hours laboratory) 

216A«i iaginning Sculptura <3«3) 

Prerequisite: Art 104. An introductory course in sculpture with emphasis on the 
creative use of wood and metal, power equipment and hand tools. (6 hours activity) 

323A«i Lattaring, Typography and Rondoring (3^) 

Prerequisite: Art 103. A study of the history, design and use of letter forms in- 
cluding techniques for rough and comprehensive layouts and the use of both 
hand-lettered forms and handset type. (6 hours activity) 

247 Roginning Printmoking (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 107A3- An introductory course of all printmaking forms to 
include litho, etching, woodcut and serigraphy. (6 hours activity) 

236 Dotign for fho Thoatro (3) 

(Same as Theatre 286.) 

301 Anciont Art (3) 

A study of the developments in art from the Paleolithic to the period of late 
antiquity. 

302 Modioval Art (3) 

A study of the developments in art from the period of late antiquity through 
the Gothic. 

30SA Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 205 A. Study and evaluation of craft concepts, processes, and 
materials as they relate to the development of utilitarian and aesthetic form. (9 
hours laboratory) 

30Si Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 205B. A study and evaluation of craft concepts and processes 
as they relate to the development of wood into utilitarian and aesthetic form. (9 
hours laboratory) 

306A^3 Advancod Caramics (3/3) 

Prerequisite: Art 106A3* Further experiences in the study and evaluation of form 
as related to the creative use of ceramic concepts and materials including design, 
forming, glazing, and firing. (6 hours activity) 

307A/3 Drawing and Painting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 117A3,C, 107 A3» 207 A3 or equivalents. The study, evaluation 
and creative use of the concepts and materials of drawing and paring with 
emphasis on individual exploration, growth, planning and craftsmanship. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

310A3 Drawing and Painting: Ta<kniqwat and Approachat for Hia Classroom 
Toodior (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 100. The study and development of painting and drawing ma- 
terials and approaches as they rdate to elementary and secondary education. (6 
hours activity) 


220 


Art 


313A,1 Inferior D*»i 9 n (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 123 A. The elements and principles of design as they 
relate to the organization of our domestic environment. (6 hours activity) 

315A,i J*w«lry (3,3) 

Prerequisites; Art 205A and 305A. Art 305A may be taken concurrently. Design 
and creation of jewelry. (9 hours laboratory) 

316A3 Sculptur* (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 104 and 216A. (9 hours laboratory) 

317A,3 Advanced LJf« Drawing (3) 

Prerequisite: three units lower division life drawing. Drawing and painting from 
the live model (9 hours laboratory) 

320 Papan Structural and Docorativa Tochniquat (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. An exploration of the structural and decorative 
aspects of construction with paper, emphasizing three-dimensional design. Such 
techniques as papier mache, paper sculpture, paper folding and paper applique will 
be considered through a variety of paper surfaces. (6 hours activity) 

323A,3 Graphic Dasign (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 223A. Development and projection of ideas in relation 
to the technical, aesthetic, and psychological aspects of advertising art. (6 hours 
acd^ty) 

325A,t MUtalimithing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 205A and 305A. Art 305A may be taken concurrently. A 
swdy and evaluation of fundamental metalsmithing concepts, processes and mate- 
rials as they relate to the development of utilitarian forms. (9 hours laboratory) 

329A,i Art and Tachnology (3,3) 

Creative activity in the context of modem technology. (9 hours laboratory) 

330 Thraadf and Fibars: Woaving Tachniquas for tho Classroom Toochor (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 100 and 380. Creative design as it applies to various u^ of 
riireads and fibers: stitchery, weaving, macrame. Study the relaaon of textiles to 
world cultures. (6 hours activity) 

333A,A Product Dosign (3,3) 

Prerequisites; Art 103, 104 and 123AJB. Planning md designing of projects in 
relation to the technological, psychological and social aspects of contemporary 
society. (6 hours activity) 

336A,3 Casting Tochniquos and Thoorios of Cast Sculpturo (3A) 

Prerequisite: Art 316A. Projects in various waxing molding and metal casting 
techniques. Media with emphasis on aluminum and bronze and the lost wax process. 
(9 hours laboratory) 

333A Croativa Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103 or its equivalent. Elxploration of the photographic media 
a means of personal expression. Historical attitudes and processes are discussed 
in relationship to new materials and contemporary aesthetic trends. Field trips 
required. (9 hours laboratory) 

3333 Croativo Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A. Further exploration of the photographic medium as a 
means of personal expression. Historical and new processes introduced as a vehicle 
toward the individual student’s personal goal. Field trips required. (9 hours labora- 
tory) 


221 


Art 


940 Ceramics} T«chiiiqu«t for tho Clofiroom Toochor (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 100. Beginning work in the creative use of hand building 
processes, and glazing of ceramic ware. Related information on decorating 
processes, drying and firing kilns as they apply to appropriate teaching levels. 
Historical development of ceramics as it relates to various c^tures. 

347A Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107 A3 and 117A3»C. Development of concepts and explora- 
tion of materials involved in printmaking including etching, wc^cut, aquatint, 
monoprint and serigraphy. ((9 hours laboratory) 

3473 PrintnMiki m Lltkogropliy (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A3 and 117A3,C. Development of concepts and explora- 
tion of materials and techniques involved in lithography printing. (9 hours lab- 
oratory) 

3S0A3 Pointing for Non-Art Mojort (3^) 

Opportunities for students with little or no background in art to work creatively 
with various painting media both indoors and outdoors. (9 hours laboratory) 

353A Toxtilo Dotign ond Construction: fabric Printing (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103. Concepts and processes of design as they relate to fabric 
surfaces with emphasis on various printing techniques. 

3533 Toxtilo Dosign and Construction: Wooving (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103. Concepts and processes of design as they relate to fabric 
surfaces with emphasis on various weaving techniques. 

340 llomontary School Crafts (3) 

Studio activities and techniques of crafts appropriate to the elementary school. 
Strongly recommended for elementary teaching credential candidates. (4 hours 
activity) 

963KB Illustration (34) 

Prerequisite: Art 103, 107A3 and 117A3»C. Development and projection of ideas 
relative to the needs of story, book, and magazine, and film illustration. (6 hours 
activity) 

330 Art and Child Dovolopmont (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 100 or equivalent and Educ 311. The study and evaluation of 
art concepts, materials, and processes as they relate to and pronK)te child de- 
velopment. (6 hours activity) 

406A4 Coromic Analysis (34) 

Prerequisites: Art 106A3 and 306A. An introduction to the physical and chemical 
aspects of ceramic materials. Study and evaluation of ceramic materials as they are 
related to the development of the ceramic art form. (6 hours activity) 

411 Foundations of Modom Art (3) 

Basic problems of painting and sculpture of the Realism, Impressionism, Post 
Impressionism periods. 

412 Art of tho 20th Contury— 1900 to Prosont (3) 

Fundamentals of modem painting, graphics, and architecture. 

421 Oriontol Art: China (3) 

A study of the historical development of the arts of China and their relation 
to Chinese philosophy and culture. 


222 


Art 


422 Oiri«ntol Artt Japan (3) 

A study of the historical development of the arts of Japan and their relation to 
Japanese philosophy and culture. 

426 Olais Forming (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 106A3t Art 306A, and approval of instructor. A course in the 
chemistry, handling and manipulation of glass and its related tools and equipment 
for the ceramic artist. (6 hours activity) 

431 Ronalfttanco Art (3) 

Basic problems of painting, sculpture and architecture of the Renaissance period. 
Lectures, discussion and field trips. 

432 iaroquo and Rococo Art (3) 

Basic problems of painting, sculpture and architecture of the Baroque and 
Rococo period. Lectures, discussion and field trips. 

451 Ocoanic Art (3) 

An introductory survey of the styles of the aboriginal people of the following 
regions: Australia, Melanesia, Micronesia, Polynesia and Indonesia. 

452 Art of Sub-Saharan Africa (3) 

An introduction by region and tribal group to the art forms of West Coattal 
Africa and the Sudan, Niger River kingdoms, Yourba kingdoms, Cameroon chief- 
tainships. Congo tribc^ Central Africa and Blast Coastal Africa. 

4S3Arl Display and ixhibition Dosign (2,2) 

A course in the appropriate and creative use of materials, processes, and design 
concepts as they relate to the special problems involved in the planning and pre- 
paring of displays, exhibits, bulletin boards, wall cases, and art portfolios. (More 
than 6 hours laboratory) 

461 Art of North Amarican Indian (3) 

An introduction to the art forms and style groupings of the following American 
Indian groups: Eskimo, Pacific Northwest, California, Eastern Woodlands, Mound 
Builders, Southwestern and Nonhem Mexico. 

462 Art of MatoanMrica (3) 

An introduction to the an and architectural forms of Mesoamcrica from the 
early, formative stages to the Spanish Conquest. 

471 Art of Contral and South Amorica (3) 

An introduction to the an styles and cultural regions of Central America and 
Sooth America. 

431 Spocial Studios in Art History (1-3) 

Prerequisite: permission of the instructor. Opportunities for intensive study and 
evaluation in one area of an history and appreciation. 

443 Spoeiol Studios in Dosign (1-3) 

Prerequisite: permission of the instructor. Opportunity for intensive study in the 
design areas listed below. Blach area listed may be reputed to a maximum of 8 
units, but no more than 3 units of credit may be obt^ed in any one area in a 
single semester. 

443a Advortising Dosign (2 hours activity for each unit) 

443b Intorior Dosign (2 hours activity for each unit) 

443< Dosign and Composition (2 hours activity for each unit) 


223 


Art 


4t3d Display Daslpn (More than 3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

4t3a Taxfila Daslf n (2 hours activity for each unit) 

444 Spaciol Studias in Caramics <1-3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper division units in ceramics. Course may be 
repeated to a maximum of eight units, but not more than three units of credit 
may be obtained in any one area in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each 
unit) 

445 Spaciol Studios in Crafts (1^) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper division units in designated area or per- 
mission of the instructor. Opportunity for intensive study in the craft areas liked 
below. Elach area listed may be repeated to a maximum of eight units, but no 
more than three units of credit may be obtained in any one area in a single 


semester. 

(2 hours activity for each unit) 

445a 

Jowolry 

445b 

Oonoral Crafts 

445c 

Motalsmithing 

445d 

Woaving 


444 Spociol Studios in Sculpturo (1—4) 

Prerequisites: Art 316A3 and permission of the instructor. Opportunity for in- 
tensive study in the following sculptural processes. May be repeated to a maxi- 
mum of eight units but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in a 
single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

446a Modoling and Fabrication 

446b Casting 

447 Spocial Studios in Drawing and Painting and Printmaking (1—4) 

Prerequisite: permission of the instructor. Opportunity for intensive study in the 
drawing and painting areas listed below. Each area liked may be repeated to a 
maximum of eight units, but no more than three units of credit may be obtained 
in any one area in a single semester. (3 hours laboratory for each unit) 


447a 

Painting 

447b 

LHo Drawing 

447c 

Drawing 

447d 

Printmaking 

444A4 

Advancod Scono Dosign (4,4) 


(Same as Theatre 488A, B) 


449 Spocial Studios in Croativo Photography (1—4) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A3. Advanced projects in photography as a means of per- 
sonal expression. May be repeated to a maximum of eight units but no more than 
three units of credit may be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours activity for 
each unit) 

500 Graduato Sominar in Art (4) 

Selected advanced problems in art and art education. Each student will present 
research results in ork or written form. 


224 


Art 


501 Oraduat* Seminar in Art HUtory and Appraciafion (9) 

Prerequisite: Art 500. Directed research with emphasis on the relationship between 
historical backgrounds and developments in art and the student’s area of concen- 
tration. May be repeated to a maximum of eight units. 

502 Saminnr in Contemporary Art (3) 

Selected advanced problems and directed research in relation to the contempo- 
rary art form. 

503 Oradwato Probiomi in Design (1-3) 

Prerequisite: permission of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, 
development, and evaluation of individual projects in the design areas listed below. 
May be repeated to a maximum of eight units in each area, but no more than three 
units of credit may be obtained in any one area in a single semester. 

503a Advortising Dosign (2 hours activity for each unit) 

503b Intarior Dasign (2 hours activity for each unit) 

503< Datign and Composition (2 hours activity for each unit) 

503d Display Dosign (More than 3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

503o Toxtilo Dosign (2 hours activity for each unit) 

504 Graduato Probloms in Coramics (1-3) 

Prerequisite: permission of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, 
development and evaluation of individual projects in ceramics. May be repeated to 
a maximum of eight units but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in 
a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

505 Graduato Probloms In Crafts (1-3) 

Prerequisite: permission of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, 
development, and evaluation of individual projects in the crafts areas listed below. 
May be repeated to a maximum of eight units but no more than three units of 
credit may be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 


505a 

Jowolry 

505b 

Gonoral Crafts 

505< 

Motalsmithing 

505d 

Woaving 


506 Graduato Probloms In Seulpturo (1-3) 

Prerequisite: permission of the instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on 
planning, development, and evaluation of individual projects in sculpture. May be 
repeated to a maximum of eight units but no more than three units of credit may 
be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each umt) 

307 Graduato Probloms In Drawing and Painting (1-3) 

Prerequisite: 12 units of upper division drawing and painting. Intensive study 
with emphasis on planning, development, and evaluation of individual projects in 
the drawing and piainting areas listed below. May be repeated to a maximum of 
eight units but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in a single 


semester. 

(3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

507a 

Painting 

507b 

Lifo Drawing 

507c 

Drawing 

507d 

Printmaking 


225 


Art Edutttflon 


S97 Pro|«€t 

Prerequisites: Art 500, 501 and reconunendadon of the students graduate com- 
mittee. Art 501 may be taken concurrendy with Art 597 on approval of instructor. 
Development and presentadon of a creative project in the area of concentradon 
beyond regularly offered coursework. 

591 TfMtis (9-4) 

Prerequisites: Art 500, 501 and recommendadon of the student’s graduate com- 
mittee. Art 501 may be taken concurrendy with Art 598 on approval of instructor. 
Development and presentation of a thesis in the area of concentradon beyond regu- 
larly offered coursework. No more than three units may be taken in any one 
semester. 

599 lnd*p«nd«nt Oraduaf* R*March (1-3) 

Open to graduate students in art with the consent of the department chairman. 
May be repeated for credit. 


ART EDUCATION 

332 Industrial Arts for Elomontary Toachors (2) 

Prerequisite: Educ 311 or consent of the instructor. Creadve selecdon, organiza- 
don and use of materials and tools in construcdon acdvides. Includes correladon 
experiences with the social studies, science, and other units of work. (4 hours 
acdvity) 

370A3 Art Activity (2,2) 

Opportunides to observe, analyze, and evaluate child growth in and through 
creadve art experiences. (4 hours acdvity) 

429A,3 Arts and Crafts for Tooching Excoptionol Childron (2,2) 

Methods of using a variety of art materials and processes with emphasis on those 
experiences which meet the needs of retarded or handicapped children. (4 hours 
acdvity) 

441 Studio Probloms in Socondory Art Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Senior standing in Art, or permission of instructor. Advanced indi- 
vidual studio problems with projects related to specific learning experiences in An 
Educadon at the secondary school level. (6 hours acdvity) 

442 Tooching Art in tho Socondary School (2) 

Prerequisites: Educ 311, Educ 340, An 380, An Ed 441, admission to teacher 
educadon, senior standing or consent of the instructor. See pages 131-133 under 
Secondary Educadon for descripdon of standard teaching credendal program. 
Objecdves, methods, and materials including audiovisual instnicdon for teaching 
an in secondary schools. Required, before student teaching of students presenting 
majors in an for the standard teaching credendal. The student who has not had 
teaching experience must register concurrendy in Educ 449. 

749 Sfudunt Taaching in Art in fhu Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

See page 269 for descripdon and prerequisites. 

DANCE 

101 Introduction to Dance (2) 

Historical and aesthedc approach to dance as an an form, to provide student 
with basic knowledge and aesthedc values in ballet, modem dance, educadonal 
dance, theatrical dance as well as ethnic dance. Field trips. Open to all students. 


226 


Dance 


125A,E Improvitatien (2,2) 

Theory and practice of improvisation in movement. The student will be taught 
to overcome inhibitions, to move freely and naturally and to improvize imagina- 
tively in movement. 

135A,B Movement and Rhythm (2,2) 

This course is designed to equip the student with higher kinesthetic and kinetic 
ability. A course in basic movement experience for dance, drama, art, music as 
well as the general student. 

227A3 Space Forming in Dance (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Dance 135A3. Theory of space and principle of space forming to 
train students to understand spacial movement, so that they can master movement 
on stage, stage design and the basic skills of choreography. 

245A,B Mime and Pantomime (2,2) 

Theory and practice of mime and pantomime for drama, dance and education 
(expression and gesture). Provide historical and contemporary knowledge and 
techniques with emphasis on individual development of creative skill in mime and 
pantomime. (4 hours activity) 

311A,B Elements and Forms of Dance Composition (2,2) 

Prerequisites: Dance 135A3 and 227A3- Basic forms and elements of dance 
composition will be offered; Simultaneous Symmetry, Alternate Symmetry, A- 
Symmetry, Simple Contrast, (Compound Contrast, Balance and Unbalance, 4-units 
Rule, 6-units Rule, Rondo, Canon. Dances in which these rules must be applied 
will be composed by the student. 

3SB Philosophy and Mothodology of iducotionol Danes (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 125A3 and Dance 311 A3 or consent of instructor. This 
course will offer: a short history of dance education; principles and objectives of 
niodem educational dance and the methodology to meet these objectives; principle 
and structure of curriculum for educational dance. 

®^4A,B Dance Theatre and Production (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Dance 135A3 and 227A3 or consent of instructor. Clannot be taken 
concurrently with Theatre 478AB. Theory and practice of creative and expressive 
niovement in relation to the theatre and dance production. (More than 6 hours 
production) 

441 Seminor in Ethnic Dance as Culture Phenomena (3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. A study of the mutual influence and relation 
Between the religion, living form, habits and economical-political-geographical en- 
vironment and dance form (including music and costume) of the major ethmc 
8^ups of the world. 

450 Creative Dance (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 135 A3 and 358, or consent of instructor. Study and analysis 
of creative dance and its relation to dance education in elementary and secondary 
schools. Recommended for students of dance, theatre, music and art as well as 
practising teachers. 

474 Special Studies in Dance Theatre Production (1—3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 374A3 or the equivalent and consent of instrucor. Oppor- 
tunity for intensive study in theory and practice in dance theatre and production, 
^^y be repeated to a maximum of eight units but no more than three units of 
credit may be obtained in a single semester. (More than 3 hours production per 
unit) 


227 


Music 


476A^B Hitfory of Done* (3^) 

History of dance from primitive times to the present. Covers development of 
dance in Europe, the Orient, Asia, America (including American Indian) in its 
general relation to culture history. 

434 Survey of Contomporory Doncors (3) 

Survey of great dancers and choreographers of the 20th century in Europe, Asia 
and the Americas; their biography, works, and philosophy. 

436 Choroogrophy (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 374A3 or the equivalent and consent of instructor. Theory 
and practice of notating dance. Provide choreographic skill with emphasis on 
individual creativity. 

535 Sominor in Educational Dance (3) 

Prerequisite; Permission of instructor. Discussion and analysis of principle, forms 
and methods of dance education in the world. Survey of the literature relating to 
dance education. 

MUSIC 

100 Introduction to Music (3) 

A basic approach to listening to music with understanding and pleasure through 
a general sur\’ey of musical literature representative of various styles and perform- 
ance media. Music will be related to other arts through lectures, recordings, and 
concerts. Qosed to music majors. 

101 Music Ttioory for Non-Music Majors (3) 

Basic theory and practical applications to further understanding of basic music 
principles and to improve music performance and listening skills. Includes sight- 
singing and relationship to keyboard and simple melodic instruments. Closed to 
music majors. 

1 1 1 Music Ttioory (3^) 

A year course covering diatonic harmony and musicianship. Includes scales and 
intervals, triads and their inversions, harmonizations, nonharmonic tones, modula- 
tion and dominant seventh chords. Practical applications, to include sight singing, 
dictation and keyboard harmonizations. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

161a, 361a Symphony Orchostro (1) 

Open by audition to college students and qualified adults in the community. Per- 
formance of standard representative symphonic works. (More than 3 hours major 
production) 

161b, 361b Colloge Choir (1) 

Open to all college students with permission of instructor. Study and per- 
formance of standard representative choral literature works. (More than 3 hours 
major production) 

161c, 361< Symphonic Bond (1) 

Open by audition to college students and qualified adults in the conununity. 
Performance of standard representative symphonic band literature. (More than 
3 hours major production) 

161d, 361d Oporo Thootro (1) 

Study of roles and representative excerpts from standard and contemporary 
operas and the basic musical, dramatic and language techniques of the musical 


228 


Musk 


theatre. Performance of operatic excerpts and complete operas. (More than 3 
hours major production) 

161«, 361* Coll«g« Singers (1) 

Membership restricted to advanced voice students or those passing voice test. 
Performs finest representative choral literature. (More than 3 hours major produc- 
tion) 

161f, 3611 Symphonic Winds (1) 

Membership limited to advanced woodwind, brass and percussion students by 
audition. Performance of original literature for symphonic band and large wind 
ensemble. (More than 3 hours major production) 

162b, 362b Wind Ensomblo (1) 

Open to qualified wind students by audition or consent of the instructor. Per- 
forms representative wind ensemble literature. (2 hours activity) 

162c, 362c Vocal insomblo (1) 

Study and performance of choral literature of the Renaissance and Baroque 
periods. Open only to students by audition. Public performance required. (2 hours 
activity) 

162d, 362d Porcussion Insomblo (1) 

Study and performance of music written for the Percussion Ensemble. Open to 
any qualified student with consent of instructor. 2 hours activity. 

163, 363 Chombor Music Ensomblos (1) 

Open to all qualified wind, string, or keyboard students. Various ensembles will 
be formed to study, read, and to perform representative chamber literature of all 
periods. (2 hours activity) 

170, 270, 370, 470 Individual Instruction (Tochniquo) (1-2) 

Note: Students must register for a minimum of one unit per semester, selected 
upon advisement from Mu 17(M70/Mu 171-471. Individual study with approved in- 
structor with emphasis on performance techniques. Jury examination required. 
Special fee. 

171, 271, 371, 471 Individual Instruction (Roportory) (1) 

Prerequisite: Jury recommendation plus two consecutive semesters of individual 
instruction (Technique) (17(M70). Note: Students must register for a minimum of 
one unit per semester, selected upon advisement from Mu 170-470/Mu 171-471. 
Individual study with approved instructor with emphasis on repertory. Jury exami- 
nation required. 

332A,1 Piano Class for Music Majors (1,1) 

Fundamentals of keyboard technique for students whose major performance 
instrument is not piano. (1 hour lecture, 1 hour activity) 

1MA,1 Piano Class for Non-Mojors (1,1) 

Prerequisite: Mu 101. Beginning and elementary instruction in basic piano tech- 
niques for the non-music major. (2 hours activity) 

211 Chromatic Harmony (3) (FormoHy 211A) 

Prerequisite: Mu lllB or equivalent. A continuation of Mu 11 lA, B with em- 
phasis on the chromatic harmonic practice of the 18th and 19th centuries. Includes 
secondary dominants*, ninth, eleventh, and thirteenth chords; sequence, and chro- 
matically altered chords. Practical applications to include sight singing, melodic 


229 


Music 


and harmonic dictation, and keyboard practice. Required of all music majors. (2 
hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

2S1 Survey of Musical Litorotvro (3) 

An introductory course required of majors in the study of the literature of 
music in Western civilization. Open to minors and qualified students by consent of 
instructor. Students should be able to read music as a part of the analysis of form, 
design and style. (3 hours lecture, 1 hour laboratory) 

231 0-0 Orchostrol Instrumonts ( 7 ) 

Courses in this area are required of all music credential candidates. (4 hours 
activity) 

23 lo String Inttnimonfs (2) 

Specialization on violin, with related work on standard instruments of the 
string family. (4 hours activity) 

231b Woodwind Inttrwmonft (2) 

Specialization on clarinet, with related work on standard instruments of 
the woodwind family. (4 hours activity) 

231c irats Instrumonts (2) 

Specialization on trumpet, with related work on standard instruments of the 
brass family. (4 hours activity) 

231 d PorcuMion Instrumonts (2) 

Specialization on the snare drum and mallet-played instruments with re- 
lated work on other standard percussion instruments. Special consideration 
given to typical problems encountered with percussion in the public schools. 
(4 hours activity) 

231 o Survoy of Orchostrol Instrumonts (2) 

A general survey of orchestral instrument practices for elementary creden- 
tial candidates. (4 hours activity) 

232Ar3 Piono Class for Music Majors (1,1) 

Prerequisite: declaration of the music major and placement by the instructor. 
Designed to meet music major piano requirements for degree and teaching creden- 
tials. Fundamentals of keyboard technique for students whose major performance 
field is not piano. Not required for piano majors. (2 hours activity) 

233A^ Voico Class (1,1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Prepares credential candidates for the func- 
tional examination. Not required for voice majors. (2 hours activity) 

316 16th Century Counterpoint (3) (Formerly 312) 

Prerequisite: Mu 211 or consent of instructor. Sixteenth century counterpoint 
in two, three and four parts, covering motet, canon, double counterpoint and 
passacaglia. Required of all music majors. 

313 13th Century Counterpoint (2) (Formerly 313) 

Prerequisite: Mu 316 or consent of instructor. Elighteenth century counterpoint 
in two, three and four parts, covering invention, canon, double and triple coun- 
terpoint and fugue. 

320 20th Century Harmony (2) (Formerly 2113) 

Prerequisite: Mu 211. A sur\xy of the harmonic practices of the 20th centur>' 
with emphasis on written exercises in the various styles. Practical applications to 


230 


Music 


include sight singing, keyboard practice, and dictation. Required of all music 
majors. (2 hours lecture, 1 hour activity) 

321 A3 Form and AnolytU (23) 

Prerequisite: Mu 211 or consent of instructor. Analysis of structural elements 
of music such as motive, phrase, and period; binary, ternary, rondo, sonato-allegro 
and larger musical forms in representative musical works. 

322A,ft Cempofition (2,2) 

Prerequisites: Mu 316, 320 and 321 A or consent of instructor. A— Ear training, 
analysis of smaller forms, simple composition of two- and three-part song from 
styles. • — Analysis and writing of more complex musical forms. 

323A,B Orchoitration (2,2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 3 12 A or consent of instructor. Writing and analysis of 
orchestral music. 

333 Music and Child Davalapmant (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 101 or equivalent or successful completion of proficiency test. 
Study of the relationship of music to child growth and development, with em- 
phasis on the child from 5 to 12. 

341 Swrvay af th# Symphany (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or consent of instructor. A study of the history ^d litera- 
ture of symphonic music from the 18th through the 20th centuries, with special 
emphasis on the relationships between musical composition and the general artisQc 
temper of historical periods. For non-music majors only. 

342 Survay of th# Cancorta (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or consent of instructor. A study of the history and lit- 
erature of the concerto from the 17th century to the present. The nature of the 
soloist and the social display of virtuosity will be considered. For non-music 
majors only. 

343 Survay af Charal Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or consent of instructor. A study of choral music through 
the ages, from Gregorian Chant to contemporary forms, concentrating on choral 
works of the great comp>osers of the Baroque, Classical and Romantic eras. For 
non-music majors only. 

3S0 Music in Our Sociaty (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or consent of instructor. Designed to increase interest and 
an understanding of music in its relation to our general culture. Emphasis on struc- 
ture, analysis and aesthetic principles through the study of masterpieces of musical 
literature of various historical periods. 

3S1A3 Hiftory and Lifaratura of Music (33) 

Prerequisite: Mu 251. A — A study of the history and literature of music from 
®^ly Greek beginnings through the Renaissance. 1 — A study of the history and 
literature of music covering the Baroque, Classic, Romantic period and the 20th 
century. (Required of all music majors) 

332 Pinna ao%% far Music Mafars (1) 

Prerequisite: Mu 282B or placement by coordinator. Ckintinuation of class piano 
series for qualified upper division students. Prepares credential candidates for piano 
functional examination. 


231 


Music 


3t6 Fiano Accompanying (1) 

The study and application of playing accompaniments for instrumentalists, vocal- 
ists, and ensembles. Participation in rehearsals, recitals, and concerts required. (2 
hours activity) 

390A«1 Diction for Singort (1,1) 

Prerequisite: Sophomore standing or consent of instructor. Study of proper sing- 
ing diction; may not be considered a substitute for formal language study. Examples 
from standard vocal literature explained through the use of the International 
Phonetic Alphabet. A^ltalian, French. • — German, English. Required of all voice 
majors. 

391 A,i Choral Conducting { 2 , 2 ) 

Principles, techniques, and methods of conducting choral groups. Laboratory 
work with class and vocal ensembles, using standard choral repertoire. Required 
of all music education majors. (4 hours activity) 

393A3 Initrumontal Conducting ( 2 , 2 ) 

Prerequisite: Mu 391 A. Principles, techniques, and methods of conducting or- 
chestral and band groups. Laboratory experience in conducting instrumental groups, 
using standard instrumental literature. (4 hours activity) 

450 History and Litoraturo of Instrunsontal Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A3 or consent of instructor. The development of instru- 
ments and instrumental forms from the Middle Ages to the present, with emphasis 
on the analy'sis of compositional techniques and stylistic development. (3 hours 
lecture and discussion, 1 hour listening) 

451 History and Utoraturo of Vocal Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A3 or consent of instructor. A study of solo and ensemble 
vocal literature, including opera, from the Middle Ages to the present, with em- 
phasis on the analysis of compositional and vocal techniques and stylistic develop- 
ment. (3 hours lecture and discussion, 1 hour listening) 

453 Choral Utoraturo and Intorprotation (3) 

Prerequisites: Mu 391 A,B or equivalent and 351 A3- The study of choral litera- 
ture from the Medieval, Renaissance, Baroque, Qassic, Romantic, and Contemporary 
eras analyzed in historical perspective. Appropriate performance practices will be 
examined. 

454 Piano Utoraturo and Intorprotation (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351A3 or consent of instructor. Study and performance of 
representative styles and schools of piano literature, particularly with reference to 
solo and ensemble works. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

455 Initrumontal Chambor Utoraturo and Intorprotation (3) 

Open to all music majors, or to non-majors by consent of instructor. Members 
of the class will be grouped into ensembles for demonstration purposes. Emphasis 
will be placed on the stylistic differences required in performing works of all 
periods. 

456 Opora Utoraturo and Intorprotation (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351A3 or consent of instructor. Study of all periods and 
nationalities, including stylistic and historical connotations. 

457A So^ Litoraturo and Intorprotation (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 390B or consent of instructor. Study and performance of Ger- 
man Lieder with representative examples of periods and styles. 


232 


Music 


4571 Song Litoroturo and Intorprototion (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 390A or consent of instructor. Study and performance of 
Italian, French, Russian, English and American art songs, with representative ex- 
amples of periods and styles. 

451 Collogium Musicum Procticum (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A3 or consent of instructor. The study and performance 
of rare and old music, both instrumental and vocal. Techniques of musical research 
will be applied. Students should be competent performers. 

467 Piano Podagogy (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 454 or consent of instructor. Fundamentals of piano pedagogy, 
with reference to studio and public school teaching. Organization, materials and 
methods of teaching piano in beginning, intermediate, and advanced classes. 

494 Sonior Rocifol (1) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Intensive preparation of representative works 
in the principal performance area. 

499 Indopondont Study (1-3) 

Study of a special topic in Music selected in consultation with the instructor and 
carried out under his supervision. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Groduato Study in Music (2) 

Required of all graduate music majors. Study of basic bibliography, literature, 
and research techniques and materials useful in graduate music study. 

SOS Tho String Quartots of ioothovon (2) 

Prerequisites: Mu 321 A, 35 IB or consent of instructor. A comprehensive study 
of the early, middle and late quartets of Beethoven approached through listening 
to recordings and live performances. Research on the period and the circumstances 
under which each quartet was composed will be presented in the form of seminar 
projects. 

522 Contomporory Todiniquos of Composition (2) 

Advanced techniques of composition, as applied to the student’s area of graduate 
specialization. 

523 Advancod Orchostration (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 323B. Analysis and practice of traditional and contemporary 
orchestration techniques. Scoring of music for large ensembles such as orchestra, 
band, chorus and or^estra, or band and orchestra. 

551 Music of tho Modioval Poriod (2) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. A detailed study of the music forms, struc- 
tures and styles from 500 to 1450. Detailed analysis of important represenutive 
works as well as the contributions of individual composers and theoretical writers. 

552 Music of tho Ronoissanco (2) 

Prerequisite: (Consent of instructor. A comprehensive study of the forms, styles, 
and developmental characteristics of music between 1450 and 1600. Detailed analy- 
sis of selected works by representative composers and theoretical writers. 

553 Music of tho Raroquo Poriod (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A3 or consent of instructor. Musical forms, styles, and 
performance practices of the Baroque period. Detailed analysis of significant repre- 
senutive works. (2 hours lecture and discussion, 1 hour listening) 


233 


Music 


554 Mu»i< of fh« Clastic Pariod (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A3 or consent of instructor. A study of the history and 
literature of music from approximately 1750 to 1900. Detailed analysis of important 
representative works. (2 hours lecture and discussions, 1 hour listening) 

555 Music of fha Romantic PoHod (2) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. An intensive study of the structure and 
development of music in the 19th century. Detailed analysis of imponant repre- 
senudve works. (2 hours lecture and discussion, 1 hour listening) 

554 20tli Contury Music (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351A3 or consent of instructor. Developments in the music of 
western Europe and the western hemisphere since 1890. Intensive study of con- 
temporary music and its structure. 

557 Sominor in Music History (2) 

Prerequisites: A least two from the following series: Mu 551-556, and consent 
of instructor. Detailed investigation and analysis of specific developments in 
musicology including exercises in transcriptions from old notations and historical 
investigations prepared by members of the seminar. 

55t Collogium Musicum (2) 

Prerequisite: Permission of instructor. Advanced studies in the performance of 
rare and old music. (See Mu 458 for general description). May be repeated for 
credit. 

570 Individuol Instruction (1—2) 

Prerequisite: Jury recommendation. Individual instruction with approved in- 
structor with emphasis on performance techniques and repertory. Minimum of 1 
unit must be taken per semester. Required of all graduate students whose terminal 
project is the graduate recital. Special fee. 

591 Advoncod Choral Conducting and Intorprotation (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 391B, conducting experience, or consent of instructor. Advanced 
problems in choral conducting techniques, with emphasis on laboratory work with 
student groups and in concert conducting. (4 hours activity) 

592 Advancod Instrumontal Conducting and Intorprotation (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 392B, keyboard facility for score reading and consent of in- 
structor. Advanced study of conducting technics through assignments with the 
college symphony. Interpretive problems of each period covered in lectures. (4 
hours activity) 

597 Projoct (3) 

Systematic study and report of a significant undertaking in the area of musical 
composition, musical performance, or other related creative activity. A written 
critical evaluation of the work or activity will be required. 

598 Thatif (3) 

Individual investigations of specific problems in the area of concentration by 
candidates for the MA. degree. 

599 Indepandant Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing in music and permission of instructor. Research 
and study projects in areas of specialization beyond regularly offered coursework. 
Oral and written reports required. 


234 


/Music Education 


MUSIC EDUCATION 

435 Children's Literoture In Music (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 333 or consent of instructor. A survey of music literature, of 
books and stories about music, and of recordings appropriate for children. Corre- 
lation of music with children’s literature. 

Music iducotien Techniques ilock: * 

* 441 Teaching Music Theory and Appreciation in the Public Schools <2) 

Prerequisite: 20 units in music; Educ 311, or consent of instructor; admission to 
teacher education. Required of all music majors working for the standard teaching 
credential, secondary specialization. Interrelation of general and specialized classes 
and their place in the total school program. (2 hours lecture) 

* 442 Teaching Vocal Music in the Public Schools <2) 

Prerequisites: 20 units in music to include Mu 391A (for those doing student 
aide), E^uc 340, Educ 311, admission to teacher education, senior standing or con- 
sent of the instructor. See page 131 under Secondary Education for description 
of standard teaching credential program. Objectives, methods, and materials in- 
cluding audiovisual instruction for teaching music in the secondary schools. The 
history and organization of the teaching of vocal and choral music in public edu- 
cation. Planning sequential vocal training and performance organizations for the 
total school program. Study of choral literature and techniques of instruction. (2 
hours lecture) 

* 443 Tuaching Instrumuntal Mutlc in thu Public Schoolc (2) 

Prerequisite: 20 units in music, EUJuc 311, admission to teacher education, senior 
standing or consent of instructor. Required of all music majors working for the 
standard teaching credential, secondary specialization. The history and organiza- 
tion of the teaching of instrumental music in public education. Study of music 
literature and appropriate curricula for the development of concert bands, sym- 
phony orchestras, and chamber music ensembles for the total school prograni. 
(2 hours lecture) 

530 Practicum of Rosoarch In Music iducatlon (2) 

Prerequisites: Graduate standing in music; completion of Mu 500. Research tech- 
niques and procedures in music education. Students will be required to complete 
a creative project or research paper. 

531 Foundations of Music Education (2) 

Prerequisites: Graduate standing in music; completion of Mu 5(X). Study of the 
philosophical and historical bases which have influenced music education in the 
United States. Identification of philosophic frames of leading educators, past and 
present. (Contemporary issues and trendhs which affect the teaching of music in the 
schools. Prerequisite for all music education courses at the graduate level. 

532 Sominar in Music Education (2) 

Studies in the trends and application of educational theory in relation to the 
teaching of music in the public schools. 

544 Curriculum Planning and Construction in Music (2) 

Principles and practices of curriculum planning in music education, with special 
reference to the public elementary, junior and senior high school. Required of 
majors who intend to complete supervision credential. 

•~Mu 441, 442 and 443 aze scheduled as an integrated course in music education techniques. 
Students must take in the semester immediately preceding student teaching fordinarilv the 
first semester of the postgraduate year) and must allow two hoars daily in their sd&edules to 
take the *-»««« azxi to complete fieldwork assignmentt. Students without teaching experience 
must Educ 449 Teacner Aide Assignment (1) concurrently and must allow sufficient 
time in tKoir schedules at the hour each day so that they can serve as teacher 

aides in public schools. 


235 


Theatre 


545 Supervision and Administration of Musk in tho Public Schools (2) 

Open to music education majors with teaching experience. Philosophy, prin- 
ciples and practices of supervision of music in the public elementary and secondary 
schools. Emphasis on modern principles of leadership, types of services, organiza- 
tion, management and evaluation of programs of instructinn. Required of candi- 
dates for supervisory credential. 

749 Studont Tooching In Music in tho Socondary School and Somlnar (6) 

Prerequisites: Mu 441, 442, 443 and Educ 449. 

See page 269 for description. 


THEATRE 

211 Introduction to Oral Intorprotation (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 101, a high school speech course, or consent 
of instructor. A fundamentals course devoted to theory, methods, and practice in 
the performance of oral communication of different types of literature. (Same as 
Speech 211.) 

241 Voico Production for tho Actor (2) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Fundamental techniques, methods, and train- 
ing to give the actor maximum use of his voice in theatre. Correction of speech 
faults and regional accents. Introduction to problems of suge dialects. Study of 
basic interpretative material. ( 1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

263A«B Boginning Acting (3,3) 

Laborator>' practice and discussions of the form and content of the art of acting. 
A— Action, motivation and circumstances of behavior on stage and television. 
B — Problems in characterization. (6 hours activity) 

271 Introduction to Thootro Arts (3) 

A study of the evolution of theatre, motion pictures, radio and television as 
composite arts. Emphasis is placed on the visual and production aspects as influ- 
enced by different cultures, traditions, and technologies. Field trips to certain 
significant productions. 

272 Undorstanding Thootro (3) 

A nontechnical survey course for the general student leading to an appreciation 
and understanding of the theatre as a medium of communication and entertainment 
and as an art form. Field trips to certain significant productions. 

276A,B Boginning Stagocroft (2,2) 

Requires concurrent enrollment in Stagecraft Lab. Lecture prepares the student 
for planning, constructing, painting and operating basic scenery for the stage and 
television. Students will act as crew for several productions. 

276A,B Boginning Stogocraft Lab (1,1) 

Requires concurrent enrollment in Beginning Stagecraft lecture. Practice in the 
safe and efficient use of hand and power tools and standard stage equipment. Prac- 
tice in reading technical drawings and building scenic items. Scenery for depart- 
mental major and class productions arc used as lab projects. Student crew produc- 
tions. (More than 6 hours production) 

277 Costumo Fundamonfals (2) 

Requires concurrent enrollment in (Costume Fundamentals Lab. Principles of 
costume and procedures of costuming a theatrical and television production. Lec- 
ture and discussion in basic construction techniques, organizing and executng the 
duties of the costume crew. Designed primarily for non-tech majors within the 
department and as an introductory course for tech majors. 


236 


Theatre 


277 Coftum« Pundaiii«iitalf Lab (1) 

Requires concurrent enrollment in Costume Fundamentals lecture or consent of 
instructor. Practical experience in executing class project assignments and in con- 
struction and organization of costumes for actual production. (More than 4 hours 
production) 

2t5A,i Thaotrical Mokaup (2,2) 

Theory and practice in makeup for stage and television. Emphasis on develop- 
ment of individual sl^ in techniques of character analysis, application in pig- 
ment, plastic, hair makeup, and selection and use of makeup equipment. (4 hours— 
activity) 

2t6 Datign for tko Tkootro (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 or Theatre 276A or 276B, or consent of instructor. 
Study and practice in the basic principles of designing scenery for the stage and 
television. Work in the designing and planning of sets for theatre productions. 
(Same as Art 286.) 

290 History and Aottkotks of Motion Plctvros (3) 

History and development of motion pictures as an art form coi^ining lec- 
tures, readings, discussion, and screening of films. (Same as Commumcations 290) 

311 Orol Intorprotation (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 211 or Speech Ommunication 211 or consent of instructor. 
The principles and practice of reading aloud from the printed page. Analysis of 
selections from prose and poetry are emphasized. The development of voice con- 
trol and projection of idea and motion. (Same as Speech Commumcadon 311.) 

314A3 Roading Tboatra (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 211 or Speech Ck)mmunicadon 211. Oral reading in which 
the emphasis is placed on group and individual reading of dramadc literature. The 
first semester will emphasize modem and contemporary dramadc literature and the 
second semester will include selections from the EUizabethan, Renaissance and 
Romandc periods. 

341 Pbeoafka (3) 

(Same as Speech Communicadon 341, Linguisdes 341) 

363A,B lotanaadiota Actiag and Cbaractarixation (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 263. Condnuadon of Theatre 263 A 3* Acting. Emphasis on 
extended and integrated speech and movement problems in characterizadon. Eln- 
couraging the student to begin development of style and ensemble acting. Labora- 
tory scenes, extensive analysis and exploradon. (6 hours activity) 

364 SMainar in Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: Evidence of student’s previous interest in creative writing and con- 
sent of the instructor. Study of superior models, development of style, and group 
cridcism and evaJuadon of each student’s independent work, as it relates to play- 
wridng. May be repeated for credit. (Same as English 364) 

370A3 Fandamontalft of Diracting (3,3) 

Prerequisite: A, prerequisite to B. Cxinsent of instructor. The study of prere- 
hearsal problems and procedures, of the structural analysis of plays, and of com- 
posidon, picturizadon, pantomimic dramadzadon, movement, and rhythm onstage 
and in television. Practice in directing scenes. (6 hours activity) 


237 


Theatre 


Z76Ke Advanc«cl Sfag«croft (2,2) 

Requires concurrent enrollment in Advanced Stagecraft Lab. Lecture prepares 
student to plan and execute complex scenery and sound for stage and television. 
Special analysis will be placed on new materials and techniques within the held. 

376 Art Advanced Stagecraft Lab (1,1) 

Requires concurrent enrollment in Advanced Stagecraft lecture or consent of 
instructor. Special construction and rigging problems are executed as they appear 
in production. The scenery for departmental major and class productions are used 
as laboratory projects. Students are crew heads for the productions. (More than 6 
hours production) 

377Aft Stag* Cettumlng (2,2) 

Requires concurrent enrollment in 377 A3 Stage Costuming Lab. 
id— History of costume for the stage; a chronological study of fashions and tex- 
tiles of major historical periods, methods of costume research, and the means of 
interpreting historical costume for theatrical statement. 

B— A study of the techniques of designing and constructing costumes of various 
historical periods, wth emphasis on creative planning. 

377A3 Stag* Cotfvming Lab (1,1) 

Requires concurrent enrollment in Stage (Costuming lecture or consent of in- 
structor. Practical experience in solving advanced problems in costume design, 
construction, and organization through participation in major productions of the 
department. (4 hours production) 

330 Introduction to Radio and TolovUion (3) 

The history and development of the broadcasting industry and its impact and 
influence on our society. A study of the basic broadcasting practices, audiences, 
production and programming. (Same as C^ommunications 380) 

331 Radio and Tolovision Announcing (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 211 or consent of instructor. Theory and practice of con- 
trol room operation. Lectures and practice in microphone and camera techniques, 
commercial announcements; interviewing, sportscasdng, narration, foreign pro- 
nunciations, and continuity. (6 hours activity) 

332 Tolovision Toebniquos (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 380. Survey of the development and current trends in 
television techniques, programming, and production. 

333 Radio and Tolovision Writing (3) 

Study of the principles and practices and experience in the writing of scripts 
and other forms of continuity for television. 

336 Stago Lighting (3 ) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 276A3 or equivalent. Theory and practice in stage light- 
ing and television presentations. Emphasis is given to design and the technology for 
its illumination. (More than 6 hours activity) 

402 Dramatic Activitios for Childron (3) 

Theory and practice in the use of creative dramatics, storytelling, puppetry, 
assembly programs, role-playing, and other aspects of dramatics as tools for the 
teacher, group worker, recreation major, and others who work with children. 

403 Childron's Thoatro (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 263 A or B; 276 A and 370AB or equivalent; or consent of 
the instructor. Theories and principles of production in the formal theatre arts for 
children. Analysis and evaluation of appropriate theatrical forms. 


238 


Theatre 


411 A Oral Intarprafation of Pros# Litoraturo (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 211 or 311 or consent of instructor. The oral inteipretation 
of prose literature. Elmphasis will be upon the application of relevant critical tech- 
niques to close study of various types of prose literature and to the development 
of oral interpreudon skills appropriate to these types. 

4113 Oral Intorprotation of Pootry (3) 

Prerequisites: Consent of instructor or Theatre 211 or 311. The oral interpreta- 
tion of poetic literature. Emphasis will be upon the applicadon of critical tech- 
niques to close study of various types of poetry and to the development of ap- 
propnate oral interpretadon skills. 

41 1C Oral Intorprotation of Drama (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 211 or 311 or consent of instructor. The oral interpreta- 
don of drama. Emphasis will be upon the applicadon or relevant critical techniques 
to the drama and upon the development of oral interpretadon techniques appropri- 
ate to drama. 

450 Thoatro Monogomont (3) 

Prerequisites: Consent of instructor. Discussion and praedee of the basic ele- 
ments of public reladons as applied to theatre with a detailed analysis of various 
advertising mediums and experimentadon in their use. A study of the various 
financial aspects of academic, community, and professional theatre operadons in- 
cluding pracdcal experience in front-of-the-house management and ^ box office 
operadon through the department’s public presentations. (6 hours aedvity) 

463 A3 Advancad Acting (33) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 363 A3. A study of historical theories and techniques of 
styles of acting as an art form. The first semester will include Greek through 
Renaissance periods and the second semester will include the Neoclassic periods 
to contemporary styles. (6 hours aedvity) 

463A3 Exp«rim«ntal Thoatra (33) 

Prerequisites: Consent of instructor. Cannot be taken concurrendy with Theatre 
479AB. An aedvity course in which dramadc principles arc applied through pro- 
duedon of full length and one-act plays using various styles of acting and staging. 
(More than 3 hours produedon per unit) 

470A3 Dirocting (33) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 370A3 or consent of instructor. Requires concurrent en- 
rollment in Theatre 470A, B. Lab. Readings in theory, analysis of scripts, and 
problems in directing plays for their oral and visual value as theatre. 

470A3 Diracting Lab (1,1) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 370A, B or the consent of instructor. Requires concurrent 
enrollment in Theatre 470A, B directing lecture. Each student directs public 
performances of a one-act play. B — Each student directs public performances of 
two-act plays, or equivalent. (3 hours laboratory) 

471 Kabwki Tboatra (3) 

Prerequisite: Upper division standing or consent of instructor. A study of the 
history and development of the Kabuki Theatre, emphasizing the three types of 
Kabuld plays (Jidaimano, Sewamono, Shosagoto) and theories of produedon of 
Kabuki drama. 

472 Amarican Tkootra (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 271, 272, or the equivalent and junior standing. The 
development of the art of theatre in the United States from colonial dmes to the 
present day; its place and potendalides as a force in a democradc society. 


239 


Theatre 


473A.i World Dromo (3^) 

Reading, discussion and interpretation of great plays of the world in translation, 
emphasizing them as literature for performance. First semester from ancient Greece 
through mid-19th century; second semester, from Ibsen to the present. (Same as 
Comparative Literature 473 A3) 

475A3 History of tho Thootro (34) 

Elxamination of the evolution of all major aspects of world theatre. A — From 
ancient Greece to the end of the 18th century; B — 19th and 20th centuries. 

477 Sonior Sominor in Contomporory Critical Tochniquos (3) 

Prerequisite: (Consent of instructor. Introduction to major contemporary modes 
of criticism and their application to selected plays and area productions. 

47tA4 Rohoorsol and Porformonco (1-3) 

Acting in stage productions, major technical assignments in stage productions, 
or participation in television or children’s theatre productions. Any upper division 
or graduate student who is interested should enroll. This class cannot be uken 
concurrently with Theatre 468 A3. (More than 3 hours production per unit) 

480 Radio and Tolovition Production and Diroction (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 370, 380, or consent of instructor. Theory and practice 
in the production of radio and television programs and announcements: the plan- 
ning, organizing, directing, rehearsing, performing, recording and editing of tele- 
vision programs and announcements. (1 hour lecture, 4 hours activity) 

486 Advoncod Thootricol Lighting (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 386 or consent of instructor. The design and technology 
of lighting. Student uoU be prepared to design for the stage, dance, pageant, dis- 
play, film and television. Student will do at least one major lighting project as 
part of the course. (6 hours activity) (Same as Art 486) 

488A^8 Advoncod Scon# Dosign (34) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 286, or equivalent beginning work in design. Lecture in 
scene design with emphasis on style, ornamentation and illusion leading to prac- 
tical problems in designing for the stage and television. (Same as Art 488A3) 

491 Sonior Sominon Grook Trogody (3) 

(Same as Comparative Literature 491) 

499 Indopondonf Study (1-3) 

Open to advanced students in theatre with the consent of the department chair- 
man. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Groduoto Study in Thootro (3) 

Introduction to methodological problems in graduate research. Location of source 
materials, including library and original data; research and project design and 
execution; interpretation of researches. 

501 Groduoto Sominon Advoncod Thootro Thoory and Approciotion (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 500. Directed research with emphasis on the relationship 
between historical backgrounds and developments in the theatre and the student’s 
area of concentration. 

511 Groduoto Sominor in Intorprototion (3) 

Prerequisites: Consent of instructor. The hisorical and philosophical backgrounds 
in the development of interpretation and its relationship to contemporary theory 
and practice. (Same as Speech Communication 511) 


240 


Theatre iducafion 


571 OraduQf* S^mlncir: Mofer Writers (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering Shake- 
spe^e. The student should consult his adviser and the schedule of classes for the 
section appropriate to his program. (Same as English 571) 

572 Production Planning in Thoatro Arts (3) 

History and philosophy of production problems in theatre arts. Organization of 
the college theatre as it relates to the total college program. Planning of the 
production within the limitations of budgets and physic^ facilities. 

573 Oraduoto Sominor, Litorary Gonros (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Permission of instructor. As appropriate to the specialized research 
and publications of the instructor, this course will offer directed research and 
writing, group discussion and lectures covering such major literary types as: 
tragedy, comedy and historical drama. With consent of the adviser, this course 
may be repeated with different content for additional credit. (Same as English 572) 

597 Projact (3) 

Development and presentation of a creative project in the area of concentration 
beyond regularly offered coursework. May be repeated to a maximum of six units. 

598 Ttiaiis (3) 

Development and presentation of a thesis in the area of concentration beyond 
regularly offered coursework. 

599 Indapandant Oraduote Raiaorch (1-3) 

Open to graduate students in theatre with the consent of the department chair- 
man. May be repeated for credit. 

THEATRE EDUCATION 

442 Taaching Thoatra In tha Sacondary School (2) 

Prerequisites: Education 340, Education 311, admission to teacher education, 
senior standing or consent of the instructor. The student who has not had 
teaching experience must register concurrently in Education 449. See page 131 
under Secondary Education for description of Standard Teaching Credential pro- 
gram. Objectives, methods, and materials including audiovisual instruction for 
teaching in secondary schools. 

484 Iducatienol Talavition Production (3) 

Theory and practice in the activities, mediods of lesson preparation, and pres- 
entation of educational television productions. 

749 Studont Tooching in Thoatro in tho Socondary School and Sominar (6) 

See pages 269-270 for description and prerequisites. 


241 


SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 
AND ECONOMICS 


ACCOUNTING 

301 A3 Actounting (33) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 A must be uken before taking Accounting 201B. 
Accounting concepts and techniques essential to the administration of a business 
enterprise; analyzing and recording financial transactions; preparation of financial 
statements; analysis and interpretation of financial statements; introduction to man> 
ufacturing accounts and reports. 

300 Accounting Fundomontols (3) (Opon only to groduoto studontt) 

The basic fundamentals of accounting as they apply to the accumulation, orga- 
nization, and interpretation of financial and quantitative data relevant to the activi- 
ties of the corporate business enterprise. 

301 A3 Intormodioto Accounting (33) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B. The quantification, recording, and presentation 
of balance sheet and income statement items with particular emphasis on the cor- 
porate type of organization; statement of application of funds; cash flow statement; 
basic concepts of accounting theory; interpretation of financial statements. 

302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite; Accounting 201B. The development of accounting information for 
management of manufacturing enterprises; cost records; cost behavior and alloca- 
tion; standard costs; and an introduction to cost control. 

303 Oovornmontnl Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: one course in accounting. A consideration of the accounts and 
reports of nonprofit institutions, municipalities, state and federal governments; 
organization, procedures, budgets. 

304 Monogoriol Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 20 IB. This course is intended for students whose area of 
concentration is not accounting. Analysis, interpretation, and application of ac- 
counting information for managerial decision making; budgets and budgetary con- 
trol; special-purpose reports; differential cost analyses. 

307 Distribution Costs (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 20 IB and Marketing 351. The development of quanti- 
tative measures for marketing activity; costs of distributing through different chan- 
nels of distribution, advertising vs. personal selling, and movement activities; devel- 
opment of sales budgets, standard costs, and the analysis of actual performance in 
the light of budgets and standards. (Same as Marketing 457) 

303 Fodoral Incomo Tax (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201B. Basic consideration of the history, theory, and 
accounting aspects of federal income taxation. 

401 Advancod Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 301B. A study of partnerships, statements for special 
purposes, receiverships, consolidated financial statements, branch accounting and 
foreign exchange. 


242 


Accounting 


407 Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301B and 302. Nature of an audit, auditing standards 
and procedures, audit reports; professional ethics and responsibilities of the inde- 
pendent public accountant; introduction to internal auditing. 

406 Cost Control (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 302. A study of current and persistent problems in cost 
accounting; theories of cost allocation and absorption; flexible budgeting; responsi- 
bility accounting; and distribution cost control. 

407 Intogrotod Doto Proeossing Systoms (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 20lB or 300 and QM 264 or 265. Integrated systems 
for the collection, processing, and transmission of information; aspects of the in- 
formation service function; feasibility studies; case studies of operating systems. 

403 Problams in Taxation (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308. Research in problems of taxation with emphasis 
on income taxes as they relate to corporations, partnerships and fiduciaries. 

409 C.PJ^. Problomt and Thoory (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 401, or consent of the instructor. Selected problems and 
questions as found in the uniform CJ^A. examination; preparation, analysis and 
revision of financial statements; assets, liabilities and ownership equities; income 
determination; cost accountings, governmental and institutional accounting; ac- 
counting theory. 

499 Indapandant Study (3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval by die department chairman. Open 
to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed independent in- 
quiry. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Saminar in Industrial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 20 IB, or 300, graduate standing and consent of the 
instructor. Accounting information for industrial management; elements of manu- 
facturing cost; cost systems; standard costs; cost reports; distribution cost analysis. 

501 Sominar in Adminiftrativo Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 302, or 304, or 500, graduate standing and consent 
of the instructor. Accounting, financial, and other quantitative data for managerial 
decision-making; long-term and short-term profit planning; budgetary control; 
cost analysis and special reports; financial analysis and planning; the financial and 
taxation aspects of business decisions. 

502 Sooiioar in Accounting Thoory (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301B, graduate standing and consent of the instructor. 
The concepts and theory of accounting; the effects of professional, governmental, 
business, and social forces on the evolution of accounting theory. 

503 Sominar in Contomporary Financial Accounting Problomt (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 502. A critical examination of the current problems 
and areas of controversy in financial accounting. 

504 Sominar in Contomporary Managerial Accounting Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 500 or 302, graduate standing and consent of the 
instructor. A critical examination of the current problems and areas of contro- 
versy in managerial accounting. 


243 


Business Adminlsfroflon 

SOS seminar in Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 402 and graduate standing. Auditing theory and prac- 
tices; professional ethics; auditing standards; SEC and stock exchange regulations; 
auditor’s legal liability; statement trends and techniques. 

S97 Projuct (3) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. 

sot Tfmtis (3-0) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. Student will 
select and have approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and 
must present himself for a defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

S99 Indupundunt Oraduotu R«»«arch (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing, the consent of the instructor, and approval by 
the department chairman. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue 
independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

407 iwsinusf and iconomic Rasaorck (3) 

Prerequisite: Bus. Ad. core, senior standing, and consent of instructor. For ad- 
vanced students who wish to investigate business and economic problems in spe- 
cialized areas. Application of research methods: selection and identification of a 
problem, determining a method of approach, collection and analysis of relevant 
data, eliciting conclusions and solutions. 

S9S Modarn Capifalitm (3) 

Prerequisite: Graduate standing and consent of instructor. The changing role of 
capitalism and its control in the United States, European countries and Japan. The 
trends as to Government policy and action, relative to private ownership and co- 
ordinated economic planning. 


ECONOMICS 


100A PrincipUs of iconomicf (3) 

The first half of a two-semester sequence. An introduction to the principles and 
analysis of economic policy. Emphasizes economic stability and growth and the 
role of public policy. 

1003 Principlos of Economics (3) 

The second half of a tu’o-semester sequence. Continuation of an introduction to 
the principles of economic analysis and policy including the central problem of 
scarcity. Emphasizes resource allocation and income distribution, international 
economics, comparative economic systems, and the role of public policy. 

200 PrincipUs of Economics (5) 

Prerequisite: open only to junior transfers. (Duplicates 100A3). An introduction 
to the principles of economic analysis and policy including the central problem of 
scarcity, basic economic institutions of the United States, resource allocation and 
income distribution, economic stability and growth, and the role of public policy. 

201 Hi* Amarican Economy (3) 

A survey of the basic economic concepts and processes of a private enterprise 
economy. Included is a consideration of such topics as resource allocation, income 
distribution, problems of economic stability and growth and the appropriate role 
of ^vemment in a private enterprise society. Not open to students majoring in 
business administration and economics. 


244 


Economics 


300 Bofic Economics (3) (Opon only to graduate students) 

A concentrated study of the principles of economic analysis and policy and the 
basic economic institutions of the United States. 

310 Intermediate Microeconomic Anolysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100A,B or 200 or equivalent. An analysis and evaluation 
of (1) rational decisionmaking behavior of consumers and firms and (2) price 
and output determination in markets; with special emphasis placed on the use of 
cases and problems to illustrate the application of the analysis to the contemporary 
scene. 

320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100A3 or 200 or equivalent. The explanation and 
evaluation of the determinants of the level and fluctuations of such economic 
^K^egates as national income and employment, with stress placed on the use of 
problems involving the application of analytical tools to modem macroeconomic 
issues. 

330 Comparative Economic Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Elconomics 100A,B, or 200 or equivalent. An analytical comparison 
of unplanned and planned systems of economic organization as to their theoretical 
foundations, existing economic institutions, and achievements and failures; capital- 
ism, socialism, communism, and fascism will be examined as exemplified by the 
United States, England, Russia and prewar Germany. 

331 Tlia Soviet Economy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100A3, or 200 or equivalent. An analytical evaluation of 
Soviet economic development including the structure and performance of the 
Soviet economy and problems of planning and control. 

^2 Economic Problems of Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100A3, or 200 or equivalent. Analysis of the natural 
resources, population, agricultural, industrial, transportation, communications, mone- 
tary, banking, etc. problems of Asia, ix. China, Japan, etc. and the Asian subconti- 
nent. The relations of non-economic problems to the economic is considered in 
detail. 

W3 Economic Development: Analysis and Case Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 A 3, or 200 or equivalent. An examination of the 
processes of economic growth with si>ecial references to developing areas. Con- 
siders capital formation, resource allocation, relation to the world economy, eco- 
nomic planning and institutional factors, with appropriate case studies. 

^34 Economics of Povorty, Race and Discrimination <3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100A3 or 200 or equivalent; Economics 201 will be 
accepted as the prerequisite with permission of the instructor. An economic 
analysis of the problems and policies dealing with poverty, race and discrimina- 
tion. A field investigation or project is required of each student. 

®50 American Economic History (3) (Formerly 323) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100A3, or 200 or eqiuvalent. The development of 
American economic institutions with special emphasis on economic problems, eco- 
nomic growth, and economic welfare. 

331 European Economic History (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100A3, or 200 or equivalent. The evolution of European 
economic institutions and their relation to the development of industry, commerce, 
transportation, and finance in the principal European countries. 


245 


Economics 


360 Economics of Location (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100A3» or 200 or equivalent. The theory and principles 
underlying the location of economic activity. 

361 Urban Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100A3» or 200 or equivalent. Theory and analysis of the 
urban economy, urban economic problems and policy. 

36S Public Einanco (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100A,B, or 200 or equivalent. A study of government 
finance at the federal, state, and local levels with particular reference to adminis- 
trative problems of public finance, the ethical aspects of taxation, and the impact 
of taxation and spending on resource allocation and income distribution. 

370 Economics of Rosoorch, Dovolopmont and Tochnologicol Chongo (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100A3» or 200 or equivalent. Elxaminadon of the im- 
portance of R & D and technological change in the economy; concepts, issues, and 
major figures in the study of economics of technology; analytical techniques for the 
assessment of technological change; and evaluation of the impacts of technological 
change. 

410 Govommont and businass (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310. An economic study of business organization, con- 
duct and performance followed by an analysis of the rationale and impact of 
public policy on various segments of business and business activities, including the 
regulated industries, sick industries, and antitrust policy. 

411 Infarnational Trada (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310. An examination of the theory or international 
trade and the means and significance of balance of payments adjustments, with 
an analysis of past and present developments in international commercial and 
monetary policy. (Same as Marketing 421) 

412 Labor Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310. An analysis of the basic economic and institutional 
influences operating in labor markets. Considers relevant aspects of resource allo- 
cation, income distribution, economic stability, and growth. 

420 Monoy and Banking (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320. A study of the structure and operation of com- 
mercial banks and financial institutions including a consideration of the impact 
of money and capital market developments on economic activity. (Same as 
Finance 324.) 

421 Monatary and Fiscal Policy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320. A study of the techniques of monetary and fiscal 
policy and an appraisal of their relative roles in promoting economic stability and 
growth. 

440 Introduction to Economotrics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310, 320 and QM 362. Development of advanced sta- 
tistical methods and their application in economic research. Advanced concepts in 
model building; development of different types of economic models. The use and 
effect of economic models in public policy. 

441 Introduction to Mathomoticol Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310, 320 and QM 362. Selected topics in economic 
theory, drawn from microeconomics and macroeconomics. Content varying from 


246 


iconomics 


year to year but with emphasis on constrained optimization problems and rational 
decision making. 

450 History of Economics Thought (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 and 320. A study of the development of economic 
thought as reflected in the evolution of major schools of thought and of leading 
individual economists as they influenced economic thought and policy. 

499 Indopondont Study (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics major or concentration, senior standing and approval 
by the department chairman. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring 
to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

503 Advoncud Microuconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 200 or 100A3» and 310. An advanced theoretical for- 
mulation of the principles of the determination of prices and outputs of goods 
and productive services in a market system. Topics include: consumer choice, de- 
mand, production, cost, the equilibrium of the firm and the market, and distribu- 
tion. 

S03 Advancad Macroaconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 200 or 100A3» and 320. Advanced theory of the de- 
termination of the level and fluctuations of real and money income, and the 
forces underlying economic growth. 

505 Mathodology in Economic Rasaarch Saminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 502 or 503 and concurrent enrollment in Economics 
503 or 502. A systematic examination of the philosophy and methodology of eco- 
nomic analysis and research. Topics include theory construction, verification and 
measurement, and the problems associated with policy formulation. 

506 Saminar in Micro- and Macrooconomic Applications (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 502, 503, and 505. Complements the study of methodol- 
ogy in economic research. Students select approved topics and via independent 
investigation and seminar presentation and critique develop their analytical and 
research abilities, culminating with an acceptable paper. 

310 Compotition, Monopoly and Public Policy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 300 or equivalent. Seminar devoted to an exammadon 
of the economic implicadons of various forms of market structure and business 
conduct and considers the applicadon of public policy to various segments of 
business and business aedvides, including andtrust policy and reguladon of busi- 
ness. (Not open to Economics MA. candidates.) 

311 Economic Problems and Public Policy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 300 or equivalent. Seminar devoted to an examinadon 
of the nature and implication of the major economic problems facing the economy 
^d an evaluadon of current and alternative policies for their solution. Problems 
considered will include price level stabilization, balance of payments equilibrium, 
economic growth, and cyclical and technological unemployment. (Not open to 
Economics MA. candidates.) 

312 Comparotiva Economics Saminar (3) 

Prerequisite: Exonomics 3(X) or equivalent. A comparative study of various 
analytical and prescriptive approaches to economic problems of scarcity, develop- 
ment, fiscal and monetary policy, planning and poverty. (Not open to Economics 
MA. candidates.) 


247 


Finance 


596 S«l«ct«d Topics in Economic Analysis and Policy (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 200 or 100A3» 310 and 320. Seminar: Selected topics 
in economic analysis and policy will be covered in depth, with special emphasis 
on contemporary research and materials. May be repeated for credit. 

597 Projocts (3) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. 

59i Thosis (3-6) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. Student will 
select and have approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and 
must present himself for a defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

S99 Indapandanf Groduata Ratoarch (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing, the consent of the instructor, and approval by 
the department chairman. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue 
independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

FINANCE 


324 Monay and Banking (3) 

(Same as Economics 420) 

330 Bwsinatt Pinanca (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B or 200. Financing business enterprises; financial 
planning and control; analysis of alternative sources and uses of combinations of 
short-, intermediate- and long-term debt and equity. Cost of capital. Study of 
capital investment decisions; capital budget analysis and valuation; working capital 
and capital structure management. Problems and case preparations. 

331 Financial Analysis (3) 

Prerequsite: Finance 330. Development of techniques for internal financial con- 
trol and their application to business situations. Capital costs and optimal capital 
investment decisions. Budgets and forecasts for projection of long-term profitable 
operations. Analysis of current financial models. Group problems and case studies. 

333 Parsonal Financ* (3) 

Prerequisite: None. (This course may not be taken for credit by students electing 
the finance area of concentration.) Financial problems of the household in allo- 
cating resources and planning expenditures. Consideration of housing, insurance, 
installment buying, medical care, savings and investments. 

334 PrincipUs of Insurance (3) 

Principles of life, casualty and liability insurance, individual and group insurance 
programs; methods of establishing risks and rates. 

335 Security Investments (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 330. Principles underlying the selection and management 
of portfolios, anal>"sis of different types of securities; the role of mutual funds, 
investment trusts and other investment institutions. Group problems and case 
studies. 

336 Principles and Practices of Real Estate (3) 

Sur\’ey of urban real estate principles and practices; structure and growth of 
cities; economic implication to real estate markets. Trends and factors affecting 
real property values, real estate financing and real estate law. Integrative cases 
and projects. Study of current urban models used in urban development. Group 
problems and case studies. 


248 


Finance 


337 Real Estate Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 336 or consent of the instructor. Sources and uses of capital 
in financing real estate transactions. Financial institutions and their effect on credit. 
Money and capital market conditions and their effect on credit availability and cost. 
Instruments of real estate finance. Real estate as an investment medium. Group 
problems and case studies. 

333 Real Estate Valuation (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 336 or consent of instructor. Theory of real property value, 
historical development; methods used in urban and rural property appraisals; special 
purpose appraisals. Group problems and field work required. 

401 Real Estate Research ( 2 ) (Formerly 339) 

Prerequisites: Finance 336 and 337 or 338 and concurrent enrollment for 1 unit 
of Finance 499. Group problems and individual projects in the use of applicable 
research techniques in solving problems related to real property. 

42S Commercial Bank and Financial Institution Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 330 and 331. Application of analytical techniques to the 
solution of financial institution problems. Major financial intermediaries and the 
broad range of decision-making problems they face: function, management opera- 
tions, loan analysis, investment policies, and liquidity problems. Regulation and its 
effect on management operations. Cases, group problems and projects. 

431 Capital and Money Markets (3) 

Role of capital and money markets in the American economy; markets for 
new corporate and government issues; secondary markets; interrelation of financial 
institutions; factors influencing yields and security prices. 

433 Problems in Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331. Comprehensive case studies including group problems 
of estimating funds requirements, long-term financial planning, controlling and 
evaluating cash flows, and financing acquisitions and mergers. (2 hours lecture, 2 
hours activity) 

435 Security Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 335, QM 361 or consent of instructor. An advanced 
securities analysis course (with computer applications) developing various models 
of security valuation. A simulated portfolio management game is played during the 
latter part of the course. 

439 Social Insurance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 330. Financial problems and policies in old age pensions, 
health insurance, unemployment insurance, workman’s compensation, and private 
Pension plans. 

499 Independent Study (1-J) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval by the department chairman. Open 
to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed independent in- 
quiry. May be repeated for credit. 

332 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 433 or consent of instructor. Emphasis in this course is 
on the analysis of the financial decision-making process. Areas of emphasis include: 
nianagement and control of current assets; evaluation of cash flows; financial fore- 
casting and fund requirements; capital budgeting; cost of capital; dividend poli- 
cies; and merger, acquisition, and valuation problems. Current financial theory 
and models. CaU studies and seminar presentations. 


249 


Management 

Seminar in Financial Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 532. Optimal financing and asset administration; advanced 
techniques of capital budgeting; application of analytical methods to the adminis- 
tration of the finance function of the business firm. 

534 Sominar in Financial Markots (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 431 or consent of the instructor. Structure and operation 
of major financial institutions; portfolio composition, price-cost problems, and 
market behavior; analysis of financial intermediation and interrelation of financial 
institutions and markets. 

535 Sominar In Invostmont Managomont (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 435 or consent of instructor. Problems of investment and 
portfolio managment; concepts of risk evaluation and investment criteria; analysis 
of interest rate movements; investment timing; valuation of securities; regulation 
of securities markets. 

536 Sominar In Risk Managomont (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 334 and graduate standing. Techniques of risk manage- 
ment, structure of risk management, insurance planning and control, risk man- 
agement programs. 

537 Sominar In Roal Istato Invostmont (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 330, 336 or equivalent and graduate standing. Problems of 
real estate investment; concepts of evaluation and investment criteria; analysis of 
real property values; real estate development and financing. 

597 Projoct (3) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. 

593 Thosis (3-6) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. Student will 
select and have approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and 
must present himself for a defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Indopondont Graduate Research (1^) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing, consent of the instructor and approval by the 
department chairman. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue inde- 
pendent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

MANAGEMB^T 

341 Principles of Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 2(X) or 100A3t or consent of the instructor. Fundamen- 
tals of management universal to all organizations; covers such studies as planning, 
organizing, activating and controlling. 

342 Production Operations Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 341 and QM 265. Fundamentals of the production 
functions in business and industry. Dynamic analysis at the production level of; 
systems, organizations, analytical models and methods, product and process de- 
velopment, and management information systems. Case studies stress realism in 
management problem solving approaches. 

343 Porsonoel Managomont (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 341 or consent of the instructor. A study of the per- 
sonnel function, its activities, and its problems. Elmphasis upon management’s re- 
sponsibilities for selection, development, and effective utilization of personnel. 


250 


Management 


346 6utiii«fi Law (3) 

The philosophy, insdtudons and role of the law in business and society, with 
emphasis upon the functions of courts and attorneys, and upon case studies in the 
areas of contracts and corporation law. 

347 3utin«ss Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 346. The philosophy, insdtudons and role of the law 
in commercial transacdons, with emphasis upon the uniform commercial code and 
case studies in the areas of sales, security devices, personal property, bailment and 
negodable instruments. 

344 Eusinass Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 346. The philosophy, insdtudons and role of the law 
in business relationships, with emphasis upon case studies in the areas of agency, 
partnership, real property, mortgages, trusts, wills, community property, insurance, 
suretyship and bankniptcy. 

349 Raal Estota Law (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 346 or equivalent area; Finance 336. Law of real prop- 
erty; types of ownership; ddes and estates; transfers of interests; encumbrances; 
casements; fixtures; land s^e contracts; recording; zoning; leases; responsibilides of 
real estate brokers. 

441 Laber-Managament Ralations (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 341 or consent of the instructor. The course provides 
an understanding of the impact of labor-management reladons upon later, manage- 
ment, and the public. Proper grievance procedure, collecdve bargaining, and the 
settlement of disputes are among the subjects that are examined. 

442 Labor Law (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 341, 346 or consent of the instructor. The ^dy of 
later law and its effects upon American society. Federal and state legisladon, and 
acdons of regulatory bodies are explored by means of case studies. 

443 iohavioral Scionco for Managomont (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 341 or consent of the instructor. A seminar designed 
to provide the student an opportunity to study cases and current literature in the 
human problems of work situadons. Special emphasis is placed upon concepts in 
modvadon, leadership, individual differences, organizadonal health, and adapdng 
to change. Group problems offer a pracdcal approach to these areas. 

444 Managomont of Systoms (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 342 and QM 361. The technology for managing pro- 
grams, enterprises, and organizadons as cybemedc systems. The course investigates 
the design and control of systems appropriate for product, project and program 
levels of analysis. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

445 Rrodwetion and Managomont Porformanco Control (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 342 and QM 361. Quandudve approaches toward as- 
suring performance control (integrating cost, schedule and techmeal progress) in 
production operations and other enterprise activities. The methods of collecting, 
evaluating and using control information in real time. The integ^don of cost and 
schedule into a single management control tool. Synthesis of effective control sys- 
tems through individual and group projects. 

446 Monagarial Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 361, Economics 310 and Management 341, or consent of the 
instructor. A study of the relationship of management tools to applied economics 


251 


Management 

and statistics in the decisionmaking process: the use of cases and group problems 
to study the true economic meaning of cost, demand, supply, price, product and 
competition. 

447 Manag«m«nt D*<ition Gom«s (3) 

Prerequisites: The business administration core or consent of the instructor. A 
simulation of an oligopolistic industry to provide the student with an opportunity, 
through group problems, to use statistics and other analytical tools to make man- 
agerial decisions in the functional areas of management. (2 hours lecture*, 2 hours 
activity) 

449 Seminar in Bwainnss Fellcint (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201A,B, Finance 330, Management 341, Marketing 351, 
and senior standing. The seminar is limited to seniors and graduate students. 
Through an analysis of integrative cases and problems the student is encouraged 
to use his business and liberal arts training. Individual and team efforts resolve de- 
cision-making policies and actions. 

499 lnd«p«nd*nt Study (3) 

Prerequisites: management concentration, senior standing, and approval by the 
department chairman. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue 
directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

541 Suminor in Proiuct Opurationt Problum Solving (3) 

Prerequisites: Graduate standing and consent of instructor. A seminar designed 
to focus attention on application of system analysis and other dynamic techniques 
to current operations problems. Special projects arc used to demonstrate applica- 
tion of concepts. 

542 Sominar in Labor Rolations (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of the instructor. Theories and 
philosophies of union-management relations in modem industrial society with at- 
tention to trends in nonindustrial organizations. Issues in collective bargaining 
contract administration, labor law, and government regulation. Discussion and anal- 
ysis of literature. 

543 5ominar in Porsonnol Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and the consent of the instructor. The seminar 
provides the graduate student with an opponunity to study cases, problems, and 
significant literature in the field in order to develop a comprehensive understanding 
of personnel administration and human relations. 

544 5#minar in Organizational Bohavior and Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of the instructor. The analysis of 

human behavior in organization, studies in organizational theories, and administra- 
tive action. 

545 5ominar in Rosoarch and Dovolopmont Profoct Managomont (3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Elxamination of the management of technical 
activities within the firm: selection, planning and control or research and develop- 
ment projects. Sur\’ey of methods of assessing the economic worth of project pro- 
posals as related to the firm’s objectives; planning and scheduling of technical 
resources; authority relationships and structures of pure project and matrix orga- 
nizations; specification and integration of cost, schedule and technical performance 
measures; control room technology*. Group problem solving and current literature 
analyses provide focus on contemporary developments in the field. 


252 


Marketing 


541 Seminar in Intnmofional Mnnagnmnnt (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of the instructor. Problems in man< 
agerial qualifications and training, political structure within and without the opera- 
tions, foreign receptivity to United States business, organizing and controlling the 
international firm. Management in selected countries is examined. 

549 S«miiior in Policy Planning and Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of the instructor. Planning, im- 
plementing, and controlling policy strategies to achieve objectives are considered. 
The executive's role in the overall operations of the enterprise and its resources are 
examined, and supported by cases, literature and training techniques in practice. 

597 Profoct (3) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. 

593 Thofis (3-4) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. Student will 
select and have approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and 
must present himself for a defense of the thesis before a facility committee. 

599 Indapandant Oraduata Ratoarch (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing, consent of instructor and approval by department 
chairman. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independent 
inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

MARKETING 


351 Prindplas of Markating (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200. Marketing organization and methods for the indi- 
vidual business with serious ccMisideradon of the social and economic aspects of 
the distribution task. Topics include the consumer, his place and his problems in 
the marketing area; marketing functions, institutions, and policies; legal and 
political environment for marketing activity; and an evaluation of the present 
marketing system. 

352 Principlaf of Ratalling (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Retail problems of location; organization; buying, 
selling media and methods; pricing; and merchandising. Elmphasis will be placed 
upon operating procedures and control, planning, budgeting, and costs. 

353 Markating Adminiftration (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Major problems facing the marketing executive, 
including product planning, pricing, market and analysis, sales potentials, market- 
ing organization, and administration of the sales force. 

354 Principlaf of Advortising (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The management of the advertising function, in- 
cluding the role of advertising in marketing strategy, budgetary considerations, 
allocation among media, measurement of effectiveness, administration and control, 
wd its economic and social implications. 

355 Crodit and Crodit Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The general nature and functions of credit, credit 
instruments; the operation of the credit department; sources of credit information; 
acceptance of credit risk; csublishment of credit limits; and the problem of col- 
lections. 


253 


Marketing 


356 Cr«€rtiv* Motivation in Markoting (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Personal salesmanship and the application of the 
findings of the behavioral sciences to selling and group dynamics as they relate to 
the creative and promotional aspects of the business. 

357 Industrial Purchasing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The principles and practices of purchasing for 
industrial organizations. Major buying policies, sources of materials, quantity and 
quality considerations, and the relation to production cost. 

353 Physical Distribution (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Consideration of the logistics problems of physically 
distributing products and the principles and practices of solving them. An evalua- 
tion of the transportation and storage of products based on considerations of cost, 
dme, and service. 

453 Markoting Rosoarch (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and QM 361. The application of scientific methodol- 
ogy as an aid in solving problems of product planning, pricing, promotion, and 
distribution. Practical application is emphasized through class projects and case 
problems. (2 hours lecture; 2 hours activity) 

453 Markating to the Government (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The marketing of defense and nondefense products 
to the government. The nature and administration of contractual agreements with 
government agencies. 

454 Advertising Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 354 or consent of the instructor, plus senior standing. 
Management of the advertising function in the marketing program. A study of the 
formulation of advertising policies, involving primarily an analysis of cases dealing 
with the role of advertising in marketing, the definition and choice of advertising 
objectives, strategy, appropriation policy, media selection, evaluation of advertising 
results, and the organization and implementation of the advertising program. Cases, 
sinmladons, and readings. 

457 Salas Analysis and Control (3) (Formoriy 307) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B and Marketing 351. The development of quanta- 
dve measures for marketing aedvity; costs of distributing through different 
channels of distribudon, advertising versus personal selling, and movement aedvi- 
des; development of sales budgets, standard costs, and the analysis of actual per- 
formance in the light of budgets and standards, (^me as Accoundng 307) 

453 Intomationol Marketing (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and Marketing Administradon 353; or consent of 
instructor. Presents an analydeal framework for studying the development of 
domesdc marketing systems in the context of overall economic growth. Emphasis 
is given to U. S. firms involved in intemadonal marketing operadons. 

459 Marketing Problems (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351, 353 and 452; or consent of instructor. Case studies 
of problems facing the markedng execudve; idendficadon and analysis of the 
probleqis; selecdon and evaluadon of altemadve soludons; and implementadon of 
recommended soludons. 

499 Independent Study (3) 

Prerequisites: Markedng concentration, senior standing, and approval by the 
department chairman. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue 
directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 


254 


Marketing 


551 S«minor in Mcirknting Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and graduate standing. A managerial approach to 
the major marketing problems faced by industry: e.g., definition of and organiza- 
tion for the marketing task; demand analysis; decisions concerning product, price, 
promotion, and trade channeb. A firm’s adjustment to its marketing environment 
with emphasb on competitive strategy. The case approach supplemented with 
simulations and topical readings. 

552 Sominor in Pricing and Prico Policy (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 551. A critical analysb of the pricing problems of a firm 
with alternative choices and diverse objectives. The pricing function will be 
examined from the standpoints of economic theory, management science, business 
practices, legal constraints, and ethical considerations. Relationship of pricing objec- 
tives, policies, strategies, and methods to market behavior and the goab of the firm. 
Pricing policies among businesses and their economic and social implications. 

553 Sominor in Product Planning (3) 

Prerequbite: Marketing 551. A course designed to assist marketing management 
in the formulation and execution of marketing plans for new and existing products. 
An examination of the management decision areas and procedures required for 
search, preliminary evaluation, development and testing, and commercialization of 
products. Particular emphasb on solving problems arising from product programs 
developed to assure corporate growth. 

354 Sominor in Promotion (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 551 or instructor’s approval. A critical analysb of the 
promotion mix as employed by small, medium and large business organizations 
in their efforts to optimize profitable operations. Particular emphasb will be given 
to: determination of promotional goab, planning, budgeting, and controlling pro- 
motional programs; and measuring the effectiveness of the promotional effort. 

355 Sominor in Marketing Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 452 and 551 or consent of instructor. The application 
of scientific method to marketing deebions; research methodology and modeb; 
decision-making applications. 

356 Seminar in Consumer Behavior (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 551. A critical analysb of theories underlying consumer 
behavior. The orientation b on understanding and predicting consumer behavior. 

559 Sominor in Marketing Thought and Concepts (3) 

Prerequbite: Marketing 551. Application of theoretical concepts in the behav- 
ioral sciences, managerial sciences and quantitative methods to the development of 
theories and modeb in marketing. The emphasb b on the interdisciplinary ex- 
change of ideas relating to marketing. Evolving concepts and theories in marketing 
we appraised. May be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (3) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. 

593 Thesis (3-6) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. Student will 
select and have approved a thesb topic, show evidence of original re^arch, and 
must present himself for a defense of the thesb before a faculty committee. 

599 Indopondont Graduato Rosoorch (3) 

Prerequbites: graduate standing, the consent of the instructor, and approval by 
the department chairman. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue 
independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 


255 


Quanfititfive Methods 


QUANTITATIVE A\ETHODS 

264 Computer Proproiwiming (1) 

Introduction to problem-oriented languages of computers. The solving of prob- 
lems using computer programming. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

265 Computer Prograitiming and Applications (3) 

Prerequisite: two years of high school algebra. Computer programming. Intro- 
duction to matrix and set notation. Introduction to discrete probability. Descrip- 
tive statistics. Computer programming solutions of probability and statistical prob- 
lems. (2 hours lecture; 2 hours activity) 

361 iusinofs and Economic Statistics (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 265 or equivalent. Collection, analysis, and presentation of 
statistical data. Random sampling, estimation, and hypothesis testing. Introduction 
to regression and correlation. 

362 Introduction to Quantitativo Mothods in Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics lOOA, B, QM 361 and Economics 310 (may be taken 
concurrently). An introduction to basic mathematical tools and their application 
to economic theory. The nature of econometric models and the concept of identifi- 
cation. Estimation and evaluation of simple single equation linear models and an 
introduction to such problems as autocorrelation and muldcoUinearity. Not open 
to students who have taken QM 462. 

364 Compvfar Logic and Programming (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 264 or equivalent. An introductory survey of automata theory, 
switching theory, the organization of modem computing equipment and nonin- 
teractive machine language programming. 

446 Compufor Programming Thoory (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 264 and Math 150A or equivalent. Selected topics of concern 
to the computer programmer from the fields of numerical analysis and simulation 
theory with FORTRAN applications. 

461 Advancod Statistics (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 361 and Math 150A or equivalent. An advanced treatment of 
the theory and application of the topics covered in QM 361, using the methods of 
the calculus where appropriate. 

462 Mathomatical Modols in Businoss and Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 361. Construction and application of mathematical models to 
business decision-making problems. Ellementar>' mathematical optimization models. 

463 Introduction to Monagomont Scionco (3) 

Prerequisites: Mathematics 150A and QM 361. Introduction to the basic concepts 
of Management Science and its relationship to economics and decision theory. 
Topics surveyed include optimization in continuous models, linear programming, 
queueing and inventory models, d>'namic programming and decision making in 
the business environment. 

464 Information Structuros, Informotion Storago and Rotrioval (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 364 or consent of instructor. An examination of modem 
computer hardware, the techniques of programming it, and the language in 
which such programs are written. Includes discussion of memory protection, 
interrupt systems, recursive programming, list-strucnired-languages and userori- 
ented languages. 


256 


Quanflfttfive Methods 


465 Linsar Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 361 (may be taken concurrently). The theory and applica- 
tions of linear programming. Topics include: Linear programming and the Simplex 
Algorithm; starting procedures; the dual and economic interpretation; parametric 
programming and sensitivity analysis; transportation and assignment problems; 
dynamic programming. 

467 StoHfticol Quolity Control (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 361. Shewhart Control Charts for variables* percent defective, 
and defects. Tolerances, process capacility, specialized control charts, and batch 
processing problems. Bayesian aspects of process control. 

469 Roliobility Statistics (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 461 or equivalent. Statistical principles of reliability; hazard 
functions; point and interval estimation of reliability; reliability demonstration; 
growth modeb. 

499 Indopondont Stvdy (3) 

Prerequisites: quantitative concentration, senior standing, and approval by the 
department chairman. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue 
directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

560 Oparations Rasaarch (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 150A and QM 361. An examination of the nattire and scope 
of Operations Research, with emphasis on the techniques of model construction. 
Topics surveyed include optimization in continuous models, linear programming, 
queueing and scheduling models, inventory models and dynamic programming, 
and decision making under uncertainty. 

561 5«minar in Oparations Rosoarch (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 560 or consent of instructor. A particular topic in Opera- 
tions Research, such as simulation, inventory theory, or synthesis of large scale 
systems will be covered in depth with specif emphasis on research methods. 

563 5tatittical Docision Ttioory (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 361. The analysis and application of advanced statistic^ tech- 
niques to the problems of management decision-making under conditions of 
uncertainty. 

565 Somlnar on Compwtors in Induftry (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 364, 464 or consent of instructor. An examination of develop- 
ments and innovations concerning computers in industry. Artificial intelligence, 
information retrieval, and time sharing. 

566 Dofign of ixporimonts (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 361 and graduate standing. A survey of the fundamentals of 
experimental design, including analysis of variance, factorial experiments, nested 
designs, confounding, and fractional replication. 

597 Projoct (3) 

Open to qualified g^duate students. Directed independent inquiry. 

593 Thotif (3-6) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. Student will 
select and have approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original r^arch, and 
must present himself for a defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Indopendont Graduato Rosoarcfi (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing, the consent of the instructor, and approval by 
the department chairman. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue 
independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 


257 


SCHOOL OF EDUCATION 


PRESERVICE COURSES 

101 Reading D«v*lopm«nt (1) 

An elective course for students enrolled at CSCF who wish to improve their 
reading efficiency. May be repeated for a maximum of three units of credit. 

296 Educational Practicum (1—3) 

Conduct an individual educationally oriented experience with a child, youth, or 
young adult in an educational practicum location under the direction of a faculty 
member. Available to students who want or need public service experience with 
children, youth, or adults. Does not give credit toward any teaching credential. 
May be repeated for a maximum of six units of credit. Open to freshman and 
sophomore students. (3 hours laboratory per hour of credit) 

303 Education of Various Cultural Groups: Early Childhood (3) 

A course designed for Head Start personnel and others engaged in the early 
education of culturally different children. Focus will be on the development of 
learning, curriculum content, and methodology related to various cultural groups. 
(2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

309 Fioldwork in tho Education of Various Cultural Groups (3) 

Observation and participation in classes for various cultural groups. Integrated 
with course work in Education of Various CXiltural Groups. Must be taken con- 
currently with Educ 308. (9 hours laboratory) 

312 Human Grourth and Dovolopmont (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. A comprehensive study of human growth and develop- 
ment with emphasis on childhood, adolescence, and middle and old age. Includes 
mental, social, emotional, and physical development. 

329 Fialdwork In Mutheds of Toaching in Elomentary Sehool (1) 

Prerequisites: Educ 411 and admission to teacher education. Must be taken con- 
currently with Educ 331 A3* Observation and participation in elementary school 
classrooms. Integrated with coursework in principles, curricula and methods. 

331 A Elomonfary School Principlos, Curricula and Methods (4) 

Prerequisites: Educ 411, Math Ed 303A and admission to teacher education. 
Must be taken concurrently with Educ 329 and 33 IB. Principles, curricula, 
methods and materials of elementary school instruction with major emphasis on 
arithmetic, social studies and science. Includes audiovisual instruction, meffiods and 
techniques. Required of all candidates for the standard teaching credential with 
specialization in elementary school teaching. Includes screening for admission to 
student teaching. (3H hours lecture, 1 hour activity) 

331 B Elomonfary School Principlot/ Curricula and Mofhodt (3) 

Prerequisites: Educ 411 and admission to teacher education. Must be taken con- 
currently with Educ 329 and 331 A. Principles, curricula, methods and materials 
of elementary school instruction with major emphasis on language arts and read- 
ing. Two semester hours devoted to methods of reading instruction, including 
phonics. Required of all candidates for the standard teaching credential with 
specialization in elemental^' school teaching. Includes screening for admission to 
student teaching. (2J^ hours lecture, 1 hour activity) 


258 


fc/ucot/on 


939 $tvd*nt Teaching In th« il•n 1 •ntary School and Stvdont 
Toochlng Somlnor (8 or 4) 

Prerequisites: Educ 331, three academic related courses, and admission to student 
teaching. Participation in a regular elementary school teaching program for the 
greater part of every school day. Includes a two-hour seminar each week in 
problems and procedures of elementary school teaching. Concxirrent enrollment in 
other courses is discouraged. (Minimum of 30 hours a week in an elementary 
school, 2 hours per week seminar.) 

340 Frinciplat and Curricula of Socondary Iducotion (3) 

Required first course in the professional sequence for the standard teaching 
credential with specialization in secondary teaching. Principles of secondary edu- 
cation in the United States: organization, curriculum, and teaching practices. Cor- 
related with methods and materials courses in the major. Two hours of observa- 
tion per week in selected junior and senior high school classes. Application for 
admission to teacher education is included. Elach student is expected to complete 
all requirements for admission during Educ 340. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours field*- 
work) 

380 Tka Taaching of Roading (3) 

Curriculum and methods in the teaching of reading in the elementary and 
secondary schools. Examination and analysis of the approaches to reading in 
teachers’ manuals and guides. Practical experience in preparing lessons in class- 
room teaching of reading. 

401 Social Foufidations of Education (4) 

Prerequisites: Exluc 411, admission to teacher education or consent of instructor. 
Seminar in philosophical, historical, and sociological foundations of education, con- 
sidered in the light of their influence on contemporary educational theory and 
practice in the United Sutes. 

402 Cooiparativo Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 401, 403, or consent of the instructor. A seminar centered in 
study of the various countries’ and areas’ education patterns, problems and trends 
as part of the cultural setting in which found; designed to deepen mnghts into our 
own culture’s educational program and offer bases for comparative evaluation 
with other systems. 

403 History of Education (3) 

Prerequisites: history of world civilization and Elduc 331 or 442 or consent 
of the instructor. The main streams of educational history in Europe and Amer- 
ica, with particular emphasis on the ways these main streams have affected the 
current scene in the United States. 

406 Educotional Sociology (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 331 or 442, or consent of the instructor. The school in the 
social order; the school as a sociid system; analysis of cultural factors affecting the 
school; the special culture of the school; roles and role conflicts in the school; 
policy questions flowing from social issues and school-cultural relationships. 

411 Psychological Foundations of Education (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 101 and concurrent enrollment in upper division practicum 
or fieldwork. Prerequisite to other courses in the professional education sequence. 
Learning theory, thinking processes, and human growth and development. Students 
who have completed Psych 311 must have permission of instructor to enroll. 


259 


iducafion 


4J1 Principles and Curricula of the Elomontary School (2) 

Prerequisite: Educ 411 or consent of the instructor. An introductory course 
in elementary education. Stress on major principles and basic curricular considera- 
tions. Importance of the elementary school system to society. 

432 Toaching— in tho Elomontary School 

Prerequisites: Educ 411 or consent of the instructor. Courses, listed dually in 
the School of Education and in the other appropriate departments dealing 
with objectives, methods, and materials of teaching the various subjects and 
areas in the elementary schools. The courses are professional education courses and 
applicable toward credential requirements. Detailed descriptions of the courses are 
to be found in the materials of other departments within this catalog. 

For Lang Ed 432 Toaching Foraign Languagnt in th# Elementary School (2) 

434 Child Study Techniques for Teachers (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 331 or permission of the instructor. This course deals 
with the techniques the classroom teacher may use in understanding individual 
children within his classroom who do not respond to the teacher and his peers 
in typical ways. 

437 Problems In Early Elementary Education (3) 

Prerequisites: Educ 339 and consent of instructor. Study of current litera- 
ture and recent research in the area of education of young children through 
individual and group study. Emphasis will be placed on problems centered in 
cognitive processes, content, structure, and instruction at the early elementary 
education level. 

442 Toachin9— in tho Socondory School (2) 

Prerequisites: 20 units in the major, Educ 311, 340, admission to teacher educa- 
tion, and senior standing; or consent of the instructor. A series of courses, with the 
exception of business and social science methods, listed dually in the School of 
Education and in the other appropriate departments, dealing with objectives, 
methods, and materials of teaching, including audio-visual instruction, the various 
subjects and areas in secondary schools. Required, before student teaching, of stu- 
dents presenting major in these areas or subjects for the standard teaching cre- 
dential with specialization in secondary school teaching. Students without teaching 
experience must register concurrently in Educ 449 to complete a teacher aide 
assignment in high schools. 

Art Ed 442 Toaching Art in tho Socondary School (2) 

Educ 442 Toaching Businoss in tho Socondary School (2) 

Educ 442 Toaching Social Scionco in tho Socondary School (2) 

Engl Ed 442 Tooching English in tho Socondary School (2) 

For Lang Ed 442 Toaching Foroign Languagos in tho Socondary School (2) 
ioum Ed 442 Toaching Journalism in tho Socondary School (2) 

Moth Ed 442 Toaching Mathomatics in tho Socondary School (2) 

Mu Ed 441 Toaching Music Thoory and Approciation in tho Public Schools (2) 
Mu Ed 442 Toaching Vocal Music in tho Public Schools (2) 

Mu Ed 443 Toaching Instrumontal Music in tho Public Schools (2) 

PE 442 Toaching Physical Education in tho Socondary School (2) 

Sci Ed 442 Toaching Scionco in tho Socondary School (2) 


260 


Education 


Sp«»€h Ed 442 Teaching Spaach In tha Sacondary School (2) 

Thootro Ed 442 Toothing Thoofro In the Secondary School (2) 

443 Principles of Cere Curriculum (2) 

Prerequisite: teaching experience or consent of the instructor. Unity and inter- 
relationships of human learning and behavior and the curricular processes and 
arrangements by which this may be achieved. Seminar on development, principles, 
and application of core curricula; guidance functions; evaluation; and roles of the 
teacher. 

445 Junior High School Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 442 or 331 or consent of instructor. Seminar on prin- 
ciples and procedures for developing the junior high school program. Purposes, 
curriculum, and organization of the junior high school are stressed including 
examination of recent innovations and proposals. Designed for students with ele- 
mentary or secondary backgrounds who plan to teach in the junior high school. 

446 Sacondary School Curriculum (3) 

Prerequisite: student teaching or teaching experience or consent of instructor. 
Fundamentals of curriculum development. Seminar on current issues within sec- 
ondary education. Curricular organization and current practices. Survey and evalu- 
ation of newer curricular programs. 

449 Fioldwork in Methods of Teaching in Secondary Schools (1) 

Prerequisite: Educ 340, 411, admission to teacher education or consent of 
instructor. Participation in the instruction of a secondary school class as a teacher 
aide. Integrated with coursework in the teaching of the major. Must be taken 
concurrently with Educ 442 and students must allow sufficient time in their 
schedules, at the same hour each day, to serve as a teacher aide. 

451 Principles of Educational Measurement (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 411 or Psych 311. Development, validation, and application 
of the principles of educational measurement. Construction and use of informal 
and standardized achievement tests. Summary and interpretation of results of 
measurement. 

452 Principles of Guidance (3) 

An introduction to pupil personnel services in the public school setting. The 
relationship of historic^, sociological, psychological and philosophical foundations 
to principles of counseling and guidance will be explored. The course is designed 
to give students an opportunity to examine their interest in pupil personnel work. 
Students will have an opportunity to participate in small groups and to conduct 
counseling interviews. Students seeking the special education credentials will em- 
phasize the counseling and guidance of the exceptional student. The course serves 
as a vehicle to screen students into the pupil personnel services program. 

471 Exceptional Children (3) 

Corequisite: Educ 411 (or Educ 312 for students working toward the Re- 
stricted EMR Credential). Seminar on the study of children who deviate from the 
average in the elementary and the secondary schoob; physically handicapped, men- 
tally retarded, gifted, socially maladjusted, emotionally disturbed, and delinquent. 
Special educational services, curriculum, procedures, and materiab necessary to 
promote their maximum development. 

472 Gifted Children (2) 

Prerequisite: Educ 411. Identification, principles of instruction, grouping, indi- 
vidualized instruction, classroom enrichment. Problem solving and research expe- 


261 


Education 


riences in science, social studies, and mathematics, reading programs and literature, 
creative writing, oral language. 

479 M*ntal Retardation and train Injury (3) 

Prerequisite; Educ 471. Organic and cultural basis of mental retardation and 
brain injury, including social, psychological, and vocational problems. Child 
growth, sensory development, learning characteristics of mentally retarded and 
brain injured children, and techniques of working with parents will be consid- 
ered. 

474 Curriculum and Methods for Teaching the Mentally Retarded (3) 

Prerequisite; Educ 473. Curriculum development, methods, and materials for 
teaching the educable and trainable mentally retarded at the elementary and sec- 
ondary levels. 

475 Observation and Individual Instruction with the Mentally Retarded (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 474. Superv'ised observation and participation with the educa- 
ble and the trainable mentally retarded at both the elementary and secondary 
levels of education. (4 hours activity, 1 hour lecture and discussion.) 

477 The Iducotlonally Handicapped Child (3) 

Prerequisite; Educ 471. Behavioral characteristics of the educationally handi- 
capped child, the child with a neurological handicap or a behavioral disorder as 
defined by the California Education Code. Elducadonal procedures, perceptual and 
motor training, evaluation, parent guidance. 

479 Seminor and Practicum in Education of the Trainable Mentally Retarded (6) 

Prerequisite: Consent of the instructor. Curriculum, methods, and materials for 
children having severe intellectual, motor, sensory and language impairment. Em- 
phasis will be placed on the educational management of children exhibiting handi- 
capping conditions. (3 hours seminar and 9 hours practicum in sp>ecial school fa- 
cilities.) 

440 Istuos in Highor Education (3) 

Seminar in structure, governance, administration and challenges of American 
higher education. 

449 Fioldwork in Excoptional Childron (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 471 or consent of instructor. Direct supervised experience 
with educationally handicapped children. 

491 Audiovisual Education (2) 

Prerequisites; Educ 411, 442, or consent of the instructor. Media in communica- 
don, ps>xhological bases, development, curricular function, evaluation. Survey of 
equipment and materials available, preparation of instructional materials for class- 
room use. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

492 Tolovision In tho Classroom (2) 

Prerequisites; Elduc 411 or consent of the instructor. Television as a vehicle for 
instruction, information, and enrichment. General theory of media in classroom, 
p^chological bases, curricular capabilities and limitations of equipment. Responsi- 
bility^ of the classroom teacher. Practice in utilization process. (1 hour lecture, 2 
hours activity) 

493 Production of Audiovisual Materials (2) 

Prerequisites: Educ 491 or consent of the instructor. Elxploration and develop- 
ment of audiovisual materials. Students will participate in script writing, story 


262 


Fducotlon 


board, photography and tape production. Experience will be provided in produc- 
ing graphics, charts and bulletin boards. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

496 Senior Educational Practicum (1—3) 

(Conduct at an advanced level an educational practicum experience with an in- 
dividual under the direction of a faculty member. May be repeated for a maximum 
of six units of credit. 

499 Indopondont Study (1—3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing, approval of instructor and department 
prior to registration. (Conduct of an individual investigation under supervision of 
a faculty member; investigation might be an experiment, a library study, or a 
creative project; only students of demonstrated capacity and maturity will be 
approved; adequate prerequisite study necessary. May be repeated for credit. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

500 Survey of Collegiate Student Personnel Services (3) 

History, philosophy, objectives, organization and administration of collegiate 
student personnel services. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity.) 

501 Philosophy of Education (3) 

Prerequisites: postgraduate standing and Educ 339 or 739 or Elduc 749, or con- 
sent of the instructor. Uses of theories of knowledge, value and reality in dealing 
with educational problems; application of contemporary systems of thought to 
education. 

503 Foundations for Administrative Leadership (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. Seminar on cultures and values to which 
schools must contribute: introduction to community sociology, tax systems and 
public administration; the literature of leadership. Screening for admission to pro- 
gram. Occasional special meetings. Required of all students during first registra- 
tion in school administration and supervision at this college. 

505 Hi# Suparvision of Curriculum (4) 

Prerequisite: Educ 566 or 586. Seminar on development of a quality program of 
instruction in both elementary and secondary schools; appraml of programs of 
instruction; advanced principles of curricular review and modification. Evaluation 
of subject matter competence in area of supervisory specialization. Meets creden- 
tial requirements in principles of curriculum construction and evaluation; super- 
vision of instruction and curriculum in both elementary and secondary schoob. 

506 Curriculum and Resaarch in Reading (3) 

Prerequbite: consent of instructor. Study of curriculum and research in reading, 
including materiab, orgamzation, and methods of instruction. 

509 Theory and Practice in Educational Meaiurement (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 411 or Psych 311. Introduction to basic concepts, theory, and 
procedures for construction of informal and standardized tests. Application of meas- 
urement theory and statistical techniques toward problems of analysis, scaling, 
norming, and interpretation of test results. Practice in item writing for short class- 
room tests and intensive analysb of selected commercial standardized tests. 

510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: bachelor’s degree, Educ 509 or the equivalent. EUements of design, 
instrumentation, treatment of data, hypothesis testing and inference, and analysis 
of educational data. Develop a research proposal. Practice in analyzing and evalu- 
ating research reports. 


263 


Education 


511 Survey of Educational Retoarch (3) 

Prerequisites: Educ 509, reaching experience. Review of descriptive statistics 
and statistical inference as applied to educational problems. Analysis of repre- 
sentative research papers. Principles of research design. Prepare a research pro- 
posal. 

514 Oradwato Sominan iohavorial Rosoarch on Childron with Looming Disorders 

(3) 

Prerequisites: Educ 510 or 511, consent of instructor, and teaching ex- 
perience with exceptional children. Critical analysis of behavioral research on 
children with learning disorders. Resources, criteria for evaluation of studies with 
exceptional children, historical view of research in special education. Research 
relating to learning and handicapping conditions, and efficacy of special methods 
and materials will be reviewed. 

516 Etiology of Rooding Difflcultios (3) 

Prerequisite: teaching experience, Educ 506 or consent of instructor. Studies 
of the factors underlying learning disabilities in reading in children, adolescents 
and young adults. 

531 Oroup Procottof in tho Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 471 or consent of instructor. Exploration of group interaction, 
teacher sensitivity, and their relevance to educational planning and management. 
Emphasis: emotionally disturbed, educationally handicapped. 

533 Rohovior Probloms in tho Classroom (3) 

Prer^uisite: Educ 471 or consent of instructor. Identification and management 
of social and affective disturbances related to school performance. Elmphasis: early 
detection, behavioral modification techniques, parent counseling, interagency coop- 
eration. 

533 Looming Probloms in tho Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 471 or consent of instructor. Identification and educational 
management of learning problems. Elmphasis: developmental sequences, related 
prescriptive teaching and remediation techniques. 

530 Graduoto Studios in Elomontary Education: Foroign Languago (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 339, 739, or permission of instructor. Seminar for the study 
of pertinent investigations and their application in the classroom together with 
significant curriculum developments and organization in the newest area facing 
the elementaiy^ school educator. Criteria for appraising programs, personnel, and 
materials also will be discussed. 

531 Graduoto Studios in Elomontory Education: Language Arts (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 510 or permission of instructor. Seminar for advanced study 
of trends and problems in teaching the fundamental skills of communication in the 
elemental^’ school. Analysis of research in the language arts and related disciplines 
as background for curriculum development. 

533 Graduoto Studios in Elomontary Education: Mathematics (3) 

Prerequisites: Math Eld 303 A, Educ 339 or 739, or permission of instructor. 
Seminar for the study of significant research, curricular developments and ma- 
terials, criteria for planning and improving mathematics programs and instruction. 

533 Graduate Studies In Elementary Education: Science (3) 

Prerequisites: Educ 339 or 739 or permission of instructor. Seminar for the study 
of significant research in elementar>’ school science. Criteria for planning and im- 
proving science programs and the development of materials. 


264 


idu€€tfion 


5i4 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Social Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: Educ 339 or 739, or consent of instructor. Seminar for the study of 
significant research developments and materials, criteria for planning and improving 
social studies programs and current techniques of teaching. 

537 Seminar for Elementary Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 339 or 739 or consent of the instructor. A study of problems 
and issues in elementary education, their causes and possible solutions. 

547 Seminar for Secondary Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 749 or consent of the instructor. Persistent problems in sec- 
ondary education and survey of related literature; causes of and solutions for these 
problems. Application of scientific method to educational problems, sources of 
educational research, and to techniques of cooperative thinking. 

550 Counseling Theories and Processes (3) 

Prerequisite: Elduc 452. Seminar in the dynamics of counselor and client relation- 
ships, techniques and processes of various levels, and relation to personality 
theory. Major project and supervised practice required. 

551 Educational and Career Orientation (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 550 or permission of instructor. Seminar in the principles 
of evaluating, classifying, and disseminating occupational and educational informa- 
tion in the guidance program; sources of occupational literature, occupational 
research, vocational surveys, and methods of studying the individual as a umque 
whole to help him develop his greatest career potential. Emphasis on the psycho- 
logical, sociological, economic, and clinical implications of career and educa- 
tional choice. A major project in career information is developed under super- 
vision. 

552 Group Procostas in Guidance (3) 

Prerequisite: E^uc 550 or permission of instructor. Seminar in the intensive study 
of the dynamics of group processes including the function of leadership, effective 
membership and techniques of group problem solving. Special emphasis on clinical 
group counseling including a semester project in a school setting. 

553 Administration and Organization of Pupil Porsonnol Programs (3) 

Prerequisites: Elduc 551 or permission of instructor. Seminar in the development, 
organization, supervision, and administration of the pupil-p>ersonnel services. Semi- 
nar on analysis and evaluation of pupil personnel services by the case study method, 
curriculum, counselor competencies, staffing; includes laws relating to children and 
child welfare. 

555 Dynamics of Individual Dohavior and Casa Study (3) 

Prerequisites: Educ 451, 550, or consent of instructor. Seminar in ca^ conference 
techniques; clinical study of the techniques of individual diagnosis including the 
synthesis and interpretation of information. Use of the life or developmental record, 
self-ratings behavior ratings and tests as they relate to counseling with the normal 
and abnormal pupil. Identification and remediation of learning diflSculties em- 
phasized. 

558A School Psychology: Saminar in Problams in Porsonality Diagnosis (5) 

Prerequisites: A clear California credential in school psychometry or psychology 
intern credential and admission by screening committee of Pupil Personnel Services. 
Seminar and internship and/or fieldwork in problems of personality assessment in 
the school setting, effecting changes in behavior among school pupils and per- 
sonnel. Emphasizes role and function of the school psychologist in pupil personnel 


265 


Education 


services. Advanced experience in the clinical case study, application of understand- 
ings of the dynamics of individual counseling and group counseling to human be- 
havior in the school setting. 

SSIi School Ptychologyt Soiwilnor In Probloms of Loornlng (5) 

Prerequisite: Educ 558A. Seminar and internship and/or fieldwork in problems 
of learning and their remediation. Advanced work in diagnostic testing, clinical 
interpretation of data, remediation of identified problems. Advanced work in com- 
munication including reporting, individual counseling, group counseling and case 
conference. 

559A^1 Fioldworfc io Pupil Porsonnol Sonricot (2-6) 

Prerequisites: Educ 551, 552, 555, admission to the CSCE pupil personnel 
credential program and permission of instructor. Guidance and counseling in the 
school setting under the supervision of local coordinator and college staff. Work 
assignments vary for school counselors, psychometrists, and child welfare workers. 
Work in a counseling relationship, parent conferences, and follow-up studies. 
May be repeated for credit up to a maximum of 12 units. 

560 Contumporary Problumt in School Administration (3) 

A seminar on contemporary problems in school organization and administration 
with particular emphasis on collective bargaining, the computer as a business and 
educational tool, and the needs of urban schooling including the problems of 
racial isolation. 

561 Orgonlxation of 5cbool 5ystoms (3) 

Prerequisite; Elduc 503 or concurrent enrollment. Seminar on structure, functions, 
trends, fiscal respionsibilities and issues in respect to the government of education at 
federal, state, county, and local school district levels. Basic principles in school or- 
ganization and administration. Special emphasis on intergovernmental relations and 
impact at local level. 

563 Prindplat of School Portonnol Admioistration (2) 

Prerequisite: Educ 503 or concurrent enrollment. Seminar on principles of organi- 
zational behavior, social processes inherent in eflPective leadership, and techniques 
of school personnel management. 

564 Sominor in School Law (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. School law as a reflection of public policy; 
the California Education Code and the California Administrative Code, Title 5, 
and county counsel opinions as they affect administration, instruction, and finan- 
cial management of public schools. Court attorney general decisions in interpreting 
school law. Legal basis for public education in California. An elective course in 
school administration. 

565 Saminar in School Finonco, Businoss Administration, and Buildings (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Elmphasis on school finance, business admin- 
istration, and b^din^ as they implement an effective educational program. A 
study of financial principles. School revenues and expenditures, budgetary pro- 
processes, cost analysis; business management, and salary policies. An 
elective course in school administration. 

566 Tho llomontary 5chool Principal and Supervisor (3) 

Prerequisites: Elduc 561 and 563. May be taken concurrently with £^uc 769. 
Seminar on leadership roles of elementary school principal and supervisor, pupil 
personnel and instructional program in elementary school; working relations and 
mor^e amemg staff, commumty and pupils; parent education; relations with central 
district staff; management and recordkeeping functions; teacher evaluation. 


266 


Education 


567A,B Fisidwork and Sominar In School Administration (2,2) 

Prerequisites: Educ 566 or 586 or concurrent registration, and consent of in- 
structor. Two-semester terminal sequence required for the M.S. in Education with 
a concentration in school administration. Includes directed held work in selected 
public schools and district offices. Supervised project or thesis required for degree. 
(4 hours fieldwork, 2 hours conference) 

S68 Saminar for Administrativ* Trainaas (3) 

The purpose of this seminar is to provide a behavioral analysis approach in the 
establishment of a sound foundation for educational administrators who have just 
completed a year of practice in administration. The seminar is the culminating 
offering of the Administrator Internship Program. The objectives of the seminar 
include (1) developing further insights into the complex behavior of human beings 
in social groups, (2) increasing understanding of how certain theory and research 
contribute to effective administrative practice, (3) evaluating further self-behavior 
in administration. Experienced school administrators who wish to relate their 
administrative experiences to the theory of behavioral analysis are welcome to 
register in the seminar. Behavioral environment will be examined as it shapes 
process, organization, and function in school administration. 

570 Graduata Saminar In Educational Psychology: Advancod Dovolopmontal 
Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Research, theory and practice in the field of 
child and adolescent development. 

571 Oraduato Sominar in Educational Psychology: Advancod Psychology of 
Looming (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Research, theory and practice in the field of 
the psychology of learning with special attention to classroom learning. 

572 Psycho-Educational Clinic (2) 

Prerequisite: prerequisite sequence or equivalent and permission of the instructor. 
(Prerequisite sequence is Elduc 475 or 477, 523, 570, and 571 concurrently with 572.) 
A clinical pracdcum for the purpose of developing clinical teaching skills in dealing 
with the learning problems of exceptional children, practice in working with 
formal and informal information-gathering devices, special teaching instruments, 
teaching systems, and teaching strategies. Students may, upon the recommendation 
of the instructor, repeat the course for credit one time. (6 hours laboratory) 

577 Saminar in Program Trends in Special Education (3) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of adviser and permission of instructor. A seminar 
designed for the study of historical development of educational programs for 
exceptional children. A critical analysis of issues and trends in special education. 

57S Administration and Supervision of Special Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 577 or consent of instructor. Problems of organization, admin- 
istration, and supervision of special education programs: finance and attendance, 
physical facilities, budgeting, needed equipment, community agencies and curricu- 
lum development. 

581 Analysis of Reading Difficulties (3) 

Prerequisites: bachelor’s degree, teaching experience. Standard Teaching Creden- 
tial, Educ 506 or consent of the instructor. Analysis and diagnosis of reading 
difficulties. Techniques and methods or prevention and treatment. Individual re- 
mediation of student. Primary through secondary. 


267 


iducttflon 


5%2 AnalysU of Cerroctivo Rooding Procticoi (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 516» 581, and consent of instructor. Critical evaluation of 
reading and remedial reading practices. Short-term project in a school situation. 

St3A«R Romodiol Rooding Cotowork (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 582, and consent of instructor. Fieldwork in diagnosis and 
remediation in reading through casework technique. Conferences with teachers, 
parents, consultants, and administrators. 

534 Lingiiittics and Rooding (3) 

A study of linguistics and its influence on reading materials and instruction. An 
analysis of trends in reading and changes affected by the science of linguistics. 

StS Word Porcoption Skills In Rooding (3) 

Study of word perception skills in the process of learning to read. A develop- 
mental hygiene of child vision. Visual anomalies and their applications to reading 
disorders. 

Tho Socondory School Principol, Junior Collogo Administrator/ ond 
Suporvisor (3) 

Prerequisites: Educ 561 and 563. May be taken concurrently with Educ 789. 
Seminar on leadership roles of the secondary school principal and supervisor, pupil 
personnel and instructional program in the secondary school; the development 
and administration of vocational and adult education; working relations and morale 
among staff, community and pupils, relations with central district stafiF; the man- 
agement and record-keeping functions; teacher evaluation. 

S9S Advoiscod Studios (1-3) 

Graduate seminars designed to develop professional competencies in such areas 
as behavior, teaching strategies, educational technology, program development, 
communication theory and interpersonal relations. May be repeated for credit. 

S97 Rroioct (1-3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor. Individual research on an empirical project, 
with conferences with the instructor, culminating in a project. 

S93 Thosis (1-3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor. Individual research with conferences with 
the instructor, culminating in a thesis. 

S99 Indopondonf Oroduoto Rotoorch (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. Open to qualified graduate students 
desiring to pursue independent inquiry. 

PROFESSIONAL COURSES IN THE POSTGRADUATE PROGRAM 

702 Ouldonco of tho Collogo Round Studont (3) 

The study of admission to college: backgrounds, current issues and research, 
the admission process, scope and diversity of institutions of higher education in 
the United States. 

709 Suponrision of Studont Tooching (3) 

Prerequisite: possession of a teaching credential and one year of teaching ex- 
perience. Designed for teachers who supeivise student teachers. Emphasis on prin- 
ciples and procedures of elective supervision and research. 


268 


£duc€tflon 


721 Philotophy and Objactivat of Junior College Education (2) 

Prerequisite: postgraduate standing or consent of instructor. Origins of the 
junior college movement in higher education in the United States; economic, tech- 
nological, and social forces creating needs for new and different post-high school 
education; objectives of junior college education; relationships to secondary and 
higher education; functions of the junior college; curriculum development and 
organization. 

739 Studant Taaching in tha EUmantary School and Studont Toaching 
Sominar (8 or 4) 

Prerequisites: Educ 331, three academic related courses, admission to student 
teaching, and postgraduate status. Participation in a regular elementary school 
teaching program for the greater part of every school day. Includes a two-hour 
seminar each week in problems and procedures of elementary school teaching. 
Concurrent enrollment in other courses is discouraged. (Minimum of 30 hours a 
week in an elementary school, 2 hours per week seminar.) 

744 Principlas of Junior Colloge Toaching (3) 

Prerequisite: postgraduate standing or consent of instructor. Psychological foun- 
dations of junior college teaching, measurement and evaluation of learning. Edu- 
cational and philosophical bases for instructional procedures in the junior college. 
Instructional procedures including audiovisual materials, junior college dais 
observations. (2 hours seminar, 3 hours fieldwork) 

749 Studant Taaching In — in tha Socondary School and Sominar (6 or 2) 

A series of courses in student teaching and seminars listed dually in the School 
of Elducation and in the other appropriate departments. 

Prerequisites: Educ 442, 449, and admission to student teaching. Student teaching 
for the general secondary credential or the standard teaching credential with spe- 
cialization in secondary school teaching. Participation in a regular secondary school 
teaching program for half-days for a full semester. Includes a seminar each week in 
problems and procedures of secondary school teaching, under the direction of the 
respective college supervisor. (Minimum of 15 hours a week in a secondary school; 
2 hours per week in seminar) 

Art Ed 749 Studant Taaching in Art in tha Sacondary School and Sominar (6) 
Educ 749 Studant Toaching in iutinoss in tho Socondary School and Sominar (6) 

Educ 749 Studant Toaching in Social Sdonco In tho Socondary School and Somi- 
nar (6) 

Engl Ed 749 Studant Touching in English in tho Socondary School and 
Sominar (6) 

For Lang Ed 749 Studant Toaching in Forolgn Languagos In tho Socondary 
School and Sominar (6) 

Joum Ed 749 Studant Toaching in Journalism in tho Socondary School and 
Sominar (6) 

Math Ed 749 Studont Toaching in Mathomatlcs in tho Socondary School and 
Sominar (6) 

Mu Ed 749 Studont Toaching in Music in tho Socondary School and Sominar (6) 

PE 749 Studont Toaching in Physical Education in tho Socondory School and 
Sominar (6) 

Sd Ed 749 Studont Toaching in Scionco in tho Socondary School and Sominar (6) 

Spooch Ed 749 Studont Toaching in Spooch In tho Socondary School and 
Sominar (6) 


269 


Health iducaflon 


Th*«tr« id 749 Stvd«nt T^ochlng in Thnotrn in Secondary School and Som- 
inor (6) 

769 Diroctod Fioldwork in Ilomontory School Adminiitrotion and Suporvitlon {!) 

Prerequisite: £duc 566 or concurrent registration. Work in selected elementary 
schools and district offices. Funher details in special publications. (8 hours field- 
work, 1 hour conference) 

771 FioldwoHc in Administration of Spociol Education (12) 

Prerequisite: Educ 577, and registration in Educ 578. Directed fieldwork in 
the administration of special education programs. An assignment will be made 
in public or private schools. 

779 Stvdont Tooching With Montally Rotardod Pupils (4) 

I^requisites: Educ 475 and concurrent enrollment in Educ 339 or 739 (for four 
units) or Educ 749 (for tw’o units). Student teaching in a special class program for 
the educable or trainable mentaUy retarded at either the elementary or secondary 
level. (Elementary level: minimum of 30 hours a week in an elementary school; 
2 hours per week in seminar. Secondary level: minimum of 15 hours a week in 
a secondary school; 2 hours per week in seminar.) 

Students working for a Restricted EMR or Restricted TMR credential need 
only enroll in Educ 779 (4 units). Enrollment in Educ 339 or 739 is not required. 

749 Diroctod Fioldwork In Socondary School Admin! strotlon and Suporvlsion (2) 

Prerequisite: Educ 586 or concurrent registration. Work in selected secondary 
schools and district offices. Further details in special publication. (8 hours field- 
work, 1 hour conference) 

799 Junior Collogo Sfudont Toachlng and Sominar (4) 

Prerequisite: Educ 744. Student teaching in the student’s major field in a 
cooperating junior college for one semester. Weekly seminar on curriculum devel- 
opment and organization in the junior college, instructional procedure and ma- 
terials, and instructional problems of the junior college student teacher. (Minimum 
of 9 hours a week in a junior college; 2 hours per week in seminar) 

HEALTH EDUCATION 

(Offered by the Department of Health Education, 

Physical Education and Recreation) 

101 Parsonal and Community Hoalth (2) 

Meaning and significance of physical, mental and social health as related to the 
individual and to society; alcohol and narcotics education; fire prevention; public 
safety and accident prevention. 

102 Provontien and First Aid (2) 

Study of the hazards in man’s environment and the common accidents related 
thereto. Elmphasis is placed upon both the care and prevention of accidents. Stu- 
dents will be certified in standard and advanced American Red Cross first aid 
procedures. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

419 Tho School Hoalth Program (3) 

Prerequisite: HE 101 or equivalent. C^onsideradon of the three classical divisions 
of the school health program: instruedon, services and environment. Study will 
include standards, problems, and reladonships pertaining to these areas as well as a 
field project. 


270 


Physical Education 


PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

(Offered by the Department of Health Education, 

Physical Education and Recreation) 

General Education Roquiromonts: 

Hoalth and Physical Education Eloctivos 

There are no specific health and phyisical education requirements. Each student, 
however, must take a minimum of three courses (9 units) with one from each of 
three fields included in Category IV, Basic Subjects: computer science, elementary 
foreign languages, health education, mathematics, oral communications, physical 
education, reading, statistics or writing. See page 68. 

110 Aquatics (1) (Formerly 111-110) 

A physical activity exp>crience in aquatics activities with a student in an educa- 
tional setting and under the direction of a faculty member who directs the activity 
to meet the needs and interests of the student. Open to all students. May be re- 
peated for credit. 

120 Group Actfvitios (1) (Formerly 121-124 and 129) 

A physical activity experience in group activities with a student in an educational 
setting and under the direction of a faculty member who directs the activity to 
meet the needs and interests of the student. Open to all students. May be repeated 
for credit. 

130 Individual Activitios (1) (FormoHy 130-139 and 150-159) 

A physical activity experience in individual activities with a student in an edu- 
cational setting and under the direction of a faculty member who directs the ac- 
tivity to meet the needs and interests of the student. Open to all students. May be 
repeated for credit. 

140 Danco Activitios (1) (FormoHy 141-149) 

A physical activity experience in dance activities with a student in an educa- 
tional setting and under the direction of a faculty member who directs the activity 
to meet the needs and interests of the student. Open to all students. May be repeated 
for credit. 

170 Intorcolloqiato Sports (W) (1) (FormoHy 170A^) 

An intercollegiate activity experience in individual or team sports for women in 
an educational setting under the direction of a coach who directs the activity to 
meet the needs and interests of the student. Consent of coach required for en- 
rollment. 

130 Intorcolloqioto Sports (M) (1) (FormoHy 181-197) 

An intercollegiate activity experience in individual and team sports for men 
in an educational setting under the direction of a coach who directs the activity 
to meet the needs and interests of the student. Consent of the coach required for 
enrollment. 


PROFESSIONAL THEORY COURSES 
201 Introduction to Physical Education and Rocroation (3) 

Introduction to physical education programs in public and private agencies, per- 
sonal, social and professional requirements of the physical education teacher and 
recreation leader, includes the origin and development of the professions of health 
education, physical education and recreation with emphasis upon their significance 
and function in contemporary American culture. 


271 


Physical Education 


705 Professional Activities: Sports/Donce (2) 

Prerequisite: open to physical education major. 

Development of skills and knowledge in selected sports and dance activities; 

(1) Combadves, modem dance, gymnasdes; 

(2) Archery, badminton, dance, golf; 

(3) Basketball, track & held, tennis, volleyball; 

(4) Football, soccer, baseball, tumbling (m); 

(5) Field hockey, soccer, softball, tumbling (w); May be repeated four dmes. 
(4 hours aedvity) 

206 Tochniqwos of OfRciating Toom Sports 

Analy'sis of officiating techniques and rules necessary for officiating team sports. 
May be repeated for vanous sports or combinadons of sports. (1 hour lecture, 2 
hours aedvity) 

210 Wator Sofoty Instructor (2) 

Prerequisite: PE 110 (Life Saving) or equivalent and consent of the instructor. 
This course prepares the student to teach swimming and life saving and to supervise 
aquatic programs. Successful completion of this course will qualify the student for 
cerdheadon as an ARC Water Safety instructor. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours aedvity) 

214 Skin and Scuba Diving (2) 

Prerequisites: PE 110 (Life Saving) or equivalent and the consent of the in- 
structor. The techniques of skin and scuba diving. Theory of diving, safety proce- 
dures and applicadons of diving will be covered. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours aedvity) 

301 Pravantion and Cara of Athlatic Injuriaf (2) 

Prerequisite: Upper division standing, successful compledon of HE 102 (or equiv- 
alent) and instructors permission. Designed to assist trainers, coaches, physical 
educadon instructors, health educators, YMCA and playground personnel, and 
athletes in the prevendon and care of athledc injuries. Emphasis will be on prac- 
dcal applicadons as well as theory. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours aedvity) 

311 Analysis of Aquotics (2) 

Prerequisites: PE 110 (Life Saving) or equivalent and permission of the instruc- 
tor. Analysis of springboard diving, instrucdonal and compeddve swimming, wa- 
terpolo, and skin and scuba diving. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours aedvity) 

312 Analysis of Combotivos (2) 

Prerequisite: PE 130 (Combadves — Men) or equivalent. Analysis of judo (jui- 
jitsu), wrestling and self-defense. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours aedvity) 

313 Analysis of Folk^ Squoro and Social Dance (2) 

Prerequisite: PE 140 (Social Dance and Square Dance) or equivalent. Analysis 
of basic dance skills, international folk, square, round and social dancing. (1 hour 
lecture, 2 hours aedvity) 

314 Analysis of Individual and Dual Sports (2) 

Prerequisites: proficiency in skills covered and permission of the instructor. 
Analysis of archery, badminton, golf and tennis. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours aedvity) 

315 Analysis of Modem Dance (2) 

Prerequisites: PE 140 (Beginning Modem Dance and Intermediate Modem 
Dance) or equivalent and i>€rmission of instructor. Analysis of modem dance in- 
cluding choreography, program planning and dance accompaniment. (1 hour 
lecture, 2 hours aedvity) 


272 


Physical Education 


917A Analy»it of Toom Sports (W) (2) 

Prerequisites: proficiency in the skills covered and permission of the instructor. 
Analysis of basketball, softball, soccer, speedball, and speed-a-way (1 hour lecture, 
2 hours activity). 

ai71 Analysis of Toom Sports (W) (2) 

Prerequisites: proficiency in the skills of the sports covered and permission of the 
instructor. Analysis of volleyball, field hockey, track and field (1 hour lecture, 2 
hours activity) . 

31t Analysis of Toom Sports (M) (2) 

Prerequisites: PE 120 (Team Sports— Men) or equivalent and permission of 
instructor. Analysis of soccer, softball, speedball, and volleyball. (1 hour lecture, 
2 hours activity) 

319 Analysis of Gymnastics and Tumbling (2) 

Prerequisites: PE 130 (Beginning Gymnastics and Tumbling) or equivalent and 
permission of the instructor. Analysis of apparatus gymnastics and tumbling. (1 
hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

320 Thoory of Cooching Eoskotboll (2) 

Prerequisites: proficiency in basketball and permission of the instructor. Analysis 
of skills, instructional procedures and coaching techniques necessary in coaching 
competitive basketball. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

321 Thoory of Cooching Eosoboll (2) 

Prerequisites: consent of the instructor and upper division standing. This course 
is designed to help prepare the student as a coach of baseball. Elmphasis is on 
offensive and defensive coaching techniques as well as conditioning, budget prepa- 
ration, purchase and care of equipment, scheduling, officiating, and design and care 
of facilities. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

322 Thoory of Cooching Track and Fluid (2) 

This course is designed to prepare students in the fundan^ntal techniques of 
coaching track and field activities. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity). 

323 Thoory of Coaching Football (2) 

This course is designed to present materials, methods of fundamental skills, 
knowledge of offensive and defensive formations, and the coaching techniques and 
procedures necessary in coaching competitive football. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours 
activity) 

324 Theory and Principles of Human Motor Looming (3) 

Prerequisites: PE 201 and permission of the instructor. An amdysis of current 
theories of motor learning as related to human performance. Philosophical bases 
are developed from which basic principles are evolved. 

325 Cose Studies in Humon Motor Learning (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 324. Case studies involving human physical performance. Se- 
quence of activities, individual needs, institutional patterns of organization and pro- 
gramming. 

333 Physicol Iducotien and Human Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 411. Emphasis is placed upon characteristics of the child, par- 
ticularly as these relate to physical growth and development; basic mechanical 
principles underlying efficient movement; and programs for physical needs of chil- 
dren in the elementary school. 


273 


Physical Education 


335 Afro-Am«ricaii Done* (2) 

Study of primitive and tribal rhythms including jazz and other derivational 
dances of Africa. (I hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

416 Kin«fiology (3) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 361 or equivalent. The study of human motion. 

417 Fhytielogy of Ex«rcU« (3) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 361 or equivalent. The study of physiological processes in 
physical activities and the effects of training upon performance. 

41 • Adapted and Corroctiva Activifias (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 416. The study and selection of activities and programs for 
students physically unable to participate in the regular physical education program. 

430 Tatft and Maasuramantt in Physical Education (3) 

A study of the development and use of tests and measurements in physical 
education in the evaluation of objectives, programs, and student achievement. 

425 Spacial Programs in Physical Education (1-4) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Group investigation of selected topics de- 
termined by professionals in the field. Will be offered as a one-, two- or three- 
unit course. May be repeated for credit. 

431 Noolth, Physical Education, Rocreation and Athlotics in tho 
Junior Collogos (3) 

This course is designed to prepare students for junior college teaching and for 
administrative positions. It will investigate the role of health, physical education, 
recreation and athletics in the junior college curriculum. Fieldwork and campus 
visitations required. 

435 Physical Activity in Cultural Porspoctivo (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing. An interdisciplinary approach to the 
examination of phy'sical activity in the cultural milieu. Study will cover historical 
and contemporary interpretations of the role of play, games and sports, dance and 
recreation in human life. 

442 Taaching Physical Education in tha Socendary 5chool (2) 

Prerequisite: Education 340, Education 411, admission to teacher education, 
senior standing or consent of the instructor. The student who has not had teaching 
experience must register concurrently in Elducadon 449. See page 131 under Sec- 
ondary' Education for description of Standard Teaching Credential Program. 
Objectives, methods, and materials including audiovisual instruction for teaching 
phy'sical education in secondary schools. 

434 Advanced Analysis of Movemont Skills (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 140 (Intermediate Modem Dance and Advanced Modem 
Dance) or consent of the instructor. Study of theories, ai>proaches, and techniques 
in advanced movement skills. Emphasis is on personal development of physical 
skills. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours acriWty) 

436 Significant Forms of Movemont (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 140 (Intemiediate Modem Dance and Advanced Modem 
Dance) or consent of the instructor. Theoretical and connotative aspects of sig- 
nificant forms in sport and other formulated categories of movement. Solo and 
group work. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 


274 


Physical Education 


496 Phytical Education Rracticum <1^) 

Prerequisite: consent of the department chairman and instructor. Participation 
as an assistant in planning, preparing, coaching, teaching in public school, college, 
or community physical education or recreation programs. May be repeated for a 
maximum of six units of credit. 

499 Indopondont Study (1-<3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing and consent of faculty adviser, professor 
supervising the study and department chairman. Independent inquiry into problems 
of topics of special interest beyond the scope of regular coursework. May be re- 
peated for credit up to six units. 

510 Rasaorch In Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status or instructor’s permission. The role and functions 
of research in health, physical education, and recreation; included are the different 
types of research with tools of and equipment for the respective research. Selection 
and development of research problems and critique of completed studies arc 
stressed. 

515 Sominar in Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a majot or minor in physical education. A 
study of current problems and issues in physical education through a critical 
analysis of the literature in the field and research findings. 

516 Philosophical Rasos of Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major in physical education. Identification 
of philosophical schools of thought as related to physical education including the 
role of the philosophical process. Examination and application of the philosophical 
process in physical education. 

520 Intomational Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major in physical education. An in depth 
study of the theory and practice of physical education and sports in selected 
foreign countries. Evaluation of foreign physical education programs in relation 
to programs witnessed in the United States. 

530 Administration and 5uporvision of Hoalth Education, Physical Education ond 
Rocroation (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with major in physical education. An in depth 
study and cridc^ analysis of existing programs in health education, physical educa- 
tion, and recreation in terms of established evaluative criteria and norms of practice. 

532 Curriculum Dosign in Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major in phyiscal education. Study in desir- 
able practices, procedures, and factors influencing curricular development in the 
field of physical education. Especially designed for the practicing teacher, super- 
visor of physical education, and the school administrator concerned with physical 
education in the total school program. 

533 Facilitios Dovolopmont and Planning (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate status and a major in physical education. Analysis of new 
trends and research in the development of indoor and outdoor facilities in planning 
programs in health education, physical education and recreation with special em- 
phasis upon design, safety, features, site selection, building construction and equip- 
ment needs. 


275 


Physical Education 


540 Seminar in Probinms in Adaptnd Physicoi Education (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 418. Identification and solutions of problems in planning, organi> 
zation, administration, and evaluation of adapted physical education programs at 
local, state, and national levels. 

545 Sominor in Evaluation in Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major in physical education. The study and 
application of advanced evaluation procedures and scientific instrumentation used 
in the solution of current problems and projects in physical education. 

551 5on«inar: Advancod 5tudy in Physiology of Exorciso (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 417 or equivalent. A study of advanced theories of exercise and 
physiological function. 

552 Human iio-Kinotlcs (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 416 or equivalent background in kinesiology and physiology. 
A study of advanced theories and a detailed analysis of human movement. 

555 Scionfific iasos of Training (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, course work in kinesiology, physiolog>' of exercise, 
bio-kinetics, and permission of the instructor. Detailed study of contemporary 
training with specific attention to the development of those qualities involved in 
various sports. Elxperience in evaluation of the effects of training. 

560A Advancod Study in Porformanco: Badminton and Tonnis (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, advanced preparation and/or experience in bad- 
minton and tennis or permission of the instructor. Theory and analysis of top 
level performance. Includes in depth study of skills, techniques and strategy in- 
volved in badminton and tennis and the factors pertinent to outstanding athletic 
performance. 

560B Advancod Study in Porformanco: Gymnasticf (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, advanced preparation and/or work in gymnastics 
or permission of the instructor. Theory and anal)*^ of top level performance. In- 
cludes in depth study of the skills and techniques involved in gymnastics and the 
factors pertinent to outstanding athletic performance. 

560C Advancod 5tudy In Porformanco: Track and Fiold (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, advanced preparation and/or work in track and 
field or permission of the instructor. Theory' and analysis of top level performance. 
Includes in depth study of the skills, techniques, and strategy' involved in track 
and field and the factors pertinent to outstanding athletic performance. 

596 Advancod Studios in Physicoi Education (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status and a backgrround in the history of physical educa- 
tion. A critical examination of the inter-relationship of sport and athletics with 
other aspects of the culture; special emphasis on 20th century' America. 

598 Thosis (4) 

Prerequisites: PE 510 and permission of the instructor. Individual research on an 
empirical problem. Conferences w'ith thesis chairman and committee, culminating 
in a thesis. 

599 Indopondont Rosoarch (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status and consent of the faculty adviser and department 
chairman. Research for qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independent 
inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 


276 


Recreation 


749 Student Teaching in Physical Education in tho Socondary School and Sominar 

( 6 ) 

See page 269 for description and prerequisites. 

RECREATION 

(Offered by the Department of Health Education, 

Physical Education and Recreation) 

203 Rocroation Programs and Activltlos (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. Theory and activity course, leadership 
in recreation programs, activities in recreation agencies. Laboratory experiences 
and practice included. <4 hours activity) 


277 


SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING 


lOOA^l Introduction to Analy»is (3,3) 

Prerequisites: two years of high school algebra, one year of high school geome- 
try. Algebraic, exponential and trigonometric functions and relations. Coordinate 
geometry and vectors. Real and complex numbers. Designed to prepare students 
better for a first course in calculus. Does not carry graduation credit for engi- 
neering, mathematics, or science majors. 

101 Introduction to Enginooring (1) 

An introduction designed to familiarize the student with the nature, responsibili- 
ties and opportunities of the profession. 

103 Orophicol AnolytU (2) 

Graphics as fundamental means of communication in engineering analysis and 
design; development of spatial visualization; freehand sketching; descriptive geome- 
try and modem engineering drawing practice. Methods of engineering design and 
design project. Graphical computation; nomography, representation and analysis 
of empirical data. (6 hours lecture-laboratory) 

110A,I Tk« Mon-Mad* World (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Must be non-science, non-mathematics, non-engineering major; co- 
requisite: Egr 111A,B (laboratory). The methodology of the technological age. 
The use of models of the real world to arrive at rational decision making. O)ntrol, 
amplification, and feedback. 

111A,I Ttio Mo n-Modo World (1,1) 

(^requisite: Egr 110A3« Laboratory to accompany Egr 110A3- Simulation of 
real situations with models. 

201 Mochonics (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 150B and Physics 225A. An introductory development of 
the fundamentals of statics with emphasis on application to strength of materials. 

202 Proportios of Inginooring Motoriols (3) 

Prerequisites: Chem 101 and Egr 201. Scientific and engineering principles im- 
portant in the selection and design of engineering materials, variables influencing 
material properties, concepts of stress and strain, Hooke’s law. Equilibrium of 
rigid bodies, introduction to metallurg>'; material models; dislocations and other 
defects in solids, strengthening mechanisms, modes of failure. 

205 Digital Computotien (2) 

Corequisite: Math 150A. (Comprehensive coverage of FORTRAN IV followed 
by an introduction to numerical methods and the solution of elementary engi- 
neering problems on the digital computer. 

300 Eloctric Circuits (3) (FormoHy 203) 

Prerequisites: Physics 225B and Math 250; corequisite: Egr 300L. Ohm and 
Kirchhoff laws; mesh-current and nodal analyses methods; basic network theorems; 
transients in RL, RC and RLC circuits; phasors, sinusoidal analysis; current, voltage 
and power relationships in single phase circuits; complex frequency and S-plane 
plots; frequency response and resonance; and magnetically coupled circuits. 

300L Eloctric Circuit! Laboratory (1) (FormoHy 203L) 

Corequisite: Egr 300. Laboratory applications of Elgr 300. (3 hours laboratory) 


278 


Engineering 


301 Strength of Materials (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and Elgr 202. States of stress and strain. Analysis and de- 
sign of structural elements (pressure vessels, beams, torsion bars, springs), fracture 
criteria, statically indeterminate problems, energy methods, buckling of columns. 

302 Dynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and Egr 201. Kinematics and kinetics of particles and 
rigid bodies, Newton’s laws, work and energy, impulse and momentum. Solution 
of problenris by using vector approach is emphasized. 

303 Elactronics (3) 

Prerequisites: Elgr 300 and 300L; corequisite: 303L. Characteristics and applica- 
tions of the ideal diode, semiconductor materials and the p-n junction, field-effect 
transistors, bipolar-junction transistors, vacuum tubes; applications of electronic 
devices (rectifiers, clippers, clampers, amplifiers). 

303L EUctronics Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: Egr 303. Laboratory study of transistors, diodes, electron tubes, elec- 
tronic circuits. (3 hours laboratory) 

304 Thormodynomics (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and Egr 201. The study of thermodynamic properties, 
heat and work, the first and second laws of thermodynamics, the Carnot cycle, 
heat engines and refrigerators. 

305 Transport Procossos (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and Egr 201. The study of one-dimensional steady heat 
conduction, radiation heat transfer, fluid statics, ideal and real fluid flows, free 
and forced heat convection. 

306A Unified Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisite: Egr 202 or equivalent; corequisite: Egr 305. Observations and 
measurements in the laboratory as an introduction to the experimental method. 
Static and dynamic measurements are made on simple engineering systems (beams, 
columns, pendulum, gyroscopes) using mechanical and electrical transducers. Re- 
port writing is emphasized. (3 hours laboratory) 

30M Unifiod Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisites: Egr 305 and 306A. A continuation of Elgr 306A. More complex en- 
gineering systems are considered with fluid flow and thermal measurements re- 
quired. (3 hours laboratory) 

308 Enginooring Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 281 or permission of instructor; corequisite: E^r 205. Fourier 
series and integrals, complex variables, Laplace transform theory, and partial dif- 
ferential equations; engineering applications. 

309 Notworks and Transmission Linos (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 300 and 300L. Continuation of Egr 3()0. Two-port network 
theory, network topology, polyphase circuits, transmission line theory and match- 
ing. 

310 Eloctronic Circuits: Discrote and Integrated (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 303 and 303L; corequisite: Egr 312. Continuation of 303, 
multistage amplifiers and feedback, frequency characteristics of amplifiers, tuned 
amplifiers, frequency characteristics and stability of feedback amplifiers, oscil- 
lators and power amplifiers. 


279 


inglnmerlng 


311 rUld Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Physics 225B and Math 281. Fundamental concepts and experi- 
mental background underlying the formulation of electric, magnetic and electro- 
magnetic field theory. Electric and magnetic fields produced by charge and cur- 
rent distributions. Effect of magnetic, dielectric and conducting materials. Forces 
produced on charges, currents and material media. Electromagnetic and magneto- 
electric induction. Reduction of field theory to circuit theory. Gipacitance, in- 
ductance and resistance. 

313 Un*ar Syff«m Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 300, 302 and 308. Analysis of lumped linear physical systems, 
electrical and mechanical analogies, block diagrams, signal flow graphs, frequency 
response, and feedback concepts. 

315 llactronics and Circuits Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: Egr 310. Experimental study of active networks. (3 hours laboratory) 

316 Appliod Ttiormodynamks (3) 

Prerequisites: Chem 105, Egr 205 and 304. Continuation of Egr 304, additional 
coverage of power and refrigeration cycles. Maxwell’s relations, mixtures of real 
and ideal fluids, chemical reactions (emphasis on combustion), phase and chemical 
equilibrium. 

330 Matallurgy (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 202. Structure and properties of metals and alloys, influences 
of mechanical and thermal treatments, plastic deformation, work hardening and 
recr>^staliization, grain growth, alloy diagrams, solution hardening, diffusion harden- 
ing, precipitation hardening, the iron-carbon system, composite materials, brittle, 
creep and fatigue failures. 

333 Structural Analytic (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 201; corequisite: Egr 202. Analysis of beams, space misses, 
frames, arches. Analysis of statically indeterminate structures. Introduction to finite 
difference method in structural mechanics. 

334 Soil Mockanict and Foundations (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 201 and 301. Soil properties and soil action as related to 
problems encountered in engineering structures; compression shear strength, stabil- 
ity and lateral earth pressures. 

334L Soil Mochanics and Foundations Laboratory (1) 

Girequisite: Egr 324. Laboratory exercises supporting Egr 324. (3 hours lab- 
oratory) 

336 Structural Dotign (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 323. Elements of the design of steel, timber members. Con- 
nection details. Design of complete structures for both vertical and lateral loads. 

331 Mockanical iobavior of Motorials (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 202. I^asdc deformation mechanisms, treatment of plastic de- 
formation, fatigue, creep and fracture. C^ase studies. 

333 Introduction to Aorodynomics (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 305. Kinematics of fluid flow, classification of flow fields, Euler 
and Navier-Stokes equations, the Bernoulli equation, flow measurement, wind tun- 
nel testing laminar and turbulent flow through ducts of varying cross-section- 
aerodynamic forces, effect of Reynolds number and Mach number. 


280 


ingineering 


335 Mechanical Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 202 and 302; corequisite: Egr 335L. Kinematics and dynamics 
of mechanisms, analysis of linkages, gears, cams, etc. using analytical and graphical 
techniques, balancing. 

33SL Machanical Analysis Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite; Egr 335. Analytical and graphical techniques will be used in solving 
engineering type problems in mechanical desigrn. (3 hours laboratory) 

360 Elactrical Englnaaring Dasign Projacts Laboratory (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 310 and 312; within 20 units of graduation. The application of 
fundamental engineering principles to typical design problems in the field of 
electrical engineering. (6 hours laboratory) 

361 Mochanical and Aorospaco Dosign Projocts Laboratory (2) 

Prerequisite: within 20 units of graduation. The application of fundamental engi- 
neering principles to typical design problems in the mechanical/aerospace engineer- 
ing field. (6 hours laboratory) 

370 Sominar in Enginooring (1) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in engineering. The engineering profession, profes- 
sional ethics, and related topics. 

371 T#«hnical Sominar in Enginooring (1) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in engineering. Recent developments in engineering. 
Oral and written reports. 

37SA^ Eloctrical Enginooring Laboratory (3^3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 310 and 312. Laboratory investigations of electronic and 
electromechanical components and systems including experimental studies involving 
feedback control systems; analog computer studies. (6 hours laboratory) 

376A Mochanical Enginooring Laboratory (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 306B and 312. Experimental studies of dynamic systems, error 
analysis, simulation and solution of dynamic problems on the analog computer. 
(6 hours laboratory) 

3761 Mocha nicol Enginooring Laboratory (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 304 and 306B. A laboratory investigation of mass transfer, heat 
transfer, and thermodynamic phenomena and their interaction with mechanical 
systems. (6 hours laboratory) 

401 Dynamics of Mochinos (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 335. The study of masses, motions and forces in machines. 
Static forces, inertia forces, balancing of machines and the principles of the gyro- 
scope, mechanical vibrations, critical speeds are some of the topics covered. 

403 Digital Compotor Logic Dotlgn (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 205 or equivalent. Introduction to digital computers. Boolean 
algebra, number representations. Analysis, simplification and synthesis of combina- 
tional and sequential networks. 

403L Digital Tochniquot Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: Egr 402. Experimental study of digital logic and switching circuits. 
(3 hours laboratory) 

403 Computor Mothods hi Numorioal Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 205 and 308 or equivalent. The use of numerical methods and 
digital computers in the solution of algebraic, transcendental, simultaneous, ordi- 
nary and partial diBerendal equations. 


281 


Engineering 


404 Analog Compototion (2) 

Prerequisite: Egr 312; corequisite: Egr 404L. Basic analog computer elements, 
programming, the solution of linear and nonlinear problems, transfer function 
generation, simulation. 

404i Analog Computation Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: Egr 404. Experimental study of linear and nonlinear problems using 
an analog computer. Simulation studies of physical systems. (3 hours laboratory) 

405 Digital Compwtor Dosign and Organization (3) 

Prerequisites: Elgr 303 and 402. Digital computer organization; arithmetic opera- 
tions: addition, subtraction, multiplication, division; control unit: instruction format, 
types, acquisition, execution; memory unit: organization, types, hierarchies; input- 
output unit: methods, data organization. 

406 Dynamics Rosponso (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 205 and 312. Steady and transient oscillations, lumped and 
distributed parameter systems, vibration isolation and vibration absorption. 

406L Dynamic Rasponsa Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisite: Egr 376A; corequisite: Egr 406. Steady and transient response of 
dynamic and control systems, linear and nonlinear s>’stems, analog and digital 
simulation and computation. (3 hours laboratory) 

407 Transfor and Rato Procossos (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 205, 305 and 308. Analysis of two- and three-dimensional 
steady and unsteady heat conduction, radiation heat transfer, forced and free con- 
vection for interior and exterior surfaces, heat transfer with a change in phase and 
heat transfer in high-speed flow. 

403 Rainforcod Concrata Datign (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301 and 323. Theory of reinforced concrete. Design of rein- 
forced concrete slabs, beams, columns, buildings and bridges. Introduction to pre- 
stressed concrete, ultimate strength theory\ 

409 Intarmodiata Structural Datign (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 323, 326 and 408. Analysis of structural systems, such as build- 
ings, bridges. Various considerations leading to the flnal selection of a structural 
design scheme. Design philosophy, code interpretation. Design projects. 

410 Spaca Dynamics (3) 

Prer^uisite: Egr 312. Kinematics and dynamics of particles and rigid bodies, 
potential flelds, orbit theory, transfer ben^een orbits, rendezvous; introduction to 
gyroscopic instruments. 

411 Dynamics of Sfrvcturas (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301, 308 and 323, or equivalent. Free and forced vibrations of 
discrete s>'stems, response of structures to impulse loads and earthquakes. Matrix 
formulation and normal coordinates ana^-sis. \"ibration of beams. 

412 Thoery of ilasficlty (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301 and 308. The differential equations which govern the 
beha\nor of an elastic solid, and their applications to a variety of problems in two 
and three dimensions using various coordinate systems. 

413 Iloctromochonlcal Inorgy Convorsion (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 309 and 312. Basic principles of electromechanical energy con- 
version machinery and transducers. Magnetic circuits and transformers. Perform- 
ance and control of synchronous, induction and direct-current machines. 


282 


Engineering 


41 3L fUctrom«chonical in«rgy Conversion Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: Egr 413. Experimental study of electromechanical machinery and 
transducers. (3 hours laboratory) 

414 Matrix Analysis of Strvcturos (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301, 323 and 308 or equivalent. Introduction to matrix algebra; 
use of matrix formulation in the analysis of structures; flexibility and stiffness 
methods; use of the matrix method on a digital computer. 

415 Gas Dynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 304 and 305. Thermodynamics of compressible fluid flow, 
normal and oblique shocks, flow through converging>diverging passages, flow in 
ducts with heating or cooling, interaction of shocks and expansion waves. 

416 Paadback Control Systoms (3) 

Prerequisite: Elgr 312. Basic servomechanism characteristics; classification of 
feedback systems; static error coefficients; application of root-locus and frequency 
response methods to feedback control systems; introduction to state-space system 
description; forward path and feedback compensation methods. 

417 inginooring Economy (2) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in engineering. Development, evaluation and pres- 
entation of alternatives for engineering systems and projects using principles of 
engineering economy and cost benefit analysis. Elxamination of the relationshlfM 
beween the engineer and other members of the enterprise environment. Exami- 
nation of the engineer’s ethics, value systems and nonquantifiable inputs from the 
enterprise environment. 

413 Foyndotion Dosigfi (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 323, 326 and 408. Design loads for foundation structures. 
Design of footings, retaining walls, piled foundations, bulkheads, other waterfront 
strucnires. 

419 Eloctromagnotic Fiald Tboory (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 311. Continuation of Egr 311 to provide a greater depth and 
extension of coverage, energy in fields. Maxwell’s equations, boundary value prob- 
lems, propagation, guided waves. 

420 Limit Analysis of Strwctvros (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301 and 323. General theory of elastic-plastic state of materials; 
concept of yield hinges and yield lines; analysis of continuous beams, frames, plates. 

421 Mocbanical Dosign (2) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301 and 335; corequisite: Egr 42lL. The application of Ae 
principles learned in mechanics of rigid and deformable bodies to the proportioning 
of machine elements to engineering problems. 

421L Mocbanical Dosign Laborofory (1) 

Corequisite: Egr 421. Analysis, formulation and solution of engineering type 
problems encountered in mechanical design. (3 hours laboratory) 

423 inginooring Probability and Statistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 308, or consent of instructor. Engineering problems involving 
discrete and continuous random variables, probability distribution and density 
functions, introduction to stochastic processes, correlation functions and power 
spectral densities. 


283 


Engineering 


427 lnd«t«rminat« Strvctwr«f (Z) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301 and 323. The analysis of indeterminate structures, such as 
continuous beams, frames, grids, arches, trusses, curv^ed beams, using slope and 
deflection method, moment distribution method, elastic energy approach. Tem- 
perature effect, foundation settlement, secondary stresses. Nonprismatic members. 

490 of Stool Stnictoroft (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 301. Design of steel structures: design of built-up girders, 
moment connections, light gage metal members. Torsion and unsymmetrical bend- 
ing of beams, buckling of beams and columns. Design for wind and earthquake 
forces. The use of the latest AISC design code. 

492 Aorospoco Vohiclo Stnicturof (9) 

Prerequisites: Egr 205 and 301. Stress analysis of vehicle components, combined 
torsion, bending and shear; stability and strength of thin sheet members, com- 
pressive strength of sheet stringer panels, interaction curves. 

499 A«r»dyii«iiilca (9) 

Prerequisites: Egr 308 and 333. Theory of lift and drag. Thin airfoil theory, 
lifting lines and lifting surfaces, supersonic airfoils, similarity laws, slender-body 
theory. 

494 Direct iii«rgy Conversion (9) 

Prerequisites: Egr 203, 304 and 305. The direct conversion of heat to electrical 
energy, thermoelectric, thermionic and magnetohydrodynamic devices, solar and 
fuel cells. 

497 Propvlsion (9) 

Prerequisites: Egr 305 and 316. Analysis of the operation of flight vehicle pro- 
pi^ve systems, rockets, ramjets, turbojets, and turboprops, reciprocating engines 
with propellers, nuclear propulsion. 

440 Flight Vnhldn Pnrfomiancn <9) 

Prerequisites: Egr 305 and 333. Drag estimation of components of aircraft, air- 
craft performance, flight testing and performance reduction, introduction to the 
performance analysis of hovercraft and helicopters. 

441 Stability and Control of Flight Vohicles (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 312 and 333. The equations of motion of a rigid flight vehicle, 
flight path and orientation equations, small disturbance theory, static and dynamic 
stability, transient response and frequency response. 

449 iloctronic Communication Systoms (9) 

Prerequisite: Elgr 310. Principles of amplitude, angular and pulse modulation, 
study of representative communication s>’stems, consideration of the effects of 
noise on system performance. 

443L Iloctronic Communicotion Syitoms Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisite: Elgr 315; corequisite: Egr 443. Experimental study of detection, 
modulation and signal generation; VHP and UHF component and system studies. 
(3 hours laboratory) 

445 Puls# and Digital Circuits (9) 

Prerequisite: Egr 310. Analysis and design of active and passive circuits for the 
generation and processing of pulse, digital and switching waveforms. 

444 Radar Systoms (9) 

Prerequisite: Egr 423 and 443. The theory of radar measurements, detection and 
measurement in search radar, range — and doppler — tracking systems, M T I 
techniques. 


284 


inginemrlng 


455A3 Sofid-Stat« lUcfronict (3^) 

Prerequisites: Egr 303 and 311. Quantum mechanical principle, atomic structure, 
quantum statistics, crystal structure, energy level in solids, band theory, transport 
phenomena, conductivity and super conductivity, theory of intrinsic and extrinsic 
semiconductors, generation and recombination processes. Dielectric theory and 
materials, magnetization density, diamagnetism, paramagnetism, ferromagnetism, 
antiferromagnetism. Ferrimagnetism theory and materials. Para and ferromagnetic 
resonance. Illustrative applications to devices. 

460 Pailwr* of ingiii*«ring Mat»rialf (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 202 and 301. Engineering and microscopic approaches, fu- 
ture testing, initiation and propagation of cracks, stress concentration, dislocation, 
fatigue, creep, stress corrosion, cracking and hydrogen embrittlement. 

461 Theory of EHslocotions (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 202 and 308 or senior standing in physics or chemistry. Nawre 
of dislocations and their influence in plastic deformation and fracture of materials, 
straight dislocations, curved dislocations, interaction of dislocations. 

462L Inginooring Motollwrgy Loborotory (1) 

Prerequisite: Elgr 202; corequisite: Egr 320. Study of microstructure of materials, 
cold work and heat treatment, use of microscope and sample preparation, fatigue 
testing and failure analysis. (3 hours laboratory) 

473 iRtredtfction to Nwdear ingineering (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing in engineering. ^ introdurtoiy course 
on the engineering aspects of nuclear energy, nuclear engineering principles and 
elementary reactor theory, reactor design considerations and certain applications. 

47S Ingin*«ring Acouftlcs (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in engineering. An introduction to the theory of 
sound. The generation, propagation, scattering, and absorption of acousdc waves 
will be treated mathematically; diffraction of sound and interaction with other 
forms of radiation. 

491 AiMlytical Methods in Inginooring (3) (Pormoriy 591) 

Prerequisite: Egr 308 or consent of the instructor. Application of advanced 
analytical methods in the solution of complicated problems in civil, electrical 
and mechanical engineering. 

499. Indopondonf Study (1*3) 

Prerequisite: approval of study plan by adviser. Study of specialized topics in 
engineering selected in consultation with the instructor and earned out under his 
supervision. May be repeated for credit. 

501 MIcrowavos (3^) 

Prerequisites: Egr 309, 403 and 419. Review of concepts underlying Maxwell’s 
equations, propagation through passive, active, linear, nonlinear, isotropic, aniso- 
tropic, homogeneous and inhomogeneous media with and without wave guiding 
structures. Orthogonal modes in waveguide and cavity resonators, microwave cir- 
cuit theory, micowave devices. Generation and transmission of microwave energy. 

503 Iw f ormetiow Thuory and Coding (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 423. Information measures, probabilistic studies of the tra^ 
mission and encoding of information. Shannon’s fundamental theorems, coding 
for noisy channels. 


285 


Engineering 


504 Linear Network Synfli^sit (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 309 and 312. Generalized analysis methods of passive net- 
works, modem synthesis procedures for realizing driving-point and transfer-func- 
tions of approximation methods in filter design. 

505 Nonlinear Control Systomt (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 416. Analysis of nonlinear control systems using linearization 
and perturbation techniques; describing function and phase plane techniques; 
Lyapunov’s stability criterion. 

506 Advoncod Digitol Compwtor Syitoms <3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 405. High speed arithmetic design, fault tolerance and fault 
defection, time-sharing, real-time and multi-processor computer systems. 

507 StotUfkol Communication Tlioory (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 423 and 443. Transmission of random signals through linear sys- 
tems, noise considerations, detection theory, optimum receivers. 

503 Nitormodlato Fluid Mockonict (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 308 and 333. An investigation of potential flow theory in- 
cludii^ the study of complex potentials, the Joukowsld transformation, sources 
and sinks, and the theorem of Schwarz and Christoffel. 

509 Ttioary of Hatas and Skalli (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301 and 491 or equivalent. Theory of plates bent by transverse 
loads; applications to circular, rectangular, other shapes. General theory of thin 
shells; shells of revolution; shells of translation. 

510 Numarical and Approximata Mathods in Stuctural Mochanict (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 308 and 205 or equivalent, graduate standing in engineering. 
The use of finite difference approximation in the analysis of beam on elastic 
supports, arches, plates, shells, vibration and buckling of beams. Numerical solution 
using relaxation and iteration method, digital computer programs. 

511 Advanced Dynamics C3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 312. The dynamics of particles and rigid bodies by the use of 
the formulations of the laws of mechanics due to Newton, Euler, Lagrange and 
Hamilton; applications. 

513 Oyrodynamics (3) 

Prerequisite: Elgr 312. Frames of reference, Eulerian angles, spinning disks and 
rotors, gravity effects, gyroscopes, control of forced and free vibrations. 

513 Optimal Control Systoms (3) 

Prer^uisite: Egr 416. Optimal control theory using the calculus of variations, 
dynamic programming, and Pontryagin’s Maximum Principle. 

514A3 Softwaro Systoms Dosign <3^) 

Prerequisites: Egr 402 and QM 464 or equivalent. Organization and design of 
software s>'stems for both concurrent and time shared processes. Design of system 
components for assembly, compilation and interpretation. 

515A3 Qwantvm floctronlcs (3/3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 403 and 419. Electroluminescence, interaction of radiation and 
matter, gas lasers, solid state laser, injection lasers, holography, electro-optic effects, 
non-linear optics, laser systems, noise and applications. 


286 


ingineering 


516 Advon<«d Principl*! of H«ot Transfer (9) 

Prerequisite: Egr 407. A study of advanced principles in convective and radiation 
heat transfer. Exact and approximate solutions of thermal boundary layer problems. 
A study of energy transfer in absorbing and emitting media. 

517 Theory of Inokisficlty (3) 

Prerequisites: Elgr 412 and 491 or equivalent. General equations of inelastic con- 
tinua; theory of plasticity; three dimensional yield conditions and flow laws; theory 
of linear viscoelasticity; applications. 

Sit Advoncod Fluid Mochonlcs (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 508. A study of the foundations of stability theory and the 
general properties of the Orr-Sommerfeld equation, investigation of turbulent 
boundary layers, turbulent flow through pipes and free turbulent flows (jet and 
wakes). 

519 Advoneud Structural Machanlct (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 301, 323 and 491 or equivalent. Use of potential energy prin- 
ciple in structural analysis; direct and indirect method of calculus of variations; 
nonlinear problems of large deformation; beam on elastic foundations; special topics 
in structu^ mechanics. 

520 IncompraMibla ioundary Loyar Thoory (3) 

Prerequisites: Elgr 333 and 407. A study of the fundamental equation of motion 
and continuity applied to viscous fluids (Navier-Stokes equations). The develop- 
ment of the boundary layer equations and the study of viscous drag, investigation 
of boundary layer control theory to reduce viscous drag. 

521A^i Afitanno Tfioory (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 309, 403 and 419. Polarization, radiation patterns; impedance 
characteristics; plane, cylindrical and spherical waves, electric and magnetic dipoles; 
wire antennas, traveling wave antennas; broad band antennas; analysis and synthesis 
of arrays; parabolas; lenses; radomes; feed systems; scattering; multiple beam 
antennas; synthetic antennas; phased arrays; diffraction; solution by superposition, 
orthogonal expansion, integral equation and variational techmques; antenna meas- 
urements. 

522 Thoory of Hydrodynamic Lubrication (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 333 and 407. Introduction to the theory and design of fluid 
film bearings. 

523 Solid Stato Dovicos and Intopratod Circuits (3) 

Prerequisite: Elgr 455 A. Diodes, bipolar transistors, junction and insulated-gate 
field effect transistors. Integrated circuit desigrn principles. Bipolar and MOS inte- 
grated circuits, monolithic and hybrid integrated circuits. 

524 Advancod Thormodynamics (3) 

Prerequisite; Egr 316. Equilibrium and stability criteria, chemical thermody- 
namics, multiple reaction systems, ionization, equihbrium composition. 

525 Comprossiblo Boundary Layor Thoory (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 333 and 407. Introduction to the study of compressible viscous 
flow analysis, the compressible boundary layer solutions. 

530 Advancod Strongth of Matorials (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301 and 308. Energy methods, principle of virtual work, appli- 
cations to structures, cylinders, shrink fits, curved beams, elastic and inelastic 
buckling of columns. 


287 


Engineering 


S4S Advanced Sfmctural Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 408 and 491 or equivalent. Analysis and design of thin shell 
structures; folded plates structures; suspended cable structures. 

547 Advanced Dynamics of Structuras (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 411 and 491 or equivalent. Vibration of beams, plates and 
shells. Dynamic response of continuous s>’stems in general. Introduction to random 
vibrations. Topics in nonlinear vibrations. 

549 Ttioory of llostic Stability (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301, 530 and 491 or equivalent. Critical loads of columns, beam 
columns, plates, shells; lateral stability of beams, torsional buckling of open sections, 
stability of the frames; dynamic stability of elastic systems. 

553A/1 Plasma Dynamics (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 403 and 419. Orbit theory, collision theory, transport prop- 
erties, equilibrium, oscillations, fluctuations, thermionic energy conversion, plasma 
containment, instabilities, fusion power, plasma propulsion, hypersonics, plasma 
sheaths and wakes, scattering from plasmas, wave propagation through plasmas, 
energy conversion. 

554 Hybrid Computation (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 403 and 404. Hybrid analog-digital computer systems, A/D 
and D/A converters and other linkage equipment, application of hybrid com- 
puters to solving partial differential equations and modeling, error analysis. 

555 Ilactromognatic fluid Thuory (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 419. Relativistic electrodynamics, retarded potentials, radiation 
from arbitrarily moving charges, Cerenkov radiation, cyclotron radiation, propa- 
gation in dispersive media, space charge dynamics, advanced boundary value 
problems. 

557 Samplud-Oafa Systums (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 416. Analysis of sampled -data and digital control systems, 
using Z-transforms and state-variable methods, consideration of stability. 

559 Activu Nutwork Syntbusis (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 504. Active devices as neruork elements, analysis of active net- 
works with controlled sources, scattering parameters, sensitivity, realizability con- 
ditions. 

569 Orbital Mucbanict (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 410. The three-body problem, geometr>' of orbits, transfers, 
perturbation, stability and oscillation, rendezvous. 

570 Suminar in iluctrical Enginuuring (1-^) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and 12 units of graduate coursework. Special 
topics and current developments of primar>' interest in the field of electrical 
engineering. This course, with different content, may be retaken for additional 
credit. 

573 Aurospacu Ouldancu 5yttumf (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 410. Principles of inertial, stellar-inertial and doppler-inerdal 
guidance and control mechanization equations; theory and error analyses 

of inertial and optical sensors, g^yro-stabilized platforms and complete naWgadon 
sy^ems; theory and mechanizadon of space vehicle navigation, guidance and con- 
trol systems. 


288 


Engineering 


575 Kin«fic Theory and Statittical Tharmodynamict (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 316. Statistical study of ideal gases, kinetic theory, statistical 
mechanics, electron gas, thermionic emission, photon and phonon gases. 

577 Raliability Analysis of Sfrvcturas (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 323 and 423. Application of statistics and theory of probabil- 
ity to the problems of safety of structures. 

531 Linaar Systams Inginaaring (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 312 and graduate standing. Classification of systems, principles 
of time domain analysis, matrices, linear spaces, analog simulation, state space, 
matrix representation of state equations, review of the Laplace transform systems 
with random signals, stability of systems. 

532 Estimation Thoory in 5ystams Inginaaring (3) 

Prerequisites: Elgr 423 and 581. Linear estimation theory, Gauss-Markoff, least 
squares, Kalman, maximum likelihood; Kalman estimation for discrete dynamic sys- 
tems, smoothing, filtering, and prediction, Kalman estimation for continuous dy- 
namic systems. 

535 Optimiaotion Tachniquas in Systams Inginaaring (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 403. Optimization of functions of several variables, Lagrange 
multipliers, gradient techniques, linear programming, and the simplex method, non- 
linear and dynamic programming. 

537 Oparotionol Analysis Tachniquas in Systams InginaaHng (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 423 and 585. Operational research models; applications of 
probability theory to reliability, quality control, waiting line theory, Markov 
chains; Monte Carlo methods. 

592 Advancad inginaaring Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 312 or equivalent. Ordinary differential equations with variable 
coefficients, Bessel and other functions, engineering application of partial differ- 
ential equations in elasticity, vibrations, heat and electrical conducaon, fluid me- 
chanics, electromagnetic waves; variational method and optimization of functions 
with multiple variables. 

596A^^,D Spacial Topics In inginaaring (1-3) 

Prerequisite: corresponding general courses in same subject area. Selected topics 
in specialized areas of engineering covering recent developments. 

597 Oradwata Rrofocts (1-3) 

Prerequisite: permission of adviser. 

593 THasis (1-6) 

Prerequisite: permission of adviser. 

599 Indapandant Gradwota Rasaarch (1—3) 

Prerequisite: classified graduate status. Open to graduate students only by per- 
mission of Engineering School Graduate Committee. May be repeated for credit 
only upon approval of this committee. 

701 A3 Raviaw of Appliad Mathamatics for Enginaars (33) 

Review of elementary calculus, ordinary differential equations, Laplace trans- 
forms, vector analysis, Fourier series, matrices, and partial differential equations. 


289 


DEPARTMENT OF ETHNIC STUDIES 


101 Introdwction to Ithnk Studies (3) 

A survey of the basic concepts and problems involved in an examination of the 
perspective through which black and brown people have come to see themselves 
in terms of their own heroes, culture and contributions to societies in which they 
live and world society in general. 

102 CommiMiicotion Skills (3) 

A methodical presentation of the basic communication skills emphasizing writing 
and communication skills stressing the use of idioms, proper pronunciation, intona- 
tion and correct English patterns of thought. 

103 Cemmuidcation Skills (3) 

Prerequisite: Ethnic Studies 102 or consent of the department. A methodical 
presentation of the basic communication skills emphasizing writing and communi- 
cation skills stressing the use of idioms, proper pronunciation, intonation, and 
correct English patterns of thought. 

213 Tk* Spanish Langwaga in tka Unitad Sfatas (3) 

A methodical presentation of the Spanish language as it is spoken in the United 
States today. The first part of the course is designed to improve the basic com- 
munication skills of everyday Spanish to students who are from Spanish speaking 
backgrounds; emphasis will be placed on vocabulary building, syntactical analysis 
and conversation. The second part emphasizes written expression. This course is 
designed for Mexican-Americans, but it is not restricted to them. 

220 Maxican Horitaga (3) 

Introduction to the basic characteristics of the Mexican and esp^ially the 
Mexican- American society and culture and its ramifications in the United States 
today. The survey course covers the period of 1519 to the present day. A special 
emphasis is placed on the arts, literature and history of Mexico and the Mexican- 
American in the United States. 

230 Tka Amarican Indian (3) 

A study of the American Indian experience in the United States as seen from 
the Indian's point of view in comparison with that of the white man. Special 
attention will be focussed on the problems of American Indians today. 

231 Swrvay of Afro-Amarican Litaratvra (3) 

A study of the literary contributions to American culture by black Americans 
from slavcr>^ to the present. Elmphasis will be on contemporary’ black writers and 
recurring themes of protest and the quest for identity. 

237 Maxican and Maxican-Amaricon Litaratura in Translation <3) 

A survey course in Mexican and Mexican-American literature in Elnglish. Special 
emphasis will be given to presenting the point of view of the Mexican-American. 
Panel discussions wnll emphasize the exj>osure of our students to the ideas of the 
Mexican and Mexican-American literature as seen by the artistic eyes of the 
Mexican-American. 

240 Elack History: Block and Wkita Varslons (3) 

A comparative analysis of the history of the black man in using black and white 
historical writings. 


290 


Ethnic Studies 


250 Cwltwrol Scan of Opprotiion (3) 

An examination of the process of socialization of the black and brown man in 
America and its imprints upon his psyche. 

260 Culturol Idontity of tho Contomporory Moxicon and ilock Mon (3) 

An examination and study of the “identity crisis” or lack of it in young Mexican 
and black individuals in the United States. An in depth analysis of the changing 
points of view of the Mexican toward acculturation. 

301 Introduction to Afro-Amoricon Culturo (3) 

An introduction to Afro-American culture. A survey of African cultural charac- 
teristics in the New World, as they relate to contemporary events, including art, 
ideas, dance and literature. 

302 Anciont Moxicon Culturo (3) 

A historical and cultural survey of the principal pre-Columbian cultures of 
Mexico and their significance for Mexican society. 

303 Anciont and Modom African Culturo (3) 

Prerequisite: limited to advanced sophomores and upper division students. This 
course will attempt a survey of the African cultures (specifically West African 
contrasted with East African) before the period of exploration and after coloniza- 
tion. A look at the present-day American black culture will try to estimate the 
carry-over of cultures. 

305 Tho Chicono Family (3) 

The Chicano family development as an American social institution. Historical 
and cross-cultural perspectives. The socio and psycho dynamics of the Chicano 
family. 

306 Barrio Studios (3) 

Prerequisites: Elthnic Studies 101 and/or 220 or the consent of the professor. 
Students are given classroom instruction covering the major characteristics of the 
barrio and are then supervised in their fieldwork in the local barrios. An analysis 
of the barrio or agency will be made after fieldwork is completed. (2 hours lecture, 
3 hours fieldwork) 

307 Barrio Studios (3) 

Prerequisite: Elthnic Studies 306. Students are given classroom instruction cover- 
ing the major characteristics of the barrio and are then supervised in their field- 
work in the local barrios. An analysis of the barrio or agency will be made after 
fieldwork is completed. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours fieldwork) 

309 Tho Black Family (3) 

A study of the American social conditions that shaped the black family from the 
African cultural patterns that were destroyed during slavery to the family that 
exists today. Special attention will be given to the roles of poverty, racism and 
discrimination. 

345 EuropO/ Africa and Amorica in Modorn Wostorn Civilisation (3) 

A historical examination of the interrelationships and interactions of European, 
African and American cultures. Particular emphasis will be placed upon the mutual 
effects of slavery, colonization and self-determination upon various cultures. 

430 Cand6n do la Rasa (3) 

Prerequisite: reading knowledge of Spanish. Survey and analysis of the Nahuad, 
Mexican and Mexican-American literature from the pre-Columbian period to the 


291 


ifhnie Sfudiet 


present. The latter pan of the course will focus on contemporary Mezican- 
American writers. 

499 Study (1^) 

Prerequisites: senior level or acceptance of the subject by the department chair- 
man and the professor (s) in charge of directing the study. An opponunity to do 
independent study under the guidance of the Ethnic Studies Department, of a 
subject of special interest to the student. 


292 


SCHOOL OF INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDIES 


AMERICAN STUDIES 

201 Introduction to Amoricon Studios (3) 

With the concept of culture as a unifying principle, this course will focus on 
four separate time periods in order to provide the framework for an understanding 
of American civilization. Several different kinds of documents will be used to 
illustrate the nature and advantages of an interdisciplinary approach. 

301 Tho Amoricon Choroctor (3) 

Prerequisite: American Studies 201 or History 170A or B or consent of instruc- 
tor. An intensive examination of the changing national character. Reading assign- 
ments will reflect an interdisciplinary approach, ranging from poetry to sociology. 
Some attention will be paid to the American Negro and Indian in addition to the 
transplanted European, and foreign perspectives on the American will be considered. 

350 Suminor In Thuery and Matkod of Amarican Sfwdias (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 and 301; or History 170A or B; or consent 
of the instructor. This course is designed to provide the American studies major 
with an understanding and appreciation of methodology, theories of society and 
images of man as they effect American studies contributions to scholarship. 

401 Prosaminor In Amarican Stvdias (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 and 301; or History 170A or B; or consent 
of the instructor. The proseminar is designed to permit students to examine the 
relationship between theory and application. An emphasis will be placed on 
analytic readings and research. Topics will be announced each semester. Some 
examples might be: The novelist as historian or the concept of postindustrial society. 

403 Raligion In th# Davalopmant of Amarican Socioty (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 and 301; or History 170A or B; or consent of 
the instructor. An intensive study of the changing role of religion in shaping, re- 
flecting, and challenging dominant American values and institutions. The course 
will focus on the 19th and 20th centuries, although some attention will be paid 
to the colonial period. 

499 Indapaiidant Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects in American studies to be taken with the consent 
of the instructor and ^e program coordinator. May be repeated for credit. 

INTERDISCIPLINARY CENTER 
(Offered by the Center) 

201 A^B Honors Colloquium: Contomporary Civilization (3) 

An interdisciplinary program to provide general education requirements for 
Honors students. The course is organized around six main themes: the “Death 
of Czod”, the loss of a world picture, what is history? the triumph of the material, 
the triumph of the therapeutic, and understanding media. Relevant readings in 
Nietzsche, Camus, Einstein, Russell, Whitehead, Toynbee, Popper, Marx, Freud, 
McLuhan, et aL Admission by consent of the instructor or the Honors Committee. 


293 


Interdisciplinary Center 


301 Psychological Approochot to Lltoroturo (3) 

A development of the work of I. A. Richards begun in his Practical Criticism. 
The course’s primary focus is on the psychological experimentation relevant to 
understanding errors of interpretation, panicularly interpretation of literary texts. 
Several experimental approaches to understanding errors in interpretation will be 
described and illustrated, including those of Piaget (errors of the child), Asch 
(structural factors of personality), and Adorno. Current therapeutic techniques 
for the development of attitude change will be discussed. 

303 Yofo (3) 

A study of Yoga: its theories, literature, and practices; some methods of medita- 
tion uught; its relevance for today’s world. 

310 Hwmon Soxwollty (3) 

The concept of sexuality will be explored as it relates to man, including data 
regarding sexual practices, their biological and social implications, and their rela- 
tionship to population and the survival of the species. 

31 S Josxi Post, Proftonf and Futuro (3) 

Jazz — its primitive and European roots; cross-cultural description of improvisa- 
tion. Lectures, demonstrations, some concerts. 

313 Choroctor and Canllictt Tha Strvggla far Awfanamy (3) 

An exploration — via lectures, discussion and group encounter — into the problems 
and techniques of resolving the conflicts created by the individual’s struggle to 
achieve and maintain personal autonomy while living successfully in an automated 
world. Topics for exploration include the changing concepts of masculinity and 
femininity, sexual morality, encountering others. 

3S1 Pavarty In Amarica (3) 

A study of the extent, causes, consequences and possible cures of poverty in 
modem America. Poverty will be treated as, among other things, a political issue, 
and spokesmen from various ix)iitical groups will lecture on their organization’s 
approach to the jwverty question. Lectures, discussion, some documentary Aims. 

402 Art, Litarotvra and Hi# Davalapmant af Cansclautnass (3) 

An application of theories of consciousness, particularly existential and Jungian, 
to poems, paintings and musical compositions. Intensive encounters between the 
individual and the art work; opportunities at checking one’s own responses against 
those of others and exploring the signiflcance of the differences, (^me as Com- 
parative Literature 402) 

403 Tlia Quast far Saif: East and West (3) 

A comparative study of quest narratives which exemplify the Elastem and West- 
ern man’s search for self-identity and fulfillment. Religious, psychological and 
literary’ texts will be used to help illuminate the comparison. (Same as Comparative 
Literature 403 and Anthropology 416) 

404 Tha Notwra af Lovat Plata ta Jayc# (3) 

An examination of the various dimensions of love as found in notable philo- 
sophical, psychological, and literary works. (Same as Comparative Literature 404) 

405 PsycHoanalytit and Drama (3) 

A detailed study" of Freud’s topographic and structural theories and their recent 
elaborations; the application of theory to selected readings in dramatic literature 
mainly, but also to some Action, poetry, and Alms. (Same as Comparative Litera- 
ture 405) 


294 


Lcrtlff American Studies 


410 S«lf-Actualixation Group: ixporioncot in Human Orourth (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive small group experiences will assist 
each individual in unleashing his own growth potential and accelerating his own 
developmental processes. Self-actualization and related existential and humanistic 
concepts will be explored in depth, using recently developed methods. Lectures, 
individual assignments supplement the class experience. Pass/no pass grading. 

411 Group Procotf and Loadorship (3) 

The impact of the individual personality on other persons in a group and what 
takes place in a group of people; the structure and process of a group; the influ- 
ence of leadership. The course will provide learning experiences involving theories 
and concepts of those forces operating in a group situation, as well as a first-hand 
experiencing of one*s own self in a group; feedback on how others see one in a 
group relation; and involvement in group dynamics. 

421 Graat 19th Cantury Ravolutionarias: Darwin, Marx, Fraud (3) 

The course will consider the three great 19th century revolutionaries, Darwin, 
Marx and Freud, with a purpose of discovering the force of their impact on 20th 
century society. Their major literary works will be discussed and the students will 
study their biographies to determine why they became revolutionaries. 

422 Jawish and Comparativa Mytticitm (3) 

A description and analysis of Jewish mysticism, and its comparison with other 
systems of mysticism from different cultures. (Same as Anthropology 422) 

451 Philosophical Backgrounds of Modam Litaratura (3) 

The connection between representative writers and such thinkers and philoso- 
phers as Freud, Spengler, Schopenhauer, Nietzsche, and Kierkegaard. (Same as 
English 451 and Philosophy 451) 

452 Studant Protast (3) 

The dynamics of student protest with major attention given to contemporary 
activities in the United States. 

470 Saminan Intardisciplinary Issuas (3) 

Concentrated study each year of a different key issue approached from an 
interdisciplinary view and frequently combined with two or three courses in other 
departments to form a nine-hour block. In 1970-71, (Contemporary Values. 

499 Indapandant Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects to be taken with the consent of the instructor and 
the program coordinator. May be repeated for credit. 

799 Indapandant Study (1—3) 

Supervised research projects to be taken with the consent of the instructor and 
the program coordinator. May be repeated for credit. 

LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES 

All courses within the Latin American studies program originate in other depart- 
nients within the college. Students should refer to the department originating the 
course for the description. 

Anthropology 

322 Paoplas of MasoomaHca (3) 

325 Paoplas of South Amarica (3) 


295 


Linguistics 


O^ogmphy 

434 Orography of Latin Amorico (3) 

444 Man and Gooprapliic Rolotionships in Latin AmoHca (3) 

Nittory 

350A Colonial Latin AmoHca (3) 

350A Ropublican Latin AmoHca (3) 

450 Chango In Contomporary Latin AmoHca (3) 

453 History of Moxico (3) 

454 History of Argontina, Brazil, Chilo (3) 

Political Scionco 

437 Oovornmont and Politics — Latin AmoHca (3) 

43B Latin Amorican Intorost Groups (3) 

443 Intomotionol Rolations and Probloms of Latin AmoHca (3) 
Portugwoso 

315 Introduction to Brazilian Culturo and Civilization (3) 

325 Contomporary Brazilian Civilization (3) 

Sociology 

440 Comparativo Institutions: Lotin AmoHca (3) 

Spanish 

314 Introduction to Spanish AmoHcan Civilization <3) 

440 Spanish AmoHcan Litoraturo from Tho Conquost to 1BSS (3) 

441 Spanish AmoHcan Litoraturo from Modomismo to tho Prosont (3) 
iconomics 

330 Comparativo Economic Systoms (3) 

333 Economic Dovolopmont: Aanalysis and Caso Studios (3) 

411 Intomotional Trodo (3) 

LINGUISTICS 

341 Phonotics (3) 

(Same as Speech Communication 341, Theatre 341) 

375 Philosophy of Language (3) 

(Same as Philosophy 375) 

402 Phonetic Analysis of Speech (3) 

(Same as Speech (Communication 402) 

404 General Semantics (3) 

(Same as Speech Communication 404) 


296 


LinguIsfUs 


406 D«tcriptiv« Lhigwisfics (3) 

Introduction to the nature of human linguistic behavior. Phonological, morpho- 
logical, and syntactic structures of languages are examined through the use of 
techniques developed for the description of such structures. 

410 Lcinguag* and Culfura (3) 

(Same as Anthropology 410) 

411 iilingualitm (3) 

The study of the personal and social development of non-English speaking com- 
munities as reflected in the conflict between the language of the home and the 
language of the conununity. Special emphasis is placed on the Spanish-speaking 
communities of California and on the need for and means of achieving bilingual 
educational programs for the maintenance of the Hispanic cultural heritage in the 
American environment. 

412 Sociolinguistics (3) 

The study of social dialects in relation to the surrounding communities, with 
special attention to black dialects in America. Topics include social stratifleation, 
acculturation, language maintenance, standardization, language planning and lan- 
guage change. 

490 Linguistics in Roiotion to Othor Dlscipllnos (1-4) 

The mutually contributing relationships between linguistics and the social and 
natural sciences, literature, music, psychology, philosophy, nuthematics, and lan- 
guage pedagogy. To be taken for one unit of credit for four semesters by majors 
in linguistics. (3pen to all upper division students. 

499 Indapandunt Stud/ (1-3) 

Supervised projects in linguistics to be taken with the consent of the Department 
Chairman as a means of meeting special curricular problems. Selection of topic to 
be studied varies with needs of the students enrolled. May be repeated for credit. 

501 Ruftuarck Mathods and iibliograpky (1) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and Linguistics 406, or equivalent. Introduction 
to principal books, periodicals, and collections in general linguistics, specifle lan- 
guage and related flelds; techniques of preparing research papers and field reports 
in linguistics. 

504 Graduota 5aNiinan Ganaral Samantics (3) 

(Same as Speech Communication 504) 

505 5«minan Rlianatics and Rhonofnics (3) 

Prerequisites: Andiropology or Linguistics 406 or consent of instructor. Study 
of various kinds of phonological systems that occur in languages. Emphasis on 
practical problems in the phonetic and phonemic analysis of selected language 
data. (Same as Anthropology 505) 

507 Saminar: Morphosyntax (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology or Ling^uisnes 406 or consent of instructor. The 
study of word formation and sentence construction in a variety of languages. 
Application of immediate constituent, tagpnemic, and tranformational analysis to 
selected linguistic data. (Same as Anthropology 507) 

503 Thooriaf of 5yiitax (3) 

Prerequisites: Linguistics 507 or consent of instructor. Intensive and practical 
study of contemporary theories of grammar, with special emphasis on transforma- 
tion^ generative, logical and electromechanical bases and techniques of utterance 
analysis. 


297 


Religious Studies 

SI 5 Pfycholingulstics (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406 or equivalent. An examination of the behavioral, 
conceptual, motivational and social aspects of language, emphasizing recent develop- 
ments in information theory, behavioral theory, and linguistic theory as applied to 
human communication. Linguistic ontogeny, non-verbal communication, and com- 
municative failure will also be discussed. 

530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisites: Linguistics 406, its equivalent, or consent of the instructor. The 
history of language, also including principles and techniques for the historical study 
and classification of individual languages and language families, writing systems, 
lexicostadsdcal methods, and linguistic geography. 

540 Oradwoto Sominan Exporimontal Phenotics (3) 

(Same as Speech C^ommunication 540) 

534 Linguistics and Roadlng (3) 

(Same as Education 584) 

593 Fiold MUthods (3) 

Prerequisites: Linguistics 505 and 507 or consent of instructor. Methods of analysis 
and description of language structures. Data elicited from informants will be 
analyzed and described. Controlled study of a live informant's language. 

597 Profact (2) 

The preparation and completion of an approved project. 

599 Indapandant Oraduata Rasaarch (1-«3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent to the chairman. May be repeated 
for credit. 


RELIGIOUS STUDIES 

303 Rabbinic Litaratura: Th« Writings of Law and Loro (3) 

The historical, sociological and cultural background of the beginnings of the 
Talmud. The Talmud as one basis of modem ethics. Special stress will be laid on: 
man as a moral being, free will, labor, justice, truth and truthfulness, peace, charity, 
parents and children, country and community. 

304 Roligion and tho Cultural Crisis (3) 

The role of religion in contemporary cultural crises and in history with such 
topics as the development of the family unit, sexual relationships and forms of 
worship. 

305 Habraw Prophats (3) 

Lectures and seminar discussions dealing with the cultural, historical, values of 
and contemporary application of Isaiah, Second Isaiah, Jeremiah, Ezekiel and the 
minor prophets. (Same as C>)mparative Literature 305) 

306 Wisdom Litoraturo (3) 

The interpretation of values in Proverbs, Job, Ecclesiastes, Ecclesiasticus, the 
Wisdom of Solomon, Egyptian and Mesopotamian Wisdom writers as applied to 
the modem world. 

307 Dimensions of Religion (3) 

The great themes of religious thought viewed objectively and subjectively in 
history' and in the present day are studied as a basis for understanding reli^ous 
relevance and application. Seminar and discussion presentation. 


298 


Russian Area Studies 


30t Judaiffii! From th« ••ginning to th« MiddU Ag«f (3) 

The historical role of the religion of the Jews will be studied and the distinc- 
tion will be drawn between the various forms of contemoprary Judaism: Ortho- 
dox, Conservative, and Reformed from the beginning to the Middle Ages. 

309 Judaitm: From th« MiddU Ag«t to tho ProMnt (3) 

The histoiy and contemporary social significance of the religion of the Jews 
from the Middle Ages to the present, with emphasis upon contemporary Judaism. 

310 Hiatory and Dovolopmont of Christianity (3) 

An introduction to the Jewish background of Christianity, the person and work 
of Jesus, and the development of the church from the days of the apostles down 
to the present ecumenical era of Christendom. 

406 Anxioty, Ooilt and Froodom (3) 

The distinction between psychiatry and religious methods of understanding basic 
human emotions will be examined together with an analysis of terms such as 
“authority”, “God”, “faith”, “forgiveness”, “sin”, “error”, “repentance”, “sex”, and 
“absolution”. 

410 Thoology and Contomporary Ufo (3) 

Prerequisites: Religious Studies 310 or consent of the instructor. An exploration 
of major theological issues, and their relevance for contemporary social problems: 
God, nature, man, sin, revelation, reconciliation; culture and creativity, marriage 
and divorce, poverty, war, race, international relations, political and economic 
authoritarianisms. 

420 Tho Worlds of Martin iubor, 'Tho Philosophy and 
Thoology of Martin iwbor" (3) 

A detailed and critical study of Buberis views concerning relationship of man 
to God and man to man. 

425 Roiigion in WosUm Cvitvro (3) 

An examination of groups and individuals whose writings and ideas have been 
formative in the development of Western culture from classic times to the present. 

435 Mafor Contomporary Roligiows Thinkors (3) 

Prerequisites: Philosophy 110 or its equivalent. A detailed and critical study of 
religious thinkers contemporary to the modem world. For 1970-71, the topic will 
be The Severed Worlds of Abraham Joshua Heschel. 

436 Ma|or Contomporary Roligious Topics (3) 

Prerequisites: Philosophy 110 or its equivalent. An in-depth inquiry into modem 
topics of a religious nature related to social, polidcal, psychological trends. 

499 Indopondont Stwdy (1-3) 

Supervised research projects in religious studies to be taken with the consent 
of the instructor and the program coordinator. May be repeated for credit. 

RUSSIAN AREA STUDIES 

All courses within the Russian area studies program originate in other depart- 
ments within the college. Students should refer to the department originating the 
course for description. 

Comparativo Litorotvro 

373 Mastort of RumIor Litoratoro (3) 


299 


Social Sciences 

374 Contemporary Rufslon LItoroturo (3) 

499 Indopondont Sfvdy (1-4) 

iconomict 

330 Comporativo Economic Syftoms (3) 

331 Tfio Soviof Economy <3) 

499 Indopondont Study (1-4) 

Oooprophy 

346 Ooography of Hio Sovlot Union (3) 

499 Indopondont Study (1-3) 

History 

434A Russia to 1390 (3) 

4343 Russian Rovolutlon and tho Sovlot Roglmo (3) 

491 Prosomlnor (3) 

499 Indopondont Study (1-4) 

Political Sclonco 

430 Govommont and Politics of tho U.S.S.It (3) 

433 Oovornmont and Politics of Authoritarian Systems (3) 

443 Theory and Philosophy of Marxism (3) 

454 Sovlot Union and World Affairs (3) 

499 Indopondont Study (3) 

Foreign Language: Russian 

303 Readings In Sdontiflc Russian (3) 

315 Introduction to Russian Civilization (3) 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

375 Introduction to Literary Form (3) 

400 Russian for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) 

431 Early Russian Literature (3) 

441 Tolstoy and Dostoevsky (3) 

451 Tho Golden Ago of Russian Literature (3) 

461 Russian Literature from 1917 (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

SOCIAL SCIENCES 

500 The Social Sciences in the Modern World: Major Findings, 

Concepts, Theories (3) 

A seminar providing a philosophical and theoretical basis for graduate work in 
the area of social science. It will focus on the interrelationships which exist among 
the various social sciences as they relate to man in his social, physical, and politi- 
cal environment. 


300 


Technological Studies 


501 Th« Social Scioncos in tho Modern World: Basic Skills and 
Human Dimensions (3) 

Analytical comparison of the historical, humanistic, and scientific methodologies 
in the history of the social sciences. This seminar will also deal with the contem- 
porary trends in the social sciences methods. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (3) 

Open to graduate students in social science with the consent of the program 
adviser or coordinator. May be repeated for credit. 

TECHNOLOGICAL STUDIES 

100 Introduction to Technological Studies (3) 

An examination, in survey form, of questions about the development of human 
technologies. Examination of the various theories and methodologies which can 
be applied to the study of the role of technology in the process of cultural and 
social development. 

110A Man-made World (3) 

(Same as Engineering IlOA) 

11 OB Man-made World (3) 

(Same as Engineering HOB) 

11 1A Laboratory: Man-made World (1) 

(Same as Engineering 111 A) 

11 IB Laboratory: Mon-made World (1) 

(Same as Engineering lllB) 

301 Society and Technology (3) 

The analysis of the relationship between technological development and various 
aspects of social reality. 

464 Technology and Ideology (3) 

Elxaminadon of the development and meaning of contemporary technolo^cal 
society; technocracy, technostructure, cybernetics and cyberculture, and associated 
changes in ideology. 

(Sponsored by the Technological Studies Program) 

Iconomics 

370 Iconomics of Research and Development and Technological Change (3) 
ingineering 

lOOA^B Introduction to Analysis (3) 

101 Introduction to Engineering (1) 

417 Engineering Economy (3) 

433 Engineering Probability and Statistics (3) 

History 

491 Preseminar in Special Historical Topics (3) 

Topic: The American Response to Technological Development 

Examination of the historical consequences of technological change and de- 


301 


Technological Studies 

vclopment for American society including the reception of technological images, 
symbols, and myths into the culture; the adaptation of institutions to imperative 
needs for technological innovation; and the changing status of technologists in 
American society with primary focus on the late 19th and 20th centuries. 

Iiit«rdi»<iplinary C«iit«r 

499 lnd«p«nd«nt Study (1-^) 

Through independent study students can pursue topics or problems of special 
interest beyond the scope of regular courses under the supervision of a faculty 
adviser. The work is of a research or creative nature, and normaUy culminates 
in a paper, project, comprehensive examination or performance. Before register- 
ing, the student must get his topic approved by the professor who will be sup- 
ervising independent study. Independent study courses may be repeated. A stu- 
dent wishing to enroll in more than six units of independent study in any one 
semester must have the approval of his major adviser and of the chairman of the 
department (s) in which the independent study is to be conducted. 

799 Indupundunt Study (1*3) 

A survey of the problems and prospects for technology and impacts of tech- 
nology on society. The course brings together lecturers from several disciplines 
included in the sciences and humanities. The seminar approach is used where 
possible. The course will include lectures on such topics as the impact of tech- 
nology on urban life and development; education in the technological society; 
technolog>% society, and central planning; the military-industrial-research com- 
plex and the new industrial state; the American challenge in international eco- 
nomic affairs; the “new economics,” technology, economic growth, and the 
social order; technology and ideology; the American response to technological 
change; development of science and technology and cultural change; evolution 
of scientific ideas; and economics of research and development and technological 
change. 

Manogumunt 

545 Rusuorch and Davalopmant Projact Managamant (3) 

Scianca Education 

461 Dovolopmonf of Scionco and Tocknology (3) 

Scionco and Mafkomatlcs Education 
470 Evolution of Sciontific Idoot (3) 


302 


SCHOOL OF LEHERS, ARTS 
AND SCIENCES 


ANTHROPOLOGY 

201 Introdvction to Physical Anthropology (3) 

Man in biological and evolutionary perspective. Methods, findings, concepts, and 
issues in the study of primates, fossil men, and races. 

202 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (3) 

The nature of culture and its significance for man. Uniformities and variations 
in human cultures. Cultural analyses of ma)or institutional forms such as the family, 
economy, government, religion and art with an emphasis on preliterate ^ peoples. 
A consideration of central problems of cultural comparison and interpretation. 

203 Introductloii to Archaoology (3) 

Relationship of archaeology, prehistory, and culture history, field methods and 
analysis of archaeological data. A survey of world culture history, from Pleistocene 
beginnings to the threshold of civilization; and introduction to the world*s early 
centers of civilization. 

301 Worid Ithnography (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A general survey of 
the peoples of the world and a study of representative cultures with special 
reference to their situation in the history and geography of the world. 

313 Human OanoHcs (3) 

(Same as Biological Science 313) 

31 S Jaza: Past, Pratant and Futura (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 315) 

321 Tlia Amarican Indian (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of 
North American Indians noith of Mexico; origins, languages, culture areas, cultural 
history; the impact of European contacts. 

322 Pooplat of MosoamoHea (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. General survey of the 
culture history and ethnology of the Mesoamerican cxilture-area, with treatment 
of each of the principal subareas in depth. Analysis of both the native civilizations 
of Mesoamerica and the present-day ethnological societies, emphasizing sociopolit- 
ical organization, economic systems and religious systems. 

325 Pooplas of Soutfi Amorica (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of 
Central and South America. Description of selected cultures representative of dif- 
ferent cultural areas before and after contacts with Western countries. 

323 Pooplof of Africa (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of 
Africa. Description of selected cultures representative of different cultural areas 
before and after contacts with Western and Asian countries. 


303 


Anthropology 

340 AborigiiMil P*opl«f of Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Survey of cultural areas 
outside the centers of high civilizations of China and Japan. Emphasis on steppe- 
nomadism, Siberia, and ethnic splinter groups between India and the Philippines, 
with focus upon their influence on the cultural centers and vice versa. Ecology, 
migration routes, social organization, religious systems. 

341 PMpUs of Chino and Jopon (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Description and analy- 
sis of the religious, social and technological systems of the civilizations of Japan 
and China, as well as the impact of nomadic herders of North and Central Asia 
upon those centers, from an anthropological point of view. Also, a comparison of 
community studies on these regions. 

34S Pooplot of tho Middio ioft (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of the 
Middle East with descriptions of selected cultures (Arab urban, nomadic, Jewish, 
Turk, Berber, Kurd). 

347 Pooplot of tho Pacific (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A survey of the native 
peoples and cultures of the Pacific Islands, including Australia; the social and 
cultural patterns of representative cultures of various areas; special ethnological 
and theoretical problems. 

3S0 Pooplot of liiropo (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Representative groups 
considered in modem and historical perspective, stressing esf>ecially rural-urban 
relationships and the dynamics of change. 

360 CoRfomporory Amoricoo Cvltoro (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Application of an- 
thropological methods, categories of analy'sis, and types of interpretation to 
American culture. Surv^ey and critique of selected community studies and other 
kinds of relevant lesearch. 

361 Afro-Amorican Cvltoro (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. An introduction to 
African culture. A survey of African cultural characteristics in the New World, 
as they relate to contemporary events, including art, ideas, dance and literature. 

401 tthoogrophic Fiold Mothods (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 and 6 additional units of anthropology or con- 
sent of instructor. Anthropological field research by students on various problems 
using participant observation techniques. 

403 A r chooologicol Pioldwork (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 or 203 and consent of instructor. Participation 
in the excavation of a local archaeological site. Archaeological mapping, photog- 
raphy and recording. Laboratory methods of cataloging, preserv ation, description 
and interpretation of archaeological materials. Saturday field sessions. (6 hours 
fieldwork per w^eek) . 

406 DotaripHvo Unguistks (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 406) 


304 


Anthropology 


410 Langi»«ig« and Cultwra (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. The study of language 
as a factor in culture. Introduction to anthropological linguistics. Trends in the 
study of language and culture. (Same as Linguistics 410) 

411 Folklora (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. An introduction to the 
study of folktales, myths, legends, proverbs, riddles and other forms of the verbal 
traditions of peoples. Major concepts and theories and research methods in the 
study of folklore. 

413 FHinological Mutic (3) 

Music, musicmaking, and musicians in various nonliteratc societies. 

41 5 Cvltiira and Porsonalityt Psychological Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 and Psychology 331 or 351 or Sociology 341 or 
consent of instructor. Comparative study of the relationship between the individual 
and his culture. (Zhild training in nonwestem cultures. Survey of important con- 
cepts, studies, and research techniques. Changing viewpoints and new directions in 
culture-personality studies. 

416 Tho Qwosf lor Ml: lost ond Wost (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 403) 

430 PHoiltivo Volvo Systoms (3) 

Prer^uisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Study of wlm properly 
is considered “common sense” in the everyday life of people living within differing 
sociocultural environments. 

431 Aothropology of Rollglon (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Examination of beliefs 
and practices in the full human variation of religious phenomena, but with an 
emphasis on primitive religions. The forms, functions, structures, symbolism, ^d 
history and evolution of man's religious systems. Analysis of major categories, 
concepts, and theoretical models used by anthropologists in the study of religion. 

433 Jewish aiid Cooiparativa Mystldsm (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 422) 

433 Cooiparativa AosfhoHcs and Syiobelism (3) 

An analysis of the metaphysical and mystical systems underlying the “gram- 
mars” of the art, poetry, languages, myths, music, and rituals of various nonliterate 
and literate peoples and their development into creative experiences. 

434 Psychodolic Anthropology (3) 

A Study of states expanded consciousness. It is a synthesis of anthropology, 
sociology, philosophy, psycholo^, psychoanalysis, mythology, mysticism, esoteric 
systems and the religious traditions of East and West, including Yoga and the 
Vedanta, Zen Buddhism, Taoism, Islam, ancient and primitive religions, Judaism 
and Christianity. 

435 Anthropology of Low and Oovormnont (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Sources of law- 
government in primitive societies; the cultural background of law; the functions 
and development of law and government in primitive politics; transitions to and 
comparisons with classical and modern leg^ and political systems. 


305 


Anthropology 


42t Social Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A study of the social 
organization of preindustrial societies; religious, political and economic institutions; 
status and value systems; conditions and theories of change. 

429 Kinahip and Social Organization (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 and 428 or consent of instructor. Kinship sys- 
tems in primitive society and their significance in the organization of social life. 
Theories of kinship, marriage regulations, and kinship role patterns. Analysis of the 
formal properties of diversely structured kinship systems and techniques of kinship 
and structural analysis. 

430 Iconoinic Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite; Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Analysis of anthro- 
pological concepts of economy, ecology, and technology; relationship between 
habitat, economy, and culture. A survey of the different types of economic 
systems found throughout the world; outline of the economic development of 
mankind. 

440 Human Ivolwtlon (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthrop>ology 201. Advanced human evolution; human physiological 
and related cultural evolution as displayed in the fossil record, adaptations, problems 
in human evolution. 

441 Human Racat (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthrop>ology 201. An historical study of racial classifications; 
analysis of processes of race formation; analysis of the concept of race and racism; 
study of variation in modem p>opulations. 

4S0 Cultura and Iducation (3) 

Prer^uisite: Anthrop>ology 202 or Education 301 or consent of instructor. The 
transmission of values, implicit cultural assumptions, and the patterning of educa- 
tion in cross-cultural p>ersp>ective, with sp>eciai attention to American culture and 
development problems. 

453 Cultural Icology (3) 

(Same as Geography 453) 

460 Cultura Changa (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthrop>ology 202 and 301 or consent of instructor. Interrelations 
between cultural, social and p>sychological processes in the dynamics of culture 
growth and change. Impact of western technology on tribal and p>easant societies. 
Anthropx>logical contributions to the planning of directed sociocultural change in 
selected areas. 

470 Pkilozopliical and iahavioral Foundations of Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite; Anthropology 202 and open to lower division students with the 
consent of the instructor. Consideration of basic assumptions and contexts of an- 
thropological work. The synthesis of ideas and methods into professional skills 
and careers. 

430 History of Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite; At least 12 units of anthropology or consent of instructor. His- 
torical antecedents of modem anthropology. A systematic survey of the develop- 
ment of anthropology as a scientific field; an examination of the principal contribu- 
tions of leading anthropologists, past and present. Reinterpretations and emerging 
trends. 


306 


Anthropology 


490 Senior Seminar In Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of the instructor. Topics in anthropology selected by the 
faculty and students participating in the course. 

499 Indopondont Stvdy (1-3) 

Prerequisites: At least 15 units of anthropology and consent of the adviser. Stu- 
dent selection of an individual research project involving either library or field- 
work. There arc conferences with the adviser as necessary, and the work results 
in one or more papers. May be repeated for credit. 

SOI Seminan Methodology of Anthropological Rosoorch (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202, 401, and consent of instructor. Examination, 
analysis and evaluation of the contemporary methodological spectrum in anthro- 
pology and of new trends in research planning and implementation. Consideration 
and critique of specific cases involving differing research designs. 

503 Contomporory Theory In Cuitvral Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 480 or consent of instructor. Critique of the basic 
assumptions and theoretical positions of leading contemporary anthropologists. 

504 Seminar: Selected Topics In Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisites: O>mpletion of undergraduate major in anthropology and/or gradu- 
ate standing or consent of instructor. The topic chosen and a general outline of 
the seminar will be announced by the Department of Anthrop<^ogy to graduate 
students in Anthropology and circulated to other potentially interested depart- 
ments. May be repeated. 

505 Somlnan Rhonotlcs and Rhonomics (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 505) 

507 Samlnan Morpho-syntax (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 507) 

503 Modam Thoorias of Syntax (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 507 or Foreign Languages 507 or Linguistics 507 or 
consent of instructor. Speech 404 and Anthropology 410 recommended but not 
required. Intensive and practical study of contemporary' theories of grammar, with 
special emphasis on transformational, generative, logical, and electromechanical 
bases and techniques of unerance analysis. (Same as Linguistics 508) 

550 Saminar In RroMams In tha Toaching of Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Discussion of a variety of methods and mate- 
rials for the teaching of anthropology at primary, secondary, and undergraduate 
college levels. 

593 fiold Mothods In Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 505 and 507 or consent of instructor. Methods of 
analysis and description of language structures. Data elicited from informants will 
be analyzed and described. CxintroUed study of a live informant’s language. (Same 
as Linguistics 592) 

597 Rrofoct (3-4) 

Prerequisite: Graduate standing and consent of instructor. Research undertaken 
as alternative to master’s thesis. May be repeated for credit. 

595 Tliafis (3-6) 

Prerequisites for this course: Graduate standing and consent of instructor. The 
writing of a thesis based on original field research, library study or an educational 
project and its analysis and evaluation. May be repeated for credit. 


307 


Astronomy 

599 lnd*p«nd«nt Graduot* R*t«arch (1-3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of department. Individual research on either a field or 
a library study, with conferences with a project adviser as necessary, and resulting 
in one or more papers. May be repeated for credit. 

ASTRONOMY 

(Offered by the Department of Science and Mathematics Education 
and the Department of Physics.) 

See department listings for course descriptions of the following: 

Physics 300 Introduction to Astronomy (3) 

(Same as Earth Science 300) 

forth Scionco 350 Oonorol Astronomy (4) (Formoriy 300) 

(Same as Physics 350) 

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE 

101 llomonts of iiology (S) 

An introduction to basic concepts in the study of living organisms and to the 
characteristics of the natural environment. (3 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

103 Crisis Biology (3) 

A discussion of general principles involving the species, community, population 
and ecosystem levels of biology. Man is discussed both as a single species in this 
system, and as the dominant modifier of this environment (Is there intelligent life 
on earth?) Offered on a pass/no pass basis only. (3 hours lecture) 

141 Principlos of Botany (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 101. Emphasis will be placed on the dynamic aspects of 
botany although the traditional areas of morphology and classification will not be 
neglected. Required of all biology majors. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

161 Principlos of Zoology (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 101. An introduction to the principles of animal biology 
with special reference to the structure, classification, physiology, behavior and 
ecology of animals. Required of all biology majors. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours labora- 
tory) 

301 Flold Biology 

(See course description under Nature Interpretation) 

305 Moloculor Biology (4) (Formoriy 315) 

Prerequisites: two semesters of college biology, a year course in inorganic 
chemistry and concurrent enrollment in organic chemistry. An introduction to the 
ph>'sical and chemical aspects of biological science, using subcellular activities as 
the primary focus of the course. Topics include studies of modem data-gathering 
methods, subcellular structure and function, bioenergetics, biosynthesis and an in- 
troduction to heredity at the molecular level. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

313 Gonofict Loctwro (3) 

Prerequisite: one year of college biology' or permission of the instructor. The 
general principles and modem developments in the study’ of heredity. G>urse de- 
signed for biology majors: nonmajors see Bio Sci 313. 

313L GonoHcs Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 312. The use of a variety of organisms and methods for 
exploring basic principles of genetics. (3 hours lat^ratory) 


308 


Biological Sclonco 


313 HwnKin 0«ii«t1cs (3) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 101 or equivalent. Principles of heredity with emphasis on 
methods of analysis, on interaction of genes and environment, and on gene popu- 
lations in humans. (Same as Anthropology 313) 

316 Principl«s of Icelogy (3) 

Prerequisite: one year college biology or permission of instructor. A community 
approach to plant and animal systems. Environmental factors, biological cycles and 
community types are discussed. Students are provided with background for the 
advanced ecology courses. 

316L PHnciplos of Icology Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 316 (can be enrolled concurrently). Laboratory and field 
techniques used in ecological studies arc taught. One or more field trips required. 
(3 hours laboratory) 

313 Marino iiology (4) (Formoriy 32S) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 101 or equivalent, or permission of the instructor. Physical 
and chemical aspects of the ocean as a background for the study of marine organ- 
isms and habitats, including food cycles, communities, identification, ecolog>’, 
methods of collecting, and preserving local marine algae, invertebrates, and fish. 
(3 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory or fieldwork) 

320 Oonorol Microbiology (4) (Fornioriy 311) 

Prerequisites: one semester courses in biology and chemistry. An introduction 
to the study of the morpholo^, growth and physiology of the bacteria and other 
microorganisms. A consideration of the role of microorganisms as agents of change 
in the natural processes important in health, industry and agriculture. (2 hours 
lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

342 Plant Anatomy (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sd 141 or one year of college biology or equivalent. The 
origin, development, and maturation of leaves, stems, roots, and flowers of vascular 
plants. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

344 Plant Morphology (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 141 or one year of college biology or equivalent. A study of 
the morphology and classification of the lower plant groups and a general survey 
of the major groups of plants exclusive of angiosperms and gymnosperms. (2 hours 
lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

361 Momncolion Anatomy and Physiology (4) 

Prerequisite: one year of college biology or permission of instructor. Study of the 
structure and function of the human organism. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

362 Hiftological Tochnlqvo (3) 

Prerequisite: one year of college biology or permission of instructor. Theory and 
practice of the preparation of cells and tissues for microscopic study. 1 hour lec- 
ture, 6 hours laboratory) 

394 Roodings in biological Scioncot (1) (Formoriy 314) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sd 101 or equivalent. Directed readings of classical and con- 
temporary biological literature with periodic group discussions concerning the 
methods and principles studied. This course is designed for the nonmajor and is 
open to seniors only. (3 hours laboratory) 

401 ilogoogrophy (3) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sd 141, 161, and 404 or 465 or permission of instructor. A 
study of the present day distribution of plants and animals based upon classification, 
fossil records, morphology and geography. 


309 


BMogUal Science 


403 ■ietyft«mofi€S (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 312 and 404. An introduction to the principles and tech- 
niques of biosystemadcs, including evolutionary mechanisms, the species concept, 
taxonomic procedures and nomenclature. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

404 Evolution (3) (Formoriy 424) 

Prerequisite: one year of college biology or permission of the instructor. A study 
of evolution, including the history of evolutionary thought; origin of universe, 
earth and life; geological and paleontological history of the earth; evidences for 
evolution derived from comparative anatomy, embryology, genetics, zoogeography; 
mechanisms of evolution. 

404L Evolution Laboratory (1) (Formoriy 424L) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 404 (may be taken concurrently). (3 hours laboratory) 

406 liomotry (4) 

Prerequisite: Math 120 or Math 150A; upper division standing in biology. Intro- 
duction to experimental design, interpretation, and practical application of statistics 
to biological problems. (3 hours lecture, 3 hours la^ratory) 

410 Gonoral Coll Physiology (4) (Formoriy 412) 

Prerequisites: one year of college biology and one semester of organic chemistry 
or permission of the instructor. Characteristics of life at the cellular level; processes 
by which the cell obtains energy and material and forms new cell substances; con- 
trol of these processes by the cell; organization of structures and enzyme systems 
within the cell. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

412 Population Oonotics (3) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 312 or 313. Theory of genetic change in population, pri- 
marily one-locus: maintenance of genetic variability, inbreeding, drift, mutation, 
section treated singly and in combination. Elstimation of genetic parameters. (3 
hours lecture, 1 hour activity) 

416 Limnology-Fro»h Wotor Ecology (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 141 and (hem lOlB. (Comparative physical, chemical and 
biological characteristics of inland waters and estuaries. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours 
laboratory) 

417 Oonoral Ocoonography (3) (Formoriy 420) 

Prerequisites; Bio Sci 141 and 161, and Chem 101 AB (may be concurrent). 
Physics 211. Introduction to oceanography including the study of the extent of 
the oceans; the chemical nature of the sea; marine geolog>'; causes and effects of 
currents and tides; and interrelationships of plants and animal life. 

418 Biological Ocoanography (4) (Formoriy 421) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 417. Biological factors of the marine environment; physi- 
ological and ecological relationships; methods of sampling, identification and 
analysis. (3 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

419 Marino Ecology (4) (Formoriy 426) 

Prerequisites: upper division or graduate standing in biological sciences, and 
successful completion of Bio Sci 418 or 461 or 446. A course in the fundamentals 
of ecology embracing the aspects of the interrelations of organisms and their 
environment with emphasis on productivity, population dynamics, behavior and 
biological associations. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

423 Pathoganlc Microbiology (4) (Formoriy 413) 

Prerequisite: one semester of microbiology or bacteriology. Study of the biology 
of infectious disease: mechanisms of microbial pathogenicity; host defenses; mode 


310 


Biological Sclonco 


of action of antibiotics and other antimicrobial agents; characteristics of specific 
pathogenic bacteria, fungi and viruses. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

434 Immunology (4) (Formoriy 414) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 305 and 320, Chem 301 A, or permission of the instructor. 
Study of the nature of antibodies and antigens, their role in immunity, and the 
specificity of their reactions. Laboratory experiments will show the kinetics of 
antibody formation and the mechanisms of antibody-antigen reactions. Some tech- 
niques in serodiagnosis will be performed. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

426 Ounurol Virology (2) (Formoriy SI 6) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 305, 312 and 320. A comparison of bacterial, animal and 
plant viruses. A detailed study of viral structure and host-virus interaction in the 
viral replication process. 

426L Gonorol Virology Uiborotory (2) (Formoriy 516L) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 305, 312 and 320. Experimental methods for bacterial and 
animal viruses, including techniques for growth and titration of infectious viral 
units and physical characterization of virus structures. (6 hours laboratory) 

432 Microbial Gonotics (2) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 305, 312 and 320. An advanced course on generic mecha- 
nisms in microorganisms with particular emphasis on bacteria and bacterial viruses. 

432L Microbial Gonotics Uiborotory (2) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 305, 312 and 320. Elxperimental techniques used in research 
on the generics of bacteria and bacterial viruses. (6 hours laboratory) 

436 Microbiol Growth and Physiology (4) 

Prerequisites: one semester courses in microbiology and organic chemistry. An 
advanced treatment of the growth, physiology and structures of the microorgan- 
isms, with emphasis on study of the free-living bacteria, yeasts and molds. (2 hours 
lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

439 Microbiol Icology (4) 

Prerequisite: one semester of microbiology or bacteriology. The interaction of 
microbes and their environment; the influence of physical and chemical factors on 
the distribution and activities of microbial populations; the effects of microbes on 
the living and nonliv'ing environment. Basic principles of nucrobial enrichment, 
selection and succession. On completion of the basic experiments each nudent 
will select and perform a field and laboratory study in microbial ecology. (2 hours 
lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

441 Plant Toxononiy (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 141 or one year of college biology or eqmvalent. An intro- 
duction to the study of classification of conifers and the flowering plants through 
field collecting and laboratory study and identification of representative kinds. (2 
hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

443 Plant Ecology (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 441. The study of plants in relation to their environment. 
Emphasis on climatic, soil, and time factors which influence plant formations, com- 
munity structure, succession, physiology, anatomy and distnburion of plants. (2 
hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory; one or more overnight field trips required) 

444 Plont Physiology (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sd 141 or equivalent and one semester of organic chemisay or 
permission of the instructor. A study of plant growth, nutrition, food synthesis, and 
metabolism. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 


311 


BiotogUal Science 


445 Mycology (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 141. A study of the comparative morphology and taxonomy 
of the fungi with an emphasis on morphological, physiological and reproductive 
characteristics demonstrating evolutionary relationships. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours 
laboratory) 

444 Algology (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 141 or equivalent. A study of the comparative morphology 
and taxonomy of the algae including a consideration of the physiological and 
chemical characteristics demonstrating evolutionary relationships. (2 hours lecture, 
6 hours laboratory or fieldwork) 

452 fconomic iotony (3) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 141 or permission of the instructor. An examination of 
man's dependence upon and economic interest in plants throughout the world. 

461 lnv«rt«br 0 t« Zoology (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 161, or a year of college biology or permission of in- 
structor. Evolution, classification, physiological adaptions, and biology of inverte- 
brate animals. Includes dissection, identification and observation of living animals. 
(2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory, or fieldwork) 

462 Parotitology (4) (Formerly 472) 

Prerequisite: one year of general biology or permission of instructor. A con- 
sideration of the symbiotic relationships existing at all levels of animal organization. 
Emphasis will be placed on the natui^ history, biology, physiology, ecology and 
laboratory recognition of symbiotic organisms. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours labo- 
ratory) 

463 C^mparativ# V*rt«brat« Anotomy (4) 

Prerequisite: a year course in general zoology or biology, or permission of the 
instructor. A comparative study of the chordates, with emphasis on morphology 
and evolution of various organ systems from fish through mammals. Includes thor- 
ough dissection of dogfish, necturus, and cat. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

464 Embryology (4) 

Prerequisite: a year course in general zoology or biology or permission of the 
instructor. Study of development from fertilization through organogenesis with 
laboratory work on the frog, chick, and pig. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

465 Animal Ecology (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 316 or permission of the instructor. A survey of the phys- 
ical, chemical, and biological factors of the environment as they affect the dis^bu- 
tion and mode of life of animals. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory; one or more 
weekend trips per semester required) 

466 Animal bohavior (3) 

Prerequisite: one year of college biolog>' or permission of the instructor. An 
introduction to the current problems in animal behavior including sensory capaci- 
ties, orientation, innate and learned patterns, and social behavior of invertebrates 
and vertebrates. 

467 Entomology (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 161, or a year of college biology or permission of instructor. 
Anatomy, physiology, evolution, and biology of insects and other terrestrial arthro- 
pods. Laboratory includes detailed dissection, collection, identification, and obser- 
vation of living arthropods. (2 hours lecture, and 6 hours laboratory or fieldwork) 


312 


Biological Science 


469 Comporativ* Animal Physiology (4) 

Prerequisites: principles of zoology, Chem lOlA, lOlB, and organic chemistry. 
A comparative survey of organ systems and physiological processes among inver- 
tebrate and venebrate animals. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

470 Arthropod Morphology (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 461 or 467. Survey of evolution, form and function of 
exoskeleton and organ systems of terrestrial anhropods, with emphasis on insects. 
(2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

474 Natural Hiftory of tho Vortobratos (4) (Formorly 471) 

Prerequisites: one year of college biology; comparative venebrate anatomy, 
evolution, or permission of the instructor. Natural history, behavior, distribution, 
and ecology of the vertebrates. Laboratory and field emphasis on identification, 
behavior, maintenance of living and preserved aninuls. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours 
laboratory or fieldwork; one or more weekend trips per semester required) 

475 Ichthyology (4) (Formarly 469) 

Prerequisites: a year of college biology, comparative venebrate anatomy, and 

natural history of the venebrates, or permission of the instructor. The biology, 

structure, physiology, ecology, evolution and economic imponance of fishes. 
Laboratory and field work in identification, collection, and natural history of 
fishes. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory or fieldwork per week; one or more 
weekend trips per semester required) 

476 Horpatology (4) 

Prerequisites: a year of college biology, comparative venebrate anatomy, and 

natural history of the venebrates; or permission of the instructor. The biolc^, 

structure, physiology, ecology, distribution, evolution, and behavior of amphibians 
and reptiles. Laboratory and fieldwork in identification, coUecaon, study of 
amphibians and reptiles including studies on reptile and amphibian behavior and 
physiology. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory or fieldwork per week; one or 
more weekend trips per semester required) 

474 Mammalogy (4) 

Prerequisite: one year of college biology, comparative venebrate anatomy, and 
natural history of the venebrates; or permission of the instructor. The biology, 
structure, physiologfy, ecology, distribution, evolution and behavior of mammals. 
Laboratory and fieldwork in identification collection, and natural history of mam- 
mals. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory or fieldwork per week; one or more 
weekend trips per semester required) 

491 Sanior Saminor (1) 

Prerequisites: senior standing in one of the sciences with a GPA of 2.4, or 
permission of die instructor. Topics in the biological sciences and related fields, 
selected by the faculty and students participating in the course. 

499 Indapandant Study (1—3) 

Open to qualified students who wish to pursue independent study in biology 
under generd supervision. May be repeated for credit. 

562 SamiiMir la tiology (3) 

Open to graduate students only by permission of the instructor. May be repeated 
for credit. 

505 Saminar in MoUcular lielegy (3) (Formarly 515) 

Selected advanced topics in molecular biology, such as macromolecular structure, 
thermodynamics in biological systems and molecular reguladon of cellular acrivi- 


313 


Chemistry 


tics. Open to graduate students and other qualified students by permission of 
instructor. May be repeated. 

510 Seminar in Physiology (3) 

Selected topics within the area of physiologry. Open to graduate students and 
other qualified students by' permission of instructor. May be repeated. 

512 Sominor in Oonotics (3) 

Selected advanced topics within the general area of genetics. Open to graduate 
students and to other qualified students only by permission of instructor. May be 
repeated. 

513 Molocwlor Oonotics (4) (Pormorly 504) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 312, 305 and Chem 301 A, B. The organization, replication and 
function of the genetic material and informational macromolecules in organisms 
from the viruses to the higher plants and animals. Topics include: chromosomal 
structure and function, recombination, mutagenesis, genetic coding, protein syn- 
thesis and genetic aspects of development. (3 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

517 Seminar in icology (3) 

Selected advanced topics within the general area of ecology. Open to graduate 
students and to other qualified students only by permission of instructor. May be 
repeated. 

513 Snminor in Mnrinn Scinnen (3) (Formnrly 520) 

Selected advanced topics within the general area of marine science. Open to 
graduate students and to other qualified students only by permission of instructor. 
May be repeated. 

520 Snminor in Microbiology (3) (Formorly 511) 

Selected topics in the area of microbiology. Open to graduate students and other 
qualified students by permission of instructor. May be repeated. 

524 Sominor In Immunology (3) (FormoHy 514) 

Selected topics in immunochemistry, immunobiology and medical immunology. 
Open to graduate students and other qualified students by permission of instructor. 
May be repeated. 

540 Sominor in ftotony (3) 

Selected advanced topics within the general area of botany. Open to graduate 
students and to other qualified students by permission of the instructor. May be 
repeated. 

560 Sominor in Zoology (3) 

Selected advanced topics within the general area of zoology'. Open to graduate 
students and to other qualified students by permission of the instructor. May be 
repeated. 

593 Tboalf (1-3) 

May be repeated for a maximum of 6 units of credit. 

599 Indopondont Groduoto Rosoorch (1-3) 

Open to graduate students only by permission of a staff member. May be re- 
peated for credit. 


CHEMISTRY 


100 Introductory Chomistry (4) 

Prerequisite: one year of high school algebra. Fundamental principles of 
chemistry with emphasis placed on the chemistry of inorganic compounds. Does 


314 


Chemistry 

not apply as credit for majors in the physical or biological sciences or for minors 
in the physical sciences. (3 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

101A,B G«ii«ral Ch«mittiry (S^) 

Prerequisites; high school algebra and either high school chemistry or high 
school physics or Chemistry 100. High school physics and trigonometry strongly 
recommended. Intended for majors and minors in the physical and biological 
sciences. 

101A— llie fundamental principles of chemistry including stoichiometry, gas 
laws, solid and liquid states, changes of state, modem atom concepts, chemical 
bonding and chemical equilibrium with emphasis on quantitative acid*base chem- 
istry. Laboratory: experiments applying elementary physical chemistry and volu- 
metric quantitative analysis. (3 hours lecture discussion, 6 hours laboratory) 

lOli— Oxidadon-reduction chemistry, introduction to chemical thermodynamics 
and chemical kinedcs, discussions of the chemistry of representative and transidon 
elements, and introduedons to biochemistry, organic and nuclear chemistry. Labo- 
ratory: Experiments concerning gravimetric and volumetric quantitative analysis, 
selected topics in qualiudve analysis and inorganic preparadons. (3 hours lecture 
discussion, 6 hours laboratory) 

105 G«n«ral Chemistry for Inglnoort (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry lOlA. Descripdon the same as Chemistry lOlB. Open 
only to engineering majors. Not open to students with credit in Chemistry 101 B. 

201 Modom Physical Sdonco (4) 

(See course descripdon imder Physical Science) 

205 Glassblowing (1) 

Elementary training in the manipulation of glass leading to the construc^on of 
sciendfic glass apparatus. Elnrollment limited with preference given to junior and 
senior physical science majors. (4 hours laboratory) 

211 Qwantitativo Anolysis (4) 

Prerequisites: two semesters of college chemistp^. Stoichiometry and the funda- 
mentals of volumetric and gravimetric quandtadve analysis. Students completing 
(Chemistry 101 B with a grade of C or better will not receive credit. (2 hours lec- 
ture discussion, 6 hours laboratory) 

301 A/B Organic Chomlttry (3/3) 

Prerequisite: CHiemistry lOlB or equivalent. Chemistry 30 IB must involve con- 
current enrollment in Chemistry 302B. A course in organic chemistry designed for 
the non-chemistry major. Emphasis is placed on modem theories of structure and 
reacdon mechanism. Recommended for biology majors and students planning to 
enter a paramedical profession. 

302A/B Organic Chamlstry Laboratory (1/1 or 2) 

Chemistry 302 A may be taken concurrendy with Chemistry 301 B and 302B. 
Chemistry 302B must be taken concurrendy with Chemistry 301 B. A course de- 
signed to give training in the basic techniques of the organic chemistry laboratory, 
including synthesis of typical aliphadc and aromadc compounds. (3 hours labora- 
tory) Chemistry 302 A, B may be taken concurrendy (6 hours laboratory) with 
301B. 

305A/B Organic Cbomittry (S/S) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 10 IB or equivalent. A comprehensive course in organic 
chemistry designed for the chemistry major. Elmphasis in lecture and laboratory 


315 


Chemistry 


is placed upon modem theories of structure and reaction mechanism with applica- 
tions of modem insmimental and spectroscopic methods. (3 hours lecture discus- 
sion, 6 hours laboratory) 

312 Quontitativ* Ch^iwilftry (4) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 101 A3t (grade C or better) or Chemistry 211. Physics 
211A3« or Physics 221 A3 strongly recommended. Modem analytical chemistry 
including contemporary separation methods, nonaqueous quantitative chemistry, 
and introductions to instrumental methods of analysis in electrochemistry, absorp- 
tion spectroscopy, and radiochemistry. (2 hours lecmre discussion, 6 hours lab- 
oratory) 

3S1 Introduction to BiochomUtry (4) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 251 or 301B and five units of biology. A survey of the 
chemistry and metabolism or proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, hormones, in plants, 
animak, and microorganisms. (3 hours lecture discussion, 3 hours laboratory) 

371A,B Physical Chomlstry (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Mathematics 250, one year of Physics and Chemistry 101 B. (Chem- 
istry 312 recommended. Equivalent courses may be substituted. A study of the 
fundamental lau's and theories of chemistry. Thermodynamics, solutions, chemical 
and phase equilibria, electrochemistry, transpon phenomena, introduction to atomic 
and molecular structure, rotation and vibration spectroscopy, statistical mechanics, 
kinetics are the major topics discussed. Discussions with emphasis on the use of 
fundamental principles to solve problems. 

403 Anolytk of Organic Compound* (4) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 305 A, B and 312 or equivalents. Isolation and identifica- 
tion of organic compounds using chemical and instrumental techniques. (2 hours 
lecture discussion, 6 hours laboratory) 

411 Instrumantal Analyslf (4) 

Prerequisites: Cliemistry 312, 301 A, B, 371 A, B and one year of college physics. 
Advanced topics in absorption and emission spectroscopy, nuclear magnetic reso- 
nance, electron spin resonance, mass spectrometry', gas chromatography. X-ray 
methods, electrochemistry' and radiochemistry'. (2 hours lecture discussion, 6 hours 
laboratory') 

421 AfB Oanaral Biochamittry (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry' 301 B or equivalent. Sur\*ey of major areas of biochemis- 
try', including chemistry and functions of compounds of biochemical interest. 

422A,B Oaoaral Biechamistry Laboratory (2,2) 

Prerequisites: (Concurrent or prior enrollment in (Chemistry 421 A, B. Laboratory 
designed to illustrate the chemistry and metabolism of carbohydrates, lipids, and 
proteins, and to introduce the student to research methods. (6 hours laboratory) 

425 Advancod litorganlc Chomlstry (3) 

Prerequisites: (Chemistry 101 A, B or equivalent and (Chemistry 301 A, B and 
371 A, B. A comprehensive inorganic chemistry course with an introduction to 
modem theories of chemical bonding and structure. Theoretical treatments include 
molecular orbital and ligand field theory' with their extensions, coordination and 
transition metal chemistry, various aspects of nonmetal chemistry and a discussion 
of hydride properties. 

427 Praparativa Toehnlquas (4) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 312, 301 A, B and 425 (concurrent enrollment accept- 
able) or equivalents. Laboratory exercises using advanced techniques and modem 


316 


Chmmigfry 

methods for the preparation and identification of chemical compounds. Readings 
in the current literature required. 

431 Advanced Organic Chomiftry (3) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 301 A, B, 371 A and 37 IB. Theoretical aspects of organic 
chemistry wtih emphasis on the modem concepts of structure and chemical re- 
activity. 

441 Physical Chamistry Laboratory (4) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 371 A3- Laboratory exercises illustrating the physical 
principles of chemistry. (2 hour lecture discussion, 6 hours laboratory) 

451 Quantum Chomistry (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 371 A3. An introduction to the application of quantum 
mechanics. Postulates and theories approximation methods, the electronic structure 
of atoms and periodic system, molecules and the chemical bond, and introduction 
to group theory. 

495 Sanior Rasaarch (1-4) 

Prerequisite: three one-year courses in chemistry and senior standing. Must have 
consent of sui^erv^ising instructor before enrollment. Open only to students with a 
3i) grade point average in chemistry. An introduction to the methods of chemical 
research through a research project carried out under the supervision of one of 
the Chemistry Department faculty. May be repeated for credit. 

499 Indapandent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing and completion of two one-year courses in 
chemistry. Study of some special topic in chemistry, selected in consultation with 
the instructor and carried out under his supervision. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Rasaarch in Chamistry (1-4) 

Prerequisites: admission to graduate standing and consent of supervising ii^ruc- 
tor before enrollment. Research in one of the fields of chemistry on an individual 
basis under the supervision of an appropriate faculty member. 

505 Saminar (1-2) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing and consent of department. Student presenta- 
tions of recent contributions to the chemical literature. May be repeated for credit. 

511 Ttiaory of Saparatiens (2) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 312, 301A3* 371A3. The theory, application, and limi- 
tations of physical and chemical separation techniques. 

512 lloctroanalytical Chamistry (4) 

Prerequisites: (Chemistry 312, 301A3 and 371A3. Advanced topics in potenti- 
ometry, amperometry, electroanalysis, coulometry, conductometry, polarography, 
single and multiple sweep voltammetry, chronopotentiometry and chronoamper- 
ometry. 

525 Radiechamistry (4) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 371 A3. Introduction to the theory of nuclear properties 
and phenomena; their detection and measurement; application of their technology 
to chemical experimentation. 

52S Coordination Chamistry (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 425 or equivalent. A concise treatment of the structure 
and bonding in coordination compounds according to crystal held, molecular 
orbital, and ligand field theories is included, as well as preparative methods and a 


317 


Chmmistry 


survey of ligand substitution kinetics. The theoretical models will be related to 
spectral, thermodynamic, kinetic and redox properties. Biochemical and industrial 
uses of coordination compounds will be discussed. 

531 Th*«r«ticol Organic Chamiitry (3) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 431 and 550. The application of theoretical concepts to 
current topics of physical organic chemistry research. 

535 Organic Synthacit (3) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 301 A3 or 305 A, B and 371 A3 (concurrent enrollment 
acceptable). Methods of synthetic organic chemistry research. 

539 Chamistry of Natural Products (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 431. Topics will be selected from alkaloids, terpenes, 
steroids, antibiotics, pigments and other natural products and may cover isolation, 
classification, structural elucidation and synthesis. 

541 Inxymo Chomistry (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistr>' 42 IB or consent of instructor. Discussion of the structure 
and preparation of en 2 ymes, kinetics of enzyme reactions and the mechanism of 
various classes of enzymes. 

542 Intormodiary Mofabolism (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 42 IB or consent of instructor. A discussion of metabolic 
and biosynthetic pathways and physiolog^ical control mechanisms. 

550 Advancad Physical Chamistry (4) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 371 A3 or equivalent. An advanced study of classical 
thermodynamics followed by an introductory study of statistical mechanics and 
chemical kinetics. 

551 Quantum Machanics <3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 451. EUementary applications. Perturbation theory, colli- 
sion problems, relativistic theory of the electron, theories of valence, complex 
compounds and complex crystals. 

555 Chamical Klnatics (3) 

Prerequisite: (Chemistry 550 or permission of the instructor. Anal>’sis of reacting 
s>’stems; theories of chemical kinetics; discussion of gas phase, liquid phase and 
surface reactions including recent developments. 

561 Statistical Tharmodynamics (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistr>’ 550 or equivalent. A study of statistical mechanics and 
its application to chemical problems. 

572 X-Ray Crystallography (3) 

Prerequisites: Ph>'sics 221 A3, Mathematics 250, and Chemistry 301 A3, or equiva- 
lent courses. Morphological crystallography, crystal symmetry and crystallographic 
groups. X-rays and X-ray diffraction, the recording and interpretation of diffrac- 
tion phenomena, and the analysis of crystal structures, including computer appli- 
cations. 

575 Thoory of Spoctroscopy (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry^ 451 or equivalent. Group theory, symmetry mode, in- 
tensities and selection rules, selected topics from electronic spectra of atoms and 
molecules, UV, IR, NMR, ESR and Raman spectroscopy. 


318 


Communications 


580 Topics in Advoncod Chomitfry (1-0) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing in chemistry. Selected areas of current research 
interest in chemistry will be discussed. May be repeated for credit. 


598 Thosis (1-2) 

Prerequisites: an officially appointed thesis committee and advancement to candi* 
dacy. Guidance in the preparation of a project or thesis for the master’s degree. 

599 Indopondont Orodvato Rotoorch (1—8) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing in chemistry. May be repeated for credit. 

COMMUNICATIONS 

101 Roporting and Writing (3) 

Introduction to news reporting and writing, with emphasis on news gathe^g, 
evaluation, and the principles of clarity and conciseness. Typing ability required. 

102 Roporting and Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 101 or i>ermission of instructor. Concentration on 
writing of more advanced news stories and news feanires. Typing ability required. 

103 Appliad Writing (3) 

Organizational principles and practice in preparing letters, reports, documents 
and proposals as required in most occupations. Designed especially for non-com- 
munications majors. 

218A Introduction to RHotography (2) 

Introduction to photographic theory and the application of photographic prin- 
ciples. Students must provide their own adjustable cameras. (1 hour lecture, 3 
hours laboratory) 

2188 Communications Rkotogrophy (2) 

Prerequisite: Communications 218A or permission of instructor. Application of 
photographic principles to the requirements of mass communications. (1 hour 
lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

290 History and AosHiotics of Motion Picturos (3) 

(Same as Theatre 290) 

306 RKotograpkic Production (2) 

Prerequisites: Communications 218A 218B, or permission of instructor. Produc- 
tion of photographs for college publications and television programs. Application 
of photocommunication principles to media problems under deadline conditions. 
(6 hours laboratory) 

311 Introduction to Motion Picturu Production (3) 

Introduction to theory and practice of motion picture photography and film 
production. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

319 Ctocumontory Film Production (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications 21 8A and 375, or permission of instructor. Funda- 
mentals of documentary film script writing, production planning and execution. 
(2 hours lecnirc, 3 hours laboratory) 

331 Nowf Communication (3) 

An introduction to the news communication media, with experience in news 
writing. (Not open to students with credit in Communications 101-102.) 


319 


Communications 


332 Copy Iditing and Mokoup (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 101 and 102, or permission of instructor. Practice 
and theory of editing information materials for publication in newspapers and 
magazines. (6 hours activity) 

333 Mats Communication in Modorn Socioty (3) 

The basic structure and the interrelationships of newspapers, magazines, films, 
radio, television, in terms of their significance as social instruments and economic 
entities in modem society. 

334 Foafuro Articio Writing (3) 

Nonfiction writing for newspapers and magazines, including study of sources, 
methods, and markets. Open to nonmajors. 

335 Reporting of Public AHairt (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications 101 and 102, or permission of instructor. Coverage 
in depth of significant events pertinent to operations of governmental units and 
related organizations. 

333 Nowfpapor Production (3) 

Prerequisite: permission of the instructor. A lecture and activity course in which 
members of the class constitute the editorial staff of the college newspaper. The 
group meets four hours per week for critiques in news reporting, writing, editing 
and makeup, followed by production. With consent of instructor, the course may 
be repeated up to a maximum of nine units credit. (More than 9 hours laboratory) 

353 AdvartUing Copy and Layout (3) 

Writing of copy and layout of advertisements, based on study of sales appeals, 
attention factors, and illustrations. (6 hours activity) 

354 Rotail Advortiring (3) 

Principles and procedures of retail advertising; utilization of mass media; super- 
vised field assignments in the analysis of specific advertising needs. 

356 Advortifing Production (1) 

Preparation of advertisements for the college newspaper, magazine and yearbook. 
Advertising accounts assigned to each student. Weekly critique sessions. Individual 
consultation with instructor. (5 hours laboratory) 

35ftA^l Publications Production (2^) 

A workshop for students engaged in the production of the college magazine and 
yearbook and other types of student publications, as scheduled by appropriate 
college authorities. Activities will include writing, editing, photography, art work, 
and layout. Open to nonmajors. (More than 6 hours laboratory) 

361 Tboory and Practico of Public Rolationt (3) 

Examination of basic principles of public relations and their appbcadon in non- 
commercial as well as commercial fields, including industry, education, government 
and welfare. 

371 Rodio-tolovislon Nows and Public Affairs (3) 

Theory and practice of covering news events and public affairs for radio and 
television. Student material will be prepared for broadcast locally. (6 hours activity) 

375 Tho Doeumontary Film (3) 

Purpose and development of the documentary; current trends; critical analysis; 
production requirements; future of the medium in business, government and edu- 
cation, and television. Students will analyze selected documentary films. 


320 


Communications 


3S0 Introduction to Radio and Tolovision (3) 

(Same as Theatre 380) 

331 Eroadcast Advortiting (3) 

Advantages and limitations of television and radio as advenising media. Planning 
advertising campaigns, costs and coverage. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

390 Introduction to Tolocommunications Production (3) 

Prerequisite; dbmmunicadons 380 or permission of instructor. Basic theory and 
practice of radio and television program production. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours 
laboratory) 

401 Roport Writing (3) 

Planning, organizing and writing of various kinds of reports for business, educa- 
tion and government. Cx>nsideration will be given to use of graphic aids and 
preparation of copy for reports that are to be printed. Recommended for non- 
majors. 

403 Tachnical Writing (3) 

The study of uses of technical writing in industry, science and engineering, and 
the completion of written assignments designed to test understanding of, and pro- 
vide experience with various forms. 

404 Advanced Tachnical Writing and Editing (3) 

Writing and editing of technical material for reports, proposals, special publica- 
tions and journals. 

407 Communicotion and the Law (3) 

Development of Anglo-American concept of freedom of speech and press; 
statutes and administrative regulations affecting freedom of information and of 
publishing, advertising and telecommunications. Problems of libel and slander, 
rights in news and advertising, contempt, copyright, and invasion of privacy. Open 
to nonmajors. 

435 Histary and Rhiletephy of American Mass Communication (3) 

The development of American mass communication beginning with newspapers 
and periodicals and continuing through radio and television. Includes ideological, 
political, social and economic aspects. 

426 Werid Communication Systems (3) 

The examination of major mass communication systems, both democratic and 
totalitarian, and the means by which news and propaganda are conveyed inter- 
nationally. 

427 Seminar on Current Issues In Mass Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Consideration of problems such as the extent 
to which the mass media should be regulated by the government, “obje^ve” 
versus “interpretive” news reporting, and ethical and legal questions of particular 
cases. 


423 Communicotions and Social Change (3) 

Examination of the impact upon contemporary society of American mass media 
and mass communications. 

439 Mass Media Internship (2) 

According to his vocational preference, the student serves a supervised intern- 
ship with a newspaper, magazine, radio or television station, press association, adver- 
tising agency, or public relations firm. 


321 


Communicttfions 


451 National Advortiting Campaigns (3) 

Advanced study of advertising campaigns; utilization of news media — television, 
newspapers, magazines, etc. — in national advertising programs. Design of complete 
campaign from idea to production. 

463 Public Rolationc Mothods (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 361 or equivalent, or consent of the intsructor. 
Means by which public relations concepts are carried out through the mass media. 

465 Intomational Public Relations (3) 

Application of public relations principle to the requirements of international 
operation in business, education, religion and philanthropy. 

467 Public Relations for Iducatienal Institutions (3) 

Prerequisite; Communications 361 or permission of the instructor. Examines the 
theory and practice of public relations as it applies to public and private schools 
at all levels, including the methods, policies, programs and problems inherent in 
educational public relations. 

473 Tolocommunication Rogulation (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications 380, comparable course, consent of instructor. 
Theatre 380. Self-regulation, governmental regulation, and international regulation 
of broadcast programming. 

475 Tulucemmunication Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 380 or Theatre 380. Theory and practice of pro- 
gramming for television and radio. 

477 Tolocommunication Station Manogomont (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 380. Functions and policies of broadcasting station 
and nen^'ork management. Meets of government, public opinion, employee groups, 
and ownership. Technical, legal, financial and other obligations. 

479 Advancod Tolocommunications Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 390 or permission of instructor. Advanced tech- 
niques in producing television-radio programs. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

499 Indopondofit Study (1-9) 

Prerequisite: consent of the department chairman. Individually supervised mass 
media projects and research on and off campus. Research and projects may in- 
volve newspapers, magazines, radio, television, and public relations agencies. May 
be repeated for credit. 

500 Moss Communication Tboory (3) 

Prerequisite! BA. degree, background in mass communications, or consent of in- 
structor. Theory of mass communication in terms of communicator, media, and 
audience. Consideration of extensive research regarding probable effects of mass 
communications. 

501 Litoraturo of Moss Communications (3) 

Types, sources, and uses of mass communication literature; application to indi- 
vidual graduate studies. 

510A Sominar in Mass Communications Rosoarch (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and 24 units of undergraduate communications 
study or consent of the instructor. A sur\'ey of the research areas, methods, and 
techniques of communications research. Research in selected problems in com- 
munications. 


322 


Comparative Literature 


S10B Seminar In Most Communications Rotoorch (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 510A. Application of research techniques to prob- 
lems in the following areas: advertising, broadcasting, news-editorial, public rela- 
tions, journalism education and history of the mass media. 

S12 Oraduofo Somlnor: Journalism Educotlon (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing. Study of selected problems in journalism educa- 
tion with emphasis on individual research. 

S97 Projoct (3 or 6) 

Completion of a creative project in the area of concentration beyond regularly 
offered course work. 

593 Thosis (3 or 6) 

Completion of a thesis in the area of concentration beyond regularly offered 
course work. 

599 Indopondont Groduoto Rosoorch (1—3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the department chairman. Individually supervised mass 
media projects or research for graduate students. May be repeated for credit. 

COMPARATIVE LITERATURE 
(Offered by the Department of English) 


202 Short Story (3) 

(Same as English 202) 

30S Tho Hobrow Prophots (3) 

(Same as Religious Studies 305) 

312 Tho Riblo os Litoroturo (3) 

A comprehensive survey of Biblical literature emphasizing intrinsic literary 
qualities as well as the influence of major themes of both Old and New Testa- 
ment writings upon western literary traditions. 

31 5 Cloftsicol Mythology In World Litoroturo (3) 

The origins, elements, forms and functions of classical mythology in works from 
the earliest times to the present. 

316 Coltic and Oormonlc Mythology (3) 

A basic study of the principal Celtic and Germanic myths with some discussion 
of literary and archeological relationships. 

317 Indic Mythology (3) 

A survey of the mythologies embodied in the Mahabbarata, the Ramayana, the 
Vedas and the Satbapatha Brabmana of India, and in the Ab^, Avesta, and Sbab 
Namab of Persia, and their relation to the principal mythologies of Europe. 

320 Grook and Roman Litoraturo (3) 

Readings in English translation from the literature of classical Greece and Rome. 

324A Advancod WoHd Litoraturo (3) 

Selected readings in Indian, (Chinese, Japanese, Middle Eastern and European 
literature from the beginning to 1650. 

3243 Advancod WoHd Litoraturo (3) 

Selected readings from Oriental and Western literature from 1650 to the present. 


323 


Comparative Literature 

332 M*di«val Lit«ratur« of Woftorn Europe (3) 

Selected readings in modem English translation from the medieval literature 
of England and the continent from St. Augustine to Sir Thomas Malory. 

333 Literature of the Renoittonee (3) 

Major phases of the Renaissance as a literary movement, from Elrasmus to Mon* 
taigne and Cervantes. 

352 African Literature (3) 

(Same as English 352) 

360 Irifh Literature (3) 

Selected writings representative of Irish literature from the early Middle Ages 
to the present. 

371 Ai The French Tradition (3) 

A comprehensive survey of French Literature from the Renaissance to present 
times. The first semester will include the novel, short story and essay, the second 
semester will cover drama and poetry. 

373 Mattors of Russian Litoraturo (3) 

Reading, discussion, and interpretation of selected works by Pushkin, Dostoyev* 
sky, Tolstoy, (Hiekhov, Pasternak, and others, and their relationship to Western 
literature. 

374 Modom Russian Litoraturo (3) 

A study of literary trends and representative works of Russian writers from 
Maxim Gorky to the present times. Special consideration of the Soviet literary 
theory and its impact upon their literature. Lectures and readings in English. 

375 Hispanic Litoraturo (3) 

A study of selected translations from Hispanic literature and their relations to 
world literature. Readings in the picaresque novel, Cervantes, C^lden Age drama, 
Galdos, Unamuno, Lorca. 

376 Main Tronds in Spanish-Amorican Litoraturo (3) 

An introduction to the main currents of Spanish-American literature, emphasiz- 
ing contemporary writers such as Alegria, Asturias, Borges, Fuentes, Neruda. Qose 
attention v^l be given to the relation between the artistic expression and the 
ideological values of the same period. 

402 Art/ Litoroturo, and tho Dovaiopmont of Censciousnoss (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 402) 

403 Tho Quost for Solf: East and Wost (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 403) 

404 Tho Naturo of Lovo: Plate to Joyce (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 404) 

405 Psychoanalysis and Drama (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 405) 

425A Oriental Litoraturo (3) 

A study of selected translations of Indian and Chinese literature. 

425B Oriental Litoraturo (3) 

A study of selected translations of Japanese literature. 


324 


Comparative Literature 


430 Persian and Arabian Literature (3) 

A survey course on the nature and distribution of the classics of western Asia 
in English translation, with lectures, readings and discussion. 

445 Literature of the Americas: Contemporary Novelists (3) 

A study of the interdependency of the contemporary fiction of North and South 
America. It focuses on direct influences, such as Hemingway’s and Faulkner’s on 
Latin American writers, and Borges’ influence on North American writers. It also 
examines several parallels in techniques and themes as they reflect relationships 
in and between the Northern and ^uthem cultures. 

450 Tho Naturalists (3) 

A study of naturalism in the works of Turgenev, Balzac, the brothers Goncourt, 
Maupassant, Zola, Huysmans, Ibsen, Verga; and also the works of Gissing, Moore, 
Hardy, Garland, Crane, Norris, Dreiser, London, and O’Neill. 

453 Th« Noval in Franca and Germany (3) 

Reading, discussion, and interpretation of outstanding novels in translation with 
a view toward determining some principles of the narrative arts. Emphasis on 
Goethe, Stendhal, Flaubert, Mann, Kafka, Proust, and others. 

454 Contemporary Movements in European Literature (3) 

A study of modem literary movements, including naniralism, realism, symbol- 
ism, expressionism and surrealism, with reading and discussion of selected exam- 
ples. 

473A,A World Drama (3^) 

Reading, discussion and interpretation of great plays of the world in translation, 
emphasizing them as literature for performance. First semester from ancient Greece 
through the mid-19th century; second semester, from Ibsen to the present. (Same 
as Theatre 473A3) 

432 Senior Seminar: Major Writers <3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures involving intensive 
study of major writers. The student should consult his adviser and the sched^e 
of classes for the sections available. This course number may be repeated with 
different content for additional credit. 

433 Senior Seminor: Special Studies In Comparative Literature (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures devoted to signifi- 
cant periods, nwvements, and themes in world literature. The smdent should con- 
sult his adviser and the schedule of classes for the sections available. This course 
number may be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

491 Senior Seminor: Greek Tragedy (3) 

Fifth century Greek tragedy through the extent works of Aeschylus and 
Sophocles, and 10 plays of Euripides. (Some as Theatre 491) 

491 Senior Seminar: Realism (3) 

The theory, the origins, and the development of realism. 

492 Literoture of Action In 20th Century France (3) 

(Same as French 492) 

492 German Literature in Translation (3) 

(Same as German 492) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

S32 Graduate Seminar: Dante (3) 


325 


Earth Science 


EARTH SCIENCE 

(Offered by the Department of Science and Mathematics Education) 

101 Physical Ooology (4) 

An introduction to the physical nature of the planet earth, its properties and 
composition; the genesis and relationships of rocks and minerals; erosion processes 
and their effects; the evolution of the eanh’s crust. (3 hours lecture, 3 hours 
laboratory, 1 field trip) 

102 Historical Ooology (4) 

Prerequisite: Geology 101 or consent of instructor. The history of the earth as 
interpreted from rocks, structures and fossils. Consideration of the geologic time 
scale, ancient environments, and the development of life, with emphasis on their 
interdependence. Development of continents and ocean basins. (3 hours lecture, 
3 hours laboratory, 1 or 2 field trips) 

110 Introduction to Physical Oceanography (3) 

Prerequisite: High school physics or chemistry and algebra. An introduction to 
the physical, chemical, and geological nature of the oceans. Does not apply as 
credit for majors in earth science. (3 hours lecture, 2 field trips) 

300 Introduction to Astronomy (3) 

(Same as Physics 300) 

301, 302, 401, 402 Studios in Geoscience (2-6 units each) 

Open to majors in earth science and related fields. Students may elect from two 
to six units per semester with approval of instructor. Guided independent study of 
problems in earth science. Supervision is geared to the experience and maturity of 
each student. Problems are designed to explore significant aspects of earth science 
and may be taken in any sequence. (1 hour of discussion or conference, 3 hours of 
laborator>’, super\'ised study and fieldwork for each 2 units) 

Areas of study that may be covered in Elarth Science 301, 302, 401 and 402 
include work in each of the following categories: 

A. Studies in the area of geochendstry. Prerequisites: Physical geology and 
general chemistry. Problems in the identification and classification of rocks, min- 
erals, soils, water types; geochemistry of ci^'stalline solids, magmatic, marine, and 
meteoric liquids, and atmospheric and volcanic gases; properties, grow'th, symmetry', 
and morphology of cry'stals; genesis of earth materials and the interdependence of 
their development. Optical, chemical, X-ray, and physical experimental techniques. 
Field methods of collecting and evaluating data. 

B. Studies in the area of geobiology. Prerequisites: Historical geology and a 
semester of biology. Problems in the reconstruction of geologic history by evolu- 
tionary trends in fossils, by radioactive isotope determinations, by stratigraphic 
sequence, by relationships of sedimentary facies, b>' analysis of rock structures in 
field and laboratory. Inter-relationships of flora and fauna and the genesis of rocks, 
oceans, and atmosphere. Techniques for identification and classification of fossils. 
Preparation and interpretation of map»s, diagrams, and aerial photographs. 

C Studies in the area of geo-fluids. Prerequisite: Fundamental physics. Prob- 
lems in the energy' sy'stems of oceans, atmosphere and surface and underground 
water and their interfaces; morphology and genesis of shorelines and seafloor; 
dynamics of oceans and atmosphere; physics of clouds and water vapor; classifica- 
tion and analysis of weather systems; composition and structure of oceans and 
atmosphere; evolutionary development of oceans and atmosphere. Methods and 
instruments. 


326 


inglish 


D. Studies in the area of geophysics. Prerequisites: Fundamental physics. Astron- 
omy recommended. Problems in the techniques and applications of seismology 
to earthquakes, exploration, and the eanh’s interior; measurement and interpre- 
tation of gravitation, terrestrial magnetism, and terrestrial heat; extra-terrestrial 
radiation, plasmas, and upper-atmospheric phenomena; lunar and planetary struc- 
tures, surfaces and atmospheres; hypotheses of the origins of planets, atmospheres, 
oceans, continents, and mountains. Geophysical instruments and methods of investi- 
gation. 

The amount of study in each area will be determined by the student’s interests 
and goals and with the approval of the student’s adviser. Other areas may be 
selected with consent of the department. 

350 G«n*ral Astronomy (4) (Formorly 200) 

Prerequisite or corequisite: Mathematics 150A. High school physics recom- 
mended. Methods of astronomy, celestial motion, solar system, stellar types, galac- 
tic structure, theories of origin of the universe and solar system. (Same as Physics 
350) (3 hours lecture, 1 hour quiz) 

499 Indopondont Study (1-3) 

Study of some special topic in earth science, selected in consultation with the 
instructor and carried out under his supervision. May be repeated for credit. 

ENGLISH 

For world literature in English translation see courses under Gompartive Litera- 
ture. English 101 • and 102 • or their equivalent are normal prerequisites for all 
courses numbered 200 or above. 

101 Composition and World Litoroturo (3) 

Analytical and critical writing based on the study of representative works from 
Qassical and Biblical literature to the Renaissance. 

102 World Litoroturo and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: English 101 or the equivalent. The study of reprc^tative works 
from the Renaissance to the modem age, as a basis for continuing practice in 
analytical and critical writing. 

201 Anolysis of Litorory Forms (3) 

The main literary forms — prose fiction, poetry, and drama — are studied and ana- 
lyzed. Various critical methods are applied to representative works mainly from 
^glish and American literature. Especially recommended for prospective teachers 
of literature. 

202 Tho Short Story (3) 

A course designed to introduce the student to the study of the structure and 
technique of the short story. Emphasis on critical analysis of selected American 
and European short stories. (Same as Comparative Literature 202) 

205 Introduction to Drama (3) 

A course designed to introduce the student to the study of dramatic literature. 
Emphasis on close analysis of individual plays. 

206 Introduction to Pootry (3) 

The course is designed to increase students’ understanding and appreciation of 
the art of poetry. The primary activity will be close reading of poems written in 
English. 

* Final decisions on any changes in tho freshman English program for 1970-71 were not made 
in time for inclusion in diis catalog. Please see “Special English Department Bulletin 
* 70 -' 71 /* available in the Fj< gli*h Department, for English Department course descriptions 
and requirements at the 100 leveL 


327 


English 


211 Matters of British Litorotvro (2) 

Prerequisite: Limited to students who arc of sophomore standing or who have 
obtained the consent of the instructor. An introduction to major periods and move- 
ments, major authors, and major forms through 1760. 

212 Motfort of British Litoroturo (3) 

Prerequisite: limited to students who arc of sophomore standing or who have 
obtained the consent of the instructor. An introduction to major periods and 
movements, major authors, and major forms from 1760 through modem times. 

301 Advanced Composition (3) 

Elxercises in creativity, analysis, and rhetoric as applied in expository writing. 
Required of Elnglish majors seeking the secondary credential. 

303 Tho Structwro of Modorn English (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing. The grammar of contemporary English applied 
to problems in writing. Modem English usage. Required of Elnglish majors seeking 
the secondary credentLd. 

30S Amoricon Diolocts (3) 

An examination of the principles of dialectology. Elmphasis will be on the descrip- 
tion of modem American dialects and their role in social, cultural and educational 
issues of today. 

320 Litoroturo of tho Amoricon Indion (3) 

A study of the prose and poetry of the American Indian, focusing on the 
literatures of the North American tribes. 

321 Amoricon Litoroturo to Whitmon (3) 

Emphasis on major writers: Hau'thome, Poe, Melville, Emerson, Thoreau, Whit- 
man, and others. 

322 Amoricon Litoroturo from Twoin to tho Modoms (3) 

Emphasis on Twain, James, Crane, Hemingway, Faulkner, O'Neill, Frost, Eliot. 

332 Modiovol English Litoroturo (3) 

An introduction to the literature of medieval England, exclusive of Chaucer. 
Readings in modem Elnglish versions of representative major works and genres 
from Beovmlf to Malory. 

333 Choucor (3) 

A study of The Canterbury Tales and of Chaucer's language, with particular 
emphasis upon the understanding of the vocabulary, pronunciation, grammar, and 
syntax of the East Midland dialect of .Middle English, as indispensable to literary 
appreciation. 

334 Shokospooro (3) 

An introduction to Shakespeare's art through a detailed study of the more 
famous plays. 

335 Elixobuthon and Jocebaon Dramo (3) 

Studies of representative English dramatists of the late 16th and early 17th 
centuries. Emphasis on the development of the dramatic tradition in the plays of 
Marlowe, Jonson, Webster, Beaumont and Fletcher, and others. 

336 Elizabathan Poatry and Prosa (3) 

A study of the nondramadc literature of the English Renaissance from More to 
Campion. Emphasis on Renaissance thought and the works of Spenser. 


328 


English 


337 17th Century Po«try and Proia (3) 

A survey of the major writers of the period from 1603 to 1660 exclusive of Milton. 

333 Tha Drama of tho Rostoration and tho 13fh Contury (3) 

A study of representative plays of the Restoration and the 18th century. Empha- 
sis will be placed on the development of such dramatic movements as the heroic 
play. Restoration comedy, and sentimental drama. 

341 Milton (3) 

An intensive study of the poetry and prose in the light of Milton’s intellectual 
development. 

342 Tho Ago of Roason in English Litoraturo (3) 

Swift, Pope, Johnson, Boswell, Addison, and Steele. The Restoration, the Age of 
Reason, and foreshadowings of Romanticism. 

343 Tho Romantic Movomont in English Litoraturo (3) 

Bums, Blake; Wordswonh, Coleridge; Byron, Shelley, and Keats. The r^don 
against radonalism, the rise of revolutionary and liberal thought, humanitarianism, 
and emphasis on individual creativity. 

344 Tho Litoraturo of tho 19th Contury oftor 1330 (3) 

A study of literature in its relationship to the problems which efrcrge from the 
social, cultural, scientific, and industrial revolutions of the Victorian period. 

345 Tho Dovolopmont of tho English Novol through Jano Auston (3) 

A study of the English novel from its beginnings to the 19th century considering 
such novelists as Defoe, Richardson, Fielding, Steme, and Austen. 

346 Tho Dovolopmont of tho 19th-Contury English Novol (3) 

A Study of such novelists as the Brdntes, Thackeray, Dickens, Eliot, and Hardy. 

351 Scionco Fiction (3) 

Prerequisite: English 101. The study of science fiction as a genre, including fu- 
ture-scene fiction, the utopian novel, the superman novel, and short fantasy 
stories. 

352 African Litoraturo (3) 

African literature written in the Elnglish language, with special emphasis on the 
fiction, poetry, and drama of the new nations. (Same as Comparative Literature 
352) 

353 3lack Writors in Amorica (3) 

A study of black American writers from Frederick Douglass to the present. 
Concentration on important figures such as Wright, Elllison and Baldwin. 

364 Sominar in Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: evidence of student’s previous interest in creative writing and con- 
sent of the instructor. Study of superior models, development of style, and group 
criticism and evaluation of each student’s independent work. Depending on the 
specialized writing field of the instructor, the various sections will concentrate on 
fiction, plays, or poetry. May be repeated for credit. 

391 5urvay of English Litarary Criticism (3) 

A study of the major English critics from the Renaissance to the modem. 
Emphasis on Sidney, Dry den, Johnson, (Ix)leridge, Arnold and Eliot. 

421 Minority Imagos in American Litoraturo (3) 

An examination of 19th- and 20th-century literature written by and about racial 
groups in America. Includes Uncle Tonies Cabhiy Saul on Ice and Laughing Boy. 


329 


inglish 


4^3 Children's Literotvre (3) 

A study of masterpieces of the world’s literature for children. Illustrates literary 
qualities appealing to children and demonstrates the ways in which children’s 
literature reflects the particular cultural differences of the various Oriental, classi- 
cal and modem cultures. 

43S Stvdins In $hak«s|>«arn (3) 

Prerequisite: English 334 or consent of the instructor. An intensive study of 
selected plays with primary emphasis upon problems of dramatic structure and 
artistic meanings. 

445 Th« Amnricon Tradition In Peotry (3) 

A study of selected American poets from the 17th century to 1914. Emphasis 
on the close reading of individual poems. 

444 Tho Amorican Novol to 1914 (3) 

A study of selected novelists from C. B. Brown, through Melville and Twain, to 
Dreiser. 

451 Philotophicol Bockgroundi of Modorn Lltorotwro (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Onter 451) 

452 Modom Litorary Criticism (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing or consent of the instructor. A study of 
the major movements in 20th-century British and American criticism. 

442 Modorn British and Amorican Novols (3) 

Prerequisites: survey of English, American, or world literature; an upper divi- 
sion literature course; or consent of the instructor. The development of modem 
British and American novels from 19(X) to 1950. 

443 Contomporary British and Amorican Novolf (3) 

The novel in English since World War 11. 

444 Modom British ond Amorican Drama (3) 

Prerequisites: survey of English, American, or world literature; an upper divi- 
sion literature course; or consent of the instructor. The development of British 
and American drama from 1900 to the present. 

444 Modom British and Amorican Pootry (3) 

Prerequisite: survey of English, American or world literature; an upper divi- 
sion literature course; or consent of the instructor. The development of British 
and American poetry from 1900 to the present. 

490 History of tho English Languago (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing. The historical development of English 
vocabulLy, phonology, morphology, and syntax from Indo-European to modem 
American En^ish. 

491 Sonior Sominor (3) 

Prerequisite: an undergraduate course in the area to be studied, a B average or 
better in English courses, or consent of the instructor. EMrected research and 
writing, group discussion, and lectures covering selected topics from language 
studies, intensive studies of major writers, criticism, and literary types, periods, 
and ideological trends. 

499 Indapandant Study (3) 

Open to advanced students in English w'ith the consent of the department chair- 
man. May be repeated for credit. 


330 


English 


570 Orodwat* S«niinan Longuog* Studies (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering philology, 
historical development, and structure of English. Individual offerings under this 
course number may deal with only one aspect of language studies. The student 
should consult his advisor and the schedule of classes for the sections appropriate 
to his graduate program. This course number may be repeated with different con- 
tent for additional credit. 

571 Oraduat* S«minan Major Writars (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of the instructor, this 
course will offer directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures cov- 
ering major figures such as: Shakespeare, Milton, Chaucer, Melville, Twain, Haw- 
thorne, Joyce, and Coleridge. The student should consult his adviser and the sched- 
ule of classes for the sections appropriate to his graduate program. This course 
number may be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

572 Oraduata Saminar: Litarary Oanrai (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of the instructor, this 
course will offer directed research and writing, group discussion and lecture, 
covering such major literary types as: the epic, the novel, the short story, lyric 
poetry, tragedy, comedy, and historical drama. The student should consult his 
adviser and the schedule of classes for sections appropriate to his graduate pro- 
gram. This course number may be repeated with different content for additional 
credit. (Same as Theatre 573) 

573 Oradwafa Saminar: Cultural Pariodf (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of the instructor, this 
course will offer directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures 
covering the literature of a particular cultural period from the Anglo-Saxon to 
modem times. The student should consult his adviser and his schedule of classes 
for the sections appropriate to his graduate program. This course number may 
be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

574 Oraduata SamiiKir: Spatial Prebloms in Litaratura (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of the instructor, this 
course will offer directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures 
covering special problems such as: the detailed critical study ^ of varying in- 
fluences on literature, including philosophical, religious, scientific, geographic, 
and other ecological viewpoints. TTie student should consult his adviser and his 
schedule of classes for the sections appropriate to his graduaw program. This 
course number may be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

579 Oraduota Saailnan Problamt in Criticism (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering historical 
development and schools of criticism. Individual offerings within this course 
number may deal with only one aspect of critical problems. The student should 
consult his adviser and the schedule of classes for the sections appropriate to his 
graduate program. This course number may be repeated with different content for 
additional credit. 

599 Indapandant Oraduota Rasoarch (3) 

Research projects in areas of specialization beyond regularly offered course work. 
Oral and written reports. This course number may be repeated with different 
content for additional credit. 


331 


English Education 


ENGLISH EDUCATION 

442 TMching In^llth in th« Sncondary School (2) 

Prerequisites: Education 311, admission to teacher education. Principles, methods, 
and materials of teaching English in the secondary school. The student who has 
not had teaching experience must register concurrently in Education 449. 

749 Stwdont Tooching in English in fho Socondory School and Sominar (6) 

See page 269 for description and prerequisites. 

FOREIGN LANGUAGES EDUCATION 

(Offered by the Depanment of Foreign Languages and Literature) 

432 Tooching Foroign Languages in the Elementary School (2) 

Methods of teaching FLES: foreign languages in elementary schools. Critical 
review of materials, audiolingual-visual aids, and current research. Conducted in 
English, with practice by students in the language they plan to teach. 

433 Electromechanical Aids in the Foreign Languoge Classroom (1) 

Principles and techniques of advanced electromechanical, auditory, visual and 
programmed learning devices in foreign language instruction. Special emphasis on 
instructional television and the language laboratory. 

442 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Secondary School (2) 

Prerequisites: Education 311 and 340; French, German, or Spanish 466; and admis- 
sion to teacher education. Also open to experienced teachers. The student who 
has not had teaching experience must register concurrently in Education 449. See 
page 131 under Secondary' Education for description of Standard Teaching Creden- 
tial program. The theory' and practice of language learning and language teaching 
with special emphasis on the audiolingual method in combination with electro- 
mechanical aids. Conducted in English, with practice by students in the language 
they' plan to teach. Required, before student teaching, of students presenting majors 
in foreign languages for the standard teaching credential with a specialization in 
secondary education. 

749 Studant Taaching In Feraign Languagas in th« 

Secondary School and Sominar <6) 

See page 269 for description and prerequisites. 

FRENCH 

(Offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures) 

101 Fundamontal Fronch (S) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to 
develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structure of French. Audio- 
lingual assignments are an integral part of the course and are to be prepared in 
the language laboratory. Conducted in French. 

102 Fundamontal Fronch (5) 

Prerequisite: French 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening compre- 
hension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of the sounds and the 
basic forms and structure of French. Audiolingual assignments are an integral part 
of the course and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted in 
French. 

203 Intormodiato Fronch (3) 

Prerequisite: French 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, under- 
standing, reading, and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic 
analysis from sound to sentence. Conducted in French. 


332 


French 


204 lnt«nii«diat* Fr«iKh (3) 

Prerequisite: French 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, under- 
standing, reading and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic 
analysis from sound to sentence. Conducted in French. 

213 lnt«rm«diat» Composition (2) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be 
taken concurrently with French 203. Required of all majors and minors at the 
intermediate level; optional to others. Conducted in French. 

214 Intormodiofo Composition (2) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be 
taken concurrently with French 204. Required of all majors and minors at the 
intermediate level; optional to others. Conducted in French. 

300 Fronch Convorsotion (2) 

Prerequisites: French 204 and 214 or equivalent. This course will enable the 
student to develop further his oral control of the language in the context of his 
own or contemporary concerns rather than in the context of the subject matter 
of a French major. Conducted in French. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

303 Rasidings in Scinntific Fmnch (3) 

Prerequisite: French 102 or equivalent. Readings reflecting a broad spectrum of 
writing in the physical and natural sciences and mathematics. Special attention 
given to the development of rapid reading for comprehension. Open only to 
science and mathematics majors. 

31S Introduction to Fronch Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Reading and discussions to develop a 
view of the French tradition (its social, intellectual and literary evolution) while 
at the same time strengthening facility with the language. Open to lower division 
students with the consent of the instructor. Conducted in French. 

317 Advancod Composition and Gramnuir (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Designed to give the student special 
competence in the control of French as an instrument for free oral and written 
expression. Conducted in French. 

313 Advancod Composition and Grammar (3) 

Prerequisite: French 317 or equivalent. Designed to give the student special 
competence in the control of French as an instrument for free oral and written 
e x pre ssi on. Conducted in French. 

325 Contomporary Fronch Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Reading and discussion to develop under- 
standing of the social and intellectual problems, trends, and contributions of pres- 
ent-day France, while at die same time strengthening facility with the language. 
Open to lower division students with the consent of the instructor. Conducted in 
French. 

375 Introduction to Utorary Forms (3) 

Prerequisite: French 317 or consent of instructor. An introduedon to the prin- 
cipal literary forms, prose Action, poetry, drama and the essay and to the major 
concepts of the literary techniques and cridcism. Qose analysis and interpretadon 
of various texts to increase the student’s abilides in reading, language, and literary 
cridcism. Conducted in French. 


333 


trench 


400 French for AdvoiKod Sfvdontf and Toachors (3) 

Prerequisite; French 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive review of spoken 
French, whfle developing the student’s powers of self-expression in the spoken and 
written language. Conducted in French. 

431 Fronch Litoraturo In tho Middio Agot and Ronaittanco (3) 

Prerequisite: French 315 or consent of instructor. The development of French 
literature from the 12th through the 16th centuries, through analysis of representa- 
tive works. Conducted in French. 

441 Fronch Litoraturo in tho Contwry of Rovolution (3) 

Prerequisite: French 315 or consent of instructor. The principal authors and 
movements (romanticism, realism, naturalism, symbolism) of the 19th century. 
Conducted in French. 

4S1 Fronch: Litoraturo in tho Baroquo and Clastic Ago (3) 

Prerequisite; French 315 or consent of instructor. The essence and evolution of 
17th-century classicism, studied principally in the major authors ((}omcillc, 
Moliire, Racine, La Fayette) and in the dominant genre (the theater). Onducted 
in French. 

441 Fron<h Litoraturo in tho Ago of Enlightonmont (3) 

Prerequisite: French 315 or consent of instructor. Two complementary aspects 
of the 18th centur>': reason and feeling, the philosophes and the current of sensibil- 
ity. Emphasis on major authors (Marivaux, Voltaire, Diderot, Rousseau, Laclos). 
(Conducted in French. 

446 Introduction to Fronch Linguistics (3) 

The anal>^cal procedures of general linguistics as applied to French, with spe- 
cial attention to structural contrasts between French and English. Emphasb on 
the application of linguistic analysis to the teaching of modem foreign languages. 

471 Sonior Sominan Contomporory Fronch Litoraturo (3) 

Prerequisite: French 315 or consent of instructor. The major figures of the 20di 
century, including the generations of Proust, Apollinaire, Malnux, Sartre and 
Robbe-Grillet. Conducted in French. 

435 Sonior Sominar in Fronch Litoraturo (3) 

Prerequisite: French 431, 441, 451, 461, or senior status. Exploration of a literary 
current, period, author, genre or problem. The subject will change each time the 
course is given and may be repeated for credit. Conducted in French. 

492 Litoraturo of Action in 20th-Contury Franco (3) 

Selected works read, discussed and analyzed in the light of current philosophical 
trends as well as historical and political developments. The works studied might 
include such titles as: The Counterfeiters (Gide); Man's Fate and The Temptation 
of the ^yest (Malraux); The Wall and What is Literature (Sartre); The Plague 
and Resistanee, Rebellion and Death (Camus); Windy Sand and Stars and A Sense 
of Life (Saint-Elxupcry). Readings and lectures in ^glish. This course may not 
be counted toward fulfillment of the requirements for the major in French. 

499 Indopondont Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in French language or literature to be taken with the consent 
of the instructor and department chairman. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Prerequisite: C^onsent of instructor. Conducted in French. 


334 


Geography 


510 Oroduat* Seminar: Pheiiolo 9 y (3) 

Prerequisite: French 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

S20 Old FrMich (3) 

Prerequisite; Consent of instructor. Readings in the medieval literature of northern 
France representing a wide variety of dialects and centuries. Conducted in French. 

530 Groduot* Seminar: HiatoHcol Unguiftics (3) 

Prerequisite; French 466 or consent of the instructor. It is highly recommended 
that the student have had some previous study of Latin. Studies in the phonetic, 
morphological, syntactic and semantic changes that characterize the development 
of Ladn into the French of today. Conducted in French. 

557 Oraduof* S^mincir: French Po*fry (3) 

Prerequisite; Consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

571 Oraduot* Seminar: French Pros* (3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

575 Oradvoto Sominon Fronch Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

576 Oroduoto Sominon Major Wrifors (3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. Conducted in 
French. 

593 Ttiofis (3-6) 

Prerequisite; Recommendation of the student’s graduate committee. 

599 Indopondont Orodwofo Itosoorch (1-3) 

Prerequisite: Fluency in French and consent of instructor. Supervised research 
projects in French language or literature. May be repeated for credit. 

GEOGRAPHY 


100 Mon and tbo Land (3) 

An introductory geography of the world, with emphasis on the world’s major 
physical regions and their occupational development by man. 

206 Ptiysicol Geography (4) 

A study of the basic elements of the physical environment (e.g., weather, 
climate, landforms, oceans, vegetation and soils) and an analysis of their world 
distribution and interrelationships. (3 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

210 Cwltoral Geography (3) 

A topical examination of the evolutionary role of culture in the human occu- 
pancy of the earth, focusing on changing technological and organizational patterns 
in livelihood and settlement. 

233 Iconomic Geography (3) 

A systematic inquiry into the worid distribution of economic activities: agri- 
culture, extractive and manufacturing industries, transportation and tertiary serv- 
ices. 

312 Geomorphology (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 206 or Geology lOOA. A study of the development of 
landforms and the processes which alter them. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 


335 


Geography 

323 Climatology (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 206 or consent of instructor. A study of atmospheric 
elements and controls, climatic classification systems, and world climatic distribu- 
tions. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

343 Maps and Map Intorprotation (3) 

Interpretation, evaluation, uses, and sources of various types of maps and 
graphic aids for teaching and research. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

350 Contorvatien of tho Amorican Environment (3) (Formerly 450} 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. A surv’ey of resource-use problems and the 
principles of conservation, with discussions of philosophy, ethics, public policy, 
and conservation education. Type studies and term papers focus on the American 
West. 

345 Geography of Europe (3) (Formerly 433) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Description and analysis of physical en- 
vironments and human occupance patterns in Europe west of the Soviet Union. 

366 Geography of the Soviet Union (3) (Formerly 438) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Character of and bases for the regional di- 
versity of man and land in the Soviet Union. 

370 Urban Goography (3) (Formerly 471) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. The city as a geographic unit; urban settle- 
ments as regional centers; city-region relationships; the structure of villages, towns 
and cities, and their historical development; case studies. 

431 Geography of Colifomia (3) 

Description and analysis of the geographic regions of California — their environ- 
mental diversity, population distribution, economic development and current prob- 
lems. 

432 Geogrophy of Anglo-America (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. A regional study of die 
United States and Canada emphasizing the interrelated physical and cultural fea- 
tures that give geographic personality both to the individual regions as well as the 
individual countries. 

434 Googrophy of Latin Amorica (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. A systemadc and regional 
survey of Middle and South America with particular emphasis on the interrela- 
tionships of the physical and social factors of the area. 

435 Goography of Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. A regional study of Asiadc 
nadon^ exclusive of the Soviet Union and Southwest Asia, showing the interrcla- 
donships of physical and cultural characterisdes with special emphasis on the grow- 
ing significance, in economic, social, and pnilidcal terms, of such countries as China, 
India and Japan. 

436 Goography of Subsaharon Africa (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. The physical, human, and 
regional geography of Africa south of the Sahara. 

439 Goography of the Middle East (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. The physical foun- 
dadons and cultural landscapes of civilizadon in the Middle East, with emphasis 
on contemporary political, socioeconomic, and cultural changes. 


336 


Geography 


445 Australia and the Pacific Islands (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. The physical, cultural, 
and regional geography of Australia, New Zealand, Melanesia, Micronesia and 
Polynesia. 

453 Cultural Ecology (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 210 or Anthropology 202, or consent of instructor. A 
senior seminar in the ecological approach to man in nature. (Same as Anthro- 
pology 453) 

463 Prabloms of California Goography (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 431 or consent of instructor. A seminar analyzing 
selected geographic problems of California, such as urbanization, transportation, 
water supply and pollution. 

464 Man and Geographic Relationships In Latin America (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 434 or consent of instructor. A seminar for advanced 
students in Latin American Studies or Geography. Studies of contemporary inter- 
est dealing with man and his development in the area of Latin America. Specific 
content of the course will vary from year to year, but major stress will be pbced 
upon the larger countries of the region. 

472 Urban Growth and Planning (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 370 or consent of instructor. A senior seminar on urban 
development with an emphasis on the decentralizing forces operating in contem- 
porary urban space; identification of trends in the planning process. 

475 Land Uto Analysis and Classification (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing and completion of the Geography 
core. Consent of the instructor is required. Analysis and interpretation of urban 
and rural land use and settlement with specific references to geographic field 
problems. The course involves application of geographic techniques and tools 
to local field studies. Saturday field sessions. 

473 Cartography (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography core or consent of instructor. Compilation and con- 
struction of maps and graphs as geographic tools, with emphasis on the principles 
of effective cartographic representation. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

479 Airphoto and Image Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisite: junior, senior or graduate standing and consent of instructor. Use 
of aerial photography, space photography and other remote sensors as tools and 
research sources. Emphasis on interpreution of physical and cultural elements of 
the landscape. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

440 Problems in Map Compilation and Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 478 and consent of the instructor. Application of scrib- 
ing and photo-cartographic techniques to advanced problems in map compliadon 
and design. U hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

441 Political Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 210 or consent of instructor. The political map of the 
world with special reference to the geopolitical structure of states, dependencies, 
and other politically organized areas. 

443 Seminar in Historical Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography core or consent of instructor. The seminar will study 
a number of geographic sites and situations as products of change through dme. 


337 


Geology 


The change will be examined under themes including theory and viewpoints, physi- 
cal and cultural evolution. A research project on a local area will be required. 

490 Olographic Rotoarch and Proaontation (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography core and consent of instructor. A senior seminar in 
research methods, with discussions of major research themes, data-gathering, writ- 
ing, editing, printing, bibliographic citation, manuscript format, and presentation. 
Students prepare several short papers and one major research study. 

499 Indopondonf Study (1-3) 

Open to advanced students. Student must have permission of instructor under 
whom study will be undertaken before enrolling. May be repeated once for credit. 

500 Saminar in tha Evolution of Goograpkic Thought (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing, or consent of instructor. An inquiry into the 
nature, scope, and development of the geographic discipline. 

S13 Sominar in Rogional Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected 
regions or selected topics within a regional setting. May be repeated once for 
credit. 

533 Seminar in Human Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected 
topics pertaining to cultural, political or social geography. May be repeated once 
for credit. 

533 Seminar in Resource Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected 
problems in resource utilization, land use planning and economic geography. May 
be repeated once for credit. 

S97 Proiect (1-3) 

May be repeated for a maximum of 6 units of credit. 

593 Thoftii (1-3) 

Prerequisite: Recommendation of the student's graduate committee. May be 
repeated for a maximum of 6 units of credit. 

S99 Indopondonf Groduoto Rosoarch (1-3) 

Open to graduate students by consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

GEOLOGY 

(See Earth Science) 

GERAAAN 

(Offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures) 

101 Fundamonfal Gorman (S) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to 
develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structures of German. 
Audiolingual assignments are an integral part of the course and are to be prepared 
in the language laboratory. (Conducted in Czerman. 

103 Fundamonfal Gorman (S) 

Prerequisite: German 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening compre- 
hension, speaking, reading, and writing to develop control of the sounds and the 
basic forms and structure of German. Audiolingual assignments are an integral 


338 


German 


part of the course and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. G)nducted 
in German. 

203 lnt«rm*diot« German (3) 

Prerequisite: German 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, under- 
standing, reading, and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic 
analysis from sound to sentence. Conducted in German. 

204 lnt«nn«diat« German (3) 

Prerequisite: German 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, under- 
standing, reading and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic 
analysis from sound to sentence. Conducted in German. 

213 lnt«nn«diat* Composition (2) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be 
taken concurrently with German 203. Required of all majors and minors at the 
intermediate level; optional to others. Conducted in German. 

214 Intormodioto Composition (2) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be 
taken concurrently with German 204. Required of all majors and minors at the 
intermediate level; optional to others. Conducted in German. 

303 Roodings in SdontiRc Gorman (3) 

Prerequisite: German 102 or equivalent. Readings reflecting a broad spectrum of 
writing in the physical and natural sciences and mathematics. Speciri attention 
given to the development of rapid reading for comprehension. Open only to 
science and mathematics majors. 

315 Introdvction to Gorman Civllixation (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or eqiuvalent. Readings and discussions in German 
literature, arts and institutions to develop insights into German ctdture, while 
strengthening facility with the language. Open to lower division students with 
the consent of the instructor. Conducted in German. 

317 Advancod Convortation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with 
the consent of the instructor. Designed to give the student special competence in 
the control of German as an instrument of free oral and written expression. Con- 
ducted in German. 

325 Modorn Gorman Thought in Scionco and Cuitvro (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Readings and discussion of modem 
German thought in science, literature, philosophy and art, designed to acquaint 
the student with a broad range of German contributions to present-day civiliution 
while strengthening facility with German language. Open to lower division stu- 
dents with consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

375 Introduction to Utorory Forms (3) 

Prerequisite: German 317 or consent of instruaor. An introduction to the 
principal literary forms, prose Action, poetry, drama and the essay and to the 
major concepts of literary techniques and criticism. Qose analysis and interpre- 
tation of various texts to increase the student’s abilities in reading, language, and 
literary criticism. Conducted in German. 

399 Gorman Phonotics (1) 

Prerequisite: junior standing and consent of instructor. Detailed analysis of 
individuri problems in pronunciation followed by intensive work in class and the 
language laboratory. May be repeated for credit. Conducted in German. 


339 


German 


400 0«rm«n for Advoncod Studonts and Toochort (3) 

Prerequisite: German 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive review of German 
while developing the student’s powers of self-expression in the spoken and written 
language. Conducted in German. 

431 Ttio Works of tossing and Schillor (3) 

The major works of Lessing and Schiller illustrating their thought and art. Con- 
ducted in German. 

441 Tko Works of Oootho (3) 

Selected works of Goethe illustrating his thought and art. Conducted in German. 

4S1 Oormon LJforotwro to tko karoquo (3) 

Important works from the Hildebrandslied to Smtplicissrmus in the setting of 
their intellectual and historical climate. Conducted in German. 

441 Oormon Litorotvro SInco Oootho (3) 

Important works illustrating the development from romanticism to expressionism 
in the setting of their intellectual and historical climate. Conducted in German. 

466 Introdoction to Oormon Linguistics (3) 

The analytical procedures of general linguistics as applied to German, with 
special attention to structural contrasts between German and English. Emphasis 
on the application of linguistic analysis to the teaching of modem foreign lan- 
guages. 

435 Sonior Sominor In Oormon Litoroturo (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in German and consent of instructor. Research and 
discussion in depth of a literary movement, a genre or an author. Subject will vary 
and will be announced in the class schedule. Topics offered in past years have in- 
cluded the Baroque, the Novelle^ Brecht, Modem Drama, Keller, Poetic Realism, 
Romantic Period. May be repeated for credit with a different topic. Conducted in 
German. 

493 Oormon Litoroturo In Translotion (3) 

Open to all students. Reading, disctission and interpretation of relevant German 
literature with emphasis on determining the specific contribution these works have 
made to world literature and the shaping of global philosophies. Authors include 
Goethe, Schiller, Kafka, Hesse, Mann, Brecht, Grass, Hauptmann. Readings and 
lectures in Elnglish. This course may not be counted toward fulfillment of the 
requirements for the major in German 

499 Indopondont Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects in German language or literature to be taken with 
the consent of the instructor and the department chairman. May be repeated for 
credit. 

500 Oroduoto Sominan Advoncod Structuro and Stylo (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

510 Oroduoto Sominon Phonology (3) 

Prerequisite: German 466 or consent of instmetor. Conducted in German. 

530 Oroduoto Sominon Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: German 466 or consent of instructor. (Conducted in German. 

557 Oroduoto Sominon Oormon Pootry (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit with a different 
topic. Conducted in German. 


340 


Hebrew 


571 Oradwat* S«minor: 0«rman Prose (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Subject will vary and will be announced in 
the class schedule. May be repeated for credit with a different topic. G)nducted 
in German. 

575 Groduoto Sominon Gorman Drama (3) 

Prerequisite; consent of instructor. Subject will vary and will be announced in 
the class schedule. May be repeated for credit with a different topic. Conducted in 
German. 

576 Graduato Sominort Major Writers (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Subject will vary and will be announced in 
the class schedule. May be repeated for credit with a different topic. Conducted in 
German. 

593 Thosis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of the student’s graduate committee. 

599 Indopondont Graduato Rosoarch (1-3) 

Prerequisite: fluency in German and consent of instructor. Supervised research 
projects in German language or literature. May be repeated for credit. 

HEBREW 


101 Fundamontal Hobrow (3) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to 
develop control of the sounds and the basic structure of Hebrew. 

102 Fundamontal Hobrow (3) 

Prerequisite 101. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, read- 
ing and writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic structure of Hebrew. 

499 Indopondont Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in Hebrew language or literature to be taken with the con- 
sent of the instructor and department chairman. May be repeated for credit. 

HISTORY 

110A World Clvilizotians to tbo 17th Contury (3) 

The story of man from the beginning of civilizations and historical records until 
the middle of the 17th century. 

not Warid Civilixotiant from 1643 (3) 

The story of man from the end of the religious wars to the present. Deals with 
the rise of science, the Elnlightenment, the Industrial Revolution, and the rise of 
the ideologies of the 20th century. 

170A Uiiitad Status to 1377 (3) 

A survey of the political, social, economic, and cultural development of the 
United States from the discovery to 1877. Attention is given to the Old World 
background, the rise of the new nation, sectional problems, and the Civil War 
and Reconstruction. Satisfies the state requirement in US. History. 

1703 Unitud StotusSIncu 1377 (3) 

A survey of United States history from the late 19th century to the present. 
Attention is given to economic transformation, political reform movements, social, 
cultural, and intellectual changes, and the role of the United States in world 
wars and the Cold War. Satiriies the state requirement in U.S. History. 


341 


History 


340A Hlftory of lii 9 laiNi and Oroaf Iritain (3) 

A study of the political, economic, and social history of medieval and Tudor- 
Smart England. Particular stress is placed on insdmtional and culmral changes 
from the Conquest to the Glorious Revolution. 

3403 History of Ingland and Groat Gritoln (3) 

A smdy of the political, economic, and social history of Great Britain from the 
later Smarts to the present. Particular stress is placed upon the modification of the 
parliamentary system and the growth of economic and social democracy within 
Britain and upon the development of responsible political systems in the dependent 
territories. 

3S0A Colonial Latin Amorlca (3) 

A survey of the pre-Columbian culmres; the conquests by Spain and Pormgal 
and the European background of these countries; the development of the socio- 
economic, culmral, and governmental instimdons in colonial life; the background of 
revolutions and the wars for independence. 

3S0A Ropwbllcan Latin Amorlca (3) 

A survey of the Latin American republic since 1826, emphasizing the strug^e 
for responsible government, socioeconomic, and culmral changes, and the role of 
United States foreign policy. 

333 History of Collfomla (3) 

A survey of the political, economic, and social history of California from the 
aboriginal inhabitants to the present, tracing the development of contemporary 
insdmdons and the historical background of current issues. 

399 Historiography (3) 

introduedon to nature and discipline of history. A smdy of methods of historical 
research and wridng, of bibliography, and of major problems of historical in- 
terpretadon. Required of history majors. 

401 Iwropoan IntolUctoal History from 1500 to tho Prosont (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The history of the competing ideas in 
European history from 1500 to the present which have entered into the formadon 
of m^em European insdmdons. 

41 2A Anciont Noor lost— Mosopotamki (3) 

Prerequisite: History llOA. A smdy of the polidcal, socioeconomic, religious, 
and literary history of Mespotamian culture from the rise of the Sumerian city- 
states to Alexander the Great, a period of over three millenia. This will include 
discussion of the Sumerians, Assyrians, Babylonians, Hurrians, and Persians. 

4131 Anclaat Noar latt—Iast Mad itarra naan (3) 

Prerequisite: History llOA. A smdy of ancient Egypt from early dynasdc times 
in the third millennium B.C. to the conquest of Alexander the Great. The history 
of the Syro-Palesdnian region will be smdied in light of its migradons and inter- 
nadonal culture. A careful smdy of the Hebrews and their contributions to modem 
civilizadon will be included. 

41 SA Clatflcal Orooc# (3) 

Prerequisite: History llOA or consent of instructor. A smdy of the civilizadon 
of ancient Greece. This course traces the rise and flourishing of the classical city- 
states; considerable attendon is devoted to the literar>' and philosophic contribu- 
dons to our modem civilizadon. 


342 


History 


41 Si H«ll«iiistic Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: History IlOA or consent of instructor. A study of the Hellenistic 
synthesis and the new patterns in government, the arts and sciences, philosophy 
and literature that appeared between the Macedonian conquest and the interven- 
tion of Rome. 

417A Reman Rapublic (3) 

Prerequisite: History IlOA or consent of instructor. A study of the development 
of Roman social and political institutions under the republic. 

417S Roman impiro (3) 

Prerequisite: History IlOA or consent of instructor. A study of Roman imperial 
institutions and culture. Attention is also given to the rise of Christianity. 

419 Tha Byzontina Emplra (3) 

The rise and fall of Byzantium from the 4th century A.D. until the 15th century 
AD. This will include a study of Byzantine society and its contribution to the 
world. 

433A Modiaval luropa. 300-1050 (3) 

Prerequisite: History IlOA. The genesis of European society and culture from 
the decline of Rome to the mid- 11th century: the medieval church, the Barbarian 
migrations, the Byzantine and Islamic cultures and the establishment of feudalism 
in western Europe. 

423B Madiaval Europa, 1050-1400 (3) 

Prerequisite: History IlOA. A continuation of History 423 A. The struggle be- 
tween church and state, the rise of feudal monarchies and the intellectual, scientific 
and artistic expressions of European civilization in the later Middle Ages. 

425 A Ttia Ranaitsanca (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The history of Europe from 1400 to 1525 
with emphasis upon the beginnings of capitalism, the beginnings of the modem 
state, humanism, the pre-Reformation and the church on the eve of the Reforma- 
tion. 

4251 Tha Ra f or m atiow (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The histoty of Europe from 1525 to 1648; 
deals with the Protestant and Catholic Reformations; the religious wars; the price 
rise; royal absolutism; the rise of science. 

426 Ris# of Modom Eurepo, 1643-1763 (3) 

Prerequisite: History HOB. European diplomatic history and the balance of 
power from 1648 to 1763. Attention is given to the social and philosophical devel- 
opments of the period. 

427 Ewropo ia fho Era of fbo Froneb Rovoivtion and Napoloon (3) 

A survey of European history from 1763 to 1815. Emphasis is placed on the 
politics, society, and culture of the Old Regime, the influence of the Elnlighten- 
ment, Ae impact of the French Revolution on Europe, and the establishment of 
Fren^ hegemony by Napoleon. 

428 19Hi Confvry Eoropo (3) 

Europe from 1815 to 1914. An examination of the political, economic, social, and 
cultural trends in European history from the Congress of Vienna to the outbreak 
of World War I. Special attention is given to the emerging forces of nationalism, 
liberalism, socialism, and secularism. 


343 


History 


429 lurop* SiiK« 1914 (3) 

Prerequisite: History HOB. Survey of events from the beginning of World War 
I to the present, fecial emphasis given to the economic, political, social, diplo- 
matic, and intellectual trends of 20th century Europe. 

432 0«miany Sine* 1643 (3) 

Prereqi^te: History llOA-B. The evolution of Germany from the Peace of 
Westphalia to the present. Emphasis is placed on political, social, economic, diplo- 
matic and cultural trends in the 19th and 20th centuries. 

434A Rwffiato 1390 (3) 

Prerequisite: History HOB. An analy^ of the historical developments from the 
^tablishment of the Russian state at Kiev through the great reforms, the revolu- 
tionary movement and reaction of the 19th century. Emphasis is placed upon the 
shaping of contemporary Russia. 

4343 Th« RuMlan Ravolutioni and Hia Soviat Rogima (3) 

An evaluation of the 1905 and 1917 revolutions and the subsequent consolidation 
of i^wer under the Communist regime. Chief emphasis is placed upon the con- 
dnmty and change in Russian social, political, c^tural institutions and foreign 
policy effected by the impact of Mandst-Leninist-Stalinist ideology. 

437 last luropa Sinca 1SOO (3) 

The political, social, economic, and cultural history of the peoples of East Central 
Europe from 1500 to the present. 

439 History of Spain (3) 

Development of Hispanic civilization from the earliest times to the present. 

450 Change in Contomporary Latin America (3) 

An analysis of political, social and economic change in present-day Latin Amer- 
ica. 

453A Mexico to 1910 (3) 

A history of Mexico from the pre-Columbian period to 1910. The course stresses 
the Indian heritage, the impact upon the native civilizations of the Spanish Conquest 
and the blending of Hispanic Institutions with those of the first Mexicans. The 
uniqueness of Mexican culture in the world as expressed in its art, literature, 
religion and philosophy will be examined in detail. 

4533 Moxico Sinco 1910 (3) 

A study of the background of the Mexican Revolution of 1910 and the revolution 
itself from 1910 to 1921 stressing the political, economic, and social features; special 
attention will be paid to the Revolution as the first of the great upheavals of the 
20th century and the relationship of the United States to Mexico during these 
turbulent years. The quest for political stabilit>' in the 1920s and 1930s along 
economic and social changes will be studied but stress will also be placed on cul- 
tural renaissance of modem Mexico. 

454 Argantina, Rraxil, Chile (3) 

A history of Argentina, Brazil, and Chile, with special attention to Chile. 

456 Tropical AfHca to 1900 (3) 

The history of tropical Africa from earliest times to the colonial era. 

457 Tropical Africa in the 20th Contvry (3) 

A study of the impact of the colonial period upon the peoples of tropical Africa 
including a comparative analysis of the various systems of colonial administration; 


344 


History 

the factors contributing to the rise of African nationalism and the achievement of 
independence; and the problems encountered by these new nations. 

45tA Southern Africa from lorliaft Timas to tho 20th Contvry (3) 

A study of the culnire and history of the indigenous peoples of southern Africa; 
and the development and impact of European interests in this area with particular 
emphasis on the history of South Africa to the Union of 1910. 

4531 Sowthom Africa in tho 20th Contury (3) 

A survey of 20th-century developments in the Union (Republic) of South 
Africa, Central Africa (the Rhodesias and Nyasaland) and the Portuguese colonies 
with emphasis on the political, economic and social ramifications of race relations. 

460 Problomi of tho Centomporary Far East (3) 

A topics course dealing with events in the major Far Eastern nations since 
World War II, with emphasis upon problems of nationalism, communism and 
economic development in C^hina, Japan, Korea and Southeast Asia. 

461 A Tho Far East (3) 

A study of the political, social and economic conditions in China, Japan and 
Korea prior to World War I, as well as the rise of American power in the Far 
Elast. 


4611 Tho Far East (3) 

A study of the developments in China and Japan that led to the Sino-Japanese 
conflict, Japan’s decision to fight the United States, and the rise of C:ommunist 
(Hiina. 

462A History of Chino (3) 

A survey of Chinese history from antiquity until Western impact in the 19th 
century. The development of Chinese society, thought and political institutions. 

4621 History of Chino (3) 

A survey of Chinese history from the 1840s to the present, emphasizing the 
problems posed by the Western presence in China and the various processes of 
modernization which China has undergone. 

463A History of Japan (3) 

A study of the social, political, and economic history of Japan until 1868, with 
emphasis upon the Tokugawa era. 

4363 History of Japan (3) 

A study emphasizing the rise of the modem Japanese state, Japanese imperialism 
and the postwar era. 

464A Sovthoast Asia in tho Modom World (3) 

A study of the social, political, and economic development in Southeast Asia 
from 1500 to the establishment of the colonial empires of the West in the 19th 
century. 

4643 Sovthoast Asia in tho Modom World (3) 

A study of Southeast Asia under the impact of imperialism and the effects of 
decolonization. 

465A History of India from tho Eoginning Through tho Dolhi Swltonoto 1526 (3) 

A survey of the history of the Indian subcontinent from the earliest times to 
the fall of the Delhi Sultanate 1526. 


345 


History 


4451 History of India from tho Mughol Through tho British Porlod, 1S26-1947 (3) 

A survey of the history of the Indian subcontinent from the fall of the Delhi 
Sultanate up to Indian independence. 

466A Arob Islamic Ago (3) 

Prerequisite: History llOA. The study of the events transpiring in the Middle 
East from the Roman world to the period of the Crusades. This will include the 
impact of the Islamic civilization upon the Middle East society. 

466B Tho Turkish World (3) 

Prerequisite: History llOB. The development of the countries of the Middle East 
following the Crusades to the present. This will include the Ottoman Empire, 
European colonialism in the Middle East, and the modem Middle East. 

447 Tho Past and tho Prosont In tho MIddIo last (3) (Offorod 
during somo summor sosslons only) 

This course is a study tour to one of three geographical areas in the Middle 
East. The three areas which will be visited during three different summer periods 
of 22 days each, arc: North Africa consisting of Morocco, Algeria, Tunisia, Libya 
and Egypt; the Elast Mediterranean consisting of Greece, Lebanon, Jordan, Israel 
and Egypt; and Turkey, Iraq and Iran. The objective of these study tours goes 
well beyond a visitation of important historical and archaeological sites, and 
stresses continuities and relationships of the past to the contemporary scene. 

443 Centamporary MIddIa last (3) 

A study of the social, political and economic changes taking place in the Middle 
Elast primarily since World War I. Where possible the Middle East will be treated 
as a whole and \'iewed through a topic-oriented approach. 

470 Amarican Colonial Clvllliotlon (3) (Pormorly 471) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of instructor. This course surveys the 
settlement of Nonh America and the gro^^’th of Anglo-American civilization to 
the mid-18th century stressing the creation of political, economic, and social insti- 
tutions and a distinctive American culture. 

471 Unlfod Statoft from Colony to Notion (3) (Pormorly 472) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of instructor. This course surveys the 
political, economic, and intellectual developments of 18th-century America uith 
special emphasis upon Anglo-American imperial problems leading to the Revolu- 
tion, the origins of American nationalism, the creation of a constitutional republic, 
and the rise of a party system. 

472 Jofforsonlan Thomos In Amorican Socioty, 1300-1341 (3) 

Prerequisite: Histor>' 170A or consent of instructor. Analyzes Jeffersonian values 
and their impact upon the social, political and cultural life of the nation during the 
era of their greatest relevance. 

473 Damocracy on Trial 1345-1377 (3) 

Slavery, sectionalism, and Civil War, and the impact of these forces upon na- 
tional life and thought from 1815 to 1865. 

474 Amarica In fha Aga of tha Industrial Ravolution (1374-1914) (3) 

A study of the maturation of the American industrial economy and its trans- 
forming impact upon class structure, politics, intellectual and cultural life, and 
diplomacy. Special consideration is given to the attempts made in the Progressive 
years to cope with the changes wrought by the Industrial Revolution. 


346 


History 


475 America Com«s of Ago, 1914-1945 (3) 

A multi-topic analysis of major trends in U. S. domestic policy, foreign policy, 
economy and society from World War I through World War II. Course will 
concentrate on competing values and ideals of domestic policy and U.S. role in 
world affairs. 

476 Ago of Powor, AfRuonco and Anxiofy SInco 1945 (3) 

Multi-topic analysis of U. S. history from 1945 to the present stressing the 
interrelationship of foreign policy, economic prosperity, domestic tensions and 
protest movements. 

431 Wostword Movomont in tho Unitod Stotos (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A3 or equivalent. A survey of the expansion of the 
United States population and sovereignty from the eastern seaboard to the Pacific, 
colonial times to 1900, and a history of regional development during the frontier 
period. 

4t2A Sociooconomic Hiftory of tho Unitod Stotot (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of the instructor. The course explores the 
interaction of social and economic factors upon each other in the development of 
American society. Special attention is given to the role of business and labor in 
economic change. The first semester covers the development of a colonial economy 
and the early national economy. 

4321 Sociooconomic History of tho Unitod Stotos (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170B or consent of the instructor. The course continues to 
explore the interaction of social and economic factors upon each other in the devel- 
opment of American society. Special attention is given to the role of business and 
labor in economic change. The second semester begins with the “takeoff sugc of 
economic development” and ends with contemporary America. 

434A Amortcon Constitvtionol History to 1365 (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A. English and colonial origins, the growth of dem^- 
racy, the slavery controversy, and the sectional conflict as they reflect constitu- 
tional development. 

4343 Amoricon Constitvtionol History from 1365 (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170B. Constitutional problems involved in the post-Chril 
War era, the expansion of business, World War I, the New Deal, World War II, 
and civil rights in the postwar era. 

435 A Unitod Stotos Foroign Rolotions to 1900 (3) 

A comprehensive survey of the foreign relations of the United States from the 
beginning of the nation until 1900. Particular attention is given to ba^ of policy, 
critical evaluation of major policies and relationships between domestic affairs and 
foreign policy. 

4353 Unitod Stotos Foroign Rolotions from 1900 (3) 

Relations from 1900 to the present. An anal^ of the rise of the United States 
as a world power in the 20th century with spe<^ emphasis on the search for world 
order and ^e diplomacy of the atomic age. 

436A Social and Intolloctvol History of tfio Unitod Stotos (3) 

A study of the social and inteUectual development of the United States from the 
Puritans to the Qvil War. 

4363 Social and Intolloctvol History of tho Unitod Stotos (3) 

A study of the social and intellectual development of the United States from the 
Qvil War to the present. 


347 


History 


4S7A History of Poliflct In Amoricon Socloty (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A3 or consent of instructor. The first semester of 
this course traces political developments from the Colonial Period to the end of 
the Civil War. Its primary focus is upon political patterns of behavior, insdnidonal 
development and the response of the American political system to changing societal 
demands and needs. 

4371 History of Politics In Amoricon Socloty (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A3 or consent of instructor. The second semester of 
the course traces political developments from Reconstruction to Lyndon Baines 
Johnson. Its primary focus is upon political patterns of behavior, institutional 
development and the response of the political system to changing societal demands 
and needs. 

433A American Nngro From Slovory to Jim Crow (3) 

History of black Americans from African backgrounds through slavery to late 
19th century. Will include comparative study of slavery in several societies. 

438B Amoricon Nogro SInco 1890 (3) 

History of black Americans from 1890 to present, stressing both their culture 
and role in American life and the issues involved in their relations with other 
segments of the population in various regions. 

489 Tko Moxlcon-Amoricon in tho Southwoft (3) 

Historical role of the Mexican-American in the Southwest stressing the cultural 
uniqueness, contributions, with special emphasis upon migration, education, and 
economic changes since 1945. 

491 Prot*mlnar In Spnclol HUtoricnl Topics (3) 

Intensive study of phases or periods of history involving occasional lecture, 
discussions, directed reading, and written reports. 

493A Community History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A study of the historical development of 
communities in general, and of the Orange County area in particular. Special 
emphasis on the techniques of gathering and processing local historical data includ- 
ing oral inteiA^iews and other archival materials. 

4938 Community History (3) 

Prerequisite: History 492 A. Community history studies continued. Special em- 
phasis is on the gathering, editing and utilization of local community history 
documents. 

499 Indopondont Study (1-3) 

Open to advanced students in history with the consent of the department chair- 
man. May be repeated for credit. 

501 Somlnor In Hio Contont and Mothod of History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

505 Somlnor In Anolysis of Rocont Intorprototions In History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the in stru c t or. 

520 Somlnor In Europoon History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

550 Somlnor In Lotin Amoricon History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 


348 


Infernitfional Study 


560 Seminar in Afro-Aiion History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

570 Sominor in Amoricon History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

535 Sominor in tho History of Unitod Stotos Poroign Rotations (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

590 History and Historians (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A study of the writings, personalities, and 
philosophies of representative historians from Herodotus to the present. 

593 Ttiosis (3 or 6) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

599 Indopondont Graduoto Rosoarch (1-4) 

Open to graduate students in history with the consent of the department chair- 
man. May ^ repeated for credit. 

INTERNATIONAL STUDY COURSES 

California State College, Fullerton students under the California State Colleges 
International Study Programs register concurrently at California State Cx)llege, 
Fullerton and at the host institution abroad, with credits assigned to the student 
which are equivalent to courses offered at California State College, Fullerton. 
Undergraduate students who discover appropriate study opportunities at the host 
institution but no equivalent course at CaUfomia State College, Fullerton may 
use Independent Study (499) and International Study 292 or 492. Graduate stu- 
dents may use Independent Graduate Research (599) and International Study 592. 

293 Frofactt in Study Abroad (Subi«<f){ lowor dhriiion units) 

Open to students enrolled in California State Olleges International Pro^an». 
Study undertaken in a university abroad under the auspices of the California 
State Colleges. 

492 Proioets in Study Abroad (Subloct)! (1-3 uppor division units; maximum 12) 

Open to students enrolled in California State Colleges International Progranu. 
Study undertaken in a university abroad under the auspices of the California 
Sute Colleges. 

592 Proiocts in Study Abroad (Subfoet): (1-3 graduate units; maximum 12) 

Open to students enrolled in the California OUeges International Pro^zms. 
Study undertaken in a university abroad under the auspices of the C^alifomia 
State Colleges. 


ITALIAN 

(Offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures) 

101 Fundamontai Italian ( 4 ) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking and writing to develop 
control of the sounds and the basic structure of Italian. Audiolingual assignments 
are an integral part of the course and are to be prepared in the language labora- 
tory. Conducted in Italian. 

102 Fundamantal Italian ( 4 ) 

Prerequisite: Italian 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening compre- 
hension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of sounds and the 


349 


Journalism Education 


basic forms and structure of Italian. Audiolingual assignments are an integral 
part of the course and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted 
in Italian. 


JOURNALISM EDUCATION 
(Offered by the Department of (Communications) 

442 T*ochiff»g Journalitm in Hi« Sneondory School (2) 

Prerequisite: Education 311, Education 340, admission to teacher education, or 
consent of the instructor. The student who has not had teaching experience must 
register concurrently in Education 449. See page 131 under Secondary Exlucadon 
for de^ription of Standard Teaching Credential program. Theory and technique 
of advising school newspaper and yearbook staffs and teaching journalism. Relation 
of classroom instruction to staff assignments. 

499 Independent Study (1—3) 

Prerequisite; consent of department chairman. Individually supervised projects 
relating to journalism education. 

749 Student Teaching In Journolltm In the Secondary School and Somlnar (4) 

See page 269 for description and prerequisites. 

LATIN 

(Offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures) 

101 Fundamental Latin (3) 

Intensive practice to develop a comprehensive reading knowledge and a funda- 
mental writing ability in Latin. Modem techniques of language instruction will be 
applied. 

102 Fundamental Latin (3) 

Prerequisite: Ladn 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice to develop a compre- 
hensive reading knowledge and a fundamental writing ability in Ladn. Modem 
techniques of language instruedon will be applied. 

203 Intermediate Latin (3) 

Prerequisite: I^dn 102 or equivalent (2 years of high school Ladn). Intensive 
reading and writing. Selected prose and poetry from the (k>lden Age. Audio- 
lingual techniques of language learning are used when applicable. 

204 Intermediate Latin (3) 

Prerequisite: I^dn 203 or equivalent (3 years of high school Ladn). Intensive 
lading and writing. Selected prose from the Silver and Middle Ages. Audio- 
lingual techniques of language learning are used when applicable. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in Ladn language and Roman literature. To be taken with 
consent of the Department Chairman as a means of meeting special curncular 
problems. Subject matter %%ill vary. May be repeated for credit. 

MATHEMATICS * 

110 Methods and Concepts of Mathematics (3) 

Prerequisites: 2H years of high school mathematics, including one year of algebra 
and one year of geometry. Selected topics in algebra, number theory, geometry, 
»t theor>\ probability and analysis with special emphasis on the ideas and method 
involved. Not open for credit to mathemadcs majors. 

* Pterequisites suy be waived in any mathematics coune by the c on tent oi the instructor. 


350 


Mafhemttfies 


120 El•lll•ntary Proboblllty (3) 

Prerequisices: three years of high school mathematics or its equivalent. Topics 
include set algebra, finite probability models, sampling, binomial trials, conditional 
probability and expectation. It is particularly suited to students of economics, the 
biological and social sciences. 

150A/B Analytic Goomatry and Calculus (4,4) 

Prerequisites: four years of high school mathematics inclusive of trigonometry 
and a passing score in the placement test. An introduction to analysis including 
vector algebra, analytic geometry, functions, limits, differentiation, the definite 
integral, techniques of integration, first order differential equations, applications. 

250 Intarmadlata Calculus (4) (Formarly 2S0A,E) 

Prerequisites: Math 150A, B or equivalent. A continuation of Math 150. Topics 
include functions of several variables, partial differentiation, curvilinear integrals, 
multiple integration, infinite series, Taylor’s theorem, linear differential equations. 

231 Llnaar Alagbra uHth DIffarantial Equations (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 250. An introduction to linear algebra with particular appli- 
cation to the theory of ordinary differential equations. Topics include: vector 
fimctions, vector spaces, linear transformations, systems of linear algebraic and 
differend^ equations, nutrices, determinants, eigenvectors and eigenvalues, applica- 
tions to physical systems, series solutions of differential equations. Intended for 
students in the physical sciences and engineering. (Credit cannot be taken for 
Math 291 if Math 281 is taken.) 

291 Llnaar Algabra (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 15(®. The study of matrices, determinants, vector spaces, 
linear transformations. (Credit cannot be taken for Math 281 if Math 291 is taken.) 

302 Modam Algabra (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 291. The integers, rational numbers, real and complex num- 
bers, polynominal domains, introduction to groups, rings, integral domains and 
fields. 

304 Motkamatlcal Logic (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 15(®. An introductory coarse in the elements of mathematical 
logic. 

305 Elamants of Sot Tboory (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and 291. Operations on sets; functions; cardinals and 
ordinals; ordering, well ordering; axiom of choice; transfinite numbers. 

306 Voctor and Tonsor Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and either 281 or 291. Analysis of vector fields; Green’s, 
Gauss’ and Stokes theorems. Introduction to tensor analysis. Applications to geom- 
etry, mechanics and electromagnetism. 

307 Elamantary DIffarantial Goomatry (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and 291. The differential geometry of curves and sur- 
faces in EUicIidean 3-space. Differential forms in 3-space. Cartan’s equations of 
structure. Gauss-Weinganen-Codazzi equations. 

310 Ordinary DIffarantial Equations (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and either 281 or 291. An introduction to existence theo- 
rems and the theory of ordinary differential equations. 


351 


Mathematics 


31 S Euclidean 0*em*try (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 250. Selected topics in advanced Euclidean geometry such as 
convexity, transformation theory and n-dimensional Euclidean space. 

320 Proj*€tiv* G«om«try (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 291. Homogeneous coordinates, projective group, cross-ratio, 
duality, point and line conics. 

330 Nwmb«r Tli«eiry (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 250 or 291. Divisibility, congruences, prime number theory, 
Diophandne problems. 

335 Matk*inaticol Prebobility (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 250. An introductory course in probability theory and its 
applications, based on use of the calculus. 

336 Matk^motical Statistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 250. An introductory course in statistical theory and its 
applications, based on use of the calculus. 

340 Nwmarical Anolysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and either 281 or 291. Corequisite: QM 264. Interpola- 
tion and approximation. Numerical differentiation and integration. Solution of non- 
linear equations. Difference equations. Error analysis. Opportunity is given to use 
the computer center facilities. 

3S0A^i Advoncad Calculus (3^) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and either 281 or 291. Designed to introduce the student 
to rigorous proofs in analysis. Topics include continuity, differentiation and inte- 
gration of functions of several variables, improper integrals, sequences and in- 
finite series. 

407 Abstract Algubra (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 302. Sets, mappings, groups, rings, modules, fields, homo- 
morphisms, advanced topics in vector spaces and theory of linear transformations, 
matrices, algebras, ideals, field theory, Galois theory. 

412 CoNipUx Aaalysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 350A. Complex differentiation and integration, Cauchy*s 
theorem and integral formulas, maximum modulus theorem, harmonic functions, 
Laurent series, analytic continuation, entire and meromorphic functions, conformal 
transformations and special functions. 

414 Topology (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 350A. An introductory course in point set and algebraic topol- 
ogy. 


430 Partial DtfForontial Equations (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 350B or consent of instructor. Cauchy-Kowaleu'sky and other 
existence theorems, theory of first order equations, classification of equations of 
higher order, detailed study of elliptic, hyperbolic and parabolic equations, appli- 
cations of functional analysis to partial differential equations. 

431 Motbods of Appliod Motbomatics (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 350A or consent of instructor. Calculus of variation, partial 
differential equations of physics, Fourier series and orthogonal functions, integral 
transforms. 


352 


Mathematics 


440 Advanced Nwiii«ricol Anolyiif (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 340 and 3 50 A or consent of instructor. Numerical solution 
of linear equations, matrix inversion, computation of eigenvalues and eigenvecton, 
numerical solution of ordinary and panial differential equations, error analysis. 

450 R*€il Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 3 SOB. An introduction to Lebesgue measure and integration 
and selected topics from the following: metric spaces, compact and perfect sets, 
Cantor’s ternary set, limes inferior and superior, discontinuities, functions of 
bounded variation, Wemann-Sdeltjes integral, families of continuous functions, 
equi-continuity, Stone- Weierstrass theorem, convergence of Fouries series, inverse 
and implicit function theorems, functional dependence. 

499 Indapandaot Stvdy (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. Study of some special topic in mathe- 
matics, selected in consultation with the instructor and earned out under his super- 
visions. 

506 Saminor in Numbar Thoory (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 302, 330, 350B or consent of the instructor. Selected topics 
in analytic and algebraic number theory. 

507 Topics in Abstract Algabra (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 407. Modules, algebras, ideal theory, field theory, Galois 
theory, categories, functors, homology. 

503 Sominar in Algobra (3) 

Prerequisites: Maffi 407 or consent of the instructor. Structure theory of rings, 
algebras, field and Galois theory. Homological algebra. Research topics in algebra. 
May be repeated for credit. 

512 CompUx Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 412. Special topics in complex analysis including ^alytic 
functions of several variables, special functions, conformal mapping and Riemann 
sxirfaces. 

514 Topology (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 414. Advanced point set and algebraic topology. 

515 Sominar in Advancod Topology (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. Advanced areas in topology in preparation 
for research work. May be repeated for credit. 

520 Lobosguo Moosuro and Intogrotion (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 350B. Lebesgue measure and integration on the line and in 
n-space. Topics include the dominated convergence theorem, absolute continuity, 
convergence in measure and in mean, differentiation and FubinTs theorem. 

525 DifForontial Goomotry (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 414. Differentiable manifolds, connections, curvature, torsions, 
covariant differentiation, topics in Riemannian geometry. 

526 Saminar ia Goomatry (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing. Permission of the instruaor. May be repeated 
for credit. 

530 Topics hi Appliod Mathamatics (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. Topics will be selected from mechanics 
of condnua, integral equations, partial differential equations, probability, statistics. 


353 


Mathematics 


ordinary differential equations, Riemann surfaces and approximation theory. May 
be repeated for credit. 

531 Seminar in Applied Mathematics (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. Advanced topics in applied mathematics. 
May be repeated for credit. 

550 Topics in Roal Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 450. General theory of measure and integration, set functions, 
theorems of Radon-Nikodym and Fubini. 

551 Seminar in Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. A semester graduate course in analysis. 
Advanced topics in real and complex analysis. May be repeated for credit. 

560 Functional Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 291 and 450; corequisite: Math 414. Topics in modem func- 
tional analysis including Hilbert and Banach spaces, linear transformations and 
spectral theory. 

530 Junior High School Mothomatics from an Advancod Standpoint (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing plus one year of full-time teaching in junior or 
senior high school mathematics. The content and methods of mathematics related 
to the junior high school mathematics curriculum correlated with a seminar on 
current junior high school mathematics programs. 

511 Nigh School Goomotry from an Advancod Standpoint (4) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing plus one year of full-time teaching in junior 
or senior high school mathematics. The content and methods of madiematics 
related to the high school geometry' curriculum, correlated with a seminar on 
current high school geometry programs. 

532 High School Algebra from on Advanced Standpoint (4) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing plus one y'ear of full-time teaching in junior 
or senior high school mathematics. The content and methods of mathematics 
related to the high school algebra curriculum, correlated with a seminar on cur- 
rent high school algebra programs. 

533 Precalculus High School Mothematics from an Advanced Standpoint (4) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing plus one >'ear of full-time teaching in junior 
or senior high school mathematics. The content and methods of mathematics 
related to the high school precalculus curriculum (primarily trigonometry' and 
analytic geometry), correlated with a seminar on current high school precalculus 
programs. 

534 llementary Analysis from on Advanced Standpoint (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing plus one year of full-time teaching in high 
school mathematics. The content and methods of mathematics related to the high 
school curriculum in analysis, correlated with a seminar on current high school 
programs in analysis. 

590 Seminar in Secondary Mathematics (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing plus one year of full-time teaching in junior 
or senior high school mathematics. An analy'sis of current issues, programs and 
proposals within secondary* mathematics. May be repeated for credit. 

597 Projeet (1-3) 

May be repeated for credit. 

354 


Mafhemafies Education 


599 lnd«p«nd«nt Groduot* R«s«arch (1-3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing. One unit of independent study required of each 
student for each regular graduate course. Also offered without being attached to 
any course. May be repeated for credit. 

MATHEMATICS EDUCATION 

(Offered by the Department of Science and Mathematics Education) 

303A/B Fundamental Concapts of Mathomatics— Arithmatic (3,3) 

Prerequisites: one year of algebra and one year of geometry. The structure of 
the real number system and its subsystems. Numeration systems. Elementary num- 
ber theory. Equations and inequalities. Elementary set theory and logic. Does 
not give credit toward mathematics major. 

311 Fundamontal Concapts of Mathomatlcs-Algobra (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 150B. Selected topics in modem algebra. Axiomatic constroc- 
tion of algebraic structure. Linear systems of equalities and inequalities. Combina- 
torial analysis. Truth-functional logic. 

312 Fundomontol Concopts of Mathomatlcs-Goomotry (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 150B. Selected topics in elementary geometry. The study of 
various axiom systems for Euclidean geometry; non-Euclidean geometry; pro- 
jective, metric, and affine geometry. 

442 Toaching MaHiomotlcs In tko Sooondory School (2) 

Prerequisites: Education 311, Education 340, Admission to Teacher Education, 
senior standing, or consent of the instructor. Objecoves, methods, and materials 
for teaching mathematics in secondary schools. Required, before student teaching, 
of students presenting majors in mathematics for the general secondary credend^. 
The student who has not had teaching experience must register concurrently in 
Elducadon 449. The requirements for the major must include Math Ed 303 A, B, 311, 
and 312. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours aedvity) 

430 History of Mothmatics (3) 

Prerequisites: Senior standing with a mathemadcs or mathemadcs educadon major. 
An introduedon to the history of elementary mathemadcs through calculus, by a 
problem solving approach. 

499 Indopondont Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. Study of some special topic in mathemadcs 
educadon, selected in consultadon with the instructor and carried out under his 
supervision. May be repeated for credit. 

749 Studont Toaching in Mathomatics in tho Socondary School and Sominar (6) 

Sec page 269 for descripdon and prerequisites. 

750 Sominar in Mathomatics Education (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of the instructor. Study of selected 
problems in elementary or secondary educadon. May be repeated for credit. 

NATURE INTERPRETATION 

(Offered by the Department of Science and Mathemadcs Education) 

350 Fiold Biology and Consorvation (3) 

(Same as Science Educadon 350) 


355 


Oceanography 

454 S«minan Public Contact Precoduros (2) 

Prerequisite: public speaking or speech course, and consent of the instructor. A 
course to develop the methods of positive personal and group contact procedures 
in nature interpretation and conservation education. Students will have the oppor- 
tunity to give class presentations and optional public speeches. 

460 Appliod Consorvation (4) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing with basic courses in Biology; Geography 
350 required of non-science majors. A survey of the history of conservation for 
application in teaching and nature interpretive professions. 

470 Fiold and Musaum Infarpratatian Tachniquat (3) 

Prerequisites: basic courses in biology and one specialized course. Investigation 
and implementation of the various techniques used in the field and museum for 
nature interpretation. Taxidermy, herbarium displays, plastic casting, and diorama 
construction will be developed. Major stress will be on individual projects. 

479A,B Suparviiad Naturalist Activitias (3^) 

Prerequisites: Nature Interpretation 454, 460 and 470, or consent of the instruc- 
tor. SupeiA'ised in-service training working as a naturalist at the Tucker Wildlife 
Sanctuary and other participating natural areas and interpretive centers. 

570 Elamants af Natura Intarpratatian (3) 

Prerequisites: BA. degree and consent of instructor. An interdisciplinary inte- 
gration of biological, earth science and social science principles relevant to a 
naturalist training program for teachers and graduate students. 

OCEAN(DGRAPHY 

(Sec departmental course descriptions for the courses listed below) 

iialogical Scianca 

325 Marina Bialagy (4) 

420 Ganaral Ocaanagraphy (3) 

421 Bialagical Ocaanagraphy (4) 

426 Marina Ecalagy (4) 

520 Saminar in Marina Scianca (3) 

Earth Scianca 

110 Intraductian ta Physical Ocaanagraphy (3) 

401 Studias in Goasdanca, Goafluids (2-6) 

PHILOSOPHY 

1(X1 Intraductian ta Philasaphy (3) 

An introduction to the nature, methods and some of the main problems of 
philosophy. 

110 Camparativa Study af tha Warld's Grant Raligians (3) 

A study of man’s religious impulse as viewed from the philosophical standpoint. 
An attempt will be made to analyze and to compare religious experience as ex- 
pressed in Christianity, Islam, Buddhism, Hinduism, etc. 


356 


Philosophy 


210 Logic (3) 

Analysis of the various forms given to propositions and the basic requirements 
necessary for valid inference. 

250 Philoaophy of Idoot (3) 

Analysis of basic ideas which have shaped modem thought. 

290 History of Philosophy: Orook Philosophy (3) 

The origins of Philosophy in Greece, and its development to the time of 
Socrates, Plato, and Aristode. 

291 History of Philosophy: Mediovol Philosophy (3) 

Scholasdc philosophy and its precursors in ancient thought. 

300 History of Philosophy: Rationalism and Impiricism (3) 

The radonalism of Descartes, Spinoza, and Leibniz, and the empiricism of Locke, 
Berkeley, and Hume. 

301 History of Philosophy: Kant and tha 19th Contwry (3) 

The empiricisdc and radonalisdc influences on Kant, followed by a study of the 
major trends in 19th-century philosophy. 

305 Contamporary Philosophy (3) 

A survey and analysis of the main trends of 20th century philosophy. Elmphasis 
will be placed on such trends as pragmatism, linguistic analysis, and existen- 
dalism. 

310 fthics (3) 

An analysis of the problems of human conduct: modvarion, valuing, norms, so- 
cial demands, and personal commitments. 

311 AosthoHcs (3) 

An invesdgadon into the condirions and the aims of art and aesthedc experience. 

323 Contomporary Ixistontialism (3) 

An analysis of the meaning of existentialism in modem philosophy. 

345 Political Philosophy (3) 

Selected problems in polidcal philosophy. 

347 Soloctod ProbUms In Philosophy (3) 

An invesdgadon into the signifleant contribudons made to human culture through 
philosophic analysis. 

360 Philosophy of History (3) 

A study of the metaphysical and the logical problems of history. 

365 Social Philosophy (3) 

Philosophical (logical) analysis of theories of social organizadon and rigorous 
invesdgadon of the various types of social, economic and cultural insdtudons 
which make up western society. 

363 Symbolic Logic (3) 

The recognidon and construction of correct deducQons in the sentential logic 
and the first-order predicate calculus with idendty. 

370 Philosophy of Roligion (3) 

An examinadon of the role of philosophy in shaping thwlogical doctrine, in 
cridcally evaluating religious experience, in proving the existence of God, and 
in considering the issues of atheism and the existence of eviL 


357 


Philosophy 


375 Introduction to Philocophy of Language (3) 

An introduction to the major issues in semantical theory: truth, meaning, ana- 
lytic-syntheic, semiotics. (Same as Linguistics 375.) 

380 Seminar in Analytic Philosophy (3) 

Prerequisite: six units in philosophy or instructor’s permission. A detailed investi- 
^don of the works of some of the many figures of the 20th century movement 
in analydc philosophy. The works of Rus^, Moore, Wittgenstein, Strawson, Ryle 
will be read. 

385 Philosophy of the Oehovioral Sciences (3) 

Problem posed by methodological developments in psychology, sociology, 
anthropolo^, economics, polidcal science and history. Topics such as objecdvity 
and value judgments in social science, Virstehen, emergence explanation, models 
and theories will be studied. The concepts of reducdonism and funcdonalism ex- 
amined. Some acquaintance with the behavioral sciences is presupposed. 

420 Motaphysics (3) 

Prerequisite: six units in philosophy or instructor’s permission. An examinadon 
of the philosophical problems of freedom and determinism, mind and body, time 
and becoming, causadon, deity, substratum, personal idendty. 

425 Introduction to Phanomonology (3) 

Prerequ^te:^ six units in philosophy or instructor’s permission. An invesdgadon 
into the historical background and basic viewpoints which have provided a frame- 
work for philosophical research and study in the writings of Husserl, Heidegger, 
Sartre, and Merleau-Ponty. 

430 Epittemology (3) 

Prerequisite: six units in philosophy or instructor’s permission. An invesdgadon 
of the concepts of knowledge, belief and certainty, and a study of representadve 
theories concerning man’s knowledge of the external world, the past, and other 
minds. 

435 Philosophy of Sclonco (3) 

Prerequisite: six units in philosophy or instructor’s permission. An invesdgadon 
into the methodologies of the deducdve and inducdve sciences. 

440 Philosophy of Mind (3) 

Prerequisite: six units in philosophy or instructor’s permission. Basic problems 
relating to the analysis of the concept of mind and such related issues as behavior, 
consciousness, and voluntary acdon. 

445 Sominar in Valuo Thoory (3) 

Prerequisite: Philosophy 310 or instructor’s permission. An invesdgadon into 
the condidons, modes, levels, and criteria relevant to any systemadc view of valuing. 

450 Saminar in Philosophy of Languogo (3) 

Prerequisite: six units in philosophy* or instructor’s permission. A detailed ex- 
amination of the problems in the theory of meaning and formal semandcs. 

457 Sominar in Anciont Philosophy (3) 

Prerequisite: Philosophy 290 or instructor’s permission. A detailed examinadon 
of the works of some major Ancient Philosopher, such as Plato or Aristode, or 
of some School of Ancient Philosophy, such as Stoicism. This course number 
may be repeated with different content for addidonal credit. 


358 


Physical Science 


467 seminar in Continental Rationalism (3) 

Prerequisite: Philosophy 300 or instructor’s permission. A detailed examination 
of the works of some major Rationalist, such as Descartes, Spinoza or Leibniz, or 
some school or phase of Continental Rationalism. This course number may be 
repeated with different content for additional credit. 

477 Seminar in British Impiricism (3) 

Prerequisite: Philosophy 300 or instructor’s permission. A detailed examination 
of the works of some major British Elmpiricist, such as Locke, Berkeley, or Hume, 
or of some school or phase of British Empiricism. This course number may be 
repeated with different content for additional credit. 

447 Saminar in Modam Philasophy (3) 

Prerequisite: Philosophy 301 or instructor’s permission. A detailed exan^nadon 
of the works of some major Modem Philosopher, such as Kant, Hegel, Nietzsche 
or J. S. Mill, or of some school or phase of Modern Philosophy to around the 
end of the 19th century. This course may be repeated with different content for 
addidonal credit. 

497 Saminar in Contamporary Philotopliy (3) 

Prerequisite: Philosophy 305 or instructor’s permission. Emphasis will be placed 
on the Analytic Movement in Philosophy as it developed during the 20th century. 
The works in such philosophers as C. I. Lewis, Quine, Goc^man, Russell and 
Wittgenstein will be read. The course may be repeated with different content for 
addidonal credit. 

499 Indapandant Stvdy (1-3) 

Prerequisites: minimum of 12 units in philosophy and approval of the depart- 
ment. Such study is designed to develop greater competency in research. May be 
repeated for credit. 


PHYSICAL SCIENCE 

(Offered by the Departments of Chemistry and Physics) 

100 Man and Hit Physical Environmont (4) 

Prerequisite: one year of high school algebra or equivalent, or permission of the 
instructor. This course is specifically designed to meet the needs of non-science 
majors. It emphasizes the historical, philosophical and social aspects of science. It 
surveys contemporary physical science qualitadvely. It seeks to interpret science 
as an intellectual, human and cultural activity relating it to other areas of human 
endeavor; contrasting its methods with others; and studying its capabilities, limi- 
tations and major accomplishments. It is designed by considering what is relevant 
to the liberal arts education of non-science majors. Selected theories are considered 
(classical mechanics, relativity, quantum mechanics, atomic theory, nuclear physics, 
elementary particles or chemical physics, and asrtonomy and geophysics) to com- 
municate the essence of the scientific approach to knowledge, as well as some of 
its major consequences. 

201 Modam Physical Scianca (4) 

Prerequisite: one year of high school algebra or equivalent, or permission of the 
instructor. Taught jointly by the departments of chemistry and physics, this 
couise presents the essential unifying features of the basic physical sciences, chra- 
istry, chemistry’ and physics, the modem concepts of the physical and chemi^ 
theory of atomic and molecular structure form the unifying course nutcr^. 
Selected physical and chemical theory (from the fields of mechanics, electroity 
and magnetism, light, kinetic theory, thermodynamics, quantum theory, and inor- 


359 


Physics 


ginic tnd organic chemistry) are included to provide the necessary background 
material. Credit will not be given to students who have had a college course in 
chemistry or physics. 


PHYSICS * 


101 Sr^thman S«iiiiiior (1) 

This course is offered on a credit-no-credit basis only. The course is open to all 
interested persons in the academic community including both those in science 
and those not in science. The course is designed to acquaint the student with the 
type of work that is presently being done by physicists throughout the world. 
The seminars consist of approximately 15 seminar talks presented by well-known 
persons from the field of physics or a closely related field and approximately 
two field trips to academic or industrial research establishments. 

101 Modern Physical Sdonco (4) (So# course description under 
Physicai Science 201) 

111 A3 Ilementary Physics (33) 

Prerequisites: high school algebra, 1)^ years; trigonometry, ^ year. Elementary 
physics taught without the use of calculus. Covers principally the fields of 
mechanics, theromodynamics and electricity and magnetism in the first semester, 
and principally the fields of waves, relativity, quantum mechanics and the search 
for the ultimate constituents of matter in the second semester. Concurrent enroll- 
ment in 2 12 A3 laboratory required. 

i11A3 Ilementary Physics (1,1) 

Laboratory for 211 A3- Concurrent enrollment in 211 A3 lecture required. (3 
hours laboratory) 

121 i Fundamental Physics (4) 

Prerequisitt: Physics 221 A. Fundamental classical and modem physics, including 
physical optics, electricity and magnetism, and an introduction to modem physics. 
Concurrent enrollment in 222B laboratory required. 

llli Fundamental Physics (1) 

Laboratory for 22 IB. Concurrent enrollment in 22 IB lecture required. (3 hours 
laboratory) 

225A Fundamental Physics: Mechanics (3) 

Cor^uisite: Math 150A. Qassical physics, including Newtonian mechanics, linear 
and circular motion, energy, momentum, systems of p)articles, rigid body motion 
and the special theory of relativity. Concurrent enrollment in Physics 2 26 A Lab- 
oratory required. 

215B Fundamental Physics: Electricity and Magnetism (3) 

Pre^uisite: Physics 225A or equivalent; corequisite: Math 150B. Electrostatics, 
electric potential, Poisson’s and Laplace’s equations, capacitance, dielectrics and 
boundary value problems, electrical circuits, resistance, emf, magnetism and mag- 
netic materials, and introduction to Max\^'eirs equations. (Concurrent enrollment in 
Physics 226B Laboratory' required. 

use Fundamental Physics: Medem Physics (3) 

Prerequisite: Physics 2 25 A or equivalent. Geometrical and physical optics, wave 
phenomena; the historical development of quantum physics, including the photo- 

* For sU courses, prerequisites xk>€ re<^uixing consent of the department chainnan may be wahred 
by the instructor o£ the course if he is satisfied that the student is qualified to undertake 
the course. A grade of C or better is required for all prerequisite courses. 


360 


Ph/sfcs 


electric effect, line spectra and the Bohr atom; the wave nature of matter; Schroe- 
dinger* equation and solutions; the Uncertainty Principle. Concurrent enrollment 
in Physics 226C Laboratory required. 

225D Fundamental Phyticst Thermal and Statistical Physics (3) 

Prerequisite: Physics 225 A or equivalent. Temperature, heat, changes of phase, 
ideal gas laws and the laws of thermodynamics; microscopic models, adiabatic 
processes and the Maxwell-Boltzman distribution function; transport phenomena, 
nonstationary state processes. 

226A,B/C Fundamental Physics: Laboratory (1,1/1) 

Laboratory for Physics 225A,B,C. Concurrent enrollment in the corresponding 
225A3.C lecture required. (3 hours laboratory) 

Nots: For Physics 225A3»CJ> and 226A3»C prerequisites may be waived by consent of the 
de];>artment chairman azkd/or the instructor. 

300 Introduction to Astronomy (3) 

Prerequisite: high school algebra. Includes celestial motion, a study of the solar 
system, gallactic structure, theories of the origin of the universe and the solar 
system. (3 hours lecture with occasional field trips replacing a lecture) (Same as 
Earth Science 300) 

350 Gonoral Astronomy (4) (Formerly Astronomy 200) 

(Same as Earth Science 350) 

405 Acoustics (4) 

(bourse is designed expressly for non-science majors and a major portion of the 
nuterial covered is oriented toward applications in music and psychology. (2 hours 
lecture, 1 hour conference and 3 hours laboratory) 

410 Introduction to Mathematical Physics (3) (Formerly 221C) 

Prerequisite: Physics 22 IB or 225 series sequence. Fundamental physical concepts 
are presented in a unifying framework. Course is intended to prepare the physics 
student for upper division physics by placing emphasis on the mathematical physics 
used in the five major theories of physics-classical mechanics, relativity, electricity 
and magnetism, quantum physics and statistical mechanics. 

41 1 Thoory of Wavo Motion (3) 

Prerequisites: Physics 22 IB or 225 series sequence. Math 150B. The properties of 
wave motion — production, propagation, refraction, diffraction, interference, and 
transmission of waves — as applied to mechanics, electromagnetism and quantum 
mechanics. 

416 Thormodynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: Physics 22IB or 225 series sequence. Math 250. A postulational 
study of thermodynamics with emphasis on thermodynamic states rather than on 
thermodynamic processes. An introductory course in the basic concepts and postu- 
lates, conditions of equilibrium, formal relationhips, processes and thermodynamic 
engines, stability of thermodynamic systems, first- and second-order phase transi- 
tions, the Nemst postulate, and representative applications. 

431 iloctrkity and Magnatism (3) 

Prerequisites: Physics 22 IB or 225 series sequence. Math 250. Theories of electro- 
statics, electrodynamics, and electromagnetic waves. 

441 Analytical Mochanics (3) 

Prerequisites: Physics 22 IB or 225 scries sequence. Math 250. Principles of New- 
tonian mechanics applied to the statistics and dynamics of particles and rigid bodies. 
Introduction to Lagrangian and Hamiltonian equations. 


361 


Physics 


451 Modern Physics (3) 

Prerequisites: Physics 22 IB or 225 series sequence, Math 250. Discussion of experi- 
ments and introduction to theory for selected topics in atomic, nuclear, and solid 
state physics. 

452 Infredwctery Radiology (3) 

Prerequisite: one year college physics. X-rays, radioactivity, interaction of radia- 
tion with maner, detection of radiation, applications to health physics. Especially 
suitable for biology, chemistr>', and premedical students who expect to work in 
radiation biology, radiation chemistry', or medical radiology. 

453 Nwcloor Physics (3) 

Prerequisites: Physics 22lB, Math 250. Properties of nuclei, radioactivity, elemen- 
tary panicles, nuclear reactions. Introductory discussion of theories of nuclear 
structure and nuclear processes. 

454 Introduction to tho Solid Stato of Mottor (3) 

Prerequisite: one course in atomic or nuclear physics, differential equations. An 
introduction to the physical propenies of maner in the solid state, as explained by 
atomic theory’. Cry’stal structure, thermal, electric, and magnetic properties of 
metals, semiconductors, band theory, and solid state devices. 

455 Introduction to Quantum Physics (3) 

Prerequisites: Physics 431, Physics 441, differential equations. An introduction to 
the concepts and theory’ of quantum physics. Elarly quantum theories, the Schrodin- 
ger equation, eigenvalue equations, operators, commutation properties, applications 
to simple quantum systems, matrix formulation, perturbation theory. 

471 iloctronic Circuit Thoory (3) 

Prwequisites: Phj^cs 22 IB, Math 250. Operating characteristics of vacuum tubes, 
transistors, and semiconductor diodes. Linear circuit theory for alternating currents 
and for transient currents. Introduction to switching and pulse circuits. 

476 Atomic Structura <3) 

Prerequisite: Physics 455. The theory of atomic strucuire, interaction of radiation 
w’ith matter. Angular momentum and coupling schemes. 

431A Exparimuntal Physics (3) 

Prerequisite: Physics 22 IB; corequisite: Physics 431. Selected experiments in elec- 
trical measurements and electronics, with emphasis on precision of measurement 
and standardization of instruments. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

4313 Exparimantal Physics (3) 

Prerequisite: Physics 481 A; corequisite: Phy’sics 441. Selected experiments in 
mechanics, acoustics, physical optics, and microwaves. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours 
laboratory) 

431 C ixparimantal Physics (3) 

Prerequisite or corequisite: one course in nuclear or modem physics. Selected 
experiments in atomic and nuclear physics. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

431 D Exparimantal Physics (3) 

Prerequisites: Physics 481A3,C or consent of department chairman. Selected 
experiments in classical and modem physics. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

490 Sanior Saminar (3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of the instructor. Topics in recent developments in physics 
not ordinarily covered in organized courses. May be repeated for credit. Open to 
upper di\’ision and graduate students in ph>’sics and related areas. 


362 


Physics 


499 lnd«p«nd«nt Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: approval of study plan by department chairman and by instructor. 
Study of some selected topic in physics, selected in consultation with the in- 
structor and carried out under his supervision. May be repeated for credit to a 
maximum of 6 units. 

521A,B Muthodt of Thuoruticol Physics (34) 

Prerequisite: Math 250A. A study of selected applications of mathematics to 
physical theory and to engineering. Applications are selected from ordinary and 
partial differential equations, integral equations, integrral transforms, scries ex- 
pansions of functions, calculus of variations, matrix theory, tensor analysis, group 
theory, complex variable theory, and numerical analysis. 

531 A,B Classical iUctrodynamlcs (3,3) 

Prerequisite: mathematics through partial differential equations. A — Boundary 
value problems in electrostatics and magnetostatics; multipole expansions; dielec- 
trics and macroscopic media; Maxwell’s equations and conservation laws; wave 
guides and resonators. 1 — Simple radiating systems; electromagnetic potentials; 
muldpole radiations; classical relativistic electrodynamics; radiation from moving 
charges. 

533 Analytical Machanlcs (3) (Formarly 541) 

Prerequisite: mathematics through partial differential equations. A thorough 
theoretical treatment of classical mechanics including the important motions of a 
point, general principles of work and energy, the principle of least action, 
Lagrange and Hamiltonian equations, the dynamics of rigid bodies, and related 
topics. 

540A,B Quantum Physics (34) 

Prerequisite: mathematics through partial differential equations. A — Transforma- 
tion theory, quantum dynamics, angular momentum, symmetry principles, repre- 
sentation theory, Klcin-Gordon equation, approximation techniques, applications 
to topics such as scattering theory, interaction with radiation, motion in a mag- 
netic field, atomic and nuclear structure. B— Lorentz groups, Dirac equation, field 
quantization, group theory approximation techniques; applications to topics such 
as systems of identical particles, molecular structure, the many-body problem, and 
magnetic phenomena. 

545 Nudaar Thoory (3) 

Prerequisite: Physics 540A. Intemucleon forces; nuclear models; electromagnetic 
properties of nuclei, nuclear radiation theory. 

562 Sfatlftical Physics (3) 

Prerequisite: Madiemadcs through pardal differendal equadons. Fundamental 
concepts of probability and statistics; random walk; equilibrium; transport theory; 
ensembles; constraints; irreversibility; canonical distributions; classical and quantum 
stadsdes. Applicadons to fields such as temperature, conduedvity, radioaedvity, 
thermionic emission, soludons, reacdons, fiuctuadons, random noise and plasmas. 

565 Solid Stato Physics (3) 

Prerequisite: Physics 562 and 540A. Crystalographic groups; lattice vibrations, 
magnetic phenomena, energ^y band theory, with applicadons to the electrical and 
optical properties of solids and superconducting media. 

511 Exporimontal Physics (3) 

Prerequisite: Sufficient undergraduate experimental background. Presents basic, 
advanced techniques. Proper usage of computers and sudstical methods in data 


363 


Political Scionco 


analysis. Selected experiments in various fields of physics will be performed to 
teach proper data handling techniques. 

59t TtMflf (1-4) 

Prerequisite: Approval of graduate adviser and Physics Graduate Conunittcc. 
May be repeated for credit up to a maximum of six units of credit. 

599 liid«p«nd«nf Oraduat* R«s«arch (1-4) 

Prerequisite; written approval of study plan by department committee and by 
instructor. Open only to graduate students and only by permission of a faculty 
member. May be repeated for credit. 

POLITICAL SCIENCE ♦ 

Political Science 100 or its equivalent is the prerequisite for all upper division 
political science courses; 300-level courses beginning with 310 may require con- 
current enrollment in a research proseminar. See the departmental bulletin for 
details not provided in the course descriptions below. 

100 Afii«ricaii Oovenwnenf (3) 

Explores (^ple, their politics, and power focusing on contemporary issues, 
chan^png political styles and processes, as well as institutions and underlying values 
contnbuting to the stability of the American political system. Satisfies the state 
requirements in U.S. Constitution and California state and local government. 

300 Contamporary Isswei in California Oovornmont and 
Politics (3) (FormoHy311) 

i^ialysis of contemporary issues in California government and politics, including 
regional, county, and community subdivisions. Emphasis is on decision-making and 
the costs of dcm<Kracy; the crisis in the cities, the flight to the suburbs, and race 
relations. Comparisons will be made with other states and their subdivisions. This 
course satisfies the state requirement in (California state and local government. 

310 Amorican Political iohavlor (3) 

Stresses American culture, social patterns, behavior as they relate to political 
interaction. To be taken in conjunction with Political Science 311 when offered by 
same instructor. 

311 Rosoarck Prosominar in Amorican Political Rohavior (3) 

Research concepts and techniques applied to an individual project in American 
political behavior. Offered only as companion course to Political Science 310. 

315 Amorican Political Procoss (3) 

Stresses theoretical and analytic approaches to the study of structures, processes, 
and institutions in the American political system. To be taken in conjunction with 
Political Science 316 when offered by same instructor. 

316 Rosoarch Prosominar in Amorican Political Procoss (3) 

Rttearch concepts and techniques applied to an individual project in American 
political process. Offered only as companion course to Political Science 315. 

330 Public Administration and Policy (3) 

Public administration and the roles played by administrators in the formulation 
and execution of public policy. To be taken in conjunction with Political Science 
321 when offered by same instructor. 

• Prerequisites zoMy be wsived only with the consent o£ the instructor. 


364 


Political Science 


321 Research Proseminar In Public Administration and Policy (3) 

Research concepts and techniques applied to an individual project in public 
administration. Offered only as companion course to Political Science 320, 

330 Comparative Political Analysis (3) (Formerly 231) 

Compares patterns of political behavior and interaction in various political sys- 
tems. Also analyzes the basis for making such comparisons. To be taken in con- 
junction with Political Science 331 when offered by same instructor. 

331 Research Proseminar in Comparative Political Analysis (3) 

Research concepts and techniques applied to an individual project in compara- 
tive political analysis. Offered only as companion course to Political Science 330. 

335 Comparative Political Change (3) 

A comparative study of sources and patterns of political change. To be taken 
in conjunction with Political Science 336 when offered by same instructor. 

336 Research Proseminar in Comparative Political Change (3) 

Research concepts and techniques applied to an individud project in comparative 
political change. Offered only as companion course to Political Science 335. 

340 Political Philosophy (3) (Formerly 341) 

Problems of evidence and validation in political studies. The distmcdon between 
empirical statements, value judgments and tautologies. The relationship of fact and 
value. Systematic approaches to the political philosophies of selected thinkers. 
To be taken in conjunction with Political Science 341 when offered by same 
instructor. 

341 Rosoorch Prosominar in Political Philosophy (3) 

Research concepts and techniques applied to an individual project in Political 
Philosophy. Offered only as companion course to Political Science 340. 

345 Political Cwituro and Political Valuo (3) 

Political values as they relate to aspects of political culture such as perceptions, 
attitudes and participation. To be taken in conjunction with Political Science 346 
when offered by same instructor. 

346 Rosoarch Prosominar in Political Cwituro and Political Valuos (3) 

Research concepts and techniques applied to an individual project in political 
culture and political value. Offered only as companion course to Political Sci- 
ence 345. 

350 Intomational Politics (3) (FormoHy 351) 

A study of the diplomatic, political, economic, and cultural relations of states; 
basic factors of power, sovereignty, nationalism, imperialism, colonialism, the rise 
to influence of the developing nations, the settlement of disputes. To be uken 
in conjunction with Political Science 351 when offered by same instructor. 

351 Rosoarch Prosominar in Intomational Politics (3) 

Research concepts and techniques applied to an individual project in Interna- 
tional Relations. Offered only as a companion course to Political Science 350. 

370 Judicial Process (3) (Formerly 371) 

The nature and fimction of the Anglo-American legal system and its role in the 
American political system. To be taken in conjunction with Political Science 371 
when offered by same instructor. 


365 


Politieal Science 


371 R«t««rch Pros«minar in Judicial Procatt (3) 

Research concepts and techniques applied to an individual project in judicial 
process. Offered only as a companion course to Political Science 370. 

405 Politics of Ixporionco (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A senior research proseminar stressing the 
theory and application of simulation models, including decision-making, game 
theory and group encounter techniques with respect to politics. Individual and 
group research encounter techniques will be udli^d. 

406 Scopo ond Ttioory of Pelitlcol Scionco (3) 

A senior proseminar in political science. The nature of the discipline: approaches, 
tools, concepts and theories. Highly recommended for all politi<kl science majors 
planning to do graduate work. 

410 Politicol Portios (3) (Formorly 312) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The structure and methods by which the 
political parties operate in the American political system with some comparisons 
to their structure and operation in other democratic societies. 

41 1 An of Adminiffrotion (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. An examination of public administration as it 
is practiced and understood by practitioners of the art. A seminar which features 
guest lecturers. 

412 Tlio An of Politics (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. An examination of politics as it is practiced 
and understood by practitioners of the art. A seminar which features guest lecturers. 

413 Prossvro Oreups and Public Opinion (3) (Formorly 313) 

The power and grox^th of farm, labor, business, and noneconomic pressure 
groups; interest group activity in Congress; administration and courts; public 
opinion and propaganda. 

414 Tbo Log islotivo Precoss (3) 

The nature of the legislative process in the United States including the organiza- 
tion and proc^ures of legislative bodies, direct legislation and the relationships 
of the legislative branch to other branches of government. Legislative systems 
uill be analyzed comparatively. 

415 Politicol iohovior (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. The application of behavioral methodol- 
og>' to the unders^ding of individual political behavior wnthin various gov- 
ernmental and social situations. The formation of attitudes and opinions, their 
measurement and relationship to political behavior. 

416 Tbo Amoricon Protidoncy (3) 

A smdy of the grow'th of the office and power of the President, of his rela- 
tionship to his advisers and the executive departments. Congress and the courts, 
state governments and the public. The role of the President as chief jwlicy- 
imker and administrator, ps^^ and public opinion leader, uith particular atten- 
tion to developments during international and domestic crises. 

417 Studont Pretoft (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The dynamics of student protest with major 
anendon given to contemporary aedvides in the U.S. (Same as Interdisciplinary 
452) 


366 


Political Science 


420 Municipal Politics and Administration (3) 

Structure and function of municipal government, with emphasis upon com- 
munity decision-making and group influence. 

421 Public Financa Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320. The role of finance administration and budg- 
eting in the determination of public policy, and in the administrative planning 
and management of governmental operations in the United States. Examines the 
relationship of assessment administration to governmental revenues and expendi- 
tures, the principles and practices of cost accounting, treasury management, and 
capital budgeting. 

422 Public Parsonnal Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320. The growth and development of the civil 
service and the merit system; an evaluation of recruitment procedures and exam- 
inations; an analysis of such topics as position classification, salary structures, re- 
tirement plans, in-service training, employees organizations, and personnel super- 
vision. 

423 Rogienal Planning and Dovolopmont (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A study of governmental policies, proce- 
dures, and agencies involved in the planning and development of regions. The 
concept of regions, survey of regional problems, and objectives, developmental 
prospects of regions, emerging views of regional planning, and intra- and inter- 
regional investment allocation during the development process. 

424 Urban Planning and Davalepmant (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The origins and developn^cnt of city plan- 
ning; the legal bases and fundamental concepts of planning are defined; and the or- 
ganization and administration of the planning activity are examined. The major 
elements of the general plan, zoning laws and administration, urban renewal, and 
capital programming are considered. 

425 Cemparotiva Public Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: Political Science 320 and 330. Strongly recommended for students 
planning to concentrate in comparative politics. Cross cultural comparison of public 
administration systems; application of different modek of analysis to administrative 
institutions; bureaucracy; the ecology of public administration in modernized and 
developing societies; and the role of public administration in nadon-building. 

426 Administrativa Rasaarch and Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320. Concepts and methods employed in admin- 
istrative research and analysis, with emphasis on organization and procedure sur- 
veys, performance evaluation techniques, administrative data sources and their 
uses, and report writing. 

427 Matropelitan Politics and Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The p<^itics and administration of metro- 
politan area institutions of government, with emphasis upon their problems and 
alternative solutions. 

424 Administrotivo Systoms and Procoduros (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320. Administrative systems and procedures in 
contemporary government, with emphasis upon systems planning and design, data 
processing, work flow, control systems, operations research, cost-benefit analysis 
and forms design. 


367 


Political Sclonco 


490 Oov«rfliin«nf and Politics of a Soloctod Notlon-Stato (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 330 or consent of instructor. Analysis of the 
political institutions and processes of a selected nadon-state. May be repeated for 
credit. 

431 Oovornmont and Politics of Wostorn Europo (3) 

Prerequisite: Polidcal Science 330 or consent of instructor. A comparadve analy- 
sis of the polidcal culture as well as the structures and funedons of the polidcal 
systems of Western Europe. 

433 Oovomnsont ond Politics of Eastorn Europo (3) 

Prerequisites: Polidcal Science 330 and 430 or 443. A comparadve analysis of 
the polidcal culture as well as the structures and funedons of the polidcal systems 
of Eastern Europe. 

435 Oovornmont and Politics of Africa (3) 

Prerequisites: Polidcal Science 330 and 335 or consent of the instructor. A com- 
paradve analysis of the structures and funedons of the polidcal systems of de- 
veloping sociedes in Africa. 

436 Oovornmont and Politics of South and Southoast Asia C3) 

Pr^equisites: Polidcal Science 330 and 335 or consent of the instructor. A com- 
paradve analysis of the structures and funedons of the polidcal systems of de- 
veloping sociedes in South and Southeast Asia. 

437 Oovornmont and Politics of Latin Amorica (3) 

A comparadve analysis of the structures and funedons of the polidcal systems of 
developing sociedes in Ladn America. 

433 Latin Amorican Intorost Oroups (3) 

Consideradon of the role of church, military, business, peasant and bureaucradc 
groups in Ladn American society with pardcular interest in their impact on the 
quest for governmental stability and economic development. 

439 Oovornmont and Politics of tho Far East (3) 

A comparadve analysis of the structures and funedons of the polidcal systems in 
the Far East. 

440 Political Idoologios and Attitvdos (3) 

Content and appeals of contemporary ideologies. Social, economic and psycho- 
logical bases of polidcal atdtudes and preferences. 

442 Prohloms of Domocratic Political Thought (3) 

Problems relevant to philosophies and theories of democradc polidcal systems, 
with emphasis on American polidcal thought. 

443 Tho Thoory and Philosophy of Marxism (3) 

Prerequisite: Polidcal Science 340. An analydeal study of Marxist theory and 
philosophy from its pre-Hegelian roots to the present. 

450 Conduct of Amorican Poroign Rolations (3) 

Formuladon and execudon of foreign policy. The roles and powers of the 
President, Senate, and House of Representadves. The funedons of the Department 
of Sutc and Foreign Service, United States Informadon Agency, Agency for In- 
temadonal Development (AID); the role of the Pentagon; public opinion and 
pressure groups. &pa^don of powers, checks and balances, and cooperadon in 
the conduct of Am^can foreign policy. 


368 


PoUtlcal Science 


451 Problems In International Rolatlont (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 350. Examination of selected problems in various 
countries and geographic areas with a definite impact on International Relations, 
such as nationalism, colonialism, andcolonialism, neutralism, racism, ethnic and lin- 
guistic minorities, border disputes, governmental instability, economic poverty, dis- 
ease, illiteracy and overpopulation. 

452 Foroign Policy of a Soloctod Country or Group of Countrios (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 310 or consent of the instructor. Objectives, capa- 
bilities, policy-making processes, and implementation of the foreign policies of a 
particular country or group of countries. Focus may be on United ^ates, Soviet 
Union, Latin America or other countries or areas. May be repeated for credit. 

461 Hia Unitud Nations and Othor Public Intornational Organizations (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 350. Structure and functions of United Nations 
and various specialized and regional international organizations. 

473 Sominar in Constitutional Law and Govornmontal Powor (3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor. Case studies, selected problems in the exer- 
cise of governmental authority, especially involving social and economic regulation; 
federalism; and the relationships among legislative, executive, and judicial branches 
of government. 

474 Sominar in Constitutional Law and Civil Libortios (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Case studies in selected constitutional rights 
and liberties. 

475 Administrotivo Law (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The study of law as it affects public 
officials and agencies in their relations with private citizens and the business 
community. Attention is given to appropriate case materials and regulatory 
practices. 

476 Intornational Low (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 350. The sources and nature of international law; 
its role in a world of sovereign states; the law of war and peace; the rights and 
duties of nations in their international relationships. The World Court; purpose, 
problems, and prospects. 

431 Politics Through Litoroturo (3) 

Uses the novel as a means of explicating political behavior in various nadon-etates. 

497 Govommont Intornship (3) {Formorly 429) 

Prerequisites: public administrarion concentration and consent of instructor. Stu- 
dents work 15-20 hours per week as supervised interns in a public agency or 
related organization. Supervision is provided by the faculty and cooperating 
agency. In addition to the job experience, interns meet in a weekly three-hour 
seminar. 


499 Indopondont Study (1-3) 

Open to advanced students in political science by permission of the department 
chairman. 

(Prerequisite for each graduate course is explicit consent of instructor.) 

501 Readings In Political Science (3) 

A seminar sur\xying the major works in the discipline of political science; 
strongly recommended for all students seeking an MA. in Political Science or 
an MPA. 


369 


PoUfkal Science 


S06 Seminar In tli« Scop# and Thaory of Political Sclonco (3) 

The nature of the discipline, approaches, tools, concepts and theories. 

511 Sominor In Amorican Politics (3) 

A comprehensive examination of the political process in the United States. 

SIS Soniinar In Political Sohavlor (3) 

An intensive analysis of selected topics in political behavior. 

Sai Sominor In Admlnistrativo Thoory (3) 

Comprehensive analysis of the historical development and theoretical foundations 
of public administration. 

S24 Sominor In Invlronmontol Planning (3) 

Specialized study of problems and issues in the physical and human environment 
of the urban community. 

S26 Sominor In Admlnistrativo Sohovior (3) 

Concepts, functions and techniques of administrative leadership; group dynamics; 
decision-making; the organization and the individual. 

sat Sominor In Public Administration Probloms (3) 

Comprehensive analysis of selected problems in the theory and practice of public 
administration. 

S31 Sominor In Comporotivo Politics (3) 

A comparative study of political systems. 

S41 Sominor in Political Thoory (3) 

A comprehensive examination of ideologies, concepts, methods and trends in 
political theory. 

550 Sominor on Forolgn Policy Formulation (3) 

A study of various models of the foreign policy-making process. Emphasis will 
be on the interaction between domestic and international sources for policy formu- 
lation. 

551 Sominor in Intomotionol Rolotions (3) 

Study of selected problems in international relations with emphasis on individual 
research and contributions within the framework of a seminar. May be repeated 
for credit. 

S71 Sominor in Advoncod Studios in Public Low (3) 

An intensive analysis of selected topics in public law. 

S97 Profoct (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

S93 Tkosis (3-4) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

599 Indopondont Groduoto Rosoorch (1-G) 

Open only by permission of the chairman of the department. May be repeated 
for credit. 


370 


Portuguese 


PORTUGUESE 

(Offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures) 

101 Fundamental Portuguase (4) 

Listening comprehension, speaking, reading comprehension, and writing to de- 
velop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structures of Portuguese. 
ElnroUment restricted to students with previous study of a Romance language. 
Conducted in Portuguese. 

102 Fundamantal Portuguata (4) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 101 or equivalent. Listening comprehension, speaking, 
reading comprehension, and writing to develop control of the sounds and the 
basic forms and structures of Portuguese. Enrollment restricted to students with 
previous study of a Romance language. Conducted in Portuguese. 

315 Introduction to Luso-Braxilian Culturo and Civilixation (3) 

Prerequisites: Portuguese 102 or equivalent, reading knowledge of Portuguese 
or consent of instructor. Readings and discussions to develop insights into the main 
currents of Portuguese culture and civilization, their expansion to the New World, 
and the intellectual and artistic development of Brazil from its discovery to the 
end of the Second Empire. Conducted in Portuguese. 

325 Contamporary iraxilkin Civilixation (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 315 or consent of instructor. Reading^ and discussion 
toward developing an understanding of the social and intellectual problems, trends, 
and contributions to Brazil from the advent of the Republic. Major emphasis on 
present day Brazil. Conducted in Portuguese. 

431 Partuguasa Utaratura of tha Geldan Ag« (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 315 or consent of instructor. The literature of Portugal’s 
golden age (1500-1700). The major works of the Cancioneiros, Gil Vicente, Luis 
de (^amoes and other writers will be examined from the point of view of their 
artistic structure as well as within the context of Portuguese culture and civiliza- 
tion. Cx)nducted in Portuguese. 

441 Brazilian Litaratura (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 315 or consent of instructor. The literature of Brazil 
from the (Colonial period to the present. (Conducted in Portuguese. 

499 Indapandant Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in Portuguese language or literature to be taken with the 
consent of the instructor and the department chairman. May be repeated for credit. 

PSYCHOLOGY 

101 Introductory Psydiology (3) 

General introduction to basic concepts and problems in psychology as a behav- 
ioral discipline. Emphasis upon the human organism as an adapting system, with 
attention to genetic origins; normal development and capacities; problem-solving 
and adjustment to stress. 

161 Elomontary Statistics (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 101 and Math 120. An introductory course in statistics. 
Descriptive statistics, hypothesis testing, analysis of variance, correlation. 

202 Principlos of Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. A course for psychology majors covering selected basic 
areas of psychology in depth. Special emphasis on the methods of studying physio- 


371 


Psychology 


logical factors, adaptive behavior, perception, cognition and motivation. (2 houn 
lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

231 Psychology of Porsonol Adluitmont (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. Dynamics of personal adjustment and interpersonal 
relations. Nature of conflict and frustration; demands of changing social roles; and 
attitudes, opinions and prejudices as they affect the individual and his relationships 
to others. 

303 Ixporimonfol Psychology: Loornlng and Motivation (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 101, 202, 161 or permission of instructor. Selected experi- 
mental investigations in human and animal learning, memory, thinking, problem 
solving, and motivation with appropriate lecture and discussion. (2 hours lecture, 
3 hours laboratory) 

303 Ixporimontal Psychology: Sonsotion and Porcoption (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 101; 202; 161 or permission of instructor. Selected experi- 
mental investigation with appropriate lecture and discussion. (2 hours lecture, 
3 hours laboratory) 

304 Ixporimontal Psychology: Comparativo (3) 

^erequisites: Psych 101; 202; 161 or permission of instructor. Behavioral simi- 
larititt and differences between species as related to their position on the phylo- 
gen^c scale; the relation of changes in activity, motivation, emotionality, com- 
plexity, plasticity and adaptiveness of behavior to changes in sensory, motor, 
endocrine and neural structures as well as genetic and environmental factors. (2 
hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

311 Educational Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: six units in psychology. Application of psychological research and 
theory to the educative process. Major attention given to the problems of learning, 
individual differences, child capacities, and behavior. 

331 Physiological Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 202 and Bio Sci 101 or equivalent. Survey of relations be- 
tween behavior and biological processes. Anatomy and physiology of the nervous 
system, role of neural and humoral agents in perception and complex behavior 
(emotion, etc.), behavorial effects of brain lesions, the effects of drugs on behavior, 
psychosomatic disorders and motivation. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

331 Psychology of Porsonallty 

Prer^uisite: Psych 202. Concepts of personality development, structure, and 
dynamics, with emphasis upon problems, methods, and findings in the study of 
personality. 

341 Abnormal Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 231 or 331. Dynamics, symptoms, causes, treatment, 
md prevention of neuroses, psychoses, alcohol and drug addiction, ps>xhosomatic 
ill n esses, and character disorders. 

343 Montal Hoalth (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. An analysis of the concepts of mental health with 
emphasis upon positive factors in the individual, group, and community which are 
conducive to improving mental health. (Oedit not given as part of psychology 
major.) 


372 


Psychology 


3S1 Social Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: six lower division units in psychology. Study of phenomena of social 
interaction and the nature of group processes and influences. Attention paid to the 
intrapsychic effects of group influences on the individual’s behavior. 

361 Dovolopmantal Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. Concepts and processes involved in the understanding 
of the psychological development of the person from infancy through adulthood. 
Attention is given to stages in the development of cognition, emotion, percep- 
tion, motivation, and to the interaction of these processes. 

391 Industrial Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 161 or 202. Study of psychological principles and tech- 
niques in industrial and business settings. Includes selection, placement, training, 
human factors, environmental influences, problems of people at work, and con- 
sumer behavior 

408 History of Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: 12 upper division units in psychology or permission of instructor. 
Survey of the development of psychology from early times to the present. 

411 Human Loarnlng and Momory (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 302. Theoretical and experimental analysis of the acquisition, 
retention, and transfer of verbal and motor responses. Consideration of single vs. 
multiple memory storage systems and of the role of reward, information, and 
motivation in human learning. 

412 Psychology of Loarnlng (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 302 or permission of instructor. Principles of learning ac- 
cording to the nujor theoretical systems. Critical evaluation of the theories and 
systems. 

413 Porcoption (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 303 or permission of instructor. Psychological problems in 
perception. 

415 Cognltlvo Procossos (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 302, 303 or 304. Consideration of theory and research with 
respect to problem solving, thinking, concept learning, language, decision making 
and judgment, cognitive structure, cognitive development. 

431 Thoerias of Parsonality (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 331 or permission of instructor. Personality structure, devel- 
opment, and dynamics according to major theories. Research methods as they apply 
to personality theory. 

451 Ixparlmuntal Social Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 161 or equivalent, 202; and 351. Study in depth of selected 
phenomena of social interaction and the nature of group processes and influences. 
Laboratory experience in experimental investigation of attitude formation and 
change; group processes such as communication, and problem-solving and forma- 
tion of norms; interpersonal processes of influence and perception. (2 hours lecture, 
3 hours laboratory) 

461 Group Psychological Tosting (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 161 or equivalent. Intelligence, apdtude, interest, and per- 
sonality testing. Theory, construction, evaluation, interpretation, and uses of psy- 
chological tests. 


373 


Psychology 


465 Aclvanc«d Psychologicol Statistics (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 161 and Math 120 or equivalent. Statistical inference. 

471 iahovior Modificotion (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 302. An exposition and evaluation of theories and techniques 
for modifying behavior including operant conditioning methods. (2 hours lecture, 
3 hours laboratory) 

431 Sanray of Clinical Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 331, 341, and 461. Development and contemporary aspects 
of the field. Methods, diagnosis, therapeutic techniques, research, and problems. 

499 Indopondont Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Senior standing and permission of instructor. Individual library 
study or experimental investigation under direction of a staff member. May be 
repeated for credit. 

500 Advancod Oonoral Psychology (3) 

An integration of key concepts in learning, motivation, perception, personality 
and social psychology. 

510 Ixporimontal Doslgn (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 161 and 465. Principles and methods of planning and carry- 
ing out systematic investigations on the behavior of complex organisms, interde- 
pendence of experimental design and statistical evaluation of results, and the oppor- 
tunity for practice in formulation of testable hypotheses. 

511 Saminar in Psychological Moasvromont (3) 

Logic and methodology of measurement in the areas of intelligence, personality, 
judgment, and attitudes: problems of test construction and validation. May be re- 
peated for credit. 

530 Sominan Exporimonfal Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing; Psych 465 and 5(X). Study in depth of the data, 
methods, problems and current developments in sensation-perception; animal 
learning; human motor and verbal learning; thinking and problem solving; and 
motivation. May be repeated for credit. 

521 Sominan Porsonality (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing; Psych 500. An intensive study of central prob- 
lems in personality. Intensive study current problems and theories in these areas. 
May be repeated for credit. 

523 Sominan Comparativo Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and permission of instructor. A study in depth 
of some aspect of animal beha\nor. Comparisons bemeen species and biological 
determinants of behavior will be emphasized. May be repeated for credit. 

531 Individual Montal Tosting (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 461. Study of the major tests of intelligence. Emphasis upon 
practical experience in administration, scoring, and interpretation of these instru- 
ments. 

551 Sominan Social Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and Ps>xh 500, and either Psych 351 or permis- 
sion of instructor. An intensive study of central problems and major theories in 
the field of social psychology. May be repeated for credit . 


374 


Russian 


S9t Thesis (3-«) 

Prerequisites: formal admission to candidacy; permission of instructor. The 
writing of a thesis based on a major study or experiment in psychology. 

599 Indapandent Oroduota Rasaarch (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and permission of instructor. Individual library 
study or experimental investigation under direction of a staff member. May be 
repeated for credit. 


RUSSIAN 

(Offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures) 

101 FundamanHil Ruffian (S) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to 
develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structure of Russian. Audio- 
lingual assignments are an integral pan of the course and are to be prepared in the 
language laboratory. Conducted in Russian. 

103 Fundamanfal Ruffian (5) 

Prerequisite: Russian 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening compre- 
hension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of the sounds and the 
basic forms and structures of Russian. Audiolingual assignments are an integral 
part of the course and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted 
in Russian. 

303 Intarmadiata Ruffian (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, under- 
standing, reading, and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic 
analysis ifrom sound to sentence. (Conducted in Russian. 

304 Intarmadiata Ruffian (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, under- 
standing, reading and writing based on cxiltural and literary materiak. Linguistic 
analysis from sound to sentence. 0)nducted in Russian. 

313 Intarmadiata Compofition (3) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be 
uken conctirrently with Russian 203. Required of all majors and minors at the 
intermediate level; optional to others. Ojnducted in Russian. 

314 Intarmadiata Compofition (3) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be 
taken concurrently with Russian 204. Required of all majors and minors at the 
intermediate level; optional to others, (inducted in Russian. 

303 Roodingf in SdantiRc Ruffian (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 102 or equivalent. Readings reflecting a broad spectrum of 
writing in the physical and natural sciences and mathematics. Special attention given 
to the development of rapid reading for comprehension. Open only to Science and 
Mathematics majors. 

315 Introduction to Ruffian Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 204 or equivalent. Reading and discussion to develop a view 
of the Russian tradition (its social, intellectual and literary evolution) while at the 
same time strengthening facility with the language. Open to lower division 
students with consent of instructor. Conducted in Russian. 


375 


Science Education 


317 Advanced Cenv^rsation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with 
the consent of the instructor. Designed to give the student special competence in the 
control of Russian as an instrument for free oral and written expression. Conducted 
in Russian. 

375 Introduction to Litorary Forms (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 317 or consent of instructor. An introduction to the princi- 
pal literary forms, prose fiction, poetry, drama and the essay and to the major con- 
cepts of literary techniques and criticism. Qose analysis and intcrpreudon of various 
texts to increase the student's abilities in reading, language, and literary criticism. 
Conducted in Russian. 

400 Hussion for Advoncod Studonts and Toachors (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive review of spoken 
Russian, while developing the student's powers of self-expression in the spoken 
and written language. Conducted in Russian. 

431 larly Russian Litoraturo (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 315 or consent of instructor. Evolution of Russian litera- 
ture from the medieval ecclesiastic traditions and transition to Baroque and 
Gassicism. French and German influence on the 18th century. Transition to 
Romanticism and the beginnings of Realism. Conducted in Russian. 

441 Ttiu Works of Tolstoy and Dosfoovsky (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 315 or equivalent, or consent of instructor. Major works 
of Tolstoy and Dostoevsky in their intellectual and historical setting and their 
impact on Russian and world literature. Conducted in Russian. 

451 Tfio Ooldon Ago of Russian Litoraturo (3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. A study of major literary works of the first 
half of the 19th century which exemplify cultural and intellectual movements in 
Russia. Conducted in Russian. 

441 Russian Litoraturo from 1917 (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 315 or equivalent, or consent of instructor. Representative 
works of outstanding modem Russian writers >^nth an emphasis on The Nobel Prize 
winners (M. Sholokhov and B. Pasternak). Analysis and discussion of their prose 
and poetry in the light of the social problems of present-day Russia. Conducted in 
Russian. 

499 Indopondont Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in Russian language or literature to be taken with the con- 
sent of the instructor and department chairman. May be repeated for credit. 

SCIENCE EDUCATION 

(Offered by the Department of Science and Mathematics Education) 

310 Elumuntary Expurimental $<iencu (3) 

Prerequisite: completion of general education natural science requirements or 
consent of instructor. A laboratory centered course in the physical sciences appro- 
priate for prospective elementary schoolteachers and other youth workers. The 
course covers primarily through laboratory investigations, selected content areas 
from the fields of chemistry', phy'sics and earth science that are commonly found 
in elementary school science programs. The major emphasis is on development of 
such science skills as observing, classifying, recognizing space-time relations, measur- 


376 


Science Education 


ing, inferring, formulating hypotheses, controlling variables and interpreting data. 
This course does not fulfill general education requirements nor is it appropriate 
for science majors. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

350 Fi«ld Biology and Consorvotlon (3) 

Prerequisite: one year of college science or consent of instructor. A course for 
nonmajors primarily designed for prospective elementary teachers to acquaint them 
with the plant and animal life of the region. In addition, the relationships between 
urban, suburban and wildlife regions will be investigrated from a biological per- 
spective. 

402 Biological Proparatlons (2) 

Prerequisite: Upper division standing with a major or minor in biology. An 
introduction to the problems and practices of preparing nuterials for teaching and 
research in biology. May include collection and preparation of whole organism 
specimens, histological specimens and media for charaaerizadon of microorganisms. 
(Same as Bio Sci 402) (6 hours laboratory) 

434 lUmantary School Scionco — Now Curricula (3) 

Prerequisite: Sci Ed 310 (or equivalent) or consent of instructor. The content, 
philosophy and techniques of the new curricula for elementary science courses 
are studied. At present the course is designed to prepare teachers for the A A AS 
process approach to elementary science. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

442 Toaching Scionco In tho Socondary School (2) 

Prerequisites: Education 340, Elducation 311, admission to teacher education, 
senior standing or consent of the instructor. The student who has not had teaching 
experience must register concurrently in Education 449. See page 131 under Second- 
ary Education for description of Standard Teaching Credential program. Objec- 
tives, methods, and materials including audiovisual instruction for teaching science 
will be studied. Developing and using lesson plans, discussions, laboratory activities, 
etc., will be experienced during the course. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

443 Sacofidary S<lan<a IducaHon— Biology (3) 

Prerequisite: Sci Eld 442 (or equivalent) or consent of the instructor. Elduca- 
tional practices particular to the teaching of biolo^ are studied. Special emphasis 
is placed on recent curricular developments in this area. Presently the course is 
designed to instruct teachers in the theory, content and methodology developed 
by the Biological Sciences Curriculum Study (BSCS). (2 hours lecture, 2 hours 
activity) 

444 Socondary Scionco Iducotion^homlstry (3) 

Prerequisite: Sci Ed 442 (or equivalent) or consent of the instructor. Similar 
to Sci Ed 443 with the emphasis on chemistry. Presently the course is oriented 
around the programs developed by the Chemical Elducational Materials Study 
((TEEMS) and the (Temical Bond Approach (CBA) to teaeWng chemistry. Needs 
of participating teachers will determine which program will be emphasized. (2 
hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

446 Socondary Scionco iducation— Earth Scionco (3) 

Prerequisites: Sci Ed 442 (or equivalent) or consent of the instructor. The 
content, philosophy, and techniques of teaching earth science on the secondary 
level are studied. TTiis course is designed to prepare teachers in the theory, content 
and methodology in the earth science course developed by the Elarth Science 
Oirriculum Project (ESCP). (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

461 Dovolopmont of Scionco and Tochnology (3) 

(Some as Interdisciplinary Onter 461) 


377 


Sociology 


470 ivoltttion of Sciontillc Idoot (3) 

Prerequisites: Upper division or graduate standing with a major or minor in one 
of the sciences or consent of the instructor. A study of how some of our currently 
held scientific concepts have evolved. Emphasis on the essential interrelation of the 
various scientific disciplines and their relation to contemporary cultural and 
intellectual influences. 

499 Indopondont Study (1-3) 

Study of some special topic in science education, selected in consultation with the 
instructor and carried out under his supervision. May be repeated for credit. 

710 Suminar in ScUnen Educotien (2) 

Prerequisites: an A.B. depee, teaching credential, or consent of instructor. 
Designed for postgraduate science students who wish to investigate recent develop- 
ments in teaching the sciences. New courses and materials for the various subject 
matter fields will be researched and demonstrated. Areas of concentration will 
depend on interests and training of the seminar participants. May be repeated for 
cr^t. 

749 Studunf Tuaching in Scinnen in thn Sneondary Sehooi and Sominar (6) 

See page 269 for description and prerequisites. 

760A3 Earth Scianc# for Socondary Schooi Toachort (3/3) 

Prerequisites: valid secondary school credential or consent of instructor. The 
course covers the theory, content and methodology of new Earth Science Cur- 
nculum Project (ESCP) course for secondary school earth science. The course 
is designed for practicing teachers of earth science. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours 
activity) 

799 Indapandant Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: valid teaching credential or consent or instructor. Study of some 
special topic in science education, selected in consultation with the instructor and 
carried out under his supervision. May be repeated for credit. 

SOCIOLOGY 

201 Introduction to Sociology (3) 

A general introduction to the basic concepts of sociology, and the scientific study 
of human society. Among topics included are social interaction, culture, personality, 
social processes, population, social class, the community, social institutions, and 
sodocdtural change. 

202 Sociol ProUoms (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Study of the extent, causes and consequences of a 
number of social problems, \vith emphasis on 20th-century America. Problems are 
viewed in the context of the changing society. 

331A Sodal Raaoarch Mottiods (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201 or consent of the department. Research design and 
methods of gathering data, especially by intcr\"icw and questionnaire, are empha- 
sized. Among other topics are the role of theory' in research, and sampling methods 
and problems. In addition, the student u'ill be introduced to the techniques and 
equipment essential to data processing and analysis. 

3313 Social Rotoarch MaHiods (3) 

Prerequisites: Sociology 201, 331 A, or consent of the department. Elementary 
stadsdcal analysis of social data is emphasized, with some consideration of prob- 


378 


Sociology 

Icms of measurement and of the wring of research reports. (2 hours lecture, 2 
hours activity) 

341 Sodal Infaraction (3) 

Prerequisites: Sociology 201 and three units of psychology. Inquiry into the 
social and sociopsychological dimensions of group behavior and the socialization 
of the individual. Social interaction and its impact on the individual and personality 
formation. 

342 Exp«rim«ntal Sociol Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 341. The course will focus on the analysis of interper- 
sonal relationships in situational contexts. Among the problems to be considered 
are determinants of the actor’s definitions of the situation, types of interpersonal 
strategies, i.e., ingratiation, altercasting, etc., the construction and elaboration of 
“fronts,” i-e^ representations or misrepresentations of self, empathy, role-taking, 
and the impartarion of motives. 

343 Coll*€tiv« i«havIor (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Characteristics of crowds, mobs, publics. Analysis of 
social movements and revolutions, their relation to social unrest and their role in 
developing and changing social organization. 

361 Population Probloms (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Population composition, growth and movement. 
Social factors affecting birth rates, death rates, and migration. Attention is given 
to the population of the United States and to selected areas of the world. 

371 Urbon Sociology (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. The population and ecology, patterns of growth, 
insriturions, characteristic social interaction, values, and problems of the urban 
community. 

411 Criminology (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. The extent, causes and control of criminal behavior. 
Includes study of the criminal law, causal factors and theories, correctional insri- 
turions, probation and parole, and preventive efforts. 

413 Jwvonilo Dolinqwoncy (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Juvenile delinquency as a social problem. Sociological 
study of the causes of delinquent behavior, and programs of control, treatment and 
prevenrion. 

425 Comporativn Social Change (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Comparative analysis of changing conununity, insri- 
turional, technological, and social class patterns in selected societies, with emphasis 
on differences between “developed” and developing areas. 

430 Sodal Psychology of Projudico (3) 

Prerequisites: Sociology 201 or consent of instructor. The social psychology of 
intergroup prejudice. An analysis of research and theory on the dimensions, causes, 
consequences and reductions of intergroup prejudice. 

431 Mioority Group Rukitiens (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Study of racial, national and religious minorities, 
especially in the United Sutes. Includes study of discrimination, prejudice, different 
patterns of intergroup adjustment, and attempts to change group status. 


379 


Sociology 


435 Applied R«t«arch T*€hnlqu«s (3) 

Prerequisites: Sociology 201 and 331 A3* This course provides the advanced 
student practical experience with the various techniques involved in social re- 
search. Students will have the opportunity to design studies, construct question- 
naires, draw samples, collect data and then process and analyze their results. 

436 Social Strafillcatlen (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Social class structures and their functions. Ditferent 
styles of life; determinants of class status; vertical social mobility; change in class 
systems. 

451 Sociology of Hio family (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. The family as a social institution. Historical and 
cross-cultural perspectives; social change affecting marriage and the family; anal- 
ysis of American courtship and marriage patterns; the psychodynamics of fam- 
ily life. 

454 Sociology of Aging (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Analysis of aging as a social process, with emphasis 
on sociological theories of aging, problems of adjustment, demographic changes and 
policy issues. 

453 Sociology of Roliglon (3) 

Prmquisite: Sociolc^ 201. Theoretical analysis of religion as a social institu- 
tion in complex societies. The structure and functioning of religious organizations; 
roles and role relationships; types of religious organizations and leadership; the 
relationships of religion to other social institutions; religion and social change. 

460 Comparativa Instifutionst Latin Amarica (3) 

Prerequisites: Sociology 201. Comparative study of Latin American institutions 
(familial, economic, religious, politic^, military). Analytic emphasis on institutional 
structures and processes; relationship of institutions to each other and the larger 
society. 

463 Political Sociology (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Theoretical perspectives; nature of power and au- 
thority; social structure and political institutions; elites and decision-making; social 
influences on political behavior; political movements. 

465 Law and Socioty (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. The law and lawyers in the context of human so- 
ciety. Law as formal social control, variations in legal systems, social change and 
selected areas of law, the legal profession. 

470 Sociology of Occupotionf (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Sociological analysis of work roles in technologically 
advanced societies. Career patterns, occupational recruitment, job mobility, organ- 
izational demands. The nature and development of the professions, their ideologies 
and images. 

473 Complox Orgonixations (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Sociological analysis of formal organizations (indus- 
trial, governmental, welfare, military, medical, educational, correctional, etc.) as 
systems of social interaction. Includes such topics as blueprinted vs. informal struc- 
ture, authority, decision-making, role conflicts, communication and morale. 

477 Social Organization (3) 

Prer^uisites: Sociology 201; six upper division sociology units, or consent. 
Theories of social organization and the structure of various social groups are 


380 


Sociology 

analyzed, with a comparative analysis of social structures and systems. The various 
levels of groups are discussed and interrelated. 

479 Concepts and FUldt of Sociology (3) 

Prerequisites: Sociology 201 and nine upper division units in sociology. Analysis 
of theoretical and methodological problems of major sociological concepts. The use 
of these concepts in selected fields, and research findings, will be emphasized. 

430 Analyiit of Social Philosophy (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. The analysis of pre-20th century explanations of 
man*s behavior and interpretations of the human condition. Considerable attention 
is given to the articulation of changing historical conditions and alternative phi- 
losophies. 

431 Sociological Thoory (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201 and consent of the department. A comprehensive 
survey of the main schools of sociological thought, both European and American, 
with emphasis on systems of theory, methodology of theorists, cultural change, and 
social institutions. 

432 Sociology of Knowlodgo (3) 

The analysis and study of frames of reference and beliefs systems in everyday 
life, and their relationship to social structure, decision processes, and social change. 

495 Sonlor Sominar (3) 

Prerequisite: senior classification. Open to sociology majors who have had the 
upper division coursework in the area of the seminar. Emphasis in the seminar 
will depend upon the particular specialty and training of the instructor. 

499 Indopondont Stvdy (1-3) 

Prerequisites: at least 12 hours of sociology and consent of the adviser. Student 
selects an individual research project, cither hbrap^ or field. There arc conferences 
with the adviser as necessary, and the work ctilminates in one or more papers. May 
be repeated for credit. 

501 Samlnan Saloctad Topics In Soclotal Stmetwro and Procoss (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Analysis of a specialization within the study 
of society such as: socialization and personality; deviance; social change; institu- 
tional structure and process. 

S11 Sominar In Crimo and Dolinquoncy (3) 

Prerequisites: either Sociology 411 or 413, or consent of department. Analysis 
of selected problems in the field of crime and delinquency with major emphasis 
upon independent investigation into the theoretical and research contributions on 
the causes, prevention and treatment of criminal and delinquent behavior. 

530 Advancod Statistical Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: sociology 331 A3 or consent of instructor. Techniques most com- 
monly utilized by sociologists but not covered in Sociology 331 A3 are studied. 
The techniques deal primarily with multivariate analysis such as tests of signifi- 
cance, tests for interaction, measures of association, regression analysis and factor 
analysis. 

531 Advanced Mathods and M«aswrem«nts In Sociology (3) 

Prerequisites; Sociology 331A3» or their equivalents, or consent of department. 
A critical analysis of basic problems of social research. Casual inferences, value 
bias, and measurement, especially the construction of scales. 


381 


Spanish 


593 Seminar in Intnrgroup Rnlations (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 431 or consent of department. Analysis of relations 
among ethnic, racial and religious groups throughout the world. Analysb of 
processes leading to, sustaining, and associated with changes in relations among 
such groups. 

536 Seminar in Sociai Stratification (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 436 or consent of department. Analysis of stratifica- 
tion in industrial societies. Emphasis on theory and methods, and on international 
comparisons. Analysis of factors leading to social class, the persistence of class 
divisions, class conflict and social change, and the effects of class on behavior. 

541 Saminar in Social Intaractien (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 341 or consent of department. Advanced social-psycho- 
logical study of social interaction, including sociological factors in personality de- 
velopment and analysis of primary group behavior. 

573 Saminar in Larga Organizations (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 473 or consent of department. The analysis of large 
organizations, their structural and operating characteristics and the relationships 
between the organization and its members. 

577 Saminar in Social Organization (3) 

Prerequisites: Sociology 477 or its equivalent and consent of department. A criti- 
cal treatment of various theoretical approaches to the analysis of social organiza- 
tion. Specific areas of social organization. 

531 Analysis of Sociological Tliaory (3) 

Prerequisite: Sociology 481 or equivalent and consent of department. Exam- 
ination of the basic elements and key problems in constructing a systematic socio- 
logical theor>\ A detailed, comprehensive and critical analysis of selected theo- 
retical works. 

593 Tbasis (3) 

Prerequisites: acceptance as a candidate for the MA. in Sociology, and approval 
of the topic. Individual research under supen'ision, reported in a thesis, and de- 
fended in an oral examination conducted by a faculty committee. Must be taken 
2 semesters for a total of six tinits. 

599 Indapandant Graduata Razaarch (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of graduate adviser and department. Individual research 
on either a library or empirical project, unth conferences with the adviser as 
necessary, culminating in one or more papers. May be repeated for credit. 

SPANISH 

(Offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures) 

101 Fiindamantal Spaniih (5) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to 
develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structure of Spanish. Audio- 
lingual assignments are an integral part of the course and are to he prepared in 
the language laboratory. (Conducted in Spanish. 

102 Fundamantal Spanish (5) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehen- 
sion, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic 
forms and structure of Spanish. Audiolingual assignments are an integral part of 


382 


Spanish 

the course and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted in 
Spanish. 

203 lnt«rm«cliat« Sponith (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, under- 
standing, reading and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic 
analysis from sound to sentence. Conducted in Spanish. 

204 liit«nn«dicit« Spanish (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, under- 
standing, reading, and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic 
analysis from sound to sentence. Conducted in Spanish. 

213 Intarmadiata Composition (2) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be 
taken concurrently with Spanish 203. Required of all majors and minors at the 
intermediate level; optional to others. Conducted in Spanish. 

214 Intormodiato Composition (2) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be 
taken concurrently with Spanish 204. Required of all majors and minors at the 
intermediate level; optional to others. Conducted in Spanish. 

315 Introduction to Sponish Civilisation (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. Readings and discussions in Spanish lit- 
erature, arts and institutions to develop insights into Spanish culture, while strength- 
ening facility with the language. Open to lower division students with the consent 
of the instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

316 Introduction to Spanish-Amorican Civilisation (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. Reading and discussion in Spanish- Amer- 
ican literature, arts and institutions to develop insights into Spanish-American 
literature and culture while strengthening facility wdth the language. Open to 
lower division students with the consent of the instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

317 Advancod Convorsation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with the 
consent of the instructor. Designed to give the student special competence in the 
control of Spanish as an instrument for free oral and written expression. Conducted 
in Spanish. 

375 Introduction to Litorary Forms (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 317 or consent of instructor. An introduction to the principal 
literary forms, prose fiction, p)oetry, drama and the essay and to the major concepts 
of the literary techniques and criticism. Close analysis and interpreution of various 
texts to increase the student’s abilities in reading, language, and literary criticism. 
Conducted in Spanish. 

399 Spanish Phonotics (1) 

Prerequisite: junior standing and consent of instructor. Detailed analysis of 
students* specific problems in pronunciation followed by intensive work in class 
and the language laboratory until articulatory proficiency is achieved. May be 
repeated for credit. Conducted in Spanish. 

400 Spanish for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive study of spoken 
Spanish, while developing the student’s powers of self-expression in the spoken 
and written language. Conducted in Spanish. 


383 


Spanish 


431 Tfi« Oold«n Agm (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 315 or consent of instructor. Major works including Mys- 
ticism, the Picaresque and Pastoral Novels, the theater of Lope de Vega and his 
contemporaries. Conducted in Spanish. 

440 Spanifh-Afn«rican Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 316 or consent of instructor. Spanish- American Literature 
from The Conquest to 1888. Conducted in Spanish. 

441 Spanish-American Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 316 or consent of instructor. Spanish-American Literature 
from fHodermsmo to the present. Conducted in Spanish. 

4S1 SfKinish Literature to the Ooiden Age (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 315 or consent of instructor. Cantor de Mio Cid and other 
epic poetry, the early ballads and lyric literature, the prose of Juan Manuel, the 
Renaissance lyrics of Garcilaso de la Vega, El li^o de buen amor and La Celes- 
tino. Conducted in Spanish. 

441 Spanish Literature Since Neoclassicism (3) 

Representative works of the 19th and 20th centuries. Analysis of romanticism, 
eclecticism, naturalism and realism. Conducted in Spanish. 

444 Intreduetien to Spanish Linguistics (3) 

The analytical procedures of general linguistics as applied to Spanish, with 
special attention to structural contrasts between Spanish and Engli^. Emphasis 
on the application of linguistic analysis to the teaching of modem foreign lan- 
guages. 

473 Senior Seminar: Cervantes and the Age of Humanism (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 431 or consent of instructor. Cervantes’ artistic creation and 
its relation to the culture of the 16th century. Special emphasis on Don Quixote and 
the Novelas ejemplares. Conducted in Spani^. 

475 Senior Seminor: Contemporary Literature of Spain (3) 

The Generation of *98 and 20th-century theater, poetry and novel. Conducted 
in Spanish. 

499 Independent Study (1-^) 

Supervised research projects in Spanish language or literature to be taken with 
the consent of the instructor and department chairman. May be repeated for 
credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

510 Graduate Seminar: Phenology (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

530 Graduate Seminar: Hiitorical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: ^>anish 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

556 Graduate Seminar: Spanish Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

557 Graduate Seminar Spanish-American Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

567 Graduate Seminar Spanish-American Novel (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 


384 


Speech Communication 


571 Graduot* S«minan Spanish Prosa (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

575 Graduata Saminan Spanish Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

576 Graduata Saminan Major Writars (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be^repeated for credit. Conducted in 
Spanish. 

598 Thasis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of student’s graduate committee. 

599 Indapandant Graduota Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: fluency in Spanish and consent of instructor. Supervised research 
projects in Spanish language or literature. May be repeated for credit. 

SPEECH COAAMUNICATION 

100 Introduction to Oral Communication (3) 

Invesdgadon of the role and use of communication in modem society. Emphasis 
on the issues and occasions which prompt the individual to communicate orally 
and the ways he may evaluate those issues and prepare discourse so as to partici- 
pate in meaningful dialogue regarding them. Student presentations required. 

102 Advanced Oral Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 1(X) or equivalent. Intensive investigation 
of the role and use of oral communication in modem society. Issues and occasions 
which prompt the individual to communicate orally, and advanced methods for 
analyzing and developing oral discourse. Student presentations required. 

120 Mootings and Organizations (3) 

The structure of organizations and the use of oral communication in meetings: 
management of and participation in groups, including use of parliamentary pro- 
cedure and problem-solving techniques. Student presentations required. 

138 Foronsics (2) 

Investigation and practice in the background, format, procedures, and evaluation 
criteria of the various forensic events. Students must participate in at least two 
intercollegiate tournaments. May be repeated for credit. (More than 6 hours for 
each unit of credit) 

202 Voica and Diction (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech (Communication 1(X). Lecture: Introductory study of voice 
and speech sound articulation processes and characteristics from the point of view 
of the speech sciences. Laboratory: Student works toward development of flexi- 
bility in his own voice and articulation patterns. 

211 Introduction to Oral Intorprotation (3) 

(Same as Theatre 211) 

230 Contomporary American Speakers (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech (Communication 1(X) or 102. Speeches of prominent figures 
are examined for motives, ideas, and devices for managing discourse. 0>ntent 
analyzed to discover the extent to which the speeches reinforce or challenge 
traditional values. 


385 


Speech Communication 


235 IsMntialt of Argumontotien and Doboto (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 100 or 102. Investigation of the forms and 
skills of debate in our society. Use of evidence and case construction are empha- 
sized. Parliamentary, symposium, and academic debate are considered. 

300 Introduction to Study of Spooch (3) 

Prerequisite: open only to speech communication majors. Designed to orient 
majors to the field of speech communication. Special emphasis is on understanding 
and using the body of professional literature in speech communication. 

301 Spooch for Toochori (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Conununication 100 or graduate standing. This course is 
designed to help teachers to use speech and dramatized activities effectively in the 
classroom. The normal speech development of children is examined, and considera- 
tion is given to the identification and handling of speech, hearing, and listening 
problems. 

304 Mostogo Rocoption and Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 100 or 102. Elxamination of listening as a 
principal form in oral communication, including theory, self-development, and 
procedures through which competence in reception, analysis, and evaluation of 
messages can be improved. Attention is given to language as it affects the inter- 
pretation of messages and the relationships among individuals. 

311 Oral Intorprotation (3) 

(Same as Theatre 311) 

324 Dynamics of Small Group Discussion (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 100. Study and practice of the principles 
of group dynamics, interpersonal communication, and the process by which indi- 
viduals work effectively in the solution of problems, sh^e ideas, and become 
sensitive to the environment in which they work with others. 

333 Oral Communications in iusinoss and Industry (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 100. The nature and scope of internal oral 
communications in business and industry, with a view toward management's respon- 
sibility in overcoming the barriers to effective communication. Partictilar emphasis 
is given to the interview, conference, and briefing sessions. 

334 Porsuasivo Speaking (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 102 or equivalent. Investigation of the prob- 
lems and techniques of a series of speeches directed toward a predetermined goal: 
emphasis on progressive use of persuasive materials. 

335 Advancod Argumontation (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 235. Argument as applied to advocacy; 
special attention is given to logic and evidence as related to analysis of significant 
issues. 


333 Infercollogiate Foronsics (2) 

Directed activit>' in debate and other forensic events. Participation in intercol- 
legiate competition is required for credit. May be repeated for credit. (More than 
6 hours for each unit of credit) 

340 Spooch Scionco (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 100. Anatomy and physiology of the speech 
mechanism with emphasis on respiration, phonadon, resonance, ardculadon, and 
hearing; the physical and acousdeal aspects of the speech process. 


386 


Speech Communication 


341 Introduction to Phonotics (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 100 or graduate standing. The study of the 
history and theory of speech sounds including the morphological aspect of linguis- 
tics; the use of the International Phonetic Alphabet; the various factors influencing 
articulation and pronunciation. (Same as Theatre 341, Linguistics 341) 

342 Survoy of Probloms in Communication (3) 

To acquaint the undergraduate student with the subject matter and vocational 
opportunities, and principles of speech pathology and audiology. Covered will be 
the role of school personnel, classes of speech and hearing disorders, incidence, 
speech development and barriers to the normal acquisition of speech. Observation, 
lecture, Aims and demonstrations will be extensively utilized. 

402 Phonetic Analysis of Speech (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 341. Intermediate level course in phonetics 
which introduces student to narrow transcriptions, the electromechanical analysis 
of speech, and laboratory techniques in physiological phonetics. Special selected 
problems in the anatomy and physiology of speech as related to problems of 
physiological and acoustic analysis. (Same as Linguistics 402) 

403 Spoech and Longuogo Dovolopmont (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech C^ommunication 100 or graduate standing. Study of linguistic 
development and the psychological aspects of oral communication. Meets the lan- 
guage and speech development and disorders requirement for specialized prepara- 
tion to serve as teachers of exceptional children. 

404 Gonorol Somontlcs (3) 

Prerequisite; Speech Communication 1(X) or graduate standing. An examination 
of the basic principles underlying the influence of language on human action and 
interaction. 

420 CommunUotlon Thoory (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Communication 324, graduate standing, or consent of the 
instructor. Examination of theoretical models and systems of the communication 
process as they relate to various types of institutional and interpersonal communi- 
cation. Emphasis on means by which the process, including discussion forms and 
methods, may be analyzed or measured. 

430 Clotticol Rhotoricol Thoory (3) 

Prerequisite: six units of upper division public address courses. Elxamination of 
contributions of Greek and Roman rhetorical theorists, and 4th century B.C. to 
3(X) AX)., together with investigation of selected practitioners of the art. 

431 Eurepoon Rhotoricol Thoory (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech C^ommunication 430. Review of EUiropean theorists, Cox to 
Whately, with special emphasis on the educational implications of each approach 
and the way in which each related to other academic disciplines. 

432 Contomporory Rhotorical Thoory (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 430. Review of contemporary rhetorical 
theory with emphasis on the nature of persuasion as an important goal of com- 
munication. 

433 iritifh Public Addrofs (3) 

Prerequisite: six units of upper division public address courses. A rhetorical study 
of the times, issues, proofs, structure, and style of selected speeches on British politi- 
cal, social, and reli^ous topics. 


387 


Speech Communication 

434 American Public Addrutf (3) 

Prerequisite: six units of upper division public address courses. A rhetorical 
history of the United States from the colonial |>criod to the present. The influence 
of selected speeches and speakers on the development of American culture. 

433 PrincipUt of Rhotorlcol CrificUm (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 430. Principles for describing, interpreting 
and evaluating speech, developed through analysis of contemporary forensic, delib- 
erative and ceremonial speeches. Consideration of various critical systems. Intensive 
practice in writing rhetorical criticisms. 

441 Spooch Pathology: Nonorgonlc Ditordort (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Communication 100 or graduate standing; Speech Com- 
munication 341 and 342. Speech patholog>' w'ith special emphasis on the identifica- 
tion of the most commonly exi>cricnccd sp>cech problems of a nonorganic nature, 
such as, articulation, stuttering, voice-delayed development, areas of mental retar- 
dation, and emotional problems of children; basic principles of therapy in the 
clinic and in the classroom; parent conferences and referrals. 

443 Spooch Pothology: Organic Disordors (3) 

Prerequisites: S|>eech Communication 340, 341, 342. Etiologies, evaluation, and 
treatment of speech defects of an organic nature (cleft palate, cerebral palsy, 
aphasia, voice, hearing, dental abnormalities and lar>’ngectomy). 

451 Diagnostic Mothods in Spooch and Mooring (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech C>>mmunication 342 or concurrent registration in Speech 
Communication 342 or consent of instructor. Provides the student with informa- 
tion about various diagnostic procedures that can be used by him and in consul- 
tation with members of related disciplines: psychologist, pediatrician, otologist, 
onhodondst, neurologist. 

452 Thoropoutic Procoduros in Spooch and Mooring (3) 

Prerequisite; Speech Communication 342 or concurrent registration in Speech 
(Communication 342 or consent of instructor. Obscr\ ation and supcr\'iscd experience 
in recommended procedures and use of instructional aids with speech-handicapp>ed 
children, including the preparation and utilizadon of speech correcdon and speech 
improvement materials. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours aedvity) 

45t Clinicol Proctico (3) 

Prerequisites; Speech Communicadon 441 or 443 or concurrent registradon in 
one of the courses and approved applicadon for clinical praedee. Praedee in the 
correcdon of speech in chUdren and adults under super>’ision. 

463 Audiology (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The nature of auditory functioning, physical 
and psychological. detailed consideradon of the anotomy of the auditory mech- 
anism, pathological changes and medical treatment. A sur\'ey of the rehabihtation 
facilides for the aurally handicapped; e.g. agencies, hearing aids, auditory training, 
speech reading, language development, etc. 

464 Audiomotry (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech (Communicadon 342. Equipment, principles, methods and 
procedures used in conduedng school and industrial hearing conservadon programs. 
Attendon is given to techniques of audiometric testing and the use of audiograms. 
(Care and use of audiometers, both air-conduction and zone-conduction. Pardally 
fulfills the state requirements for public school audiometrist. 


388 


Speech Communication 


465 Sp««ch Reading and Auditory Training (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 341 or consent of instructor. Historical 
backgrounds of lipreading, methods used in visual reading of speech, and the 
techniques commonly used in the teaching of speech reading to the aurally handi- 
capped. 

430 Rhetoric of Radal Ditient (3) 

Prerequisite: sophomore standing. Examination of past and present efforts to 
voice dissent on racial matters. Selected messages of dissent are studied within 
the social and intellectual context of the day, with special concern for the strategies 
chosen to respond to that context and the reaction of society to those strategies. 

499 Indopondont Study (1-3) 

Open to advanced students in speech with the consent of the department chair- 
man. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Saminar in Spauch Rataarch (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing. Speech (Communication 300 or equivalent. Ex- 
amination of research design and methods used in historical, descriptive and ex- 
perimental research in speech communication. 

504 Suminan Ganaral Samantks (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech (Communication 404. An in-depth study, analysis, interpreta- 
tion and criticism of some of the major concepts of general semantics as a theo- 
retical construct of the influence of language on human action and interaction and 
the relationship of these concepts to other fields of knowledge. 

511 Graduata Saminar in Intarpratotien (3) 

(Same as Theatre 511.) 

520 Saminar in Group Communicatian (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 324 and 420. Critical analysis of significant 
literature and current research regarding intra- and intergroup communication. 

525 Saminar in Organisational Communicatfon (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Critical examination of significant literature 
and current research regarding communication systems and practices within busi- 
ness and industry. 

535 Saminar in Advocacy (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 335. Critical analysis of significant texts and 
periodic literature relating to argumentation and advocatory discourse. 

536 Saminar in Rhatorical Ttiaary (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 430. Intensive analysis of selected rhetorical 
treatises chosen to represent complementary or contrasting systems of rhetoric. 

533 Saminar in Rhotarical Criticism (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 438. Principles for anal>'zing existing rhe- 
torical critical methodologies. An investigation of the “new criticism.*’ Methods and 
practice in developing a critical methodology. Intensive analysis of new forms of 
rhetorical criticism. 

539 Spadal Tapics in Public Addrast (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A critical analysis or intensive investigation 
of a topic selected by the students and/or instructor. May be repeated for credit. 


389 


Spemch Communication 


540 Seminar in ixpnrimniital HioiMtics (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 341 and 402, or 341 and consent of in- 
structor. Study and evaluation of selected major issues and problems in physio- 
logical, acoustic, and perceptual phonetics. The Speech Science Laboratory will be 
made available to students taking this course. 

543 Snminnn Ma|or ProbUmi in Spnnch Pothology and Audiology (3) 

Selected problems in speech pathology and audiology approached through an 
investigation of the literature and clinical research. 

557 A-l Sominar in Spooch Pathology (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 441 and 443. May be repeated for a total 
of 16 units, but no individual seminar nuy be repeated for credit: A— cleft palate; 
B— stuttering; I>— cerebral palsy; E — aphasoid child; F — voice disorders; G — 
articulation problems; H — mentally retarded; I — advanced diagnostics. 

55IA3,C Advancod Clinical Practlco (7,2,7) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 458 or equivalent. Advanced clinical prac- 
tice with children and adults, having communication problems encountered in 
professional setting such as the college clinic, public schools, hospitals, crippled 
children clinics, etc. Students will work with clients with disorders of voice, 
deafness, aphasia, dysarthria, stuttering. May be repeated for credit. 

560A Saminar In Aphasia: iackground (3) (Permarly 557C) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The areas studied will be the history of 
aphasia from 1850-1915 (primarily academic and structural); 1917-1941 (primarily 
psychological and anatonucal); Wl-present (eclectic). The phy'siology (anatomy 
and neurology) involved in the communicative processes and classification and 
theories regarding aphasia. 

5603 Saminar in Aphasia: Diagnosis (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study of the etiology of aphasia, dysarthria, 
apraxia. Diagnosis of communication problems arising from brain-damage. Guest 
lecturers in the fields of aphasia, dysarthria, apraxia, stroke research, internal 
medicine. 

560C Saminar in Aphasia: Thorapy (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Exlccdc study of the approaches to therapy 
with brain damaged adults who have sustained a communication deficit. Intro- 
duction to the interdisciplinary involvement required to work effectively with the 
adult in this category. Guest lecturers will include representatives from orthopedics, 
counseling, rehabilitation, social services, physical therapy, occupational therapy, 
vocational rehabilitation. 

563 Saminar in Audiology (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Lbmmunication 463, 464, or consent of instructor. Investi- 
gation into a particular area or areas of audiology with selected problems. Emphasis 
upon research and contributions vidthin the framework of the seminar. 

597A3^ Profoct i7AA) 

The conduct and reporting of an approved project. 

593A^,C Thotit {7A»7) 

Prerequisite: Speech Communication 500. The selection, investigation, and written 
presentation of a selected problem in the field of speech. 


390 


Speech iducctflon 


599 lnd«p«nd«nf Oraduat* R«t«ardi (1-4) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of chairman. Open to graduate 
students with permission of chairman of department. May be repeated for credit. 

SPEECH EDUCATION 

442 Teaching Sp«#ch in fhn Sneondary School (2) 

Prerequisites: Education 311, Education 340, admission to teacher education, 
senior standing or consent of the instructor. The student who has not had teaching 
experience must register concurrently in Education 449. See page 131 under Sec- 
ondary Education for description of standard teaching credential program. Ob- 
ieedves, methods, and materials for teaching speech in secondary schools. Required, 
before student teaching, of students presenting majors in speech for the standard 
teaching credential. 

459 Clinical Practica and SttNianf Toaching in Spaoch Corraction and 
Lip Roading (4) 

Prerequisites: Education 311 and 24 units in the area of speech and hearing 
handicapped children in the public schools. Experiences include working in small 
groups and in individual therapy sessions with speech and hearing handicapped 
children enrolled in regular school classes, participation in parent counseling 
conferences and conferences with school personnel including administrators, 
classroom teachers, and nurses. Planning of curriculum materials to integrate 
speech and hearing therapy with regular classroom instruction will be stressed. 
This meets the directed teaching requirements for the credential to teach speech 
and hearing handicapped in remedial classes. 

749 Stadant Toaching In Spoocli ia tha Socondary School and Sooiinar (6) 

See page 269 for description and prerequisites. 

SWAHIU 

(Offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures) 

101 Fifndamontal Swahili (4) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking and writing to master 
the basic structure of Swahili and the requisite skills for both oral and written 
communication. Conducted in Swahili. 

102 Fnndamontal Swahili (4) 

Prerequisite: Swahili 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening compre- 
hension, speaking and writing to master the basic structure of Swahili and the 
requisite skills for both oral and written communication. Conducted in Swahili. 


391 


DIVISION OF LIBRARY SCIENCE 


LIBRARY SCIENCE 

400 Introdvcfion to 0«n«ral libliegraphic R«ft«arch (3) 

A study of the methods of performing literature searches for advanced research 
problems including bibliographic form and documentation with special emphasis 
on exploitation of the information in library card catalogs, trade bibliog- 
raphies, index and abstract journals and other reference literature, and a study 
of abstracts, annotations, and critical reviewing. 

500 PHiidpl«t of LibroHonship (3) 

Consideration of libraries in contemporary society. History of libraries, develop- 
ment of objectives of library service, identification and definition of user com- 
munities and their needs, survey of professional associations, interrelationships 
within library organization. 

501 Librory Collocfion Dovolopmont (3) 

The principles of a library acquisitions program developed from an examination 
of methods of bibliographic control. Publishers and publishing and other factors of 
the book trade and their influence on the development of an efficient order de- 
partment. 

S03 Organizotien and Oparatien of LibroHas (3) 

An introduction to administrative theories and principles and their implications 
and applications to managerial activities in all kinds of libraries. 

503 Orgonizotion of Informcrtion for Ratriavol (3) 

Theory and principles of classification, indexing, subject headings and cataloging 
and a survey of systems for storing and retrieving information. (2 hours lecture, 
2 hours activity) 

504 Tbooriat of Roodart' Sorvicoz (3) 

A study of the history, theory, and principles of reference service and informa- 
tion retrieval, of national and trade bibliographical tools, and of specialized refer- 
ence tools; the identification of requesters’ needs, and the analysis of research 
techniques in special subject areas. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

505 Raftoorck la Librarionzbip W 

The scientific method and social sciences research methodology applied to li- 
brary and information problems, focusing on library research and its accomplish- 
ments and evaluations of current research activities. 


392 


DIRECTORIES 

FOR 1969-70 




ADVISORY COUNCILS 
AUXILIARY ORGANIZATIONS 
COOPERATING TEACHERS 
FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATION 


INDEX 


/ i.7ihiy 

; yMT OV^ITAH.-: 


ADVISORY COUNCILS 


Computer Center Technical Advisory Committee 


Kenneth R. Doane, Chairman 
Director, Institutional Research 
California State College, Fullerton 
Fullerton 

Raymond V. Adams 
Professor of Physics 
California State College, Fullenon 
Fullerton 

Wil Baden 

Controlled Data Corporation 
Santa Ana 

John N. Bryden 
Professor of Chemistry 
California State College, Fullerton 
Fullerton 

Edward T. Card 
Operations Research Analyst 
C^omia State College, Fullerton 
Fullerton 

Robert W. Carlil 

Manager, Data Processing Operations 
Hughes Aircraft Company 
Fullerton 

Wen Mau Chow 
Professor, Quantitative Methods 
California State College, Fullerton 
Fullerton 

Fred R. Colgan 
Professor of Management 
California State College, Fullerton 
Fullerton 


Engineering Advisory Council 
Nicholas A. Begovich, Chairman 
Vice President 
Hughes Aircraft Company 
Culver City 

Alfred V. Gangnes 
President 

Interstate Electronics Corporation 
Anaheim 


Ronald W. Colman 
Lecturer, Quantitative Methods 
California State College, Fullerton 
Fullerton 

Munir R. El-Saden 
Professor of Engineering 
California State College, Fullerton 
Fullenon 

Walter J. Kosinsld 
Consultant 
Santa Ana 

James Malakoff 

Manager, Data Processing Operations 
Beckman Instruments, Inc. 

Fullerton 

Herbert C. Rutemiller 
Chairman, Department of 
Quantitative Methods 
California State College, Fullerton 
Fullerton 

Thomas R. Sheehan 
General Manager 
McCall Information Services 
Company 
Fullenon 

A. O. Williman 

Manager, Computer Applications 
Branch 

Autonedcs Division 
Nonh American Rockwell 
Corporation 
Anaheim 


Louis B. Horwitr 

Vice President and Division Manager 
Time-Share Computing Division 
Scientific Data Systems 
El Segundo 

Joseph W. Lewis 
San Marino 


395 


Advisory Councils 


WcndcU B. ScU 
President 

Hoffnun Electronics Corporation 
£1 Monte 

John L. Sigrist 
Vice President 

Douglas Missile and Space Systems 
Division 

Space Science Center 
Huntington Beach 


William B. Simecka 
Chief Scientist 
Northrop Nortronics 
Anaheim 

W. J. West 

Vice President, Engineering 
Autonedcs Division 
North American Rockwell 
Corporadon 
Anaheim 


School Administration Advisory Council 

Ernest G. Lake, Chairman 
Director, School Administradon 
Program 

California State College, Fullerton 
Fullerton 

Hollis P. Allen 

Professor of Educadon Emeritus 
Claremont College and California 
State College, Fullerton 
Qaremont 

HUton D. BeU 
Department of Educadon 
Chapman College 
Orange 

Truman Benedict 
Superintendent 

Capistrano Unified School District 
Capistrano Beach 

James D. Brier 
Superintendent 

Anaheim City Elementary School 
District 
Anaheim 

William L. Cunningham 
Superintendent 

Newport-Mesa Unified School 
District 

Newport Beach 

Max L. Forney 
Superintendent 

Huntington Beach Union High 
School District 
Huntington Beach 

Sterling L. Fox 
Superintendent 
Yorba Linda School District 
Yorba Linda 


Bert K. Hathaway 
Principal 

La Habra High School 
La Habra 

Charles F. Kenney 
Superintendent 

Santa Ana Unified School District 
Santa Ana 

Harold V. Kibby 
Superintendent 

Oi^ge Unified School District 
Orange 

William Limebrook, ex officio 
Principal 

Crown Valley School 
South Laguna 

Eugene L. McGarry, ex officio 
Dean, School of Educadon 
California State College, FuUerton 
Fullerton 

Murrell M. Miller 
Superintendent 

Placentia Unified School District 
Placenda 

William Montonna, ex officio 
Principal 

V’^illa Park High School 
Villa Park 

Elmest R. Norton 
Assistant Superintendent, Business 
Services 

Orange County Schools 
Santa Ana 

D. Russell Parks 
Superintendent 

Fullerton EJementary School District 
Fullerton 


396 


Advisory Councils 


David H. Paynter 
Superintendent 

Garden Grove Unified School 
District 
Garden Grove 

Walter J. Pray 
Vice Chancellor 
North Orange County Junior 
College District 
Fullerton 

Kenneth J. Preble, Jr. 

Associate Professor of Education 
California State College, Fullerton 
Fullerton 

Alden W. Smith 
Associate Professor of Education 
California State College, Fullerton 
Fullenon 

Science Advisory Council 

A. L. Antonio 
Group Vice President 
Aerojet-General Corporation 
El Monte 

Merl J. Carson, M J). 

Medical Director 
Children's Hospital of 
Orange County 
Orange 

Earl A. Coddington 
Professor of Mathematics 
University of California 
Los Angeles 

Richard S. Crog 
Director, Elzploradon and 
Production Research Division 
Union Oil Company 
Brea 

Robert P. Dilworth 
Professor of Mathematics 
California Institute of Technology 
Pasadena 

Joseph Kaplan 
Professor of Physics 
University of California 
Los Angeles 

H. W. Magoun 
Dean of Graduate Division 
University of California 
Los Angdes 


Leonard J. Stiffler 
Principal 

Col. J. K. Tuffree School 
Placentia 

David P. Tansey 
Principal 

Valencia High School 
Placentia 

William L. Ullom 
Superintendent 
Laguna Beach Unified School 
District 
Laguna Beach 

Norman E. Watson 
Superintendent 
Orange Coast Junior College 
District 
Costa Mesa 


Thane H. McCuUoh 
Professor of Geology 
California Institute of Technology 
Pasadena 

Eric L. Nelson 
Vice President 
Allergan Pharmaceuticals 
Santa Ana 

Andreas Rechnitzer 
Project Engineer 
Autonedcs Division 
North American Rockwell 
Corporadon 
Anaheim 

N. Allen Riley 
Laboratory Director 
Chevron Research Company 
La Habra 

A. H. Roebuck 
Director of Research 
Amercoat Corporadon 
Brea 

Howard Steinberg 
Vice President and Director of 
Research 

U.S. Borax Research Corporadon 
Anaheim 


397 


Advisory Councils 

Student Health Center Advisory Council 

Jerry P, Andes, M.D. 

Fullerton 

Everett Bannister 
Executive Secretary 
Orange County Medical Association 
Orange 

Deane W. Benton, M.D. 

Santa Ana 

Bennett R. Berkhausen, MD. 

Anaheim 

Robert Blough 

Associate Elxecudve Secretary 
Orange County Medical Ass^iadon 
Orange 

John Davis, MD. 

Fullerton 

Henry V. Eastman, MO. 

Counselor 

California Medical Associadon 
Tusdn 

Raul Fraide, MX). 

La Habra 

Harold L. Graber, MO. 

Fullerton 

Thomas Jones, MO. 

President, Medical Staff 
St. Jude Hospital 
Fullerton 

Fred M. Kay, MO. 

Sccrecar>'-T reasurer 

Orange County Medical Associadon 

Fullerton 

Donald Lantz, MO. 

President, Medical Staff 
Fullerton Community Hospital 
Fullerton 

Francis G. Mackey, MO. 

Chief, Medical Suff 
St. Jude Hospital 
Fullerton 


Phaip H. McFarland, MO. 

Fullerton 

William R. McGinty, M.D. 

Placenda 

Mrs. Laurence Moiser 
President 

Women’s Auxiliary to the 
Orange County Medical 
Associadon 
Anaheim 

Cari J. Paul, MO. 

Editor 

Orange County Medical Associadon 
Bulletin 
Orange 

John R. Philip, MO. 

Health Officer 

Orange County Health Department 
Santa Ana 

Herman W. Rannels, MO. 

Medical Director 

Orange County Medical Center 

Orange 

Guillermo Rios, MO. 

President, Medical Staff 
Anaheim Memorial Hospital 
Anaheim 

Harry Stewart 
Administrator 

Fullerton Community Hospital 
Fullerton 

Marshall Stonestrect, MO. 

Director 

Orange County Medical Associadon 
and E^ecudve Committee 
Martin Luther Hospital 
Anaheim 

Mrs. William H. Wickett, Jr. 

Secretary 

W'^omen’s Auxiliary to the California 
Medical Associadon